THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND

CHARLESWORTH 'S ‘MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. )

CONDUCTED BY

CHARLES C. BABINGTON, Ese., M.A., F.B.S., F.LS., F.G.8.,

JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Ph.D., F.RS., F.LS., F.Z8. &e.,

WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.LS.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

VOL. X.—FOURTH SERIES———~

‘S

LAPIN OS

2 ANOS

onal muse

LONDON:

PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS :

MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1872.

“‘Omnes res create sunt divine sapientiz et potentia testes, divitix felicitatis

human :—ex harum usu donitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapzentia Domini ;

ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis

elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper sstimata ;

a yeré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper

inimica fuit.”—Linnxvs.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour

voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuyre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-

tent toutes ses opérations.”—Brucnner, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden,

1767.

SES hs goer ear cole Berd The sylvan powers

Obey our summons; from their deepest dells

The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild

And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs

That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme

And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,

But scatter round ten thousand forms minute

Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock

Or rifted oak or’cayern deep: the Naiads too

Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face

They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush

That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,

Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,

The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,

All, all to us unlock their secret stores

And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

CONTENTS OF VOL. X.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

NUMBER LV.

I. Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. By GrorcEr

STEWARDSON Brapy, C.M.Z.S. &e.—No. VI. A List of the Non-

parasitic Marine Copepoda of the North-east Coast of England.

(Plates IT.-VI.)

Il. Further Observations on the Myology of Sarcophilus wrsinus.

By ALEXANDER Maca ister, M.B., Professor of Zoology, Univer-

sity of Dublin, and Director of the University Museum ..........

III. The Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton. By Harry G.

SEELEY, St. John’s College, Cambridge

IV. Proposed name for the Sponge-animal, viz. ‘“ Spongozoon ;”

also on the Origin of Thread-cells in the Spongiade. By H. J.

(CAPRIS Psy aunts ees Marana keener ee tage MO Qt alae Gh nage ee ea Oks

V. On my so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. By Dr. HERMANN

BURMEISTER

ia ta elybiva/iee we) «re! .y. wisiied.e lelrel.eiiace tombe

VI. On Emys nigra from Upper California. By Dr. J. E. Gray,

[DAR eh SOB er hore neal hbo be o aitteidn pein Sram cr aoe Se

VII. Experimental Researches upon the Position of the Centre of

Gravity in Insects. By FELIx PLaTEau

VIII. Observations on Mr. Carter’s Paper ‘‘ On two new Sponges

from the Antarctic Sea, and on a new Species of Tethya from Shet-

land ; together with Observations on the Reproduction of Sponges

commencing from Zygosis of the Sponge-animal.” By J.S. BowER-

Bank, DED: BRIS. BOL vides 2 aos A a eo eit s vies Ak ee ae

IX. On a new Species of 7imalia from Eastern India. By Ar-

THU ER Viscony WALDEN, ED Z,S.5 RSs) Scent cae eutoleh sia steele =

X. Notes on the Anatomy of the Derriah ( Cynocephalus hama-

dryas). By ALEXANDER MacatisTER, M.B., Professor of Zoology,

University of Dublin

aia) oe! Oia 6,'0) vee) of eee) isu) e. * 6 © e) see vie) .e. 5 e) Selvin ef elelielle

On some Dermal Tubercles associated with Fossil Fish-remains, by

James Thomson; On the two (?) unknown Species of Argus

Pheasant, by T. W. Wood ; Note on a Deformed Example of

Cariama cristata, by Dr. A. Giinther; On the Natural Affinities

of the Balistide, by M. C. Dareste; On the Synonymy of the

Genera of Euryalide, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On a new

Species of Paradoxornis, by the Abbé A. David; Investigations

on Fossils Birds, by M. A. Milne-Edwards; Migrations of the

Page

17,

lv CONTENTS.

Page

Graptolites, by H. Alleyne Nicholson, M.D., F.R.S.E., F.GS.,

&e.; Notice of a new Netted Sponge (Meyerella) from the Phi-

lippines, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Additional Note on

Osteocella septentrionalis, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. .... 66—76

NUMBER LVI.

XI. Antipathes arctica, a new Species of Black Coral (Antipathide)

momenne olan seas. :| by Wr. 0), LuOiREN |. 6.25.10 oh) ss aeln soe nie (4

XII. Additions to the Australian Curculionidae. Part UI. By

BEAN GTN eAscom, Classe. (Plate T,)) ois siciee sic ciaceiwrals oad 84

XIII. Description, with Illustrations, of a new Species of Aplysina

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c.

PELVIS Nios Sy cvay cra co ops ssndavirar saalaliaas ne See task Bite tiara crue Mae ets ie ME

XIV. Descriptions of two new Sponges from the Philippine Islands.

PES Lage WPAN TIGER Bude, (05. val aats bo fess isis Susann evo d rates epene ioe Stolen 110

XV. On two new Species of Birds. By Joun Gouxp, F.R.S. &e. 114

XVI. List of Echinoderms collected by Robert M‘Andrew, Esq.,

F.R.S., in the Gulf of Suez in the Red Sea. By Dr. J. E. Gray,

LIGITGSS Gh eM cl ogee IAC Ra ae ee AREER S ok oR a Maser tats ri 115

XVII. Description of a new Genus and Species of Heterocerous

Lepidoptera. By ArrHur Garpiner Burts, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.

PTT Seay PISULE eat cavats eaeto-e baal assyeSepacs a Guede ays abate tee arate oe beers 125

XVIII. On a new Genus and Species of Hydroid Zoophytes. By

RY oD) Om ote MENS.) vk, Ah ace SERA TS Je eB cai Wamu cee eta 126

XIX. The Muscular Anatomy of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus).

By ALEXANDER MacatisTER, M.B., Professor of Zoology, University

SUNT ave: 3a un oleic sas ac oyeegs a oa yal ionedad ar before la me ome Ree Niece

XX. On a new Genus of Hexaradiate and other Sponges dis-

covered in the Philippine Islands by Dr. A. B. Meyer. By Dr. J. E.

Gray, F.R.S. &e.

XXI. On Codiophyllum, a new Genus of Unicellular Green Algze

from Port Natal. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &. (Plate IX.)....

XXII. Answer to Dr. Bowerbank’s “ Observations on Mr. Carter’s

paper &c.” in the last Number of the ‘Annals.’ By H. J. Carter,

F.R.S. &c.

Proceedings of the Royal Society

else) ote ena .e) ee) oie 6) 160), 0 '@l.e aa; ie aie 4 ke: 10 te) elie, @, 6:10 18 ue eaiieted ale) aifeael ihe! te (a

Ce CeO) Ta ONCmCAC i mat On ter a ee eh O

On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spelling, by Dr. J. E. Gray,

F.R.S. &e. ; Note on the Systematic Name of the Walrus, by Dr.

W. Peters; The Clustered Sea-Polype (Umbellula grenlandica),

by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; On Ziphius Sowerbiensis, by Dr.

J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; Marine Sponges in the British Mu-

seum, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e. ; Habits of Terebratula trun-

cata, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Reproduction and

127

Mode of Life of the Phyllopoda, by Dr. Friedrich Brauer, . 150—152

CONTENTS. Vv

NUMBER LVII.

XXIII. Note on some Fossil Monkeys found in Italy, preceded by

a Review of the Fossil Quadrumana in general. By C.J. ForsytH

MNNETCD Ey ICN ts hat are ays nits pera tabek o Picea a ta"atal stake tatetaotavereeteretererdave athe a ates 158

XXIV. On Flustra mar: vee of Krauss and an allied Species,

forming anew Genus (Flustramorpha) of Escharide, from Natal. By

DDE REIL EAs EIT GGG 51 59s cts sha Piarc enal el dateraxnio aiwle’ sla lehe pte atis 167

XXV. A Cuvierian Principle in Paleeontology, tested by evidences

of an extinct Leonine Marsupial (Thylacoleo carnifex), by Professor

OWEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Foreign Associate of the Institute of France.

Reviewed by Grerarp Krerrt, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., M.F.D.H., &e.

OE aa ecee NSM rN ae? =! al aes nya, ars ithe ap ae er eae, cals ah een 169

XXVI. Description of two new Fishes from Tasmania. By Dr. A.

Ga Uoc e801 eee Sea Ake en AR ND oir hae oe orth iere Bets ir ic 183

XXVII. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K.

Parker, 1. R:S;, andProf, T; Rorurr Jonus, F:G:S....005 7225... 184

XXVIII. A Monograph of the Genus Thelyphonus. By ARTHUR

G-Burinn, BOL.S., Z:95; &e. - ((elete si). 0. ee cele ee 200

XXIX. Notes on a new Propithecus and the Fossane from Mada-

gascar.. by Dr. J. Ee Grae PRS, Seppe. 5 coe es canes so th oor: 206

XXX. On the double-horned Asiatic Rhinoceros (Ceratorhinus).

Meyeikne ey tle GAY, ERAS a Ocenia. 2 ie! «aye Rinses soa gee rate eee 207

XXXI. Note on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, and Dorvillia agari-

ciformis, Kent. By W.Savitue Kent, F.Z.S., F.R.M.S., Geological

Department, British Marseums 7. jaaaeaieteledé «ald. .chetet. attends 209

XXXII. Description of Hesperornis regalis, with notices of four

Other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. By Prof. O. C. Marsn.... 212

XXXIII. On the Genera Manourta and Scapia. By Dr. J.E.

CGA NEUSE WAS ROU car srek | svete a iaNe: hase Dy STA SHS fst c ees thee PO Dealer ohare tens 218

XXXIV. On Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Trionyx hurum, B. H.

and Dr. Gray... by Dr. AnprEson, Calcutta.......5 5 <2.inqcs as. 219

Proceedings of the Royal: Society). 205. cass cae ao eee 222—224

On the Specific Name of the Black Redstart, by Alfred Newton, M.A.,

F.R.S.; New Names for a long-known Lepidopteron, by C.

Ritsema; Note on Intelligence in Monkeys, by Prof. Cope ;

Curious Habit ofa Snake, by Prof. Cope; Eggs and newly hatched

young of Ixodes Dugesti and Argas reflexus, by George Gulliver,

F.R.S.; Onthe Embryonic Form of the Gordii, by M. A. Villot

227—231

NUMBER LVIUI.

XXXV. On Callograptus radicans,a new Dendroid Graptolite.

By Joun Horxrson, F.G.S., F.R.M.S. (Plate X.).............. 233

XXXVI. The Mollusca of Europe compared with those of Eastern

North America. By J. Gwyn Jerrreys, F.R.S................. 2387

al CONTENTS.

Page

XXXVII. Remarks on the Genera Trimerella, Dinobolus, and

Monomerella. By Tuomas Davipson, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., and WIL-

L1AM Kina, Se.D., Professor of Mineralogy and Geology in Queen’s

Gilere MOnIWAYy. ince sade scWes Soup ets ae pe ae ee ee ealeee elute 248

XXXVIII. On two new Species of Birds from the Philippine

Islands. By ArTHUR Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.S., F.R.S. ........ 252

XXXIX. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W. K.

ParkKER, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.8. .... 253

XL. On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. By FREDERICK

FE CATTLE Rept LISI A TLIS chk favseeka ee HAM bee dm Rah wialaton fo wtie E> baie ou eral 271

XLI. Remarks on Crinodes Sommeriand Tarsolepis remicauda. By

MOON MERPREST STOR BUS T2005, E Liss y COCs v sere dare oi tere We ere Rad Dee kee aION G 274

XLII. Preliminary Report on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. By H.

ALLEYNE NicHo.son, M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E., Professor of

Natural History in University College, Toronto.................. 276

XLIII. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof. 8. Lovén.

Hkee ARADO MUINVECD) Mk tess srskestaks) VAR at We Raia es ene ts PAR ALANS CIE g. Blarote acai hake Coce 285

XLIV. Notes on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis. By

Esme MOA PhD), F Rise. Mies. rteais a Soe are bn 298

New Book :—Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles drawn from Life, by

James de Carle Sowerby, F.L.S., and Edward Lear .......... 299

Proceedings of the Royal Society

On Thread-cells and Semen in Marine Sponges, by T. Eimer; Inyes-

tigations upon the Development of the Gregarine, by E. van

Beneden ; Diatoms in Hot Springs, by Dr. Blake ; On the Habits

of Galeodes pallipes, by Prof. Cope..........-20.e0000- 306—312

NUMBER LIX.

XLV. On the Hydroid Lar sabellarum, Gosse, and its Reproduc-

tion. By the Rev. THomas Hinoxs, B.A.,F.R.S. (Plate XIX.).. 313

XLVI. Notes on Coleoptera, with Descriptions of new Genera and

Species.—Part II. By Francis P. Pasconr, F.LS. &e. (Plate XV.) 317

XLVII. Notes on the Mud-Tortoises of India (Trionyx, Geoffroy).

Poynter Ana ER SeiReG, «it, snuttaieacon state Sue AE ee 326

XLVIII. Notes on a Deep-sea Dredging-Expedition round the

Island of Anticosti, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. By J. F. Wurr-

RUMMORL KS VOUC 42 SLY. oN an Cladeethicls Oh eine bee end RE ERE 541

XLIX. Descriptions of new Myriopoda of the Family Glomeride.

By ArtTHuR GARDINER Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &c. (Plate XVIII.) 354

L. On Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. By Oscar Scumipr. (Plates

Pree LL) Welrrre gest bihs Mii sgt Ae ag Ae etc bcore, nee ... 359

LI. Notice of a new Species of Lizard (Eumeces albofasciolatus)

from North Australia. By Dr. A. Ginruer, F.RS. ............ 370

CONTENTS. Vil

Page

LIT. Dredging-Excursion to Iceland in June and July 1872. By

UAV BO VOR RIKGEULTATINE SS aiche sc fet, ERT Ales ails soleil Paee CRIA oh ae eab A AO eras chardis ofl sz

LUI. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof. 8. Lovin.. 376

LIV. Contributions to the History of the Hydroida. By the Rev.

Tuomas Hincks, B.A., F.R.S. (Plate XX. figs. 1-4, & Plate XXI.) 385

LY. On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa. By the Rev.

THomas Hincxs, B:A., F.R.S. (Plate XX. fig. 5.). 2... scenes 396

LVI. Notice of some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands.

Ayes he ss UNE EER Sh 6 agg sc oes ond vacsensrahet oe ais hokey oles eke pea ae 397

LVII. On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. By

fpwarp Biver. kon, Mom. Ag: Soe. .osii cece sae wawsarseiete 399

Varieties of the Tiara (Galera barbata), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.

&e.; On Branchipus and Artemia, by C. Voat; On Osteocella

septentrionalis from British Columbia, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.

&e.; Sowerby and Lear’s ‘ Tortoises’; The Ahu (Capreolus py-

gargus), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.; A new British Calli-

thamnion, by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On Macroxus tephro-

nacter, aby Uris J... Fu Greys Wl. SECs. 5 5s. tn ard sistent ne 405—408

NUMBER LX.

LVIII. On a new Family and Genus and two new Species of

Thelyphondea. By the Rey. O. P. Campriner, M.A., C.M.Z.S.

CG RLEN Fey. ©. @ dp eaeaergee eer emia) OF ie Ange AC Meine Ceci ere ran tae ca A 409

LIX. On Bulenoptera patachonica and B, intermedia, By Dr. H.

SUPREMO THURS hy woe a ca Ccpateas cashed «esta! 9,6, tS) seks avs. sa.oicen ef Se 418

LX. On some new Species of Reptiles and Fishes collected by J.

Brenchley, Esq. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S. ............ 418

LXI. On Psammoperca and Cnidon. By Dr. A. GiNTHER .... 426

LXII. On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By Prof.S.Lovin,. 427

LXIII. On the Guémul (Huamela leucotis). By Dr. J. E. Gray,

TR etl Celeste eedar Zo atcn.«scferoe apace: ohtsas D gsbeidte kta Wet af Oats Gude wes 445

LXIV. On Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda, in answer

to Mr. Butler's Remarks. By C. RrmsmMa ........ 06+. cncses 446

_ LXV. On the Habits and Distribution of Lycosa ingens (Bl.). By

the ev. O: Ps Cancsamen, MAS CIMA: crs encase gene ee cones 448

LXVI. Notice of a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons. By

Hy ACY: Be Te nea Ys CaN EDNG ER kee nal eee ha satel oe, RUA ZoLS ol 0° ale ocelat anak: 449

LXVII. Description of some new Species of Birds in the National

Collection. By R. Bowpiter SuHarpe, F.LS., F.Z.8., &c., Senior

Assistant, Zoological Department, British Museum .............. 450

LXVIII. Descriptions of three new Species of Humming-birds.

Pay eh OHRID PEL Bema co dn glial 5 sinter <a s caphointe Minn eratadeta 452

LXIX. On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera, By W. K.

PaRKER, F.R.S., F.Z.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jonss, F.R.S., F.G.S. 458

Vill CONTENTS.

Page

New Books :—Notes on the Birds of Damara Land, by C. J. Andersson ;

A Handbook to the Birds of Egypt, by G. E. Shelley, F.G:S.,

F.ZS., &e.; A Handbook of British Birds, by J. E. Harting,

Ps UR pe cas & ak Pin ehe ccpe wie) absent maces Oe papahwn gam etecw 457—461

The Bell Collection of Reptiles; On Spatulemys Lasale, a new

Genus of Hydraspide from Rio Parana, Corrientes, by Dr. J. E.

Gray, F.R.S. &c. ; Observations on the Metamorphoses of the

Bony Fishes in general, and especially on those of a small Chinese

Fish, of the Genus Macropoda, recently introduced into France,

by M. N. Joly; On the Habits of Terebratule, or Lamp-shells,

by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.; On the Connexion which exists

between the Nervous System and the Muscular System in the

Helices, by M. Sicard ; On Delphinus Desmarestii, Risso (Aliama

Desmarestii, Gray), by Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.; The Swedish

Scientific Expedition ; Report on a Memoir by Dr. Dufossé, “On

the Noises and Expressive Sounds which the Freshwater and

Marine Fishes of Europe produce,” by M. C. Robin; On a new

Species of Balenoptera, by Capt. C. M. Scammon, U.S.R.M ;

On the Varieties of Lndris and Propithecus, by Dr. J. E. Gray,

F.R.S. &e.; on Peloric Structures, by Dr. Peyritsch .... 466—474

lbaahsc~ Senay ae PRA i ee SAA = COORDS Dat ke Soot een ee Ne eae 475

PLATES IN VOL. X.

PLATE I. Australian Curculionidae.

a Marine Copepoda.

VL)

VIL. Aplysina corneostellata.

VII. Tarsolepis remicauda.

IX. Codiophyllum natalense.

X. Callograptus radicans,

ey Thylacoleo carnifex.

XIII. New species of Thelyphonus.

XIV. Structure of the Echinoidea.

XV. New Genera and Species of Coleoptera.

eat Coceoliths and Rhabdoliths.

XVIII. New Myriopoda.

XIX. Lar sabellarum and its reproduction.

XX. Sarcothecee of the Plumulariide.—Reproduction in Campa-

nularia neglecta.—New Genus of Polyzoa.

XXI. Plumularia cornu-copize.—Planoblast of Cladonema radiatum.

XXII. New Genus and Species of Thelyphonidea,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. }

Ce tptecanscuceece per litora spargite muscum,

Naiades, et circiim vitreos considite fontes:

Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:

Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.

At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas;

Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco

Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas

Ferte, Dew pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”

NV. Parthenii Giannettasii Kel. 1.

No. 55. JULY 1872.

I.— Contributions to the Study of the Entomostraca. By

GEORGE STEWARDSON Brapy, C.M.Z.S. &e.

No. VII. A List of the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda of the

North-east Coast of England.

[Plates IL—VI.]

TuE following list, though embracing all the species at pre-

sent known to me as inhabiting the above-named district,

must be taken only as an instalment of what an exhaustive

survey would no doubt reveal. The examination of these

little creatures is exceedingly tedious and laborious, the points

of difference being often undistinguishable except with tolera-

bly high microscopic powers. ‘Thus a very small gathering,

if it contain any great variety of species, will often occupy

many hours in its examination.

By far the greater number of species here noted, or described

by foreign authors, are free-swimming animals; some have a

special predilection for the fronds of Fuci, and others for

muddy localities or the bed of the sea; but little is yet known

of the ground-inhabiting forms, and among them there remains

doubtless a rich harvest for future collectors.

T'wo of the species described in Baird’s ‘ British Entomo-

straca’ it seems impossible to identify— Canthocamptus Stromitt

and C. minuticornis. The former name probably applies to

some member of the genus Thalestris, the latter, perhaps,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x.

2 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

to a Laophonte. Neither species is included in the following

list.

Fam. Calanide, Dana.

Subfam. Oazawrvm, Dana.

Genus CALANuSs, Leach.

(Cetochilus, Roussel de Vauzéme, fide Boeck.)

Calanus finmarchicus (Gunner).

Monoculus finmarchicus, Gunner, Act. Hafn. (1765), x. p. 175, f. 20-25.

Cetochilus septentrionalis, Goodsir, Edinb. New Phil. Journ. xxxv. p. 389,

pl. 6. figs. 1-11; Baird, Nat. Hist. Brit. Entom. (1850), p. 835, t. 30.

figs. 1, a-g.

Cetochilus an olinitacits Claus, Die frei-leb. Copep. (1863), p. 171, t. 26.

figs. 2-9,

According to M. Boeck the species described first by Gunner

as Monoculus finmarchicus is identical with the Cetochilus hel-

golandicus of Claus, and not at all with the species called by

Baird Temora finmarchica. Leach’s genus Calanus, however,

was constituted to receive Gunner’s species, and is synony-

mous with the more recent name Cetochilus, applied by Roussel

de Vauzeme to the same animal. Not having the opportunity

of reference to the original memoirs of Gunner and Leach, [

must accept as substantially correct M. Boeck’s careful account

of this synonymy. ‘The generic name Cetochilus must there-

fore give way to Calanus.

The present species, C. finmarchicus, is generally distributed

all round the British coast, being met with in equal abundance

both between tide-marks and in the open sea. It is said to

constitute an important part of the food of the whale.

Genus CLAustA, Boeck.

Clausia elongata, Boeck.

Clausia elongata, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864), p. 10.

Calanus Clausit, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N, & D. (1865), vol. i. p. 33,

pl. 1. figs. 1-11, 13.

Often taken in abundance, by the surface-net, in the open

sea and in tide-pools, all along our coast.

Boeck’s C. elongata is undoubtedly the same species as tha

described by myself (possibly a little later, though I am not

pertectly sure as to the actual date of publication of Boeck’s

monograph) under the name Calanus Clausi?. The differences

between this and the genus Paracalanus, Boeck (Calanus,

Claus), lie chiefly in the one-jointed inner branch of the first

foot, and in the very small or entirely wanting fifth foot of the

female. It is, I think, open to doubt whether these ought to

_of the North-east Coast of England. 3

be considered of generic importance; but the separation having

been made, it seems best to adhere to it.

Genus Dias, Lilljeborg.

Dias longiremis, Lilljeborg.

Abundant all round the British Islands, both in the open

sea and between tide-marks; frequent also in brackish water.

Genus TEmorA, Baird.

1. Temora longicornis (Miiller).

Cyciops longicornis, Miller, Entomostraca (1785), p. 115, t. 19. figs. 7-9.

Temora finmarchica, Baird, Brit. Entom. (1850), p. 228, t. 28. figs. 1, a-g;

Claus, Die frei-leb. Copep. p. 195, t. 34. figs. 1-11; Brady, Nat. Hist.

Trans. N. & D. vol. i. p. 36, pl. 1. fig. 15, and pl. 2. figs. 1-10.

Temora longicornis, Boeck, loc. cit. p. 16.

Diaptomus longicaudatus, Lubbock.

(Not Monoculus finmarchicus, Gunner.)

Common in the open sea; and between tide-marks perhaps

the most abundant of all British species.

2. Temora velox, Lilljeborg.

In the autumn months, when the brackish pools of salt

marshes have become thoroughly warmed by the sun, this

species occurs in such situations in immense profusion. I

have only on one or two occasions met with a stray specimen

amongst the weeds on the sea-shore.

Genus Istas, Boeck.

Isias clavipes, Boeck.

Isias clavipes, Boeck, loc. cit. p. 18.

Superior antenne twenty-five-jointed, about equal in length

to the cephalothorax ; joints short and broad at the base, and

gradually increasing in length to the nmeteenth, which is

about four times as long as broad; first fifteen joints of the

male antenne bearing each a single club-shaped, ciliated,

auditory seta; hinge-joint of the twenty-one-jointed right male

antenna situated between the eighteenth and nineteenth joints ;

eighteenth joint formed by the coalescence of the normal

eighteenth and nineteenth; nineteenth by the twentieth and

twenty-first ; twentieth by the twenty-second, twenty-third,

and twenty-fourth. Mouth-organs and swimming-feet as in

Centropages typicus. Fifth pair of feet two-branched, in the

female having the inner branch of one joint with two terminal

sete, the outer branch of three broad laminar joints, the second

of which is produced on the inner margin into a broad spinous

4 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine, Copepoda

process: in the male the feet are somewhat similar, but the

central joint is destitute of the spinous process, and the ter-

minal joint of the outer branch of one side is expanded into a

very broad lamina, which is terminated by a broad ciliated

seta. Abdomen of the female with four, of the male with five

segments. Length, exclusive of tail-sete, 1; of an inch.

Hab. Bridlington Bay; several specimens taken in the

towing-net by Mr. E. C. Davison. On weeds in Roundstone

and Clifden Bays, Ireland (G. S. B.).

The most distinguishing characters of this fine species are

the auditory sete, with which the upper antennz are on their

basal portions thickly clothed, and the broadly laminar con-

struction of the fifth pair of feet, more especially in the male

sex.

Genus CENTROPAGES, Kroyer.

(Ichthyophorba, Lilljeborg ; Calanopia, Dana; Catopia (?), Dana.)

1. Centropages typicus, Kroyer.

C. typicus, Kroyer (1849), Nat. Tidsskr. Anden Reekke andet Bind, Side 288;

Boeck (1864), Oversigt over de ved Norges Kyster iagttagne Copepoder,

.19.

Ichthyophorba denticornis, Claus (1863), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,

p- 199, pl. 35. figs. 1, 3-9; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. i. p. 40,

pl. 4. figs. 1-6,

This species occurs not uncommonly in surface-net gather-

ings from the open sea, but never in very great numbers, so

far as my observation extends. I accept Boeck’s identification

of the species with C. typicus of Kroyer, but without the

opportunity of myself referring for verification to the original

description.

2. Centropages hamatus (Lilljeborg).

Ichthyophorba hamata, Lilljeborg (1853), De Crustaceis &c. p. 185, t. 21.

figs. 1-5, 7-9, and t. 22. figs. 9-12; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D.

(1865), vol. i. p. 39, pl. 4. tigs. 7-10.

I, angustata, Claus (1868), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 199, t. 35.

figs. 2, 10-12.

Diaptomus Bateanus, Lubbock (1857), Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2.

vol. xx. p. 404, pl. 11. figs. 1-3.

Centropages hamatus, Boeck (1864), Oversigt &c. p. 20.

Of very frequent occurrence in surface-net gatherings from

the North Sea, I have also once taken it sparingly amongst

Fuci near low-water mark, between Sunderland and Ryhope.

Subfam. Powrerriw.

Genus ANOMALOCERA, Templeton.

Anomalocera Patersonit, Temp.

Anomalocera_ Patersonit, Temp. Trans. Ent. Soc. (1837); Baird, Brit.

Entom. (1850) ; Boeck, loc. cit. (1864).

of the North-east Coast of England. 3)

Ireneus Patersonii, Claus, Die frei-leb.. Copep. (1863).

Of common occurrence in the open sea all round the British

Islands.

Genus PoNnTELLA, Dana.

Pontella brevicornis, Lubbock.

Pontella brevicornis, Lubbock, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2. vol. xx.

(1857), pl. 11. figs. 4-8.

In surface-net off Grimsby and in Bridlington Bay. Amongst

weeds in tide-pools near Ryhope, August 1871. Shetland

(Mr. Norman).

In a gathering made by Mr. E. C. Davison in Bridlington

Bay, this species occurred in great abundance, the contents of

the net, which quite filled a six-ounce bottle, consisting of

about equal numbers of P. brevicornis, Anomalocera Patersonitt,

and larval forms of the higher Decapods.

Fam. Cyclopide.

Genus Cyctiops, O. F. Miiller.

1. Cyclops Lubbockit, Brady.

C. Lubbockii, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans, N. & D. vol. iv. p.127, pl. 4. figs. 1-8.

In pools of brackish water, Hartlepool, June 1866.

2. Cyclops equoreus, Fischer.

C. equoreus, Fischer, Abhandl. der Akad, der Wissenschaften, Munchen

(1860), Band viii. p. 654; Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. iv.

p- 128, pl. iv. figs. 9-16.

In brackish pools at Seaton Sluice, Northumberland.

3. Cyclops littoralis, n. sp. Pl. I. figs. 9-14.

Superior antenne twenty-two-joited, clothed with long

setee, more particularly towards the base ; joints all very short,

the two terminal ones, which are the longest, not being much

longer than broad, the twelfth and sixteenth much produced

and bearing a long seta at the external margin. Inferior an-

tenn without a secondary branch, four-jointed ; fifth pair of

feet composed of a single three-jointed branch ; caudal seg-

ments about four times as long as broad; sete four, the two

central ones being alike in length and equal to the three pre-

ceding segments.

Hab. Amongst weeds in tidal pools, near Whitley and

Ryhope. Rare.

4. Cyclops ovalis,n. sp. PI. III. figs. 1, 2.

Superior antenne twenty-four-jointed, as long as cephalo-

6 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

thorax, slender and nearly equal in width throughout; joints

about equal in length and breadth at the base, gradually in-

creasing in length towards the apex, the terminal joint being

about thrice as long as broad; each joint bearing a single

short delicate hair on the external margin, the twenty-second

and twenty-third one on each margin, the last having four

or five apical sete. Caudal segments about four times as

long as broad; seta not much longer than the caudal seg-

ments.

Hab. One specimen only, taken off Sunderland in the surface-

net.

Genus Orrnona, Baird.

Oithona helgolandica, Claus.

Oithona helgolandica, Claus (1863), Die frei-lebenden Copepoden, p. 105,

Taf. 11. figs. 10-12.

O. spinifrons ?, Boeck (1864), Oversigt Norges Copep. p. 25.

Taken occasionally in the surface-net; plentifully off Sun-

derland, August 1871. Frith of Forth, Whitby, and Brid-

lington, in gatherings made by Mr. E. C. Davison.

Boeck’s description of O. spinifrons seems to me not to in-

dicate any essential difference between it and O. helgolandica,

Claus, the chief point being the presence of a minute rostrum

in the Norwegian specimens, which is not noted in Claus’s

definition. ‘This, however, might be easily overlooked. I

have seen it in some of my examples, but have not succeeded

in bringing it into view in others, and should, in fact, have

probably missed it altogether, had it not been for M. Boeck’s

description.

Genus BorckIA, nov. gen.

Like Cyclopina in general appearance. Superior antenne

very short, six-jointed, much shorter than the cephalothorax.

(Mouth-organs totally different from those of any of the allied

genera.) Swimming-feet like those of Cyclops, but very short

and broad. Fifth pair of feet one-jointed, laminar, spinous.

Abdomen much elongated ; tail-sete short; ovisacs two.

Boeckia arenicola, n. sp.

Second joint of superior antenne the longest, three times as

long as broad ; fourth and fifth joints of equal length, two thirds

as long as the second; sixth joint scarcely as long as the pre-

ceding; third the shortest of all, about one-fourth as long as

the second. Inferior antennz short and thick, three-jointed,

without any secondary branch, densely beset with rather short

and stout seta. Swimming-feet having the marginal angles

of the North-east Coast of England. 7

of the inner branch much produced ; margins densely and finely

ciliated ; lateral spines of the outer branch lanceolate, laminar;

the basal joint fringed with a row of somewhat similar, but

much smaller, spines in pectinate series. Feet of fifth pair

consisting of a single slightly curved, club-shaped joint,

having on its outer margin one long spiniform seta with two

minute ones near its base, at the truncate extremity two

similar large setee with an intermediate smaller one, on the

middle of the inner margin six subequal curved setee of mo-

derate size, and at the extreme angle three of a similar kind

but smaller. Abdomen elongated, swollen at the base; caudal

segments rather more than twice as long as broad; tail-sete

shorter than the abdomen. Length +4 of an inch.

One specimen, dredged on a sandy bottom at a depth of

4 fathoms, off Seaton Carew, September 1871.

The mouth-organs of this animal are of very remarkable

structure; but I defer attempting any description or giving

any drawing of this species, in the hope of being able to illus-

trate it completely from a better series of specimens.

Genus PSEUDOCYCLOPS, nov. gen.

In general conformation resembling Cyclops. Right supe-

rior antenne of male without a hinge-joint, but much swollen in

the middle. Inferior antenne two-branched, secondary branch

nearly equal in size to the primary. Lower foot-jaw like that

of Cyclops. Swimming-feet having both branches three-

jointed. Fifth pair of feet in the male very complex in struc-

ture, the external branch of one side produced into a powerful

sickle-shaped clasping-joint, the whole resembling very closely

the male copulative organs of some Ostracoda.

Pseudocyclops crassiremis, n. sp. Pl. II. figs. 1-8.

Left superior antenna of male seventeen-jointed ; basal joint

large and stout, those next following very short and broad,

gradually decreasing in breadth to the fifteenth, which is about

as long as broad; last two joints more slender, about twice as

long as broad; the whole limb densely beset on the outer

margin, especially towards the base, with long sete; antenna

of right side ten-jointed, the central joints much enlarged, last

two suddenly contracted and similar to those of the left side,

antepenultimate joint armed with a strong lateral subfalciform

process ; both branches of inferior antennz bearing numerous

long, curved terminal setze ; first joint of the lower branch en-

larged and truncate at the distal end. Maxillee composed of

four digitate lobes, each bearing four long terminal sete.

8 Mr.G.S.Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

Lower foot-jaw stout, with almost entire margins. Joints of

swimming-feet very broad, subtriangular, much produced at

the external distal angle. Abdomen slender, consisting of four

segments ; tail-sete slender, finely plumose, the longest equal

to about twice the length of the abdomen. Length of animal

gi, of an inch.

Hab. Off Seaham Harbour, dredged in a depth of twenty

to thirty fathoms. Only one specimen taken.

The characters of this genus are very remarkable and

strongly pronounced, especially as regards the fifth pair of

feet of the male, which are more complex than any thing of

the kind hitherto known amongst the Copepoda. Another

species referable to the same genus (P. obtusatus, Brady, MS.)

was taken abundantly in the surface-net by Mr. D. Robertson

and myself in Roundstone Bay, Ireland, on a calm moonlight

night in June of last year.

Genus THORELLIA, Boeck.

Thorellia brunnea, Boeck.

T. brunnea, Boeck (1864), Oversigt over de ved Norges Kyster iagt.

Copep. p. 26. k

iNadere regional, Norman (1868), Last Shetland Dredging Report,

p- 2965.

One specimen of this species occurred to me amongst Fuci,

in pools near low-water mark between Ryhope and Sunder-

land, in the autumn of 1871. Mr. Norman has taken it abun-

Soy amongst Laminarie in Shetland and at Tobermory in

ull.

The genus differs from Cyclops chiefly in the conformation

of the lower foot-jaw, which is transformed into a four-jointed

clawed foot. M. Boeck describes also in the same place an-

other closely allied genus, Misophria, in which the maxille

are formed as in the Harpactide, but with a strongly deve-

loped palp; the lower foot-jaws as in Calanus.

Genus CYCLOPICERA, nov. gen.

Superior antenne about as long as the cephalothorax, many

jointed, bearing (as in the Harpactide:) a sword-shaped ap-

pendage near the distal extremity. Inferior antenne three-

jointed, having a minute secondary branch. Upper foot-jaw

chelate, three-jointed, the last joint forming a doubly-curved

very long claw; lower foot-jaw four-jointed, last two joints

forming a long claw, each joint of which bears a spine on its

inner margin. Swimming-feet as in Cyclops. Fifth pair of

feet small, one-jointed.

of the North-east Coast of England. 9

Cyclopicera lata, n. sp. Pl. III. figs. 3-8.

Superior antenne twenty-jointed, basal joint large, next

eight very short and broad, the following six about as long as

broad, sixteenth and seventeenth about twice as long as broad,

last three shorter and more slender, seventeenth joint bearing

a long laminated ensiform seta ; inferior antenne triarticulate,

the first joint bearing a minute biciliated one-jointed branch,

second joint of about equal length with the first, third very

short and bearing a slender terminal claw; maxille two-

branched (?), each branch terminating in three long slender

sete ; fifth pair of feet very small, laminar, with one basal and

two apical sete. First segment of abdomen very short and

broad, finely ciliated in the middle of each lateral margin ;

caudal segments about twice as long as broad; setee equal in

length to the abdomen.

One specimen only, taken amongst weeds in rock-pools at

Roker.

Fam. Corycexide.

Genus MAcrocHIRon*, nov. gen.

Superior antenne (six to seven-?) jointed; inferior four-

jointed, uncinate. Lower foot-jaw very large and powerfully

chelate. First three pairs of swimming-feet alike, each branch

being three-jointed ; fourth pair with the mner branch small

and two-jointed, rudimentary. Fifth segment of cephalothorax

long and greatly swollen below. Abdomen consisting of five

segments, all short.

Macrochiron fuctcolum, n. sp. Pl. III. figs. 9-18.

Rostrum short, but distinctly angulated; first cephalo-

thoracic segment very large, following three small, fifth con-

stricted at the base but much swollen and elongated below,

equal in length to the preceding. three segments ; abdominal

segments short, none of them longer than broad, the first the

shortest. Superior antenne of the male seven-(?), of the

female six-jomted; last joint of lower antenna very short,

bearing several long sete and a long curved claw, which is

serrated on its inner margin; terminal claw of the lower foot-

jaw very long and strong, suddenly curved at the extremity.

First three pairs of swimming-feet short, springing from a large

base, the joints short and broad; fourth pair having the outer

branch elongated, the inner short, biarticulate, its second joint

bearing two apical sete. Fifth pair of feet rudimentary,

slightly different in the two sexes. Caudal segments about

* Maxpos, long; yelp, a hand,

10 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

thrice as long as broad; sete short, ciliated, jointed in the

middle. Length !; of an inch. Colour dark brown.

Hab. Amongst Fuci near low-water mark between Ryhope

and Sunderland. 'T'wo or three specimens.

This approaches very closely the genera Oncea, Philippi,

and Antarva, Dana, but does not seem strictly referable to

either of them. Probably, indeed, the two are synonymous.

One of my specimens differed in some minor points from the

others, whence I supposed it to be of different sex, and have

so described it here. The species, however, requires further

examination.

Fam. Harpactide.

Genus LONGIPEDIA, Claus.

Longipedia coronata, Claus.

This beautiful species occurred abundantly on a sandy

bottom off Seaton Carew, in a depth of four fathoms, also off

Seaham Harbour (twenty to thirty fathoms), and among weeds

near the Bell-Rock Lighthouse. Mr. Norman finds it in

Shetland; and I have myself taken it on the west coast of

Ireland.

Genus Ecrinosoma, Boeck.

Lictinosoma melaniceps, Boeck. Pl. V. figs. 1-12.

Off Seaton Carew and Seaham Harbour, in company with

the foregoing species, but less abundantly.

The characters of this remarkable species are so distinct

that I cannot doubt its identity with that described by Boeck,

though I have not noticed any thing in my specimens which

warrants the term melaniceps. Moreover the fifth foot con-

sists of two branches, and not of one only as stated by that

author, unless, indeed, the Norwegian animal be a different

but closely allied member of the same genus.

Genus 'Tacurprus, Lilljeborg.

Tachidius brevicornis (Miiller).

Cyclops brevicornis, Miiller, Entomostraca, p. 118.

Tachidius brevicornis, Lillj., De Crustaceis; Brady, Nat, Hist. Trans. N.

& D, vol. iv. p. 180, pl. 5. figs. 1-9.

In pools of brackish water at Hartlepool, Hylton Dene, and

Seaton Sluice.

Genus Ipya, Philippi.

Idya furcata (Baird).

Canthocamptus furcatus, Baird, Brit. Entom. (1850).

Tisbe furcata, Lilljeborg, De Crustaceis (1858),

of the North-east Coast of England. 11

Tisbe ensifer, Fischer, Beitr. zur Kenntn, der Entom. (1860).

e tt ya barbigera (?), Phil. Wiegmann’s Archiv (1843).

Very common amongst weeds in tide-pools.

Genus WeEstwoop!A, Dana.

Westwoodia nobilis (Baird).

LHarpacticus nobilis, Baird, Brit. Entom.

One specimen, on Laminaria saccharina at Roker (1871).

Berwick Bay (Dr. Baird).

Genus DELAVALIA, Brady.

Delavalia palustris, Brady.

D. palustris, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. N. & D. vol. iv. p. 134, pl. 5.

figs, 10-15.

In pools of brackish water at the side of the Seaton burn,

above Seaton Sluice.

Genus CANTHOCAMPTUS, Westwood.

Canthocamptus imus,n.sp. Pl. IV. figs. 1-5.

Animal slender, sublinear. Superior antennee of the female

eight-jointed, the fourth, seventh, and eighth joints bearing

several long sete, the second and third each three of moderate

length, the last joint having also five or six smaller marginal

sete arranged in a pectinate series ; rostrum long and slender,

curvate. Lower foot-jaw simple, chelate; mner margin of

hand bearing in the middle one seta of moderate length.

First joint of inner branch of first swimming-foot equal in

length to the entire outer branch, second joint very short,

third about half as long as first, bearing three terminal sete,

the middle one being very long and minutely pectinate at the

extremity ; outer branch of fifth pair oblong, having two long

apical sete, three shorter ones on outer and one on inner

margin; inner branch ciliate on outer, and armed with five

long setee (the last of which is excessively slender) on inner

margin. Ovisac single, curvate, containing but few (six to

nine) ova, ranged in a single plane, and very large in propor-

tion to the size of the animal. Length 5! of an inch.

Hab. About ten miles off Seaham Harbour, in a depth of

thirty fathoms on a muddy bottom: a few specimens only

taken.

Genus LaopHonte, Philippi.

1. Laophonte similis? (Claus).

Cleta similis, Cls. Die Copepoden-Fauna von Nizza, p. 23, pl. 5. figs. 13-16,

Amongst weeds in tide-pools at Whitley, Cullercoats, and

Sunderland, and in brackish water at Seaton Sluice.

12 Mr.G.S8. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

My specimens do not entirely agree with the figures and

descriptions given by Claus; but 1 am unwilling, without a e

more extended examination, to describe them as belonging to

a distinct species.

2. Laophonte lamellifera (Claus).

Cleta lamellifera, Cls. Die frei-lebend. Copep. p. 123, pl. 15. figs. 21-24.

One specimen, on frond of Laminaria saccharina at Roker.

3. Laophonte Hodgit, n. sp. Pl. VI. figs. 1-9.

Upper antennz six- or seven-jointed, those of the male (?)

shorter and thicker than those of the female, rather densely setose;

lower foot-jaw of moderate size, with a very long and slender

slightly curved claw; outer branch of first foot three-jointed,

short ; fifth pair of feet foliaceous, larger in the male, the outer

branch elongated, having four or six long sete on the apex

and outer margin; the inner wider, and bearing internally

four or five marginal sete, those situated near the apex being

very long. Caudal segments in the female at least four times

as long as broad.

Hab, Off Seaham, dredged in twenty to thirty fathoms.

Several specimens were taken. I have a mournful pleasure in

naming this species after my late friend, Mr. George Hodge,

it having been taken during one of the last dredging-excur-

sions in which I had the pleasure of his company.

Genus CLETODES, nov. gen.

Animal resembling Laophonte in general appearance. Up-

per antenne six-jointed. All the four pairs of swimming-feet

alike, and having the outer branch three-, the inner two-

jointed. Lower foot-jaw chelate. Lower antenne without a

secondary branch.

Cletodes limicola, n. sp. Pl. VI. figs. 10-17.

Animal, when seen from above, elongated, distinctly in-

dented at each ring of the body. First segment of cephalo-

thorax short, about equal in length to the two following ;

second and third abdominal segments produced into spinous

processes at the lower lateral angles. Upper antenne in the

female much shorter than the first cephalothoracie segment ;

first three joints short and nearly equal, fourth about half as

long as the third, fifth as long as the third, but much more

slender: in the ma/e forming at the third joint a large vesi-

culiform swelling, last joimt elongated and uncinate. Swim-

ming-feet elongated, slender ; the outer branch ciliated on the

of the North-east Coast of England. 13

margins, bearing at the apex of each joint, on the external

margin, a long slender spine; terminal spines long and slen-

der; the middle joint has also a long apical seta at the inner

margin: inner branch two-jointed, the first joint very small,

the second long, almost filiform, and dividing at the extremity

into one short and two very long lash-like branches. Fifth

foot in the female foliaceous, the outer branch rather the longer,

bearing one long seta at the apex and three shorter ones on

the outer margin; inner branch with two long apical sete : in

the male the two branches are of nearly equal length, very

narrow, simple, one branch bearing one, the other two long

setee at the apex. The caudal segments short, but longer in

the male than in the female; seta one on each segment,

scarcely longer than the segment itself. Length 1, of an

inch.

Hab. Off Seaham Harbour, in a depth of from twenty to thirty

fathoms, on a soft muddy bottom. ‘T'wo specimens only taken.

On account of the peculiar structure of the swimming-feet,

which were identical in both examples, I think I am justified

in referring these to the male and female of the same species.

The genus approaches Lilljeborgia of Claus; but the characters

given by that author, “ Pedum sequentium (2, 3,4) rami in-

ternt rudimentarti, rami externi triarticulati, uncinati,” do

not apply here.

Genus Harpacticus, M.-Edwards.

1. Harpacticus chelifer (O. F. Miller).

Cyclops chelifer, Miller, Entomostraca (1798).

Harpacticus chelifer, Claus, Die frei-lebend. Copep. (1863) ; Boeck, Over-

sigt Norges Copep. (1864).

(Not H. chelifer of Lilljeborg.)

Not uncommon amongst weeds between tide-marks, Roker,

Whitley, &c. In the open sea, off Seaton Carew.

2. Harpacticus gracilis, Claus.

H. gracilis, Claus, Die frei-lebend. Copep. (1863).

H, elongatus, Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864).

This occurs in the same situations, though not so frequently

as the foregoing species. M. Boeck doubts the identity of his

H. elongatus with Claus’s gracilis, on account of a difference

in the lengths of the antennal joints. This character, however,

seems to me to be often subject to considerable variation ; and

I should not, without some divergence in other respects, be

disposed to separate the two forms. Indeed both approach so

closely to H. chelifer that it seems questionable whether they

might not be more fitly regarded as varieties of that species.

14 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda

3. Harpacticus fulvus, Fischer.

H., fulvus, Fisch. Beitrige zur Kenntniss der Entom. (1860); G. O. Sars,

om. 1862 Zool. Reise.

H. curticornis, Boeck, loc, cit. p. 88 (1864).

H. chelifer, Lilljeborg, De Crustaceis ex ord. trib.

Tigriopus Lilljeborgi, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report, p. 296.

In pools at or above high-water mark, Bamborough, Cul-

lercoats, Marsden. Boeck and Sars both describe this species

as inhabiting chiefly pools at or above high-water mark, which

are liable to get warmed by the sun. In such situations it is

often extremely abundant in our district.

4, Harpacticus niceensis ?, Claus.

Harpacticus niceensis, Claus, Die Copep.-Fauna von Nizza, p. 31, pl. 2.

fies, 12-14.

A few specimens which I doubtfully refer to this species

have occurred to me on the fronds of Laminaria saccharina

and other Fuci at Sunderland and Ryhope.

Genus ZAus, Goodsir.

Zaus spinosus, Goodsir.

Z. spinosus, Goodsir, Edinburgh New Phil. Journ. (1842) ; Claus, Die frei-

lebend, Copep. (1863) ; Boeck, Oversigt Norges Copep. (1864).

Common on Fuci, and especially on the fronds of Laminaria,

in tidal pools and beyond low-water mark, Roker, Ryhope,

Sunderland, Cullercoats, &c. Shetland (Rev. A. M. Norman).

Genus THALESTRIS, Claus.

1. Thalestris longimana, Claus.

Frequent on the smaller weeds and on Laminarie in tidal

pools, Roker, Sunderland, Ryhope, &c. Also in the open sea,

but more rarely.

2. Thalestris helgolandica?, Claus.

On Laminaria in tide-pools at Roker; not common.

3. Thalestris harpactoides, Claus.

In the surface-net off Grimsby and Teesmouth.

4. Thalestris Clausii, Norman.

T. Clausii, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report.

Frequent on Laminaria saccharina and other weeds in tide-

pools, Ryhope, Sunderland, Roker, Whitley, &e.

of the North-east Coast of England. 15

Genus DacryLopus, Claus.

1. Dactylopus tisboides, Claus.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker and Ryhope; scarce.

Abundant in brackish pools at Seaton Sluice.

2. Dactylopus similis, Claus.

One specimen, dredged in a depth of four fathoms off Seaton

Carew.

3. Dactylopus brevicornis, Claus.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker ; not common.

4. Dactylopus Normani,n. sp. Pl. V. figs. 13-17.

Closely approaching D. tisboides, from which it differs, how-

ever, in the following particulars :—The superior antennz are

eight-jointed, and not so densely setose, the proportional

lengths of the various joints being as follows :—4, 4, 3, 4, 4,

$,4,4%. The secondary branch of the lower antenne biarti-

culate, each joint bearing two moderately long sete. Lower

foot-jaw (gnathopod) simply chelate; the inner margin of the

hand fringed with short sete. Longer branch of the first foot

slender, bearing almost at the extremity of the outer margin a

short ciliated seta. Fifth pair of feet large; outer branch

subovate, bearing three long sete (one at the apex, one on

each lateral margin), and three shorter ones on the outer mar-

gin between the apical and lateral sete; inner branch ver

much smaller, subquadrate, extending only half the length of

the outer, bearing four primary sete, two of them long and

two of moderate length, the interspaces being densely ciliated.

Hab. Roker, on Laminaria saccharina; rare.

Genus ScuTELLIDIUM, Claus.

Scutellidium tisboides, Claus. Pl. IV. figs. 6-10.

One specimen, on the frond of Laminaria saccharina at

Roker.

Genus ALTEUTHA, Baird.

1. Alteutha bopyroides, Claus.

Often taken abundantly in the surface-net, all round the

British Islands.

2. Alteutha purpurocincta, Norman.

A. purpurocincta, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging Report.

Peltidium purpureum, White, Pop. Hist. Brit. Crust.

On Laminaria saccharina at Roker and Cullercoats; fre-

quent. Shetland (Rev. A. M. Norman).

16 Mr.G.S. Brady on the Non-parasitic Marine Copepoda.

3. Alteutha depressa, Baird.

This species, described by Dr. Baird in his ‘ Natural History

of the British Entomostraca,’ is unknown to me, and appears

not to have been recognized by any other author. It was

taken by Dr. Baird in Berwick Bay.

Genus Aspipiscus, Norman.

Aspidiscus fasciatus, Norman, Last Shetland Dredging

Report, p. 298.

Abundant on the fronds of Laminaria saccharina at Roker,

Sunderland, and Cullercoats. Shetland (fev. A. M. Norman).

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate IL.

Fig. 1. Pseudocyclops crassiremis (male): animal, seen from right side,

x 84. iy. 2. Superior antenna of right side, x 210. Fig. 3.

Superior antenna of left side, x 210. Fg. 4. Inferior antenna,

<x 210. Fig. 5. Maxilla, x 210. Fig. 6. Lower foot-jaw, x 210.

Fig. 7. Fifth pair of feet, x 120. Fy. 8. Last abdominal seg-

ments and tail, x 84.

Fig. 9. Cyclops littoralis, superior antenna, X 210. Fg. 10. Inferior

antenna, X 210. fg. 11. Mandible, x 210. Fig. 12. Upper

foot-jaw (?), X 210. Fg. 18. Lower foot-jaw, x 210. Fig. 14.

Abdomen and tail: a, foot of fifth pair: x 210,

Puate III.

Fig. 1. Cyclops ovalis, superior antenna, X 120. Fig.2. Abdomen and

tail, x 120.

Fiy.38. Cyclopicera lata, superior antenna, X 210. Fig. 4. Inferior an-

tenna, X 210. Fig. 5. Maxilla, x 210. Fig. 6. Upper foot-

jaw, X 210. Fig. 7. Lower foot-jaw, x 210. Fig. 8. Abdomen

and tail: a, foot of fifth pair; x 120.

Fig. 9. Macrochiron fucicolum, male (?), seen from right side, x 100.

Fig. 10. Upper antenna of male, x 220. Fig. 11. Upper an-

tenna of female, x 220. Fig. 12. Lower antenna, x 220.

Fig. 13. Mandible, x 220. Fig. 14. Lower foot-jaw, x 220.

Fig. 15, Foot of fourth pair, x 220. Fig. 16. Foot of fifth

pair (male), X 220. Fig. 17. Foot of fifth pair (female), x 220.

Fig. 18. Caudal segment and sete, x 220.

PuateE LV.

Fig. 1. Canthocamptus imus (female) : animal, seen from left side, x 100.

Fig. 2. Superior antenna, X 250. Fig. 3. Lower foot-jaw,

Xx 250. Fig. 4. Foot of first pair, x 250. Fig. 5. Foot of fifth

pair, x 250.

Fig. 6. Scutellidium tisboides (female), upper antenna, x 210. Fig. 7.

Mandible and maxilla, x 210. Fig. 8. Foot of first pair, x 210.

ee Lower foot-jaw, xX 210. Fig. 10, Foot of fifth pair,

x 1

On the Myology of Sarcophilus ursinus. 17

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Ectinosoma melaniceps, female (?), seen from right side, x 84.

Fig. 2. Superior antenna, x 210, Fig. 3. Lower antenna, x 210.

Fig. 4. Mandible: a, origin of palp, x 300. Fig. 5, Mandible-

palp, x 300. Fig. 6. Maxilla, x 300. Fig. 7. Upper foot-jaw,

x 300. Fig. 8. Lower foot-jaw, x 300. Fig. 9. Foot of first

pair, x 210. Fvg. 10. Posterior abdominal segments and setz,

x 120. Fig. 11. Foot of fifth pair, x 210. Fig. 12. Maxillary

appendage (?).

Fig.13. Dactylopus Normani, superior antenna, X 210. Fig. 14. Lower

foot-jaw, X 210. Fig. 15. Foot of first pair, x 210. Fig. 16.

Secondary branch of lower antenna, xX 210. Fig. 17. Fifth

pair of feet, x 210.

PuateE VI.

Fig. 1. Laophonte Hodgii, upper antenna of female, x 210. Fig. 2. Upper

antenna of male, x 210. Fig. 3. Lower foot-jaw, x 210.

Fig. 4. Foot of first pair, x 210. Fig. 5. Foot of fourth pair,

x 210. Fig. 6. Fifth foot of female, x 250. Fig. 7. Fifth foot

of male, x 250. Fig. 8. Caudal segment of female, x 250.

Fig. 9. Caudal segment of male, x 210.

Fig. 10. Cletodes limicola, female, seen from above, X 100. Fig. 11. Up-

per antenna of female, x 250. Jy. 12. Upper antenna of male,

x 250. Fig. 18. Lower foot-jaw, x 250. Fig. 14. Foot of

first pair, x 250. Fig. 15. Foot of fifth pair, female, x 250.

Fig. 16. Foot of fifth pair, male, x 250. Fig. 17, Caudal seg-

ment of female, x 250.

IL.—Further Observations on the Myology of Sarcophilus

ursinus. By ALEXANDER Maca.ister, M.B., Professor of

Zoology, University of Dublin, and Director of the Univer-

sity Museum.

In the ‘ Annals’ for March 1870 I published an account of

the dissection of a young female Tasmanian Devil. Since

that time three specimens of this species have been brought

alive to the Dublin Zoological Gardens. Two of these still

live, and are in an exceedingly healthy condition ; one, how-

ever, did not survive its imprisonment for more than a few

months; and I have had the opportunity of making a careful

examination of its muscles and of repeating my former obse1

vations.

As this second specimen was fresh, a male, and full-grown,

it was in far better condition for examination than its prede-

cessor in our dissecting-room, which was a salted specimen.

This individual was 30 inches long, and his muscles were

red, plump, and strong.

The platysma myoides, and indeed all parts of the panni-

culus carnosus, were very strong and red, contrasting decidedly

with the weak undefined condition which they exhibited in

- Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 2

18 Prof. A. Macalister on the Myology

the former specimen. The cervical portion of this muscle

formed a thick strong sheet, which passed from the occipital

and mastoid regions downwards and forwards, over the mova-

ble clavicle and over the humeral region, to be attached to the

integument in the vicinity of the elbow. The dorsal and

abdomino-lateral and femoral parts of the panniculus were

particularly strong.

The muscles of mastication were exceedingly remarkable in

their development. The masseter was distinctly bilaminar,

the superficial portion being four times the size of the deeper ;

the directions of the two lamine were exceedingly oblique.

The temporal was of enormous size, three times the size of the

external masseter; the pterygoids were smaller, the external

being exceedingly feeble; the internal was also small. The

most expressive way of representing the enormous size of

these muscles is by stating that the weights of the muscles

which elevate the lower jaw (masseters, pterygoids, and tem-

porals) were equal to the sum of the weights of all the scapular

and brachial muscles (deltoids, spinates, biceps, brachiales,

triceps, &e.), or to the entire series of muscles which act on

the shoulder-joint (pectorals, latissimus dorsi, spinati, deltoids,

&c.). This will give some idea of the power with which these

formidable creatures can close their mouths. (However, the

habits of the two specimens in the Zoological Gardens do not

seem to indicate the great degree of ferocity for which the

species has got credit.)

The trapezius arose from only four dorsal spines (in my

other specimen it extended to seven); the clavicular portion

was distinctly attached to the outer third of the clavicle. The

central portion of the cervical and upper part of the muscle

was directly continuous with the acromial (not the clavicular)

deltoid; and, gliding over the shoulder, this portion was in-

serted into the lowest part of the deltoidal crest.

The latissimus dorsi was attached to the lowest five dorsal

spines, and to the spines of three lumbar vertebre, and only

to the tip of the last rib: I was able to separate it clearly

from the pectoralis quartus (from which it was not easily

distinguished in the last specimen); its tendon of insertion

was rather below that of the teres major.

Rhomboideus major was only attached to three dorsal spines.

The serratus magnus arose from the seven upper ribs and the

four lower cervical transverse processes ; a detached slip arose

from the second and third cervical transverse processes, and

represented a levator scapule.

The cleido-mastoid was small and separate, one third the

size of the sterno-mastoid.

of Sarcophilus ursinus. 19

There were two trachelo-acromiales muscles, as in the

otter, one from the transverse process of the atlas to the outer

half of the scapular spine; the other arose from the same

process further back, and was inserted into the posterior

third of the scapular spine. In the former specimen I missed

the posterior portion of this muscle.

The supraspinatus is double the size of the infraspinatus,

and equal to the subscapularis. There is a distinct small

teres minor; I could not separate it in my former specimen.

The subclavius was not only attached to the clavicle, but also

extended beneath that bone to the spine of the scapula.

The deltoid consisted of three parts :—a clavicular, from the

outer half of the clavicle (this I before thought was acromial) ;

an acromial, continuous with the trapezius; and a scapular,

from the metacromion and anterior half of the scapular spine.

The pectoralis quartus was a strap-like band from the linea

alba of the abdomen (extending upwards for *2 of an inch

from a point ‘25 above the umbilicus) ; its insertion is above

that of the pectoralis minor.

The two tendons of the biceps were very closely tied toge-

ther, and the main body of the muscle was radial in its inser-

tion; yet there was a very slender ulnar slip. The biceps was

twice the size of the brachialis (‘32 oz. :°16 0z.). The extensor

mass was very much in excess of the flexors (1°67 oz. : 0°48 0z.).

The anconeus externus was inseparable from the triceps, but

the anconeeus internus was very distinct. The palmaris was

as described in my former paper.

A careful dissection satisfied me that the slip which I had

before taken as a supinator longus was really only a slip of

the panniculus carnosus—as it had no bony. attachment, but

was directly continuous with the continued slip of the pla-

tysma: the only supinator is the short one, which nearly equals

in weight the pronator quadratus. The extensor secundus

digitorum was only attached to the fourth and fifth digits ;

and the former digit had two tendons supplying it (in my

former specimen there were four tendons—two to the fifth,

one to the third, and one to the fourth). A separate slip

(ulnaris quinti) existed, which arose with the extensor carpi

ulnaris, and, passing in the groove in the annular ligament

with the extensor minimi digiti, is inserted into the base of

the fifth metacarpal bone.

The psoas magnus and the iliacus are easily separated from

each other; these, taken together, are four times the size of

the psoas parvus. The pectineus was not double, as it was

in the former specimen. The upper slip of the obturator ex-

ternus was semidetached from the rest of the muscle.

20 On the Myology of Sarcophilus ursinus.

The quadratus femoris was very remarkable, arising from

the transverse process of the first caudal vertebra, from the

tuber ischii, and a tendinous band which passed from the one

to the other. Gluteus minimus was easily separable from the

medius. A very thin slip represented the obturator internus.

Tensor vagine femoris is separate and thin. Sartorius is ex-

ceedingly feeble. The biceps flexor cruris arises only from

the tuber ischii and two caudal vertebree.

The “ bicipiti accessorius” was quite distinct at its origin,

but joined at its insertion to the semitendinosus—which muscle

was thus tricipital, having one head caudal overlapping the

biceps, one ischiatic, and, thirdly, this accessorius. The two

other heads are similar to those which exist for the same muscle

in Castor fiber, Atherura, and the Otter. There is a middle

head of the gastrocnemius, which joins the external.

The peronsi and tibial muscles were exactly similar to those

in my former specimen. The foot-muscles were as follows :—

Abductor ossis metatarsi minimi digiti, from the os calcis to

the spur of the fifth metatarsal; abductor minimi digiti, a

superficial muscle, with a short triangular belly and a long

tendon, which arises from the external annular ligament over

the peroneei tendons, and is inserted into the fascia over the

flexor tendon of the little toe.

The lumbricales were six in number—one to the inner and

one to the outer side of the outer toe, a similar pair for the

fourth toe, a single internal muscle for the third and one for

the second toes.

The rudimental hallux has two muscles—a flexor brevis,

which extends from the scaphoid bone to the first phalanx,

and an exceedingly fine triangular and superficial adductor,

which arises superficial to the palmar interosseous muscle for

the index toe, and is inserted into the inner side of the first

phalanx of the hallux.

The interossei were three plantar and four dorsal, the former

being (1) adductor indicis, (2) adductor quarti digiti, (3) ad-

ductor quinti digiti; the latter were (1) abductor indicis,

(2) adductor terti digiti, (3) abductor tertii, and (4) abductor

quarti digiti.

The only other points worthy of note were the extension of

the scalenus posticus to the upper four ribs, of the external

oblique to the ten lowermost, the absence of ilio-costal fibres

in the quadratus lumborum, an enormous triangularis sterni,

a two-bellied depressor of the mandible, whose anterior por-

tion is connected to and parallel with the genio-hyoid, with

which it agrees in function.

On the Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 21

I1.— The Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton.

By Harry G. SEELEY, St. John’s College, Cambridge.

[Continued from vol. ix. p. 280.]

§ 3. The Physics of the Skeleton.

The next step after a study of growth is to observe in what

directions growth usually occurs; then we may discover the

forces which accumulate the energy that results in such growth.

All animals of the kinds named Vertebrata have their internal

bones arranged in a way which in many respects is the same

for them all—a great antero-posterior extension; and this

arrangement is named the skeleton. But when animals are

contrasted with each other, they manifest differences in the

degree of growth, and in the presence or absence of some of

their bones; and these peculiarities, being persistent through

an immense number of variously modified individuals, give to

the skeleton a number of different plans, which admit of being

defined. And out of these considerations arise the great pro-

blems affecting all bones, which will here be stated. They

are :— What is the skeleton, and why has it an existence as a

skeleton ? and what are the plans of growth of the skeleton

among vertebrate animals, and why do those plans exist ?

Here, then, the skeleton first appears as an accomplished

fact, without visible genesis beyond such as may be traced in

each individual, where changes are observed to occur in the

bones after an animal has left the egg or the uterus, which

are in sequence from their first formation to completed growth.

By the skeleton, I understand in the foregoing passage the

vertebrate skeleton only ; and I wish, for convenience, to keep

the idea of the vertebrate skeleton distinct from other impor-

tant osseous machinery of vertebrates, which is better named

the appendicular bones, the dermal bones, and the respiratory

bones. The reason for this distinction is that the nature of

their relation to the axial skeleton must first be demonstrated

before it can be reasoned upon. ‘The vertebrate skeleton,

moreover, is the only one which is well developed in every

vertebrate animal, the other bones being variable and giving

characters to the plans of the subordinate sections. Thus the

Vertebrata admit of being defined as those animals in which

the elongated central nervous system is sheathed posteriorly

by a sequence of osseous rings, and anteriorly by a bony box—

the rmgs being the vertebree protecting the spinal cord, while

the box is the skull covering the brain. This definition in-

cludes all the animals classed by zoologists as Vertebrata, ex-

cepting the lancelet (Amphioxus), which, for reasons given in

22 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

the chapter on classification, must be regarded as forming a

group of equal zoological value with the Vertebrata.

The division of the nervous system and of the skeleton into

a long posterior part and a wide anterior part is the essential

vertebrate character. And if we are to understand what cha-

racters are essential, and why they undergo change, an attempt

must be made to state clearly what they are, and why they

exist. It will be sufficient, with regard to the spinal column,

to know that it is a central, somewhat cylindrical mass, ex-

tending the length of the vertebral column generally, giving

off at intervals pairs of nerves, and tapering towards the tail.

While the brain is posteriorly continuous with the spinal cord,

it is much larger, and consists of parts which are sometimes

arranged one before the other, and sometimes one over the

other; it usually gives off nerves to the eyes, the ears, the

nose, &e.

The vertebree have a common basis, on which the neural

column rests, and which is a subcylindrical column, called the

notochord. When segmented and ossified, it forms the part

of each vertebra named the centrum; and this centrum gives

attachment to a pair of bones which arch over the spinal cord

and are separated from others by the intervertebral nerves ;

they may become inseparably united to the centrum or always

remain distinct. The skull is made by a number of small

bones which suturally unite, or simply overlap each other, so

as to enclose the brain, which case usually may be separated

vertically down the sutures into three more or less well-defined

segments, each consisting of a bone at the base, a bone on

each side for the sides of the arch, and one or two bones above

vaulting it over. A necessary and separate part of the skull

is comprised generally under the terms upper and lower jaws.

Now we have to inquire why these parts exist—in other

words, how they come to grow. And all growth has been

seen to be organic dialysis, which takes place under the in-

fluence of alternating pressure and tension and rest. How,

then, does this law apply to the formation of the vertebrate

skeleton, and account for the formation of bones so deeply

seated and well protected, and for the formation and com-

plexity of brains and crania? I will endeavour to explain.

All vertebrate animals are locomotive, and all fish and all

immature Amphibia live in water. These animals progress

backward, though we usually name the motion forward ; that

is, each uses its tail to obtain a leverage by which it retreats,

the animal’s head necessarily going where the tail sends it.

It is therefore evident that the head, in piercing the water,

experiences some pressure alternating with rest, while the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 23

body experiences a serpentine motion originated by the tail

and passing forward. ‘To understand clearly the effects upon

the animal of this movement, it will be useful to study it ex-

perimentally. If, then, I take an ordinary long bolster, which

in its cylindrical form will represent a fish, and hold firmly

one extremity of it (which for convenience I suppose to be its

tail), and then imitate the movement of the fish by moving

the tail powerfully from side to side, it will be seen that the

movement propels the feathers towards the free end of the

bolster; that is, by granting the bolster a tail, I have elabo-

rated for it a head also. Now to apply this principle to the fish.

Instead of the force furnished by my hands, there are enor-

mous muscles extending down the body ; instead of the bed-

ticking for an outer envelope, there is a vertebral column;

and finally, instead of feathers inside of it, there is the central

nervous system, which, in the young state at least, is centrally

fluid. Now, if the tail is set moving as it is seen to move in

a fish out of water, the powerful pressure behind will compress

the light semifluid substance of the spinal cord and force it to

move forward, and this movement is maintained during the

life of the individual; it will also by the tension increase the

length of the spinal matter relatively to the osseous sheath.

The mechanical effect, then, of motion originated by the tail

is an immense amount of leverage applied at every point of

the curve of the body, which inevitably acts upon the con-

tents of the spmal tube in compressing and forcing the sub-

stance forward. It also must act, as all tension and pressure

have been seen to act, in stimulating the growth of the spinal

cord.

Thus there is a persistent influence ever tending to elongate

the spimal column. As it was seen that there is an actual

forcing of the spinal cord forward, so this growth will tend in

the same way. But I have already pointed out how soon the

individual power to be modified in form comes to an end,

although the forces capable of modifying the organism con-

tinue to act,—and that thus the energy of life is not lost, but

becomes potential for a time in the parent, and can only be

manifested kinetically when a bud or ovum which has in it a

capacity for mobility which the parent had not, is thrown off

from the organism; and then, under the name of a variety,

we see manifested the potential activity of the parent which

its organization had previously compelled to remain as poten-

tial activity. So that we cannot expect to find these forces

producing large visible effects under our eyes in one indivi-

dual. But we must expect that im a succession of individuals,

each of which remains for a certain period capable of modifi-

24 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

cation, the force which is potential and persistent, and in each

individual is renewed, will, as the opportunities for it to take

the kinetic form successively arrive, be manifested as fully as

it would originally have been in one individual if the organic

machinery had been capable of maintaining the nutrition ne-

cessary to elaborate growth. I shall thus be justified in

reasoning about the species as though it were an individual,

and to conclude that the force which has been shown, both

theoretically and experimentally, to be competent to produce

an elongation of the spinal cord toward the part called the

head, actually does produce the effects which it ought to pro-

duce. And the way in which this is done depends upon the

means to do it: first, the forcing of the nutritive fluid forward

necessarily produces an enlargement of the nervous system at

the anterior end; and, secondly, the growth forward of the

nervous system must cause a pressure which will stimulate

special growth in that region; and the parts of the brain

which were originally arranged one before each other may

come to be forced one over the other by growth forward of the

neural tissue pressing into the brain-case.

And when a brain is examined, in it are found large cavi-

ties called ventricles, which are the receptacles of fluid, such

as we might theoretically expect. And when the brains of

the lower Vertebrata are compared with those of the higher

Vertebrata, there will be remarked a gradual increase, as we

ascend in organization, in the size of the cerebral lobes, which

first push the optic lobes on each side so that the cerebrum

abuts against the cerebellum, and finally overrides it. There- |

fore it must be anticipated that the longer the time for which

a vertebrate type of animal has persisted upon the earth’s

surface, the higher will be its nervous organization; and

hence that extinct animals which seem to be the direct repre-

sentatives, so far as their bones go, of existing animals, will,

so far as they approach nearer to the common vertebrate

plan, have had a lower grade of vital organs. Having seen

that the movement of the body would be competent, by

governing the direction of growth and the distribution of

nutriment, to generate the brain from a pre-existing spinal

cord, it is probable that the nerves are in the same way

affluents to and sustainers of the spinal column, and that their

presence preserves its division into segments.

Having advanced this hypothesis of the vertebrate plan of

the central neural system, we will endeavour to see how the

nerve-matter becomes coated with the investing skeleton.

And to do this, it will be requisite to consider the entire body

as a machine capable of manifesting the forces of pressure and

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 25

’ tension, and to examine how the part of the body under con-

sideration can be affected by these forces.

It is due to Mr. Herbert Spencer to state that he has

endeavoured to grapple with this question; but, although he

appreciated fully the simple mechanical conditions of the

problem, he seems to me to have failed to solve it. His argu-

ment is that when pressure is manifested on alternate sides of

a rod, there will be a neutral axis within it which only expe-

riences small compressions, and external to that an investing

region, where pressure and tension alternate. He then tries

to apply that principle to a fish. The principle would be »

perfectly applicable to a long bone, and would account for its

being hollow or less dense internally ; but it is not applicable

to a fish, because there is nothing to correspond to the hollow-

ness of a bone in the middle line of the animal; and, on the

contrary, the region which should be the unossified neutral

axis is the ossified neural skeleton—a condition exactly the

reverse of what it should be were Mr. Spencer’s hypothesis

true. Mr. Spencer’s error consists in not recognizing that the

muscles of the body are, in regard to the production of the

neural skeleton, precisely what the weight is which bends a

revolving flexible rod—the power which produces a neutral

axis, and which also produces the pressure and tension in

which we have seen that ossifications arise*.

In seeking to explain this formation of an osseous skele-

ton, stead of taking an abstract, impossible archetype to

reason from, my argument may be clearer if we examine

the conditions of the problem as presented in some animal.

Having the choice of animals, among which a Chelonian

would be the least suitable, the most difficult skeleton to un-

derstand, I select a whiting. The fish manifests locomotive

energy ; and to find the source of this mechanical power, I

skin her. ‘The skin requires to be dissected off, on account of

its close union with the constituent fibres of the muscles ; and

in some parts of the body there are attached to it special

skin-muscles in addition. The skin removed, there is seen an

enormous development of muscles, which are arranged in a

very marked way. Fibres extend from the skin obliquely

inward toward the skeleton; and these fibres are grouped into

obliquely placed muscles, which are arranged along the animal

parallel to each other, so as to make large strips of similar

muscles, which reach from tail to head. In the tail of the

whiting there are four of these strips on each side; and the

constituent muscles are so arranged that the obliquity of the

* Principles of Biology, vol. ii. p. 196.

26 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

four series makes a W-like outline when traced externally ©

from the dorsal to the ventral surface, the upper part of the W

being towards the animal’s head. Here, then, is an immense

muscular power, so arranged as to act in many directions.

Removing the whole of the muscles, we expose the verte-

brate skeleton beneath them, and find that each transverse

muscular segment corresponds with a transverse osseous seg-

ment ; and that the direction of the muscles of the two middle

strips of the W coincides with the direction of the dorsal and

abdominal processes of the vertebree, and with the nerves.

‘These middle muscular strips are large compared with the

superior and inferior strips; and in transverse section each

often shows, by the method of overlapping, an approach to a

concentric arrangement of the constituent muscles in the re-

gion of the tail. The forces represented by these muscles are,

I believe, precisely such in their distribution and combination

as theoretically might have been anticipated. But, before

considering the effects of their action, it is to be remarked that

the discovery of a notochord among the Tunicata lends strong

probability to the supposition that the notochord, which ex-

tends beneath the neural chord, is not a product, but one of

the original foundations, of the vertebrate plan. But, granting

a notochord, it is impossible, without a stretch of imagination,

under which the reason gives way, to assume the existence of

a mass of muscle like that which makes the great bulk of a

fish, and then try to account for its segmented condition, as

Mr. Herbert Spencer does, by lateral breaking strains. In

nature, so far as [ am aware, no such phenomenon exists.

And it seems to me as gratuitous to assume the existence of

the muscles, in order to have them subsequently segmented

by these imaginary lateral strains, produced without any force

to produce them, as it is to suppose that the foundation of the

vertebral column is laid by breaking strains segmenting the

notochord. Before such views can claim to be considered in

science, their author is bound to show that an animal is acted

upon by lateral forces external to itself, and that an effect of

such strains would be to cause the muscular tissues to snap

into little short muscles, and that such strains continued would

eventually pass through the whole of the animal except its

skin and viscera! In the chapter on growth, we have seen

that the consequences of strains would be, not a weakening,

but a strengthening of the tissues.

In the axial part of a fish, a serpent, or indeed in any ani-

mal, the successive segments, both of bone and muscle, are

exceedingly similar to each other. Almost at all parts of the

trunk two adjacent vertebree can only be distinguished from

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. par

each other by close comparison, if they are in the same divi-

sion of the body. And there being this sequence, the form of

parts only changing with the changed function of different

regions of the body, it will be legitimate reasoning, if we can

discover a law capable of accounting for a primitive initial

segment, to conclude that the continuous operation of that law

would eventually segment the entire animal, 7f an animal

capable of being encased in a segmented covering already

existed.

According to the laws of growth, we find that differentiation

of parts is due to the kinetic energy of the individual or to

the potential energy of its organization—and that no organic

energy is lost, but becomes accumulated in the individual long

after the mobility of the parts ceases, and then is transmitted

with and added to the common stock of energy to be inherited.

If this inherited energy is such that it is capable of being

manifested within the mobile period of life, then it will stamp

its characteristic marks upon the organism. But if it is too

general to be manifested during that period, it takes a poten-

tial form, and may even remain latent for several generations

and accumulate, and then, instead of being developed kineti-

eally in the individual, it at an early period is merged in the

common stock, and appears kinetically in the organization,

and potentially in the individual, as a new part.

Thus in Ophidians, which exert continually an intense

muscular force upon every joint of the vertebral column, we

find that the kinetic energy is manifested in giving to the

bones great density, sharpness of definition, and perfect ossifi-

cation, but never in the partial formation of a growth like

an epiphysis, between vertebre. Yet, if the views which

IT urge are true views, there should be some result, in in-

creased ossification, of all this muscular power; and the

result is found in the numerical increase of the vertebra, so

that in Ophidians they sometimes number 400 or 500. But

this increase is potential, and takes place at so early a period

that the newly added segment (vertebree, muscles, nerves, &c.)

is developed equally with the others. If the increase takes

place in the thoracic region, it necessarily elongates the viscera;

if the tail is lengthened, by comparison the body appears to be

shortened.

If we take another type, that of the Anurous Amphibia,

which do not display muscular power by: wrigglings which

press and pull the vertebrae, as among serpents, but progress

by leaping, and keep the body removed from the ground, ex-

cept at the caudal style, the power, both kinetic and potential,

acts chiefly on the limbs—kinetically in the elongation and

28 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

hollowness of the limb-bones, the ilia, &c., potentially (per-

haps) in the formation of investing epiphyses at their ends—

but in scarcely an appreciable way upon the vertebree in either

form, since they remain both very few in number and short.

It cannot be necessary to multiply these illustrations ; for

the same law may be traced in every osseous structure. Where

an animal uses any part of the body, the part grows long,

either kinetically by lengthening the individual parts, or

potentially by increasing their number.

If, now, we generalize these facts in relation to the vertebral

column, the result is, that since the potential epiphyses multi-

tiply indefinitely and elongate the body, so there must have

been a period when the body was short and when the seg-

ments were very few—and that the elongation of the body

proceeds gradually, and, except in the caudal region, is likely

to be arrested by the development of limbs.

It were simplest to assume, if there had been grounds for

doing so, a single vertebra as the basis from which the body

was formed; but the existence of a notochord among tunica-

ries, and the vast gap between Amphioxus and ordinary

vertebrates, does not warrant such an assumption ; nor does it

indeed enter practically into my theory of a vertebrate. How-

ever, if we assume an animal with the viscera of a fish, with

a notochord, and with terminal muscles capable of moving the

tail, then the consequence of that arrangement would be the

formation of a terminal segment, not by breaking a piece off

the notochord, but by the muscular action increasing the

density of the terminal portion, and this organic dialysis even-

tually giving it a structure by which it is chemically separated

from the other parts. The direction of the mechanical strain

becomes the direction of greatest density, and determines the

directions in which the osseous matter is deposited and the

shapes which it assumes.

Then, just as the inherited energy of many individuals at

last became a force sufficient to differentiate the first osseous

caudal segment, so the continuous operation of the same mus-

cles goes on accumulating energy for which there can be no

outlet in the adult organization, and the energy takes the

potential form. It has, in fact, become so powerful that, in-

stead of displaying itself only in maturity, it begins to act

upon the immature animal at as early a time as the other and

ordinary laws of its growth, and in this way gives expression

to itself, differentiating a new segment similar to the pre-

existing segment—a potential epiphysis, which, growing con-

tinuously with the original segment, can afterwards scarcely

be distinguished from it. Thus the tail comes to have two

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 29

segments; and so the process must go on, the vertebra in-

creasing in number and extending further towards the head,

till the basis of a vertebral column is elaborated. So far as I

am aware, this hypothesis is in accord with the sum of the

facts, and gives an explanation of their relation to each other.

And not only does it account for the original existence of a

vertebral column, but for its subsequent modifications, and for

the repetition of the successive similar soft parts (muscles and

nerves) which are correlated with the bones.

But so far we only account for the centrum of a vertebra.

In our usual conception of it, especially as seen in the fish’s

tail, it includes an arch on the dorsal part, called the neural

arch, which covers the neural column, and a similar arch on

the ventral side, called the hemal arch, which covers a blood-

vessel. In dissecting a fish, the muscles in the tail of the

dorsal and hemal sides of the animal are seen fo be as like

each other as are the neural and hemal arches; so that it will

be in accord with the mechanical basis on which this investi-

gation started to conclude that in both cases a like force has

produced a like result.

But how? If we grant the differentiation of an initial

caudal segment of the notochord by muscular power, then as

those lateral muscles of the tail, acting obliquely, enlarge,

they would, with increasing force, become competent to set up

a separate ossification upon the notochord at each of the mar-

gins of their overgrowth. And these points, it is to be re-

marked, coincide with the points of origin from the centrum

of the lateral parts of the two arches. When once these

kinetic epiphyses are brought into existence, the lateral mus-

cular attachment would ensure their growth, and the dorsal

and ventral muscles would as surely draw them towards each

other above and below. Thus the fundamental plan of the

tail of a fish in its soft parts supplies the machinery necessary

to elaborate the hard parts; and from their less bulk and the

greater relative power brought to bear upon them, it would

seem not improbable that the neural and hemal arches should

be ossified at an earlier period in the history of the organiza-

tion than the centrum. And this muscular power would be

competent, if the arches long remained separate from the cen-

trum, to draw them towards each other, so that the dorsal part

of every neural arch would abut against the dorsal part of the

arch next behind it. Thus there will come to be formed in-

terlocking facets between the arches, of which the anterior

will look upward while the posterior will look downward: in

most animals the neural arches actually have such. facets,

which are known as anterior and posterior zygapophyses.

30 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

In the median lateral line between the great lateral muscles

slight transverse processes are sometimes developed; and these

may be upon the centrum, or upon the neural arch, or upon

the hemal arch, according to the arrangement of the muscles.

But the point is one of detail, and not a fundamental part of

the vertebrate common plan. As the caudal vertebree progress

forward towards the head, they encounter the viscera on the

hemal side; and then the hemal arch widens and embraces

the viscera, so that the parts called hemapophyses, which in

the tail are directed downward, come in the thorax to be lifted

up the side of the centrum and directed outward, sometimes

attached to the median lateral osseous process, and often con-

nate with it.. When the viscera extend to a great length

down the body, the lateral transverse processes are not deve-

loped as distmct processes; when the viscera have a short

extension and the tail is long, they are considerably developed,

and then pass forward as epiphyses upon the visceral region,

being developed at the point of junction of the hemapophysis

with the part of the centrum which supports it. In this form

the hemal arch is called a rib. And as the arch widens, new

elements come to be introduced into the circle which it consti-

tutes—formed toward the ventral surface by the increased

expansion given to the ventral strips of muscles, which often

become blended with the lower lateral strips.

In this way I conceive the vertebrate common plan to have

been elaborated, so far as its osteological structures are con-

cerned, by the mechanical machinery with which it is inevi-

tably accompanied. And if so, it will be evident that all

subsequent variations it may assume in form will be due to a

different distribution of the muscular machinery resulting

from kinetic growth, while the different proportions of the

different regions of the column will be due to potential growth.

In first conceiving of a vertebrate I introduced two ideas—

the tail and its product, the head. In obtaining a similar

generalized idea of the head to that just given of the body, it

may be as well to remark :—that the extension forward of the

vertebre will have maintained the spinal cord of approxi-

mately uniform size up to the point where, like the constricted

neck of a bottle, it abuts against the enlarged terminal part;

and that the transition im the dorsal region from neural

matter covered by a vertebra to the brain covered by the

skull is not dissimilar in kind to the transition seen on the

hemal surface, where the tail suddenly expands and covers

the viscera, only with this difference—that while the brain ex-

periences but very slight fluctuations im size, the viscera are

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 31

constantly undergoing change. Both hemal and neural parts

terminate in the head, but under these different conditions—

that while the neural arch is being modified for the first time,

the hemal arch undergoes its second transformation, which

may be altered to some extent by the relation of the two

arches to each other; so that, on & prior? grounds, the hemal

arch in the skull may be expected to be more complex than

the neural arch, and also to more readily assimilate to the

heemal arches of the body.

Now, if the brain-substance is supposed to have accumulated

at the anterior end of the body as a consequence of the motion

and mode of growth of the animal, and quite irrespective of the

vertebre, its covering from the very first experienced some

different conditions of ossification from those of the vertebral

neural arch—supposing, of course, an anterior enlargement of

the nervous system to have taken place prior to the entire

segmentation of the notochord. Such a view, however, is not

supported by the evidence from Amphioxus, since the noto-

chord is segmented and no brain developed. And the difficulty

of a theory of the skull hinges upon the relative probability

of the skull originating prior or subsequently to segmentation

of the notochord—because in the one case it will be but an

extension onward of the vertebral plan, and in the other case

it may have originated apart from the vertebral basis. If the

Amphioxus is a distinct type animal from the Vertebrata,

we shall not be warranted in reasoning from it to a vertebrate.

But, whatever the initial circumstances were which governed

the formation of a brain-case, we shall not be justified, except

with good evidence, in assuming any other cause to account

for it than potential repetition, which under altered conditions

has been found competent to produce very different osseous

structures in different parts of the vertebral column, especially

as the brain offers a surface to be covered different from the

spinal cord, and conditions of stability different from the visceral

region. It has been seen, with the diverging vertebral pro-

cesses, that, under the new conditions, osseous elements come

into existence which were not found in the caudal region:

similarly it will not be surprising if some new structures are

developed in the head by the special influences working in

that part of the body.

Suggestive evidence of original unity of origin, direct or

indirect, for the whole skeleton, is supplied by the skull being

segmented, as it is shown to be by well-made researches ; for

if it had originated independently, no trace of segments could

be anticipated, but an arrangement of bones with which the

spinal column would have at first nothing in common, though

32 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

eventually its potential energy would influence their arrange-

ment, and gradually bring the structure of the brain-case into

harmony with the vertebral plan. Thus there are three pos-

sible ways of formation for a skull :—1Ist, potential repetition

of the vertebrate plan; 2ndly, independent ossification; and,

3rdly, independent ossification modified by potential repetition.

The facts of the case are such that it is quite possible to select

examples which would sustain each of these views. Thus

among the shark tribe, the bony cerebral envelope is made up

of homogeneous osseous particles which show no indication

whatever of segmentation. And, in the absence of evidence

of division of the head into separate bones, it would be an

unwarrantable use of the imagination to suppose that the

divisions had once existed and have become obliterated. This

would seem to be a type of those examples of the skull which

have originated independently of the vertebral column and

before it extended the whole length of the animal. The ser-

pent might be taken as a type in which the skull might have

originated as a natural consecutive part of the vertebral sys-

tem; while for the third type we might instance fishes like

the sturgeon or animals like the Chelonians, where the brain

is first sheathed in homogeneous cartilage which may have

been formed independently of the vertebral system, then this

is covered with osseous plates, which reproduce with some

modifications the vertebral elements.

Thus there must always be a conflict between potential

energy, in organization, leading to uniformity and simplicity,

and kinetic energy, leading to variety; and the longer any

type endures in time, the more closely its cerebral region will

approximate to the vertebral structure, so far as the grouping

of the bones is concerned; thus in the human subject the

structure of the brain-case is more simple and the segments

are better marked than is the case with fishes; so that a

theory of the skull will depend upon the organization of the

animal, which determines the relative influence of kinetic and

potential ossification.

The human brain-case, being almost entirely a potential

ossification, is one of the simplest. It consists of some (three)

bones at the base, in the median line, called in sequence basi-

occipital, basisphenoid, and presphenoid, the basisphenoid

and presphenoid in the adult being united together as one

bone. The basioccipital immediately follows the centrum of

a vertebra; and these bones are to the skull what the centrums

would be to three segments of the vertebral column. On each

side of this row of skull-bones are placed three other bones (a

side bone to each base-bone), which rise up to embrace the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 33

sides of the brain. They are called (in sequence from behind

forward) exoccipital, alisphenoid, and orbitosphenoid, and have

the same sort of relation to the base-bones that the lateral

elements of the upper arch of a series of three vertebre have

to the three centrums out of which they rise. In the vertebra

the upper bones, called neurapophyses, enclose the neural

substance, meeting above it. In the skull they do not meet

above ; but just as with the lateral elements of the inferior

vertebral arch, in the transition from the true caudal region to

the preanal or visceral region osseous elements come to be

introduced between them in some animals, which did not

exist in the tail, so in the transition from the upper arches of

the vertebree to the upper arches ef the skull, enlarged to

cover the brain, a sequence of bones is introduced, to roof

over the cavity, to which there is nothing corresponding in

the vertebral region. ‘These bones, counting from behind

forward, are named supraoccipital, parietal, and frontal.

And all the bones enumerated differ from those of ver-

tebree in touching each other throughout their lateral margins

by sutures or overlap—a condition which in the vertebral

column is only met with exceptionally, as in the cervical re-

gion of the rays, pipe-fish, &c., and a part of the vertebral

column called the sacrum, in many land-animals. And these

bones touching each other throughout their extent, enlarge

the cranial cavity much in the same way as a sea-urchin en-

larges its covering shell. In the human skull there is some-

thing more, however; there are bones which have existence

in relation to the senses: such are some bones which come in

between the first and second segments of the skull, and are

connected in a more or less evident way with the ear; they

have been named collectively the otic bones. Then, between

the second and third segments, though external to them, is

usually one bone or more, developed seemingly i in relation to

the eye: the lachrymal (and, perhaps, the malar) is such a bone.

And in front of the brain there are bones which have relation

to the nasal functions, and are named generally the ethmoid

bones. In possessing these sets of bones the bony investing

girdles of the brain differ in plan from the investing girdles

of the spinal column.

If, now, we ask why there should be three segments in this

bony box for the brain, and why not an indefinite number of

segments as in the vertebral column, and why the structure

of the skull should become simpler the higher we ascend in

nervous organization, so that the three segments become more

and more well defined, the answer is, that the division be-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 3

34. Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

tween the segments is maintained by senses which are not

repetitions of each other, that the brain has a terminal sense

anteriorly, and that by the bones touching each other on

every margin, along all of which they can grow, there is in

the skull an exercised facility for kinetic growth, which ren-

ders it impossible that potential growth should be manifested.

If, for instance, a potential epiphysis of the frontal segment

of the skull were to be formed, it could only be developed

etween that segment and the parietal segment; and it could

only reproduce, to mark its division, a new pair of eyes behind

the old pair. And it is impossible to conceive of such a change

taking place except as the only way in which the energy of the

animal could be manifested. While, therefore, the bones of each

segment remain separate from each other, and permit growth

within, it is impossible that any cerebral increase, supposing

for a moment it were competent for such an end under any

circumstances, could result in the formation of a new segment.

Then (no matter how the mammalian skull originated), being

segmented by the sense-capsules, it must ever have been sub-

jected with greater and increasing influence to the potential

power of the vertebral column, which will be manifested in

bringing the plan of the segments of the skull more and more

into harmony with the plan of the vertebree, and so will obli-

terate any differences due to origin or number that there may

have been, in an earlier condition, between the structures of

the different segments.

Neglecting for the present the jaws of the potential skull

and the whole question of the nature of the inferior arches to

the segments, I would draw attention to the question whether

the potential character is always an induced one.

In most sharks there is no differentiation whatever of the

brain-case into constituent bones. In a specimen of the angel

shark in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, there

appears on the base of the skull to be a faint indication of a

transverse division. And it might be presumed that the seg-

ments would originate first, and then that each segment would

put on the divided condition; but I doubt whether the ten-

dency to potential increase is the same in the neural arch and

centrum ; for in many sharks the neural arch appears to be

double, to have been formed originally at each end of the

centrum, though often one of these arches has more the aspect

of a supplementary arch introduced between two centrums ;

moreover the fact that in paleeozoic fossil fishes the centrum is

rarely ossified would lead us to anticipate that in the skull the

base-bones would be the last formed and least well defined ;

so that in conceiving of a skull induced potentially upon the

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 35

basis of a shark’s skull, it would be quite consistent with the

vertebrate plan to have a greater number of superior arches

than of median base-bones.

But in those ordinary osseous fishes in which the several

bones can be separated from each other, we find the skull in

no transitional state, but already with the elements well de-

fined, except at the base of the skull, where the kinetic ossifi-

cation persists as a long median bone called the parasphenoid

or basitemporal. And in the upper part of the skull, besides

the three ordinary arches such as have been described, there

come to be introduced three additional, imperfect arches, ana-

logous to the intervertebral neural arches of sharks, and which

I interpret as potential representatives of those structures.

The first pair, in front of the frontal bones, are named the

prefrontal bones, one on each side; the second pair are be-

tween the frontal bones and parietal, and are named post-

frontal; the third set are between the occipital and parietal,

and are named the interparietal bones: these latter only per-

sist in the skulls of the higher Vertebrata.

It is to be remarked that in fishes the cranial bones overlap

each other in the squamous way in which an ordinary zyga-

pophysis laps upon its fellow.

And it appears to me probable that Prof. Owen truly appre-

ciated the homology of the bones which roof in the skull when

he compared them to the small ossification which often

crowns the spimous part of the vertebral neural arch, which is

by him named the neural spine, since without that ossification

it would be more difficult to see why the lateral bones should

not curve upward and roof in the cranium.

It is also worth considering whether in osseous fishes the

potential growth may not have a direction, so to speak, given

it by the influence of cerebral form, because it is observed, in

skulls of equal size, that in Lophius, which has the cerebellum

very short and small, the occipital region of the skull only

measures 2 inches in length, while in the tunny, which has the

cerebellum large, the oécipital part of the skull measures 44

inches in length ; so that, since some fishes (like the eels) have

olfactory lobes to the brain almost as large as the cerebrum,

it may not be impossible that such a condition in fishes may

have had a tendency to promote differentiation like that seen

in the separation of nasal bones from the prefrontal in some

Chelonians.

Now, just as in the more osseous fishes the parts of the

divided neural arch become blended, and the centrum becomes

more solid, so in the higher Ver tebrata the prefrontal and post-

frontal bones have become lost under the uniformity induced

36 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

by potential growth—if ancestors of such animals are con-

sidered ever to have had such bones.

This being, as I suppose, the mode of origin and plan of

growth of the neural arches of the skull, I turn to explain the

inferior arches.

In sharks the head is singularly instructive in the relation

of the jaws to the skull; for there they are seen to be free

structures which are merely appended to the brain-case. This

condition, permanent in the shark, is embryonic in what

are called higher Vertebrata.

The jaws are the entrance to the digestive canal ; and there-

fore we must anticipate that they will be surrounded with

bones which are the representatives of those which encompass

the digestive organs in the region of the vertebral column,

viz. of ribs. Prof. Rathke, describing the embryonic develop-

ment of the jaws in serpents, records that “that part of the

investing mass of the notochord in which the basisphenoid is

developed in many animals sends out a ‘ray’ or band down-

wards on each side, which presents a remarkable similarity to

a rib, not only in its mode of origin, but in its original posi-

tion and form.” “ But very early there grows out from near

the upper end of the ray a long thin process, which passes off

at an obtuse angle to it, and applies itself to the inferior wall

of the future brain-case.” Now this condition is that of an

ordinary rib of a fish. There is a long rib, as in mammals ;

but near its junction with the vertebra it gives off by articu-

lation a long thin epipleural element, homologous with that

of Crocodiles, [latteria, Birds, &c.; so that I see no reason to

doubt that the jaws are developed primarily as one rib, the

epipleural elements of the two sides being directed forward

and meeting in the middle line, so as to form the palate, and

the ordinary pleural elements being directed downward so as

to meet and enclose the digestive tube below. ‘The ribs of

fishes are simple ; but in reptiles and birds and mammals they

become segmented ; and there appears to be no limit to the

number of parts which may be included, while the degree of

ossification 1s various. In some animals there are five parts.

In the serpent the epipleural element. becomes segmented

into the pterygoid, palatine, and maxillary bones; while the

rib itself is divided into the quadrate bone proximally, then

the articular bone, and then the elements of the lower jaw,

which surround the cartilage and may number as many as

five. ‘The cranial representative of the rib always articulates

with the squamosal bone.

It must at once occur to any one to ask, if the cranium

consists of three segments, and only the middle one developes

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 37

arib, what has become of the ribs to the other segments ?

And it was the difficulty that there is in meeting this question

in the higher Vertebrata, which led me (in a former paper*)

to regard the occipital and frontal segments of the skull as

standing i in the same relation to the parietal segment as the

epiphyses of a vertebra stand to its centrum. But remember-

ing that, no matter what the potential power may be, it can

only ¢ rive great development to a structure when coincident

with functional growth, we should no more be justified in

anticipating ribs to all the cranial segments than to all the

vertebral segments ; and with many animals parts of the ver-

tebral column will be devoid of ribs. Yet as the upper arches

of the skull retain characters which long previously became

lost to the upper arches of the vertebral column, so we might

with more reason expect the lower arches to be present in the

skull than in cervical or lumbar vertebree. Accordingly, if

we examine a skull, and remove all those bones which we

have regarded as modified from a functionally developed rib

(which we name the jaws), there will be found in front of

their point of attachment, and under the frontal segment, two .

bones, named the vomeres ; sometimes they become ‘anchy rlosed

into one median bone. And anterior to these bones, and bent

up over them frequently, are the ethmoid bones, which simi-

larly may become anchylosed. Thus we again have the re-

presentative of a rib with its epipleuron. By segmentation

the ethmoid developes the nasal bones; and it 1s probable that

by segmentation the vomer forms the premaxillary. Thus the

pene rib conforms in plan to the posterior rib, and, like it,

embraces an organ which, in the lower animals, 1s only that

of smell, but which, by potential g growth comes, in the higher

vertebrates, to be the respiratory region. So that, just as there

are distinct tubes for breathing and for swallowing in the

land Vertebrata, so distinct tubes are made for those offices in

the skull by the prolongation forward of thé dorsal respiratory

tube till it is embraced by the first pair of cranial ribs, while

the digestive tube, not prolonged so far forward, is embraced

by the second pair. :

It is not so easy to find the third pair; and only on turn-

ing to the fish is the homology evident. At each side of the

back of the skull is a bone attached to the periotic bones,

named the hyomandibular; and to this bone is attached in

front the circle of hyoid bones; and attached to it behind are

the opercular bones; so that there is again a forked rib va-

riously segmented for the third arch.

* “ Outline of a Theory of the Skull &c.,” Annals, 1866, xvii. p. 345.

38 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

With the termination of branchial respiration (and the

branchial arches appear to represent the epipleural elements

of cervical ribs) the function of the pleural element of the first

cerebral arch appears to cease, and the bones of the operculum

are no longer developed; and in the same way, when the

respiratory function becomes changed, so that the animal

breathes by lungs, the branchial bones are merged in the

hyoid; the hyoid loses its heavy osseous character, and has a

less firm attachment to the hyomandibular. This bone then

gives attachment to the quadrate, and becomes the main sup-

port for the mandible ; so that it appears to be the bone which

among the higher Vertebrata is named the squamosal. In

the fish there are bones in front of the quadrate bone which

are called metapterygoid and symplectic. I have doubted

whether these bones may not have originally stood in the

same relation to the second visceral arch which the hyo-

mandibular held for the first, since they persist, the meta-

pterygoid becoming the quadrato-jugal, and the symplectic

becoming the supraquadrate ; and they both appear ultimately

to be absorbed into the squamosal. If this view were taken,

it would in no way be inconsistent with fact, and would only

show that the lower jaw had been carried a stage backward,

while it would explain the existence of two otherwise obscure

bones, and justify their disappearance under the influence of

potential growth in those animals in which they are wanting,

since in the Amphibia is seen a similar lateral joming-up and

absorption of the branchial arches into the hyoid.

Already it has been remarked that the lower jaw always

articulates with the squamosal bone, the squamosal bone

being, as we have just seen, apparently the proximal element

of a visceral arch. Sometimes the squamosal bone itself is

free, as in serpents ; but usually it is firmly fixed in the skull.

Sometimes, also, the quadrate bone is firmly wedged in the

skull, as in Crocodiles, Chelonians, Hatterta, and most of the

extinct Monocondylia; but there is no evidence whatever of

any other part of the lower jaw (as the os articulare) being

united with the skull» And in all those animals in which the

quadrate bone is joined with the skull, the lower jaw remains

composite. In the highest Monocondylia (birds) the quadrate

bone remains distinct, while the squamosal bone has entered

into the skull in the same way as in mammals, and furnishes

a concave articulation for the quadrate bone exactly like that

which in mammals is given to the lower jaw. Now, in so far

as the lower jaw occupies the position of a rib, the influence

of potential growth upon it would be to make it ever more

and more like a rib in simplicity of structure: hence I pre-

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 39

sume that when, in the mammal, one continuous ossification

joimed up all the splint elements of the lower jaw, the os arti-

culare and quadrate bone, as natural elements of the same rib,

could be no exception, and that there is nothing more re-

markable in this union than in any of the other transitions to

simplicity and uniformity and order which are produced by

potential growth.

And it may not be uninteresting to remark how much the

vertical part of the lower jaw in any herbivore reproduces of

the form of the quadrate bone in such an animal as a bird,

and how the inflection of the lower jaw in marsupials and

rodents reproduces such an inflexion as characterizes the os

articulare in birds and many reptiles. These growths in the

mammal may, I conceive, be potential repetitions. In the

mammal the pterygoid is moderately developed and is directed

downward posteriorly, and not backward as in birds and

lizards ; so that it does not actually meet the representative of

the quadrate bone; but the union is kept up by the ptery-

goideus muscle, attached from the outer inferior side of the

pterygoid to the inner side of the quadrate portion of the

lower jaw.

I am aware that Prof. Huxley has supposed that, contrary

to all analogy, the quadrate bone and os articulare enter the

mammalian cranium and become the malleus and incus.

After reading all that has been said for that doctrine, I can

see no evidence in its favour sufficiently strong to dissuade me

from stating my own view. If it has been important to con-

struct those bones out of pre-existing cranial elements, I would

suggest that Prof. Huxley might have taken the quadrato-

jugal and symplectic, which were available and would have

answered equally well. But I do not think any exigency of

theory can justify the creation of a new joint in the body by

imagining a convex articulation beneath the articular bone,

when there is nothing in the vertebrate province to suggest

that such an articulation might exist.

Such, divested of details, is the conception of the common

plan of the axial skeleton which, by the operation of the laws

of organic energy, may, I believe, call all skeletons into exis-

tence, extending them over the viscera like a pillow-case over

a pillow, till the animal is gradually but inevitably sheathed

in rings of bones. And thus it will be remarked that the pre-

existing soft animal would have no necessary correlation of

soft vital parts with its osseous sheath.

I touch with reluctance, because of its difficulties, on another

part of the skeleton, which seems as though only appended to

the vertebral column, already discussed by Prof. Owen, in his

40 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

treatise on limbs, and by others. Each limb consists of a

sequence of bones, of which the number of parts in each seg-

ment in most animals increases from above downward, and is

usually the same, part for part, in the fore limb and in the

hind limb. Thus in the first segment there is one bone, the

humerus or femur ; in the second segment two bones, the ulna

and radius or the tibia and fibula; in the third segment three

bones, in the proximal row of the carpals or tarsals; in the

fourth segment four bones, in the distal row of the carpus or

tarsus ; and in the fifth segment the five digits. Variations

occur in great number, but chiefly by suppression of parts;

and so true is the correspondence in general, that Professor

Humphrey offered an interpretation of the structure by sup-

posing that there were originally in each hmb five rays,

which in the humerus are blended into one, while in the pha-

langes they remain more frequently distinct.

It will be necessary to ask, what are these limbs, and in

obedience to what mechanical law are they where found, and

why do the fore and hind limbs correspond in their parts ?

But, besides the limbs, the skeleton possesses the arches

with which they articulate :—for the hind limb a pelvis, made

up of an ilium, ischium, and a pubis; and for the fore limb a

scapular arch consisting of a scapula and coracoid, and some-

times having associated with it a clavicle and interclavicle.

If we turn to comparative anatomy for an explanation of

the phenomena, in sharks and rays the pectoral and pelvic

regions will be found to be well developed, and Jong limbs are

attached to them which are already well segmented and limited

at the sides to fore limbs and hind limbs. In osseous fishes,

however, the fins represent, as a rule, more than two pairs,

and are often strongly developed down the back. So the first

difficulty is, why should there be but two pairs of limbs? 'To

that question, perhaps, an examination of a skeleton will fur-

nish an answer ; for the two arches will be seen to be at the

two ends of the primitive soft animal enclosed by the skeleton,

and at the two chief points of flexure of the skeleton—one

where the neck bends with the body, the other where the tail

bends with the body; and in those animals in which there is

little or no special flexure in one part more than another,

limbs are wanting, the potential tendency to the development

of limbs nevertheless notwithstanding. Now if we can dis-

cover why they are wanting, we obtain a clue to their law of

development.

In serpents the power expended in motion is distributed

equally along the whole body, and there is scarcely greater

pressure in one part than in another; so that its influence

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 41

upon growth is only seen in the great length of the ribs.

Now, if the body were stiffer in the middle, and flexible chiefly

in the neck and tail, then, instead of intermittent pressure

being distributed uniformly, it would be manifested chiefly at

the two extremities of the stiffer part, which, touching the

ground, would be lifted by the movements of the head and

tail. If, then, a large part of the pressure and tension which,

distributed over the body, elongate the ribs of Ophidians, were

accumulated in this or some such way (by movement of the

body) at these points, whatever osseous structures pre-existed

there would grow ; and potential growth would tend to make

the parts at the anterior end of the body correspond with those

at the posterior end. What parts, then, would there be exist-

ing in such places? Clearly some element of the abdominal

rib—elements, it may be presumed, which become the coracoid

bones and the ischia. As the ribs become segmented into a

number of parts in different animals, it is not easy to guess

how many were developed ; but as the facts of the case only

require two (coracoid and scapula, and ilium and ischium),

these may be presumed to be the second and third segments

of the rib. Now the consequence of setting up a special ten-

dency to grow in these elements can in no way interfere with the

growth of the original rib, which, being joined to these hemal

elements by overlap and by muscles, would, I suppose, slide

over the outside of these new growths, which would extend

inside of it. And I should regard the epipleuron as eventually

forming the clavicle and the pubis, while the suprascapular

is an effort of potential growth to reproduce the original rib

from which the arch-elementsthave become detached.

But how account for the limbs?~ Did they spring into ex-

istence ready formed, or grow gradually ? and, in either case,

how? I cannot but be impressed with the forked character of

the limb, dividing in its second segment, as reproducing the

forked character of the visceral arches of the cranium and of

the vertebre; and therefore I believe that, in the absence

of any other evidence of a distal osseous fork, we can

only look for the proximal element of a limb in the proximal

element of a rib. And so I conceive that the increased mus-

cular power of the pectoral or pelvic girdle might detach the

proximal part of the rib from its attachment with the vertebra

and draw it on to the already expanded hemal elements—and

that potential growth, such as reproduces the lizard’s tail and

the salamander’s legs, would cause its distal segments to be

developed anew at the distal end, although the proper distal

segments now gave attachment to the proximal end. With

the bone would necessarily follow the muscles ; and potentially

42 Mr. H. G. Seeley on the Origin

added segments would comprise both hard and soft parts. In

the absence of evidence, I can only throw out this idea as com-

pleting a conception of the skeleton as a whole. It explains

the origin of limbs simply as a modification of pre-existing

structures, without calling any new part into existence ; It

explains the harmonious segmentation of fore and hind limbs,

and the increase in number of bones in the successive distal

segments (as well as the primitive separation of the arches

from the vertebrae), which are the fundamental points of

structure in a limb. And no idea of epigenesis from the arches,

as suggested by Professor Owen, could justify either one

condition or the other. The only other obvious origin for the

limbs is by potential growth repeating the structure of the

jaws with their segments upon each of the arches, first on the

pectoral and afterwards on the pelvic arch, which is simple

and so far a preferable view. And if the limbs were regarded

as potential jaws, the fact that there are thus two modified

appendages to the body may explain why the three segments

of the brain-case have only one functionally developed hemal

arch, the other two, by potential growth, bemg removed to

the pectoral and pelvic arches.

This conception of the skeleton as originating in a single

ossification, and attaining all its complexity by growth in a

definite direction, which is sustained by laws coextensive with

the universe, and modified in the limbs by the circumstances

of existence, has a unity of plan, and gives a reason for every

variation which it displays. And if we believe that animals

have been changed in form and stature by the continuous

operation of those laws of energy which, by changing the

minutie of every thing that cognizance extends to, preserves

for them uniformity, order, and progress, then such small va-

riations from this common plan as give the distinctive marks

to each group of animals are themselves but an evidence of the

larger range of those laws which give the animal its unity and

one harmonious government with all things. Because this

unity is mcontestable, I believe in this change as a condition of

its stability ; but whether it is named creation or whether it is

named evolution, no name can extinguish the unbounded

harmony of the relations which it exhibits, or the unvarying

order in the changes to which names are but paths, or can

part a knowledge of the universe in its government from an

unutterable and reverent confidence. For to me it indicates,

beyond laws and their consequences, what, judged by human

standards, is Intelligence, of which laws in their working are

manifestations. If, then, an attempt is made to explain the

plans of animal life, it is in faith, born of science, that they

of the Vertebrate Skeleton. 43

are products of divine law, and in a conviction of duty to seek

out its working in all ways.

The scheme of the skeleton now sketched is what may be

named a potential skeleton ; and whatever value it has is in

the insight it gives into the tana to each other of the parts

of skeletons and the importance of resemblances between

similar parts in different skeletons as evidence of genetic rela-

tion. All the types of vertebrate animals are based upon this

general plan, and each differs from the other m some compa-

ratively slight details of potential growth; and there is no-

thing peculiar i in the genera eee to onal of these minor

types except a varying growth, or suppression of growth, or

combinations of erowths: in the different bones of the body :

such modifications are the kinetic skeleton. If we find simili-

tudes between bones when they are compared together, the

comparison becomes meaningless and unprofitable unless we

believe the similitudes to be consequences of laws which can

be traced in their effects. The idea of affinity expresses faith

in such laws by teaching that the structural resemblances be-

tween animals are a consequence and evidence of an original

community of plan now only seen in fragments. And an

original common plan for vertebrates, a potential skeleton,

implies that the physical laws of nature producing growth

have upon their simpler product acted in differing ways, so

that the energy of the type became manifest in the divergence

of special different parts which make the plans of the several

vertebrate classes.

Hence the practical question, affecting all comparative

study, after the mind has cancelled whatever osteological

structures are variable in the type (and therefore demonstrabl

kinetic), is to discover in what direction each order has di-

verged from the common plan, and in what way this diversity

obscures or renders clear its affinities with the other orders.

To put a special case :—in what direction. relatively to the

vertebrate common plan is the osteology of a tortoise deve-

loped ? and how far from this osteology can we inter a com-

munity of divergence between the tortoise and all other or

any other known animals? Those points of divergence in the

potential skeleton would be the osteological affinities of an

animal, and, determined for a number of leaders types, would

eaaplen us to predicate within approximate limits the characters

of many extinct orders of which the existence is at present

hardly suspected.

To examine such a problem, it is necessary to be familiar

with the facts which are factors in it; and so to these we

must next turn.

44 On the Origin of the Vertebrate Skeleton.

The correspondence of parts is frequently close between

animals which would not be placed by classifiers in the same

natural group; so that, as animals can only have diverged in

many different directions, or in directions which are approxi-

mately parallel, it is impossible not to believe that the corre-

spondence is the evidence of some kind of parallel relation

between the groups, which may, of course, be a parallel func-

tion kinetically modifying different common plans, or parallel

plans kinetically modified by different functions. Hach verte-

brate class consists of orders, but if these are arranged in

sequence of classificational semblance, their bones do not

graduate from one group into another: the lowest mammal

does not graduate into the highest bird, nor is there a sequence

from the bird down to the reptile. Classifiers, however, have

always agreed that there is something unnatural in the best

grouping “according to a logical system, because it removes

from near association animals which have real affinity with

each other. Nor can this be surprising, when we remember

that by a class of animals is practically understood a certain

horizon or grade of complexity of soft structures. So that if

the organization of the bird, for instance, has any relation of

affinity with mammal or reptile, the relation must be with

some specified order of reptile or mammal, and must be due

to their all having diverged in the same direction from the

common plan, all being the consequence of a line of variation

which has preserved parts of the skeleton unaltered for them

all, while the soft parts have become more and more complex,

in such ways that the ordinal stem has been divided at inter-

vals into parts which are successively named, it may be, fish,

reptile, and bird. If there is foundation for such a view, ‘there

can be no such close osteolo-

gical resemblance between the

different natural groups of ani-

mals upon the same horizon of

organization as there must be

between some animals upon

that horizon and some animals

upon another horizon. This

proposition may be exempli-

fied by a diagram of a hand,

where there may be supposed to

be five stems, springing from

a common plan, and it might

be better exemplified by taking

the entire limb as a type, w here the humerus would stand for

the common plan. Such a diagram expresses the idea that

_ Bird.

Reptile.

Fish.

\ common

One ]

A ve

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. 45

the resemblance between the different groups of reptiles, for

instance, is a correspondence of homologous parts, and no

evidence of the orders having had an immediate parentage in

common. Such a doctrine invites investigation. Here T can

but state it, and try to show hereafter in what way such por-

tions of it as practically concern the student of reptile bones

may be profitably studied.

IV’ —Proposed Name for the Sponge-animal, viz. “ Spongo-

zoon ;” also on the Ori. ‘agin of Thread-cells in the Spongiade.

By I. J. Carter, F'.R.S. &e.

As it has now been. satisfactorily determined that the Spon-

ciade are animals and not plants, and the form of the animal

which produces them has also been determined, it becomes

necessary to give that form a specific name, and to define the

animal, in order that henceforth both may not only be used

by the zoologist, but by the comparative anatomist, whose

lectures without such additions now cannot be considered

complete, the time having passed for the comparative anato-

mist and the botanist to dispute respecting the kingdom to

which this class of beings may belong.:

The name that [ would propose for this purpose is ‘ spon-

gozoon,” which is only the Greek rendering of “ sponge-

animal,” but retaining “ sponge” for the root will ever ally it

to the ’Spongiade, and thus aid the memory by associations

which any other term differently compounded would not do.

Spongozoon, or the sponge-animal, then, I first poimted out

in Spongilla, in 1857 (Annals, vol. xx. p. 28, pl. 1. fig. 4),

wherein it is shown that it is a granuliferous polymorphic

body possessing a nucleus and one or more contracting vesi-

cles (p. 30), that it exists in communities of a spherical form

with a common circular aperture (figs. 2,3, 5), in countless

numbers, in the sarcode of the sponge (fig. 1), and that it is

capable of taking into its body crude material and of dis-

charging the undigested portions after the manner of Ameba ;

lastly, that the circular aperture opens and closes itself as

required.

Then, in 1859 (Annals, vol. iii. p. 14, pl. 1. fig. 12), the

same monociliated body is described and figured with two

ear- or spine-like points of its sarcode, one on each side the

cilium, which, I might also add, now stands in my journal as

it was ‘fio ured Aug. 12, 1854, 1 although not published until

1859 ; and that I had been previously acquainted with the

existence of the spines may be seen by the following passage

in the paper to which I have last referred, viz. :—“ But there

4G Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon.

is one [monociliated body] in particular, which has two spines

or ear-like points projecting backwards, one on each side of

the root of the cilium (pl. 1. fig. 12), and this was the kind

which I first discovered and described; but, confounding it

with cells not possessing these spines (because I then thought

the spines might be accidental prolongations of the sarcode),

I did not give it this character.”

That I might have been right in this conjecture, the poly-

morphic nature of the whole of this body will presently show.

In June 1866, Prof. James-Clark read a paper before the

Boston Natural-History Society “ On the Spongie ciliate as

Infusoria flagellata, &c.” (Mem. vol. i. pt. 8, reprinted in

Annals, Feb. 1868), in which (p. 21, footnote) he conceives

that the two spines or ear-like points represent the lines en

profile of a‘ membranous cylindrical collar’? which he had

observed to exist round the cilium of the monociliated cell in

Leucosolenia botryoides, of which most satisfactory delineations

are given in his plate 1. figs. 41-44, together with that of

several species, fluviatile and marine, of similar aniinals that

live independently in groups or singly, sessile and pedicelled,

respectively, apart from the sponge altogether. In the latter

Prof. James-Clark most sagaciously demonstrates the exist-

ence also of this ‘‘ membranous collar ’’—observations which

have been further confirmed as satisfactorily by Mr. Kent’s

descriptions and delineations of several of the same kind of

Infusoria that he found in a pond at Stoke-Newington, in the

neighbourhood of London (Monthly Microscop. Journal for

Dec. 1871, p. 261, pl. cv.).

Returning, however, to Prof. James-Clark’s “ footnote,” he

adds, “ that Carter did not always find these ‘ two spines,’ may

be explained by the fact that the membranous collar, as | am

inclined to believe the ‘spines’ to be, was retracted, since I

have frequently observed this to happen in the case of Leuco-

solenia when it was disturbed.”

That is as much as to say that the “ collar” is polymorphic ;

and herein is the explanation of what I have above quoted

from my paper of 1859, viz. that “I then thought the

spines might be accidental prolongations of the sarcode,’”’—

a fact which is still further confirmed by my paper of 1871

(Annals, vol. vii. pl. 2. figs. 17 & 18), wherein it is not only

stated that every part of the sponge-animal is polymorphic, but

the “collar” itself in the figures mentioned may be observed to

be transformed into two pseudopodial tentaculiform processes

for seizing particles of food, like those of an Actinophrys or of

an Acineta.

Hence the “ collar ”’

may be cup-like around the base of the

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. 47

cilium, transformed into pseudopodial prolongations, or, as

Prof. James-Clark has stated, ‘ retracted’ altogether.

In 1871 (Annals, . c. pl. 1. ‘flow. 15, 16, &c.) [not only con-

firmed Prof. James-Clark’s observations respecting the exist-

ence of the “collar,” but found that in the spongozoon of

Grantia compressa it was supported on a neck-like projection,

to which I gave the name of ‘rostrum.’ Moreover it was

also proved, “by the use of indigo-solution, that the spongozoa

of this sponge took in crude particles of this substance, while

similar monociliated bodies similarly grouped were also ob-

served in the marine siliceous sponges; to which I can add

one of the horny species par excellence, viz. an Aplysina

(Nardo & Schmidt), now belonging to the British Museum,

but which Mr. Kent lately found while dredging for sponges

on board the yacht ‘ Norna,’ in Vigo Bay.

Thus having found spongozoa in all the three divisions of

the Spongiade, viz. in the Keratospongiz, the Siliceospongie,

and the Calcispongiz, similar in form and similarly grouped,

we may reasonably infer that the spongozoon exists as such,

perhaps more or less modified, throughout the whole of the

Spongiade, and therefore is the animal which constructs the

sponges generally

In Siliman’s Journal for Dec. 1871 (reprinted in Annals,

vol. ix. p. 71, pl. 11) Prof. James-Clark confirms, so far as his

observations go, the principal points of my description and

figures of the “‘ Ultimate Structure of Spongilla,” given in the

‘Annals’ of 1857 (7. c.), to which I have alluded in the first

part of this communication.

But at p. 76 (Annals, /. c.), where Prof. James-Clark states

that the groups of “ monad cephalids”’ (our spongozoa) are

“not cells; they are the heads of a polycephalic individual,

and consequently correspond functionally to the tentaculated

heads of polypi,” I cannot agree with him, inasmuch as

they appear to me to be much more analogous to the groups

of Ascidians in the gelatinous structure of a Compound Tuni-

cated animal, where the little colony is divided up into

groups, furnished respectively with a common cloacal orifice

(Annals, vol. vin. pl. 2. fig.41). Here I might add that some

of Schmidt’s Halisarcine are so like the Compound Tunicata,

that his HZ. guttula appears to me to be one of the latter, and

no sponge at all. I speak, of course, from the actual exami-

nation of his specimen in spirit at the British Museum in

connexion with his published description.

Further, Prof. James-Clark does not admit the existence of

a distinct cell round the groups of spongozoa, as I originally

described and figured them as a whole under the name of

48 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon.

‘‘ ampullaceous sac” (Annals, 1857, 7. c.), but that the groups

are situated in excavations of what I termed, in 1849, the

“intercellular substance ” (that is, in “‘ mere cavities,” having

“no lining wall,” Annals, 1872, /.c. p. 76), but opening into

the chamber which I have delineated between the “ investing

membrane” and the “ parenchyma” (fig. 1, 1857, /. c.), Pro-

fessor James-Clark’s “ cytoblastemic mass.’

All that I can state in reply to this is, that I have figured

faithfully (7. c.) what appeared to me to be the rim of a circular

opening in material belonging to the spherical group of spon-

gozoa. Furthermore, in my journal, under date “ 26th March

1857,” stands a figure of one of these spherical groups of

spongozoa which I well remember to have observed in

the watch-glass by dtse/f, with the cilia still vibrating in its

interior and the aperture closed, after that state had arrived

when, as I have described (p. 29, /. c.), the whole of the soft

parts of the young Spongilla, apparently from starvation,

leave the spicular structure and become dispersed about the

watch-glass.

That I did not figure this cell I also well remember to have

arisen from diffidence on account of the great number of new

and startling facts that were then revealed to me.

Of this being fact, [now have no longer any doubt; and

thus we had an “ampullaceous sac” entirely isolated from

the parenchyma (“cytoblastemic mass,” Prof. James-Clark)

of the sponge, that is, by itself in the watch-glass.

With no aperture, it is true; but then we know that this

can be closed or opened as required: yet it still retained the

globular form; and hence the question then comes, whether

this globular form was retained by an intercellular substance

or sarcode uniting the spongozoa together, or whether this

union arose from an amalgamation of the polymorphic sarcode

of which their bodies are respectively composed. I incline to

the former; and this is what I should designate as the ‘ am-

pullaceous sac.”

But here we arrive at a point which is most perplexing, if

it be not almost entirely beyond our powers to decide,—viz.

that state in which the living material assumes forms so deli-

cate and so fugitive that we are inclined to deny to them

characters even in a remote degree of that solidity and per-

manence which by comparative coarseness becomes so evident

to our senses in the more advanced developments of ordinary

tissues.

In short, are we to deny the existence of a cell of inter-

cellular substance binding the whole of the spongozoa into a

spherical community, or not? And if so, where is the proof

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Spongozoon. | 49

that this spherical form is maintained by the spongozoa

uniting together without the intervention of this substance ?

This brings me to another point which I wish particularly

here to clear up.

In Prof. James-Clark’s footnote (Annals, Jan. 1872, p.76) it is

stated that ‘he [Carter] has since (viz. in the Annals of 1859,

i. c.) revoked that view and adopted another. We believe him

to be, excepting the inferred ‘ampullaceous sac,’ in the main

right in his first interpretation ’”—that is, of 1857.

Had Prof. James-Clark chanced to have looked on to my

“Notes and Corrections” (Annals, 1861, vol. viii. p. 290),

two years afterwards, he would there have seen that which he

himself has stated, viz. that I myself then felt right in my

interpretations of 1857.

Time and subsequent observation have explained how all

this revoking occurred. The whole has arisen from the poly-

morphic ever-changing nature of the soft parts of the sponge.

What I saw at first was changed upon my second observa-

tions ; and I saw in the third set again what I had proclaimed

in the first and denied in the second. In the higher develop-

ments there is no dispute as to the nature of structures, because

they are permanent and evident; but in the ever-changing

sarcode phenomena are exhibited which certainly, in our pre-

sent state of knowledge, are inexplicable; and the very dif-

ference of opinion respecting them to which I have above

alluded proves at once that we have as yet no certain data:

to go upon for any assertions respecting them. What is a

mass of sarcode at one moment may be at another in the form

of a membrane so delicate as almost to be inappreciable by

our senses, and at a third reappear in the form of pseudopodial

prolongations. Nay, in dthalium the sarcode may be seen

to divide into separate portions and reunite into one mass,

apparently as intimately as drops of water.

Finally, I have to describe Spongozoon.

It may be defined to be a spherical polymorphic body or

cell, bearing on one part of its circumference an oblong cylin-

drical neck-like process, called the rostrum, which supports a

delicate cup-like collar, from the centre of which proceeds a

long cilium. Internally it contains granular plasma, in which

are imbedded a nucleus and one or more contracting vesicles.

It possesses the power of taking in crude material for food,

and exists in spherical or globular communities imbedded in

countless numbers in the sarcodal lining of the areolar cavities

of the sponge. Each of these spherical communities is pro-

vided with a circular contractile opening on the surtace,

through which the particles of food enter, to be further taken

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 4

50 On Parasitic Polypes and Thread-cells in Sponges.

in by the monociliated bodies which, in juxtaposition, line the

interior and, projecting their cilia inwards, keep up a rapid

undulating vibration towards the centre of this hollow sphere.

The undigested parts of their food may be seen to pass into the

excretory canals, and, through them, to be finally ejected at the

vents on the surface; but whether it passes through their

bodies after the manner of Ameba, or has a distinct channel

appropriated for this purpose, has yet to be determined.

Parasitic Polypes and Thread-cells in the Parenchyma of a

Sponge.

In a specimen, about two inches long, of a thick digito-

lobulate branched Reniera, tubulate, opening by a large vent

at the end of each lobe, and having one form of spicule only,

viz. thin, curved, acerate, said to be of a “pale red colour

when alive,” and found in “ Bon Bay,” in “ 25-65 faths.,”

just sent to me by Prof. Wyville Thomson, I have found the

parenchyma interiorly to be charged with thread-cells of an

ovoid form, almost elliptical, and averaging 3-6000ths of an

inch long by 2-6000ths of an inch broad—in short, very

similar to, if not exactly like, that delineated by Dr. T. Eimer

(Schultze’s Archiv fiir mikroscop. Anatom. vol. i. pt. 2,

fig. 1, A, p. 283).

Not having found these cells in the dermal part of this

sponge, nor in the surface-layer of the great tubular vents,

analogous to their position in the polypes &c., but, on the

contrary, in the interior of the parenchymatous structure of

the sponge, I began to think that they could not belong to it;

so I placed a portion in water and examined it with one-inch

focus, when they were observed to come from minute delicate

polypes, seated in dilated cavities, apparently of the excretory

canals, the disk or head of each polype averaging 100th of an

inch in diameter, and supported on a short neck, which ended

in a little saccular prolongation that was sunk into the paren-

chyma or sarcode of the sponge, and charged, in its walls

as welf as tentacles, with thread-cells so numerous that they

appeared to exceed in bulk the rest of the polype, as may be

seen by picking out one on the point of a needle, and putting

it under a higher power.

This is the first instance, I think, in which a parasitic

polype has been discovered in the znterior of the substance of

a sponge; and when it is remembered that a microscopic

power with delicate manipulation under water is required for

their detection, it may perhaps be assumed that this is how

these polypes escaped Dr. Kimer’s notice, and may also explain

Dr. H. Burmeister on hi's so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. 51

how he found thread-cells in Rentera fibulata and Desmacella

vagabunda, seemg that many thousands of microscopical ex-

aminations of the Spongiade have been made by different

naturalists up to this time without their observation.

The Renierinz are especially subject to surface polype

parasites, and none more so, perhaps, than Reniera fibulata, Sdt.,

all over the world. (This species 1s characterized by two forms

of spicules, viz. (1) acerate, curved, smooth, large, and (2) C- &

S-shaped, minute.) But I have never before found a parasitic

polype in the interior of a Hendera or any other sponge, and

never any thread-cells where there were no parasitic polypes

to originate them. Nor should I have been able to detect

them now but for the process mentioned.

There is also another jar sent me by Prof. W. Thomson, in

which there is a portion of the same sponge with three other

small fragments of as many species undescribed; but this is

labelled “‘ Adventure Bank, 92 faths.”

“Bon Bay” is on the African coast, opposite Cape Sparti-

vento (Sardinia); and “‘ Adventure Bank”? is the shoal between

Tunis and Sicily.

Prof. Thomson also adds the following interesting informa-

tion respecting thread-cells, in a note just received :-—

“'Thread-cells are abundant in every thing which feeds upon

Ceelenterates of any kind, young or mature, whether feeding

by cilia or by the mouth. I have found the thread-cells of

several Hydroids apparently living in the skin of a Synapta;

and you can always find plenty of them in Amphidetus. Of

course, if you find a parasitic polype in the sponge, there is no

further difficulty ; but that does not seem necessary. Thread-

cells appear to be able to live, for a time at least, an indepen-

dent life in foreign quarters.”

June 17, 1872.

V.—On my so-called Globiocephalus Grayi.

By Dr. HerMANN BuRMEISTER.

Iv the new ‘ Journal de Zoologie,’ the editor, Prof. Paul Ger-

vais, of Paris, has noticed (tome i. p. 68) the descriptions of

Cetacea published by myself in the ‘ Anales del Museo Publico

de Buenos Aires,’ tome 1. p. 367 et seqqg., and has hinted, with

good reason, that the animal described there as Globiocephalus

Gray? is not a Globiocephalus, but a Pseudorca, nearly allied

to, if not identical with, Ps. crassidens of Prof. Reinhardt

(Overs. Kong]. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl. 1862, p. 103

et seqq.), comparing my figures given on pl. 21 of es ‘Anales’

| 4

52 Dr. H. Burmeister on his so-called Globiocephalus Grayi.

with those of the ‘ Ostéogr. d. Cétacés,’ pl. 50, published by

himself two years ago.

As the sixth part of my ‘Anales,’ wherein is to be found the

description of Globiocephalus Grayt, was published in the year

1869*, I could not compare the excellent figures of the ‘Ostéo-

graphie’ during the elaboration of my treatise, because the part

of M. Gervais’s work alluded to did not reach Buenos Ayres

until Sept. 1870. Ihadat hand no other scientific works than

Cuvier’s ‘ Ossemens Fossiles’ and Gray’s ‘ Catalogue of Seals

and Whales,’ as I have already said in the ‘ Anales,’ p. 369.

Even Prof. Reinhardt’s extended description was not known

to me until after the printing of my ‘ Anales.’ Occupied

with the elaboration of the following parts, I could not find

time to compare my previous labours with the new publi-

cations; and although, in Sept. 1870, I had seen the cited

figures of M. Gervais, and recognized my error, I could not at

once undertake the careful comparison of them with my own,

as I was so much engaged with other labours which it was

necessary, for various reasons, to complete. But now the

criticism of M. Gervais has obliged me to do what I have

hitherto neglected, to compare the cranium of G'lobiocephalus

Grayt in our museum with the figures of his work, and to

publish the results of this comparison.

From my new examination there can be no doubt that my

Globiocephalus is a true Pseudorca; but I am also convinced

that the species from Buenos Ayres is not identical with Ps,

crasstdens, but anew one, more nearly allied to Ps. meridionalis,

Flower (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1864), than to the species of the Euro-

pean seas. My opinion is founded on the following reasons :—

1. The whole skull is narrower before than that of Ps.

crassidens, and resembles more in the general figure that of

Ps. meridionalis, with the exception of the tip of the muzzle,

which is somewhat broader in my skull, and more nearly

allied in its form to that of Ps. crassidens.

2. The right intermaxillary bone is much longer posteriorly

than the left, surrounding there the outside of the nasal bone,

nearly in the same manner as in Gervais’s fig. 1. pl. 50. This

character is not well indicated in my fig. 3. pl. 21, because the

tip of the ght intermaxillary bone of my skull has been

broken off, which I had not noticed before I saw the figures

in the ‘ Ostéographie.’

3. The two small faces of the maxillary bones, immediately

before the nostrils, are of the same unequal size as in Ps. me-

ridionalis, the right bemg larger and broader than the left.

In Ps, crassidens both are smaller and of nearly equal size.

* The copies of this part of my ‘ Anales’ were sent from here to London

Oct. 25, 1869, and to Paris Noy, 12, 1869, by the post-steamers.

Dr. H. Burmeister on his so-called Globiocephalus Grayi. 53

4, The nasal bones are of very different form, without the

high knob behind, but each with a deep diagonal furrow,

which divides them into two faces.

5. The tip of the united parietal bones, with a prolon-

gation going in between the frontals, is not poimted as in Ps.

crassidens, but broad and truncate as in Ps. mertdionalis.

6. Both the upper and the under jaw have the same num-

ber of nine teeth, of which the first in the upper jaw is much

smaller than the others, but the last of equal size with the

preceding ones. This character does not agree with the other

species ; both have one tooth more in the under jaw than in

the upper jaw. Ps. crassidens has eight teeth above and nine

below, and Ps. meridionalis nine above and ten below, the

first of the upper jaw of this species being also much smaller

than the following ones.

This difference seems to me to be of great importance, and

alone sufficient to prove the distinctness of my species.

7. The vomer is visible between the upper maxillary bones

in my skull, but not visible in Ps. meridionalis.

8. At least the form of the teeth is entirely different from

that in both the previously known species; neither of them

has the teeth so thick, short, and worn as my species from the

Patagonian coast.

For all these reasons I believe I am quite justified in sepa-

rating this animal as a distinct and new species from Ps. cras-

sidens and Ps. meridionalis, naming it now

Pseudorca Grayt.

As [ have given a comparative description of the skull in

the ‘ Anales,’ and also added the measurements (p. 373) on

the metrical scale, I will not here repeat the same, but add

only the principal measurements of the skulls of the three

species in English inches, in the same manner as they are

given by Gray in his ‘ Catalogue of Seals and Whales,’ pp. 290

& 294.

Ps. meridionalis.

Pseudorca Ps.

crassidens.| | sté«dS:«CG@ ray.

Adult. Young.

Bmtmedlene ths Ac sas cs Sky 2 23-24 237 | 204,| 26

Dhengthvol mosey. sia: oka ls s- WAS ey LS 93 | .12

Length of teeth-line ........ 10 94 S21 ete

Length of lower jaw ........ 21 19 164 | 21

Breadthgat Motch 1. xe wise « 84 ie 64 9

Breadth at middle of beak.... 8 53 on 8

Breadth of intermaxillaries .. 54 44 33 oF

54 Dr. J. E. Gray on Emys nigra from. Upper California.

These measurements prove that the cranial part of the skull

is relatively somewhat larger in Ps. Grayt than in Ps, crassi-

dens, and that the whole animal may have been consequently

stronger and stouter than the European species, exceeding the

Australian one still more in both qualities.

The description and figures of the swimming Delphinide,

seen by myself in the Atlantic Ocean and published in my

‘ Anales,’ p. 368, do not belong to the Pseudorca Gray?, as I

supposed, but to a true Globiocephalus, which cannot be deter-

mined exactly without further observations.

Buenos Ayres, April 24, 1872.

VI.—On Emys nigra from Upper California.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

mys nigra of Hallowell is said to be the same as Emys

marmorata of Baird and Girard, which Agassiz, in his great

work on the Natural History of the United States (of which

only the general observations and the tortoises have appeared),

refers to the genus Actinemys, and figures the young of the

species ; and on his authority (for I have never been able to

see the species) I have arranged it under Ceoclemmys (see

Cat. Shield Reptiles, Suppl. p: 27).

In Hallowell’s Report on the Reptiles colleeted in the

Survey for the Railroad from the Mississippi to the Pacific

Ocean, 1859 (a work which I had not previously consulted),

he describes and figures Emys nigra, which he says is very

abundant in Posa Creek, northern part of Upper California.

The figure represents a very depressed water-Hmys, with a

dark narrow band across the eye, broad webbed feet, with

acute elongated claws. The head appears to be covered with

a uniform skin, not divided into symmetrical plates. The

limbs and tail are marked with large black spots; and the

upper part of the head and neck is blackish, with numerous

small yellow spots.

The skin of the head and limbs more resembles that of the

true Terrapins than any other American species I know; and

it would be very interesting to know the form of the jaws. It

certainly is a purely aquatic tortoise, and has nothing to do

with the more terrestrial tortoises of America forming the

genus Geoclemmys or Actinemys.

Mr. Hallowell’s figure is very like a specimen that I ob-

tained at Nantes, and which I deseribed and figured as Hmys

olivacea in the ‘Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ p. 30, t. 12 ¢,

and which is named Redamia olivacea in the Supplement to

that Catalogue, p. 35.

M. F. Plateau on the Centre of Gravity in Insects. 55

The specimen only differs from Mr. Hallowell’s figure in

being marked with brown lines beneath, and in having more

elongate claws ; and I strongly suspect that they are both the

same species.

VII.— Experimental Researches upon the Position of the Centre

of Gravity in Insects. By Friix PLATEAU*.

TuE study of the conditions of equilibrium of living crea-

tures, I need scarcely say, is only possible when we know in

each of them the situation of the centre of gravity. Now that

the knowledge of the mechanics of the Articulata has made

considerable progress, thanks to the employment of processes

of investigation borrowed from physics, it seemed to me that

it would be really useful to describe an easy method of inves-

tigating the centre of gravity of the Articulata, and to give an

account of the results which its application to insects has en-

abled me to obtain.

Unfortunately I cannot, in a mere summary, give a descrip-

tion of the instrument I have employed. A mere short de-

scription without a figure is of necessity obscure and of no use

at all. I shall only say that this instrument nearly reproduces,,.

on a small scale and with some improvements, that which was

invented by Borelli to determine the position of the centre of

gravity in man. As to the results of my experiments, I must

likewise refrain from giving them under the form which they

take in my memoir—that is to say, in the shape of a consider-

able number of figures brought together in several tables. I

shall therefore confine myself to the indication of the general

conclusions which I have thought I might deduce from them,

supporting these, where necessary, by a few examples.

1. The centre of gravity of insects is situated in the vertical

median plane which passes through the longitudinal axis of

the body.

2. It occupies a very nearly identical position in insects of

the same species and of the same sex in the same attitude.

3. It is rarely that the external form of the body allows us

to determine, without experiment, the exact position of the

centre of gravity. I shall cite, as an example, the results

furnished by the family of the Odonata. All its representa-

tives have nearly the same external aspect ; and yet, notwith-

standing this quasi-identity of structure, I have found the

* Bibliothéque Universelle: Archives des Sciences Physiques et Na-

turelles, tome xliii. 1872, from an abstract communicated by the author.

56 . M. F. Plateau on the Position of

following differences in the relative positions of the centre of

gravity :—

Agrion puella 9. First third of the third abdominal seg-

ment.

Agrion sanguinea. Posterior margin of the second abdo-

minal segment.

Libellula conspurcata 9. Posterior margin of the meta-

thorax.

Lnbellula vulgata 2. Furrow between thorax and abdomen.

Cordulia metallica 9. Posterior margin of the metathorax.

Lischna grandis 9. Middle of the second abdominal seg-

ment.

4. The centre of gravity does not occupy the same position

in the two sexes of the same species; it is sometimes more

and sometimes less backward in the females than in the males,

and its situation depends upon the relations existing between

the various dimensions of the individuals.

It might have been supposed that the centre of gravity was

always situated further back in the females, the abdomen of

which is generally more voluminous than that of the males.

I have observed the opposite condition in the females of

Oryctes nasicornis, Libellula vulgata, and Agrion puella.

5. During the metamorphosis of the larva into the perfect

insect, the relative centre of gravity approaches the head; the

absolute centre of gravity, on the contrary, departs from it*.

This apparent contradiction is easily explained. The tho-

rax.of larve is generally very much reduced and the segments

of the abdomen numerous. The centre of gravity therefore

falls imevitably in an abdominal segment. In the perfect

msect the thorax has acquired considerable dimensions, and

the number of abdominal segments has diminished. The

thorax, thus being more prolonged posteriorly, has advanced,

im a manner, to meet the centre of gravity, which remains

plainly in the median region of the body; and the abdomen

* In my memoir I have given the name of the relative position of the

centre of gravity to its position with relation to some one of the parts of

the body (segment, coxa, &c.), and that of the absolute position of the

centre of gravity to the number which is obtained by calculating the

relation between the distance from the centre of gravity to the posterior

cee of the body and the total length of the animal. The quotients

0:50, 0°67, for example, obtained in this manner, signify that the distance

from the centre of gravity to the posterior extremity is five tenths or sixty-

seven hundredths of the length of the body. They show at once, and

independently of the form and extent of the segments, whether the centre

of gravity is at the middle of the insect, more approximated t® the head,

or nearer to the anal orifice.

the Centre of Gravity in Insects. oT

becoming shortened, the distance from its extremity to the

point in question diminishes.

6. In standing, the centre of gravity is placed at the base

of the abdomen, or in the posterior part of the thorax, and

usually at the middle of the length of the body.

_ 7. In walking, the centre of gravity of an insect is con-

stantly displaced around a mean position, but by too small an

amount to be capable of measurement.

In fact, if we make experiments by means of Saltatorial

Orthoptera (locusts or grasshoppers), we find that the move-

ments of their enormous posterior limbs induce changes in the

situation of the centre of gravity; but these changes being

very slight, we arrive at the conclusion that it would be im-

possible to measure them in ordinary insects.

8. We do not detect any displacement of the centre of

gravity when an insect passes from the position of repose to

that of flight, except in those species in which the wings are

decumbent or crossed upon the back in a state of repose. The

displacement is horizontal and from behind forward. For

example, this displacement is as follows, in the following

species :-—

Dytiscus dimidiatus 0°045 of the total length of the body.

Hydrophilus piceus 0028

Melolontha vulgaris ¢ 0°053

Notonecta glauca . . . 0°032

Locusta viridissima. . 0°054

Vespa vulgaris . . . . 0°023 + 93

Plusia gamma ... . 0°025 . ”

Eristalis tenax . . . . 0°037

”? ?

9. During active flight the centre of gravity oscillates con-

tinually around a mean position which answers to the moments

when the extremities of the wings are at the point of crossing

of the figure-of-8 curve which they describe in the air.

10. In aquatic insects the centre of gravity 1s nearer to the

lower than to the upper surface of the body.

11. During natation the movements of the oar-like posterior

legs cause oscillations of the centre of gravity around a mean

position, which answers to the situation of the natatory feet

at the middle of their course. These oscillations of the centre

of gravity induce a continual balancing of the body upon a

transverse axis passing through the mean centre of gravity,

and cause it, consequently, to traverse a slightly undulated

path.

58 Dr. J. S. Bowerbank on Mr. Carter's Paper

VIII.— Observations on Mr. Carter's paper “ On two new

Sponges from the Antarctic Sea, and on a new Species of

Tethya from Shetland ; together with Observations on the

Reproduction of Sponges commencing from Zygosis of the

Sponge-animal.” By J.S. BowerBAnNK, LL.D., F.R.S.,&e.

Mr. Carter’s frank and straightforward, though not very

courteous style of criticism, emboldens me to adopt a like

free-and-easy style in making a few observations on the sub-

jects of his paper published in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of

Natural History,’ No. 54, June 1872. Let me ask him, then,

why he designates his proposed new genus Rossella, without

giving us the slightest idea of its generic characters, as the

author himself states, p. 415, “ All that I have to offer re-

_specting this sponge is the description of two forms of spi-

cules ;”” and these organs are essentially specific characters.

If he had described these spicula without going to the extre-

mity of founding a new genus and species to account for them,

it would, I think, have been quite sufficient for all scientific

purposes. ‘The term Rossedla does not seem to be a happy one,

and would certainly have been perfectly imcomprehensible

without his reference to Ross. In the first place we have

already two genera named Lossia, one of birds and one of mol-

lusca ; so that a third founded on the same name appears to be

rather superfluous; and, as constructed by the author, it is

very possible that our French friends would understand the

genus, from its name, as having been founded in honour of

Rossel, the eminent communist who was summarily disposed

of some time since by the military tribunals of Paris.

Tethya antarctica, Carter.

The specific characters of the sponge (upon which its whole

history, both actual and imaginary, is based) are given from

a single specimen of a gemmule apparently somewhat dis-

torted ; but this distortion gives the author an imaginary basal

anchoring character, which, however, is quite a new habit

among the Tethec in their adult and natural condition. The

supposed new species is illustrated in a diagrammatic series of

dots and lines, which may afford effective recollections to the

author, but will certainly serve any other purpose rather than

that of leading future students to the identification of the

species, which, I have a strong idea, is, in reality, Tethea

simillima, from the South Sea, in the museum of the Royal

College of Surgeons, and registered in the catalogue of

“Contents of the Museum,” part i. 1860, p. 128, B. 176,

“from Tongatabue ;” and he will see, in the last paragraph,

on Sponges from the Antarctic Sea and from Shetland. 59

p- 148, vol. i. of ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiadex,’ that I

have stated that that species has the same description of gem-

mule as the larger of the two described as belonging to 7.

cranium, but that the smaller and more simple ones which

accompany the large one in that species are not present in

the college specimen of 7. simillima. A difference in the

amount of the projection of the spicula beyond the margins of

some parts of the object prepared for microscopical observa-

tion, as represented by Mr. Carter in his pl. xx. fig. 2, is

very likely to be caused by the process of preparation for ex-

amination. In the natural condition, as represented in the

gemmules of 7. craniwm, in ‘ Mon. Brit. Spongiade,’ pl. xxv.

tig. 344, they do not appear beyond the external membrane of

the gemmule. ‘These facts are all stated in p. 147 of vol. i.

of my work, and might have been readily verified by Mr.

Carter from the specimens of 7. cranium in the British

Museum, had he taken the trouble to carefully examine

them. ‘The fact of their not appearing beyond the surface of

the gemmule militates strongly against Mr. Carter’s imaginary

base with its anchoring spicula; and neither in the adult state

of the specimens of 7. simillima, nor in any other among the

ten species with which I am familiar, are there any such an-

choring spicula in their natural state.

The author, in the last paragraph of p. 410 of his paper,

has evidently fallen imto the error of imagining that the

“ ovum or, rather, young Tethya”’ is, in point of structure, the

exact representative of the mature sponge, when, in truth, a

very considerable difference in structural arrangement exists

between them—that is, if we are to take Tethea cranium,

the structure of which we do know, as our exainple of the

anatomy of the fully developed sponge and the gemmules

within it.

Mr. Carter appears to have been somewhat shocked b

finding a jar at the British Museum labelled “‘ Shetland. J.

S. Bowerbank, 52. 3. 12. 70-73,’ to which is added, in Dr.

Bowerbank’s blue ink and handwriting, ‘ Tethya lyncurtum.’”

1 think Mr. Carter will find that I have not labelled the jar

Tethya but Tethea, if I have labelled it myself at all. At

this distance of time I only recollect that I gave some British

Sponges to the British Museum, and that among them were

several specimens of Zethea cranium; and whether I mis-

labelled the jar myself inadvertently, or the label was cut

from the list of species sent, and so stuck on it in error, I really

cannot say; the numbers on the label were certainly not put

on by me. In this jar Mr. Carter found “ six specimens, two

of Zethya cranium and four of another species of Tethya as

60 Dr.J.S. Bowerbank on Mr. Carter’s Paper on Sponges.

yet undescribed ;”’ and the latter specimens he subsequently

described as Tethya antarctica. Mr. Carter seems to have been

exceedingly fortunate, if he be correct in his conclusions, in find-

ing four specimens of a new species, as immediately on reading

his observations on them I set myself to carefully examine

the remainder of my stock of 7. cranium, more than a hundred

specimens, varying in size from a pea to an average-sized

orange; and I could not find a single specimen among them

that could not be satisfactorily identified as 7. cranium. I

therefore feel strongly inclined to believe that Mr. Carter has

fallen into the error of making from small, unimportant dif-

ferences in the same sorts. of structures, two species out of

one; but the dots and lines he has given in illustration of his

paper are so vague and unsatisfactory, that they do not at all

assist us in unravelling the mystery. The description of the

gemmules‘of his 7. zetlandica would apply quite as well to

those of J. cranium; and every form of spiculum that he

figures as from the former, may be readily found in the latter

species. ;

The author, in p. 419, treating of “the small globular and

compressed elliptical bodies” or gemmules of Tethea, writes, in

the second paragraph, ‘‘ In Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘ British Sponges,’

pl. 25. fig. 343, will be found a monstrous representation of one

of these oviform bodies under the designation of ‘ gemmule,’

which is only surpassed by his description (vol. 1. p. 87),

where he applies the term ‘sexual’ to them, and conjectures

that one may be the ‘female or prolific gemmule;’ but Dr.

Bowerbank had never been able to discover any ‘ spermatozoa’

in either! As this is a kind of physiology that I do not un-

derstand, let us go back to the term oviform &c.”

If the author of the paper, in place of criticising the represen-

tation of the gemmules of 7. cranium in vol. 1. pl. 25. fig. 343,

and the description of them in vol. ii. p. 87, of the ‘ Monograph

of British Sponges,’ in the flippant manner in which he has

indulged, had communicated with me on the subject, I could

have informed him that, instead of illustrating the anatomy of

the subjects under consideration by dots and lines, the figures

alluded to were drawn from the preparation still in my pos-

session, by the aid of the microscope and the camera lucida,

by one of the most talented and accurate microscopical artists

that we have among us, Mr. W. Lens Aldous, and that his

representation of the originals is not in the slightest degree

exaggerated; on the contrary, the figure of the larger of the

two is that of a gemmule rather less complicated in its struc-

ture than many of those closely adjoining it, in a slice of the

sponge immersed in Canada balsam, about four lines square,

Viscount Walden on a new Species of Timalia, 61

and which contains twenty-one such gemmules as the two

represented—fourteen of the small and more simple ones, and

seven of the so-called monstrosities; and I shall at any time

be happy to show the originals of the figures to Mr. Gaies

and to convince him that all that is monstrous in the matter is

in his own imagination. Having had ample opportunity of

verifying the correctness of the figures under consideration by

access to the specimens in the British Museum, and having

failed in this part of his researches, it is evident that he has

much more to learn of the anatomy of the sponges under con-

sideration before he will be master of his subjects. What we

want in the investigation of such matters is careful minute

observations and faithful figures and records of their structure,

and not abstruse hypothetical imaginations illustrated by dia-

grams of dots and lines. And | think I may venture to pre-

dict that no naturalist will hereafter be able, by Mr. Carter’s

descriptions or his illustrations, to recognize either his Tethya

antarctica or Tethya zetlandica.

I must acknowledge that I have not yet been able to realize

Mr. Carter’s idea that a sponge is a compound creature, and

that every cilium with its basal cell is a separate or distinct

animal. It is a step beyond my comprehension; for if it be

so in sponges, why not also in human beings? from one of

whom I have seen the cilia living and in motion. The late

Professor Liston, of University College, many years ago had

a patient in the University Hospital with polypus in his

nose; and he invited me to come up one morning, and pro-

mised to show me the human cilia in motion on a small piece

of the polypus from the nose of the man. I went, and had

the satisfaction of seeing them, in rather languid motion, in

some of their own fluid, in a cell slightly warmed by having

been put into warm water and then placed beneath the micro-

scope. The aérating surfaces of a great variety of animals,

beside sponges, are abundantly supplied with cilia and ciliated

cells; are we to regard all these as compound animals ?

IX.—On a new Species of Timalia from Eastern India.

By Artuur Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.S., F.R.S.

Timalia Jerdoni, n. sp.

Timalia pileata, Horsf. ap. Jerdon, B. of Ind. ii. p. 24, nec Horsf.

A narrow frontal band extending over the eyes, the cheeks,

chin, and throat white; forehead and crown deep chestnut ;

remainder of upper surface dark olive-grey ; quills and rec-

62 Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah.

trices above brown, tinged with olive; rectrices traversed by

numerous narrow bands of a darker shade of brown ; upper

part of breast white, changing to cinereous lower down ; each

feather with a black shaft ; remainder of lower surface fulvous

mixed with cinereous olive ; under tail-coverts cinereous olive.

Longitudo

Rostr.a nar. Ale. Caude. Tarsi.

T. Jerdom.. 0-31 2°36 2°88 0-88. * Khasia Hills.”

T. pileata .. 0°50 2-62, 312 1:00. “ Java.”

Described from specimens obtained in the Khasia Hills.

This bird has hitherto been considered identical with the

Javan T. pileata, Horsf. A comparison I have recently been

enabled to make with authentic Javan examples has convinced

me of their specific distinctness. True 7. pileata is a larger

bird; in it the bill is much more powerful, its altitude being

quite double that of examples from the Khasia Hills; the

crown of the head is bright ferruginous, not dark chestnut ;

the colour of the upper plumage, wings, and rectrices 1s con-

siderably paler; that of the lower is pale tawny ; and the ashy

colour of the black-shafted breast-plumes is less intense. My

deeply lamented friend Dr. Jerdon fully concurred with me in

the propriety of separating the two species.

In the ‘ Birds of India’ (/.c.) this species is said to extend

through the Malayan peninsula to Java; but I believe that

it has never been found further south than Arakan. Neither

it nor the Javan species has been shown to occur in the

Malayan peninsula or in Sumatra. It seems to belong to

that category of Javan forms (such as Harpactes oreskios,

Crypsirrhina varians, Bhringa remifer, &c.) which, while

absent from the intermediate regions of Sumatra and the Malay

peninsula, reappear further to the north in Burma, some pene-

trating as far as Nipaul.

X.—Notes on the Anatomy of the Derriah (Cynocephalus

hamadryas). By ALEexaNDER MAcALisTer, M.B., Pro-

fessor of Zoology, University of Dublin.

THE Dublin Zoological Gardens received from Viscount

Southwell two fine specimens of this curious animal, a male

and a female, both full-grown and in excellent condition.

After a residence of some months, the male sickened and died

suddenly, and was dissected carefully by Professor Haughton

and myself.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah. 63

The most important points of the muscular anatomy of this

animal are as follows :—

The trapezius was indivisible, and was inserted into the

outer half of the clavicle. ‘The sterno- and cleidomastoids

were inseparable and large, being nearly an ounce in weight.

The omohyoid was a single-bellied muscle, with no tendinous

intersection. ‘The trachelo-acromial was large, half the size

of the sterno-cleidomastoid. ‘The latissimus dorsi arises from

the eleven spines below the fifth dorsal, and from the posterior

fifth of the iliac crest, but from no ribs. The rhomboid is

indivisible, but consists of the usual occipital and dorsal por-

tions. The serratus magnus is in three parts, and extends

from the second cervical transverse process to the tenth rib;

the uppermost and lowest of these are strong, the middle

weaker.

Serratus posticus superior is attached to the third, fourth,

and fifth ribs, the inferior to the ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth,

and thirteenth ribs. The pectoralis minor arises from the

cartilages of the second to the seventh ribs, and from the

abdominal aponeurosis. ‘The deltoid is easily divisible into

scapular, acromial, and clavicular parts; of these the acromial

is the largest, the clavicular about half its size, and the sca-

pular still smaller. The subclavius does not extend beyond

the clavicle. The capsular muscles of the shoulder are as

usual, and in the following proportions of relative develop-

ment :—supraspinatus = 1, infraspinatus = 1°34, subscapu-

laris = 1-6, teres major 0°6, teres minor = 0°17. There is a

pectoralis quartus from the cartilages of the lowest ribs, in-

serted under the pectoralis major and below the pectoralis

minor into the shoulder-capsule. -The coraco-brachialis is

double—a short muscle (c. brevis of Wood) weighing 0:07 of an

ounce, and a longer, going to the lower third of the humerus,

weighing 0°14. The two heads of the biceps humeri were

inseparably united ; and the entire muscle was nearly 2 ounces

in weight: this muscle was 2°3 times as heavy as the bra-

chialis anticus; and the triceps (which is divisible into long,

outer, and inner parts) is exactly double the sum of these two

flexors. The coracoid head of the biceps was fleshy. The

dorsi epitrochlearis was thin, extending halfway down the

arm, and half an ounce in weight.

There are two anconei, an outer and an inner.

Among the forearm muscles the peculiarities were :—The

palmaris longus fleshy for the upper half of the forearm, and

half the size of the flexor carpi radialis. The flexor sublimis

has no radial origin. The flexor digitorum profundus and

pollicis are inseparably connected, and there is a condyloid

head separated from the rest by the median nerve. The polli-

64 Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah.

ceal tendon of this muscle arises from that part of the flexor

mass which springs from the inner side of the olecranon.

Pronator quadratus is bilaminar, the upper layer being tri-

angular, with the base at the ulna; the deeper layer is also a

triangle with a radial base: the entire muscle occupies one

fourth of the ulna and one sixth of the radius.

There is a large supinator longus, exactly equal to the pro-

nator teres (0°4 of an ounce). The extensor minimi digiti

supplies the fourth and fifth fingers. The indicator supplies

the second and third digits; and there is no abductor minor

pollicis (extensor primi internodii pollicis).

Palmaris brevis is very thick, and attached to the pisiform

bone. The abductor pollicis brevis is divided into two—a

weak external slip arising from the metacarpal bone, and an

internal stronger one from the trapezium. ‘The flexor brevis

pollicis is also divided into two parts, both of which arise from

the annular ligament. A distinct opponens pollicis stretches

from the trapezium to the polliceal metacarpal; and there is

an adductor from the middle metacarpal. The little finger

has three muscles—an abductor, an opponens, and a flexor.

The hand-interossei are as in man, as are the lumbricales.

The abductor pollicis major is mainly inserted into the trape-

zium, with a few fibres into the metacarpal.

The psoas parvus is one seventh part of the psoas magnus,

which latter 1s inseparable from the iliacus. ‘The adductors

are three, as usual; and the pectineus is very small. The

gluteus maximus, agitator caude, and tensor vagine femoris

are inseparable, as also are the pyriformis and gluteus medius.

The biceps femoris is ischiatic, and has only one head.

The semitendinosus is one third the size of the biceps, and

the semimembranosus is one fourth. The extensors of the

knee are to the flexors as 11°6 : 16°09.

Plantaris is very large, and attached as usual. The flexor

digitorum muscle mainly supplies the second and fifth toes,

while the flexor hallucis supplies the first, third, and fourth

toes. The tibialis anticus has a double tendon, and is attached

to the internal cuneiform and metatarsal bone of the hallux.

The peroneus longus has a sesamoid bone in its tendon.

The peronzus brevis has a thread-like oftshooting tendon, re-

presenting the peroneus quinti. There is a large pyriform

abductor minimi digiti. The flexor brevis digitorum has no

tendon to the fifth toe ; nor is there a lumbricalis for the second

toe; the others are all bicipital.

From the tendon of the flexor hallucis at the ankle there

arose a fleshy belly, which soon became tendinous; and this

formed a head for the first lumbricalis, which was thus made

into a digastric muscle.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Derriah. 65

The foot-interossei are as follows :—three plantar, an ad-

ductor hallucis, an adductor indicis, and adductor quinti digiti.

The dorsals’ are :—abductor indicis with only one head from

the second metatarsal bone, an abductor medii digiti with two

heads, an adductor medii digiti, an abductor annularis.

The masseter is very large; and so is the temporal; the

entire muscular mass for the closure of the jaws is over twelve

ounces in weight—that is, equal to the entire quadriceps ex-

tensor cruris.

This animal is a native of Abyssinia, and, under the name

of Hepi and Thoth, figured largely in the Egyptian mytho-

logy; but this part of its history has been very thoroughly

elucidated by Ehrenberg in his paper “ Ueber den Cynocephalus

der Aegyptier, nebst emigen Betrachtungen tiber die iigyp-

tische Mythe der Thot und Sphinx vom naturhistorische

Standpunkt,” in the ‘ Abhandlungen’ of the Berlin Academy

for 1833 (Physikal. Klasse, p. 337). Mr. Ogilby, however,

has combated this opinion, and supposes that another species,

which he names Cynocephalus Thoth, is the sacred animal of

Hermapolis (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1843, p. 10). However, it is

unquestionable that the figures of the animal in Lepsius,

Rossellini, and on Canopi and Scarabei, &e., in the Dublin

University Museum, are exceedingly good representations of

the Hamadryad.

The literature of the anatomy of Cynocephali and their

allies is not extensive : the best papers on the subject are those

by Pagenstecher (Drill, ‘ Zoologischer Garten,’ 1867, p. 128),

and Champneys (Anubis, ‘ Journal of Anat.’ 1871, p. 176). In

comparing the latter paper with my description, the following

points may be noticed in which the Anubis and Hamadryad

are dissimilar :—The trachelo-acromial is attached to the occi-

put in the Anubis, while it is not in the Hamadryad; the lesser

pectoral was not separate in the Anubis, and the insertion of

its representative was along the bicipital groove, not into the

semivagina of the shoulder-joint; the rhomboids were separa-

ble in the Anubis, not in the Hamadryad; the arrangement of the

serratus magnus, described by Champneys in the Anubis,

was very dissimilar to what is described above; the extensor

carpi ulnaris had an origin from the ulna in the Hamadryad, but

not in the Anubis; the abductor pollicis major had a sesamoid

cartilage in the Anubis (/. ¢. p. 184), no such thing existed in

the Hamadryad ; the iliacus is simple in the Hamadryad, not

in the Anubis; plantaris was perfectly separate in the Hama-

dryad, but not so in the Anubis; Champneys’s peroneus

tertii m the Anubis is really, as he suggests, a quinti, as also

is the so-called tertii of Church.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vel. x. 5

MISCELLANEOUS.

On some Dermal Tubercles associated with Fossil Fish-remains.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrntLEMEN,—In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’

for April, pp. 260 & 261, there is an interesting communication by

Messrs. Hancock and Atthey, in which they describe the discovery

of certain teeth-like bodies found associated with Cladodus mirabilis

and Gyracanthus tuberculatus.

They refer to a paper of mine, published in the ‘ Transactions of

the Geological Society of Glasgow,’ vol. iv. pt. 1. pp. 57-59, and

state that I seem to confound Diplodus with those teeth-like bodies

or dermal tubercles, and to consider the remains of the semicartila-

ginous skeleton to be shagreen,—and also state that it is to Prof,

Williamson that we owe the discovery of the true nature of this

peculiar substance, who clearly proves it to be the remains of what

he terms the chondriform bone or semicartilaginous skeleton.

While I do not wish to call in question their deductions regarding

their own discoveries, or the identifications of Prof. Williamson, I

beg, however, to be allowed to express my surprise at those gentle-

men supposing that I had confounded Diplodus with the dermal

tubercles referred to.

In my paper I refer to the discovery of a slab of ironstone covered

with shagreen, and two spines of Otenacanthus hybodoides imbedded

in that substance. Associated with these spines are a number of

the teeth of Cladodus mirabilis, all evidently in their proper relative

position. I had removed a portion of the ironstone overlying the

snout, and exposed the skin thickly studded over with numerous

teeth-like bodies, consisting of two, three, and four curved diverging

points rising from an expanded base, and with a sharp keel on the

curved side passing to the apex of each of the points.

Further on I state that I discovered on another slab of ironstone

the teeth of Diplodus gibbosus associated with another form of those

dermal teeth-like bodies; but these are smooth, enamelled, circular

in section, and relatively larger, and more sharply pointed than

those with the keel along the curved face. Thus having found the

first form associated with the teeth of Cladodus mirabilis and the

latter with the teeth of Diplodus gibbosus, and having frequently

verified this discovery, the conclusion was irresistible, viz. that

they each represented the dermal development of different fish ;

and as in the recent rays (that is, in the living forms) sexual dif-

ferences are to be noted in the dermal development, I suggested

the probability of the difference exhibited in the fossils being due to

a similar cause. This suggestion is thrown out without the slightest

desire to dogmatize, well knowing that there have been far too many

forms named from being simply found associated with other parts.

The evidence, however, is much in favour of the suggestion. The

different forms are not only associated with, but are imbedded in,

the shagreen of the fish.

Miscellaneous. 67

From numerous microscopic sections, both of the semicartilaginous

skeleton and that of the skin, there is not the slightest doubt re-

garding the bone of the skeleton and the shagreen of the skin. In

sections of the latter I have exposed the dermal tubercles resting

upon and attached to the skin. |

JamEs Tomson.

276 Eglinton Street, Glasgow.

May 27.

On the two (?) unknown Species of Argus Pheasant.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,—Permit me to make a few remarks on the feathers of

the two (?) unknown species of Argus Pheasant.

The largest feather, as figured in Mr. Elliot’s ‘ Monograph of the

Phasianide,’ part 5, is undoubtedly a relic of a bird which, when

found, will probably prove to be generically distinct from Argus, so

different is it in form from any feather of the known species of that

genus. Of the other two feathers, which Mr. Elliot supposes to be

primaries of the same bird, I have a very different opinion, believing

them to be feathers of the true tail (as distinguished from the orna-

mental tail-coverts) of the Javan Peacock, Pavo muticus. I sus-

pected this on first looking at the plate; and on examining the tail-

feathers of that bird in the British Museum this opinion was con-

firmed, the form, colour, and markings being identical. I also found

by comparison that the drawings of these feathers are of exactly the

same dimensions as the real ones of P. muticus; whereas Mr. Elliot

states them to be represented only half the natural size. This is

probably a mistake ; but if not, the bird to which they belonged must

have been, in all probability, a very large variety or species of the

genus Pavo.

I also wish to state that the feather which I described as belonging

to an unknown bird related to Argus also presents certain peculi-

arities which seem to indicate that the bird to which it belongs is

generically distinct ; and I regret that Mr. Elliot, in quoting from the

‘Annals,’ omitted the note of interrogation which I placed after the

word Argus, as I think he will agree with me that the generic posi-

tions of these birds can only be approximately determined from their

feathers.

I remain, Gentlemen,

Yours very truly,

London, June 15th, 1872. T. W. Woop.

Note on a Deformed Example of Cariama cristata.

By Dr. A. GintHer.

There is in the British Museum a stuffed example of a Cariama

which differs from C. cristata in so striking a manner, by the short-

ness of its neck and legs, that it might be easily taken for a distinct

species. However, on a closer examination, I have convinced myself

~ Se

68 Miscellaneous.

that it is merely a deformed example of the common Brazilian

species.

* 1. The specimen, although fully adult, is not very old, having still

reddish-brown cross bars on the outer web of the inner primaries.

The state of its wing- and tail-feathers shows clearly that it has

been kept in captivity. ;

2. The head, body, and toes are of the same dimensions as in

normally developed individuals; but the tarsus, which in an old

bird measures normally 7} inches*, is reduced in our specimen to

53 inches, the number of anterior transverse scutes being the same

in both (26 or 27). The bone is slightly bent inwards, thus showing

unmistakable signs of being malformed by rhachitic disease. Also

the tibia appears to be somewhat shortened,

3. The shortness of the neck can be accounted for by the manipu-

lation of the stuffer ; but I must remark that in the skeleton of an-

other specimen likewise kept in captivity, the eleventh and twelfth -

cervical vertebre are affected by rhachitis; so that in our stuffed

example the shortness of the neck may have been really caused by

an abnormal curvature of the cervical portion of the vertebral

column. In the skeleton mentioned the upper end of the right tibia

and the first phalanx of the outer toe of the same side are much

swollen in consequence of osteoporosis.

4. In the plumage not the slightest difference can be observed

between this and other specimens of C. cristata of the same age.

Tt will be seen from these remarks that the Gariama, which is

easily domesticated and frequently kept in captivity, is, in this state,

subject to diseases of the bones, and that bodies of tame birds should

not be chosen for osteological preparations.

On the Natural Affinities of the Balistide.

By M. C. Darzsre.

Ina memoir published in 1851 I showed that the Cuvierian order

Plectognathi contains a certain number of very dissimilar forms

united by a very imperfect character—that it must, consequently, be

struck out of our classification, as M. Vogt had previously indicated,

but without giving any demonstration—and that the diverse types

united under this denomination must be referred to other groups of

osseous fishes. Resuming these investigations, I propose to show

that one of the groups of the order Plectognathi, that of the Balistes,

must take its place among the Acanthopterygians, in the vicinity of

the Acanthuri and other fishes belonging to the small family of the

Teuthyes.

The family of the Teuthyes, as established by Cuvier, presents, in

the small number of genera which he combined under this denomi-

nation, two very different types of organization. The Sidjans or

Amphacanthi, which Cuvier placed at the head of this family, differ

so much from the other genera that M. Agassiz and subsequently

* 84-8§ inches (Rhenish meas.), according to Burmeister.

Miscellaneous. 69

Dr. Giinther have thought it necessary to separate them. This

elimination having been made, the Acanthuri and the four or five

allied genera which remain in the family Teuthyes have the closest

affinities with the Balistes, as I shall now endeavour to prove.

In vertebrate animals it is the skeleton that furnishes the most

correct indications as to the affinities and consequently the true

characters of the natural groups. The uncertainty in which we

still are with regard to the establishment of these groups among

fishes will only be dissipated by the determination of their osteo-

logical types. The elements of such a work are still too completely

wanting to allow of our attacking it as a whole ; but we may prepare

the way for it by partial investigations. Thus I now propose to

demonstrate the very great analogy and the common characters of

the skeletons of the Acanthuri and Balistide, especially the true

Balistes, which are more neatly allied to the Acanthuri than the

Triacanthi, Monacanthi, and Alutere.

In both groups the jaws are very small. The border of the upper

jaw is formed solely by the intermaxillaries. The maxillaries, which

are but very slightly developed, are firmly and immovyably attached

to the intermaxillaries. This character is the more important be-

cause it constitutes, according to Cuvier, the character of the order

Plectognathi. Now the Acanthuri deserve to be called Plectognathi

quite as much as the Balistes. The teeth, in both jaws, have the

form of incisors.

The skull is very narrow. Its upper surface is much elongated

and formed by two planes which meet at an obtuse angle above the

orbit; whence it results that the true cranium descends obliquely

behind the orbit to meet the vertebral column, instead of being

placed in the same horizontal plane as this bony column. It also fol-

lows, from this oblique position of the cranial region, that the mas-

toid bone is placed very low. It nevertheless presents, in both

groups, a large vertical apophysis in front of its articulation with

the bones of the shoulder.

The upper occipital, or interparietal, advances between the prin-

cipal frontals, and forms, at the summit of the head, a more or less

elevated crest.

The ethmoid is much elongated; and consequently the anterior

frontals and the palatines are at a great distance from each other,

and do not become united to form bony nasal cavities.

The anterior sphenoid is produced in front of the orbit in the form

of a vertical plate, which meets a vertical plate produced by the

ethmoid, and forms with it a bony partition which separates the

ethmoid from the palatine arch.

The vomer is very small, and destitute of teeth.

The palatines are also small, destitute of teeth, and movably arti-

culated with the ethmoid and intermaxillary.

The different pieces of the temporal wing are not all soldered

together, and leave empty spaces merely occupied by the membrane

of the palate.

The opercular flap is formed only by the operculum and the sub-

70 Miscellaneous.

operculum. ‘The interoperculum is more or less concealed within

the preoperculum; at least in its anterior part, or that which is

joined to the jaw, and sometimes throughout its whole extent, it

presents the form of a rod. The second case is that of the Balistes ;

the former that of the Acanthuri, in which it acquires the form of a

very narrow plate only in its posterior part.

The hyoid bone is attached to the temporal wing at but little dis-

tance from the posterior angle of the lower jaw; it is consequently

very small. The lateral branches, which bear the branchiostegal

rays, have fewer pieces than in other fishes. The unpaired piece, or

tail of the hyoid, is very large, and formed of two long branches

uniting at a right angle.

The bones of the shoulder appear, in the part anterior to the

pectoral fins, in the form of large plates, produced by at least the

partial amalgamation of the three bony pieces which, according to

Cuvier’s nomenclature, form the humerus, radius, and cubitus. The

coracoid is greatly developed. The pelvis is much elongated, and

the two pieces which form it are more or less soldered together.

The vertebral column is formed by a small number of vertebree

(about 20 to 22). The dorsal vertebrae bear very long vertical

neurapophyses and horizontal hemapophyses starting from the

middle of the vertebra and bearing very small ribs. The caudal

vertebrae have the neurapophyses and hemapophyses vertical and

much elongated.

The differences between the skeletons of the Acanthuri and Balistes

are but few and of slight importance.

The Acanthurt have nasal and suborbital bones, which are want-

ing in the Balistes; but these bones are very variable in fishes, and

can only furnish secondary characters.

The dorsal fin is single in the Acanthuri, whilst in the Balistes

the spinous and soft rays are separated to form two fins,

In the Balistes the preeoperculum has its oblique shorter than its

horizontal branch ; the reverse is the case in the Acanthuri: con-

sequently the branchial fissures and the opercular flaps are larger in

the Acanthuri than in the Balistes.

In the Acanthuri the dorsal hemapophyses bear, besides the ribs,

some little styles which ascend in the interior of the muscles, as in

the Clupeidee.

We see therefore that, with the exception of a few differences, the

osteological type of the Acanthuri is the same as that of the Balistes.

I regret that I am unable to complete this investigation by the

comparison of the other organs, which must undoubtedly present

resemblances similar to those of the skeletons. I must add, how-

ever, that Valenciennes has already indicated the at least apparent

similarity presented by the scaling of a species of Acanthurus (A.

scopas) to that of certain Balistide of the genus Monacanthus—a

resemblance which had even struck the Dutch of the East Indies,

since they confound the Balistide and the Acanthuri under the same

denomination, that of Leervisch, or ‘leather-fishes.” — Comptes

Rendus, June 17, 1872, pp. 1527-1530,

Miscellaneous. @

On the Synonymy of the Genera of Kuryalide. -

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Having occasion to examine ‘and determine the Red-Sea Radiata

presented to the British Museum by Mr. M‘Andrew, I had occasion

to use MM. Dujardin and Hupé’s work. The following corrections

and additions to his synonymy occurred to me. ‘They chiefly arise

from the almost universal habit of French zoologists to ignore the

works of any other country. In the ‘Synopsis of the British Mu-

seum’ for 1840 I gave the characters of the families and genera ;

so there is no excuse for their not being quoted.

Euryalide, Gray, Syn. Brit. Mus. 1840, p. 63, = Huryalidies, Du-

jardin & Hupé, 1862, p. 292.

I. Evryatr, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 62. Huryale, pars, Link.

Trichaster, Agassiz, Dujardin & Hupé, 1862, p. 300,

1. Euryale palmiferus, Lam.

II. Asrropuyton, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p.62; Miller & Troschel,

Liitken, Duj. & Hupé, 1862, p. 301.

Gorgonocephalus, Leach, Zool. Mise.

1. Astrophyton verrucosum, Lam. &e.

IIL. Lasrarta, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 64, with characters.

Asterochema, Liitken, Addit. ad Hist. Ophiur, 1859, p. 255;

Dujardin & Hupé, Echinod. p. 296.

1. Laspalia oligactes = Asterias oligactes, Pallas. Asterochema

oligactes, Litken, l.c.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 297. Ophiura

cirrosa, Say. Trichaster leptocladia, Mus. Paris.

Euryale simplex, Gray, Encycl. Metropol.

West Indies and Central America.

IV. Natatra, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 64.

Asteroporpa, Liitken, Addit. ad Hist. Ophiur. 1859, p. 152.

1. Natalia annulata,

Asteroporpa annulata, Liitken, 7. c. p. 159, t. 5. f.4; Dujardin

& Hupé, Echinod. p. 298, t. 2. f. 6.

Central America.

On a New Species of Paradoxornis. By the Abbé A. Davin,

Father Heude, Missionary at Shanghai, busies himself actively in

studying and collecting the natural productions of the province in

which he dwells. Among the birds in his collection which he showed

me as I passed through that city there are several which do not yet

figure in the ornithological catalogues of the Chinese Empire. Of

these I observed one which is particularly interesting, belonging to

that curious group of Insectivora with a stout and compressed beak,

which is represented in Eastern Asia by the genera Conostoma,

Cholornis, Paradoxornis, and Suthora.

The bird in question appears to me to be intermediate between the

last two genera, and may, perhaps, form a new genus. I place it

provisionally in the genus Paradowornis, of which it presents the

principal characters.

72 Miscellaneous.

M. Heude having allowed me to take the description of his bird,

which is unique in his collection, I hasten to send it to you, and

regard it as my duty to dedicate to him this new species, under the

name of Paradowxornis Heuder.

Morelelencgh:.) 2cjk\. eae ss Gis hits Ries te 18 centims.

eneph at phestalliyy errs. . ws stl etelel ees 92 55

an OF the closedvwint.<. c.045 645 57 millims.

BE GOL CHOKUATAB YE Sodbiekoky. Acese abbots ot ee

Bill yellow ; feet of a yellowish grey; claws grey.

Tail long, much graduated, with the feathers black, terminated

by a broad white spot; the median feathers unicolorous yellowish

TOY.

‘ Wings short and round, with the quill-feathers black, surrounded

by a margin of reddish grey ; lesser coverts of a cinnamon fulvous,

as well as the feathers of the insertion of the wings.

Stalks of the rectrices and remiges black above, white beneath.

Head grey in the middle ; two broad black streaks above the eyes,

like eyebrows; neck grey ; parotic region of a rosy grey ; back rosy

grey, with a few elongated brown spots; rump reddish yellow.

Throat white; breast of a vinous rosy colour; flanks reddish ;

middle of the belly whitish, as are also the subcaudals.

M. Heude killed this pretty bird in December 1871 among the

reeds (Phragmites) which border a lake of the Kiang-Sou; these it

traverses in little flocks. According to that naturalist, it possesses

an agreeable voice and has the climbing (or rather clinging) habits

of the allied genera—Comptes Rendus, June 3, 1872, p. 1449.

Investigations on Fossil Birds. By M. A. Mitye-Epwarps.

At the moment when my investigations upon fossil birds approach

their termination, and before the last part is given to the public, I

will ask the Academy’s permission to explain in a few words the re-

sults at which I have arrived during these studies, which have lasted

fully twelve years.

I believe I have demonstrated, by the examination of the bones

which have been found in the recent deposits in the Mascarene

Islands, and which belong, for the most part, to extinct species, such

as the dodo, the solitaire, the Aphanapteryx, Fulica Newtoni, large

Parrots, &c., that these islands have once been part of a vast extent

of land, that these lands by little and little and by a slow depression

have been hidden under the waters of the ocean, only leaving visible

some of their highest points, such as the islands of Mauritius,

Rodriguez, and Bourbon. These islands have served as a refuge for

the last representatives of the terrestrial population of these ancient

epochs; but the species, confined in too limited a space and exposed

to all causes of destruction, have disappeared by degrees; and man

has in some measure aided in their extinction.

Madagascar evidently was not in communication with these islands ;

for when Europeans visited them for the first time, they did not find

Miscellaneous. Vf)

there any Mammalia, with the exception of some large bats; none

of those remarkable Lemurid peculiar to the fauna of Madagascar

existed in the Mascarene Islands. The study of fossil birds leads to

the same result; and the three species of Apyornis which M. A.

Grandidier and I have been able to recognize among the fossils col-

lected in the swamps of the south-west coast have enabled us to

establish the relationship which connects these birds with the Dv-

nornis, the Palapteryx, and Aptornis of New Zealand. All these

species belong to the same zoological type, and make us feel that at

a more or less remote epoch there may have existed some communi-

cation between these lands so far away from one another; perhaps

groups of islands, now submerged, formed intermediate stations, of

which unfortunately we have now no trace.

In France, from the earliest age of man, we remark sometimes

in superficial deposits, sometimes in caverns, fragments of birds which

furnish us with valuable indications of the climatal conditions of

that epoch. Some of these species have now entirely disappeared ;

others, in considerable numbers, have by degrees retired towards the

north—for instance, the grouse and the great hawk owl, which

then were extremely common in these countries. Their presence is

most significant ; for even supposing, according to some naturalists,

the reindeer is only found fossil in France because it had been in-

troduced by the Finnish population, we cannot invoke the same ex-

planation for birds which have never been domesticated. Lastly.

we also find in our caves a great number of species identical with

those which now inhabit temperate Europe—among others, the

cock, which was supposed to be a native of India, but which, on

the contrary, must have been a contemporary of the first ages of man.

It is especially the Middle Tertiary deposits which have furnished

me with a rich harvest. Thus in the Department of the Allier [have

recognized the presence of about 70 species belonging to very various

groups, some of which no longer belong to our fauna. Parrots and

Trogons inhabited the woods; swallows built in the fissures of the

rocks nests in all probability like those now found in certain parts of

Asia and the Indian archipelago. A secretary bird nearly allied

to that of the Cape of Good Hope sought in the plains the ser-

pents and reptiles which at that time, as now, must have furnished

its nourishment. Large adjutants, cranes, flamingoes, the Palc-

lodi (birds of curious forms, partaking at once of the characters of

the flamingoes and ordinary Gralle), and ibises frequented the

banks of the watercourses where the larve cf insects and mollusks

abounded ; pelicans floated in the midst of the lakes; and, lastly,

sand-grouse and numerous gallinaceous birds assisted in giving to

this ornithological population a physiognomy with which it is im-

possible not to be struck, and which recalls to one’s mind the de-

seriptions which Livingstone has given us of certain lakes of southern

Africa.

The list I have given of the birds whose existence I have ascer-

tained in the part of the Miocene lakes the alluvium of which has

formed the deposits of St. Géraud le Puy, of Vaumas, &c., indicates

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 6

74 Miscellaneous.

the relations in which the different groups of this class of vertebrates

lived. Whilst some of them are extremely common, there are others

which are only found, so to speak, accidentally, and which are only

represented in my collection by a single bone or only a few bones.

The species most frequently met with are the water-birds: thus the

ducks have left numerous remains; the cormorant is only found at

certain places. Evidently at that time, as now, birds had prefer-

ences for certain places, certain rocks, &c., from which they de-

parted but little. The little diver (Colymboides minutus) is less

abundant than the gulls, of which two species, Larus elegans and

L. totanoides, exist in profusion.

It is the same with some of the small shore-waders belonging to

the genera Totanus and T'ringa, whilst Elorius and Himantopus are

represented by few individuals. I have found numerous bones of

the ibis, and in particular of the Palelodus ambiguus ; the four other

species of the latter genus are by no means so common. Thus out

of two hundred bones of these birds hardly one will turn out to be

of P. crassipes, P. minutus, P. gracilipes, or P. goliath. The por-

tions of the skeleton of the flamingo are rarely found entire at St.

Géraud le Puy; whereas at Coumon and Chaptuzat, on the contrary,

they are well preserved. I have only once met with the bones of

the adjutant; they belonged to two young specimens, and were as-

sociated in the same excavation filled with sand. The cranes are rare ;

their bones are almost always broken and often injured by the teeth

of rodents, as if they had lain for a long time on the bank before

being carried to the bottom of the lake. The rails, the gallinaceous

birds, the pigeons, the sand-grouse, the passerine birds, the raptores,

and the parrots have left but few traces of their existence. These

birds, from their mode of life, did not remain continually on the

shores of the lakes or watercourses ; their remains might be eaten

or destroyed at once, and it would need a concurrence of exceptional

circumstances for them to be transported by the streams into the

alluvial deposits of the lakes: thus I had explored these deposits for

more than ten years before I met with a single bone of a parrot,

sand-grouse, secretary bird, or of several of the raptores ; and some,

of which I had collected the remains a long time ago, have not ap-

peared since.

All the bones of birds collected in the Miocene beds of Weissenau,

in the basin of Mayence, that I have been able to examine, present a

complete resemblance to those of the Department of the Alber.

The ornithological population of the celebrated deposit of Sansan,

in the Department of the Gers, presents another character ; not one

of its representatives is foundin the lacustrine deposits of the Bour-

bonnais and the Auvergne: and although the greater part of the

species belong to families at present existing in our fauna, not one

is known to be actually living, and several of them present charac-

ters sufficient to constitute new genera.

I have discovered there a parrot of a more slender form than that

of the Allier, and I have designated it by the name of Pszttacus Lar-

tetianus, to attach the name of my regretted master and friend to one

Miscellaneous. "5

of the most interesting species that I have ever found in this rich

deposit. Some gallinaceous birds of a large size, and in this respect

hardly inferior to the peacocks and true pheasants, also inhabited

the shores of the little lake, where the deposits accumulated which

now form the hill of Sansan ; numerous passerine birds, resembling

the Bengalis and Senegalis, frequented the margins of the waters ;

lastly, the number of species was not less than 35, and certainly new

excavations will not fail to make known more.

The marine faluns of the Loire have only furnished me with a few

species of birds. I have been able, however, to recognize a cormo-

rant almost as large as that which now lives on our shores, a goose a

little smaller than the bernicle, a heron, and a pheasant.

The beds of gypsum in the environs of Paris contain numerous

impressions of skeletons of birds; and it is to be observed that the

animals of that period deviated more from the zoological forms

which exist at the present day. Thus, despite the unwillingness I

feel, especially in paleontological studies, to increase the already too

large number of generic groups, I have beenobliged to formnew genera

for many among them. Thus the Cryptornis antiquus was nearer

the hornbills than any known type; Laurillardia and Palegithalus

belong to the order of passerine birds, but were quite distinct from all

those now living. The Palwortyges are gallinaceous, of the size of

a quail, but very different from those birds. G'ypsornis is the giant

of the family Rallide; it must almost have attained the size of a

stork. Agnopterus approaches the flamingoes, although it displays

some characters peculiar to itself.

The singularity of the forms of these Eocene birds makes us

doubly regret not knowing those of the Cretaceous period. Unfor-

tunately there exist only a very small number of freshwater depo-

sits dating from that period; therefore it is not astonishing that we

have as yet discovered only very few traces of terrestrial animals

which lived during the deposition of these important strata. Perhaps

new zoological forms will be discovered there filling up the immense

gap which exists between the Jurassic Archeopteryx and the typical

birds of the Tertiary epoch.—Comptes Rendus, April 15, 1872,

pp. 1030-1034.

Migrations of the Graptolites. By H. Attnyne Nicuotson, M.D.,

F.R.S.E., F.G.8., Professor of Natural History and Botany in

University College, Toronto.

The author commenced by stating that the occurrence of the same

species of marine animals in deposits in distant areas is now gene-

rally regarded as evidence that such deposits are not strictly contem-

poraneous, but rather that a migration from one area to another has

taken place; this migration he thought would probably in many

cases be accompanied by modification. Applying these principles to

the Graptolites, he endeavoured to show in what directions their

migrations may have taken place.

He excluded from the family Graptolitide the genera Dictyonema,

Dendrograpsus, Callograpsus, and Ptilograpsus, and stated that the

76 Miscellaneous.

family as thus limited extended from Upper Cambrian to Upper

Silurian times. The earliest known Graptolites were those of the

Skiddaw Slates, which he thought would prove to belong to the

Upper Cambrian series. The Skiddaw area he considered to extend

into Canada, where the Quebec group belongs to it. Genera of

Graptolites belonging to this area are represented in Australia; and

this the author regarded as indicative of migration, but in which

direction was uncertain. Having discussed the forms of Graptolites

characteristic of the deposits in the Skiddaw-Quebee area, the author

proceeded to indicate the mode in which the family is represented

in the areas of deposition of the great Silurian series—namely, the

Llandeilo areas of Wales and Scotland, the Coniston area of the

North of England, the Gala area of South Scotland, the Hudson-

River area of North America, and the Saxon and Bohemian areas—

giving under each of these heads a list of species, with indications of

their probable derivation.—Proc. Geol. Soc. Feb. 1872.

Notice of a new Netted Sponge (Meyerella) from the Philippines.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

The British Museum has just received a very beautiful clavate

netted sponge, discovered in the Philippines by Dr. Adolf Bernhard

Meyer, which I have proposed to indicate as a new genus under the

name of MBYERELLA.

Sponge simple, elongate, clavate, acute at the apex, at which are

placed several tufts of short cylindrical fibres. The body of the

sponge is elongate-fusiform, with longitudinal ridges irregularly dis-

posed, often inosculating together, leaving various-shaped deep con-

cavities on the surface. These ridges and the very numerous irre-

gularly shaped often confluent elevations in the concavities between

them are furnished with various-shaped large oscules on the upper

surface. The sides of the ridges and the tops of the prominences are

all united by a very fine cobweb-like netted coat, formed of numerous

fibres, and pierced with an immense number of very minute exceed-

ingly close perforations. The stem cylindrical, thick, ending in a

thick cylindrical tuft of elongated glassy fibres, evidently anchor-

ing the sponge in the sand; numerous cylindrical bunches of fibre

are to be seen through the substance of the sponge extending

throughout the greater part of the length of the stem. Species :—

Meyerella claviformis.

Hab. Philippines (Dr. Meyer, Brit. Mus.).

Additional Note on Osteocella septentrionalis.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e:

I have been informed by Dr. Giinther that this species (see Ann.

& Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ix. p. 405) is frequently found in Buz-

zard Inlet, near New Westminster, Fraser River, British Columbia,

which confirms my original supposition that it probably comes from

the west coast of America.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. |

No. 56. AUGUST 1872.

X1.—Antipathes arctica, a new Species of Black Coral (Anti-

pathide) from the Polar Seas. By Dr. C. LUTKEN*.

A LITTLE before the commencement of the illness which at

the end of last year carried off M.C.S..M. Olik, Councillor of

Justice and Director of Greenland trade, and formerly Inspector

in North Greenland, thus inflicting upon science a serious loss

by depriving us of a man who had striven with much zeal and

great perseverance to elucidate the natural history of Green-

land, especially in collecting its zoological and paleontological

objects for our museums, that gentleman brought to me at the

museum a black coral which, as he knew with certainty, was

found in the stomach of a shark (7. e. a sea-hound, Scymnus

microcephalus) in Rodebayt, about two miles north of Jakobs-

havn, in North Greenland, by M. K. Fleischer. This dis-

covery is of great interest in many respects. It increases our

knowledge of the Greenland fauna with a genus, and, indeed,

with a family, which had not previously been included in it ;

nay, what is more, this family was previously known only

from warm or very warm seas: north of the Mediterranean {

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Oversigt over det Kongl.

Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandl.’ 1871, pp. 18-26.

+ Rink calls it “ Rodebay.” I do not know which of these denomina-

tions is the right one.

{ The text was already printed when Professor Wyville Thomson had

the kindness to inform me that Antipatharia had been found in the

British expeditions for the exploration of the great depths by means of

the dredge, and consequently in a part of the Atlantic situated between

the polar seas and the warm seas which, until recently, formed the

northern limit of the known Antipatharia.

From the Mediterranean we know with certainty apparently five spe-

cies—namely, Antipathes lariz, Esper, subpinnata, Ellis, and dichotoma,

Pall., Leiopathes glaberrima (Esper) and Gerardia Lamarchii (J. Haime) ;

whilst I regard it as very doubtful whether Antipathes scoparia, Lamk.,

and Cirripathes spiralis (Pall.) also occur in the Mediterranean, as is

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 7

78 = Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

and South Carolina no Antipathid has hitherto been known;

and that a representative of this group is now suddenly dis-

covered in the extreme north certainly makes a very consider-

able alteration in the notions which we have hitherto enter-

tained as to its geographical distribution, and leads us to con-

jecture that it may extend to all the deeper valleys of the

ocean*. That the Greenland ‘species belongs to deep water 1s

warranted by the sea-hound’s well-known habit of seeking its

food at great depths (200-250 fathoms) ; that it should have

gone to fetch this little “‘sea-shrub” very far from the place

where it was itself caught we may regard as not very probable.

It is true that the sea-hound, like the sharks in general, is a

fish which wanders pretty widely ; and we have instances of

its straying far beyond its proper range—to Scotland and the

north of France, for example. But, nevertheless, in the pre-

sent case it would be improbable that it should have sought

stated by Milne-Edwards (Hist. Nat. des Corall. tome i. pp. 314-319).

The last mentioned is a native of the East Indies; and other species of its

genus are known from the West Indies, Madeira, and Australia. Ant?-

pathes scoparia I believe I have recognized with certainty in a form from

the Red Sea represented in our museum. Of the species which are stated

only by older writers (e. g. Lamouroux) to be from the Mediterranean

we may probably take no notice. From Madeira also various species are

known (Cirripathes setacea and gracilis, Gray, Antipathes furcata, Gray,

and subpinnata, Ellis?)—and from South Carolina Antipathes Bosci,

Lamk., and A. alopecuroides, Ellis. In the tract between Florida and

Cuba Pourtales found five species (A. filix, humilis, tetrasticha, and two

undescribed species). Besides these we know a whole series of species

from the West Indies :—Cirripathes Desbonni, Duch. & Mich.; Antipa-

thes pedata and atlantica, Gray; A. americana and dissecta, Duch. &

Mich. (both from St. Thomas); A. eupteridea, Lamk. (Martinique) ;

Arachnopathes paniculata, Duch. & Mich. (Guadeloupe) ; and Leiopathes

compressa, Esp. (Jamaica). Many of these, however, are but imperfectly

known. A. reticuluta, Esp., and A. lariz, Esp., are also represented as

West-Indian; but this can hardly be correct, but due to mistakes either

in the determination or in the statement of localities. A. reticulata is an

Kast-Indian species (Manilla), and A. larix is a native of the Mediterra-

nean. From Cape Palmas we have <A. spinescens, Gray. From the

southern part of the Atlantic we know no Antipatharia.

* Marsigli took A. dichotoma at a depth of 140 fathoms. Pourtales

captured his species at 116-120, 270, and 195-324 fathoms. Heller took

Gerardia Lamarckwi at 50-60 fathoms, in company with red corals. That

the Mediterranean black corals (palmas neras) usually occur in this asso-

ciation, and at considerable depths, is known from Lacaze-Duthiers’s ad-

mirable investigations upon the Antipatharia. That those in warmer

seas also occur at much smaller depths, however, appears from the fact

that Dana obtained A. arborea in 10 fathoms and A. anguwinea in 10 feet

of water at the Fiji Islands (Explor. Exped. Zoophytes, pp. 577 & 585).

At the Pearl Islands, in the Gulf of Panama, Bradley obtained A. pana-

mensis, by means of pearl-divers, from 6-8 fathoms (Verrill, “ Notes on

Radiata, No. 6,” p.500, Transact. Conn. Acad. i.).

(Antipathide) from the Polar Seas. 79

its prey beyond the Polar Sea; and were we even to stretch

this possibility to its utmost limits, this Antipatharian would

still remain a northern form, and the diffusion of the family

as far as the northern seas would remain indubitable.

The Black Corals, or Antipathide, are still among the less-

known animal-forms; it is only a few years since their struc-

ture was so far elucidated * that they could be arranged in

their right place in the system as a type analogous to the

Horny Corals (Gorgoniide) in the sex- or multitentaculate

order of Coralliaria. On account of the great softness and

perishableness of the outer layer (“‘flesh”’), which, again, is

chiefly caused by the apparently total want of hard parts

(“‘sclerites ’’), it 1s seldom that we find in collections specimens

which show any traces of this the essential living part of these

animals—the horny, most frequently black and spinous “‘axis”’

being in general all that remains, and the only thing that we

have to depend upon in the description, specific distinction,

and grouping of these forms. Most of them, moreover, are

known only by imperfect descriptions or defective figures

(those of Professor Lacaze-Duthiers’s excellent revision T of

the whole family, founded on the materials in the Paris Mu-

seum, have, unfortunately, never appeared) ; and of not a few

we do not know whence they come. That under these cir-

cumstances the determination of species presents nearly insu-

perable difficulties will be evident; but, on the other hand, I

must admit, after the experience that I have been able to

obtain by the examination of the comparatively considerable

collection in the Museum (seventeen species), that in general

it is not difficult to trace the limits between one species and

another. The modes of ramification especially present many

characteristic and easily grasped differences, although it may

be less easy to express these in words.

That the present specimen, after lying, whether for a short

or a long time, in the stomach of a shark, is without any trace

of the softer and more perishable parts, is a matter of course ;

but in other respects it is well preserved. That it represents

a new species is also very probable, as the locality of its oc-

currence is so exceedingly distant from that of any previously

known Antipathid. But upon this circumstance we must

not for the present lay very great stress, as it is certain that

* First elucidated (if we leave out of consideration what Marsigli

(1725), Ellis (1786), and Gray (1832) had previously published with

regard to it) by Dana (Explor. Exped. Zoophytes, x. tab. 56. figs. 1 & 2),

and afterwards more completely by Lacaze-Duthiers (Ann. Sci. Nat.

5° sér., Zool. & Pal., tomes ii. & iv. 1864-65).

+ Loe. eit. tome ii. p. 173, and several other places.

80 Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

deep-sea species may have a distribution which may extend

even from the tropical to the glacial zones. If it is actually

Big. 1, Fig. 2.

i i oh

A portion of the main stem, enlarged. The tip of a branch, enlarged,

MALS wi ye

Nee

Antipathes arctica, Liitken, somewhat diminished.

(Antipathidee) from the Polar Seas. 81

the case that a whole series of northern Echinoderms (Rhzzo-

crinus lofotensis, Pteraster militaris, Echinus Flemingti, Bris-

sopsis lyrifera, Echinocardium ovatum, Echinocucumis typica,

Cucumaria frondosa, and Molpadia borealis*) live together in

the deep water around and among the Antilles, there is, of

course, nothing against the possibility that an Antipathid also

might be diffused from the icy sea to south of the tropic

of Cancer; and our thoughts turn quite naturally at once to

the species recently recorded by Pourtales t from the Straits

of Florida. Nevertheless I have been unable to refer the pre-

sent form to any species known to me either in nature or from

descriptions or figures; and although this, considermg what

has been said above as to the defective state of this depart-

ment of our science, is not much to say, I hope that I shall

not fall into any mistake in describing it as new. For its

recognition the annexed photoxylographic figure (fig. 3) will,

I hope, furnish sufficient means, although I will not omit to add

a short description of it; but first I will endeavour to deter-

mine its approximate place in the systematic arrangement of

the Antipathide.

According to Milne-Edwards’s proposed classification of

this family, our Greenland species is undoubtedly a true Ané?-

pathes ; itis branched and has a rough surface, and its branches

show no very great tendency to coalesce (as in Arachnopathes

and Lhipidipathes), although, apparently accidentally, a slight

amalgamation occurs at isolated points. I shall leave it for

the present undecided how far it may be possible to distin-

guish the genera of Antipathide in the mode attempted by

the above-mentioned distinguished zoologist: opinions are

divided upon this subject}; and the analogous genera to them

in the parallel group of the Alcyonaria have not stood the test

of the more thoroughgoing analysis of recent times; but under

* Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Anatomy at Harvard Col-

lege, Nos. 9-13. ‘Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf-stream at

Great Depths: Echinoderms,” by A. Agassiz, T. Lyman, and Pourtales,

1869.

+ Op. cit. 1867, p. 112; 1868, p. 133.

{ At the same time with Milne-Edwards, Gray gave (Proc. Zool. Soc.

1857) a systematic arrangement of the Antipathide. He has only two

genera—Letopathes, with smooth, and <Antypathes, with spinous axis,

and distinguishes the species with an unbranched axis only as a subgenus

(Cirripathes) of the latter. Moreover Milne-Edwards himself regards

his attempt at a more minute division of the Antipathide into genera as

essentially only an artificial arrangement for the ready revision of the

species, and pays particular attention to certain striking differences (1. ¢,

pp. 312,513). Verrill also says that “generic characters derived only

from the mode of growth and branching are always unsatisfactory in

classing compound Zoophytes” (Notes on Radiata, No. 6, p. 499).

§2 Dr. C. Liitken on a new Species of Black Coral

any circumstances the above-mentioned amalgamation of the

branches at particular points will not justify us in giving our

species a place outside the genus Antipathes. In this genus

A. arctica will take its place among the species whose branches

and stems are not very different in thickness (“ polypier se

subdivisant en branches de divers ordres, qui ne different que

peu les uns des autres par leur diamétre, lequel décroit gra-

duellement”’) ; but it belongs neither to the species whose

branches lie in all possible different planes, and thus form

tufted masses (“ panicules, touffes’’) of different forms, nor to

those in which they all lie in the same plane, and form as it

were a quadrifid or bipinnate leaf (A.myriophylla, pinnatifida).

It stands about in the middle between these two chief types of

the genus, and seems at the same time to point from this to-

wards Arachnopathes.

The stem is nearly straight, widening below into a flat ex-

pansion, by which it has been attached at the bottom of the

sea; its height, in a direct line, is 113 millims., and its dia-

meter about 1} millim.; superiorly it decreases very slowly in

thickness; only its lowest portion is smooth, the remainder

being covered with somewhat irregular fine furrows; on the

raised lines separating these furrows are seated the short acute

spines in tolerably close series (fig. 1). The shining black

colour of the stem gradually acquires a brownish tint in its upper

part; its lower part (about 30 millims.) is destitute of branches ;

but from the upper part of the stem there issue on each side,

right and left, 10-13 main branches. Except in the uppermost

part of the coral, where some irregularity occurs, the points of

origin of these main branches are placed pretty regularly,

alternately to the right and left. The distance between two

branches situated one above the other on the same side is at

the utmost 9 millims. On the whole the middle branches are

the longest and strongest; the angle which they form with

the stem is not much less than a right angle, and their direc-

tion is therefore nearly horizontal. All the branches placed

one above the other on the same side lie, at least approximately,

in the same vertical plane; and the angle which those from

the two sides form with each other at their origin is only a

little more than a right angle; and as they curve in an elon-

gated arc at first forward and then backward, their points

come to lie in the same (vertical) plane as their points of ori-

gin. If we leave the curvature out of consideration, all the

coral’s horizontal main branches will therefore lie approxi-

mately in the same plane. These main branches are not much

less in diameter than the upper part of the stem; and they

maintain this character nearly throughout their whole length;

(Antipathidee) from the Polar Seas. 83

their surface is spinous (fig. 2), like that of the stem ; but raised

and depressed lines are seen only where they are thickest,

which is not always nearest to the base; the length of the

largest main branch is about equal to that of the branch-bearing

part of the’stem. The secondary branches, which are only a

little thinner than the main branches, and have an average

length of about 35 millims. (of course there are many much

shorter, and some much longer), spring from the main branches

at right angles and at an average distance of 8-12 millims.

apart; some are directed upwards, and others downwards,

whilst others, again, project more or less obliquely forwards,

but none backward. ‘The hinder surface of the coral is, in fact,

completely without branches; all the secondary and tertiary

branches are turned more or less towards the same side,

namely the anterior side. At certain points where secondary

branches have met or crossed each other, an amalgamation

has taken place; but in this there is nothing particularly re-

gular, and it therefore appears to me probable that we may

find specimens in which no such coalescence has taken place

at any pot. All the secondary branches are spinous, like

the stem and main branches ; and the finer they are, the lighter

brown is also their colour.

As only a single specimen is extant, I have in this short

description been unable to separate what is only individual

and what may be regarded as characterizing the species. I

shall now, however, endeavour to bring together in the form

of a diagnosis those peculiarities which, until more material

may be before us, may serve to distinguish it from the other

known Antipathide.

Antipathes arctica, Liitken.

Sclerobasis (axis) cornea, nigra vel nigro-fusca, spinosa, arborem

humilem, latiorem quam altiorem constituit; stipes erectus, teres,

gracilis, niger, basi levis, ceterum spinulis brevissimis, longitudi-

naliter seriatis, cum sulculis minutis alternantibus, asper; rami

(primarii) patentissimi, horizontales fere, bifariam dispositi,

utrinque 10 vel ultra, gracillimi, asperi, colore dilutiore, ramulos

(secundarios, tertiarios) similes emittunt, angulos rectos cum

ramis (primaris, secundariis) formantes, sursum, deorsum vel

antrorsum inclinatos ; rariter coalescunt. Superficies dorsalis vel

posterior arboris totius ramulis omnino caret. Altitudo e. 5 pol-

lices, latitudo 63 poll.

In ventre Scymni microcephalo prope oras Groénlandie septentrio-

nales inventa.

84 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

XU1.—Additions to the Australian Curculionide. Part III.

By Francis P. Pascoz, F.L.8. &e.

[ Plate I. ]

AMYCTERIN®. (Enochroma rubeta.

Mythites asperatus. Misophrice, n. g.

pithecius. hispida. _

degener. Orpha persimilis.

Aidriodes, n. ». Phrenozemia, n. g.

fastigiatus. lyproides.

mendosus. BELinz.

inuus.

Acherres, n. 2.

Belus centralis.

mamillatus. CYLINz.

Ennothus, n. g. Myrmacicelus exsertus.

fallax. . :

Oditesus, n. @. CRYPTORHYNCHIN&.

indutus. Meechius, n. g.

—— lycosarius. anaglyptus.

—— inceenis. Agriocheeta, n. g.

—— perditus. crinita.

—— sulcirostris. Tragopus plagiatus.

buceros. Imaliodes nodulosus.

Sosytelus, n. g. Drassicus, n. g.

lobatus, nigricornis.

illotus.

CYLINDRORHININ2:. Agenopus, n. g.

Centyres ovis. agricola.

Enchymus humeralis.

Nechyrus incomptus.

ERIRHININZE. ZYGOPINE.

Aoplocnemis lineata. Idotasia sequalis,

(Enochroma, n. g. —— evanida.

Mythites asperatus.

M. subelongatus, ovatus, niger, capite supra oculos corrugato ; rostro

latitudine haud longiore, in medio sulco profundo apicem versus

valde ampliato, impresso, emarginatura triangulari indistincta ;

prothorace vix transyerso, ante medium paulo rotundato, postice

angustiore, crebre grosse granulato, in medio leviter suleato ;

elytris basi prothorace paulo latioribus, ovatis, angulo humerali

modice productis, insequaliter grosse tuberculato-granulatis cavi-

tatibus foveiformibus impressis; corpore infra levigato; pedibus

setosulis. Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

This species differs, znter alia, from M. basalis and M. sul-

cicollis in the absence of the larger conical tubercles, those on

the elytra in ill-defined groups of 3-5, the intervals here and

there with foveiform impressions.

Mythites pithecius.

M. ovatus, niger, capite rostroque mamillato-punctatus, hoc basi

quadrilobato, lobis duobus intermediis prominulis, infra medium

the Australian Curculionide. 85

rugoso-impresso, apice emarginatura triangulari parva, margini-

bus elevata ; scapo flexuoso, apicem versus valde incrassato ; pro-

thorace sat fortiter rotundato, apice valde prominulo, in medio

suleato, granulis mamillatis nitidis majusculis, nonnullis confertis,

munito; elytris prothorace vix latioribus, postice gradatim am-

plioribus, angulo humerali recto, transversim grosse undulato-

granulatis, granulis unisetigeris, singulo elytro postice tuberculo

oblongo obtuso obsito; corpore infra sparse punctato-setoso ;

pedibus setis numerosis adspersis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. New South Wales (Monaro).

Allied to M. basalis, but smaller, with a different rostrum

and the elytra more regularly and less strongly sculptured.

Mythites degener.

M. sat anguste ovatus, niger, capite inter oculos carina depressa

notato, supra oculos cristato; rostro tenuiore, basi profunde

transversim sulcato, antice fortiter sulcato, sulco angustiore, versus

apicem minus ampliato ; prothorace latitudine vix longiore, modice

rotundato, irregulariter rude granulato, in medio profunde sul-

cato; elytris basi prothorace haud latioribus, lateribus ¢ sub-

parallelis, 9 subovatis, apicibus parum emarginatis, subseriatim

foveolatis, interstitiis alternis antice paulo, postice magis elevatis

et in tubercula plus minusye nodiformia dissolutis, humeris

antrorsum fortiter productis; abdomine maris in medio longi-

tudinaliter piloso; pedibus setulis albidis adpressis adspersis.

Long. 43-5 lin.

Hab. South Australia (Port Lincoln).

Much less strongly sculptured than JM. sulcicollis, with

only a single depressed carina in front.

JEDRIODES.

Caput antice convexum, circa oculos elevatum ; rostrum breve, ca-

pite angustius, antice bilobum, inter lobos sulcatum, emarginatura

triangulari terminatum ; scrobes breves, arcuate. Antenne bre-

viusculee, clava distincta. Oculi parvi, subovati, a prothorace di-

stantes. Prothorav rotundatus, convexus, apice productus, basi

truncatus, lobis ocularibus distinctis, plus minusve prominulis.

Elytra oblonga vel ovata, humeris antrorsum productis, postice

declivia. Pedes subvalidi; tibiw recte ; tarsi modice elongati.

The small roundish eyes away from the prothorax, notwith-

standing its ocular lobes, offer a good diagnosis of this genus.

Besides the species described below, which are all very di-

stinct, though the sculpture seems liable to some variation,

Huomus nodipennis, Boh., is also to be referred to it. Phali-

dura scorpio, Bois., seems to me to be the species on which

Schénherr founded his genus Hwomus, naming it, but without

any description, #. Fahret.

86 | Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

Atdriodes fastigiatus. Pl. I. fig. 8.

47, subparallelus, niger, opacus; rostro sparse setoso; prothorace

longitudine paulo latiore, utrinque fortiter rotundato, valde con-

yvexo, apice trisulcato, sulco intermedio longiore ad basin currente,

dorso confertim mamillato-granulato, granulis depressis, uniseti-

geris; elytris prothorace paulo latioribus, subparallelis, supra

deplanatis, subseriatim punctatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque

carinatis, carina interiore abbreviata, profunde incisa, exteriore in

tubercula quatuor dissoluto, uno humerali cristato-producto,

duobus sequentibus dentiformibus, ultimo majusculo, lobiformi,

ad marginem declivitatis sito, marginibus postice serrato-setigeris,

apicibus acutis; corpore infra sparse fortiter punctato ; pedibus

punctatis et atro-setosis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The subparallel elytra and strong humeral crest afford a

good differentiation for this species.

Atdriodes mendosus.

44, oblongo-ovalis, niger squamulis silaceis vel subeupreis valde

adspersus; rostro breviore, minus fortiter punctato; prothorace

modice rotundato, antice profunde trifoveato, fovea intermedia

majore, confertim mamillato-tuberculato, tuberculis conicis ele-

vatis, setis nigris coronatis; elytris prothorace vix latioribus,

ovalibus, convexis, lateribus paulo rotundatis, supra subseriatim

granulato-punctatis, singulatim tuberculis circa decem, majusculis,

conicis, in seriebus duabus ordinatis, lateribus, etiam fortiter

sulcato-punctatis, tuberculis parvis inzequalibus obsitis, illis pluri-,

his unisetigeris, angulo humerali carinatis, apiee parum producto,

anguste sed profunde emarginato; corpore infra coriaceo, impune-

tato, setulis minutis adsperso; pedibus silaceo-squamosis, setis

numerosis nigris interjectis. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The granules on the elytra are seated between the punc-

tures; or, rather, the spaces between the punctures are granuli-

form ; in this respect it differs, énter alia, from the next species,

Atdriodes inuus.

47, anguste ovatus, niger, squamulis minutis subcupreis adspersus ;

capite fere impunctato; rostro prothoraceque ut in 4. mendoso ;

elytris basi prothoracis vix latioribus, supra subseriatim impresso-

punctatis, haud granulatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque antice

granulato-carinatis, postice tuberculis conicis, illo duobus, hoe

tribus, instructis, lateribus fortiter suleato-punctatis, interstitiis

valde elevatis, angulo humerali carinatis, apice obtuse rotundato,

vix emarginato; corpore infra coriaceo, obsolete punctato; pedi-

bus ut in precedente. Long. 4-5 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

the Australian Curculionide. 87

ACHERRES.

Caput antice convexum, rotundatum ; rostrum validum, breve, ver-

sus apicem gradatim crassius, basi transversim sulcatum, bialatum,

ala utrinque supra oculum currente; scrobes breves, laterales,

parum arcuate. Oculc parvi, rotundati, a prothorace distantes.

Antenne breviuscule, clava distincta. Prothorax breviter ovatus,

apice truncatus, lobis ocularibus nullis. Hlytra ovalia, basi pro-

thorace hand latiora, utrinque antrorsum paulo producta, postice

declivia, plica epipleurali ad apicem instructa. Pedes subvalidi,

setosi ; femora paulo incrassata; tibiw rect ; tarsi robusti; arti-

culis tribus basalibus triangularibus, ultimo haud bilobo, postice

paulo longiores. Abdomen segmentis marginibus prominulis, 3—4

conjunctim secundo longioribus.

The essential characters of this genus lie in the absence of

the ocular lobes and in the form of the rostrum. The claw-

jot is received in a cavity of the preceding one, and the

three basal are all prolonged beneath into a sort of spine.

This structure is common to most genera of the subfamily,

and more or less to the Brachycerine, Byrsopine, &e.

Acherres mamillatus. Pl. I. fig. 5.

A. niger, opacus, plerumque esquamosus, aliquando sparse silaceo-

maculatus; capite antice impunctato; rostro inter alas late sul-

cato, sulco lateribusque punctis grossis sparse impresso ;_ protho-

race parum longiore quam latiore, sat confertim mamillato, ma-

millis validis, singulis profunde foveatim impressis, setam geren-

tibus, interspatiis (aliquando) ferrugineo-squamosis; elytris in

medio prothorace fere duplo latioribus, grosse seriatim punc-

tatis, dorso mamillis nonnullis depressis, aliis externe tuberculi-

formibus, quarum duabus posticis majoribus, instructis, his punctis

plurimis, illis punctis 1-3 impressis, punctis generaliter setigeris ;

corpore infra sparse punctato-setoso ; pedibus, articulo ultimo tar-

sorum incluso, valde setosis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

ENNOTHUS.

Acherre differt rostro bicornuto, plica epipleurali elytrorum nulla,

et tarsis articulo ultimo bilobo.

In Acherres the base of the rostrum is prolonged into two

wing-shaped bodies extending above and overlapping the eyes

on each side; in this genus it is nearly the same as in Odi-

tesus ; but in the absence of ocular lobes and in habit it agrees

with the former genus.

Ennothus fallax.

E. niger, opacus, supra squamulis piliformibus minutis rarissimis

indutus, subtus squamulis longioribus minus dispersis; capite

88 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

leviter granulato, supra oculos paulo elevato; rostro breviusculo,

cornibus basi remotis, apice profunde emarginato, marginibus

convexis; antennis tenuioribus, subferrugineis, funiculi articulo

secundo primo sesquilongiore, tribus ultimis turbinatis ; prothorace

parvo, parum transverso, basi apiceque sequalibus, rugoso, tuber-

culis fasciculatis, apicalibus quatuor, utrinque tribus locatis, his

spiniformibus, instructo ; elytris ampliato-rotundatis, rugosis, seri-

atim punctatis, tuberculisque conicis, apice setigeris, postice ple-

rumque maj oribus, instructis, regione humerali quadrituberculatis ;

femoribus parum incrassatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

ODITESUS.

Caput antice subplanatum vel leviter excavatum, supra oculos ele-

vatum ; rostrum capite angustius et longius, basi supra elevatum,

bicornutum ; scrobes flexuosee, oblique, infra oculos evanescentes.

Antenne ut in Huomo. Oculi rotundati, ampliati. Prothorawx

suboblongus, utrinque rotundatus, basi apice subsequali; lobis

ocularibus prominulis. Elytra obovata vel elliptica, postice de-

clivia, humeris vix productis, singulo crista 3-4-dentata oblique

instructo, apicibus ad suturam aliquando perparum emarginatis.

Pedes longiusculi, ubique setigeri; femora parum incrassata,

flexuosa; tibiw recte ; tars? hispidi, antici et intermedii modice

dilatati, postici angusti, articulis duobus basalibus longitudine

cequalibus. Abdomen segmentis tertio quartoque conjunctim se-

cundo brevioribus. Corpus oblongo-ovatum.

The species of this genus are very homogeneous in point of

habit, the head and rostrum affording some of the most pro-

minent characters. O. buceros differs in having no spines on

the dorsal portion of the elytra. They all apparently vary in

the amount of squamosity, some being prettily varied with

white; the scales probably drop off with age. The females

appear to be smaller and more ovate.

Oditesus indutus. PI. I. fig. 6.

O. niger, opacus, parce fulvescenti-squamulosus ; capite inter oculos.

leviter bicarinulato; rostro vage setoso, antice excavato, cornibus

basi distantibus, divaricatis, in carinulis duabus descendentibus

terminatis ; clava antennarum breviter obovata, obtusa; protho-

race basi apice haud latiore, antice trisubsulcato, dorso utrinque

in medio tuberculis tribus conicis, intermedio majore, instructo,

apice quatuor, aliis etiam dispersis, lateribus mamillato-granu-

latis; elytris breviusculis, obovatis, tuberculis granulitormibus

Tan erosis, quorum duobus pasanad majoribus, munitis, elytro

singulo tuberculis validis conicis octo etiam instructis, scl. uno

exteriors prope humerum, ceteris in seriebus duabus locatis,

spatiis inter tubercula squamositate grisea vestitis ; corpore infra

sparse punctato-setoso ; pedibus valide setosis. Long. 33 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

the Australian Curculionide. 89

Oditesus lycosarius.

O. niger, opacus, haud squamosus ; capite inter oculos sat profunde

excavato, haud carinulato; rostro vage setoso, antice supra scrobes

fortiter excavato, cornibus suberectis, basi approximatis, incras-

satis, in carinulis brevibus descendentibus terminatis; clava an-

tennarum breviter elliptica, acuminata; prothorace basi apice

latiore, in medio antice subsulcato, supra tuberculis inequalibus

mamilliformibus, vel plus minusve conicis, illis singulis setam

gerentibus, instructo, lateribus mamillato-granulatis ; elytris sub-

ellipticis, fortiter seriatim punctatis, tuberculis ut in precedente,

sed apicibus tuberculorum evidenter setosis, et interspatiis haud

granulatis; corpore infra vage setoso-punctato; pedibus valide

setosis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The cavity below the protuberances on the rostrum, which,

however, varies in size, seems to afford a ready diagnostic

of this species from the last.

Oditesus incenis.

O. niger, opacus, sejunctim pallide ferrugineo- vel aliquando albido-

squamulosus; capite inter oculos subplanato; rostro angustiore,

setoso, cornibus erectis, magis approximatis, inter ea profunde

fisso, carinula obsoleta; prothorace magis oblongo, basi apice

evidenter latiore, in medio longitudinaliter sulcato, tuberculis

plurimis conicis, nonnullis submamilliformibus, instructo, lateri-

bus mamillatis; elytris obovatis, seriatim punctatis, basi sutu-

ram versus subcarinato-tuberculatis, singulo elytro tuberculis

validis conicis ut in specie preced. munitis, his interspatiisque

squamulosis; corpore infra pedibusque ut in precedentibus.

Long. 3-3; lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The rostrum is narrower in this species ; and the carinula is

broader, or has in fact ceased to be one. The fissure between

the horns is very marked.

Oditesus perditus.

O. niger, opacus, sejunctim griseo-squamulosus; capite inter oculos

parum excavato, sat dense squamoso; rostro basi squamoso, cor-

nibus valde productis, validis; prothorace antice in medio sul-

cato, basi apice vix latiore, supra tuberculis mamilliformibus

esquamosis eequalibus irregulariter notato, dorso utrinque in medio

tuberculo conico breviusculo munito; elytris subellipticis, ceteris

ut in preecedentibus. Long. 3? lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

90 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

Odttesus sulctrostris.

O. niger, opacus, plerumque esquamosus ; capite inter oculos modice

excavato, rugulis verticalibus notato; rostro in medio longitudi-

naliter sulcato, cornibus brevibus, sulco inter ea currente; pro-

thorace confertim tuberculato, tuberculis submamilliformibus,

nonnullis valide conicis, in medio longitudinaliter sulcato ; elytris

ovatis, fortiter seriatim punctatis, lateribus ampliato punctatis,

maculatim albo-squamosis, interstitio tertio antice tuberculato-

carinato, tuberculo ultimo segregato, nodiformi, post id tuberculis

duobus, ultimo minore, ad declivitatem sito, interstitio quinto

tuberculis tribus, alteroque exteriore humero approximato, totis

conicis, instructis ; corpore infra pedibusque ut in praecedentibus.

Long. 33 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

As the name indicates, there is a well-marked groove on

the rostrum—a character which I have not observed in any

other species, except in a very slight degree.

Oditesus buceros.

O. niger, opacus, fere esquamosus ; capite inter oculos modice exca-

vato; rostro basi valde gibboso, cornibus brevibus, inter ea pro-

funde fisso, antice rugoso, minus excavato ; prothorace confertim

tuberculato, tuberculis plerumque mamilliformibus, uno utrinque

conspicuo, magis conico; elytris ovatis, supra paulo depressis,

fortiter seriatim punctatis, lateribus ampliato-punctatis, apice

rotundatis, interstitiis tertio quintoque carinatis; illo postice

nodos duos gerente, ultimo majore, hoc tuberculis tribus instructo,

primo elongato, sequentibus conicis, etiam tuberculo magno conico

exteriore humero approximato; corpore infra pedibusque ut in

precedentibus. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

The absence of tubercles on the dorsum of the elytra, and

the linear smooth carina of the third interstice for the greater

part of its extent, will at once differentiate this species from

any of the preceding. All the above from King George’s

Sound were collected by Mr. Brewer, who is, at the instance

of Mr. Wilson Saunders, F.R.S., journeying in the western

part of Australia.

SosyTELUS.

Caput antice planatum, vel paulo excavatum, supra oculos elevatum ;

rostrum difforme, crassum, in medio gibbosum, antice excavatum ;

scrobes flexuosee, infra oculos terminate. Antenne valide ; funi-

culus brevis, articulo ultimo clave adnato. Prothorax sexangu-

laris, dorso depressus, lobis ocularibus prominulis. Hlytra postice

gradatim latiora, supra planata, humeris antrorsum productis,

postice abrupte declivia, apice producto-ampliata, Pedes sub-

the Australian Curculionide. 91

validi, ubique setigeri; tibiw rectse; tarsi lati, postici ceteris

parum longiores, articulo basali triangulari. Abdomen planatum,

segmentis 3-4 conjunctim secundo longioribus.

This genus agrees with Oditesus in the flatness or concavity

of the front; but the rostrum is short and stout, and not cor-

nuted ; the tarsi also are, for this group, unusually dilated.

Sosytelus lobatus. Pl. I. fig. 1.

S. niger, opacus, squamulis minutis rarissime adspersus; capite

rostroque erebre rude punctatis, hoe capite paulo angustiore ;

prothorace crebre mamillato-granulato, in medio longitudinaliter

sulcato; elytris prothorace latioribus, dorso postice ad latera

lobato-productis, supra subtuberculato-rugosis, lateribus valide

granulatis, apicibus ad suturam dentato-productis; corpore infra

rugosulo, vage punctato. Long. 4—44 lin.

Hab. New South Wales (Sydney).

The table below includes all the genera of the short-scaped

Amycterine which form Lacordaire’s “* Huomides.” I would

remark, however, that, whilst the Amycterine are a perfectly

natural assemblage, the division into two “ groups” appears

to me to be a purely artificial arrangement.

Propectus entire.

With ocular lobes.

Head convex in front.

Eyes partly covered by the ocular lobes.

Prothorax produced at the apex.

ivostrumi short, stout, jcc acters eee sere Euomus, Schonh.

Rostrum longer, narrowed or constricted

at the base.

Tarsi short.

Prothorax angularly produced at

the ICES i. F aierais ce a) austere ssi Tetralophus, Waterh.

Prothorax rounded at the sides.... Melanegis, Pasc.

Tarsi of the posterior and intermediate

dees long, JIMGaD <1 01; 2550* since 2 Dialeptopus, Pase.

Prothorax truncate at the apex.

Terminal joints of the funicle moniliform Mythites, Schénh.

Terminal joints of the funicle transverse Atychoria, Pasc.

Hyes free from the ocular lobes .......... Adriodes, n. 2.

Head concave in front.

Mars, NUTTOWe makers) cfetmiale:siciste/«)<.<'e 5; oatele so alone Oditesus, n. g.

INAS lnpilas 5 one Meee Mee eee ee ae Sosytelus, 0. 2.

Without ocular lobes.

Elytra with an epipleural fold behind...... Acherres, n. &.

Elytra without an epipleural fold.......... Ennothus, n. g.

Propectus excavated 250 sc. c aie ee sos onto wens Amorphorhinus, Lac.

Centyres ovis.

C. breviter ovatus, piceus, omnino dense griseo-squamosus ; rostro

paulo elongato; antennis ut in C. turgido, sed scapo breviore ;

92 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

prothorace transverso, utrinque rotundato, lobis ocularibus fere

obsoletis; elytris ampliatis, modice elevatis, apice acuminatis,

striato-punctatis, punctis singulis squama minuta instructis, inter-

stitiis convexis; corpore infra squamis argenteo-lavatis; tibiis

anticis intus denticulatis. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. Port Dennison (Queensland).

A more depressed form than C. turgidus ; the rostrum longer,

the ocular lobes obsolete, &c. In the recently published

volume of Gemminger and Harold’s ‘ Catalogus,’ Centyres,

Enchymus, and Catastygnus* are placed directly after Leptops.

I do not know whether this has been done inadvertently, be-

cause Leptops immediately precedes them in the work in which

these three genera were first proposed; they are, however,

certainly phanerognathous, and should be placed further on,

near Perperus.

Enchymus humeralis.

E. niger, supra griseo-, subtus lateribusque dense argenteo-squamosus ;

capite rostroque setulis concoloribus adspersis; antennis ferrugi-

neis, griseo-pubescentibus et sparse setulosis; clava subnuda ;

funiculo minus longo; prothorace ante medium magis rotun-

dato, postice angustiore, rugoso-granulato, supra obscure albido

trivittato ; elytris pone medium latioribus, fortiter striato-punc-

tatis, interstitiis convexis, setulis numerosis griseis instructis, hu-

meris dentato-productis, apicibus subacuminatis; tibiis anticis

intus denticulatis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

Differs, inter alia, from EH. punctostriatus in the toothed

shoulders and in the prothorax not being canaliculate.

Aoplocnemis lineata.

A, nigra, nitida, squamis aureo-viridulis lineatim decorata ; capite

sejunctim viridi-squamoso; rostro antennisque subferrugineis,

illo, apice excepto, rude lineatim impresso; prothorace confertim

granulato-punctato, dorso lineis tribus lateribusque squamosis ;

elytris striato-punctatis, interstitiis alternis nudis, nitidis, sub-

granulatis, reliquis sat dense squamosis, apice rotundatis ; corpore

infra sat dense viridulo-squamoso ; pedibus subferrugineis, griseo

pilosis, Long. 4 lin.

Hab. North Australia.

A well-marked species on account of its golden-green stripes.

I have two more species nearly allied to A. rufipes.

CHNOCHROMA.

Ab Aoplocneme differt scrobibus infra haud conniventibus, ab oculis

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. vol. viii. pp. 93-96.

the Australian Curculionide. 93

utrinque sat remote desinentibus ; dds anticis apicem versus fal-

catis ; funiculo articulis ultimis transversis.

From the other genera allied to Aoplocnemis this is differen-

tiated by the curved anterior tibize, which are otherwise some-

what peculiar, the apex not being angularly dilated and the

mucro given off at one of the angles, but passing gradually

into the mucro, which thus becomes a continuation of the

tibia; this is clearly indicated on the Plate (fig. 18).

(nochroma rubeta.

@. anguste oblonga, rufo-ferruginea, opaca ; capite rostroque crebre

tenuiter punctulatis, hoc prothorace parum breviore, apice paulo

depresso ; funiculo articulis duobus basalibus longitudine sequali-

bus (primo crassiore), ceteris brevibus ; oculis ovatis; prothorace

oblongo, utrinque rotundato, basi truncato, apice angustiore, con-

fertim granulato-punctato, pilis parvis flavis parce adsperso ;

elytris oblongo-subcordatis, suleato-punctatis, interstitiis conferte

granulatis, squamis ochraceis maculas adspersas, unam communem

in medio formantibus; corpore infra denudato; pedibus parce

pilosis. Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

I owe this, and many other species, to my indefatigable

correspondent Mr. Masters of Sydney.

MiISOPHRICE.

Rostrum modice elongatum, paulo arcuatum, basi crassius; scrobes

preemedians, infra rostrum currentes ; scapus longiusculus, apice

clavatus ; funiculus 6-articulatus, articulis primo et secundo paulo

longioribus, illo crassiore, ceteris turbinatis; clava valida, di-

stincta. Ocult magni, prominuli, rotundati. Prothoraa subcylin-

dricus, margine antico truncato, lobis ocularibus nullis. Scutellum

punctiforme. /ytra ovalia, prothorace manifeste latiora. Pedes

validi; femora in medio crassa, mutica; tébie flexuose; tarsi

triarticulati, articulo tertio dilatato, integro. Abdomen segmentis

tertio quartoque conjunctim secundo longioribus.

The six-jointed funicle, and tarsi without the claw-joint as

in Anoplus, are at once diagnostic of this genus. Lndalus

and Tanysphyrus, also belonging to this section of the sub-

family, have a six-jointed funicle, but the normal number of

tarsal joints.

Misophrice hispida.

M. oblongo-ovata, nigra, supra pedibusque setis longis erectis ejus-

dem coloris sat vage instructa; rostro apicem versus setis dece-

dentibus munito, in medio lineis duabus longitudinaliter impresso;

antennis nigris, subnitidis, clava breviter ovata; prothorace ob-

longo, antice paulo angustiore, basi parum bisinuato, pube nivea

adsperso; scutello angusto; elytris striato-punctatis, punctis sub-

Ann. & Mag. N. ITist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 8

94 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

quadratis approximatis, basi lateribusque plaga magna nivea e

squamulis condensatis ornatis ; pedibus squamositate alba indutis,

setis minoribus interjectis. Long. 1} lin.

Hab. South Australia.

Orpha persimilis.

O. subdepressa, picea, nitida, rarissime nivyeo-pilosula; ( 9 ) rostro

prothorace duplo longiore, subtiliter lineatim punctulato ; scapo

articuloque basali funiculi flavo-testaceis, ceeteris clavaque piceis,

sparse niveo-pilosis; prothorace subconico, utrinque rotundato,

sat confertim tenuiter punctulato, pone apicem constricto; scu-

tello semiorbiculari; elytris latitudine duplo longioribus, sub-

striatim punctatis, interstitiis planatis et impunctatis; corpore

infra pedibusque fuscis, sparse albo-pilosis ; unguiculis flavidis.

Long. 143-2 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

Very like O. flavicornis; but, besides the absence of pubes-

cence, that species has a much coarser punctation, and the

elytra strongly sulcate, with the intervals finely punctured ;

the coloration of the antenne is also different. In this species

the scrobes are not connivent beneath, the septum between

them passing distinctly to the throat; in O. flavicornis its

form is wedge-shaped, and it terminates at the middle of the

scrobes, which at that point become connivent.

PHRENOZEMIA.

Caput conicum, rostro continuatum. Oculi depressi, rotundati, a

prothorace distantes. ostrum cylindricum, modice elongatum, sat

validum, parum arcuatum ; scrobes preemediane, infra rostrum et

ad oculos currentes. Scapus oculum vix attingens ; funiculus 7-

articulatus, articulo primo crassiore, secundo longitudine sequali,

ceteris brevioribus, duobus ultimis turbinatis; clava distincta.

Prothorax subcylindricus, margine antico truncatus, basi vix bi-

sinuatus. Scutellum punctiforme. Hlytra oblonga, prothorace

multo latiora, humeris rotundata. Pedes mediocres; femora in

medio incrassata, mutica; tibiw flexuose; tarsi articulis tribus

basalibus brevibus, tertio vix dilatato, ultimo elongato ; wnguwi-

culi simplices. Abdomen segmentis tertio quartoque conjunctim

secundo brevioribus ; sutura prima arcuata.

In Lacordaire’s tabulation of his “ groupe Eugnomides,” one

of the five subdivisions of the Erirhinine, this genus would

be placed next to Ophthalmoborus. 'These tabulations are

generally of an artificial character ; yet it would be often diffi-

cult to suggest a better place for the genera than they offer.

Such is the case with Phrenozemia, as the rostrum and de-

pressed eyes.do not allow of an approximation to any genus

of the group. In the species described below the scales have

the Australian Curculionide. 95

a pearly lustre, those on the head are deeply hollowed out at

the base, giving the head itself the appearance of being closely

punctured. Hoplocneme, White (Voy. Erebus and Terror,

Entom. p. 14), without doubt belongs to this group, and is

closely allied to Stephanorhynchus of the same author. Mr.

White says, in regard to its affinity, that “ it is not far removed

from Orchestes.”

Phrenozemia lyprovdes.

P, oblonga, nigra, pedibus rufo-testaceis, squamulis griseo-albis

omnino dense tecta, squamulis piliformibus raro adspersa; rostro,

apice excepto, toto squamuloso, in medio supra lineis tribus ele-

vatis instructo; antennis rufo-testaceis, sparse niveo-pilosis, pro-

thorace latitudine paulo longiore, utrinque leviter rotundato,

punctis plurimis rude impresso; elytris latitudine plus duplo

longioribus, striato-punctatis, interstitiis parum convexis, quarto

quintoque versus apicem tuberculo parvo instructis, apice rotun-

datis ; tarsis articulo ultimo rufo-testaceo, apice unguiculisque

nigris. Long. 12 lin.

Hab. King George’s Sound.

Belus centralis. Pl. I. fig. 4.

B. linearis, elongatus, fuscus, supra confertim granulatus, impunc-

tatus ; prothorace utrinque vittis duabus, elytrisque macula com-

muni in medio, e pilis condensatis ochraceis formatis, notatis;

antennis articulis duobus basalibus piceis, nitidis (primo quam

secundo vix duplo longiore), ceteris pallidioribus ; elytris apice

productis, lateribus aliquando maculatim ochraceo-pilosis; cor-

pore infra pedibusque albido pilosis. Long. 84 lin. (rostr. incl.).

Hab. South Australia.

This species has the outline of B. bidentatus, but differs in

the sculpture, and in having a central spot common to both

elytra.

Myrmacicelus exsertus.

M. oblongo-ovatus, ater, nitidus; rostro sat sparse subtiliter punc-

tulato ; prothorace subtilissime vage punctulato ; elytris impune-

tatis; tarsis articulo basali antice rotundato, ultimo a precedente

distincto et paulo exserto. Long. 2 lin. (rostr. inel.).

Hab. West Australia.

My specimens of this Curculionid are a little larger than

M. formicarius, Chevr., and the punctation, weak as it is, is

decidedly stronger; but it differs essentially in not having the

claw-joint embayed as it were between the lobes of the pre-

ceding one, so as to give the tarsus the appearance of being

three-jointed only, as in formicarius. Guérin has given a

96 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

figure of the latter in the ‘ Voyage de la Coquille,’ Entom.

pl. 6. fig. 7.

Mecuivs.

Caput hemisphericum; rostrum tenue, arcuatum; scrobes ante-

median, infra rostrum currentes. Scapus oculum attingens ;

funiculus 7-articulatus, articulo primo crassiore; clava adnata,

ovata. Oculi rotundati, laterales, grosse granulati. Prothorax

breviter subconicus, apice productus, lobis ocularibus distinctis.

Elytra cordata, prothorace multo latiora. Femora valida, lon-

giuscula, infra dentata; tibee breves, flexuose, sulcate; tarsi

breviusculi. Rima pectoralis usque ad marginem posteriorem

metasterni extensa. Abdomen segmentis duobus basalibus am-

pliatis; sutura prima distincta.

The only exponent of this genus has much the habit of

Melanterius porcatus, Er.; but, the metasternum entering

into the formation of the pectoral canal, the genus must be re-

ferred to the neighbourhood of Mecistocerus and Aidemonus*,

although differing from both in the characters of the antenna,

legs, sculpture, and in the pectoral canal passing behind the in-

termediate coxe.

Mechius anaglyptus.

M. breviter ovatus, convexus, nitide niger; capite crebre punctato ;

rostro prothoraci longitudine «quali, in medio fere obsolete cari-

nato; antennis fulvo-testaceis ; funiculo articulo secundo primo

longiore; reliquis brevibus, gradatim magis transversis; protho-

race antice paulo tubulato, utrinque rotundato, basi bisinuato,

confertim punctato, punctis nonnullis confluentibus, totis in fundo

squamulam minutam albam gerentibus ; scutello angusto; elytris

profunde late sulcatis, sulcis fortiter foveatis, interstitiis carinatis

et utrinque uniseriatim punctulatis; abdomine segmentis duobus

basalibus, femoribusque grosse punctatis, punctis unisquamigeris ;

tibiis basi sat valde arcuatis, sulcis uniseriatim albo-setosis ; tarsis

extus unguiculisque rufescentibus. Long. 23 lin.

Tlab. Wide Bay.

AGRIOCH ATA.

Caput parum exsertum; rostrum yalidum, equilatum, arcuatum ;

scrobes premedianse, oblique, infra rostrum exeuntes. Scapus

oculum haud attingens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis tribus

ultimis turbinatis; clava conica, distincta. Oculi sat magni,

ovati, laterales. Prothorax transversus, basi rotundatus, lobis

ocularibus nullis. Hlytra ampla, prothorace multo latiora. Pecdes

* Edemonus, Schonherr, not Lacordaire; the former author expressly

states 44. eminentepunctatus to be the type; Lacordaire describes the

genus from 4, Erichsoni: the two species are not congeneric, as Lacor-

daire himself states; the latter, therefore, should receive a new generic

name.

the Australian Curculionide. 97

mediocres ; femora crassa, mutica; tébiew recte, apice haud unci-

nate vel mucronate ; tarsi articulis primo secundoque late trian-

gularibus, tertio fortiter bilobo; wnguiculi liberi. Cow antice

haud contigue. Pectus longitudinaliter canaliculatum. Meso-

sternum angustum, depressum. Metasternwm breve. Abdomen

segmentis duobus basalibus amplis.

The character of the pectoral canal places this genus in

Lacordaire’s arrangement with his “ sows-tribw Ithyporides,”’

but not in the “ groupe” of that name, nor in any of the re-

maining six into which he has divided his “ sous-tribu.” It

is, however, questionable whether he would have not placed

it in the Erirhinine, like Awbeonymus, which also has a pec-

toral canal. In a family so difficult to classify as the Cureu-

lionidee, I think it would be better to adhere more strictly to

characters, even if it should in some cases lead us away from an

apparently more natural arrangement. The species described

below is, from its hairiness and coloration, not unlike Ocladius

variabilis, Ol., after which genus I am content for the present

to place it.

Agriocheta crinita. PI. I. fig. 2.

A, late ovata, modice convexa, nigra, supra pilis longis nigris, non-

nullis albis, vestita ; rostro capite duplo longiore, sat sparse piloso ;

antennis ferrugineis ; scapo ab oculo sat longe terminato ; funiculo

articulis duobus basalibus eequalibus, tertio praecedente fere duplo

breviore ; prothorace antice utrinque rotundato, postice parallelo,

lateribus dense niveo-pilosis ; scutello subrotundato ; elytris cor-

dato-ovatis, striato-punctatis, fasciis duabus interruptis, antica

arcuata ante medium sita, e pilis densis niveis formatis, ornatis ;

corpore infra pedibusque sat sparse longe niveo-pilosis. Long.

3 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Rockhampton).

Tragopus plagiatus. Pl. I. fig. 7.

T. oblongus, utrinque cylindrico-conicus, fuscus, parce silaceo-

squamosus ; capite rostroque sat dense omnino squamosis; antennis

piceis ; funiculo articulis duobus basalibus equalibus, tertio sub-

conico, precedentis dimidia longitudine ; oculis tenuiter granu-

latis ; prothorace conico, utrinque perparum rotundato, basi vix

bisinuato ; elytris basi prothorace vix latioribus, postice gradatim

parum latioribus, supra valde convexis, fere obsolete foveatis,

transversim interrupte undulato-granulatis, singulis plagis duabus

pallidioribus, una ante alteram fere obsoletam pone medium, no-

tatis; corpore infra nigra maculis silaceis lateraliter notato ;

femoribus subtus dente minuto armatis, posticis abdomen haud

superantibus. Long. 6 lin.

flab. Queensland.

98 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Additions to

The outline of this species is somewhat different from that of

T. asper and its congeners. One of the latter from Java, and

a very near ally, has coarsely facetted eyes. A good generic

character may be found occasionally to be only of specific

value.

Imaliodes nodulosus.

1. ovatus, niger, squamulis griseis suberectis sat dense tectus ; rostro

capite fere duplo longiore; antennis piceis; funiculo articulis

duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus, tertio quartoque con-

junctim precedente brevioribus; prothorace utrinque fortiter

rotundato, antice valde constricto; scutello transverso; elytris

breviter ovatis, sulcato-punctatis, interstitiis, posticis exceptis,

nodis elevatis 2-4 singulatim munitis ; femoribus modice incras-

satis, auticis dente minuto instructis; tarsis articulo ultimo sub-

testaceo, sparse piloso. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Rockhampton.

This species differs from its two congeners in having a

small but distinct scutellum, and in its nodulose elytra.

DRASSICUS.

Caput inter oculos subplanatum ; rostrum mediocre, validum ; scrobes

prémediane, laterales, Scapus breviusculus, oculum haud attin-

gens; funiculus 7-articulatus, articulis duobus basalibus longiori-

bus, ceteris subturbinatis ; clava distincta. Prothorax subconicus,

apice productus, utrinque paulo rotundatus, basi truncatus vel

perparum bisinuatus, lobis ocularibus distinctis. Hlytra ovata,

basi prothorace haud latiora, humeris nullis. Pedes validi;

femora modice crassa, postica brevia ; tbiw breves, rect ; tarsi

breves, articulo tertio late bilobo ; wnguzculi liberi. Rima pecto-

ralis pone coxas anticas terminata, apice fornicata. Abdomen

segmento secundo amplo.

This genus differs from Tragopus in its short legs and thick

femora, and from Jmaliodes in the elytra not projecting beyond

the prothorax at the base.

Drassicus nigricornis. Pl. I. fig. 3.

D, ovatus, convexus, niger, squamis griseis sat dense omnino tectus,

aliis nigris erectis adspersus; rostro capite plus duplo longiore,

versus apicem evidenter latiore ; antennis piceo-nigris ; funiculo

articulis duobus basalibus equalibus, reliquis conjunctim fere

longioribus ; prothorace in medio rotundato, antice cito, postice

gradatim paulo angustiore, basi perparum bisinuato, lobis ocula-

ribus prominulis ; elytris orbiculato-ovatis, seriatim grosse punc-

tatis, punctis plerumque squama antice laxe instructis ; femoribus

anticis dente minuto armatis. Long. 34 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

the Australian Curculionide. 99

Drassicus tllotus.

D. precedenti similis, sed squamositate crustacea sculpturam occul-

tante supra tectus; articulo secundo funiculi quam primo. evi-

denter longiore; prothorace apice magis producto, pone medium

lateribus parallelis; corpore infra pedibusque sat dense griseo-

squamosis ; femoribus anticis dente acuto armatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

When the squamosity is removed, the punctation on the

prothorax is seen to be nearly obsolete; on the elytra it con-

sists of large, rather closely set fovez.

AGENOPUS.

Poroptero affinis, sed tarsis linearibus, infra nudis, sparse setosulo-

marginatis, articulo tertio haud bilobo.

The only other genus among the allies of Poropterus with

linear tarsi is Mormosintes ; but in that genus they are hispid

or spongy beneath, as in Poropterus, and the femora are linear,

and the eyes finely facetted. The species described below is

exceedingly like Poropterus musculus ; but, besides the generic

differences, the base of the prothorax and the proportional

sizes of the three intermediate abdominal segments will, cnter

alia, at once distinguish it.

Agenopus agricola.

A, ovatus, supra depressus, niger, indumento fusco, squamulis erectis

setulisque raris nigris interjectis, indutus; rostro valido, sat bre-

viusculo, rude squamoso; antennis subpiceis, funiculo articulis

duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus (primo crassiore), reliquis

subturbinatis; prothorace latitudine paulo longiore, apice paulo

producto, antice constricto, deinde rotundato, lateribus gradatim

parum angustiore, basi fortiter bisinuato, lobis ocularibus distinctis,

supra ineequali, fere obsolete foveato; elytris supra sat confertim

leviter foveatis, basi circa scutellum elevatis, lateribus subparal-

lelis, declivitate perparum latioribus, deinde sat abrupte angus-

tioribus, apice late rotundatis, humeris paulo prominulis ; corpore

infra pedibusque remote rude punctato-squamigeris; abdomine

segmento secundo duobus sequentibus conjunctim breviore ; tibiis

brevibus. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Western Australia.

Nechyrus incomptus. Pl. I. fig. 9.

JV. ovatus, supra depressus, niger, squamis erectis, plerumque fasci-

culatis, concoloribus vel fuscis, nonnullis griseis, adspersus ; capite

parvo; rostro prothorace vix breviore, dimidio apicali nitido,

lateraliter sulcato, remote tenuiter punctulato; antennis piceis ;

scapo sat breviusculo, gradatim crassiore ; funiculo articulis duo-

100 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

bus basalibus sequalibus, reliquis subturbinatis; clava breviter

ovata; prothorace utrinque usque ad medium gradatim latiore,

deinde lateribus parallelis, apice producto, supra basin versus

laté leviter excavato; scutello semiorbiculari; elytris oblongo-

cordatis, rude remote punctatis, humeris modice prominulis, apice

rotundatis, singulis tuberculis fasciculatis sex biseriatim obsitis ;

corpore infra remote punctato, punctis in fundo squamam griseam

gerentibus ; pedibus squamis elongatis asperrime vestitis; tibiis

minus elongatis, rude squamosis. Long, 4-5 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

Near the Ceram N. porcatus, which has also shorter tibiz,

but, ¢nter alia, with scattered foveate punctures on the elytra,

instead of their being sulcate-punctured. This species has a

resemblance to some species of Poropterus, from which genus,

however, Nechyrus is known by the pectoral canal open at the

apex and extending to the posterior part of the intermediate

cox; from Cnemargus, to which I think it is most nearly

allied among the genera known to Lacordaire, it is at once

differentiated by its straight tibie.

Idotasia cequalis.

J, elliptica, nigra, nitida; rostro arcuato, basi fronteque lineis lon-

gitudinalibus acute elevatis; antennis piceis ; oculis tenui-granu-

latis ; prothorace sat fortiter vage punctulato, punctis squama

nivea instructis ; elytris subtilissime striato-punctulatis ; femoribus

parum incrassatis, muticis, vage lineatim albo-squamulosis; tibiis

suleatis, rectis, posticis intus subflexuosis. Long. 1% lin.

Hab. Cape York; Rockhampton.

Near the Moluccan J. elliptica, but the prothorax less

strongly and closely punctured, and the femora lineated but

not toothed.

Idotasia evanida.

I. elliptica, nigra, nitida; rostro arcuato, basi fronteque lineis lon-

gitudinalibus elevatis ; antennis piceis; oculis tenui-granulatis ;

prothorace sat tenuiter vage punctulato, punctis squamula minu-

tissima instructis ; elytris subtilissime striatis, vix punctulatis ;

femoribus haud incrassatis, sulcato-lineatis, muticis; tibiis sulca-

tis, rectis. Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Wide Bay).

Prothorax and elytra less strongly punctured than in the

preceding, the latter with the least possible vestiges of punc-

tuation, and the femora nearly linear; the posterior femora in

this and its congeners, as well as in allied genera, have the

upper margin densely covered with snowy-white scales. A

figure of Jdotasia nasuta is given in this Magazine, ser. 4.

Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina. 101

vol. vii. pl. 16. fig. 2, which, the femora excepted, will give a

good idea of the two species here described.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. Sosytelus lobatus; 1 a, side view of the head.

Fig. 2. Agriocheta crinita; 2a, side view of the head.

Fig. 3. Drassicus nigricornis; 3 a, side view of the head.

tg. 4. Belus centralis.

Fig. 5. Acherres mamillatus; 5 a, side view of the head.

Fig. 6. Oditesus indutus ; 6 a, side view of the head.

"g. 7. Tragopus plagiatus.

Fig. 8. Aidriodes fastigiatus ; 8 a, side view of the head.

Fig. 9. Nechyrus incomptus.

Fiig.10. Side view of the head of Misophrice hispida; 10a, tarsus of the

same.

Fig. 11. Side view of the head of Nechyrus incomptus *.

Fig. 12. » - yy Oditesus buceros.

Fig. 15. “ ns 9 Amorphorhinus australis, for comparison.

Fig. 14. a = y <Acantholophus Marshami, ditto.

Fig. 15. “- ay », Luomus insculptus, ditto.

Fig. 16. Upper view of the head of Phrenozemia lyproides.

Fig. 17. Side view of the head of Agenopus agricola.

Fig. 18. Fore leg of Gnochroma rubeta.

Fig. 19. Tarsus of Myrmacicelus exsertus; 19 a, tarsus of M. formicarius,

for comparison.

Fig. 20. Fore tarsus and part of tibia of Sosytelus lobatus.

Fig. 21. Fore tarsus and part of tibia of Agenopus agricola (unfortunately

reversed),

XIU1.—Deseription, with Illustrations, of a new Species of

Aplysina from the N.W. Coast of Spain. By H. J. Carter,

HR; Occ.

[Plate VIL]

THERE is a little family of purely horny sponges (that is,

aspiculous, and without foreign objects in the core of the homy

fibre) in which there are as yet only two genera mentioned,

viz. Aplysina and Luffaria. For this family I propose,the

name of “ Aplysinide,” after Aristotle’s term for certain

sponges which he has described as follows :—

“There is also another species, called Aplysia (amducia),

because it cannot be washed. This has very large passages ;

but the other parts of the substance are quite compact. When

cut open it is more compact and smooth than the sponge, and

the whole is like a lung; of all the sponges this one is con-

fessed to have the most sensation and to be the most enduring.

They are plainly seen in the sea near the sponges; for the

* The lateral groove below the insertion of the scape, in a line with

the scrobe, is made rather too much like the scrobe itself by the en-

2raver.

102. - Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

other sponges are white as the mud settles down upon them,

but these are always black.” (Hist. An., trans. by R.

Cresgwell, Bk. V. chap. xiv., Arist. V. xvi. 10.)

How far Aristotle meant the sponges now called “Aply-

sine,” or whether he included others among them under the

general name of “Aplysia,” it would be waste of time to

discuss. Suflice it, therefore, to state that the description comes

very near to the Aplysine of the Adriatic Sea at the present

day, and that the name has thus been well chosen for such

sponges.

On referring to Schmidt’s invaluable work on the Sponges

of the Adriatic Sea (1862, p. 25), we may there find that

Nardo, in 1834 (‘Isis’), first adopted the term “<Aplysine”’

(originally named by him “‘Aplysie”’) for certain sponges, one

of which he called A. aérophoba, and that Schmidt, in 1862,

elucidated this species, in the publication to which I have just

alluded, both by description and illustration—that is to say,

that he added the sine gud non for the identification of Aply-

sina, viz. the character of the fibre of which the skeleton is

composed. So far, then, Schmidt has established this genus.

Now as regards that of Luffaria, which Schmidt has also

accepted (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 80, 1870) :—

In 1845 (Annals, vol. xvi. p. 403) Dr. Bowerbank de-

scribed a sponge from the West Indies, which had been pre-

sented to him by Dr. Veronge, as follows: “ This specimen

is in the form of a cluster of cylindrical tubes about twelve

inches in height and two in diameter, the thickness of the

tube being about half an inch’”—the skeleton of which is

stated at the commencement of the description to be “ com-

posed of a network of keratose fibres inosculating in every

direction without order. Fibre cylindrical, continuously fistular,

without spicula. Cavity of the fibre simple.”

No reference is made by Dr. Bowerbank to any previous

authority—although one of the highest, viz. Esper, had figured

this* sponge in three plates successively in 1794 (Pflanzen-

thiere, tab. xx., xxi., and xxi. a), as confirmed by Dr. Ehlers

in 1870 in his Synonymy of the Esperian Collection at the

Museum of the University of Erlangen, wherein he identifies

Esper’s Spongia fistularis (that is, the one figured in the above

mentioned plates) with the Luffaria jfistularis of De Fonbressin

and Michelotti, given in their descriptions and illustrations of

the sponges of the Caribbean Sea (Natuurk. Verh. Holland.

Maat. Wet. te Haarlem, vol. xxi. 1864); the latter authors

having already, in their description and figure of this species

(op. cit. p. 60, pl. 10. fig. 2), come to the same conclusion.

Dr. Bowerbank, it is true, named the species “ Verongia,”

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 103

after Dr. Veronge, who gave him the specimen ; and the fibre

is well characterized by Lens Aldous’s figure (Annals, pl. 13.

fig. 7, 1. c.), though much better, by the same artist, in

Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘ British Spongiadee’ (pl. 13. fig. 266, 1864) ;

and so far the priority of ‘‘ naming” is in tavour of Dr,

Bowerbank. But when we find Dr. Bowerbank in the fol-

lowing page identifying his “Verongia” in a fossilized state

with the conferva-like glauconite ‘‘in the green agates, mis-

called in commerce jaspers, from India” (which, to my certain

knowledge, come from geodes in the decomposed trap of

Western India), one cannot help being struck by the inferiority

of mental power on the one hand and the sharp-sightedness

on the other—much after the fable of the shoemaker who rose

greatly in the estimation of the sculptor when he pointed out

the absence of the shoe-string in his statue, but sunk lamen-

tably in it afterwards when he made observations on the

higher art.

So much for Dr. Bowerbank’s part in the matter. Now

let us direct our attention to the work of De Fonbressin and

Michelotti (op. cit.), who collected the sponges of the Carib-

bean Sea on the spot, and described six species, with modest

references to all those who seemed to have noticed the like

before them—giving to the whole the generic name of “ Luf-

faria,” drawn from the great resemblance of the horny skeleton

of these sponges to the fibrous mass of a species of the cucur-

bitacean genus Luffa which remains after the skin and soft

parts have rotted away, and which they also state to be used

in the “ colonies” of the West Indies, where real sponges are

not at hand. Further, we find that, recognizing the whole

bearing of the family generally towards the rest of the Spon-

giade, elementarily (that is in the structure of the fibre) as

well as en masse, they finally placed the genus in the third

tribe of their second family of sponges, under the designation

of “‘ Spongice homogene.”

Is it extraordinary, then, after contrasting thus the value of

the contributions to our knowledge of this genus, respectively

named by Dr. Bowerbank and the authors last mentioned, that

we should find Schmidt (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 30)

ignore the former altogether, and accept the name of “ Luf-

faria,” given to this genus by De Fonbressin and Michelotti ?

nor resting here, but also synonymizing Dr. Bowerbank’s

Verongia zetlandica, not with Luffaria (that is, Dr. Veronge’s

West-Indian sponge above quoted), but with his (Schmidt’s)

Cacospongia, which has a totally different fibre, the cavity of

which, instead of being simple, is charged more or less with

foreign objects, 7. e. grains of sand and fragments of spicules.

104. Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

I might here add too, as regards sponges hitherto considered

to have a skeleton possessed of simple, solid fibre only (that is,

without core of any kind), that I very much doubt if there be

many such, since, in the softest officinal sponge, to say nothing

of the coarser kind, it is hardly possible to pinch out the

minute portion which is required for microscopic examination

without finding in it a filament also possessed of an axis

containing fragments of spicules and grains of sand. It is

true that the solid fibre is greatly in excess of this, and that

the softest sponges have most of it; but this does not

release us from the necessity of grouping these sponges among

the Hirciniad, wherein the character of the fibre is to possess

an axis formed more or less of the fragments of spicules, minute

grains of sand, and other foreign objects of the like nature.

While the Aplysine have as yet been chiefly found in and

about the Mediterranean Sea, the Luffariw appear to have come

almost exclusively from the West Indies and their neigh-

bouring seas.

In Dr. Schmidt’s work on the Sponges of the Adriatic

Sea, to which I have already referred, based on the exami-

nation of specimens which he himself dredged up, described

with the power of a professor of zoology, and illustrated with

great ability by skilful naturalists, two species of Aplysine

are mentioned, viz. A. aérophoba, which is Nardo’s name and

form, and A. carnosa, which is Dr. Schmidt’s new species.

Good specimens of the former were sent to the British Museum

by Dr. Schmidt, where they now represent the type specimen

of this species; and the same species would appear to exist in

the Gulf of Florida (Atlantisch. Spongienfauna, p. 30, pl. 3.

fig. 16) ; while De Fonbressin and Michelotti, as before stated,

give six species of Luffaria (op. et loc. cit.), of which there

is also an abundance of very fime specimens in the British

Museum.

It is, however, with the former genus, and not with the

latter, that we are here chiefly concerned, as we have to add

a new locality to A. carnosa and a new species to the genus,

from specimens dredged up by W. Saville Kent, Ksq., of the

British Museum, in Vigo Bay, while on board the yacht

‘Norna,’ in 1870, and now handed over with the rest of his

valuable collection to the British Museum.

To Myr. Kent, therefore, we are indebted for the new spe-

cies of Aplysina which I am about to describe under the

designation of “ corneostellata,” on account of the skeleton

chietly consisting of horny stellates; and the specimens have

been so successfully preserved in spirit, that [ shall not only

be able to describe the ova with which they happen to be

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 105

charged, but also the spongozoa which now and then appear in

groups with portions of the sponge placed under the microscope

for examination (as may be seen by reference to Pl. VIL.

fig. 12), pointing out the interesting fact that the kerataceous

sponges possess the same kind of spongozoon as the rest.

Aplysina corneostellata, n. sp. Pl. VII. fig. 1.

Sessile, spreading, massive, rising into short lobes terminated

by mammitorm conical extremities, each bearing a large vent

(fig. 1, 6 6; 2, 6). Colour pinkish violet or flesh-colour.

Surface smooth, minutely aculeated, each aculeation (fig. 2, a)

terminated by the projection of a single horny hair-like fila-

ment (fig. 3,a). Internal structure cancellous, fleshy, permeated

by branched systems of excretory canals, which finally end

in the large vents at the summits of the mammiform eminences

respectively ; the whole supported on a horny skeleton com-

posed of 5-G-rayed stelliform structures (fig. 4, ¢cecc), one

arm of which, when near the surface, projects through an

aculeation (fig. 3, ac), and the rest, where they are in contact

with the rays of neighbouring stellates, united to the latter by

a thin expansion of transparent horny matter (fig. 4, ddd),

which thus, altogether, forms a continuous skeleton supported

or. a few stem-like filaments at the base, which are united to

the object on which the sponge may be growing (fig. 4, bd).

Horny filament hollow, the core consisting of fine granular

matter only, with here and there parabolical wave-like lines,

whose convexities are directed towards the end of the filament

(figs. 5 & 6); diameter of the core much exceeding the thick-

ness of the horny tube (fig. 7).

Dermal structure consisting of a thin transparent layer of

sarcode (fig. 3, ¢; 9, a a), in which the pores may be observed

by the aid of a microscope to be situated in variable plurality

over the interstices of a subjacent network (fig. 8, a, 6; 9, c)

composed of elongated fusiform granuliferous cells adhering

together in a cord-like form (fig. 10, 6), which contrasts strongly

with the globular form of the granuliferous cell in the overlying

dermal sarcode (fig. 11); both structures covering the whole

of the sponge up to the brink of the vents, and by their transpa-

rency exposing the cavities of the cancellous structure beneath,

whose dark round cavities thus: appear like so many minor

vents opening upon the surface generally.

Body charged with spherical ova (fig. 4, 9 gg) of a deeper

colour than the rest of the substance, presenting on pressure

under the microscope a homogeneous, transparent, capsular

envelope, within which is a more delicate one filled with nucle-

ated granuliferous cells suspended apparently in a grumous

106 Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

dark brown-red coloured plasma (fig. 13), in which may also

be observed a few colourless, semiopaque, albuminoid concre-.

tionary masses, each of which, too, seems to be in a cell.

The spongozoa may now and then be also observed in

ageregated groups with the rostrum and cilium extended,

together with two ear-like projections, one on each side of the

cilium, indicative of the remains of the “ collar” (fig. 12).

Size of specimen varying with that over which the sponge

may be growing, the one figured about 1 inch long by half

an inch thick ; horny stellates about 1-15th, ova about 1-120th,

and spongozoon about 1-3000th of an inch in diameter re-

spectively.

Hab. Marine, growing over the shells of living mussels

(Modiola albicosta ?) and on the empty shells of Solen.

Loc. Cies Islands, Vigo Bay (W. 8. Kent, Esq.).

Obs. The chief distinguishing character of this species is

the stellate form assumed by the filaments of the horny

skeleton. It also differs from the specimen of A. carnosa

dredged up by Mr. Kent in the same locality in the followmg

particulars. A. carnosa is more fleshy, solid, and smooth, has

no part of the horny skeleton projecting through the aculeations

or any other part of the surface ; no appearance of holes or

small vents on the surface, from the dermal sarcode being too

thick and opaque to allow the cavities of the cancellous or

areolated structure beneath to be seen through it ; and, for the

same reason, here and there, where the surface is reticulated,

the reticulations are more like superficial rugee; the mammi-

form projections are flattened, and the vents sunk in the centre

instead of being at the end of conical eminences as in A. cor-

neostellata. In short, altogether A. carnosa is a coarser form

with a dark violet colour and opaque appearance.

I have not seen a portion of Luffaria that has been preserved

in the wet state; but we learn from De Fonbressin and

Michelotti (p. 58, op. cét.) that they are all black, brown, or

yellow—and when dry all black, which is the case with those

in the British Museum on which the sarcode still remains.

The sarcode is black, or, rather, blue-black now, more like the

colour of ink, and the colour of the horny fibre more or less

brown or yellow. When the latter is transparent and held

between the eye and the light, it presents an amber-like ap-

pearance with a whitish core in the interior, round like the

fibre, but very much less in diameter than the thickness even

of the wall of the fibre.

The opposite of the latter is the case with the Aplysine

(see fig. 7); and herein, together with their sessile spreading

growth and comparatively diminutive size, they contrast

from the N.W. Coast of Spain. 107

greatly with the comparatively gigantic tubular forms of Luf-

Jaria (whence the original designation of “ fistularis””), which,

as yet, have only been found in the seas between the two

Americas.

I have stated that the network (figs. 3 & 8) subjacent to the

dermal sarcode in A. corneostellata “is composed of elongated

fusiform granuliferous cells aggregated together in a cord-

like form” (fig. 10, 6) ; but this assertion, so far as the indi-

viduality of the cells is concerned, rests on the conjecture that

each elongated group of granules represents a distinct sponge-

cell. Whether, however, the cord-like form is produced by

the mere contact of these cells, or they are thus united by an

intervening sarcode, I know of no means to determine.

Certain it is that, if they possess the same polymorphic power

as the soft parts of the sponge generally, this network must

afford considerable support to the whole structure, and thus

also yield to that of the dermal sarcode about it, whose poly-

morphic power we know to be such in Spongilla that it can

extemporize and close pores in its substance wherever and

whenever requisite.

The ova, so far as my examination extended (and I examined

many), did not appear to have gone beyond cell-multiplication;

that is to say, none presented rudiments of the horny structure

like unto the development of spicules in the ova of the spicu-

liferous sponges at this period. What the colourless albu-

minoid concretions may be which I have not figured I am not

able even to conjecture.

The spongozoa presented nothing further than the passive

form above described.

Sudden death, by immersion in a preservative fluid during

active life, would seem more calculated to cause many poly-

morphic parts of the sponge to retain their active forms than

gradual death. At the same time it cannot be ignored that

the pores in the dermal sarcode, which is as polymorphic as

any other part of the sponge, do appear to be retained under

any circumstances, as if, instead of being merely extempo-

raneous, they had been established holes endowed with a

sphinctral power of contraction or dilatation as required.

As regards increase of the horny element of the skeleton

during the general growth of the sponge, a cell was often

observed to be fixed to the side of a ray of one of the stellates

by a transparent film of a horny nature, apparently extended

over it from the surface of the ray itself (fig. 4,e; 5,c). In

some instances this cell was observed to have undergone in-

crease in size, elongation, and the addition of concentric horny

layers to its circumference (fig. 5, d) ; while in others it was

108 Mr. H. J. Carter on a new Species of Aplysina

observed to have put out several points or buds, as if about to

grow into a stellate (e).

On the other hand, a ray was sometimes observed to present

a young branch(fig. 6, c) whose medullary or central cavity was

in continuation with that of the ray on which it was situated.

Occasionally a grain of sand (fig. 4, f) was seen to be

attached to a horny filament after the manner of the cell, and

some of the stem-like filaments towards their base of attach-

ment had a grain or two of sand in their centre. But these

must be regarded as accidental occurrences; for the structure

generally is not only devoid of proper spicules (that is, of

spicules formed by the sponge itself), but the cavity of the

horny fibre is equally devoid of grains of sand, fragments

of spicules, or any other of the minute objects which are so

characteristic of that in the Hirciniade.

The subdermal network appears to be common to most of

the kerataceous sponges, attaching to itself through the dermal

sarcode, in some of the Hircinic, a number of minute objects,

so as to present a white lacework between the aculeations,

which is visible to the naked eye, and which, when mounted

in Canada balsam and viewed with a microscope, resolves

itself into an infinite variety of entire spicules, both siliceous

and calcareous, together with fragments of the same and grains

of sand—altogether forming a most inviting, instructive, and

interesting study to the spongologist. This lacework is par-

ticularly well developed in many of the great Hircinia at the

British Museum which have been collected from the West-

Indian seas and the coast of Southern Australia, as well as in

the little specimen of H. variabilis from the Adriatic Sea,

presented by Dr. Schmidt. In some of the kerataceous sponges

the network is horny, in the spiculiferous sponges spiculi-

ferous ; in short, more or less modified in all, it supports the

dermal sarcode, in which the pores, in variable plurality, find

themselves conveniently placed opposite the interstices. Thus

the two combined form the pore-structure, which is often as

beautiful as it is characteristic of the species.

I would also here add, with reference to the parasites of

sponges, that on one of the specimens of Aplysina corneo-

stellata are a number of minute isolated Ascidians attached to

the dermal sarcode, which, from their dark red colour, looking

like so many blood-red points, appear to have derived this tint

in some way from the colouring-matter of the Aplysina on

which they were growing, as there is a portion of an Hsperia

in the same collection, and dredged up from the same locality,

on which there is an equal amount of the same species of

Ascidians similarly situated, but without any colour at all, or,

From the N.W. Coast of Spain. 109

at all events, any more than that of the Hsperia on which

they were growing, which merely presents the grey tint of

colourless sarcode. The granuliferous cells represented in the

dermal sarcode of fig. 9 might also well stand for the appear-

ance and relative size of these Ascidians.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Aplysina corneostellata, n. sp., nat. size, growing on the shell of

Fig.

a living mussel (Modiola albicosta ?) ; colour pink-violet or flesh-

colour: a, shell; 60, vents.

. The same, one of the mammiform eminences, magnified, to show

the position of the vents and genera) character of the aculeated

surface: a,raysof horny stellates projecting beyond the summits

of the aculeations; 6, vent, showing its division into smaller vents

within.

. The same, single ray, still more magnified, to show the manner in

which the dermal sarcode hanging upon it tent-like forms the

aculeation: aa, ray; 6, centre of horny stellate; ¢ c, subdermal

reticulated structure covered by the transparent dermal sarcode.

The same, corneo-stellate fibre and ova, magnitied 15 diameters :

a, foreign object on which the stem-like filament (0 0b) is

erowing ; cc ccc, corneo-stellates; ddd, thin expansions of

horny matter uniting the rays together; e, cell enclosed under

an expansion of horny matter; f, grain of sand enclosed under

an expansion of horny matter; gg g, ova.

. The same, portion of ray of stellate, much magnified : a, cortical or

horny tube; 6, core or interior presenting parabolical wave-like

lines, with their convexities directed towards the free extremity

of the ray; c, cell enclosed under a thin expansion of horny

matter; d, the same, enlarged and elongated, with the addition

of concentric horny layers round the cell, which now becomes

the core; e, the same, putting forth five buds, corresponding

with the number of rays in the stellate. Diagrammatic.

. The same, extremity of ray, much magnified, to show the com-

mencement of a branch whose core is connected with that of

the ray: a, cortical or horny tube; ), core; c, branch; d, thin

expansion of horny matter covering the branch.

. The same, piece of horny fibre, still more but proportionately

magnified, to show the relative thicknesses of the core and cor-

tical tube, also that the latter is formed of layers: a, cortical

tube ; 6, core.

. The same, portion of the dermal surface, magnified, showing :—a,

the subdermal reticular structure ; 6, the interstices in which the

pores are situated.

. The same, a single interstice, much magnified, and partly covered

by the dermal sarcode in which the pores are seen and situated :

aa, dermal sarcode, apparently homogeneous, charged more or

less with globular granuliferous cells, also bearing (66) the

pores ; c, interstice or mesh of the subdermal reticulated structure

or network.

10. The same, portion of the subdermal reticulated structure, greatly

magnified, to show that it is composed of elongated fusiform

eranuliferous cells united into the form of acord: aa, cord;

6, elongated groups of granules representing elongated fusi-

form sponge-cells.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 8)

110 Mr. H. J. Carter on two new Sponges

Fig. 11. The same, form of the globular granuliferous cells of the dermal

sarcode, to contrast with the elongated forms in fig. 10.

Fig. 12. The same, three spongozoa, much magnified, each about 1-3000th

inch in diameter.

Fig. 13. The same, ovum much magnified, showing :—a, capsule ; ), ovi-

cell filled with nucleated granuliferous cellules suspended in a

dark red grumous matter.

XIV.—Descriptions of two new Sponges from the Philippine

Islands. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c.

THE two following Sponges, obtained at Cebu, one of the

Philippine Islands, by Dr. A. B. Meyer, and now the property of

the British Museum, are herewith described at the request of

Dr. J. E. Gray, pending their further description and future

illustration elsewhere.

1. Meyerina (nov. gen.) claviformis, Gray.

Specific character.—Sarco-spiculous. General form long,

conical, cucumber-like, slightly bent upon itself. Colour now

(that is in its dried state) light sponge-yellow. Cylindrical

at the base, where the yellow colour ceases, and the structure

is extended by bundles of long, colourless, glassy spicules,

which were continued downwards for several inches into the

sandy mud in which the sponge grew, while they pass upwards

in an oblique network, longitudinally, to the middle of the

body, whence they are continued on, by repetition, to terminate

at the apex in short naked tufts round the cloacal orifice of

the sponge, like those at the root, to which they thus bear a

miniature resemblance. Surface even towards the base, be-

coming angular in the middle third by the projection of long

ridges, which, uniting longitudinally, leave lozenge-shaped

intervals as they gradually subside towards the apex. Vents

chiefly on the ridges, in large circular network, and here and

there in the intervals, which, on the other hand, are occupied

by a small rectangular network, in the interstices of which are

the pores. Internal structure rigid, reticulate, largely canalo-

areolar, especially towards the surface, interwoven with the

longitudinal spicules before mentioned, and surrounding a long,

fusiform cloacal cavity, which commences about four inches

from the base, and, increasing gradually in size to about the

middle of the body of the sponge (where it is an inch in dia-

meter), then diminishes again towards the apex, where it ter-

minates in an orifice about one sixth of an inch wide; per-

meated on all sides by the canals of the areolar structure, which

from the Philippine Islands. 111

open into it. Spicules of ten kinds, viz.:—I1st, of the root:

a, long, smooth, large, ends pointed above, broken off below ;

b, long, spined, small, ends pointed and smooth above, anchor-

shaped below; spines recurved, alternate, ceasing just before

they arrive at the lower extremity, which is two-armed,

opposite. 2nd, of the ridges or vent-arez: c, nail-like, head con-

sisting of four short arms extended horizontally and at or nearly

at right angles to each other, situated on a long vertical shaft ;

d, thin, straight, acerate, fusiform-spined, situated in bundles

round and projecting beyond the former; spines directed in-

wards, almost vertical and recurved at first, becoming afterwards

nearly parallel with the shaft; e, anchor-headed (“‘birotulate”’),

large, with straight tubercled shaft and eight arms at each

end, equally long, directed towards the middle of the shaft and

arranged at equal distances (somewhat spreading) from each

other around each end, very numerous, and bespangling the

surface of the vent-areze with the outermost head; f, crucial-

headed, with long spined shaft; arms of the head short,

one or two blunt-spined, abruptly ended, slightly curved

in opposite directions (¢.e. slightly sigmoid) ; shaft densely

armed a little below the head with long, stout, recurved spines

on all sides, bottle-brush-like; in great numbers round the

vents, with their heads applied to the horizontal arms of c,

and their spined shafts projecting outwards so as to form a

fringe round the vents, capable of thus closing them when

required; g, anchor-headed, minute, resembling a miniature

form of e, charging the sarcode in great numbers round the

arms of c, and, indeed, everywhere; hf, hexaradiate, minute,

each arm bearing a few long spines towards its extremity,

the rest smooth; numerous in the sarcode, and characteristic

of the species; 7, acerate, fusiform, minute, bearing four large

spines opposite and nearly vertical in the centre, and a few

others sparsely scattered over the rest of the shaft, chiefly to-

wards the ends, numerous and characteristic. 3rd, of the

pore-area: k, like c, but with longer horizontal arms and

shorter vertical shaft; 7, like f, but with shorter shaft; m,

the same as e, but not so abundant as in the vent-area; x,

like g, but more plentiful here. Spicule of the tufts at the

apex spined towards the free end, with the spines directed out-

wards. Spicules of the internal structure a mixture of those

above described, with the arms of the crucial-headed one

greatly extended.

Size of specimen: total length 18inches. From the apex to

the commencement of the root-spicules 15 inches ; root-spicules

3 inches (probably six or more if the whole were present

entire and extended, instead of being wrapt up in a bunch as

112 Mr. H. J. Carter on two new Sponges

they now are); diameter in the centre 2 inches; cylindrical

portion between the root and the ridges 1} in diameter by

3 inches long.

Hab, Marine, growing erect in sandy mud.

Loc. Cebu, one of the Philippine Islands (Dr. A. B. Meyer).

Obs. The spicules a, c, e, g closely resemble similar ones

in Carteria and the glass-cord respectively; f, although

common to Carteria and Holtenia, more closely resembles this

spicule in the latter; and 6 is almost identical with the long

root-spicule of Holtenia and Pheronema Grrayi; h and @ are

peculiar to the species—that is, not found in either of the other

sponges mentioned. The common, long, acerate fusiform spi-

cule with central canal-cross and inflation is apparently absent

here, together with the rarer spined crucial spicule of Hyalo-

nema, as is apparently the case in Holtenia; so that our sponge

is a mixture of Carteria, Holtenia, and Pheronema, which

shows that they are all three closely allied.

This is the most exquisite sponge that I have yet examined

as a whole and in its parts. Individually its spicules equal

any in beauty of form, and collectively surpass all. Its general

form has been shortly described by Dr. J. E. Gray, under the

name of Meyerella claviformis, in the last number of the

‘Annals’ (p. 76) ; but Dr. Gray has now changed “‘ Meyerella”’

to “ Meyerina,” having discovered that the former has been

already used for something else.

2. Crateromorpha (nov. gen.) Meyert, Gray.

Specific character.—Sarco-spiculous. General form globular,

wide, ovate, truncated, hollow, supported on a contracted stem,

goblet-shaped. Colour light sponge-yellow in its dried state.

Margin of the brim extemely thin, thickening towards the

base. Covered externally throughout with a fine reticular

structure of square meshwork, in the interstices of which the

pores are situated. Vents on the inner side of the cup enor-

mously large at the bottom, becoming smaller towards the

brim. Internal structure dense, permeated by inosculating

canals, which respectively open by the vents into the inner side

of the cup, and appear beneath the reticular structure exter-

nally. Stem long, round, contracted, compound, fistulous—

that is, consisting of a dozen longitudinal canals imbedded in

a felt-like disposition of the spicules, which canals open into

the vents at the bottom of the cup where the stem joins the

latter ; stem becoming dispersed at the other end, where it disap-

pears in a fibrous mass into the sandy mud in which the sponge

grew. Spicules of five kinds :—1st, of the head: a, straight,

from the Philippine Islands. 113

fusiform, inflated and spined at the ends, also inflated more or

less and smooth in the centre, where the central canal has a

hexaradiate cross, opposite to the ends of which there may be

two or four tubercles; this is the staple form of the spicule of

this sponge; and by intercrossing each other in bundles at

and about right angles they support the dermal reticular struc-

ture above; 0, nail- or crucial-headed, scanty ; arms smooth,

straight and pointed, the shaft a little longer than the rest—

among the foregoing, but chiefly visible at the base of the

sponge on the outside about the point where the stem joins the

cup—supporting, together witha, the dermal reticular structure;

c, hexaradiate, minute, smooth, each arm of the cross, imme-

diately after leaving the centre, separating into two long, diver-

gent spines, in myriads throughout the sponge. 2nd, of the

pore-area: d, nail- or crucial-headed, arms parting at right

angles from the centre, more or less inflated at the ends, and

spined throughout; shaft a little longer than the rest, also spined

and more or less pointed; arms of this spicule spreading out

horizontally to reach the centres of the adjoining crosses, and

thus together forming the rectangular dermal network. 3rd, of

the stem: e, the same as a, forming a felt-like mass, in the

midst of which are the long fistular canals; f, the nail-head

spicule 4, chiefly found about the part mentioned; g, large,

smooth, thick spicules 4-12ths of an inch in length, acuate,

inflated at both ends, fusiform and acerate respectively, dis-

tributed longitudinally over the surface of the stem.

Size of specimen: widest part of head 3} inches, aperture

22 by 1? inches; depth of cup 27 inches; length of head out-

side 3? inches ; greatest thickness of walls 14-12ths of an inch ;

length of stem 34 inches, diameter of stem 7-12ths.

Hab. Marine, growing erect in sandy mud.

Loc. Cebu, one of the Philippine Islands (Dr. A. B. Meyer).

Obs. This is entirely a new genus, although, as will here-

after be seen, some of its spicules are almost identical with

those of Rossella philippinensis, Gray (to be described here-

after), which comes from the same locality and is also cup-like,

but is fixed to the bottom by a number of bundles, or tail-

like extensions from the base, of long, stiff spicules, bearmg

at their extremities the four-armed recurved head which I

have already given (‘ Annals’ for June 1872, p. 414, pl. xxi.)

as an essential character of this genus.

114 Mr. J. Gould on two new Species of Birds.

XV.—On two new Species of Birds.

By Joun GOuLp, F.R.S. &e.

Asout twenty years ago I obtained two specimens of a

Diceum, one labelled Manila, the other Mindanao, which,

although not quite certain, I believe to be the opposite sexes

of an undescribed species, and now propose to characterize as

Diceum retrocinctum.

Male (from Manila).—Head, neck, back, wing-coverts, tail,

sides and centre of the throat, and a broad stripe down the

centre of the breast steel or bluish black; a semicollar at the

base of the neck behind, a small stripe down the chin, and a

broader and longer stripe down the centre of the abdomen

scarlet; under tail-coverts white ; wings slaty black ; sides of

the chest and the abdomen white, passing into silvery grey on

the flanks; bill black, lighter at the base; feet apparently

dark brown.

Total length 33 inches; bill 8, wing 2, tail 7, tarsi 3.

Female (from Mindanao).—Like the male on the upper sur-

face, but wanting the red at the base of the neck; chin and

throat white ; remainder of the under surface grey, fading into

white on the abdomen, down the centre of which is a stripe of

scarlet as in the opposite sex ; under tail-coverts white.

Size the same as that of the male.

Colluricincla parvissima, Gould.

Crown of the head, all the upper surface, including the

wing-coverts and tail, olivaceous brown; wings rufous, their

inner webs brown; over each eye a narrow line of buff; chin

pale buffy, with a very faint stripe of brown down each fea-

ther; all the under surface rich buff or fawn-colour ; bill light

horny, darker above ; legs and feet pale fleshy brown.

Total length 63 inches; bill Z, wing 33, tail 22, tarsi 4%.

Hab. Rockingham Bay, Eastern Australia.

Remark. 'This bird is by far the smallest species of the

genus I have yet seen, as is implied in the name I have

applied to it, in contradistinction to C. parvula. In colour it

differs from, the latter in the buff mark over the eye, in the

rufous colouring of the wings, and especially in the rich rufous

tint of the under surface, which is even deeper in hue than the

same part in C. rufigaster: the three species are, in fact, nearly

allied.

Dr. J. E. Gray on Red-Sea Echinoderms. 115

XVI.—List of Echinoderms collected by Robert M‘Andrew,

Esq., F.R.S., in the Gulf of Suez in the Red Sea. By Dr.

J. H. Gray, F.R.S. &e.*

SAVIGNY, who accompanied the French Expedition to Egypt,

drew and engraved in the most beautiful and elaborate style

the Echinoderms that were collected during that Expedition.

They form part of the plates of the magnificent imperial

but most useless work that is usually called the great work

on Egypt. This work, though published at the commencement

of the present century, is hardly known to scientific zoologists,

and is rarely to be seen out of the great public libraries. So

much is this the case, that on my showing the details of a

species figured in it to a well-known Scandinavian zoologist,

he inquired what work it was, he had never seen or even heard

of its existence.

There are many species figured in the zoological portion of

it that are as yet unknown and unnamed; and many of the

microscopic peculiarities of the species that are there figured

are being every now and then produced as modern discoveries ;

and there are yet others still to be described as new.

It is truly a “work of luxury” and not for scientific

utility, though it contains, as I have observed, most accurate

details which were far in advance of the scientific knowledge

of the period, and in some respects of the present timet; but

the great expense of the work and its immense size have

rendered it almost a closed book to scientific men.

Unfortunately M. Savigny became blind before he was able

to complete the descriptions of the animals and refer to the

details on the plates of the Echinoderms ; indeed he only pub-

lished the descriptions of the Annelides and the Ascidia.

Professor Victor Audouin published an “ Explication som-

maire des planches des Echinodermes ” and other divisions of

the animal kingdom that had been drawn and engraved under

Savigny’s directions.

Unfortunately he does not seem to have had at his disposal

the original specimens figured for sheet 1; and he observes,

“in comparant les figures 1, 2, et 3 aux especes représentées

* This manuscript was prepared and written soon after Mr. M‘Andrew’s

return; but being left on my writing-table during my temporary illness,

it was carefully put away by my attendant, along with a quantity of

manuscripts on Bats (where it was not looked for), and was only acciden-

tally found a few weeks ago.—J. E. G.

+ This is particularly the case with the Sponges, the texture of the

mass and the spicules of each species as seen under the microscope being

exhibited in detail.

116 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

par Miiller on leur trouve plusieurs fois des ressemblances

avec l’ Ophiura fragilis et ? Ophiura tricolor de M. de Lamarck,

mais il seroit difficile de donner une détermination positive ”

(p. 206).

Now that specimens have been obtained from the Red Sea

and the coast of Syria, it is found that many of the species

represented by Savigny are different from those to which Au-

douin referred them; but as yet I have not been able to com-

pare the species of that family with the published work on

them as carefully as I could have wished; and it is better

they should remain until Dr. Perceval Wright, who has

undertaken to make an examination of the Echinoderms in

the Museum, with some other naturalists who have paid special

attention to this group of animals, have examined and com-

pared them.

I here give a list of the plates and the explanations as far

as they are referred to:—

Savigny, Echinodermes de 0 Egypte.

Tab. 1. figs. 1, 2. Comatules. Maultiradiata, Aud. 105. Comatula

Savignil, J. Miller.

fig. 3. Ophiura echinata, Aud. 106. Ophiolepis dubia,

Miller & Troschel.

Tab. 2. fig. 1. Ophiures. O. fragilis, Aud. 106.

fig. 2. O. fragilis, Aud. 106.

fig. 3. ——. 0. tricolor, Aud. 106.

fig. 4. O.squamata, Aud.107. Ophiolepis Savignii.

Tab. 3. Asterias Savignii, dud. Lidia Savignii. B.M.

Tab. 4. fig. 1. Asterias aurantiaca, dud. 108. Astropecten.

fig. 2. A. calear, Awd. 108. Asteriscus pentagonus.

fig. 3. A. seposita, Aud. 108. Rhopia seposita. B.M.

Tab. 5. figs. 1, 2. A. mamillata, Aud. 109. Pentaceros mamillata.

Tab. 6. Oursins. Cidarites Savignul, Awd. 110.

aby. fig) i. C. baculosa, Aud. 110.

fig. 2, ——. Kchinus pallidus, Aud. 110.

fig. 3. ——. Scutella bifissa, dud. 110. B.M.

fig. 4. ——. Spatangus crux-Andree, Aud. 111.

fig. 5, 6. . S. canaliferus, Aud. 111.

Tab. 8. figs. 1-5. Holothures, sp.

I have made a list of all the species which I have found

recorded as inhabiting the Red Sea, and marked those that

have been collected by Mr. M‘Andrew, and those that are in

the British Museum from other sources.

I have added a few notes formed on the examination of

Mr. M‘Andrew’s specimens.

R. M‘Andrew in the Gulf of Suez. 117

Fam. Comatulide.

Comatulides et Comatuliens, Dujard. & Hupé, pp. 186, 191.

Comatula, Lamk.

Comatula Savignit, J. Miiller; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 203.

Echinoderme, Saviguy, Egypte, t. 1.

Comatula multiradiata, Aud. Expl. pl.

adeonea, Blainy. Man. d’Actin. p. 249, t. 26.

Arms twice or three times forked at the base, with more

than twenty secondary or tertiary arms.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Ophiuride, Gray, Syn. B. M. 1840, p. 63.

Ophiurides, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 219.

Ophiolepis dubia, Miller & Troschel, p. 94; Dujard. & Hupé,

p: 240.

Ophiura, Savigny, Egypte, t. 1. f. 3.

Hab. Red Sea.

Ophiolepis Savignyt, Miiller & Troschel, p. 95; Dujard. &

Hupé, p. 240.

Ophiura, Savigny, Egypte, t. 2. f. 4, 5.

squamata, Aud. Expl. p. 107.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Ophiolepis annulosa, Miller & 'Trosch. p. 89, t. 8. f. 4; Du-

jard. & Hupé, p. 236.

Ophiura annulosa, Blainy. Man. d’Actin. t. 44 (not Lamk.).

Hab. Red Sea.

Ophiolepis cincta, Miller & Trosch. p. 90; Dujard. & Hupé,

p. 237.

Hab. Red Sea.

Ophiura brachyura.

Body smooth, without shield or spines, white-lined ; arms

short, thick, tapering ; lateral spines elongate.

Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M. no. 2.

Not in Savigny: arms much shorter than any there figured.

Ophiura ? (Not in good state.)

Disk with small spicules; lateral spines short, thick, not

larger than diameter of arms.

Hab, Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Not figured in Savigny’s ‘ Egypte.’

118 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

Fam. Asteride.

Asterides, D. & H. p. 807, 1862.

Rhopia seposita, Gray.

Asterias seposita, Retz. Vetensk. Akad. iv. p. 337; Aud., Muller and

Troschel.

Cribella seposita, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 354.

Asterias, Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 4. f. 3.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Linckia typus, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H.

Asterias levigata, Linn.

Ophidiaster miliaris, Miller & Troschel, p. 30, t. 2. f. 2; Dujard. & Hupé,

p- 360.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Gomophia egyptiaca, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi.

p- 286; see Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 62.

Hab. Red Sea. B.M.

Asteriscus pentagonus, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 878; Seba, t. 5.

flo(cop. Ha: 4.100. £031?)

Asterias calcar, Aud.; Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 4. f. 2.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Asterina Burtonii, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi. p. 289.

Asteriscus vermiculatus, Miller & Troschel.

Asterina gibbosa, Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 72.

Hab. Red Sea (J. Burton). B.M.

Pentaceros ——?, Savigny, Echinod. Egypte, t. 5. figs. 1, 2.

Asterias mamillata, Aud. Expl. p. 209.

Oreaster mamillatus, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 48; Dujard. &

Hupé, Echinod. p. 383.

Back reticulated ; margin spinose.

Var. Reticulation of the back more obscure, more closely

covered with granulations; the margin not spinose.

Hab. Red Sea (Savigny); Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

? Pentaceros tuberculatus.

Oreaster tuberculatus, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 46; Dujard. &

Hupé, Echin. p. 381.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Goniaster Seba, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. vi. p. 28.

Goniodiscus Sebe, Miller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 58; Dujard. & Hupé,

Kchin. p. 402; Seba, Thesaur. t. 6. f. 7, 8.

Hab. Red Sea.

R. M‘Andrew itn the Gulf of Sucz. 119

Astropecten polyacanthus, Miiller & Troschel, Syst. Aster. p.69

t. 5. £3; Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 417.

Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Astropecten Hemprichii, Miller & Trosch. Syst. Aster. p. 71 ;

Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 419.

Hab. Red Sea (Burton); Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Genus Lurp1A, Forbes.

Hemicnemus, Miller & Troschel.

Luidia Savignii, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1840, vi. p. 183 ;

Miiller & Troschel, Syst. Ast. p. 77, 1842; Savigny,

Echin. Egypte, t. 3. f. 1; Hupé, p. 482.

Asterias Savignii, Aud. Exp).

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Cidaride, Gray.

Cidarides, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 468.

Cidaris baculosa, Lamk. A.s. V.; Aud.111; Savigny, Echin.

Egypte, t. 7. f. 1; Michelin, Mag. Zool. 1845, p. 18, t. 4.

f.1-8; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 471; Martens, Wiegm. Arch.

1866, p. 141.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

‘The spines vary in form according to the age of the speci-

mens. In the young the spines are elongate, slender, fusi-

form, with the distal end attenuated to a more or less acute

tip, and the spines are twice or sometimes even more than

twice the length of the diameter of its body.

In the older specimens the spines are nearly cylindrical,

scarcely attenuated at the end, which is often truncated ; they

are rarely longer than the diameter of the body: the spines

near the vent have the apex deeply and irregularly grooved ;

those nearer the mouth. have the end truncated and more or

less dilated, with a more or less flat or concave end, which is

sometimes furnished on the margin with irregular lobes.

The spines on the upper surface of the body are often en-

tirely covered with tufts of Janda or a thin crust of Lepralia ;

and some of them have one or more small parasitic oysters

with a crenated and plicated margin affixed to them: such

parasitic growths were not present on the spines of any of the

other Hehind in the collection. The spines on the underside,

especially those nearer the mouth, are clear, and show the

120 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

spicules on the surface; these vary a little in shape at the

end.

A very young specimen, apparently of the same species, is -

brown, and the spines brown and white-ringed ; the spines are

quite clear, and covered with longitudinal series of rather large

rounded tubercles. The spines vary in shape: they are

generally cylindrical and truncated; but a few are fusiform

and tapering to a point.

Cidaris ornata (Gray, P. Z.S. 1855, p. 37) is perhaps a

variety.

Echinothrix Desorti, Bilsche, Archiv fiir Naturgesch. 1865,

p- 330.

Astropyga Desorit, Agassiz, Ann. Sci. Nat. 1846, p. 545.

Hab. Red Sea.

Diadema Savignii, Michelin, Mag. Zool.; Agassiz, A. R.

p- 349; Dujard. & Hupé, chin. p. 505; Savigny, Echin.

Egypte, t. 6; Bélsche, Arch. fiir Naturg. 1865, p. 227.

Cidarites mamuillata, Aud. p. 109.

Jun, D. Lamarckii, Agassiz.

Echinothrix calamaris, Peters.

turcarum, Peters, Bolsche.

Garetia turcarum, Agassiz.

Diadema Dujardinii, Michelin, Mag. Zool. 1845, t. 7.

Var. 1. The spines of the oral surface white.

Var. 2. Spines all pale.

Hab. Red Sea.

See :—Diadema (Echinothrix) calamare, Martens, Wiegm.

Arch. 1866, p. 150. Echinus calamarius, Pallas, Spic. Zool.

x. p. 38, t. 2. f. 4-8; Gmelin, Syst. Nat. p. 3173. Cidaris

calamarius, Leske, Lamk., Gray ; Michelin, Rev. Zool. p. 14,

no. 26. Astropyga calamaria, Agassiz.

The shell is covered with small black spines. The upper

part of the shell has a broad, smooth area, radiating from the

anal opening, as in Astropyga. The spines are very slender,

tubular, and covered externally with whorls of short, regular,

closely packed, adpressed spines. ‘The spines near the oral

region are slender, subcylindrical, striated, slightly depressed,

and clavate at the end.

I have not seen any specimen with such long slender spines

as that figured in the great work on Egypt. In all I have

seen the spines were thicker compared with their length, and

much shorter compared with the diameter of the body.

R. M‘Andrew tn the Gulf of Suez. 121

Temnopleurus toreumaticus, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 514;

Gray, P.Z.8. 1855, p. 39.

Cidaris toreumaticus, Wein.

Echinus sculptus, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea. Subfossil, Isle of Karrah (Dujardin).

Fam. Echinide.

Echinides, Dujard. & Hupé, Echin. p. 440.

Tripneustes 4

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

‘* Pure red when alive”’ (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Tripneustes ry

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

“¢ White when alive” (M‘Andrew).

Fam. Echinometrida.

Echinometra lucunter, Gray ; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 538.

Echinus lucunter, Linn.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Tubercles very numerous, small.

? Echinometra heteropora, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 538.

Hab. Red Sea. Subfossil (Dujardin).

Acrocladia mamillata, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 539.

Cidaris mamillatus, Leske, t. 6, t. 39. f. 1.

Echinus mamillatus, Lamk.

Echinometra mamillata, Blainy., Martens.

Heterocentrotus mamillatus, Brandt.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

The spines vary greatly in shape; they are usually clavate,

but more or less three-keeled near the end, which is generally

rounded.

The short, broad, top spine in two of the specimens was

dark brown; in another paler.

Acrocladia planispina, Martens, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. in Wien,

1866, p. 381; Zool. Record, 1866, p. 617.

Hab. Red Sea (Martens).

Spines not triangular as in A. trigonaria, nor club-shaped

as in-A.mamillata, nor cylindrical as in another Red Sea species,

122 Dr. J. E. Gray on Echinoderms collected by

A. Blainvillei, but small and pointed, and the corona covered

with true spines.

Agassiz notices a small specimen from the Red Sea in the

Paris Museum, which he names A. Blainvillet.

See Dujardin & Hupé, Echin. p. 540.

I believe, from Mr. AE Mildrew's series, that the A. Blain-

villet is only a variety of A. mamillata.

Fam. Scutellide, Gray ; Martens, Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 170.

Clypeastroidea, Agassiz & Desor; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 554.

Echinanthus placunarius, Gray, Cat. Kchin. B. M. p. 7.

Scutella ambigena, Lamk.

albigena, Lamk.

placunaria, Lamk.

Clypeaster placunarius, Lamk.; Dujardin. & Hupé, p. 571; Martens,

Wiegm. Arch. 1866, p. 172.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).

Echinanthus scutiformis, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 5.

Clypeaster scutiformis, Lamk.

Laganum scutiforme, Gray, Ann. Phil. 1825; Desor, Syn. p. 329;

Dujard. & Hupé, p. 559; E. M. t. 147. f. 3.

Scutella clypeastriformis, Blainv.; Seba, iii. t. 15, f. 28, 24.

Laganum depressum, Lesson, Voy. Uran.; Agassiz, Mon. Scut. p. 110,

t. 23. f. 1-7.

Hab, Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).

Laganum attenuatum?, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 10.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Laganum ellipticum, Agassiz, Mon. Scut. t. 23. f. 13-15;

Dujard. & Hupé, p. 560.

Laganum attenuatum, Agassiz, Cat, Scut. p. 74; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 560.

Hab. Red Sea.

Echinodiscus truncatus, Gray, Cat. Eichin. B. M. p. 20.

Lobophora truncata, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 565.

Scutella bifora, var., Lamk.

biforts, Blainy.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew).

Echinodiscus maurita, Gray, Cat. Echin. p. 21.

Lobophora bifissa, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 363; Martens, Wiegm.

Arch. 1866, p. 174; Savigny, Echin. t. 7. f. 3.

Scutella bifissa, Lamk. EF. M. t. 152. f. 1, 2.

Echinus inauritus, Gmelin, p. 3190.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

R. M‘Andrew in the Gulf of Suez. 123

Var. Lobophora aurita, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 365.

Scutella bifissa, var., Lamk. E. M. t. 151. f. 5, 6.

Echinoglycus auritus, Vauchel. p. 84; Bleeker.

Echinodiscus inauritus, var., Gray, Cat. Echin. p. 21.

Hab. Red Sea.

Fibularia craniolaris, Lamk.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 557.

Echinus craniolaris, Gmel. 8. N. p. 3198.

Fibularia nucleus, Lamk.

—— trigona, Lamk.

lathyrus, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Fam. Spatangide, Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p. 38.

Brissus bicinctus, Val.; Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, Echin.

“ p. 608.

Hab. Red Sea (Valenciennes, Mus. Paris).

Lovenia hystrix, Agassiz; Dujard. & Hupé, Kchin. p. 606 ;

Gray, Cat. Echin. B. M. p- 45; Savieny, Echin. Egypte,

tee tS

Hab. Red oe: Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Spatangus meridionalis, Risso, Kur. Mérid. v. p. 228; Gray,

Cat. Ech. B. M. p. 47; Duy. & Hupé, Kch. p. 608.

Spatangus siculus, Agassiz & eee

Hab. Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Periaster gibberulus, D’Orb.; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 598.

Schizaster gibberulus, Agassiz; Savigny, Echin. Egypte, t. 7. f. 6.

Hab. Red Sea (Savigny).

Fam. Holothuriade.

Holothuria impatiens, Linn; Dujard. & pe 617; Forsk.

Egypt, p. 121, t. 39. f, B=E. M. t. 86. f. 1

Fistularia impatiens, en

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Savigny figures eleven kinds of this family, viz. five in

tab. 8 and six in tab. 9. They are not quoted by Dujardin and

Hupé; so I fear that the specimens obtained by the French

naturalists and figured by Savigny no longer exist in the

124 Dr. J. E. Gray on Red-Sea Corals &e.

French Museum, like the specimens obtained by Quoy, Gai-

mard, and other French travellers. I have not had the

opportunity or time to examine the Red-Sea species.

Synapta reciprocans, Dujard. & Hupé, p. 615.

Fistularia reciprocans, Forsk. Egypte, p. 121, t. 30. f. 8=E. M. t. 87. f. 7.

Holothuria glutina, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea (Forskal).

Synapta vittata, Jeger; Dujard. & Hupé, p. 615.

Fistularia vittata, Forsk. Egypte, p. 223, t. 37. f. 26=E. M. t. 87. £8, 9.

Holothuria vittata, Lamk.

Tiedemannia vittata, Lamk.

Hab. Red Sea (Forskal).

Aleyonoid corals and sponge from the Gulf of Suez, col-

lected by R. M‘Andrew, Esq., in 1868 :—

CORALS.

), 0. Sp.

Sarcophyton

On shells.

Ammothea virescens, Savigny, Pol. Egypte, t. 2. f. 6.

Nephthya Savignii, Ehrenb.

Xenea umbellata, Ehrenb.

Anthelia glauca, Khrenb.; Savigny, t. 1. f. 7.

Anthelia grandis, n. sp.

Alcyonium aurum, n. sp.

This is not Amocella; the coral is not fleshy, but crustaceous

externally, and with subcylindrical branches.

SPONGE.

Genus GRAYELLA, Carter, Ann.& Mag.'N. H. 1869, iv. p. 190.

Sponge massive, expanded or subglobular, attached by an

expanded base; outer surface covered with a smooth fleshy

skin, with numerous, regular, equal-sized, flat-topped, low

tubercles. Sponge fleshy, with spicules siliceous, fusiform,

elongate, of one form.

Grayella cyathophora, Carter.

Hab. Red Sea; Gulf of Suez (M‘Andrew). B.M.

Mr. A. G. Butler on a new Genus of Moths. 125

Corals collected in the Red Sea by R. M‘Andrew, Esq., in

1869, and given to the British Museum by Mr. W.S. Kent :—

JLeterocyathus cochlea. Fungia patella.

Stylophora pistillata. Cycloseris cyclolites.

subseriata. Madrepora corymbosa.

Husmilia fastigiata. Turbinaria cinerascens.

Lithophyllia lacera. Alveopora diedalea.

Mussa corymbosa. Porites conglomerata.

Trachypora Geoftroyii. Seriatopora lineata.

Pavia cavernosa. Tubipora musica.

Solenastraeea Hemprichiana.

XVII.—Description of a new Genus and Species of Hetero-

cerous Lepidoptera. By ARTHUR GARDINER BUTLER,

ead Zi,0-; OC,

[Plate VIIL.]

Tue following remarkable species is in the collection of the

Rey. 'T’. Cornthwaite. It presents the most wonderful modifi-

cation of the Lepidopterous scale that I have ever seen; and I

am much indebted to its possessor for the pleasure of describing

and figuring it.

Group BoMBYCITES.

amily Notodontide.

TARSOLEPIS (Tapaos, Nemris), Zen. NOV.

Gen. alis magnis, anticis elongatis, costa producta; antennis plus

quam bis triente pectinatis; corpore robusto, abdomine elongato,

squamis valde clongatis remiformibus analibus; valvulis dense

puosis ; subtus cristis ad basin abdominis clongatis, arcuatis, cocci-

neis, aliisque brevioribus, ochraceis. Generis typus 7’. remicauda.

Tarsolepis remicauda, sp.n. Pl. VEIL.

Wings above brownish grey; the cost and bases pale

ochreous: primaries with central area chestnut-brown, inter-

rupted between the nervures by double parallel lines uniting

at their extremities and bounded externally by an irregular

whitish line; two large subtriangular silver patches placed

obliquely on central area; outer margin sinuated and bordered

by a tricoloured band of black, ochreous, and chestnut; a very

indistinct, blackish, lunulate lime between margin and central

area: secondaries paler than primaries, with dusky spot at

end of cell; the margin externally chestnut-brown, mternally

pale ochraceous; fringe white: body above, with head, palpi,

and antenne, reddish brown, whitish in parts; collar ver

broad, silver-grey, with a transverse interrupted blackish stripe

Ann. & Maq. N. Hist, Ser. 4. Vol. x. 10

126 Mr. W. D. Rotch on a new Genus of Hydroid Zoophytes.

in front; thorax for the most part pale ochraceous, but with

the scales chestnut-tipped, and with two lateral pitchy streaks

uniting over the back; abdomen blackish grey, segments

somewhat ochraceous; a lateral series of six or seven black

spots; anus clothed with pale ochreous hairs and surrounded

by a zone of radiating, semitransparent, red-brown, paddle-

shaped scales, about half an inch long.

Wings below pale ochreous; a common waved dusky discal

line; margin narrowly edged with very light ochreous; a

series of submarginal black spots between nervures: primarics

with medio-discoidal area dusky; base, inner margin, and

basal half of second median interspace whitish ochraceous :

secondaries with large black spot at end of cell; fringe white,

spotted with brown: body below for the most part pale ochre-

ous; head, front and hind legs, and anus, except valves, red-

brown; two long curved tufts of carmine hairs at base of

abdomen.

Eixpanse of wings 3 inches 3 lines.

Hab. Java, Batavia. Coll. Cornthwaite.

The scales on the tail of this extraordinary moth are very

similar to those occurring on the bodies of many Lepidopterous

insects as seen under a high magnifying-power.

The genus comes nearest to Duduna.

XVII.—On a new Genus and Species of Hydroid Zoophytes.

By W. D. Rorcu, Esq.

STAUROCORYNE, nov. gen.

Gen. char.—Stem simple, rooted by a creeping filiform

stolon, the whole invested by a polypary. Polypites terminal,

clavate, with several verticils of capitate tentacula disposed

in the form of a cross.

Staurocoryne differs from Coryne in its mode of growth and

the disposition of its tentacles. Its mode of growth closely

resembles that of Cladonema; and it is equally slender and

hyaline.

In the cross-like disposition of its tentacles it nearly re-

sembles Stauridium. Its reproduction is unknown.

Staurocoryne Wortley?, nov. Sp.

Stem simple, of extreme tenuity; polypary hyaline and smooth;

polypites clavate, with 12 tentacles (when fully grown)

disposed in 8 whorls of 4 tentacles each; gonophores not

known.

Prof. A. Macalister on the Anatomy of the Koala. 127

I have named this minute but beautiful hydroid after

Colonel Stuart Wortley, in whose tanks it was first found. It

grows along the glass sides of the tank, sending out long

creeping shoots, whence the polypites rise at intervals.

It has recently appeared suddenly in my tanks, and, I fancy,

is not uncommon, though liable to be overlooked through its

minute size.

XIX.—The Muscular Anatomy of the Koala (Phascolarctos

cinereus). By ALEXANDER Maca.istrer, M.B., Professor

of Zoology, University of Dublin.

A FINE female Koala was procured from Mr. Gerrard by:

Prof. Haughton for the Anatomical Museum of the Dublin

University ; and as it was in splendid condition for dissection,

we were enabled to examine its muscular system thoroughly.

As in its anatomical arrangements it is by far the most

aberrant form among the Marsupials, I have compiled the

following list of its peculiarities, from which it will be

perceived that the myology of this animal is full of interesting

features.

The specimen was a salted one; but its muscles were

exceedingly well preserved and easily dissected. She mea-

sured 26 inches in length; and throughout there was a

marked disproportion in the development of the two sides, the

left-side muscles being very much larger and stronger than

the right. There was an exceedingly strong panniculus

carnosus, which sprang from the outside of the arm, and the

fibres of which passed backwards in an arcuate manner to the

integument of the sides; and forward, forming a very thick

platysma myotdes in the neck ; this muscle had a thick rounded

anterior border, and terminated by being inserted into the

skin along the ramus of the mandible; and, stretching even

above this limit, the facial fibres formed an even sheet over

the front of the masseter and the facial artery to terminate in

the middle line of the lower lip, the margin of the mouth, the

ala of the nose, and the lower margin of the orbicular muscle

of the eyelids.

The platysma on the hinder part of the body displayed

nothing of importance ; its femoral attachment was weak.

The facial muscles were unusually strong, the orbicularis

palpebrarum being a simple thick ring, composed of several

thick fascicles; the occ¢pitalis arises from the occipital protu-

berance, and passes radiating forwards; the frontalis, quite

separate, arises from the mesial line of the scalp, and runs

ioe

128 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

downwards to the inner half of the upper edge of the orbicu-

laris palpebrarum, extending into the origin of the levator

labit superioris.

The large auricle had a powerful arrangement of muscles

for its motions, having three series of transverse intrinsic

fibres on the back of the concha, and a strong bilaminar

retrahens aurem, which came from the occipital protuberance,

external and attached to the occipitalis, and was inserted by

the superficial layer of fibres into the back of the auricle;

the deep layer bifurcated into two muscular bundles—an upper

to the upper and anterior part of the auricle, and a lower to

the inferior part of the same cartilage.

The attollens aurem was thin and wide; and the attrahens

was a very strong wide slip, inseparable from the platysma ;

a second special attrahens existed in the form of a flat fleshy

slip from the anterior half inch of the temporal crest behind

the postorbital process, which ran downwards and backwards

over the temporal fascia and zygomatic arch to the inferior

margin of the helix : the lowest third of this muscle is tendi-

nous. ‘The other facial muscles were a single-headed levator

labit superioris aleque nast, a depressor labii inferioris, and

levator menti. I found no muscles attached to the angle of

the mouth other than the wide continued sheet of the pla-

tysma. ‘The orbicularis oris was strong, but the buccinator

was very feeble. A depressor labii supertoris from the upper

alveolar arch completes the catalogue. There was no zygo-

matic or buccal salivary gland.

The masticatory muscles were arranged as in all the

Marsupials, and equalled the pectorals in weight (masseteres +

temporales =1°4 oz.).

The external pterygoid is an exceedingly small rudiment,

crossing and inseparable from the internal.

The sterno-mastoid was four times the size of the cle¢do-

mastoid, and was inserted fleshy into the outer side of the

elongated paroccipital process. The latter had a tendinous

insertion, and was attached more internally to the same pro-

cess; its origin was by a fine flat fleshy band from the inner

sixth of the clavicle.

The omo-hyoid arose far back from the preescapula near its

superior angle; it had no tendinous inscription, and was in-

serted into the hyoid body and into a tendinous line in the

angle between the digastric and sterno-hyoid muscles, to both

of which it is connected. he posterior belly of the digastric

is exceedingly small and short, and arises from the front of the

paroccipital process ; it ends in a tendinous inscription which

gives partial origin to the anterior belly; but this latter part

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 129

is treble the size of the posterior, gaining an additional origin

from the tendinous line in which the omo- and _ sterno-hyoid

muscles terminate. ‘The tendinous inscription is very short

and oblique.

Sterno-hyoid is monogastric, and has a strong origin from

the back of the clavicle as well as from the second and third

pieces of the sternum. Sterno-thyrotd is much shorter and

more narrow, and has likewise no inscription. Mylo-hyoid

has very short fibres, and extends down for a very considerable

distance, overlying the very long slender genio-hyorder. A

transverse band of. muscle, like an aberrant slip of the mylo-

hyoid, crossed beneath the genio-hyoidet and superficial to the

genio-hyo-glossi; this is on each side attached to the mucous

membrane. The styloid group of muscles formed a single

sheet, the hinder fibres of which passed to the pharynx, the

middle to the cerato- -hyal under the stylo-hyoid ligament; the

anterior passed to the side of the tongue. Genio-h yo-glosst,

the palatine muscles, and /inguales are very normal.

The trapeztus is an indivisible sheet extending from the

inner third of the occiput to the seventh dorsal spe ; its in-

sertion is into the acromion and spine of the scapula ; and,

partly crossing the former, some of its fibres are inserted into

the surface of the tendinous fibres of origin of the deltoid.

The latissimus dorsi arose from the fourth to the tenth

dorsal spines, and, by the lumbar fascia, from the four spines

below these ; it had no costal origin.

The trachelo-acromial (omo- -atlantic) occupied by its insertion

one half the length of the spine of the scapula, and was much

thicker than usual. The rhomboid muscle is single and large,

half the size of the trapeztus; it occupies one half the occipital

curved line, the middle line of the nucha, and the three

upper dorsal spines. Serratus magnus was a single muscle

consisting of thirteen slips, six cervical and seven costal, whose

insertion was indivisible ; serratus posticus superior extends

in its insertion from the second to the eighth rib; serratus tn-

fertor, quite continuous with it, only distinguishable by the

upward direction of its fibres, was attached to “the mth, tenth,

and eleventh ribs. Splenius ‘arose from the three upper dorsal

and five lower cervical spines, and was attached to the occiput

and three upper cervical transverse processes. Trachelo-mastoid!

is not digastric, and stretches from the five lower cervical

transverse processes to the occipital bone. The other spinal

muscles were invariable.

The great pectoral is large, having the usual attachments; be-

neath it there are the following three muscles:—pectoralis minor,

from the cartilages of the third and fourth ribs to the shoulder-

130 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

capsule ; pectoralis quartus, from the cartilages of the lowest

four ribs to the shoulder-capsule; and a third pectoral (pecto-

ralis minimus of Wenzel Grube), from the manubrium sterni

and cartilage of the first rib to the shoulder-capsule. The

subclavius, under a strong costo-coracoid membrane, stretches

to the posterior margin of the outer third of the clavicle.

The deltord is a smgle muscle, composed of its three parts

united inseparably, and sending an extensive offshoot at its

insertion, which is continuous into the origin of the supinator

longus. 'The capsular muscles are developed in the following

proportions :—deltoid=1, supraspinatus=1-11, infraspinatus

=1°69, teres minor (exceedingly thin, with a marginal tendi-

nous origin for one fifth the axillary costa of the scapula

and an unusually wide fleshy insertion) =-08, subscapularis

=2, teres major=1.

The biceps is, as usual in Marsupials, composed of a partially

united gleno-ulnar and a coraco-radial muscle ; the latter re-

ceives a large fascicle from the former; the brachialis anticus

is long; the triceps externus and internus are united; and the

muscles of this region have to each other the following propor-

tions :—biceps coracoidalis =1, glenoidalis = 0°68, brachialis

=0°8, triceps lonqus=2, triceps externus and internus=2°6,

dorst epitrochlearts (which is inserted into the inner condyle and

olecranon) =0'14. There aretwoanconet,external and internal.

The pronatox and supinator muscles are well-developed. The

round pronator has but one head; and the guadrate pronator

occupies the lower sixth of the forearm. Supinator longus,

besides an origin from the deltoid, is attached to the lower half

of the humerus ; end its tendon, passing under the tendon of the

abductor major pollicis and lying on the wrist synovial mem-

brane, was inserted into the scaphoid bone. ‘The swpinator

brevis occupies two fifths of the radius. These muscles are

developed in the following proportions :—Pronatores : supina-

tores:: 1:4.

The other muscles in the forearm are well marked. The

radial and ulnar flexors of the carpus and the palmaris longus

are simple and normal; the flewor sublimis digitorum arises

from the front of the deep flexor, and is exceedingly feeble ; its

tendon for the fourth finger is the strongest. ‘The deep flexor

consists of four heads—one condyloid, one olecranal, one

radial, and one ulnar; five tendons spring from this; but the

polliceal tendon is not from the radial border of the common

tendon, but springs from the front of the tendon inside the edge,

as is sometimes the case in the Quadrumana.

The extensores carpt radiales are as usual, and are inserted,

not into the carpal ends, but into the middle of the shaft of

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 131

their respective metacarpal bones. The extensor secundus

digitorum was attached to the fourth and fifth fingers. The

other extensors of the fingers, ulnar carpal extensor and extensor

secundd internodit pollicis, are as usual.

The abductor pollicis major has a radio-interosseal origin

and a double tendon of insertion into the trapezium and first

metacarpal. . The left ¢ndicator sent a filmy shp to the pollex.

There is a separate extensor medit digit’, with an ulnar origin.

The proportions of these muscles are as follows :—flexors of

the wrist (fic. Ty Pe l., fic.ul.) : extensors of wrist (ec. 7. l.

& 6., 2. ¢. ul.) :: 0°36: 0°75; flexors of fingers (fi d; 8.

foadup.): extensors (é'ds Ch @: d. Bi, 02 O88: hs D5 Cs 8. OLD.) C2 t.,

ennesth ese OF202 -O'56:

The hand-muscles are as follows:—For the pollex, an

abductor brevis, a single-headed flexor, an opponens, and an

adductor (from the third metacarpal). For the little finger

there are the following muscles :—abductor, opponens, and

jflecor muscles. The dorsal interossei are (1) a two-headed

abductor indicts, (2) a two-headed abductor medit, (3) a bici-

pital abductor medii, (4) an abductor quarti digiti; the

palmar interossei are (1) an adductor indicis from the second

metacarpal under the adductor pollicis, (2) a common adductor

of the third and fourth digits.

There is no scalenus anticus; the medius is attached to the

first rib and to the fourth to the seventh vertebre ; the posticus

from the fifth transverse process to the third rib. Longus colli

consists of three parts—one from the bodies of the upper five

dorsal vertebrae to the cervical transverse processes, a second

part from the transverse processes of the fourth to the seventh

cervical vertebrae extending to the cervical bodies (second to

fifth), and a third from the same origin to the occiput.

The external oblique is attached to the ribs from the third to

the eleventh; the ¢nternal oblique and transversalis are with

very great difficulty separable. The rectus abdominis has eight

linee transverse intersecting it, and is attached to the xiphi-

sternum and to the cartilages of the second to the sixth ribs.

Pyramidalis is very wide, covers the entire of the vectus, and is

attached to the linea alba. The lumbar, vertebree, besides the

ordinary guadratus lumborum (with its three usual component

parts), have attached to them anterior ¢ntertransversales, most

of whose fibres skip two vertebra. ‘The psoas parvus is "equal

to the psoas magnus and 0°37 times the size of the combined

psoas magnus and tliacus, whose elements are imperfectly sepa-

rable ; the latter part of this mass is bipartite, the portion most

closely united to the psoas magnus being separate from a part

of the muscle arising from the anterior superior iliac spine.

132 Prof. A. Macalister on the Muscular Anatomy

The sartor’us is wide, and inserted into the inner side of the

patella, as well as into the knee-capsule and tibia. The peeé?-

neus is double at its insertion, but has a single origin. The

adductor longus is inserted posterior and superior to the pecti-

neus, and is very small, but attached to the marsupial bone, as

Prof. Owen observes. ‘The rest of the adductor mass exhibits

a faint division into the three usual elements, the condyloid

and the anterior and posterior strata of magnus. CQuadratus

femoris has a narrow ischiatic and a very wide femoral attach-

ment occupying the upper sixth of the femur; it is, however,

with great difficulty separated from the adductor magnus.

The gluteus maximus is bilaminar, the sacral part over-

lapping the coccygeal ; its insertion is into the whole length

of the linea aspera. ‘The gluteus medius is bilaminar, and the

pyriformis is perfectly separate, arising from the front surface

ot three vertebra ; over this muscle passes the sciatic nerve.

Gluteus minimus arises from the acetabular margin and from

the surface behind it, as well as from the anterior margin of the

ilium. I could separate no tensor vagine femoris.

Rectus femoris had but a single head; and the other ele-

ments in the extensor mass formed but one continuous belly,

in which the vastus externus portion is by far the largest

factor. The hamstrings are the usual three ; and none of them

exhibits a trace of a tendinous inscription. iceps has a narrow

tendon of origin 1°25 in length from the sacrum, which is tied

down to and parallel with the great sciatic ligament; the in-

sertion is wide and fleshy. The proportionate development of

these muscles is as follows :—vrectus=1, biceps=1, semi-

membranosus = 1°45, semitendinosus= 0°80, rest of the guadri-

ceps extensor =3'58. ‘Thus the flexors : extensors :: 1°87 oz.

: 2:lloz. (I have included the gracilis with the flexors ; it

has a pubic origin and a slender insertion, and equals the sem-

tendinosus in weight.)

The popliteus muscle arises from the fibula alone, and is in-

serted into the tibia close to the tibialis posticus.

The outer head of the gastrocnemius has a sesamoid bone in

its tendon of origin; the inner head, which is only half its size,

has no such bone. Plantaris arises from the sesamoid bone,

inseparable from the outer head, and does not become distin-

guishable until about the lower third of the leg; its tendon is

inserted into the fascia of the foot on the inner side of the heel.

We could not separate any soleus from the gastrocnemius

externus.

The common flexor of the toes had an origin mainly fibular,

and sent off five tendons, those of the second and third toes

being closely joimed for the longest portion of their extent.

of the Koala (Phascolarctos cinereus). 133

Tibialis posticus is double :—a larger muscle, placed rather more

superficially, and inserted anteriorly into the sesamoid at the

base of the hallux; a smaller, deeper muscle, inserted into the

entocuneiform and second and third metatarsals,

The perforated flexor of the toes was a very remarkable

muscle ; it lay, not in the foot as usual, but on the back of the

leg, arising from the surface of the ‘flewor profundus for the

lower half of the leg, exactly like its homotype the flexor sub-

limis in the forearm ; its fleshy portion does not extend below

the ankle; but its tendons pass to the second, third, fourth,

and fifth toes. There is no jlecor accessortus in the foot ; but

a muscle, evidently similar to this in nature, passes from the

caleaneum to the sesamoid at the base of the hallux.

There is a long peroneus which arises from the upper half of

the fibula and from the sesamoid bone of the g gastrocnemius exter-

nus; this is inserted as usual. Peronwusbrevis is alsonormal, and

quite separate from the peronceus quinti, below which it arises.

There is also a peroneus quarti metatars? in front of the quint?,

perfectly separate from it and placed behind the malleolus.

Tibialis anticus and extensor hallucts are normal. The ex-

tensor digitorum sends off four tendons; but those for the

second and third digits are connected until very close to their

insertion.

On the back of the leg there is a large pronator quadratus

like that in the leg of other Marsupials and the crocodile; this

occupied more than half the length.

The foot-muscles are the following :—lfor the hallux there

is an abductor, a bicipital flexor breve 2s, an opponens (from the

inner cuneiform to the metatarsal), and an adductor (from the

second metatarsal to the hallux) ; there is also an “ ¢nterosseus

primus volaris,” like Henle’s interosseous m the manus. For

the little finger there is an abductor proper and a separate ab-

TL ese ee digitt (Flower). There is no

lumbricalis for the second digit ; that for the third comes from

the tendon for the third digit alone; that for the fourth comes

from the third and fourth tendons; and that for the fifth comes

from the fourth tendon.

The cnterossed are arranged as follows :—The dorsal are:

(1) abductor indicts, bicipital ; (2) abductor medit, bicipital ;

(3) abductor quartz, also two- headed ; (4) abductor quar tt, with

only one head from the fourth metatarsal. . The palmar are :

(1) adductor halluctis, as before mentioned; (2) adductor

indicts ; (3) adductor (?) mediv, from the second metatarsal to

the fibular side of the third, whose metatarsal it crosses ;

(4) adductor minimi digiti. There is also a very small oppo-

nens minim digitt inserted into the metatarsal of the fifth toe.

134. Dr. J. H. Gray on some

Prof. Owen has said that among the Marsupials “the Koala

has the best claim to typical preeminence” (Todd’s Cyclop.

vol. iii. p. 329); and certainly from the foregoing account it

will be seen that this animal presents, in its muscular system,

a greater number of structural divergences from the general

placental type than, perhaps, any other Didelphian.

XX.—On a new Genus of Hexaradiate and other Sponges

discovered in the Philippine Islands by Dy. A. B. Meyer.

By Dr. J. BH. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Dr. Apot¥ BerNHARD Mryer has brought with him some

beautiful species of hexaradiate sponges, which he obtained

at ‘Talisay on Cebu, in March 1872, and they are now in the

collection of the British Museum.

the two principal sponges discovered by Dr. Meyer would

form two very distinct families according to the classification

published in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872, June, p. 442.

They both belong to the order Coralliospongia. Before I pro-

ceed to define them I may remark that the order may be

divided into three groups:

I, The normal Coralliosponges have elongate subulate rays

to the hexaradiate spicules, which are generally smooth, but

one or more of them may be covered with spines or lobes

directed towards the tip. ‘This group contains the first ten

families in the paper above referred to. The genus Cratero-

morpha here described appears to belong to it.

I]. This group, which may be considered the abnormal

form of the order, has the hexaradiate spines with short uni-

form rays of equal length, each ending in a number of re-

flexed lobes, and forming in their completely developed state

a cube.

It will contain two families, and may be thus divided :—

A. Sponge sessile, attached.

Fam. 1. Carteriade.

B. Sponge free, attached to the bottom of the sea by tufts of

elongate anchoring fibres.

Fam. 2. Meyerinidz.

Sponge elongate, tubular, covered with a cobweb-like netted »

coat, with a circle of tufts of anchoring fibres at the base, which

extend more than halfway through the length of the body, and

Philippine-Island Sponges. i349)

then, by repetition of a shorter kind, are continued on to the

apex, where they also form a circle of tufts round the margin

of the apical aperture.

~ Genus 1. Meyerina.

III. This group, which is equally abnormal, has the hexa-

radiate spicules with very short cubic rays. The genus Awvos

alone belongs to this group.

I have described this sponge under the name of “ Meyerella

claviformis,”’ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for July 1872, p. 76;

but as I am told that the generic name of ‘‘Afeyerella” has been

used for a genus of small Lepidoptera, 1 propose to alter this

name to Meyerina claviformis.

Dr. Meyer brought a second specimen of this beautiful

sponge. ‘The club is rather smaller compared with the size

of the stem, which is considerably thicker than in the other

specimen. The elongate transparent spicules by which the

sponge is anchored to the bottom are placed in very numerous

cylindrical fascicles rather close together in a circle on the

edge of the truncated circular base of the stem of the sponge.

These cylindrical rope-like fascicles may be seen to extend

in the way above mentioned throughout the whole length of

the body, terminating in small tufts of naked spicules round

the apex of the club; while the whole surface appears covered

with hexaradiate spicules, like those of Moltenta—that is to

say, with the external end of the axis abortive.

Mr. Carter has kindly examined this sponge microscopically,

and in a note observes :—“ It is a true Oarteria, so nearly

allied in the form of the spicules that but for its general form it

might be a second species of the genus. ‘he net-like struc-

ture over this sponge is just that of Carterta in spicular com-

position, as already mentioned.”

The discovery of a second species of the genus, or rather

family Carteriade, decidedly shows that the sponge that is

found parasitic on the Hyalonema cannot be a part of that

genus, as Dr. Bowerbank, Dr. Wyville Thomson, and others

have supposed; for no one can believe tor a minute that the

free clavitorm Philippine Carteria is any part of a Fyalonema,

which it ought to be if the attached Japanese Carterta is only

a state of that genus, or that one species of the genus is only

a state of another most distinct genus, and the other species a

distinct genus by itself; for surely Meyerina claviformis is not

a state of Hyalonema! Indeed Mr. Carter observes that “Meyc-

rina is more nearly allied to Holtenia than Carterta; but thoy

are both allied in their spicules and differ chiefly in their

136 Dr. J. E. Gray on some

general structure and form.” Iam glad to state that Mr. Carter

has undertaken to examine this sponge more in detail.

The other sponge is of the shape and size of a large goblet,

with a cylindrical stem nearly as long as the cup, which I

propose to describe as |

CRATEROMORPHA.

Sponge attached to marine bodies, goblet-shaped.

Body hollow, vasiform, with a circular mouth, swollen at

the bottom, placed at the top of the stem, and of very different

structure from it, the line of demarcation being distinctly

marked. Vase rather dilated and thick at the bottom, very thin

towards the edge, which is terminated by a very thin mem-

brane-like margin. ‘he outer surface of the vase pierced with

cylindrical cavities, and the whole surface covered with a mi-

nute network formed of the four rays of hexaradiate spines,

which are so placed as to form square meshes. The internal

cavity large, reaching nearly to the bottom of the vase, and

furnished at the base with very large irregularly shaped oscules,

which become smaller, more regular, and oblong-lanceolate

about the middle of the walls, and circular in the upper part,

gradually diminishing in size as they approach the margin of

the cavity, where they are smallest.

Stem thick, cylindrical, with numerous parallel, similar,

longitudinal, cylindrical tubular spaces in a felt of spicules;

covered externally with a layer of short robust ones arranged

longitudinally, and on this, again, the minute network with

square meshes, like that on the club, finally ending below in

a multitude of spiculiferous filaments extending some way

into the mass of sandy mud at its base.

Crateromorpha Meyert.

Hab. Philippine Islands, Talisay, on Cebu, March 1872

(Dr. A. B. Meyer).

This sponge is like a large goblet, with the body about 34

inches long, and a thick stem of nearly the same length, which

is attached to a mass of hard mud. ‘The stem is pale reddish

brown, and the body greenish white; in its dry state, and

most probably bleached.

The cruciform central rays of the hexaradiate spicules are

short. and placed regularly perpendicularly—that is to say,

parallel to the longitudinal axis of the body—and the others

horizontally, or transversely with regard to the imaginary axis

of the sponge. The rays of each spicule are free from those of

ite neighbour, but overlap each other to their full extent, and

so form a regular network of square meshes, as in the genus

Philippine-Island Sponges. 137

Farrea, where the spicules are united by their rays but im-

bedded in glassy fibre; hence, as Mr. Carter observes, Dr.

Bowerbank’s mistake of calling it “ fistulous siliceous fibre ”’

(B.8.); whereas in the genus //o/tenta and allied genera the

cruciform rays of the hexaradiate spicules are placed obliquely

with regard to the axis, forming a network of rhombic meshes.

This sponge evidently belongs to the first group of the

Coralliospongia, and the first section of them, as defined in my

paper above referred to (p. 450), and will form a family distinct

from those there defined, which may be thus characterized :-—

Fam. Crateromorphide.

Sponge cup-shaped, attached by an elongated pedicel, formed

of numerous short spicules. Body of sponge covered externally

with hexaradiate spicules, the outer ray of which is aborted,

placed in longitudinal and transverse lines, making a square

mesh ; hollow, with large oscules, which diminish in size as

they reach the margin of the cup. Stem formed of numerous

cylindrical tubes, situated in a spiculous felt; ending in a

bunch of filaments sunk in the mud.

Rossella philippensis.

Dr. Meyer also brought from Cebu a sponge the size of a

moderately large walnut (that is, about 14 inch long), regular,

oblong, smooth, thick, spongy, truncated at the top, with

large circular apertures, and with a large deep cavity occupy-

ing nearly the whole of the body of the sponge. The hinder

half of the sponge has sundry distant cylindrical tufts of elon-

gated siliceous fibres spreading out from the sponge and then

directed backwards.

This is very like the Zetclla polywra of Schmidt (Atlantic

Sponge-Fauna, t. vi. f. 8), the type of my genus Lophurella ;

but the Philippine sponge is oblong, longer than broad, smooth

on the external surface, and truncated above, with a large

mouth, in fact like a round-based tumbler.

If this is the young state of another sponge of a different

form, which is possible, it is a giant of its kind. The Zetilla

polyura of Schmidt is only } inch long; and the young form

of Tethya antarctica described by Mr. Carter is much smaller, in

fact microscopic ; whereas this is more than an inch long and

comparatively broad, and resembles the goblet of Crateromorpha

Meyert. It is not the young of that sponge, as Mr. Carter

shows that the spicules are markedly different; and we have

no other Philippine sponge of which it could be the young.

Mr. Carter has kindly sent me the following account of his ex-

amination of the sponge :—

138 Dr. J. 1. Gray on some Philippine-Island Sponges.

“This is a Jtossella, as you will see directly, not 2. antare-

tica, simply because the arms of the surface or body in Lt. an-

tarctica ave spined; in the Philippine one they are smooth.

“ Dr. Wyville Thomson sent me a woodcut of this sponge,

noticing its resemblance to Schmidt's Tettlla polywra. 1

wrote back and said it was allied to Rossella antarctica and not

a Tethya at all, for all its spicules, of which there are only two

kinds apparent in the figure, are, or should be, fowr-armed. |

“No Yethya has more than three-armed spicules; but his

artist had put in three-armed at the end of the tailed ones.

Now I see how the artist has overlooked this important charac-

ter, just as Schmidt states, at the end of his preface to his

Adriatic sponges, ‘an artist by profession fails here.’

“There is no such spicule, fowr-armed recurved, in any other

sponge. Was I wrong in stating this as the peculiarity of

Rossella? Wave we not now found out a Philippine one by it ?

“ Tas not Thomson’s artist, because he did not know the

value of this fourth arm in the tailed spicules, omitted to put

in more than three, although he has put in four in the body-

spicules? And do we not here see the disadvantage under

which a professed artist labours, as Schmidt has stated ?

“T find the Philippine Rossella has been put into a bottle with

the two other species that you sent down in the box, or at least

with the goblet-sponge and the Muplectella®, because it contains

spicules of the latter. When the heads of spicules with recurved

spines get into other sponges they break off and remain there,

because being barbed like an arrow they easily go in, but never

come out again; and you can always tell that they do not be-

long to the species, because they have their heads where their

tails ought to be. No spicule has a head like this 7 the sponge :

it is always at the extremity of the long spicule, of course.

Hence it was that | found so many of the four-armed headed

spicules stuck into Tethya antarctica, and was thus able to

make out the antarctic deep-sea genus Lossella.

“There are several of the spicules of the goblet-shaped

sponge [ Crateromorpha] in the surface of the Philippine Mos-

sella, especially the minute spicules, somewhat like in structure

though not in form to those of Muplectella.”

Mr. Carter, in a subsequent note, states that the minute

spicules i Crateromorpha and Rossella ave very much alike,

and that they both contain crucial-headed ones which are

almost undistinetishable from each other.

He also adds that Dr. W.'lhomson has sent him the speci-

men of Rossella above alluded to, and that it turns out to be a

* (It was contained in the same bottle of spirits as Luplectella—J. Mi. G.)

Dr. J. E. Gray on Codiophyllum. 139

third species of that genus, being widely different from the

antarctic and Philippine ones.

Euplectella aspergillum.

Dr. A. B. Meyer has brought home, and-placed in the Bri-

tish Museum, two specimens Of this sponge in spirits from the

Philippines, which are entirely covered with a thick coat of

sareode like the bark on a Gorgonia, but softer, so that the

siliceous fibres are entirely hidden from view. No one would

suspect that this sponge had such a beautiful lace-like struc-

ture, but simply a netted or pierced tube, with irregular, cir-

cular, thicker hoops. The flesh or sarcode is of a dark Bravia

colour, but most likely is coloured by the action of the spirit.

Esperiade.—Along with these sponges were sent some frag-

ments of a sponge, according to Mr. Carter’s examination,

} ; : ihe : : J

“nearly allied to Halichondria incrustans, with three kinds of

spicules :—1, large, subulate, smooth; 2, bihamate; 3, equi-

anchorate, larger than the bihamate.”

Mr. Carter’s microscopical examination of Meyerina clavi-

formis and Crateromorpha Meyert will be found at pp. 110-118

of this Number of the ‘ Annals.’

XXI.—On Codiophyllum, a new Genus of Unicellular Green

Alge from Port Natal. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

[Plate IX. ]

AMONG a large collection of corals and corallines from Port

Natal, sent by Colonel Bolton, I observed some specimens of

a green spongy alga of a thick cloth-lke texture, more or less

of a wedge-shape, and borne on a solid, cylindrical stem,

which is branched at the bottom, and may "be a distinct Rho-

dosperm Alga on which it is parasitic. ‘This stem pierces and

supports the broad, expanded frond, and is branched so that

the branches support the different parts of the expansion.

When the felt-like cloth is carefully examined, it is found to

consist of a very fine network of fine cylindrical tubular fibre,

which inosculates in every direction, leaving a minute mesh.

When looked at in a mass, the mesh seems to be arranged

in very obscure circles concentric to the outer margin, indi-

cating the lines of growth, the mesh of the outer edge ‘being

incomplete. The stem is tough and fleshy when soaked in

water, but becomes cartilaginous when dry; in the younger

specimens it is tortuous and slightly branched, each branch

140 Dr. J. E. Gray on Codiophyllum.

ending in a triangular, wedge-shaped frond, with the stem

extending a slight distance from its base; the stem is thick

and gradually tapers as it extends in length, and is affixed to

a rock by a rather extended base. The older fronds become

more or less semicircular, with one or two slight lobes on the

circumference, and the stem becomes divided at the base of the

frond into several branches, which spread out in a palmated

manner and thus support the different parts of the frond, which

rarely throws out a rounded lobe of a similar structure from

its surface.

The stem when wet is flesh-coloured, becoming dark brown

or blackish when dry; the frond is green, like the rest of the

chlorosperm Algz.

This plant evidently forms a new family ; and I do not know

to what existing group of the green Alge to refer it. The

filaments of which the felted net is composed are cylindrical,

all of the same size, and in external appearance like the fibre

of Cladophora; but they appear to be entirely destitute of

articulations, and they are very unlike the continuous fibre of

the Oscillatoria or Calothrix, and they seem to have most

alliance with Bryopsis.

This plant, when roughly dried with other seaweeds as it

comes out of the sea (and | have little doubt it is so when it is

growing), has a matted green frond which is thicker and more

opaque in the older and more developed specimens, when it

looks like a piece of felted cloth just showing the internal

stems through some parts of it; but when it is washed in fresh

water and dried between blotting-paper with just sufficient

pressure to prevent its curling, the frond loses a great part of

its thickness, becomes nearly transparent, shows the details of

the network and the internal part of the stem through the

substance, very unlike the living state of the plant.

The genus may be thus defined :—

Cobpi0PHYLLUM.

The frond expanded, formed of uniform, minute network,

_ matted together so as to form a cloth, and consisting of uni-

form cylindrical tubular fibres supported or parasitic on a car-

tilagimous solid stem, which pierces the base of the frond and

is affixed to the rocks by an expanded base.

Codiophyllum natalense. Pl. IX.

Stem branched, tapering, ending in a triangular wedge-

shaped frond, which becomes more or less semicircular, and

sometimes furnished with one or more lobes on the surface.

Hab. Coast of Natal.

Mr. H. J. Carter’s Answer to Dr. Bowerbank. 141

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.

Fig. 1. The adult frond.

Fig. 2. The worn stems of an adult frond; part of the network still

remaining.

Fig. 3. A young specimen with root dried after being soaked in fresh water.

Fig. 4. Part of the frond magnified, showing the imperfect meshes in pro-

cess of formation on the margin.

XXI.—Answer to Dr. Bowerbank’s “ Observations on Mr.

Carter's paper cc.” in the last Number of the ‘ Annals.’

By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &c.

In reply to Dr. Bowerbank’s criticisms on my paper “On

two new Sponges from the Antarctic Sea &c.,” in the ‘ Annals’

of last June, I can only state that I shall be quite satisfied

with the verdict that a perusal of our respective papers may

give. I employ no artist, make my own drawings, write my

own descriptions to the best of my ability, and with nothing

to compensate me but the hope that I am communicating the

truth, and, in many instances, saving future students from

losing time in labouring to understand that which too fre-

quently is imaginary, misconceived, or utterly unintelligible.

Truly it has been said, that “ of all extravagance, waste of

time is the greatest;’’ and what is this but a grievous waste

entailed upon posterity (if his works ever reach it) of an ig-

norant or unscrupulous author.

In criticising Dr. Bowerbank’s publications I am not criti-

cising Dr. Bowerbank (personally we should not know each

other in the street), but simply, as I have before stated, en-

deavouring to save time for those who may come after us in

similar inquiries.

Controversial disputes afford very little interest to any but

the parties immediately concerned, and therefore ought not to be

allowed to occupy the pages of a valuable scientific journal.

Dr. Bowerbank’s and my own descriptions are now before

the public; and a practical examination of them concerns the

public and posterity much more than it will ever concern us.

I have not time to make finished drawings, but my sketches,

I have no doubt, will serve, at least diagrammatically, with

my descriptions to convey the meaning I intend to an intel-

ligent naturalist.

Besides, however “talented and accurate a microscopical

artist”? may be, Dr. Bowerbank will hardly deny, I should

think, what Dr. Schmidt states on this subject at the end of

the preface to his work on the Adriatic Sponges, viz. :—‘‘ Ein

Maler von Profession wiirde die Charaktere vieler Species

kaum haben ausdriicken kénnen, &c.”’

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. iia!

142 Royal Society :-—

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

ROYAL SOCIETY.

May 16, 1872.—Francis Galton, M.A., Vice-President, in the Chair.

“Remarks on the sense of Sight in Birds, accompanied by a de-

scription of the Eye, and particularly of the Ciliary Muscle, in three

species of the order Rapaces.” By Rosert James Leg, M.A.,

M.D.

Ir is proposed in this communication to describe certain peculiarities

in the eye of the bird as compared with the eyes of other Vertebrata,

and, further, to examine to what extent those peculiarities enable us

to explain the remarkable powers of sight with which all species of

birds are more or less highly endowed.

Those who study the habits and modes of existence of the lower

animals, find great interest in applying to various phenomena con-

nected with them the results of anatomical investigation, and in

endeavouring to discover such causes, or means adequate to produce

such effects, as to render the supposition of the existence of an

indefinite property like instinct very frequently unnecessary.

This method it is my desire to apply in the explanation of those

high and distant flights which are performed by certain species of

birds in search of food or in their migrations to different localities.

For us it is difficult to form a clear conception of the power of

sight possessed by birds if we only use our own faculties in this

respect as the standard of comparison; by which I mean to imply

that the mind must be prepared for the consideration of the pheno-

mena referred to by observing in detail numerous important differ-

ences in the structure of the eye, which combine to facilitate a

conception of ideas otherwise beyond the reasonable limits to which

even imagination might extend. .

This field of inquiry will long engage the attention of the naturalist

and anatomist; indeed it may be said to be inexhaustible; and I

feel considerable hesitation in offering a contribution insignificantly

small to the elucidation of a subject of such magnitude.

We may acquire some idea of the sight of the bird by comparing

the dimensions of the eye with those of the brain or the optic lobes ;

and by arranging the measurements thus obtained, and referring

them to some fixed standard, we may estimate the relative and

individual powers of vision enjoyed by different species. In illustra-

tion of this we have an instance, in the case of one of the birds which

I propose to describe minutely in this communication, in which the

eye is actually considerably larger than in the human species; and

we have a still more striking example, considering the size of the bird,

in the Goura coronata.

Again, if we regard the eye as an optical instrument, we may

estimate its efficiency by examining the internal structures on which

the formation and perception of the image depend,—such as the

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 148

size and coefficient of refraction of the lens, the extent and character

of the retina, and particularly those differences of minute structure

which have relation to susceptibility to light, by which the night-

flying birds are distinguished from the day-flyers. Nor does the in-

quiry into the effects of domestication upon the sight appear less

interesting.

It is only to point out the various ways in which we may deal with

this subject that I have mentioned these different lines of research,

and in order that it may be understood that I have not overlooked

their importance. It is to one particular property of the eye that

my own observations have beeri chiefly directed, namely the power

of accommodation for distance; and I shall endeavour to show that

in birds great range of vision depends upon the development and

character of the ciliary muscle, to which all are agreed that the power

of adjustment is to be attributed.

It is chiefly, then, a comparison of the ciliary muscle in different

birds to which I invite attention, assuming the perfection of the sight

to depeud on this power of accommodation, and that again on the

character of the muscle. Let me first mention the general opinion

entertained by those who are best acquainted with the habits of

that class of birds which astonish us by the rapidity and duration

of their flights, namely the pigeons, in regard to the means by which

they accomplish them. In his interesting work on this subject Mr.

Tegetmeier gives his reasons for concluding that “ homing,” as it is

termed in the Antwerp pigeon, is not the result of “instinct,” but

of “observation.” ‘These pigeons require to be trained stage by

stage, or they are certain to be lost. ‘The best of them refuse to fly

in a fog or in the dark. They crave in new localities some known

landmark; and hence their gradually increasing gyrations, until

having descried some familiar object, they recollect their route and

fly straight ahead. The objection that no pigeon can possibly see

for two hundred miles ahead is met by the details of aéronautic ex-

perience. Mr. Glaisher, half a mile aloft in air, could embrace in

his “ bird’s-eye view” the course of the Thames from the Nore to

Richmond ; and Mr. Wheelwright, though puzzled to account for

the flying pigeons ‘‘ homing”’ across seas (as from London to Ant-

werp), which can offer no landmark, is disposed to attribute their

power of doing so to their habit of soaring round, circling, and

beating about until, sooner or later, they can descry their familiar

guide-posts.

My own observations entirely support Mr. Tegetmeier’s conclu-

sions. This part of my subject is one of general interest; and I

trust that I shall be pardoned for attempting to alleviate the tedious-

ness of anatomical details by this digression.

It must clearly be understood that perfection of sight for very near

objects is as important as very extensive range, and that the chief

function of the ciliary muscle is to adjust the sight for the former

rather than for the latter. When the eye is at rest (that is to say,

when the muscle is relaxed) vision of very distant objects is permitted ;

and it is when the distance is diminished to a very few inches, and

144 Royal Society :-—

in small species of birds to considerably less than an inch, that the

action of the muscle is exerted.

The exact functions performed by the ciliary muscle in all those

vertebrata in which it exists are still undecided ; but it is not difficult

to reconcile the accounts which have been given by different anato-

mists of its structure, if we are aware of the fact that the muscle

does not possess the same characters in all classes of animals—

indeed, that it is not precisely the same in those that are very nearly

allied ; so that it is important, particularly in the case of birds, as

will be seen, to mention the species under consideration.

It may be stated generally that in birds it is developed in a re-

markable degree ; in fish it is entirely wanting; in the mammalia it

varies directly in proportion to the powers of sight possessed by the

species, except in the feline class and in those animals which enjoy

the power of nocturnal vision, and in which the ciliary muscle is

peculiarly large and differently developed from the same structure in

other mammals.

The three specimens which are to be described belong to the Eagle

Owl, the Egyptian Vulture, and the Buzzard. They were brought

from Egypt by a gentleman who shot the birds himself, and removed

the eyes while in the fresh state, preserving them in spirit of wine

till he sent them to me.

The eye of the Eagle Owl presents in the most striking degree the

peculiar characters of the class to which it belongs. The first of

these are its shape and size, too well known to require description,

adapted as they are to the very shallow cavities of the orbits.

In the Egyptian Vulture the pyramidal shape of the eye is less

remarkable, and a slight approach is observable in it to the spherical

globe. Inthe Buzzard this is still more marked, and the eye resembles

as much the eye of the Pigeon as it does that of the Eagle Owl.

In examination of specimens which have been preserved in spirit,

it is necessary to restore the pliancy of the tissues of the ciliary

muscle by allowing them to remain in water for some days; and I

may observe that as this condition must be obtained in order to

make satisfactory preparations, the method of using solutions of

chromic acid or bichromate of potash to enable the anatomist to

make sections is not to be recommended, if the object be to ascertain

the dimensions of the muscle and the elasticity of the ligament, which

will be presently described. It need hardly he stated that the best

mode of treating the eye is to freeze it and then make sections.

The strong plates of bone which exist in the sclerotic of birds

preserve the shape of the eye sufficiently well to allow of the dimen-

sions being ascertained after it has been preserved in spirit.

In the Eagle Owl the dimensions are as follow :—

in.

iamieter Of COMPA. st es... ee f

Wiameter’ot base Of CVE «eas. eres 135

Antere-postetior length ..25.-.-..........- 15%

ALPLETAiammetor OF fefigesemn. <. os. sae eer fh

nie

Antero-posterior diameter of lens ..........

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 145

The shape of the lens does not appear to be altered by the action

of alcohol; but the size is diminished, and the measurements just

stated are less than they would be found to be if the lens had been

perfectly fresh.

The eye is first to be divided into halves by cutting through

the sclerotic, choroid, cornea, and iris. We may regard the sclerotic

as a hollow case enclosing a sphere, of which the choroid is the

proper covering, and which sphere is attached to its case by tissues

of highly elastic and muscular properties, by which a certain amount

of movement is capable of being effected in the parts on which the

formation of the image depends. It is to be observed, however, that the

posterior surface of the choroid is kept in close apposition to the

inner and posterior surface of the sclerotic, so that movement of the

anterior parts is not communicated to that part on which the optic

nerve is expanded. In the eye of the Eagle Owl these conditions

are obtained in the following manner.

The whole of the posterior surface of the choroid which corresponds

to the optic disk is kept in close apposition to the sclerotic by the

direct attachment of the circumference of the part immediately

beneath the margin of the retina; it is also fixed where the nerve

passes through the sclerotic, while delicate fibres from the choroid

keep it in its position at other points.

The anterior part of the choroid, on the contrary, is not in contact

with the sclerotic, as the ciliary muscle and the structure I have termed

the posterior elastic ligament intervene.

This division of the choroid is not artificial, but is clearly defined

by a difference of structure. The posterior part is but slightly

vascular, is not elastic, is of considerable tenuity, and has greater

resemblance in its general characters to the choroid of fish than to

that of the mammalia.

The anterior portion is covered on its internal surface by the ciliary

processes, which extend to the angle of curvature of the posterior

part of the eye. The tissue of this part of the choroid is of peculiar

character ; it is dense, strong, and imelastic, and appears to be com-

posed of delicate fibrous tissue. The combination of these characters

enables it to preserve its symmetrical shape, and ensure to some

degree the preservation of the structures within it. It possesses a

rigidity which may be compared to that of ordinary writing-paper,

and is of about the same thickness. The anterior part of the choroid

is attached to the sclerotic by another structure—a system of fine

elastic fibres which pass from the corneal margin of the sclerotic to

the line of union between the iris and the choroid, and for which I

proposed the name of anterior elastic filaments. Between the an-

terior elastic filaments and the posterior elastic ligament (a distance

in the eye of the Eagle Owl of nearly five eighths of an inch) is

interposed the ciliary muscle. The body of the muscle is attached

to the line of union of the sclerotic and cornea, so that it may be said

to arise from the anterior angle of curvature. The greater part of the

posterior portion of the muscle is of delicate tendinous structure ; its

line of insertion into the choroid is the same as, but on the opposite

146 Royal Society :—

side of, the line of insertion of the posterior elastic ligament. The

breadth of the latter structure is about one eighth of an inch, while

the length of the anterior elastic filaments is nearly the same. Thus,

passing from before backwards, we have the anterior elastic filaments,

the body of the ciliary muscle, its long delicate tendinous portion,

and lastly the posterior elastic ligament. To exhibit the structures

satisfactorily, the best plan is to make a section of the choroid and

sclerotic of one sixteenth of an inch in thickness, and after fixing the

two ends of the section on a layer of cork with needles, to dissect the

muscle under water or aleohol—a very simple process if a magnifying-

glass of an inch focus is employed. It is only necessary to draw the

iris gently away from the sclerotic so as to extend the anterior elastic

filaments, fixing it with a needle, and then to do the same with the

choroid, taking care to hold that membrane at a point posterior to

the line of insertion of the posterior elastic ligament.

The length of the ciliary muscle is about three eighths of an inch.

I have attempted to preserve sections made in this way in Canada

balsam, but have found that rupture of the ligament usually takes

place, I presume from its tenacity being destroyed by the action of

the fluid. It is on that part of the choroid which hes between its

two lines of attachment, on its internal surface, that the ciliary pro-

cesses are developed, and to the anterior part. of those processes that

the crystalline lens is attached. Contraction of the ciliary muscle, it

is reasonable to suppose, would produce a change in the position of

the lens, and would take place when the object to which the sight

was directed was close to the eye—that is to say, the muscle is

employed in accommodation for short range of vision. The position

of rest is restored by the posterior elastic ligament, which acts in

direct opposition to the muscle.

The eye of the Vulture is smaller than that of the Owl, is not so

decidedly pyramidal in shape, and may be placed between the latter

and the eye of the Buzzard. The chief difference, however, between

them is in the greater degree of concavity which the posterior portion

of the sclerotic assumes; so that in the Owl the retina lies on a flatter

surface than in the Buzzard, while in that respect the Vulture is be-

tween the two.

The dimensions of the eye of the Vulture are as follow :—

in.

Diameter of cores 2 tk. Ce ee es ae 7

Lateral diameter of the sclerotic in its broadest part.... 15%

Antero-posterior diameter of eye ...........+...... 42

Meneth of-ciliary muscle*)-eopee es se. Se ee ene

Breadth of the posterior elastic ligament ..!......... ay

Length of the anterior elastic filaments approximately the same.

With regard to the anterior elastic filaments and the posterior

elastic ligament, it is unnecessary to make further remark, beyond

that they resemble those structures in the eye of the Owl.

In the Buzzard the dimensions of the eye and its structures are as

follow :—

Mr. R. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 147

in.

Diameter Gt comer. | hat bse. 150 Se alfele es sess) os zi

AiaternMainmmeterot eye sO SS 2.120%. ene Noa l

Antero-posterior diameter of eye .................. 3

Kener ciliary wrasele Yee 2 0,05) ae Gee sees a5

Length of posterior elastic ligament ................ } q

Length of anterior elastic filament ................ 16

In order to ascertain the mechanical effect produced by the ciliary

muscle, the simple experiment may be performed of applying traction,

by means of a pair of forceps, on the choroid, the dissection being

arranged and fixed as I have described. It will readily be seen that

the elastic ligament acts in direct opposition to the muscle, and in

the living eye has the power of restoring the parts to the condition

of rest.

The ciliary muscle is composed of striated fibre of very distinct

character. It varies, asis seen in the three examples described, in

length and amount of muscular tissue. The tendon in the Owl is

long and the body of the muscle short ; but in the other species, as

in most birds, the muscular fibres extend to a great length, if not

entirely from the origin to the insertion of the muscle. These minute

differences should be pointed out in detail in the case of each species

of bird.

The elastic ligament is composed of very delicate elastic tissue, the

microscopical character of which is well defined.

On the peculiar nature of the anterior elastic filaments I beg to

postpone any decided opinion.

With regard to the nerves which supply the ciliary muscle and

the iris, I have no particular remarks to offer, as the description

which I gave some years ago of the ganglia and plexuses on the

ciliary nerves in the eye of the Pheasant will apply generally to all

birds. Whether the contraction of the iris and the accommodation

of the sight be voluntary or involuntary actions on the part of birds

we cannot say positively ; I am inclined to believe that the latter is

the case.

For the sake of convenience, and to render any further researches

on the dimensions of the different parts of the eye in other species

of birds symmetrical with those contained in this communication, I

have arranged the principal facts in a tabular form (see p. 148).

From this Table we may draw the following conclusions :—

that in the Eagle Owl the range of vision is small, the power of

accommodation very rapid ; in the Vulture range of vision is great,

the power of accommodation considerable, but slower than in the

Owl ; in the Buzzard the range of vision is greater still, and the power

of accommodation capable of being readily and extensively exercised.

These conclusions, I think, will be found to accord with the obser-

vations of those who have had opportunities of making themselves

acquainted with the habits of the birds during life.

It has been usual for those who have devoted much attention to

the physiology of vision to propose some original and independent

148 Royal Society :-—

explanation of the means by which accommodation for distance is

effected, if their researches have been attended with the observation

of any previously unknown facts connected with the subject, either

experimental or anatomical. It appears to me that as yet we have

not sufficient data to afford a perfectly satisfactory explanation of

that remarkable property possessed by the eye, partly on account

of the difficulty of ascertaining the exact functions of different struc-

tures, and particularly by reason of the very various conditions which

the same structures assume in various species of vertebrate animals.

The line of investigation which is pointed out in this communication

it is by no means certain will assist in the solution of the problem

of the means by which adjustment for distance is effected ; but I am

inclined to think that we have not yet exhausted all the resources

which careful anatomical inquiry places at our command, and that

when a sufficient number of details have been collected, the subject

will be ina more suitable state for the application of optical laws than

it is at present.

f Egyptian

Eagle Owl. Vitanc Buzzard.

Diameter of cornea .................-4-- 875 506 4

Greatest diameter of sclerotic (trans-

WLS essere see es ssceeeee eee pete 1-312 1:182 1

Antero-posterior diameter ............ 1375 ‘932 ‘75

Diameter of lens (transversely) ...... 506 Not recorded. 343

Antero-posteriorly .............s0sce00 “Ona din il Abeta “22

Length of ciliary muscle ............... ‘375 3 187

Breadth of posterior elastic ligament "125 ‘1 063

Length of anterior elastic filaments . 125 i] 063

Character of ciliary muscle............ Body short, Muscular Muscular

tendon long. | fibres form | fibres extend

more than | from origin

three fourths} to insertion.

of it.

Supplement, containing a description of the Eye in Rhea Ameri-

cana, Phenicopterus antiquorum, and Aptenodytes Humboldtii :—

In the American Ostrich the eye is large, and the structures con-

cerned in the adjustment for distance are well developed. In the

Ostrich (Struthio camelus) the observation was first made by Sir

P. Crampton of the existence of the ciliary muscle; and as the views

of physiologists regarding the mechanical functions of the muscle in

the accommodation of sight were various, while numerous inquiries

Mr. BR. J. Lee on the Sense of Sight in Birds. 149

were made very soon after the publication of this new anatomical fact,

Iam gratified in having the opportunity of pointing out the cause of

the discrepancies in opinion which have continued to the present

time.

The description which Crampton has given is correct so far as it

goes, but it was limited to that part of the ciliary muscle which forms

the thickest portion of it—that is to say, the dense part which lies

closest to the margin of the cornea. The tendon of the muscle and

its insertion into the choroid were not observed by Crampton, and

the structure termed the posterior elastic ligament was overlooked.

It can thus be explained how it was that the deflection of the margin

of the cornea and consequent change in its curvature were advanced

as the means by which accommodation was effected.

The eye of Rhea americana appears to be very similar to that of

Struthio camelus, though not quite so large. The globe is of irre-

gular shape, and bulges out both laterally and vertically ; its diameter

in the former direction is an inch and two thirds, in the latter an inch

and a half, and antero-posteriorly an inch and one third.

The sclerotic is not particularly thick, and contains but slightly

developed osseous structure. The crystalline lens is about half an

inch in its lateral diameter, and one third of an inch in its antero-

posterior diameter. The ciliary muscle is large and strong, the body

thick, and the fibres diminishing in size as they become tendinous

near their insertion ; its length is 53; inch.

The anterior and posterior elastic ligaments are each about ;3,

inch in length, though it is to be understood that their elasticity is so

great that they might be stretched to a considerably greater length.

In the first part of this communication I expressed some doubt

regarding the microscopical character of the anterior elastic liga-

ments ; indeed the term ligament was not applied to them, as they

did not possess the same distinct character as the posterior elastic

ligament.

In all the species of birds which have come under my observation,

the microscopical character of the last-mentioned structure was the

same. In the Rhea the anterior elastic filaments are distinctly com-

posed of the same kind of elastic fibres ; their colour is a light grey ;

they coil up very readily when torn from one another with needles ;

they are to some extent covered with fine granular or spongy tissue,

which at first conceals their elastic character; they are continuous

and of equal diameter from their origin to their insertion, and are

united more closely than in most birds, so that the filamentous cha-

racter so clearly seen in the Owls is not observed.

A more complete investigation into the anatomy of this part of

the subject allows of the conclusion that the anterior elastic filaments

are composed of cellular and elastic tissue combined in different

proportions, and that the differences in their strength, elasticity, and

appearance depend on the collection of the filaments into fibres of

varying sizes, or their approximation so as to form a continuous sus-

pensory band between the iris and the cornea.

The iris in this bird is not composed entirely of muscular fibres

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 12

150 Miscellaneous.

as in many other genera, but is soft and spongy in its genera]

character, and more like the iris in mammalia than in birds.

As it is desirable to limit myself to those particular structures

which are concerned in the accommodation of the eye for distance,

deferring for the present certain general conclusions which fresh

observations are required to confirm, I shall leave to the considera-

tion of the naturalist the subjoined facts arranged in a tabulated form,

and which appear to me to be applicable to the explanation of the

habits of the birds by anatomical peculiarities.

Elastic ligament.

Cornea. | Sclerotic. Lens. ree

Posterior.| Anterior.

in, in. in. in. in, in.

( |vertical $3\vertical 14 jlateral 23 3s oh =e

eal

Rhea ameri- ;

Bi } lateral 43/lateral 134

\ ant.-post.1,%5 ant.-post. 34 fibres long.

vertical 3#/lateral 44Jateral ar er Fa

_|Phenicopterus

antiquorum ) \lateral 7 \ant.-post. 3§/ant.-post. 35,'gradually di-

more. minishing.

[ fillateral i4jlateral =% Yr +s ve

Aptenodytes

Humboldtii ant.-post. }#/ant.-post. ,8\gradually di-

| minishing.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spelling.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.RS. &e.

Lamarck established the genus 7ethya in the first volume of the

‘Annales du Muséum’ and in the ‘ Hist. Nat. des Anim. sans Vert.’

ii. p. 384 (1816). As usual in the latter work he uses the French

generic name Téthie and prints it in capitals, and the Latin generic

name J'ethia in common Roman characters: but the 7 is evidently an

oversight or misprint ; for to each of the six species he gives the name

of Tethya, and it is so in the second edition. This name so written

has been almost universally followed.

Dr. Johnston, in his ‘ British Sponges,’ p. 81, writes it ‘ Tethea,

Lamarck,” but quotes Tethia or Tethya, Lam., les T’hethyes, Cuv., and

Tethium, Blainy., and observes it is not the “ T'ethea of Pliny,” and

that Bohadsch has given the name of Tethyum to the Tethis of Linneus.

Dr. Bowerbank, in his ‘ British Sponges’ (i. p.181 and ii. p.6), adopts

Dr. Johnston’s name of Tethea, but quotes it as Lamarck’s, probably

from Johnston. In the next page he quotes Milne-Edwards’s edition

Miscellaneous. 151

of Lamarck, and gives Téthie as the French and Tethea erroneously

as the Latin name, and quotes Tethea lyncurium and T. cranium as

types, names not found in Lamarck.

Note on the Systematic Name of the Walrus. By Dr. W. Peters.

Although Steenstrup and Sundevall, nearly thirteen years ago,

showed that Linné, in the first edition of his Systema Naturee ’

(1735), applied the generic name Odobenus to the walrus, and that

at the same time the name 7’richechus had been given by Artedi and

Linné alike to the manatee, which they then considered to belong

to the class of fishes, it seems that these facts have not been so much

appreciated as they ought to be. Linné continued to apply the

name Z’richechus exclusively to the “ hairy” fish, which he after-

wards united with Hlephas, Bradypus, Myrmecophaga, and Manis

in his order Bruta. This may be seen even as late as the tenth

edition of the ‘ Systema Naturee’ (1758), wherein the walrus figures

at the same time as Phoca rosmarus amongst the Fere. Only in

the twelfth edition of his ‘Systema Nature’ (1766), p. 49, Linné

added the walrus, as a second species, to the manatee in Artedi’s

genus 7'richechus, upon the presumption that it had ‘ dentes pri-

mores nullos utrinque.”

It seems therefore quite clear that it is wrong to apply the generic

name T'richechus (belonging to the manatee) to the walrus.

We have another, quite analogous case in zoology of the mis-

application of a generic name, namely that of Ursus labiatus,

which, in consequence of losing its front teeth easily, was trans-

ferred from the Fere to the Bruta or Edentata, and stands as

Bradypus ursinus in the systematic arrangements of Pennant and

Shaw. But no one, I think, would contend that we ought to apply the

name Bradypus, previously used for the Sloths, to the Ursus labiatus.

The Clustered Sea-Polype (Umbellula greenlandica). By Dr. J. E.

Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Two specimens of this very rare and extraordinarily large Radiate

animal from Greenland were obtained during the Swedish expedition

of the frigate ‘Eugenia’ to the Northern Ocean. Only two speci-

mens had previously been seen, which were obtained by Captain

Adrians on the coast of Greenland, and described by M. Christlob

Mylius in 1754, and by Ellis in Phil. Trans. vol. xlvii. p. 305.

These specimens are believed to be no longer in existence; so that

the rediscovery of this animal is most important, and we await the

description of it in the zoology of the voyage with impatience. (See

Gray, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1860, v. p. 25, and Cat. Sea-Pens

in Brit. Mus. p. 39.)

Ziphius Sowerbiensis.

Mr. William Andrews informs me that they have received a fine

perfect skeleton of this rare whale at the Dublin Museum. This is

the third specimen taken on the west coast of Ireland in the last few

years ; they were all males and have two large well-developed teeth

like the specimen figured by Sowerby.—Dr. J. E. Gray.

152 Miscellaneous.

Marine Sponges in the British Museum.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.RS. &e.

Mr. Carter has examined with the microscope, figured, and described

in a preliminary manner, the species of sponges in the British Museum,

and has determined that there are more than six hundred species of

that group in the collection, which he is now describing in detail.

Every day brings forward important additions to this immense class,

showing that at present we have a very imperfect knowledge of the

sponges in existence ; and as yet we have not received any sponges

from the Persian Gulf, the beautiful islands of the Pacific, or from the

shores of the northern parts of that ocean, and many other localities.

Habits of Terebratula truncata, By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Mr. Atherstone has presented to the British Museum a series of

specimens of Terebratula truncata from the 8.E. coast of the Cape

of Good Hope, showing that this species, unlike the Terebratule

from the Australian seas, which are generally found on stones and

rocks, lives in groups, composed of specimens of all ages, on the

stems of the larger Algze, and also on the larger species of Ascidia.

The shells vary greatly in the radiating grooves, some being very

distinctly ribbed and others smooth, even in the same group.

On the Reproduction and Mode of Life of the Phyllopoda.

By Dr. Frrepricu Braver.

The author observed these Crustacea in aquaria. He succeeded

repeatedly in rearing both sexes of Apus caneriformis, Linn., from

the ova, and in witnessing the act of fertilization. In this, the male

places himself upon the carapace of the female, and then strikes re-

peatedly and quickly with the part of his body which is free from

the carapace upon the ventral surface of the female, during which

process the seminal matter is evacuated. The male of Apus can-

criformis, Linn., and that of Apus numidicus, Grube, constantly

possess one footless segment more than their females. Thus the male

of Apus cancriformis presents seven, and the female six footless

segments at the extremity of the body; whilst the male of Apus nu-

midicus has nine, and the female eight. The author has also re-

peated the experiment made more than a hundred years ago by

Schiffer, and, taking a female in the Nauplius-stage, brought it up

in an isolated condition—by which means he obtained ova which

were certainly unfecundated, and from which only females were de-

veloped, the eggs of which again furnished only female Phyllopoda

a8 a third generation. In opposition to this he obtained chiefly

males from the ova of fecundated females. In conclusion, the

author refers to the breeding of these and other Phyllopoda in

aquaria in accordance with the method invented by Prazak, and

describes briefly the mode of life of Branchipus stagnalis, Linn., and

Estheria dahalacensis, Riipp.— Anzeiger der Akad. der Wiss. in

Wien, May 31, 1872, p. 100.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES.]

No. 57. SEPTEMBER 1872.

XXIIT1.—Note on some Fossil Monkeys found in Italy, preceded

by a Review of the Fossil (Quadrumana in general. By C.

J. ForsytH Masor, M.D.*

WE shall commence this review of the fossil monkeys hitherto

described with the monkeys of the Eocene strata.

As early as 1859 Messrs. Lyell and Owen indicated in the

London Clay of Kyson (in Suffolk) some mandibular teeth of

a quadrumanous animal which Prof. Owen at first named

Macacus eocenust and afterwards Hopithecus. In 1862 the

same author in a short note} declared that the fossils in ques-

tion ought very probably to be referred to a species of Hyra-

cotherium (H. cuniculus), a pachyderm of which orily the teeth

of the upper jaw were previously known. In a collection of

fossils from the above-mentioned locality, Pref. Owen had met

with, on the one hand, a series of upper molars of the type

of Hyracotherium, and on the other a series of lower molars

analogous to those previously described under the name of

Macacus eocenus, and likewise resembling the mandibular

teeth of Pliolophus, a genus allied to Hyracotherium leporinum.

From this circumstance it becomes probable that the upper

and lower teeth may have belonged to one and the same

species ; but as to the conclusion that all these remains origi-

nated from a pachyderm of the genus Hyracotherium, this

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Atti della Societa

Italiana di Scienze Naturali,’ vol. xv. pp. 79-95.

+ Annals of Nat. Hist. ser. 1. vol. iv. p. 189, Nov. 1839.;

{ “On the Hyracotherian character of the Lower Molars of the sup-

osed Macacus from the Eocene Sand of Kyson, Suffolk,” Ann. & Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 3. vol. x. p. 240, 1862.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 13

154 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

does not seem to me, at present at least, sufficiently well-

founded. The mandibular teeth of the supposed Hyracotherium

cuniculus certainly present more analogy with the Macaques

than with Pliolophus vulpiceps (and this, indeed, is admitted by

Prof. Owen himself) ; and as regards the upper teeth, as Prof.

Owen has figured and described them*, they appear to me to

present as many affinities with certain Quadrumana as with

the teeth of Hyracotherium leporinum to which Prof. Owen

compares them. +

In 1862 M. Riitimeyer described a fragment of a monkey

derived from the Jura of Soleure, from the siderolitic deposit

(Bohnerz) of Egerkingen, which, from the general character

of the remains of Mammalia composing its fauna, is regarded

as contemporaneous with the Calcaire Grossier of Paris. The

fossil in question, which consists of a fragment of the right

maxillary furnished with the three true molars, is ascribed

by M. Riitimeyer to a monkey which combined the form of

cranium characteristic of the Marmosets with the dentition

and size of a Mycetes, at the same time by its dentition

reminding us of the Lemuride f.

Among the fossil rodents derived from the same locality,

which were intrusted to me some time since by the interven-

tion of M. Riitimeyer, there was a left last inferior molar,

which I ascribe, although with some doubt, to Canopithecus

lemuroides, the name given by M. Riitimeyer to the monkey

from Egerkingen. ‘The difference between this tooth, which

I shall shortly publish, and the corresponding molar of My-

cetes is not greater than that between the upper molars of this

same genus and the teeth described by M. Riitimeyer. The

relative size likewise corresponds.

Miocene Monkeys.—The greater part of the fossil monkeys

known up to the present day belong to the Miocene deposits.

Dr. Falconer and Sir Proby Cautley were the first} who found

remains of monkeys in a fossil state; their communication

upon this discovery, which was made in the probably Miocene

strata of the Sewalik Hills in Northern India, bears date

November 24, 1836. The astragalus in question agrees per-

fectly in size with the same bone in Semnopithecus entellus ;

* A History of British Fossil Mammals and Birds, 1846, p. 424, figs.

170, 171.

+ L. Riitimeyer, ‘ ociine Siiugethiere aus dem Gebiet des schweiz.

Jura,’ p. 88 (Neue Denkschriften der alle. schweiz. Gesellsch. fiir die

ges. Naturwiss..Band xix. 1862),

{ See for what relates to the question of priority, Falconer, “ Note on

a Correction of published Statements respecting Fossil Quadrumana,”

Pal. Memoirs, &e. 1868, vol. i. pp. 309-314.

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana. 155

the differences between the two bones in details of form were

only appreciable by means of compasses *.

The second document attesting the presence of monkeys in

the Sewalik Hills is a right upper jaw found soon afterwards

by Baker and Durand near the Sutlej. According to these

authors it presents analogies with the genera Macacus and Cy-

nocephalus, but still more with Semnopithecus ; but it indicates

an animal of the size of the orang (Pithecus satyrus), far larger

than the Semnopithectt.

It is further to the researches of Falconer and Cautley that

we owe the knowledge of three other Quadrumana from the

same strata—namely, the upper jaw of a species allied to, but

larger than Semnopithecus entellust, two fragments of the

lower jaw of a species allied to Macacus rhesus§, and, lastly,

the extra-alveolar portion of a left upper canine, indicating a

species allied to the orang'||.

On the 16th of January, 1837, Lartet communicated to the

Academy of Sciences of Paris the discovery made by him, in

December 1836, in the Miocene freshwater deposit at Sansan,

of a quadrumane which he at first united with the living genus

Hylobates, but which he subsequently named Pliopithecus

antiquus, adopting the opinion already pronounced by Is.

Geottroy and M. Gervais].

An allied species was found about ten years ago in the

upper freshwater Molasse at HKlgg (in the canton of Zurich).

It is a very fine upper jaw, whilst from Sansan we know only

the lower jaw: it has been described by M. Biedermann** and

by M. Heert{; and the latter gives an excellent figure of it.

* Cautley and Falconer, “ Notice on the Remains of a Fossil Monkey

from the Tertiary Strata of the Sewalik Hills in the north of Hindustan ”

(dated November 24, 1856, read June 14, 1837), Trans. Geol. Soc. Lond.

2nd ser. vol. v. p. 499. Reprinted in Falconer’s Palzont. Mem. vol. i.

p- 292, figs. 6-9 (p. 294).

+ Baker and Durand, “Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the Dadoopoor

Collection,” Journ. Asiatic Soc. Nov. 1836, vol. v. p. 739. Reprinted in

Falconer’s Palzeont. Mem. vol. i. p. 298, pl. 24. figs. 1, 2.

{ Falconer and Cautley, “On additional Fossil Species of the order

Quadrumana from the Sewalik Hills,” Journ. Asiatic Society, May 1837,

vol. vi. p. 554, Reprinted in Falconer’s Palzeont. Mem, vol. i. pp. 800-807,

pl. 24. figs. 5, 4.

§ Ibid. pl. 24. figs. 5-8.

|| bed. tig. 11 (p. 304). Falconer “On additional Quadrumanous Re-

mains from the Tertiary Deposits of the Sewalik Hills,” Paleont. Mem.

vol. i. pp. 807-309.

| Lartet, ‘ Notice sur la colline de Sansan &e.,’ Auch, 1857; Comptes

Rendus, 1856, tome xliii. pp. 219-223. For the complete literature of

this species see Gervais, Zool, et Paléontol. Frangaises, edit. 2. p. 8.

** Petrefacten aus der Umgegend von Winterthur, Heft ii. Die Braun-

kohlen von Elgg (Winterthur, 1863), p. 14.

tt Die Urwelt der Schweiz (Zurich, 1865), pp. 418, 419, pl. 11. fig. 4.

156 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

M. Biedermann had given to the fossil the name of Pliopi-

thecus platyodon; M. Riitimeyer, on the other hand (Heer,

. c.), regards the j jaw from Klee as belonging to the same

species as those of Sansan, which he names //ylobates antiquus.

oe. considering how slight are the specific and even the

generic differences presented by the dentition of the living

monkeys, we shall be disposed rather to accept for the fossils

in question two distinct species and to refer them to a distinct

genus. The Pliopithecus antiquus of Sansan approaches the

anthropomorphous apes more than LP. platyodon, on account of

the blunter tubercles of its molars, which indicate a more

frugivorous diet. Lartet has demonstrated that the true molars

of the Sansan jaw even present more resemblance, apart from

size, to those of the gorilla than to those of /1ylobates, espe-

cially the last molar (mm), which is longer than the penultimate

one; and this is not the case in the Gibbons*. LP. platyodon,

on the contrary, diverges from the anthropomorphous apes by

the form of its molars, which are furnished with less rounded

tubercles and with more trenchant crests. ‘The differences pre-

sented by the incisors and canines of Pliopithecus platyodon when

compared with those of the genus /ylobates have been indicated

by M. Biedermann and by M. Riitimeyer himself (Heer, /. c.).

The second quadrumane of which Lartet presented a de-

scription to the Academy, in 1856 (/. c.), Dryopithecus Kontant,

also belongs to the anthropomorphous group. It was found i in

a bed of marly clay situated at the base of the plateau on which

the town of St. Gaudens (Haute-Garonne) is built, a locality

belonging to the same geological horizon as Sansan. The

remains consist of two halves of a lower jaw with the ascend-

ing rami truncated, together with the symphysary region of

the jaw and a humerus, the whole indicating an individual

still young but of large size. ‘The last molar on each side

was not yet in its place; nevertheless the jaw bears the teeth

of the second set: this is what occurs in the human species,

whilst among the monkeys in general, according to Lartet,

the cutting of the last molar always precedes the shedding

and replacement of the milk teeth. ‘The crowns of the hinder

molars present the five blunt points which characterize the

ed molars of the higher apes and those of man. ‘To sum

, this fossil, with characters of inferiority im certain points of

view, takes its ret in the group of anthropomorphous. apes,

which includes the Chimpanzee, the Orang, the Gorilla, the

Gibbons, and the species of the fossil genus Pliopithecus.”

* See the excellent figures which have been given of the dentition of

Hylobates syndactylus by Gervais (Hist. Nat. des Mamumiféres, 1854, p, 49)

and Giebel (Odontographie, pl. 1, fig. 8).

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fosst? Quadrumana. 157

Prof. Owen, on his part, is of opinion that the mode of suc-

cession of the teeth, as well as their conformation and relative

size, indicate the near affinity of Dryopithecus to the Pliopi-

thect and recent Gibbons, and that this is the only conclusion

we can justly draw from the examination of the fossils*. I

have betore me the skull of a Macacus rhesus that I myself

prepared. The teeth of the second set are in their places,

whilst the last molar, although perfectly developed, had not

yet pierced the gum, nor even the bone completely. This

mode of replacement, therefore, is by no means a proot of supe-

riority, the Macaques being very inferior to the anthropomor-

phous apes.

The paleontologists of Wiirttemberg also cite Dryopithecus

Fontan from several localities in the Suabian Alps (Salmen-

dingen, Ebingen)+, in what M. Quenstedt calls the second

mammalian fauna of the siderolitic strata; the isolated molars.

found were at first taken for human teeth f.

In his fine monograph of the Miocene fauna of Steinheim

in Wiirttemberg, which, like the preceding locality, presents

much analogy with Sansan, M. Fraas describes the remains.

of a quadrumane (/. c. pp. 150-153, pl. iv. fig. 1). He figures

’ the four posterior teeth of the left mandible, which belong,

according to him, to a species of Colobus (C. grandevus).

The Colobi, as is well known, are distinguished from the

Semnopithect only by the want of a thumb on the anterior

limbs ; A. Wagner was even unwilling to separate them from

the latter genus§. M. Gervais also says of the Colobi, in

comparing them with the Semnopithec?, that “their teeth present

the same characters so nearly as to be mistaken”’||. I cannot

but confirm these statements from two skulls (of C. guereza

and C. ursinus) which I have had the opportunity of com-

paring. ‘The posterior appendix which M. Fraas describes as

characteristic of the first and second true molars of the Colobz,

occurs likewise in the unworn teeth of several Semnopithect,

and still better developed in the Macaques, as well as on the

anterior side. The third lower molar of Colobus is described

by M. Fraas as furnished with a terminal bicuspid talon, which

resembles a third pair of ridges. In any case this division of

the terminal talon into two points could only be very shallow;

* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. part xxvii. 1859, p. 18.

+ Fraas, “ Die Fauna von Steinheim mit Ricksicht auf die miocinen

Siiugethier- und Vogelreste des Steinheimer Beckens,” Wiirtt. naturw.

Jahreshefte, Jahrg. xxvi. (1870), pp. 145-306.

{ Quenstedt, ‘Handb. der Petrefactenkunde,’2te Aufl. (1865), p. 32, fig. 1.

§ Schreber’s Saugethiere, Supplementband, 5te Abth. (1855), p. 36.

|| Hist. Nat. des Mammiteres, 1854, p. 64.

158 Droid. ®: Major on Fossil Quadrumana.

in the two species before me, of which the teeth are not much

worn, there is only an unpaired terminal talon.

I may remark here that the last lower molar of some species

of Macaques, such as Macacus (Inwus) ecaudatus, is charac-

terized by a terminal talon subdivided into three parts, whilst

in others there are only two divisions. With regard to the

Semnopithect it is only in young individuals that we see a

faint indication of a division of the terminal talon, which occurs

somewhat approximated to the inner side, whilst in Colobus

guereza it occupies more nearly the middle of the posterior

margin ; this is the only difference which I have been able to

detect in the dentition of the two genera. ‘Thus it would appear

that it is only with some reservation that the determination

given by M. Fraas must be accepted.

It is in the deposit of Pikermi, in Attica, that the most

numerous remains of Quadrumana have been found, but

always represented by a single species, Mesopithecus pentelict,

A. Wagn., which possesses the cranium and dentition of the

Semnopithect and the limbs of Macacus*. Of this M. Gaudry

sent to Paris the remains of twenty-five individuals; at

Munich there are also numerous remains of it, and the

Museum of Milan possesses some fine crania.

I will conclude the examination of the Miocene Monkeys

by referring to the discovery in the sands of Eppelsheim

(Rhenish Hesse) of a fossil ascribed to a monkey}. Eppels-

heim is of the same age as Pikermi; it is therefore possible

that the same species may occur in both localities ; neverthe-

less it would appear that the remains found at Eppelsheim

are not sufficient to allow of exact determination.

Monkeys from Deposits more recent than the Miocene.-—The

name of Macacus pliocenus was given by Prof. Owen to a

fragment of a maxillary containing the penultimate right upper

molar, most nearly resembling the corresponding tooth of

Macacus sinicus. ‘The deposit in which the specimen was

found is a bed of yellowish sand between two beds of brick-

earth situated near the village of Gray’s Thurrock, in the

county of Essexf. M. Beyrich thinks that the denomina-

* A. Gaudry, ‘ Animaux fossiles et Géologie de l’Attique,’ 1862, p. 18.

See also this work for the complete literature of Mesopithecus.

+ H. von Meyer, “ Die fossilen Reste des Genus Tapirus,” Paleeontogra-

phica, Bd. xv. (1867) p. 164.

{ Owen, “ Note sur la découverte, faite en Angleterre, de restes fossiles

dun quadrumane du genre Macaque, dans une formation d’eau douce

appartenant au nouveau pliocene,” ComptesRendus, tome xxi. Sept. 1845,

pp. 573-575. The specimen is figured in Owen’s ‘ British Fossil Mam-

mals and Birds,’ 1846, pl. xlii. figs. 1-3. I do not find Macacus pliocenus

mentioned in the enumeration given by Mr. Boyd Dawkins (Quart. Journ.

Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Quadrumana. 159

tion given by Prof. Owen is arbitrary, the tooth in question

presenting only insignificant differences in the genera Jnwus,

Cercopithecus, and Semnopithecus*. Nevertheless, as this tooth

possesses the general form and the mode of wear which

characterize Macacus and distinguish it from Semnopithecus,

I do not think that there is any reason to change the name

adopted by Owen into “ Semnopithecus pliocenus”’ (Beyrich, l.c.

p- 24), and the less as the occurrence of the genus Macacus in

the fossil state is now placed beyond doubt.

There is only a single point which leads to doubt in the

figure given by Prof. Owen, which shows the inner tubercles

ot the teeth distinctly separated, in a manner such as I have

not met with in any of the living species of Macacus. Nor is

it a peculiarity of the Semnopithect; in the molars of both

these genera the inner tubercles are united by well-marked

diagonal crests.

The few isolated teeth which M. Gervais has described

under the name of Semnopithecus monspessulanus were found

by him at Montpellier in the freshwater marls of the Pliocene

stagey. According to M. Gervais it is possible that Semno-

pithecus monspessulanus is of the same species as the monkey

from the marine sands which M. de Christol has named

Pithecus maritimust, comparing it especially to the genus

Cercopithecus, but without giving either a detailed description

or figure of it.

From the same deposits, according to M. Gervais, are

derived a series of four right lower molars, two canines, and

one incisor, named by him Macacus priscus §.

Lastly, the Danish naturalist Lund found in the Brazilian

caves five species of platyrrhine monkeys, one of which,

Protopithecus brasiliensis, found nearly at the same time

(July 1836) as the first remains of Quadrumana in Asia, sur-

Geol. Soc. vol. xxiii. 1867, p. 101, and vol. xxv. 1869, p. 199) of the fossil

Mammalia of these deposits at Gray’s Thurrock, which are as follows :—

Felis speleus, F. catus, Hyena spelea, Ursus?, U. arctos, Canis lupus, C.

vulpes, Lutra vulgaris, Bos primigenius, Bison priscus, Megaceros hibernicus,

Cervus elaphus, Elephas antiquus, E. priscus, Goldf., Equus fossilis, Owen,

Rhinoceros hemitechus, Fale., R. megarhinus, Christ. (=R. leptorhinus,

Cuv.), Sus scrofa, Hippopotamus major, Castor fiber, Arvicola amphibia.

We shall recur hereafter to the question of the age of the brick-earths of

the valley of the Thames.

* “Ueber Semnopithecus pentelicus,” Abhandl. Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin

aus d. Jahre 1860, p. 25 (1861).

+ P. Gervais, “ Note sur une nouvelle espéce de Singe fossile,’’ Comptes

Rendus, tome xxviii. 1849, p. 699; and Zool. et Paleont. Frangaises,

2nd ed. 1859, p. 10.

t Bull. Soc. Géol. de France, 2° sér. tome vi. p. 175.

§ Zool. et Paléont. Frang. p. 11.

160 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

passed in size the largest of the American monkeys now

living, the Mycetes, with which it had some relations. Sub-

sequently the same naturalist discovered successively remains

belonging to two species of Jacchus (J. grandis, J. aff. pent-

cillato), and to the genera Callithrix and Cebus*.

I cannot say whether the two species of monkeys allied to

the genera Mycetes and Cebus that P. von Claussen has also

discovered in the Brazilian caves belong to the Protopithecus

and Cebus described by Lund. They are known to me only

by the short note of the former naturalistt.

Summarizing the indications just given we get at the num-

ber, nineteen species, of fossil monkeys described in detail.

Of the two suborders of Primates the Lemuride shave as yet

no representatives in the fossil fauna. Nevertheless the Hocene

genus Cenopithecus is to a certain extent intermediate between

the Lemuride and the Simiade, combining at the same time

certain characters of two families of Simiade (Arctopithecint

and Platyrrhint). The first family of the Simiade, that of

the Arctopithecini, is represented by the two species of Jacchus

from the limestone caves of Brazil. To the second, that of

the Platyrrhini, belong the other monkeys discovered in these

same caves, to the number of three, or perhaps of five species.

All the other fossil remains belong to the family of the

Old-World monkeys, the Catarrhini—the majority to the

Cynomorpha, represented by three or four species of Semnopi-

thecus, three species of Macaeus, and the Mesopithecus of

Pikermi (which is, so to speak, intermediate between the other

two genera mentioned)§. Lastly, the Anthropomorpha are

represented by four species, three of which belong to two

extinct genera allied to Hylobates, whilst an animal very

similar to the Orang is indicated by a single canine.

The following is the geographical distribution of the fossil

Quadrumana :—

In South America, from five to seven species, belonging to

at least four genera, one of which is extinct: Protopithecus,

Jacchus, Cebus, Callithrix.

In India (Sewalik Hills), four or five species, referable to

three living genera: Macacus, Semnopithecus, Pithecus satyrus.

In Greece, one species of an extinet genus, JJesopithecus.

* Lund, “ Blik paa Brasiliens Dyreverden for sidste Jordomveeltning,”

in Kongl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Naturv. og Math. Afhandl. 8-12 Deel,

Copenhagen, 1841-1845,

t+ Neues Jahrbuch fiir Miner. &e. Jahrg. 1845, p. 174.

{ See, for the subdivisions of the order Primates, Huxley, ‘A Manual

of the Anatomy of Vertebrate Animals,’ 1871.

§ I have passed over Colobus grandevus, Vraas, the determination of

which appears to me still doubtful.

Monkeys found in Italy. 161

In Germany, two or three species, belonging to at least

two genera: Dryopithecus Fontant (genus extinct), Colobus ?

grandevus.

In France, four species, belonging to four different genera,

two of which are extinct : Pliopithecus antiquus, Dryopithecus

Fontani, Semnopithecus monspessulanus, Macacus priscus.

In Switzerland, two species, belonging to two extinct

genera: Coenopithecus lemuroides, Pliopithecus platyodon.

In England, one species of a living genus: Macacus plio-

cenus.

The Hocene deposits have hitherto furnished a single species

of which the determination appears to be certain, the Mvocene

nine or ten, the Pliocene two, and the Postpliocene a single one,

leaving out of consideration the fossils buried in the caverns

of Brazil, which probably also belong to the Postpliocene.

Fossil Monkeys discovered in Italy.—Until quite recently

fossil monkeys were unknown in the different fossiliferous for-

mations of Italy. The specimen which I lay before the

Society belongs to the paleontological collection of the Civic

Museum of Milan (Cat. no. 849). Derived from a private

collection, this fossil was sent to the Marquis C. Ermes-

Visconti, who presented it to the Museum. Prof. Cornalia,

Director of the Museum, has been kind enough to allow me

to examine it; and I take advantage of this opportunity to

express my thanks to him for this. Unfortunately the exact

derivation of this interesting specimen is unknown; the ticket

which accompanied it was inscribed ‘ Val d’Arno inferiore.”’

Inquiries made to ascertain its origin were without result;

nevertheless, for various reasons, it 1s more probable that the

fossil is derived from the upper Val d’Arno. We shall have

to recur to the reasons which lead me to accept this suppo-

sition ; I shall only remark here that fossils of terrestrial Mam-

malia are rare in what is called the lower Val d’Arno.

The specimen in question, which is imbedded in a kind of

greenish and very soft marly grit, consists of a fragment of a

right upper jaw containing the three true molars in position.

Of the premolars there is no other trace than three alveoli,

which, judging from their respective situations, belonged to

the two outer roots of the last premolar and to the postero-

external root of the first; in the middle alveolus there is a

small fragment of the root. ‘The enamel of these molars is of

a greenish-grey colour, which in the neighbourhood of the

roots acquires a darker and bluish tint.

I will not take up the time of the Society by repeating the

detailed description, which I give in the memoir of which the

present communication is only a summary. I shall content

162 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

myself with saying that the form of the teeth and their mode

of wearing leave no doubt that they have belonged to a

monkey of the genus Macacus, nearly allied to the MM. (Inuus)

ecaudatus, which now inhabits the coast of Morocco and the

Rock of Gibraltar.

I am led to assume for the MW. priscus of Montpellier a size

rather superior to the fossil before us, having measured the

three true molars of a living species of Macacus, in which the

length of the lower teeth corresponds with the figure given by

M. Gervais for the Montpellier fossil. Nevertheless it is well

known that differences of size are often considerable in the

different individuals of the same species of Quadrumana, and

especially as regards the Macaques. ‘The figure given of the

specimens referred to M/. priscus is not sufficiently accurate to

allow of the discussion of the possible differences of the two

specimens ; and, taking all this into consideration, I prefer

retaining, at least for the present, the designation J. priscus

for the fossil of the Val d’Arno: fresh specimens will perhaps

hereafter give rise to a new name, which I cannot justify at

the present moment.

Every thing leads us to believe that we shall not have to

wait long for fresh evidence. During my visit to Florence

M. Cocchi was kind enough to show me a fine mandible of

a fossil monkey, which he ascribes to an Jnuus (Macacus),

and which had been found a few months ago near Monte

Varchi, in the upper Val d’Armo. M. Cocchi has already

spoken briefly upon this at the meeting of the Italian Society

ot Anthropology at Florence *.

The dental series of this fine specimen is tolerably complete ;

there are wanting only the nght canine and three incisors.

The enamel of the teeth presents absolutely the same shades

of colour that I have indicated in the fossil from the Museum

of Milan, which seems to show that the two specimens are

derived from the same deposit. From a hasty examination I

do not think that these two specimens can be separated spe-

cifically. However, it is to M. Cocchi that it belongs to

describe the mandible of the Florence Museum.

What is the relative age of these Macaques of the Val

@Arno? The locality “Val d’Arno” has long been with

paleontologists synonymous with Pliocene. MM. Gaudin and

Strozzi first commenced, by their “ Contributions a la flore

fossile Italienne’’}, to disentangle the question of the relative

* Meeting of the 20th February of the present year. See the ‘Nazione,’

27th February, 1872.

t+ Neue Denkschriften der allgem. schweizer. Gesellsch, fir die ges.

Naturwissensch. vol. xvii. 1860.

Monkeys found in Italy. 163

age of these strata. Molars found by the Marquis Strozzi

himself near San Giovanni are referred by him to Mastodon

angustidens, Cuv., and M. pyrenaicus, Lartet. If this deter-

mination is correct *, these two species incontestably indicate

the presence of Miocene deposits in the Val d’Arno; and the

study of the flora, which we here pass over, led to the same

result. Mast. angustidens especially is eminently characteristic

of the middle Miocene of France, Switzerland, Southern

Germany, and Austria, such as Sansan in the Pyrenees,

Kiipfnach in the upper freshwater Molasse of Switzerland,

Georgensgmund in Bavaria, Eibiswald in Styria, &e. It is

not, therefore, as M. Stéhr thinksT, to the Eppelsheim deposit

that the blue marls in which these two species have been

found correspond; at Eppelsheim only the MJ. longirostris,

Kaup (which belongs to the subgenus Tetralophodon), has

ever been met with.

The numerous remains of Mammalia buried in the Val

d’Arno, in the beds superior to those just mentioned, are

reterred to the Pliocene. Among those which have been

well determined we may cite, above all, three species of Rhi-

noceros.

1. Rhinoceros etruscus, Fale., is frequent in the upper Val

@ Arno, of which, according to Dr. Falconer, it characterizes

the lower bedsf{. In the preglacial forest-bed of Norfolk it

occurs, together with eighteen well-defined mammals, taking

no account of others, the determination of which is not certain.

I will cite as examples :—2hinoceros leptorhinus, Cuv., Bos

primigenius, Hippopotamus major, Hlephas antiquus, Elephas

meridionalis, Ursus arvernensis, two species of Cervus now

extinct, and Trogontherium Cuvier, besides six still living

species of mammals, namely Mygale moschata, Talpa europea,

Cervus capreolus, Cervus elaphus, Arvicola amphibia, and

Castor fiber§. If Rhinoceros etruscus is really the same

species as Lt. Merckit, Jeg., as Lartet|| and Boyd Dawkins {j

* M. Cocchi does not mention these fossils in the enumeration which

he gives of the fossils of the Val d’Arno :—* L’uomo fossile nell’ Italia

centrale,” Memorie della Soc. Ital. di Sci. Nat. tomo ii. no. 7, 1867. At

p: 15 we read as follows :—‘ If Mast. arvernensis probably did not share

our soil with other congeners, this was not the case with the elephant,”

Xe.

+ “Intorno ai Depositi di Lignite che si trovano in Val d’Arno superiore,

ed intorno alla loro posizione geologica,’’ per Emilio Stiéhr (Annuario della

Soc. dei Naturalisti in Modena, anno y. 1870, p. 95).

{ Paleontological Memoirs, vol. ii. p. 310.

§ Boyd Dawkins, “On the Distribution of the British Postglacial

Mammals,” Quart. Journ, Geol. Sot. vol. xxv. 1869, p. 210.

|| Ann. des Sci. Nat. vii. 1867, p. 27.

| Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. 1870, p. 468.

164 Dr. C. J. F. Major on some Fossil

have supposed, it is met with in Switzerland, together with

Elephas antiquus, Bos primigenius, Cervus elaphus, &c., in

the foliated coals of Diirnten, which were preceded and suc-

ceeded by a glacial epoch*. In Germany Rhinoceros Merckit

preceded &. tichorhinus, and, according to H. von Meyer,

occupies the lower part of the Diluvian, whilst 2. tichorinus

occurs in the upper part, which, however, does not preclude

that in some places the two species may have coexisted.

2. Rhinoceros leptorhinus, Cuv., the principal representative

of which is the celebrated Cortesi skull preserved in the Mu-

seum of Milan, does not appear to be very frequent in the

Val d’Arno. Falconer regarded this species as characteristic

of the upper Pliocene formation of the Val d’Arnof. In

England, as we have already said, it was first met with in the

Norfolk forest-bed. The lower brick-earths in the valley of

the Thames, according to Mr. Boyd Dawkins, unite the pre-

glacial to the postglacial—that is to say, to the faunaof the caves

and fluviatile deposits§. We have already (p. 159, note) given

the list of the mammals found in one of these localities (Gray’s

Thurrock) ; to this must be added, to complete the fauna of

the brick-earths in general, the following Mammalia met

with in other localities in the valley of the Thames :—

Cervus capreolus, Ovibos moschatus, Ursus ferox, Hlephas

primigenius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus||. In these earths, there-

tore, Rhinoceros leptorhinus occurs associated with a partially

arctic fauna. Moreover its presence has, not long since, been

demonstrated by Mr. Busk in the Oreston cave].

3. Rhinoceros hemitaechus, Fale., which has generally been

regarded as characteristic of the epochs posterior to the

two species already cited, but anterior to L. tichorhinus**, has

been met with in England in certain caves, together with

* Heer, Urwelt der Schweiz, p. 498.

+ H. von Meyer, “ Die diluvialen Rhmoceros-Arten,”’ Palzeontographica,

Bd. xi. 1864, p. 282.

t Falconer, J. c. p. 810. “ With this species [R. leptorhinus, Cuv. ]

also I have identified the rhinoceros remains found in the Subapennine

beds of Piacenza, in the Val d’Arno upper beds, at Montpellier and Lyons,

and at Gray’s Thurrock in Essex.”

§ “On these grounds the deposits in question have been separated from

the ordinary postglacial series. They probably form the first terms of

the postglacial series, and point back to a time when the postglacial in-

vaders had not taken full possession of this district ” (W. Boyd Dawkins,

“On the Distribution of the British Postglacial Mammals,” Quart. Journ.

Geol. Soc. vol. xxv. 1869, p. 214).

|| Boyd Dawkins, /. c. p. 199.

] Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. 1870, p. 457.

** Boyd Dawkins, “On the Dentition of Rhinoceros leptorhinus, Owen,”

Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxiii. 1867, p. 215 et segg.

Monkeys found in Italy. | 165

Elephas antiquus and Hippopotamus major. We have already

cited it among the Mammalia of the brick-earths of the valley

of the Thames. In another cave it also occurs side by side

with nearly all the species characteristic of the Pleistocene

period in England, and especially with R. tichorhinus (Boyd

Dawkins, /. c. p. 225). Finally, in a particular case, at Peck-

ham, the remains of &. tichorhinus have been found in a peat-

bed below the bed of clay which contained R. hemitechus.

4. Elephas meridionalis occurs in England in the forest-bed,

but does not appear to have in that country survived the

glacial epoch*. In Lombardy it has been found in abundance

in the lacustrine basin of Gandino, which M. Stoppani main-

tains to be of glacial origint, and the fauna of which is known

to us by the work of M. Balsamo Crivelli, and especially of

M. Cornalia f.

I might further name the Hippopotamus major, which is

cited in the Pliocene fauna of the Val d’Arno, and which

everywhere else occurs in indubitably quaternary deposits ;

but it seems to me that the identity of the species of the Val

d’Arno with that which occurs so abundantly in the alluvia of

rivers and in caves has not yet been satisfactorily demonstrated.

Most of the other species buried in the rich ossuary of the Val

d’Arno likewise require to be carefully studied.

Nevertheless the few examples which I have just cited

appear to me to demonstrate satisfactorily that the proofs (if

there are any) in support of the assertion that the beds in which

these Mammalia occur belong to the Pliocene must be sought

in the Val d’Arno itself; we must not, as has been done,

call in the testimony of their places of deposition in other

countries ; for, as we have just seen, these furnish no evidence.

I will, however except a single species among those which

are well-determined and called Pliocene of the Val d’Arno,

namely Mastodon arvernensis. For France we have the tes-

timony of two highly esteemed authorities, Lartet§ and M.

Gervais||, that Mastodon arvernensis did not coexist with

Elephas meridionalis (as had generally been supposed), but that

the latter always occurs in more recent deposits. Moreover,

* Nevertheless M. Gaudry, in his ‘ Considérations générales sur les

animaux fossiles de Pikermi,’ 1866, p. 38, cites Elephas meridionalis as

occurring in the quaternary deposits of the valley of the Thames.

+ A. Stoppani, ‘ Note ad un Corso annuale di Geologia,’ 1867, part ii.

. 210.

: t E. Cornalia, ‘Sull’ Elefante trovato nella Lignite di Leffe,’ Milan,

1865. Also “ Mammiféres fossiles de Lombardi,” Milan, 1858-71, in the

‘ Paléontologie Lombarde’ of A. Stoppani, 2° série.

§ Bull. Soc. Géol. France, 2° sér. tom. xvi. 1859, p. 494.

|| Zool. et Paléont. Frang.

166 Dr. C. J. F. Major on Fossil Monkeys found in Italy.

of late, voices have been raised in England which admit that

the same thing may be true for that country also*.

As to the Val d’Arno, at present, incontestable evidence in

support of the assertion that these two genera of Proboscidia

coexisted is still wanting.

With regard to the Macacus of the Val d’Arno, I think I

may assume that it was contemporary with Rhinoceros etruscus,

Elephas meridionalis, Bos etruscus, Fale., and a horse which

I cannot distinguish from Lguus fossilis, Owen—at least as it

is described by M. Riitimeyer, from the voleanic alluvia of

Auvergne}. The same marly grit in which the fragment of

the jaw of Macacus belonging to the Museum of Milan is im-

bedded covers and fills the remains of the above-cited Mam-

malia preserved in several museums.

Fossil Monkey from Monte Bamboli.—At the meeting of the

Geological Society of France, in November 1871, M. Gervais

mentioned a monkey found in the lignities of Monte Bam-

boli, in the Maremmas of Tuscany}. The mandible in

question is deposited in the Museum at Florence; according

to M. Cocchi it seems to belong to the genus Cercopithecus§.

We are expecting its publication by M. Gervais.

Fossil Monkey from Mugello.—tLastly there are in the

Museum of Pisa some separate teeth of the lower jaw, a

_ hasty examination of which seemed to me to indicate a species

of Macacus which might be different from the two specimens

from the Val d’Arno of which I have just been speaking ;

as to the determination of the genus there can be no doubt.

These specimens consist of two last lower molars, right and

left, a first or second lower molar, a premolar, and a frag-

ment of a canine, the whole having probably belonged to the

mandible of the same individual. ‘These teeth are derived

from Mugello, in the Val d’Arno, from a lignite that M.

Meneghini considers to belong to the Pliocene. By M.

Meneghini’s permission I shall shortly be able to give a de-

tailed description of these remains in the Memoirs of the

Society.

* KE. Ray Lankester, ‘“‘ Contributions to a knowledge of the newer Ter-

tiaries of Suffolk and their Fauna,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi.

1870, p. 498.

+ L. Riitimeyer, “ Beitriige zur Kenntniss der fossilen Pferde und zu

einer vergleichenden Odontographie der Hufthiere im Allgemeinen,” p. 91

(Verhandl. der Naturforsch. Gesellsch. in Basel, Bd. iii. Heft 4, 1863),

t See ‘ Revue Scientifique,’ No. 25, Dec. 16, 1871.

§ See ‘La Nazione di Firenze,’ February 27, 1872.

Dr. J. E. Gray on a new Genus of Escharide. 167

XXIV.—On Flustra marginata of Krauss and an allied

Species, forming anew Genus (Flustramorpha) of Escharide,

from Natal. By Dr. J. EH. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

In the collection of corallines contaiming a few seaweeds,

especially the one described in the August number of the

‘ Annals,’ received some years ago from Port Natal as a pre-

sent from Colonel Bolton, I observe several specimens of the

Flustra marginata described by Dr. Krauss in his ‘ Corallines

and Zoophytes of the South Sea,’ p. 35, tab. 1. fig. 3. The

figure of this coralline has always been a matter of curiosity

to me; and therefore it was with great pleasure that I found

several specimens of this and an allied species in the collection.

Their formations are very peculiar, having the frond-like

form of a Flustra, but supported by horny, often inosculating

fibres, that margin the frond and also traverse it in various

directions so as to break it into several sections, as is well

represented in Krauss’s figure. One might be inclined, as

it often grows among the dead denuded stems of zoophytes,

to believe that those zoophytes formed the margin of the frond ;

but a study of numerous specimens has convinced me that this

cannot be the case; for the thickened horny margins do not

stand out from the ends of the fronds, as they would do if they

were the denuded stems of other species, but they are evidently

developed on the edge and across the frond as the frond grows.

The substance of the coral is calcareous and exactly like

those of Lepralia and Eschara; and it forms a frond with a

series of cells on each side like the latter genus. The fronds

are expanded, repeatedly and furcately branched like the com-

mon flustra, but they are known from that genus by the cells

being much more calcareous and covered with a calcareous

coat. ‘The two species have a general external resemblance

to the two common European Flustras 7. foliacea and F, trun-

cata; I therefore propose to call the genus F'lustramorpha.

Krauss, when describing Flustra marginata, observes that

“perhaps it may become the type of a separate genus on account

of the thickened edges, which, standing out from the calcareous

structure, border the two margins of the frond. Where the

frond divides, the thickened edge of the upper margin turns

across it; and consequently it appears that the growth of the

branch is continuous ; but here a pause occurs, during which the

thickened margin is forming, which after a time constitutes the

foundation of a new lobe. These cross lines show the different

epochs of growth, like the varices on Murices and Casside

and other genera of shells. ,

“These thickened ribs give the strength and firmness whiel

168 Dr. J. EH. Gray on a new Genus of Escharide.

are necessary to support the extremely fine and brittle cell-

structure of the frond. The whole zoophyte can therefore

only be dried and preserved with great care; but if it dies in

the sea the calcareous matter soon after death dissolves in the

sea-water, and, instead of the stiff light bluish grey-brown

zoophyte, one only finds a pale brown, horny, shining skeleton

with more transparent cells; a similar skeleton may be ob-

tained by placing a frond in very weak acid. ‘The ribs of the

frond are then visible; and one recognizes on these teeth the

points by which the bordering seam is connected with it.”

Dr. Krauss describes both sides of the frond as covered with

blunt rhomboidal cells; ‘‘at the upper end of each cell is a

rounded, four-cornered, untoothed, oblique oral opening, and

on the side of the opening there is a small circular anal

aperture. ‘This second opening is always directed sideways

towards the edge of the frond; that is to say, if a perpendicular

line is drawn from the middle of the frond, it is found to be on

the right side of the line on the mght side, and on the left of

it on the left side of the oral aperture. Immediately below

the oral aperture is to be observed a second, very small opening,

the use of which is not known.” Similar openings are to be

seen in several species of Lepralia.

It is curious that Dr. Krauss, who observes so accurately

the structure of the cell, did not see that the coralline was

much more closely allied to Hschara and Lepralia than to

Flustra.

The other species is perhaps described by Mr. Busk as

Eschara; but he does not mention the margin or divisions.

Fam. Escharide.

Genus FLUSTRAMORPHA.

Polyzoarium frondose, flabellate, furcately divided; cells

disposed on both surfaces back to back, immersed, coalescent,

parallel to the plane of the axis. Oral opening with a small

tubular opening on one side of it and a smaller aperture be-

neath. The frond supported by cylindrical horny fibres, which

traverse it in various directions and edge the two margins

of the lobes.

1. Flustramorpha marginata. B.M.

The polyzoarium grey-brown, rather thin; the stem and

branches strap-shaped, with nearly parallel sides, regularly

furcately branched, and margined with a thickened mb.

Flustra marginata, Krauss, Beitr. Corall. und Zooph, der Siidsee, 1837,

p. 35, tab. 1. figs. 3 a-d.

Hab. Port Natal.

Dr. Krefft on Thylacoleo. 169

2. Flustramorpha flabellaris. B.M.

The polyzoarium pale reddish brown; the frond widening

upwards, rather irregular ; the terminal lobes broad, fan-shaped

or irregular, much broader at the end.

Eschara flabellaris, Busk, Cat. of Marine Polyzoa, ii. p. 91, tab. 107.

figs. 7, 8, 9, 10.

Hab. Port Natal.

This species much resembles Flustra marginata in external

appearance, but is much more calcareous and supported by

marginal and transverse horny ribs, which are stouter but do.

not form such a regular margin to the frond as in the other

species ; and the frond is broader, and more irregularly divided,

the terminal lobes being very irregular in shape, very unlike

the regular strap-shaped furcate fronds of the former species.

Mr. Busk, to whom I had sent a small specimen of this

species, informs me that it is the one he described and figured

in the ‘Catalogue of Marine Polyzoa’ under the name of

Eschara flabellaris ; but in neither the figure nor description is

there any mention of the lobes being divided and supported

by a cartilaginous margin; in other respects the figure is a

very good representation.

XXV.—A Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology, tested by

evidences of an extinct Leonine Marsupial (‘Thylacoleo

carnifex), by Professor OwEN, F.R.S., D.C.L., Foreign

Associate of the Institute of France. Reviewed by GERARD

Krerrt, F.L.8., C.M.Z.8., M.F.D.H., &.*

[Plates XI. & XII.]

Proressor Owen spoke boldly when he thus headed his last

treatise on the Extinct Mammals of Australia,—too boldly, in

fact—because if the ‘‘Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology” is

once found wanting, it must be reduced in value ever after-

wards. ‘The founder of a science is not always able to provide

at first for all the exigencies which may arise out of a careful

investigation of his system; and the worship of learned men

may go a little too far. It is right to love the master who

taught us, and I admire Professor Owen on that account; but

when anatomists like Flower, Falconer, and Huxley differ

from Cuvier as they differ from Buffon and Linneus, Professor

Owen will probably reconsider his verdict and make the

amende honorable. Cuvier and his principles cannot always

be depended on in the classification of Australian fossils; and

* From the ‘Sydney Mail,’ May 18, 1872, with corrections and the

illustrations communicated by the Author.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 14

170 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuviertan

I refer those interested to Sir Thomas Mitchell’s ‘ Three Expe-

ditions,’ where, on plate 32 of vol. i1., the author remarks,

“The two figures 12 and 13 represent, on a reduced scale,

the large bone which M. Cuvier supposed to have belonged

to a young elephant.”

It was evidently M. Cuvier who could not distinguish

between the femur of a “ gigantic kangaroo” and that of an

elephant; and we are justified in discarding Cuvierian prin-

ciples as far as fossil marsupials are concerned.

Professor Owen may say that the bone figured by Sir

Thomas Mitchellis not a kangaroo-bone; but it never was the

femur of an elephant, and if not a kangaroo it certainly belongs

to a marsupial animal closely allied to it. All the other

objects represented on the same plate are either wrongly named

or not named at all. Did M. Cuvier inspect these bones

also? Did Professor Owen notice what they really are?

Fig. 1 is the ulna of a wombat; fig. 2 a block of limestone

nodules with a few wombat-phalanges (toe-bones) in it; fig. 3

is a much-worn lower incisor of a gigantic kangaroo; figs. 4

and 5 are two views of a right upper first incisor of a Thyla-

coleo; figs. 6,7, 8, and 9 are different views of the right lower

incisor of Thylacoleo; fig. 10 represents the much-worn right

third premolar of a Thylacoleo, the very tooth which the author

of the “‘ extinct leonine marsupial” constantly terms the great

carnassial, and which was of so little importance to him in

1836 that he never referred to it in his report on the Welling-

ton fossils.

If these teeth did not strike Professor Owen in 1836 as

uncommon, why are they considered valuable evidence of car-

nivority in 1858 or 1859? In that year I think the first

attempt was made to fit some fragments of a Thylacoleo’s

skull into such a shape as to produce a cat-like head (‘ Cyclo-

pedia Britannica,’ art. Paleontology, p. 175, fig. 115). Let

any unprejudiced person examine the impossible restoration of

that head (Pl. XI. fig. 4), and he will at once see that the

author had a preconceived opinion about it, evidently trying to

form the remains into the skull of a carnivore.

I consider these remarks necessary before reviewing Pro-

fessor Owen’s paper; and they will show :—1st, that the chief

part of the Thylacoleo’s dentition was known to him as far

back as the year 1836; 2nd, that there was nothing very ex-

traordinary in the size or formation of the teeth, otherwise

Professor Owen would have noticed them long before; 3rd,

that, having once pronounced a certain opinion, the author has

been reluctant ever since to modify or alter it; 4th, and last,

that the principle in paleontology laid down by the great

Principle in Paleontology. . 171

Cuvier cannot be applied with confidence or successfully in

the classification of our fossil marsupial animals, which were

not discovered when Cuvier wrote.

The authorities against Professor Owen are Professor

Flower, F'.R.S., the eminent lecturer at the Royal College of

Surgeons, the late Dr. Falconer, Mr. Boyd Dawkins, and the

discoverer of the missing teeth, who first pointed out their real

position in skull and mandible, myself.

It is a well-known fact that in highly carnivorous animals

the exposed portion of a tooth is completely covered by enamel.

This is not the case with the Thylacoleo’s incisors, which

Professor Owen considers designed to “pierce, retain, and

kill”! They are almost destitute of enamel on their flat inner

surface, and are, comparatively speaking, less formidable than

the upper and lower front incisors of the striped phalanger

known as Dactylopsila trivirgata (PI. XI. figs. 6 &7), the nearest

ally (as far as incisors are concerned) to the Thylacoleo.

The corresponding pair of front teeth in the Belideus flavi-

venter, or “ yellow-bellied flying squirrel,” are more like the

Thylacoleo’s teeth in their structure ; but they are not so largely

developed as the teeth of the Dactylopsila, which, comparatively

speaking, has the largest incisors of any marsupial animal living

or extinct, though only a fruit- and leaf-eating phalanger.

The dental formula in Thylacoleo is as follows :—

Incisors. Canines. Premolars. Molars.

6 1—1 3—3 i 98

Pe 0—0 Sas Vy ;

Professor Owen, to suit his peculiar system, arranges these

teeth in this manner :—

Incisors. Canines, Premolars. Molars.

a5 ia 4—4 1-1 | gos

Si 0—0 4—4 pa) ;

If the author will kindly examine the upper incisors of a com-

mon bettong (Bettongia rufescens, Pl. XI. fig. 8) and compare

therewith the Thylacoleo incisors which I sent him, and which

he figures under wrong names, he will at once perceive that the

“‘leonine marsupial” had a large pair of front incisors (which

correspond, as before stated, with those of Dactylopsila or Beli-

deus), and a second and third pair behind the first, which are

almost identical in form with those of the bettong just men-

* The two or three little teeth which occupied the empty sockets be-

hind the anterior part of the third incisor are still unknown ; we do not

even know whether they were two or three in number. These teeth are

met with in all phalangers proper, but are seldom found perfect.

14*

172 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuviertan

tioned. The first tooth in each upper ramus is curved, com-

ressed, and almost destitute of enamel on the inner side; the

second tooth is conical, with a short thick produced crown,

showing a transverse mark made by the lower incisor; the

third tooth, again, is curved, three-sided, and inserted in such a

manner that the sharp angle stands inwards. Professor Owen,

disregarding my careful investigations, freely communicated to

him, figures it constantly as a “canine ”’ (pl. x1. figs. 10, 11,

and 12). The conical second incisor (fig. 13 of the same plate)

he names the “ first upper premolar, outer side,” though he

figures the small tubercular premolars with their nail-headed

crowns (pl. xi. fig. 2, pp. 2, 3) right enough.

The upper canine puzzles Professor Owen considerably, as

it did myself when I first found loose specimens of it. This

tooth, which encroaches further into the palate than is usual

(and is sometimes almost covered by the first premolar and

fast incisor), has a curved tapering fang and a heart-shaped

flattened crown. Mistrusting my observation, the author

again calls it ‘the second incisor” in one instance, and “ the

second upper premolar” in another (figs. 9 and 14 of pl. xi.).

I make these statements with confidence, and will explain

why.

Teel tooth which Professor Owen figures on pl. xi., from

no. 9 to 14, was collected by myself and transmitted to him,

as my list and photographs will prove. These teeth are not

from a breccia cave, but from “ the breccia cave of Welling-

ton valley,” and they are what I stated them to be, and not

what Professor Owen designates them in his treatise.

I have known the teeth for years to be those of Thylacoleo, and

I reconstructed the skull with all the teeth in it in 1869 (Pl. XI.

fig. 3). This plate, lithographed by Mrs. Forde, was printed

at the Government Printing Office in 1870, with seventeen

other plates of fossil remains (by Miss Scott and Mrs. Forde),

which, however, for want of funds, have never been published.

I was desired to give Professor Owen all the information I

could; and I kept nothing back; but for some reason or other

the most typical specimens, of which I could send photographs

only, are not figured in his paper.

The illustration of a tooth (pl. xi. no. 6) named “ crown of

a less worn upper laniary, outer side,” which means “a left

first upper incisor,” should have been drawn from the cnner

side as well, so as to show the absence of the enamel. Com-

ared with Sir Thomas Mitchell’s figure in the ‘Three Ex-

peditions’ (fig. 5. pl. 32), the fallacy of Professor Owen’s

argument as to its laniary (¢. e. flesh-cutting) character becomes

at once apparent.

Principle in Paleontology. 173

Professor Owen is careful to give us three views of a much

fractured specimen of the right upper jaw from Queensland,

in which the most interesting teeth (the second and third

incisors) are missing, and the canine is fractured. He uselessly

figures also a fractured mandible (pl. xiii. fig. 2), a more com-

plete one having been given above it (fig. 1). He carefully

avoids enlightening his readers by supplying a sketch of the

upper teeth belonging to fig. 2, of which the canine and two

hinder incisors were almost perfect; these teeth are figured

exactly in the position in which they were found imbedded in

stiff moist loam. Having unfortunately broken the skull and

mandible into fragments with my pick, I called Dr. Thomson

and Harry Barnes to my aid, and pointed out the position in

which the teeth lay imbedded, asking friend Thomson to take

notice of it, so that there should be no dispute about the matter

hereafter. ‘To myself the arrangement of the teeth was known

from other specimens obtained on former occasions; but Dr.

Thomson had never seen them together ; and we both sketched

their position.

There is nothing wrong in the arrangement of the teeth in

the rejected photograph, except that the sharp edge of the third

incisor should be more inward, and the canine should, of course,

be partly hidden by the third incisorand the first small premolar.

We had just removed the teeth, when Harry Barnes blew the

candle out to prevent some uninvited visitors from coming

down the shaft. These inquisitive ‘‘ gentlemen” were too far,

however, for retreat, and, bewildered by the sudden darkness,

brought their bodies and some ten tons of loose breccia on the

top of our “ diggings,” and so prevented us from finding the

rest of the skull. Professor Owen’s left incisor (no. 6 of plate

x1.) looks very much like the fellow to my right-hand one.

Having carefully removed the dirt and the “ dirty visitors” I

had another examination of the moist clay, and found the con-

dyle, which resembles that of a koala or native bear*.

It is necessary to go thus into particulars; and as Pro-

fessor Owen will not believe me, | must speak out myself.

Twisting or turning will not alter what I stated to be the

truth; and I feel confident that time and Professor Flower

will prove the correctness of my observations.

I have been in the habit of consulting Professor Owen’s

works on our marsupials, and I have always found he has

* A cast of a similar condyle, with a portion of the inflected angle, was

dispatched to Professor Owen as far back as 1863 or 1864, A year or two

afterwards I pointed out that the cast sent must be that of the missing

part of the Thylacoleo’s mandible. I had good proof of my assertion; but

the proposition was not entertained by Professor Owen.

174 Dr. Gerard Kvrefft on a Cuvierian

given it as his opinion that the first tubercular tooth behind

the lower incisor of a phalanger must be considered to repre-

sent the canine. As late as the year 1868 he teaches this; and

he gives examples of such teeth in the ‘Anatomy of Verte-

brates,’ vol. i. p. 289, figs. 228 and 229: the last represents

the dentition of Phalangista Cookii (our “red ringtail opos-

sum”), In this figure the large incisor is the first tooth of

the series, then follow three small tubercular teeth, the first of

which is distinctly marked “ canine.”

It has been proved that all phalangers proper have three

premolars above and below at some time or other of their

existence ; but in the face of this evidence laid down by Pro-

fessor Owen, as well as by Flower and others, the great ana-

tomist now turns these three little teeth into ‘‘ premolars,” and

alters the premolar formula of Phalangista to four below,

whilst he retains only three above. (See ‘A Cuvierian Prin-

ciple &c.’ p. 254, fig. 19, right mandible of Phalangista

Cookit with four premolars, and without a canine.)

I make no comments on this strange alteration to suit a

certain purpose, which, if accepted by anatomists, will confuse

every thing Professor Owen has taught about the dentition of

the genus Phalangista. The first tooth after the incisor in the

mandible of a phalanger is most undoubtedly a canine, and it

will remain a canine as long as there is truth in comparative

anatomy. Even if every other tooth is marked with a “p”

(premolar); it will never be believed by those who understand

these things, and the teeth will be called, as hitherto, by their

right names given by Professor Owen himself. If we examine

the depressions, two or three in number, on the front inner side

of the large premolar of Thylacoleo, it will be observed at once

that they probably contained two or three little teeth, like

other phalangers, the first of which would of course represent

the lower canine.

Thus far the herbivorous principle is prevalent; but with

the true molars reduced to a pair below, one of which is tuber-

cular, and to a single transverse tooth above, the somewhat

carnivorous character of the animal becomes manifest. The

carnivority is still further expressed in the position of the line

of mandibular teeth, which exactly fronts the ascending ramus ;

but there, again, the carnivorous proof ends.

From the shape of the condyle, placed moderately high, and

from the broad, scoop-like inward process of the lower jaw, we

conclude the T’hylacoleo to have been a mixed-feeding or her-

bivorous animal.

On page 236 of the treatise ‘A Cuvierian Principle in

Palaontology,’ we read in plain words, “The rotatory grinding-

Principle in Paleontology. 175

movements of the mandible are commonly associated with a

high position of the condyle and vegetable diet; the vertical

biting-movements are commonly associated with a low position

of the condyle and animal diet.” This is not quite correct,

the condyle of the herbivorous phalanger known as Dactylo-

psila trivirgata being lower than the row of grinding teeth.

On April 19, 1870, I wrote to Professor Owen, saying,

“The carnivorous character of our friend Thylacoleo is greater

than I first thought it was. I firmly believe the cast of a con-

dyle I sent you is that of this animal.”” These remarks were

made when [I had noticed the row of teeth to be in a line with

the ascending ramus, which is a more or less carnivorous cha-

racter in marsupials.

June 13, 1871 (evidently too late for the paper under dis-

cussion), [ wrote again :—“ Regarding the Thylacoleo I wish to

assist you as much as possible to arrive at a correct determi-

nation of the animal’s character. I sent you already what I

consider the condyle and angular process, in fact the very part

which is missing. Jf you choose to believe me, it is the iden-

tical left posterior portion of the jaw, whereof we possess the

right anterior one also. The jaw is very much like that of a

koala; and the condyle resembles it more than that of any

other animal.”’ With this letter I despatched a series of careful

tracings of my sketches, including one of an upper canine of a

tiger and the lower incisor of a Thylacoleo, for comparison.

Nearly a year has passed since this letter was written; and

my opinion that the animal under discussion is a mixed feeder,

allied to the phalanger tribe, is more and more confirmed.

There is no occasion for me to fall back upon the Purbeck

fossils, or to ransack all the countries under the sun for allied

forms; I have only to examine the numerous recent skulls of

our marsupials collected for a purpose like the present during

the last twelve years, and I am adle to form a very good idea

of the “‘leonine marsupial.”

I believe, and am ready to prove presently, that the Thyla-

coleo contained in its structure certain characteristic parts from

each of our principal marsupial groups. Let me describe the

upper jaw :—The first pair of curved incisors (Pl. XI. fig. 2,

and Pl. XII. fig. 1,a) resemble those of the Belideus flaviventer

or ‘ yellow-bellied flying phalanger.” The next pair (0), as

well as the third (c), are as near in shape to those of the

“bettong ” as can possibly be imagined. The canine (d), with

its compressed crown, is also “‘ bettong-like,” and differs con-

siderably from that of the phalangers proper. The disposition

of the incisor teeth is the saine as in the “ bettong” (Pl. XI.

fig. 8), the curved first incisor arching above the close-packed

176 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

second and third one. All these teeth vary considerably, and

indicate several distinct species; the canines are as irregular

in their structure, and lead to the same conclusion. The short

functionless first and second premolars (e, f) do not indicate

great carnivorous propensities, and they are not near so for-

midable-looking as those of our phalangers.

I mentioned before that the upper canine stands far back

into the palate, and is often completely covered by its neigh-

bours. With regard to the third premolar (g), Owen’s “ car-

nassial tooth,” it will be found, in form, position, and function,

to be identical with the third premolar in the common Phalan-

gista vulpina, in Cuscus maculatus, and in other more or less

carnivorous phalangers. This tooth is often worn in a far

greater degree than Professor Owen imagines; and specimens

now in his hands will sufficiently prove it. No ‘ formidable

carnivore” would be able to make an impression on “ hide and

flesh’ with such “ grindstones:” I have no more appropriate

word to offer when describing the worn condition of some of

the many specimens examined by me. The upper first and

only molar (PI. XII. fig. 20) is a shallow-rooted, distorted, flat,

rugged tooth, with a depression in the middle, and evidently

designed for grinding or crushing, never for lacerating flesh.

Looking at Professor Owen’s figure on plate xiv. (Phil.

Trans. 1871), I notice the old tendency to make the animal as

carnivorous as possible. The first upper incisor has the form

of a “ parrot’s beak,” and is probably noé quite true to nature ;

the indicated second incisor is far too small; and the tooth

which he terms a “canine” is out of shape and out of place

where Professor Owen has put it. The upper front teeth of

a Thylacoleo are closely packed, there is not a line of space

between them; the canine is perfectly crowded out, and stands

back into the palate, as Professor Owen’s drawing plainly

shows; but he will call this real undoubted “canine” the

“first premolar,” and I shall say no more.

Description of the lower jaw (Pl. XI. fig. 1):—This part settles

all our disputed points, and turns the supposed “lion” into a

leaf-eating phalanger. The front view of it, given on plate xiii.

fig. 3, is too broad; the incisors should not close together at

the tip, but remain considerably parted, as their marks against

the second pair of premolars clearly indicate. Professor Owen

says, to illustrate the power of these weak incisors (p. 228) :—

“Were a pair of bayonets cemented side by side, and the force

of two brawny arms concentrated on the thrust, their perfora-

ting and lethal power would be increased.” The Professor is

right enough in his conclusion; but his premises are wrong.

The flat lower incisor teeth of our animal (Pl. XI. fig. 1, a,

Principle in Paleontology. 177

fig. 2, h, and Pl. XII. fig. 1, 4) are not cemented close together ;

on the contrary, their attachment is remarkably weak; and

the symphysis of the mandibles is not firm and compact like

that of a koala or a wombat. We find plenty of wombat-

jaws in a fossil state with both incisors present; even perfect

jaws are “not uncommon; and wombat-jaws, as a rule, seldom

part at the symphysis: but not a single Thylacoleo jaw

has ever been found under such conditions. The wombat

is the only marsupial animal which in compactness, shape,

and biting-power can at all be compared with our “ lionized

friend ;’’ and the “ formidable carnivore” was only as large

again as a common wombat. We know fossil wombats con-

siderably larger than the Thylacoleo; and having experienced

the impressions of the teeth of some recent ones, I make con-

fession that they bruised the part nipped considerably, but

did not draw much blood; they crush, but do not tear. The

koala bites sharper, and resembles the Z'hylacoleo more; but,

like the wombat and unlike the “marsupial lion,” it has much

firmer jaws, and, were it as large as the T’hylacoleo, would be

more formidable. The average form of a koala’s lower incisors

differs considerably from the blunt specimens specially selected

by Professor Owen, probably for other than Australian readers,

and figured on page 233, no. 6, of his treatise. The real car-

nivorous marsupials have always a series of small incisor teeth

inserted between the canines, which resemble those of ordinary

placental carnivores. ‘The most formidable, the Thylacine, or

Tasmanian tiger, and the black Dasyure, were numerous in

Postpliocene times; and that they did their duty well in

checking the increase of the great herbivores (which were

“‘calves”’ at some time of their existence) is evident enough

from the marks which their strong teeth left on some of the

fossil bones. Animals with Zhylacoleo-dentition could not

make such impressions.

If dingoes find no difficulty in destroying cattle, the great

Dasyures were as able to overpower Diprotodons of respectable

size ; so that the Thylacoleo was not required for that purpose.

But I am not going to speculate.

The general form of the lower jaw of our marsupial friend

is undoubtedly that of a phalanger. The flattened and but

partly enamelled lower incisors are exactly represented by the

incisors of Belideus and Dactylopsila (Pl. XI. fig. 7), even to

their serrated edges; the diminutive canine and one or two

premolars are the old story of the phalanger dentition over

again; and the great third “ carnassial”’ premolar (Pl. XI.

fig. 1,c, fig. 2, and Pl. XII. fig. 1,7) resembles, as in the upper

jaw, the outwardly produced formidable tooth of the common

178 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

phalanger. No person who applied the laws of comparative

anatomy correctly would fall into the mistake of supposing the

Thylacoleo’s large premolar to be more closely related to that

of the rat kangaroo than to the phalangers ; and if I once men-

tioned Thylacoleo carnifex as a “ gigantic kangaroo rat” in

one of the Trustees’ Annual Reports (as Professor Owen is

careful to point out), I beg to assure him that this was done

to give the general reader of such documents some idea of

what was meant. I must try and speak in terms which the

public can understand, and avoid as much as possible all

scientific names for which English equivalents are at hand.

The remaining teeth in the lower jaware a triangular, posteriorly

depressed molar (d andi), and a very small functionless tuber-

cular tooth (e and 7), which closes the series. The line of teeth

is in a line with the rising ramus; and in this and in the form

of the first molar I discern relationship with the Dasyuride.

Several of the mandibles in the Museum collection show clearly,

at the point where they are broken off, that the jaw widened out

inwards and upwards like that of a wombat, to which, in this

respect, the Thylacoleo was also related. The upward direction

of the wombat’s jaw from the base of the ascending ramus is

very abrupt; and it may have been the same with the Thyla-

coleo. ‘here is a foramen (small opening) at the base of the

ramus, which also occurs in the wombat and koala and in all

the kangaroos in a larger degree, but is never found in a true

marsupial carnivore. The articulating condyle is irregular,

large, rugged, and rounded; it resembles the condyle of the

native bear or koala, and will be found (when discovered at-

tached to a perfect ramus) to be a moderately high-placed con-

dyle associated with the rotatory movements of the jaw, just

as in herbivorous marsupials and herbivorous placentals (see

Owen’s ‘Cuvierian Principle,’ p. 233). I do not see the

use of discussing the arguments of Professor Owen in favour

of the existence of a “ leonine marsupial” any further; I only

remind him of the fact that our really carnivorous marsupials,

from the smallest Antechinus to the largest Thylacine, resemble

each other—that all have six lower incisors like the placental

carnivores, “ which hold the canines well apart,” and streng-

then them for the purpose for which they were designed—that

all possess a low condyle, and always a sharp-pointed (never

a broad and rounded) inflected angle below it. In not one

of them has a foramen been noticed at the base of the coronotd ;

and all have rounded strong canines, which, in particular the

upper ones, are covered with thick enamel; whilst the teeth

of the Thylacoleo are compressed, and the upper incisors pos-

sess little or no enamel on the inner and lower surface. The

Principle in Paleontology. 179

true carnivorous type is always the same, whether we consider

the placental or the marsupial orders. There is no more dif-

ference between a small marten cat and a tiger than there is

between the minute Antechinus and the largest Thylacine ;

teeth and jaw are constructed on the same principle; and no

teacher knows this better than Professor Owen.

But the Thylacoleo stands not isolated. I can prove several

distinct species ; and I have already discovered a much smaller

allied form, described under the generic term of Plectodon. Of

this genus I can also demonstrate three species at least.

On the 2nd April, 1870, I dispatched, by direction of the

Trustees, two cases of specimens (2100 in number) to Profes-

sor Owen, no. 846 of which was the right lower incisor of a

Plectodon. Professor Owen never mentions this, the most

interesting specimen in the whole series, though it bears con-

siderably on the question at issue, and I doubt not we shall

hear of 1t at some future time. I kept photographs of it to

prove its identity with my duly established genus Plectodon ;

whenever this becomes necessary.

I must bring my remarks to a close, however, though there

are numerous errors yet to be corrected.

Making every allowance for Professor Owen’s want of spe-

cimens, I am surprised to read the following sentence (p. 243):

—“In the Bettongia penicillata, with such worn incisors, and

with all the molars in place and showing an habitual use, the

trenchant premolar retains its vertical groovings to the cutting-

edge of both the outer and inner sides. They have been used

to divide the grass-blades and leaf-stalk or other tough part

or fibre of the vegetable food; but the more important and

continuous work of mastication has had grinders im number,

size, massiveness, and complexity of horizontal area fitted to

perform it. Old age is attended with seeming exceptions to

this rule in both human incisors and hypsiprymnal premolars,

which then show the wear or work of life.”

I draw the attention of Australians to table case A, section

A, in the new wing of the Museum, where “hypsiprymnal” and

“bettongial” (fossil and recent) premolars may be seen, in

which not only the premolars, but the following three molars,

are worn ‘ Thylacoleo fashion,” leaving not a vestige of the

vertical grooves.

Much-worn human incisors are by no means rare in the

skulls of our collection; and in a particular one, found at

Bondi, all the teeth are ground down to the roots. ‘This re-

markable wear is caused by the chewing of certain reed or

bulrush-roots (Typha Shuttleworthit), for the purpose of get-

ting at the starch between the fibres and to obtain the fibre

180 Dr. Gerard Krefft on a Cuvierian

itself, which, spun or twisted, was used by the aborigines to

prepare fishing-, duck-, and wallaby-nets.

I can guess pretty well the age of native skulls, often

brought here, by examination of the teeth, because the practice

of chewing typha-fibre has ceased with the introduction of

twine. I may have misunderstood Professor Owen regarding

the wear and tear of incisor teeth ; if he means to say that they

do wear with age my remarks are superfluous. I regret that

Professor Owen has so little faith in my observing-power, and.

more so that it is so difficult to convince him of his errors. I

have explained to him, by way of long letters, photographs,

casts, and original specimens, that the genus Zygomaturus,

established by the late Mr. W. 8S. Macleay, must be retained,

because the mandibular teeth of the animal which he has

named Notothertwm are totally different in shape and structure

from those of Mr. Macleay’s creature. Those who are able to

do so may compare them (Cat. Royal Coll. Surgeons, Mamm. &

Aves, plate 8. fig. 5, Notothertwm, and Proc. Geol. Soc. vol. xv.

plate 7. fig. 1). Professor Owen again and again refers to

Mr. Macleay’s genus under the designation of Nototherium ;

and as my own generic and specific terms have been super-

seded, sometimes in the most off-hand manner, by badly in-

formed naturalists, I consider it my duty to keep facts such

as these before the public. Professor Owen says (p. 263) :—

““ No evidence of a megatheroid or other edentate animal has

been had from any cave or fossiliferous deposit in Australia.

The ungual phalanges (plate 13. figs. 11, 12, 13, 14) are too

small for Notothertwum and Diprotodon, if even one were to

entertain the ideaof those huge marsupial Herbivora having had

sheathed, compressed, decurved, pointed claws like those which

the phalanges in question plainly bore. These phalanges are

much too large for the Thylacinus and Sarcophilus. But there

is no other associated carnivore corresponding in size with

that of the animal indicated by them save the Thylacoleo.”

When sending the photographs and casts of these “ claw-

bones,” I said to Professor Thomson :—“‘ We shall have some

fun, depend upon it; Owen will claim them as ‘ Thylacoleo-

claws,’ just as he claims Macleay’s Zygomaturus to be the

part to which the Nototherium’s mandibles belong.” Good,

clever, liberal, and obliging Professor Thomson is gone to

his long home, and Professor Owen has not disappointed my

expectations.

The claw to which I more particularly refer as being that

of a ‘‘megatheroid animal,” and which, with its next joint,

is deposited in the Australian Museum, where it may be in-

spected (table case C), is what I stated it to be— the ungual

Principle in Paleontology. 181

or terminal phalanx of a creature allied to the Mylodon.” The

upper face of the sheath is naturally open; and the next joint

is short and thick, like some of the phalanges of Professor

Owen’s Mylodon (see ‘ Memoir of Mylodon,’ plates 15 and 16).

I am not going to try and prove what this claw is not like, as

Professor Owen does. I only draw attention to the probability

that there were in olden times, as at the present day, small

Edentata as well as large ones; and as I first discovered the

presence of fossil edentate Monotremes in this country, I may

be allowed to say, with the evidence before me, that animals

allied to the Mylodon will yet be found. I am very careful in

my statements: I respect Professor Owen, and am ready to

serve him at any time, whatever difference there may be in our

opinions. I have cast my lot with Australians these twenty

years; I have had opportunities like few persons living to

study our fauna, and will not give in, because it must be proved

first that I am wrong. I shall always strive to deserve the

high compliment which Professor Owen, as well as Professor

Flower, have paid me regarding my ability as the Curator of

the Australian Museum; and I hope that, like the tattoo-

marks in “Tichborne v. Lushington,”’ my postscript will

settle the disputed point.

Postscript.—In ‘drawing a few of the lower incisors of

“ Thylacoleo”’ last night for the purpose of giving illustrations

of them in a future issue of the ‘ Sydney Mail,’ I noticed, to my

astonishment, clear evidence of attrition on the inner side of

several. ‘There was no doubt about it, they had touched each

other during the lifetime of the animal (as kangaroo-teeth do),

but generally at the tip only. In one specimen, however, the

surface of the inner side was observed to be quite smooth to

the extent of one inch on the lower margin. The ridge so

prominent in young or immature specimens had totally disap-

peared, and my supposition that the jaws were loosely attached

1s Clearly borne out. Professor Owen lays great stress on the

sharp points of all the lower incisor teeth found in a perfect

state; and as he makes this an argument in favour of the car-

nivority of our now “unmasked”’ friend, I may as well state

why the teeth are not worn down. [very one of our upper

incisors of Thylacoleo has the under surface, against which

the lower teeth work, scooped out; and even in young ani-

mals the teeth-marks are plainly visible, and not a vestige of

enamel can be seen. Is it a wonder that the lower incisor

teeth keep perfect so long as they are not violently broken off ?

and will Professor Owen continue to call this probably hand-

some and certainly harmless creature, with “ trembling jaws,”

182 On a Cuvierian Principle in Paleontology.

the fellest of savage carnivores? How bears “the Cuvierian

principle ”’ an ordeal with animals which Cuvier did not know

and did not dream of? The test has been applied, and human

vanity is exposed again.

Sydney, May 15th, 1872.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Puate XI.

Fig. 1. Lower jaw of Thylacoleo, showing the position of the broken

ramus and coronoid process, restored from fragments in the Aus-

tralian Museum at Sydney: a, incisors; }, two or three tuber-

cular teeth, representing canine and_ first and second premolars ;

ec, third premolar; d, first molar; e, second molar; f, base of

fractured ascending ramus and coronoid process.

Fig. 2. Skull of Thylacoleo from the side, restored: a, first, 6, second, e,

third upper incisor ; d, upper canine; e, first, f, second, g, third

upper premolar; , lower incisor; 2, two or three tubercular

teeth representing canine and premolars; j, third lower pre-

_ molar; &, first, 7, second lower molar; m, inflected angle of lower

jaw; 2, condyle.

Fig. 3. Skull of Thylacoleo as restored by Krefft in 1869.

Fig. 4, Skull of Thylacoleo as restored by Prof. Owen in the Encyel,

Brit. vol. xvii. p. 175 (1859).

Fig. 5. Lower jaw of Cuscus maculatus, showing close relationship to

Thylacoleo.

Figs. 6,7. The skull and lower jaw of Dactylopsila trivirgata, to show

the powerful incisor teeth of a vegetable- or mixed-feeding pha-

langer.

Fig. 8, Canine and upper front teeth of Bettongia rufescens : a, first in-

cisor; 6, canine.

*,%* All, except fig. 8, reduced about one half.

PLaTE XII.

Fig. 1. The dentition of Thylacoleo, reduced about one half. The letters

as in Pl. XI, fig. 2.

Fig. 2. Left lower incisor, showing the extent of the enamelled portion.

Fig. 3. Right lower incisor, outer surface.

Fig. 4, First right upper incisor: a, inner, and b, outer view, showing the

extent of the enamelled part.

Fig. 5. First left upper incisor, inner view.

Expeditions,’ 1856.

. Right lower incisor, with fractured crown, from Sir T. Mitchell,

1836.

Fig. 8. Left lower incisor of a young Thylacoleo.

Figs. 9, 10. Second upper incisors.

Fig. 11. Right upper canine of a new species of Thylacoleo,

Fig. 12. Fractured upper canine.

Figs. 18, 14. Upper canines.

Figs. 15-18. Four premolars.

Fig. 19. aa lower third premolar, much worn, from Sir T, Mitchell,

Fig. 6. First right upper incisor, two views, from Sir T, Mitchell’s ‘ Three

Fig. 7

Fig. 20, Upper molar, right side.

Fig. 21. Upper canine of a tiger.

Dr. A. Giinther on two new Fishes from Tasmania. 183

XXVI.—Description of two new Fishes from Tasmania.

By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

In a collection of Tasmanian fishes presented by Morton

Allport, Esq., to the British Museum, two fishes were con-

tained which appear to have hitherto escaped observation.

LANIOPERCA, g. 1.

This genus would appear to be allied to the Percoid group

of Apogonina, and more especially to Scombrops, as far as we

are able to judge from external characters.

Body compressed, rather elongate, covered with thin deci-

duous scales of moderate size. Head with the snout produced

and pointed, entirely covered with small scales. Cleft of the

mouth wide, with the lower jaw projecting. Jaws, vomer,

and palatine bones with narrow bands of villiform teeth, and

with an outer series of stronger teeth. A pair of very strong

canine teeth in the upper jaw. Tongue smooth. Hye of

moderate size. Branchiostegals seven ; pseudobranchie. ‘Two

dorsal fins, the first composed of a few feeble spines; the soft

dorsal and anal with rather numerous rays; the latter with

two spines. No denticulations on the cranial bones, the oper-

cular margins. being very thin and membranaceous.

Lanioperca mordax.

D.5 | = A. a L. lat. 66.

The height of the body is contained five times in the total

length (without caudal); the length of the head thrice and one

fourth. The eye is nearer to the end of the opercle than to that

of the snout, its diameter being two elevenths of the length of

the head, and equal to the width of the interorbital space. The

maxillary does not quite reach the vertical from the front margin

of the eye, which is immediately below the upper profile. The

teeth of the outer series in the upper jaw are subequal in size, and

much smaller than those in the lower, the four or five posterior

of which are enlarged, distant, and canine-like. Posterior

margin of the preoperculum deeply emarginate. Pectoral

fin not quite half as long as the head, the upper rays the

longest; root of the ventral fins at a very short distance

behind that of the pectorals. Dorsal spines very feeble.

Caudal forked. Coloration uniform.

One specimen has been sent, 11 inches long. Mr. M. All-

ort says that it is of medium size and called “ Pike” or

* Jack” by the colonists.

184. Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Chilodactylus Allporti.

iG); ae Ay Sei lat. 55-56.

Allied to Chilodactylus nigricans, but with the body more

elevated and with the ventral fin reaching to or even slightly

beyond the vent.

The height of the body is contained twice and a half or

twice and two thirds in the total length. Six simple pectoral

rays, the second of which is the longest, but projects only a

little beyond the membrane. Dorsal spines strong, the fifth,

sixth, and seventh being the longest, not quite one half of the

length of the head. The spinous and soft dorsal fins of nearly

equal height; but the last spines are much shorter than the

first rays. Scales very rough. ‘There are five longitudinal

series of scales above the lateral line; and a band of minute

scales runs along the base ofthe entire dorsal fin.

Purplish brown, with six broad, slightly oblique, blackish

cross bands; fins and opercular membrane deep black.

Mr. Morton Allport has presented to the British Museum

two specimens, 11 inches long; but the species grows to a

much larger size, as we possess from another collection a third

example which is two feet long.

XXVII.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.

K. Parker, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jonss, F.G.S.

Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg.

[Continued from yol. ix. p. 303.]

XIV. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Isle of Moen,

Denmark. (Monatsberichte, 1838, p. 192; Abhandlungen,

1838, table 111. pl. 4. fig. 11.)

Pl. xxrx. figs. 1, a, b,c, Rotalia laxa, and fig. 2, R. perfo-

rata, must both be referred to the subdiscoidal variety of

Globigerina bulloides known as Gl. eretacea, D’Orb. Figs. 3

to 7 are neatly grown, young or arrested Planorbuline, with -

globose chambers, comparable with the early stages of growth

in Pl. farcta. They may for convenience be grouped as Pl.

globulosa (Khr.). Such are figs. 8, a, b,c, Rotalia densa;

fig. 4, R. senaria; fig. 5, R. quaterna; fig. 6, R. globulosa?,

1838 ; fig. 7, R. leptospira. ~

Fig. 8, Lotalia? (Planulina?) monospira, is a rotiform

Pulvinulina (?), with thick marginal wall and strong straight

septa, and with a curious symmetrical set of holes, one at the

base of each chamber, around the large, convex, central cham-

the Nomenclature of the Foramin¢fera. 185

ber. It seems to belong to the subtype Pulvinulina elegans,

with its subquadrangular chambers ; and it may be P. Orbignyt

or P. caracolla (Roemer), showing the high umbonate face.

Fig. 9, Rotalia crete, is a relatively large Planorbulina, an-

swering to Reuss’s P/. ammonoides. Fig. 10, Planulina tur-

gida, and fig. 11, P/. sicula (1838), are Planuline, near to, if

not the same as, Pl. ariminensis, with falcate chambers. So

also the much larger (fig. 12) PJ. ocellaris ; but its large scat-

tered foramina may, like those in fig. 8, possibly be due to

parasitic borings*. |

Figs. 13, Pl. ampla, and 14, Pl. angusta, are thick-margined

and strongly septated, with triangular and oblong segments,

as in fig. 8, and may be flat-face views of Pulvinulina cara-

colla, P. ornata, or some other of the P. elegans group. (See

Phil. Trans. vol. clv. p. 890 &e.) . Fig. 15, Planulina spatiosa,

a young form of Pl. spatiosa, Khr. (from the tripoli-shale of

Oran, Africa), Monatsb. 1844, pp. 67 & 94, and ‘ Mikrogeol.’

pl. xxi. fig. 95, is a variety of Pulvinulina repanda, near vay.

pulchella.

Fig. 16, Textilaria sulcata (“ Text. striata, 1838”) may

well pass as 7. striata, Khr. Figs. 17, a, b, Text. globulosa

(1838), is the common minute (arrested) form of 7. gibbosa.

Figs. 18, a,b, Text. linearis (“ T. aciculata, 1838 ; see Stropho-

conus”) 1s Bolivina punctata. As all Ehrenberg’s Strophocont

‘are either Bolivine or closely allied Virguline, the allusion to

-Strophoconus here might have been carried further with justice

to our author’s perspicacity. Fig. 19, Text. dilatata (1838), is

a good T. gibbosa. Figs. 20, a,b, Text. aculeata, are separa-

ble,—20 a as a coarse aculeate Text. gibbosa, and 206 as a

thick-shelled variety of Bolivina punctata, bluntly aculeate on

the outer margin of each chamber, and as such might be

registered as B. aculeata; whilst the Textilaria falls to T.

subangulata, D’Orb., 1846. Fig. 21 a, Text. pachyaulax

(“compare T. brevis”’), and fig. 21 6, T. sulcata, come under

T. striata, Ehr.

Fig. 22, Grammostomum polystigma, is either a young spe-

cimen or the early chambers of a very broad strong-shelled

Bolivina dilatata, Reuss, with short but transversely broad

and faleate chambers; 23, Gr. dilatatum, is also a_thick-

shelled Bolivina dilatata, but with less curved and more

quadrangular chambers; 24, Gir. pinnula, is a common Texti-

laria of the gibbosa type, with a smooth and evenly tapering

subarcuate shell; 25, Gr. convergens, is probably a long-ovate

well-grown Bolivina punctata (?), but without visible pores ;

_ _* In specimens from the Chalk of Meudon there are frequent borings

(figs. 20, 37, & 38 of pl. xxvii.).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 15

186 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

26, Gr. divergens, is a subconical delicate B. punctata ; 27, Gr.

lineare, is a delicate subcylindrical B. punctata of typical

character; 28, Gr. rhomboidale, is a relatively large Virgulina

squamosa. Virgulina is a subgenus of Bolivina, having

flattish, smooth, and delicate shells, with extremely fine pores,

and with the chambers built up more or less regularly anglewise ;

whilst Bolivina is coarser in shell-structure, and its chambers

are rounder, or at least shorter transversely. Vérgulina squa-

mosa comprises the very regularly Textilariform varieties ;

V. Schreibersti takes those that have long inflated chambers,

variously arranged, parallel with the axis of the shell, or nearly

so—sometimes resembling a Polymorphina, sometimes modi-

fied by a partial twist of growth and passing towards Bulimina

proper, of which genus both Bolivina and Virgulina are

sections.

Fig. 29, Proroporus verrucosus, is a tuberculated or coarsely

granular entosolenian Polymorphina tuberculata, and may be

added to the synonymy of that species in the ‘ Monograph of

Polymorphina,” Linnean Soc. Transact. vol. xxvil. p. 242.

Fig. 30, Polymorphina glabra, is Virgulina squamosa; and 31,

P. asparagus, is a narrow subyvariety of the same. Figs.

32-86 are various small individuals of Virgulina Hemprichii

(Ehr.), described more fully in the ‘Geol. Mag.’ no. 89,

p- 509; and they represent forms that may be said to be trans-

itional between V. Schretbersit and Bulimina proper (32, Stro-

phoconus ovum; 33, Str. cepa; 34, Str. flosculus; 35, Str.

gemma; 36, Str. gracilis). Fig. 37, Guttulina turrita, = Ver-

neuilina pygmea (Kigger) ; 38, Pleurites turgidus, = Virgulina

Hemprichit (see above) ; an aperture, visible on the inner side

of the terminal chamber, is diagnostic, as in pl. xxviii. f. 30,

showing the really Bulimine character of the shell, and indi-

cating the passage of the Virguline into the Cassiduline section

of this genus.

Fig. 89, Vaginulina linearis (fragment), =Marginulina

ensts, Reuss (‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ 1. pl. 18. fig. 27). Fig. 40,

Vaginulina acuta (fragment), belongs to the Citharina section

of the subgenus. Fig. 41, Planularia tenella, is a delicate

young or arrested Cristellaria, such as in the full-grown state

would arrive at either the Planularian or the Marginuline con-

dition.

Fig. 42, Nodosaria aculeata, is a very interesting thick-

shelled and elongate variety of N. radicula, having numerous

prickles, chiefly but not wholly on the base of the chambers,

pointing backwards. Oblique and tapering (Dentaline) sub-

varieties of this form have been plentifully met with in Ter-

tiary strata, as Dentalina Adolphina D’Orb. (almost straight

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 187

as figured by Bornemann, from Hermsdorf), D. scabra, Reuss,

D. spinescens, Reuss; and Nodosaria hispida, D’Orb., and

Nod. conspurcata, Reuss (both Tertiary), are straight forms

very near to Ehrenberg’s NV. aculeata; and the first takes pre-

cedence. Figs. 43, a, 6, N. vulgaris, and fig. 44, NV. truncata,

belong to the simple elongated N. radicula type, with short

and close-set chambers. Herein they resemble N. glabra,

D’Orb., and the almost straight Dent. filiformis, D’Orb.*,

still more closely, as also does the foregoing N. aculeata,

excepting as to its prickles and straightness. Nod. subulata

(Reuss, ‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ ii. pl. 13. fig. 11), however, is the

earliest published form with which figs. 43 and 44 most

nearly correspond. Indeed, as often stated already, the differ-

ences above alluded to are not of essential value in a zoological

point of view.

Fig. 45, Miliola ovum, =Lagena globosa. Fig. 46, Miliola

caudata, =Lagena apiculata, Reuss (1851). Fig. 47, Syn-

spira triquetra, seems to be the spiral, non-segmented com-

mencement of some Spirilline form, assuming a triangular

outline externally as it advances in growth.

Xanthidia and Coccoliths are also figured on this plate as

occurring in the Chalk of Méen.

Such Foraminifera as the above are found at about 100

fathoms depth.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Moen, figured

by Ehrenberg.

. Lagena globosa (Montagu).

apiculata, ss.

. Nodosaria hispida, D’ Ord.

subulata, Fss.

. Vaginulina acuta, Hhr.

. Marginulina ensis, 2ss.

. Planularia tenella, Lhe.

. Polymorphina tuberculata, D’ Ord.

- Bolivina punctata, D’ Ord.

10. —— dilatata, Rss.

COCO ND OP Oboe

dt aculeata, Hhr.

12. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Orb.

13. asparagus (Lhr.).

14. —— Hemprichu (Zhr.).

15. gemma (Hhr.).

16. Textilaria gibbosa, D’ Orb.

subangulata, D’ Ord.

* After Soldani, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. viii. p. 156,

15*

188 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

18. Textilaria pinnula, Hhr.

19. striata, Hhr.

20. globulosa, Hhr.

21. Verneuilina pygmea (Hgger).

22. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

23. Planorbulina ammonoides, /’ss.

24. globulosa (Lhr.).

25. Planulina ariminensis, D’ Orb.

26. Pulvinulina elegans (D’ Ord.) ?

27. Orbignyi (Ram.)?

28. spatiosa (/hr.).

29. Synspira triquetra, Hhr.

XV. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Island of Rigen,

Baltic. (Monatsber. 1838, p. 192; Abhandlung. 1838, table

i. pl. 4. fig. 111.)

Pl. xxx. fig. 1, Miliola (Monocystis) arcella (“ Orbulina

universa, D’Orb.?”),1s Orb. universa. Fig. 2, Nodosaria

monile, a few joints of a short-chambered N. ovicula (or elon-

gated N. radicula) ; probably the straight form of Dentalina

monile, Hagenow, from the same Chalk. Figs. 3, a, 6, Tex-

tilaria globulosa (1838), =6, T. gibbosa and, a, its young form

or early chambers. Figs. 4, a,b,c, Text. sulcata (‘‘ T. striata,

1838”’), and figs. 5, a, b, T. pachyaulax (“ compare T. brevis”’),

are strongly marked specimens of 7. striata, which, though

differing from 7’. gibbosa only in its ornament, is a convenient

variety. Fig. 4¢ shows that the septal apertures, otherwise

normal, are slightly lipped. Figs. 6, a, b, c,d, Text. linearis,

is a typical Bolivina punctata. Fig. 7, Text. acuta, is also

Bolivina punctata, but somewhat irregular in shape; it well

matches in outline Virgulina Reussii, Geinitz, as figured by

Reuss, ‘ Bohm. Kreid.’ 1. pl. 8. fig. 61: figs. 9 & 10 of pl. xxvu.

(Meudon Chalk) are very similar, but with thicker shell-walls.

Fig. 8, Text. subtilis, is another B. punctata, small and regular,

of a common elongate-ovate shape. Fig. 9, Grammostomum

gracile, is a rather coarse Virgulina Schreibersti. Figs. 10,

a, b, Gram. platytheca, is Textilaria sagittula. Fig.11, Gram.

millepora, is a well-grown bolivina dilatata (see also fig. 15).

Fig. 12, Text. inflata (“ T. aspera, 1838, partly”’), is a coarse-

shelled 7. gibbosa, with slight marginal prickles, like 7. sub-

angulata from Moen, p. 185; and fig. 13, Gram. aculeatum

(““ Text. spinosa, 1838, partly”’), is a smaller individual with

more abundant and coarser prickles on the outer edges of the

chambers. These two are rough relatives of the beautifully

neat and simply aculeate Text. Marie, D’Orb. Fig. 14, Gram.

pinnula, seems to be the tapering subarcuate apex of a Lolivina

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 189

dilatata. In outline it much resembles fig. 24, pl. xxix., which

is also named Gram. pinnula; but the latter is Textilarian in

the arrangement of its chambers... Fig. 15, Proroporus? cla-

vulina, is a strongly built Bolivina dilatata, corresponding

with Bolivina incrassata of Reuss, which he has found in the

Chalk both of Lemberg and of Riigen,

‘Fig. 16, Sagrina crete, is a large, pouting, lipped Bigenerina,

with a rough shell of globose chambers. It presents a stage

of growth further than that of “ Loxostomum tumens,” pl. xxvii.

fig. 25 (Geol. Mag. no. 89, p. 508), having become quite

uniserial, and thus passed into the subgenus Bigenerina; but

its necked and rimmed aperture gives it the further distinctive

characters of the subgenus /Teterostomella, Reuss. The slight

tuberculation visible on the edge of the figure indicates suf-

ficiently the habit of growth so much more fully exposed in

the blunt spines of HH. aculeata (Ehr.), to which we refer also

pl. xxvii. figs. 21 & 22, and pl. xxvii. figs. 25 & 26, on ac-

count of the tendency they show to take on the extension of

the neck and its marginal thickening.

Fig. 17, Grammostomum? decurrens, is a beautiful and

characteristic Virgulina squamosa. Fig. 18, Polymorphina

nucleus*, is a variety of Virgulina Hemprichiit, having a

tendency towards Cassidulina, Fig. 19, Pleurites calciparus,

is a Textilariform variety of Virg. Hemprichit. Figs. 20, a, b,

Strophoconus ovum, is a small Virg. Schretbersit. Fig. 21,

Str. cepa, being dark-shelled, is probably Virg. Hemprichii,

young. Figs. 22, a,b, Spheroidina gemmula,= Sph. bulloides,

well figured. Figs. 23, a, 6, Rotalia globulosa (1838), figs. 24,

a, b, R. leptospira, and fig. 25, L. pertusa, are either young

Planorbuline or young Globigerine ; in this state they are

with difficulty distinguishable. Figs. 23 & 25 resemble the

early chambers of G'lobigerinew, as shown in figs. 26 & 38;

fig. 24 may be Pl. globulosa (Khr.). Figs. 26, a, b, Phanerosto-

mum asperum, is decidedly Globigerina cretacea of the sub-

discoidal type. Fig. 27, Rotalia obscura, = Cristellaria rotulata,

or a feebly keeled Or. cultrata, like Cr. producta, Von Hagenow,

from Riigen. Fig. 28, Platyacus? squama, seems to be a

variety of Pulvinulina repanda, and near to Pulv. spatiosa

(Ehr.), pl. xxi. fig.95, and pl. xxix. fig. 15. Fig. 29, Planulina

annulosa, = Planorbulina ammonoides. Fig. 80, Planulina po-

* This is entered with doubt among the synonyms of Polymorphina

rotundata in the “ Monograph of Polymorphina,” Linn. Soc. Trans. vol.

xxvii. p. 234; but, together with several other Ehrenbergian species re-

ferred to in that Monograph, will have to be erased.

+ For an account of this species, see also ‘Geol. Mag.’ no. 89, pp. 508,

509.

190 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

merana, = Pulvinulina Micheliniana, seen from the flat top.

Fig. 31, Pl. umbilicata, looks somewhat like an umbonate Cris-

tellaria cultrata, or rather Cr. rotulata with pinched edge; but it

is doubtful. Fig. 32, Nonionina? spira, is also Cristellarian in

most points, like the foregoing ; but the speckled appearance is

peculiar, Fig. 33, Planulina ampliata, =Planorbulina am-

monoides. Fig. 34, Cristellaria porosa, is a fragment of some

neatly grown Planorbulina. Fig. 35, Cristellaria rota, be-

longs to a limbated Cr. cultrata, such as Or. planicosta, Von

Hagenow, from Riigen.

Fig. 36, Lenticulina discus, is Planorbulina Haidingert,

seen with the umbilical or lower face upwards. Fig. 37, He-

terostomum alternans, 1s Virgulina Hemprichii in a fme

condition, showing the characteristic notch-like infolded aper-

tures in two chambers, and exhibiting a transition of form

towards Cassidulina.

Fig. 38, Globigerina crete, is a full-grown Gl. cretacea,

having the later chambers relatively large, globose, and nearly

equal (compare D’Orbigny’s figure 18, pl. ii. ‘ Mém. sur la

Craie blanche,’ &c.).

Coccospheres, Coccoliths, Pyaidicula prisca (?), Gallionella

aurichalcea (1838), and Spongoliths are also figured on this

plate, from the Chalk of Riigen.

The foregoing lived at about 100 fathoms depth.

In 1842 Herr von HAGENow contributed a memoir on the

fossils of the Chalk of Riigen (3rd part, Mollusks) to the

‘Neues Jahrbuch fiir Min., Geol. u. Paleont.’ 1842, pp. 528-

575; and at pages 568-574, and in pl. ix. figs. 20-26, are

described and illustrated the Foraminifera he met with. In

1861 Prof. Dr. A. E. Reuss treated of all the Foraminifera

known to him from the soft Chalk of Riigen, in ‘ Sitzungs-

berichte math.-nat: Cl. Kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien,’ vol.

xliv. pp. 324-333,) pl. v. figs. 6-9, pl. vi., and pl. vu. figs.

1&2. In cases where the species were merely mentioned by

Von Hagenow in 1842, but figured and described by himself

subsequently, he has decided to adopt the names given with

the later and full account of the species. The following are

recognized by Reuss :—

Lagena simplex, Fss.

apiculata, Lss.

Nodosaria monile, v. Hag. Dentalina, Rss. [= Nodosaria

montle, Khr.|

Dentalina sulcata, Nilsson.

Steenstrupi, ss.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 191

Frondicularia solea, v. Hag.

capillaris, Rss. (Hr. lineata, v. Hag.).

Flabellina lingula (v. Hag.).

reticulata, Rss.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.). [? Pl. xxx. figs. 31, 32, ‘ Mi-

krogeol.’]

exarata, v. Hag.

planicostata, v. Hag. [=Pl. xxx. fig. 35, ‘ Mikro-

geol.’]

Spachholtzi, Rss. (Cr. producta, v. Hag.). [Compare

pl. xxx. fig. 27, ‘ Mikrogeol.’]

— umnbilicata, Rss.

— Willamsoni, Rss.

navicula, D’ Orb. (Cr. obliqua, v. Hag.).

retroflexa, v. Hag.

— Marcki, Rss.

multiseptata, Rss.

nuda, Liss. i

Haplophragmium ovatum (v. Hag.).

Nonionina quaternaria, fss. [Pullenia.|

Planorbulina involuta (/ss.). [A plump variety of Pl. Un-

geriana, D’Orb.]

constricta (v. Hag.). [A scarcely distinct subvariety

of Pl. ammonoides (Rss.). |]

ammonoides (fss.) (Planorbulina angulata, v. Hag.).

[Pl. xxx. figs. 29 & 33, ‘ Mikrogeologie.’]

complanata (Lss.) (Planorbulina umbilicata, v. Hag.).

[= PI. rotula, (D’Orb.).*]

(Truncatulina) convexa (fss.) (Trunc. sublevis, v.

Hag.). [A thick subvariety of Truncatulina lobatula.]

Rotalia umbilicata, D’ Orb. (R. turgida, v. Wag.).

globosa (v. Hag.). [Near R. wmbilicata, D’Orb.]

Ataxophragmium obesum, fss. (Globigerina confluens, v.

Hag.).

oe Rss. (Bulimina amphiconica, v. Hag. in parte).

obliquum (Bulimina, D’ Orb.), Rss.

Bulimina gibbosat (Valvulina, D’Ord.), Rss. (Valvulina

quadribullata, v. Hag.).

intermedia, Rss. (Valvulina tribullata, v. Hag.).

* In this case the name given by D’Orbigny in 1846, yields precedence

to that applied by Von Hagenow in 1842, unless the want of full informa-

tion about the species when mentioned by the latter interferes.

+ Dr. Reuss observes that the Riigen specimens have no mouth-valve,

but otherwise resemble D’Orbigny’s Valvulina gibbosa. We are satistied

that the latter is a true Valvulina, as well as Reuss’s Valvulina spcula

from the Bohemian Chalk.

192 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Bulimina brevis, D’ Orb.

ovulum, Jss. (Bul. amphiconica, v. Hag. in parte).

—— Puschi, ss.

Guttulina cretacea, Alth.

Bolivina incrassata, Rss. (Textularia elongata, v. Hag.).

[Pl. xxx. figs. 11 & 15, ‘ Mikrogeologie.’]

The following, mentioned by Von Hagenow in 1842, are

not noticed by Reuss in 1861. Under the circumstances of

the case, they cannot be regarded as important elements in the

fossil Foraminiferal fauna of Riigen.

Nodosaria linearis (?), Ramer.

Marginulina nitida, v. Hag.

Planularia nodosa, v. Hag. op. cit. pl. 9. f. 21, p. 569.

compressa, v. Hag.

Globigerina globosa, v. Hag.

Robulina Comptoni (Sow.).

sublevis, v. Haq.

crenata, v. Hag.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Riigen,

Jigured by Ehrenberg.

. Orbulina universa, D’ Orb.

. Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Orb.

. Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.).

eultrata (Montf:).

Bolivina punctata, D’ Ord.

Reussii (Gentz).

. —— dilatata, Rss.

incrassata, iss.

. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Ord.

Schreibersii, Czjzek.

Hemprichiu (£hr.).

nucleus (Lhr.).

calcipara (Zhr.).

. Textilaria sagittula, Defr.

. —— gibbosa, D’ Orb.

subangulata, D’ Ord.

striata, hr.

globulosa, Hhr.

. Heterostomella aculeata (Zhr.).

. Spheeroidina bulloides, D’ Ord.

. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Ord.

2. Planorbulina ammonoides, Fss.

23. —— Haidingeru (D’Oré.).

——_

De Hee eee ee

SODNADNEWNRODDNAMP WN

bo bo

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 193

_ 24, Planorbulina globulosa (Ehr.).

_ 25. Pulvinulina Micheliniana (D’ Orb.).

26. squama (LHhr.).

XVI. Foraminifera from the Chalk of Volsk, on the Volga,

Russia. (EHRENBERG, ‘ Das unsichtbar wirkende organische

Leben,’ 1842, p. 52.)

_ Pl. xxx. figs. 1, a, b;¢, Miliola spherula, = Orbulina uni-

versa. Figs.2&3, M. paradoxa, and fig. 4, M. ovum, appear

to be isolated chambers of Globigerina. Fig. 5, M. levis, is

the Lagena emaciata, Reuss. Fig. 6, M. stiligera, is a Lagena,

exactly like a recent one we have from the Abrolhos Bank,

flat, elongato-lanceolate, and marginate, with a bimucronate

base, due to the wing-like ends of the keel on each edge; ex-

cepting in the last-mentioned feature, it resembles fig. 46,

pl. xxix. Fig. 7, Vaginulina rotundata, the first three chambers

of a strong simple Vaginulina like V. marginata, D’Orb. Fig.

8, Nodosaria monile, 1s a rather thick-set N. ovicula.

Fig. 9, Textilaria striata, and fig. 10, T. sulcata? (“ T. stri-

ata?’’), are T. striata, Ehr. Fig. 11, Text. amplior, and figs.

12 & 13, T. globulosa ampliata, are T. globulosa, Ehr. (small

arrested 7. gibbosa). Figs. 14 & 15, Test. linearis, and fig. 16,

Grammostomum angulatum, are small specimens of 7. agglu-

tinans. Fig. 17, Text. aculeata, is a coarse T. gibbosa with

apiculate chamber-walls, like fig. 20 a, pl. xxix., and figs. 12,

13, pl. xxx., = 7. subangulata, D’Orb. Figs. 18, 19, Gram.

rossicum, and fig. 20, Gr. secundarium (?), are various speci-

mens of Text. sagittula. Fig.21, Gr.incrassatum, is a thick-

shelled Virgulina Schreibersti. Fig. 22, Gr. attenuatum, is

Bolivina dilatata with a strong shell. Figs. 23 & 24, a, b,c,

Gram. pachyderma, and tig. 25, Gr. thebaicum (?), are coarse-

shelled Virg. Schreibersti. Fig. 26, Gr.laxum (?), is Poly-

morphina lactea. Fig. 27, Gr. megaloglossum, is a fragment of

a large Virgulina squamosa.

Fig. 28, Sagrina crete, represents a strong but somewhat

ill-grown individual of the pouting Bigenerina, with slightly

dentate chamber-margins, referred to Heterostomella aculeata

(pl. xxx. fig. 16) at page 189. Fig. 29, Loxostomum tumens,

is a fine, free-grown, smooth-shelled individual of the same

species. Fig. 30, Polymorphina acanthophora, and fig. 31,

P. obtusa, appear to be young Bigenerine specimens allied to the

last mentioned, but with longer and straighter flask-like cham-

bers, nearly parallel to the axis of the shell. A spike on the

base of the shell gives the name to the larger specimen ; but

this feature is indicated on the other also. They nearly con-

form with B. (Gemmulina) digitata, D’Orb.

194 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Fig. 32, Strophoconus ovum, and figs. 33 & 34, St. spicula,

are small coarse-shelled Virguline Schreibersii. Figs. 35 & 36,

Pyrulina ovulum, =Polymorphina lactea. Fig. 37, Pleurites

turgens, probably Virgulina Hemprichit, but doubtful; it may

possibly be a Polymorphina. Figs. 38-53 represent different

ages, stages, and conditions of G'lobigerina cretacea (fig. 38,

lotalia perforata; fig. 39, R. quaterna ; figs. 40, 41, 43, ft. glo-

bulosa; fig. 42, f. laxa; fig. 44, Reaspera; fig. 45, 49, R.

leptospira; figs. 46, 47, Lt. senaria; fig, 48, Lt. glomerata;

figs. 50, 51, 2. wolgensis ; fig.52, Planulina incurvata, showing

the diagnostic aperture; and fig. 53, Pl. ocellata).

Vig. 54, Lenticulina? pachyderma, = Pulvinulina caracolla

(Rem.). Fig. 55, Planulina umbilicata (?), represents the

central chambers of a Planulina; compare fig. 60 for instance.

Fig. 56, Pl. porophena, and fig. 57, Pl. pardalis, are relatively

large specimens of probably Planulina ariminensis. Fig. 58,

Lenticulina discus, = Planorbulina Haidingerit, almost of the

typical form. Fig. 59, Planulina micromphala, fig. 60, PI.

ampliata, and fig. 61, Pl. ampla, are all probably Planuline

Eteine to the Pl. ariminensis type.

Fig. 62, Pl. turgida, seems to be a small Operculina. This

subgenus of Nwmmulina is rare in the Cretaceous strata, and

therefore the Russian specimen is of great interest. ‘Two

Operculine (one described and figured by Reuss as Amphi-

stegina Hlewriast, D’Orb., and the other as Op. eretacea) occur

in the Maestricht Chalk, ‘ Sitzungsber. Akad. Wien,’ vol. xliv.

pp. 308, 309, pl. i. figs. 10-12, and pl. ii. fig. 1, a,b. Another,

described and figured by Reuss as Amphistegina clypeolus

(Zeitschr. Deutsch. geol. Gesellch. vol. vil. pl. ix. fig. 9), was

found,in Upper Chalk of the same age as that of Maestricht,

at Mecklenburg. From the Lower Cretaceous formation in the

Haute-Marne, France, M. Cornuel has a somewhat doubtful

Operculina (Op. angularis), Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 2,

vol. ii. part 1, Mém. no. 3, pl. 2. figs. 20-22.

Coniostylis and Coccoliths are also figured on this plate.

The group of Foraminifera here represented belonged to a

fauna inhabiting a shallower part of the sea than that with the

western Chalk, probably from 50 to 100 fathoms in depth.

Species and notable Varieties from the Chalk of Volsk, Russia,

jigured by Ehrenberg.

1. Orbulina universa, D’ Ord.

2. Lagena emaciata, Liss.

3. —— stiligera (Lhr.).

4, Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Orb.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 195

5. Vaginulina marginata, D’ Orb.

6. Polymorphina lactea (W. & J.).

7. Bolivina dilatata, ss.

8. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Orb.

Schreibersu, Czjzek.

. —— Hemprichii (Ehr.)?

11. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Ord.

sagittula, Defr.

13. —— gibbosa, D’ Orb.

subangulata, D’ Orb.

globulosa, Lhr.

16. Bigenerina acanthopora (Lhr.).

17. Heterostomella tumens (Lhr.).

18. —-- aculeata (Zhr.).

19. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

20. Planorbulina Haidingeri (D’ Ord.).

21. Planulina ariminensis, D’ Orb.

22. Pulvinulina caracolla (emer).

23. Operculina turgida (Lhr.).

XVII. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Upper Missour?,

North America. (Monatsber. 1842, p. 187; Abhandl. 1841,

pp- 365, 398, 429, 433 [1843].)

In the ‘American Journal of Science and Arts,’ vol. xli.,

October 1841, pp. 400-402, the late Prof. J. W. Bailey gave

an account of some ‘‘ American Polythalamia from the Upper

Mississippi, and also from the Cretaceous Formation on the

Upper Missouri ;” and in vol. xlvi. p. 297, &c., the researches

of Ehrenberg in these Cretaceous Foraminifera of America are

treated of in connexion with a résumé of the results of his ex-

amination of large quantities of both North- and South-Ame-

rican Microzoic deposits, recent and fossil*. At page 307 a

woodcut outline of Textilaria missouriensis, Ehy., is inserted

ina footnote. Inthe Am. Journ. Se. vol. xlvii. (1845), p. 341,

Prof. Bailey gives a list of the American rocks in which

Foraminifera had been found, and from which specimens had

been sent to Dr. Ehrenberg.

Pl. xxxui. 1. figs.1, a, 6, Miliola? (Vaginulina?) bursa, are

obscure ; possibly Huglypha or Protocystis. Fig. 2, Nodosaria

vulgaris, two chambers of N. glabra, D’Orb. Fig. 3, Nod.

acus, is the early portion of an extremely attenuate and scarcely

segmented variety of N. ovicula. A similar specimen has been

figured by Prof. Bailey from the deep soundings off New Jersey

and Delaware (‘ Smithsonian Contrib.’ 1861, fig. 8). Fig. 4, a,

* Abhandlungen Akad. Berlin for 1841 (1843).

196 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

Textilaria americana (“ 1843, pp. 398, 429”), is a variety of

T. striata, with the outer margins of the younger and larger

chambers more or less produced and aculeate. Fig. 4b, 7.

striata, is the early portion of 7. americana, simply T. striata

with pores in the fine furrows*. Fig. 5, 7. missouriensis, 1s

T. gibbosa becoming laterally aculeate, as in fig. 4a, but

without strie. Fig. 6, 7. proroconus, is simply T. gibbosa

with bored holes. Fig. 7, 7. americana (?), young, is the same

as fig. 4b, with thicker shell. Fig. 8, 7. globulosa, is a small,

stout, oblong 7. gibbosa. Fig. 9, T. ewryconus, is a much

larger 7. gibbosa. Fig. 10, 7. gomphoconus, is a neat, narrow,

tapering 7. gibbosa. Fig. 11, Grammostomum americanum,

is Virgulina Schreibersii. Fig. 12, Gr. validum, is a small,

stout, squarish Textilaria of the gibbosa type. Figs. 138, 14,

Spiroplecta americana (“ Heterohelix, 1843, p. 429”), is the

same as 4a, excepting that the first segments have a spiral

growth. This variation is common in the Textilaride, and,

like analogous differences in growth, has been accepted as the

basis for subgeneric division.

Figs. 15, Phanerostomum porulosum, fig. 16, Ph. dilatatum,

figs. 17 & 18, Ph. lacerum, fig. 19, Ph. leve (small and round),

and fig. 20, Ph. quaternarium, are stages and conditions of

Globigerina hirsuta, D’Orb., a subdiscoidal variety of Gl. bul-

loides, which is extremely acerose, and has very wide septal

apertures. This is the Globigerina that abounds in the Red

Sea and Indian Ocean; it is often outspread and very prickly,

sometimes having its apertures closed over with the projecting

and interlacing needles. Fig. 21, Rotalia globulosa-protolepta, is

a small arrested or young Planorbulina vulgaris (Pl. globulosa).

Fig. 22, Phanerostomum hispidulum (small and roughish),

fig. 23, Ph. hexaleptum (small and smooth), fig. 24, Ph. asperum

(tuberculate), fig. 25, Ph. senarium (aculeate), fig. 26, Planu-

lina globigerina (large and tuberculate), fig. 27, Ptygostomum

senarium (small and aculeate), fig. 28, Pt. quinartum (small

and smooth), fig. 29, Phanerostomum hispidulum (small and

tuberculate), fig. 30, Ph. dilatatum (aculeate), and fig. 31, Ph.

hexacyclus (tuberculate) are also specimens of G'lobigerina

hirsuta, D’Orb., ‘ Foram. Canaries,’ pl. 11. figs. 4-6.

_ Fig. 32, Rotalia lenticulina, is possibly a Cristellaria ; or it

may be a Nonionina; but its scattered granules constitute a

doubtful character, and the position of the septal apertures is

not indicated. Other specimens referred to “ Rotalia lenticu-

lina,” in other plates, appear to be Planorbuline.

* Dr. J.G. Egger figures and describes a Miocene Tertilaria like this

from Lower Bavaria ; Tezt. striato-punctata, Kg. ‘ Neues Jahrb.’ 1857, pl.8.

figs. 27-29.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 197

Coccoliths are also given on this plate in fig. I. B.

This Chalk was probably formed in about 50 to 100

fathoms.

Species and noticeable Varieties from the Chalk of the ee

Missouri, figured by Ehrenberg.

. Nodosaria glabra, D’ Orb.

—— acus, Hhi

. Cristellaria ?

Virgulina Schreibersu, Czjzek.

. Textilaria gibbosa, D’ Orb.

missouriensis, “hr.

—— striata, hr.

(et Spiroplecta) americana, Lhr.

—— striato-punctata, Hgger.

. Globigerina hirsuta, D’ Orb.

. Planorbulina globulosa (Zhr.).

SO NI OUR OY NO

—

XVIII. Foraminifera from the Chalk of the Upper Missis-

sippt, North America. (Monatsb. 1842, p. 187; Abhandl.

1841, pp. 365, 433 [1843].)

In the ‘Americ. Journ. Sc.’ vol. xli. p. 400, the material

examined by Dr. Ehrenberg is described as “a light cream-

coloured marl from a Mission-station on the Upper Mississippi,

called there ‘ prairie chalk,’”” and some unnamed woodcut Ui

lines of the Foraminifera are given (p. 401), namely :—figs. 1

& 2, Textilaria gibbosa; fig. 3, Cr istellaria cultrata, with

narrow falcate chambers ; fic. 4, 4 small Planorbulina,

Pl. xxxu. U1. fig. 1, Miliola striata, = Lagena costata, Wil-

liamson. Fig. 2a, M. levis, =L. emaciata, Reuss. Fig. 2 3,

Ovulina clava, = L. clavata, ‘D’Orb. Fig. 3, Dentalina ameré.

cana, = D. Boueana, D’ Orb. Fig, 4, Nodosaria tumescens,

= N. ovicula, D’Orb. Figs. 5, N. vulgart zs, and 6, N. ampla,

= N. glabra, D’Orb. Fig. 7, Vaginulina calcipara, fig. 8,

V. crete, and fig. 9, V. subacuta, = V. leguminiformis (Batsch).

Fig. 10, ’ Planularia elongata, isa simple subcarinate Planula-

ria, or an elongate Marginuline Cristellaria cultrata, and is

known as Pl. crepidula (F. & M.).

Fig. 11, Textilaria striata, is a thick-shelled 7. striata.

Fig. 12, Tet. globulosa, is the common small form of T. gib-

bosa, and so is fig.13. Fig.14, 7. striata, is a rather narrow

T. striata, Fig. "15, Grammostomum amer icanwm, is Bolivina

dilatata, with a faintly reticulated surface. Fig. 16, Gr,

phyllodes, = Virgqulina squamosa._ Fig. 17, Gram. “invalidum,

is a small Textilaria of the agglutinans type. Fig. 18, Gr.

198 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

tessera, is an outspread, rhomboidal, Textilariform Virgulina

Hemprichii. Fig. 19, Gr. rhombotdale, = Bolivina dilatata.

Fig. 20, Pleurites? americanus, is a suboblong Textilariform

Virgulina Hemprichii. Fig. 21, Strophoconus spicula?, is a

young Virg. Schreibersii, with a mode of growth approaching

that of Bulimina ig sae

Fig. 22, Sagrina longirostris, is “ Loxostomum tumens,” the

smooth form of Heterostomella aculeata, not having grown gross

enough to produce exogenous shell-matter. Fig. 23, Proro-

porus obtusus, is Polymorphina compressa. Fig. 24, Pr. ob-

tusus?,is a Bigenerine Textilaria, near to Bigenerina acantho-

phora, pl. xxxi. figs. 30, 31,:and may pass as B. digitata.

Fig. 25, Spiroplecta americana (“ Heteroheliz, 1843, p. 429”),

is Text. gibbosa with a spiral commencement, but without the

ornament of figs. 13 & 14 on the upper portion of this plate.

Fig. 26, Spiroplecta rosula, is a straight-sided Textilaria of

the agglutinans type, but commencing its growth with a large

coil of chambers. This species lives in the Atlantic, and in

its sandy condition has of late years been named by us Tezt.

biformis*, and in the clear-shell state has received the name

of T. complera from Mr. H. B. Bradyt; but Ehrenberg’s

name has precedence.

Fig. 27, Dimorphina saxipara, is an interesting specimen

of Virgulina Schreibersii that has formed the latter part of its

shell in a uniserial manner, and has thus become Dimorphine ;

but the name “ Dimorphina” is limited to the Dimorphous

forms of Polymorphina. In Cassidulina, which is a very close

ally of Virgulina, we occasionally see evidences of weak and

rapid growth in one-sidedness and linear direction of the seg-

ments (Ehrenbergina). In accordance with the plan of no-

menclature among Foraminifera, the dimorphous varieties of

Buliminat, Virgulina, Bolivina, and Cassidulina require one

or more subgeneric appellations. We propose Bifarina for the

dimorphous Virgulina; and Bf. saxipara is the name with

which the interesting American specimen under notice will be

registered.

Fig. 28, Guttulina turrita, = Verneuilina pygmea (Egger).

Fig. 29, Frondicularia? strophoconus, is a small, smooth,

acute-ovate Glandulina levigata, looking flat by reason of its

transparency.

Fig. 30, Rotalia senaria, fig. 31, R. globulosa-protolepta, and

* Philos. Trans. 1862, vol. clv. p. 370, pl. 15. figs. 25, 24.

+ Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumberland and Durham, vol. i. part 1, 1865,

pl. 12. fig. 6, p. 101. é

- { Bulimina variabilis, )’Orb., may be said to be dimorphous in this

sense.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminiyera. 199

fic. 32, R. leptospira, are smooth, polished and apparently

poreless, and, with their numerous globose limbate chambers,

are readily identified as Pulvinulina canariensts (D’Orb.), ‘ Hist.

Nat. Canaries, Foram.,’ pl. 1. figs. 34-36. Fig. 33, Rotalia

caleipara, and fig. 34, Omphalophacus? tenellus, belong to a

somewhat prickly variety of Pulvinulina Menardii, D’Orb.

Fig. 35, Planulina nebulosa, is obscure; perhaps a Planorbu-

lina.

Fig. 36, Rotalia nonas (?), may be an umbonate and limbated

Cristellaria rotulata (?). Fig. 37, Cristellaria alta, is a young

Cristellaria cultrata. Fig. 38, Aspidospira saxtpara, is Pla-

nulina ariminensis with large scattered foramina. Fig. 39,

Robulina? denaria, seems to be an umbonate Cristellaria ro-

tulata. Fig. 40, Rotalia heptas, is probably the same as fig. 36.

Figs. 41, Planulina mississippica, 42, Phanerostomum asperum,

43, Planulina oligosticta, 44, Phan. globulosum (young), 45,

Rotalia globulosa-protolepta (young and smooth), and 46, Phan.

quaternarium (young and smooth), are subvarieties and con-

ditions of a large, outspread, tuberculated Globigerina of the

cretacea subtype; and not nearly so acerose, nor with such

patulous apertures, as the fossil Globigerina from the Upper

Missouri, figured in the upper part of this plate. Fig. 47, Ro-

bulina ocellus, is a young Cristellaria cultrata. Fig. 48, Pla-

nulina suboctonaria, is Planorbulina ammonoides.

Coccoliths also are indicated in the text.

The group indicates about 50 to 100 fathoms depth.

Species and noticeable Varieties from the Chalk of the Upper

Mississippi, figured by Ehrenberg.

. Lagena costata, Williamson.

emaciata, /ss.

clavata, D’ Orb.

. Glandulina levigata, D’ Orb.

. Dentalina Boueana, D’ Ord.

Nodosaria ovicula, D’ Ord.

glabra, D’ Ord.

. Vaginulina leguminiformis (Datsch).

. Planularia crepidula (Ff. & JZ).

. Cristellaria rotulata (Lamk.).

cultrata (Montf:).

. Polymorphina compressa, D’ Ord.

. Bolivina dilatata, 2ss.

americana, Hhr.

. Virgulina squamosa, D’ Ord.

Schreibersii, Cz., var.

free ped fed feed ped teed fed

DOPE WHE OODNAOP wre

200 Mr. A. G. Butler on the genus Thelyphonus.

17. Virgulina Hemprichii (Hhr.).

—— tessera (Hhr.).

americana (Hhr.).

20. Bifarina saxipara (Hhr.).

21. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Orb.

22. gibbosa, D’ Orb.

23. striata, Hhr.

24. globulosa, Ehr.

25. Spiroplecta americana, Hhr.

rosula, Hhr.

27. Bigenerina digitata, D’ Orb.

28. Heterostomella tumens (Hhr.).

29. Verneuilina pygmea (Hgger).

30. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

31. Planorbulina ammonoides (£fss.).

32. Planulina ariminensis (D’ Ord.).

(To be continued. }

Roy 4 Monograph of the Genus Thelyphonus.

By Arruur G. But er, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

[Plate XIII.]

THE first monograph of this genus was that by M. Lucas in

the ‘Magasin de Zoologie’ for 1835, in which six species

were recognized, five of them being then described for the

first time.

In 1843 Koch added five new forms in his ‘ Arachniden,’

since which time three others have been diagnosed, one of

them being probably the adult type of a previously described

species.

I have now to add eight more species, which, considering

that one of those described by M. Lucas is apparently a young

form of the 7. proscorpio of Latreille (hitherto confounded

with J. caudatus, Linn.), will bring the number of known

Thelyphont up to twenty-one.

In the present paper I have separated the species into three

sections according to the number of teeth on the second joint

of the cheliceres. This important character, which appears to

be very constant, has been much neglected in descriptions,

and still more so in figures of the various species; very little

attention has also been paid to the amount of rugosity, or the

hairiness of the cheliceres, legs, &c., though in the order Coleo-

ptera such characters are considered of the utmost importance,

as, indeed, they may be shown to be in the present order.

The species of Uhelyphonus in their general appearance

remind one strongly of the two genera Lucanus and Nepa.

” Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 201

Fam. Thelyphonide, Wood.

Genus THELYPHONUS, Latreille.

Section a. Species with five spines on upperside of second

Joint of cheliceres.

1. Thelyphonus giganteus.

Thelyphonus giganteus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 8

(1835); Koch, Arachn. x. p. 21, pls. 331, 352, figs. 767, 768 (1845).

Thelyphonus excubitor, Girard, Marcy’s Report of Expl. of Red River,

p. 265, fig. xvii. 1-4.

Hab. Mexico (Oaxaca). Obtained 1858, from M. Sallé.

B.M.

2. Thelyphonus mexicanus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 1.

Colour chocolate-brown.

Allied to T. giganteus, one third smaller; cephalothorax

narrower, more pointed in front and less rugose; abdomen

with the sides much more parallel; the stigmatiform spots

much better defined; the granular rugosities less distinct ; che-

liceres, excepting the second joint, more rugose and pilose, the

latter joint broader; the teeth above quite different in arrange-

ment, five in number, the first two and the fifth very short and

blunt, the fourth slightly longer, the third twice the length of

the fourth ; a space between the second and third; third joint

with external rugosities lengthened, rendering it distinctly

spinous; fourth joint more pilose; legs less rugose, more

pilose.

Length of cephalothorax and abdomen 1 inch 93 lines.

Hab. Mexico. B.M.

3. Thelyphonus brasilianus.

Thelyphonus brasilianus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 24, pl. 333. fig. 770 (1843).

Hab. Brazil. B.M.

4, Thelyphonus amazonicus, nu.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 2.

Seems allied to 7. spinimanus and T. antillanus, but may

be at once distinguished from both by its more cylindrical

abdomen, which has no marginal ridge as in those species.

Colours: cephalothorax above black, somewhat shining ;

abdomen dull black; cheliceres shining, pitchy, last joint

reddish; legs and caudal appendage reddish, varied with

greyish black ; entire central region below shining red.

Cephalothorax very slightly rugose, oblong, triangular in

front ; abdomen half as long again, subcylindrical ; stigmati-

form depressions ill-defined ; tail setose throughout its entire

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 16

202. = Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus.

length: cheliceres quite smooth; second joint with five short

teeth above, the second broad and prominent, the fifth very

minute; third joint with one short tooth on its inner margin

below ; fourth joint with inner edge of terminal spine and outer

edge of fixed finger of chele distinctly serrated; legs smooth.

Length 7} lines.

Hab. Santarem, Alter do Chao (Bates). B.M.

5. Thelyphonus antillanus. -

Thelyphonus antillanus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 29, pl. 334. fig. 773 (1843).

Theliphonus caudatus, Guérin (nec Linn.), Cuvier’s Régne Anim. Arach.

. 11, pl. 3. fig. 3 (1829-44),

Thelyphonus antillianus, Lucas, in Ramon de la Sagra’s Hist. de Vile de

Cuba, pl. 5. figs. 4, 4a (1857).

Hab. Haiti. B.M.

6. Thelyphonus rufimanus.

Thelyphonus rufimanus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 8.

fig. 1 (1835).

Adult. Thelyphonus assamensis, Stoliczka, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,

XXXviil. p. 205, pl. 19. fig. 1 (1869).

Hab. “Java” (Lucas); “Assam” (Stoliczhka); Silhet (Stains-

forth); “India,” from Mr. Argent. B.M.

Young specimens agree precisely with M. Lucas’s figure ;

but I doubt the occurrence of this species in Java. It seems

the commonest of all the Thelyphont.

7. Thelyphonus proscorpio.

Thelyphonus proscorpio, Latreille, Gen. Crust. & Ins. i. p.180.n.1; Koch,

Avachn, x. p. 26, pl. 833. fig. 771 (1843).

Thelyphonus caudatus, Lucas (nec Linneeus), Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de

Zool. pl. 9. fig. 1 (1835).

? Young. Thelyphonus angustus, Lucas, loc. cit. pl. 10. fig. 3 (1835).

Hab. Bengal, presented by Gen. Hardwicke. B.M.

8. Thelyphonus linganus.

Thelyphonus linganus, Koch, Arachn, x. p. 31, pl. 335. fig. 774 (1848).

Hab. “ Linga” (Koch); Borneo, from Mr. Stevens. B.M.

9. Thelyphonus australianus.

Thelyphonus australianus, Koch, Arachn. x. p. 33, pl. 335, fig. 775 (1848). -

Hab. Australasia, from Sir J. Liddell (Voy. Herald) ; Anei-

teum, New Hebrides, from Mr. Cuming. B.M.

10. Thelyphonus rufipes.

Thelyphonus rufipes, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 9. fig. 2

(1835); Koch, Arachn, x. p, 23, pl. 332. fig. 769 (1843),

Hab. ? BM.

Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 203

11. Thelyphonus manilanus.

Thelyphonus manilanus (sic), Koch, Arachn. x. p, 28, pl. 384, fig. 772

(1843).

Hab, Philippines. B.M.

12. Thelyphonus proboscideus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 3.

Colours: black above, with legs, tail, and apex of cephalo-

thorax chestnut-red; cheliceres shining chocolate-brown ;

below shining pitchy, with basal joint of cheliceres, legs, tail,

base and central region of abdomen more or less red.

Cephalothorax elongate, somewhat rugose, triangular in

front, where it culminates in a depressed, well-defined, red

tooth or spine; abdomen covered with minute granular rugo-

sities; the segments minutely serrated, the last segment before

the tail strongly excavated; stigmatiform depressions well

defined: cheliceres varying in length, slightly wrinkled trans-

versely ; basal joint termmating anteriorly in an enormous

spine, toothed internally at its base and pilose; second joint

with five teeth above, the first and second large, separated by

an interval from each other, the third, fourth, and fifth about

half the length of the others, situated upon the interior margin,

which is also somewhat pilose, interior surface bearing several

denticulate rugosities, inferior margin bearing two teeth;

third joint elongate, cylindrical, with one spine below; fourth

joint distinctly rugose, with a large blunt protuberance on its

lower surface ; terminal spine very prominent, blunt, somewhat

curved, and ending abruptly in a short conical tooth: chele

pilose, dentated internally, the fixed finger, which is very

short and spine-like, externally ; when closed with the terminal

spine of third joint they appear as a compact, quadrate, com-

pressed plate, terminating above in two diverging teeth: legs

and caudal appendage slightly rugose and pilose,

Length 1 inch.

Hab. Ceylon (£. L. Layard). B.M.

A very remarkable new species, and unlike any thing pre-

viously described in the genus.

Section b. Species with two spines on upper surface of second

joint of cheliceres.

13. Thelyphonus formosus, n.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 4.

Allied to 7. proboscideus ; colours the same; cephalothorax

without apical spine, otherwise very similar; cheliceres some-

what long, nearly smooth, sparsely but distinctly punctured ;

basal joint of ordinary type; second joint slightly wrinkled,

with only two minute teeth above, its ner surface somewhat

16%

204 Mr. A.G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus.

denticulate and pilose; third joint with one small tooth below ;

fourth joint with large, curved, terminal spine, terminating

above in a minute blunt fork, one tooth of which is bifid, and

below in a rounded protuberance; chele short and rounded,

fixed finger short and somewhat conical, serrate and pilose

externally ; moveable finger long, curved, pilose ; legs covered

with granular rugosities.

Length 11 lines.

Hab. Moulmein (Archdeacon Clerk). B.M.

Section c. Species with six spines on upperside of second joint

of cheliceres.

14. Thelyphonus pugnator, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 5.

Allied to T. manilanus and T. proboscideus. Form of

eephalothorax and abdomen as in the former; colours as in

the latter species ; cephalothorax less rugose thanin 7. mant-

lanus ; abdominal segments not serrated ; cheliceres very long,

nearly smooth, shining, clothed internally with long lake-red

hairs; basal joint with short blunt spine, terminating in a

small conical tooth; second joint with six small teeth above,

an interval between each of them, the first smallest, the third

largest; two minute teeth below; inner surface denticulate ;

third joint cylindrical, without tooth*; fourth joint rather

short, with very long terminal spine; chele long, flattened

externally ; the fixed finger broad, compressed, and strongly

curved, serrated internally; movable finger long, nearly

straight, bifid at its extremity, serrated on both edges, but

most coarsely externally; legs covered with granular rugo-

sities. :

Length 1 inch 5 lines.

Hab. Philippines. B.M.

The most remarkable of all the species of Thelyphonus.

, 4b: Thelyphonus spinimanus.

Thelyphonus spinimanus, Lucas, Monogr. in Guérin’s Mag. de Zool. pl. 10.

fig. 2 (1835).

Probably a New-World species.

16. Thelyphonus Stimpsonii.

Thelyphonus Stimpsonii, Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. p. 312 (1861).

Hab. “Japan” (Wood); Hongkong (J. Bowring, Esq.).

B.M.

_ * On the left-hand chelicere there isa minute tubercle, which probably

represents the missing tooth.

Mr. A. G. Butler on the Genus Thelyphonus. 205

In our example the first tooth on the inner edge of the

second joint (first jomt of Wood) is almost imperceptible; so

that there seem at first sight to be only four, instead of five

teeth.

; 17. Thelyphonus seticauda.

Thelyphonus seticauda, Doleschall, Natuurk. Tijdschr. voor Nederl. Indié,

xi. p. 404 (1857).

Hab. “ Amboina” (Doleschall); Ceram (Madame Ida

Pyeger). BM: ae

18. Thelyphonus lucanoides, sp.n. Pl. XIII. fig. 6.

Closely allied to 7. seticauda, but considerably larger and

darker ; the cephalothorax comparatively longer and narrower,

with the fork of the median depression terminating also much

further from its imferior edge ; the abdomen more cylindrical

and with less distinct marginal ridge; the cheliceres more

distinctly punctured.

_ Length 1 inch 1 line.

Hab. Corea (Arthur Adams, Esq.). Two specimens. B.M.

A local representative of T. seticauda.

19. Thelyphonus caudatus.

Phalangium caudatum, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. 1, ii. p. 1029, n. 8 (1766)

Sulzer, Gesch. Ins. pl. 29. fig. 11 (1776).

Tarantula caudata, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ii. p. 433. n. 2 (1798).

Hab. Madras (French rocks) (Mrs. Hamilton, Vigors’s coll.,

Mr. Jerdon) ; Bengal (Gen. Hardwicke) ; 'Tenasserim (J. C.

D. V. Packman) ; Ceylon (H. W. Janson). B.M.

A broad, well-marked form, having six teeth on second

joint of cheliceres and a very depressed abdomen ; it has been

confounded with two, if not three, other species.

20. Thelyphonus sinensis,n.sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 7.

Allied to T. caudatus, but larger and blacker; cephalothorax

comparatively longer; cheliceres duller and less rugose, second.

joint with all the teeth considerably longer, the third being

most prominent. ,

Length 1 inch 7 lines.

Hab, Hongkong, from J. C. Bowring, Esq. B.M.

Unquestionably 1a local form of 7. caudatus, but sufficiently

different to require a distinctive name.

21. Thelyphonus rufus, n. sp. Pl. XIII. fig. 8.

Allied to J. rufipes, but much larger and entirely of a

reddish-chestnut colour; the cheliceres much more coarsely

206 Dr, J. E. Gray on a new Propithecus and the Fossane.

punctured, and with the external edge very setose; terminal

segment of abdomen more transverse.

Length 1 inch 6 lines.

Hab. Locality unknown, B.M.

Looks, at first sight, like a red specimen of 7. sinensis; but

the sculpture, pilosity, and dentation of the cheliceres are quite

different.

XXIX.—WNotes on a new Propithecus and the Fossane from

Madagascar. By Dr. J. EK. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Tue British Museum has lately received a number of mam-

malia from Madagascar collected by Mr. Crossley. ‘The two

following are quite new to the Museum collection, and, I

believe, new to modern science,

1. Propithecus bicolor,

Black ; middle of back and loins white, with a central black

streak ; brownish on the margin.

Madagascar.

The white on the back is marked with a more or less di-

stinct, central, longitudinal black line, which is most distinct

and extends nearly to the rump in one of the specimens.

In the other specimen, that has not this line so distinctly

marked, the middle of the back is brownish. In both speci-

mens the hinder part of the thigh is rather brown; the tail is

slender, of an intense black, and about the length of the body.

The two specimens are very much alike in size and colour,

and very different from the other three species in the Museum.

They are very like Indris brevicaudatus ; but they have a di-

stinct tail, like the other Propithect.

2. I have no doubt that this is the animal described by

Buffon (Hist. Nat. xiii, p. 163, t. 21), received from M.

Poivre, who sent it to the Academy of Sciences in 1761, but

which of late has been unknown to naturalists. I was so

satisfied from the description and figure that it was separate

from the other known Viverre, that in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soe.’

for 1864 I established for it a genus of the name of Yossa; and

this is repeated in the ‘Catalogue of Carnivorous, Pachyder-

matous, and Edentate Mammalia in the British Museum ;’ but

various zoologists have decided that this was amistake. The

Museum has now received a male and a female and a skeleton

of an animal that I have no doubt is the Fossane; and it

proves to be a very distinct genus, having the soles of the

Dr. J. E. Gray on Ceratorhinus. 207

hind feet entirely hairy, like the Viverricola; but it differs

from that animal in having no lunate mark on the front of the

chest ; and the tail is only marked with a series of spots on

each side of the upper part, very unlike the distinct rings of

Viverricola. It ought to be arranged in the tribe Viverrina,

next to Viverricola, and not, as placed in the Catalogue, after

Genetta, in the tribe Genettina.

Fossa, Gray, P. Z. 8S. 1864, and Cat. Carn. Mam. Brit. Mus.

p: 02.

Head tapering. Throat pale, without any lunate bands.

Body elongate; back not crested. Legs moderate, equal.

Tail shorter than the body, grizzled, with a series of dark

spots on each side of the basal half, and very indistinct inter-

rupted dark rings on the hinder half; underside not ringed or

spotted. Soles of the hind feet entirely hairy, without any

naked streak, extending from the base of the toes to the heel.

1. Fossa Daubentonii, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 518; Cat. Carn.

Mam. B. M. p. 62.

Fossane, Bufton, Hist. Nat. xiii. p. 163, t. 21.

Viverra fossa, Schreb, Saugeth. t. 114 (from Buffon).

Hab. Madagascar. B.M. .

I will on a future occasion give a longer description, with

an account of the dentition and skeleton, of this long-lost and

much misunderstood beast.

Buffon and Daubenton described a specimen brought home

by M. Poivre in 1761, which was afterwards in the Museum

of the Jardin des Plantes. When I have been in Paris I

have searched for it two or three times without being able to

discover it; so that I fear the original specimen has been

lost; and I regard the rediscovery of the animal as quite as

important as the finding of a new species. Daubenton’s

description is very accurate. It is at once known from Viver-

ricola malaccensis and Grenetta, with which some zoologists

have confounded it, by having no lunate bands on the throat.

XXX.— On the double-horned Asiatic Rhinoceros (Cerato-

rhinus). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

THE Zoological Society has, within this last year, received

two specimens of the double-horned Asiatic rhinoceros (Cera-

torhinus). They are very unlike one another, and come from

different but neighbouring parts of South Asia, both being

females and nearly adult. ‘There is every reason to suppose

208 Dr. J. E. Gray on Ceratorhinus.

that they are distinct species. Both have been called the hairy

rhinoceros, or Rhinoceros sumatrensis. The one comes from

Chittagong, and the other from Malacca; and Mr. Blyth sup-

poses that the one inhabits the east coast of the Bay of Ben-

gal and the series of islands extending to Sumatra, and the

other the Malay peninsula and Tenasserim, separated in Bur-

mah by the Irrawaddy river.

The one from Chittagong is covered with soft hair, and the

ears are surrounded by a fringe of long hairs; I have no doubt

this is the double-horned rhinoceros of Sumatra, described by

W. Bellin the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ January 10, 1793.

Mr. Bell describes the “general colour as brownish-ash.

Underside of belly between the legs and folds of skin dirty

flesh-coloured. Ears small and pointed, lined on the edge with

short black hair. Upper lip pointed and hanging over the

under, Whole skin rough, and covered very thinly with

short black hair.”

The figure represents the ears fringed with longer hair, and

the tail covered with longer hair and reaching two thirds of

the distance to the hocks.

The following names have been applied to this species :—

The double-horned Rhinoceros of Suntatra, Bell. Phil. Trans. 1793, p. 8, t. 2

(animal), t.3 & 4 (skull); Home, Phil. Trans. 1821, p. 270, t. 21

(skeleton), and t. 22 (skull). i!

Rhinocéros bicorne de Sumatra, Cuvier, Oss. Foss. vol. ii. p. 27, t. 4, vol. iii.

p. 49, t. 7 & t. 8. f. 8 (skull, from Bell).

Rhinoceros sumatranus, Raffles, Linn. Trans. xiii. p. 268; Miiller, Verh.

t. 35 (old and young); Blyth, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 806, 1862, p.1; Journ.

Asiat. Soc. of Bengal, xxxi. 1869, p. 151, t. 3.

Rhinoceros sumatrensis, Cuv. R. A.; Blainv. Ostéogr. t. 2 (skull), t. 7

(teeth) ; Anderson, P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 129; Sclater, P. Z.S. 1872,

. 185.

Goioninns sumatranus, Gray, P. Z.S. 1867, p. 1021; Cat. B. M. p. 3138.

The Sumatran or Hairy Rhinoceros, Tegetmeier, ‘ Field,’ March 16, 1872.

The Sumatran Rhinoceros, P. U.S. ‘Nature,’ March 18, 1872, p. 427, f. 1.

Hairy Rhinocercs from Chittagong, Buckland, ‘ Land and Water,’ August

10, 1872.

Rhinoceros lasiotis, Sclater, fide Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ August

10, 1872.

Hab. Chittagong and Sumatra.

I cannot conceive how the idea originated of giving another

name to this species.

The length of the hairs on the margin of the ears appears to

vary in the different specimens; and those in the specimen in

the Zoological Gardens appear to be much longer than usual.

Thus Dr. Anderson states that in the adult males and females

from Burmah the margin of the ears is fringed with strong,

Mr. W.S. Kent on Tethya muricata. 209

erect, black hairs tipped with brown, almost an inch or rather

more in length; but in this individual the hairs are nearly 5

inches long (P. Z. 8. 1872, p. 130), so that the character from

which it has been named may be only an individual pecu-

liarity.

The species from Malacca has the hair on the body “ thick,

black, which stands erect like the hog-mane of a horse ;”” and

further on, Mr. Buckland says the hair is stiff like “hedgehog’s

bristles.”

The skin is “ very rough, the tail long and thin, and comes

nearly to the hocks.”

Hairy Rhinoceros from Malacca, Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ Aug. 10,

Rhinoceros sumatrensis, Sclater, fide Buckland, ‘Land and Water,’ Aug. 10,

1872.

Rhinoceros sumatranus from Tavoy, Blyth, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,

1862, t. 4. f. 1 & 2 (skull).

Rhinoceros sumatranus from Tenasserim, Blyth, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal,

1862, p. 156, t. 3.£.1,2,3,& 442 & 3.

Rhinoceros Cross, Gray, P. Z.S. 1854, p. 250, fig. (horns).

Hab. Malacca (Zool. Gard.) ; 'Tavoy, northern frontier of

Siam; Pegu (Theobald, B. M.).

I think, from Blyth’s figure of the skull from Tavoy, that

the name of Ceratorhinus Crossii should be attributed to this

species.

It is clearly not the Sumatran Ceratorhinus figured and

described by Bell, Miiller, and other zoologists, who would

not have overlooked the hedgehog-like bristles and long slender

tail.

XXXI.—WNote on Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, and Dor-

villia agariciformis, Kent. By W.SAvILLE KEnT, F.Z.5.,

_ F.R.M.S., Geological Department, British Museum.

In Part I. of the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for

this year, just issued, Dr. Bowerbank comments upon a sponge

described and figured by myself in the ‘Transactions of the

Royal Microscopical Society’ for 1870, under the name of

Dorvillia agaricrformis, referring it to his hitherto manuscript

species Tethya muricata. The singular mushroom-like form

which suggested the specific title attached to this sponge in

my description, Dr. Bowerbank thinks fit to regard as an

abnormal and imperfect condition, and summarily disposes of

it as a “ mutilated specimen ”’ of his own species, having “ the

upper portion evidently torn away from its basal one, causing

210 Mr. W.S. Kent on Tethya muricata

the part described to assume a form very much like that of an

Agaric.” Referrmg next to the types of spicula figured in

my plate, Dr. Bowerbank assumes that I have “fallen into

the error of describing some of those organs (?) that do not

belong to the species under consideration,” and enumerates in

consecutive order such ones as he condemns as being derived

from extraneous sources.

Dr. Bowerbank’s foregoing adverse criticisms being rather

calculated to mislead those interested in the structure of the

Spongiade, I feel it incumbent upon myself to reply briefly

to them. ;

In the first place I must express the most unqualified dissent

from Dr. Bowerbank’s proposition that the specimen from which

my description was derived is a “mutilated” one: another

example, accompanying the individual figured, furnished the

same characters; and the same may be said of a fine series

obtained by Dr. Carpenter and Professor Wyville Thomson

during their earlier dredging expeditions to the North Atlantic

in H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine.’ The last-named gentleman, singu-

larly enough, independently adopted the same specific title of

agariciformis for this remarkable sponge, in reference to its

striking contour, while at the same time he further generically

distinguished it by the title of T%s¢phonia.

Had Dr. Bowerbank referred to his last year’s volume of the

‘Annals,’ he would have discovered that in the January

number I contribute additional remarks on this same sponge,

discarding those spicula of the hexaradiate type objected to by

himself as having been derived from contact with other species,

and correlate it with the true Tethyade. The question now

remains whether the form is identical with Dr. Bowerbank’s

Tethya muricata, or whether it must rank as distinct a species.

In the former case Dr. Bowerbank’s specific title will have to

be expunged, as, until this last issue of the Zoological Society’s

‘Proceedings,’ no recognizable diagnosis of Tethya muricata

has been published. One or two of the spicula have been

figured by its author in his “ Physiology of the Spongiade ”

in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for 1858 and 1862, and

in his ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiade,’ published by

the Ray Society, these being in both places referred to Tethya

muricata of his own MS.; so vague a reference, however, is

totally inadequate for the purpose of establishing it as a species.

On the other hand, the evidence in favour of its being a well-

established deep-sea form, closely allied to, but possessing

constant characters of specific value distinct from Dr. Bower-

bank’s 7. muricata is of the most satisfactory description.

Both Professor Wyville Thomson’s specimens and my own

and Dorvillia agariciformis. 211

show in common the characteristic agaricine contour, and

vary from all hitherto described Tethyade in the possession

of the dependent fascicles of long anchoring spicula by means

of which it rests secure on the treacherous surface of the

yielding ooze which constitutes its habitat. Dr. Bowerbank

has thought fit to assume that these dependent fascicles are

“‘ skeleton-fasciculi of the sponge drawn out of the basal por-

tion”’ at the time of his supposed mutilation, an error of

judgment only explicable by his over-anxiety to identify the

species with his own. On equally slender grounds, because

he cannot find them in his own example, he considers himself

justified in condemning as “ extraneous ”’ in mine certain very

characteristic three- and four-rayed tension-spicula of the sar-

code, figured and alluded to in my description (M. M. J. 1870,

pl. Ixvi. figs. 16-18 and p. 294). Since perusing his comments

I have reexamined carefully mounted sections of the sponge,

and am perfectly satisfied as to the correctness of referrmg

these spicula to the position already indicated, which again

constitutes valuable evidence in support of its being a species

perfectly distinct from Dr. Bowerbank’s. - It is also most

satisfactory to remark that Prof. Wyville Thonison has de-

tected these same types of spicula in his specimens and figured

them in his unpublished plates, which have again been repro-

duced in Dr. Oscar Schmidt’s ‘ Spongienfauna des atlantischen

Gebietes,’ where they may be readily recognized at pl. vi.

fig. 12. The anchoring filaments in Prof. Thomson’s speci-

mens exceed mine in length and abundance.

The nomenclature of this sponge, which has proved itself

a very “apple of discord” among spongologists of the day,

will now admit of definite solution. Allowing, with Oscar

Schmidt, that the character of the dependent anchoring fila-

ments, in which it differs from all Tethy@ hitherto described, con-

stitutes a modification and adaptation to its natural habitat,

scarcely justifying its being promoted to the rank of a distinct

genus, the generic title of Zethya is still retained, with the

specific one of agariciformis already bestowed upon it by Pro-

fessor Wyville Thomson and myself, the following being

offered as a brief summary of its technical characters already

more comprehensively treated of in the two journals here

quoted.

Tethya agariciformis, Kent.

Dorvillia agariciformis, Kent, Monthly Microscopical Journal, December

_ 1870, p. 293, pl. Ixvi. (excepting figs. 10-12, 14, 15, & 19); Ann. & Mag,

Nat. Hist. Jan. 1871, vol. vii. ser. 4. p. 37.

Tisiphonia agariciformis, Wyville Thomson, MS. Porcupine Exp. 1870.

Stellata agariciformis, Oscar Schmidt, Spongienfauna des atlantischen

Gebietes, p. 68, pl. vi. fig. 12, 1870.

212 = Prof. O. C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

Wyvillethomsonia Wallichii (?), Perceval Wright, Quarterly Journal of

Microscopical Science, p. 8, pl. ii. 1870*.

Not Tethya muricata, Bowerbank, Proc. Zool. Soc. p. 117, 1872.

Sponge subconical, agariciform, having an expanded upper.

portion or hood, at or around the summit of which are

located the exhalent apertures or oscula, and a lower or

basal portion bearing numerous fasciculi of attenuate ace-

rate and anchorate spicula, the two regions being distinctly

marked off from one another by the overlapping of the hood.

Spicula of the skeleton large, fusiformi-acerate, expando-

ternate, recurvato-ternate, and bifurcate expando-ternate 5

spicula of the sarcode abundant, minute attenuato-stellate,

with occasional larger triradiate and quadriradiate types.

Hab. Atlantic, dredged at a depth of 500 fathoms and upwards.

XXXII.—Description of Hesperornis regalis, with notices of

four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. By Professor

O. C. Marsuf.

THE few remains of birds hitherto described from the Creta-

ceous deposits of this country, although of much interest, all

pertained to comparatively small species, and belonged, appa-

rently, to families still existing}. It is fortunate, therefore,

that the existence of a fossil bird so large and remarkable as

the one that forms the subject of the present description should

first be made known by the discovery of such important parts

of a skeleton as to afford ample material for the determination

of its affinities. This interesting discovery has already been

announced in this Journal, and the name Hesperornis regalis

proposed by the writer for the species thus represented§. The

present paper is preliminary to a full description, with illustra~

tions, now in course of preparation. The other species briefly

described in this article are likewise of interest, as they add

some new forms to the limited avian fauna heretofore found in

the Cretaceous beds of the Atlantic coast.

Hesperornis regalis, gen. et sp. nov.

The remains of this species at present known consist of por-

tions of one skeleton, including the nearly entire posterior

limbs, from the femur to the terminal phalanges, parts of the

* Possibly the embryonic condition of Tethya agariciformis.

_ + From the ‘American Journal of Science and Arts,’ n. s. vol. iii. May,

1872.

} Ibid. vol. xlix. p. 205, March 1870.

§ Ibid. n. s. vol. iii. p. 56, January 1872; Ann. & Mag, Nat. Hist. April

1872, p. 526.

four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 213

pelvis, several cervical and caudal vertebre, and numerous

ribs, all in excellent preservation. Fragments of four other

individuals were also found by the writer, which agree essen-

tially with the corresponding parts of the more perfect skeleton.

An examination of these various remains soon makes it

evident that they represent a gigantic swimming bird, having

its nearest living allies probably in the Colymbide, but difter-

ing widely in many respects from that group, and from all

other known birds, recent and extinct.

The femur is unusually short and stout, much flattened

antero-posteriorly, and the shaft curved forward. It some-

what resembles in form the femur of Colymbus torquatus,

Briinn., but the great trochanter is proportionally much less

developed in a fore-and-aft direction, and the shaft is much

more flattened. The tibia, or tébia-tarsus, is straight and

elongated. Its proximal end has a moderately developed

cnemial process, with an obtuse apex. The epicnemial ridge

is prominent, and continued distally about one half the length

of the shaft. The distal end of the tibia has on its anterior

face no ossified supratendinal bridge, differing in this respect

from all known aquatic birds. The fibula is well developed,

and resembles that of the Divers.

The tarso-metatarsal bone is much compressed transversely,

and resembles in its main features that of Colymbus. On its

anterior face there is a deep groove between the third and

fourth metatarsal elements, bounded on its outer margin by a

prominent rounded ridge, which expands distally into the free

articular end of the fourth metatarsal. This extremity projects

far beyond the other two, and is double the size of either, thus

showing a marked difference from any known recent or fossil

birds. There is a shallow groove, also, between the second

and third metatarsals, which, taken in connexion with the

deeper one, made the specimen appear, while still in the rock,

as if its main elements were separate. The second metatarsal

is much shorter than the third or fourth ; and its trochlear end

resembles in shape and size that of the former. The ex-

istence of a hallux is indicated by an elongated oval in-

dentation on the inner margin above the articular face of the

second metatarsal. The free extremities of the metatarsals

have the same oblique arrangement as in the Colymbide, to

facilitate the forward stroke of the foot through the water.

There are no canals, or even grooves, for tendons on the

posterior face of the proximal end, as in the Divers and most

other birds ; but below this there is a broad shallow depression

extending rather more than halfway to the distal extremity.

The phalanges of the large external toe are very peculiar,

214 ~— Prof. O. C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

although an approach to the same structure is seen in the

genus Podiceps. On the outer inferior margin they are all

deeply excavated. ‘The first, second, and third have, at their

distal ends, a single oblique articular face on the inner half

of the extremity; and the outer portion is produced into an

elongated obtuse process, which fits into a corresponding

cavity in the adjoming phalanx. This peculiar articulation

prevents flexion except in one direction, and greatly increases

the strength of the joints. The terminal phalanx of this toe

was much compressed. The third or middle toe was greatly

inferior to the fourth in size, and had slender compressed

phalanges, which correspond essentially in their main features

with those of modern Divers. The phalanges of the first and

second toes of the present specimen are wanting.

Portions of the pelvis, found with the posterior limbs in

three of the specimens, indicate that the ilia were separated

from each other, and not very firmly ossified to the sacral

vertebree. The acetabulum was covered with a thick cushion

of cartilage, as in Apteryx; and at its upper margin the

anterior and posterior extensions of the ilia, if both existed,

were disconnected, or unossified at their union.

The cervical and caudal vertebrae preserved present no fea-

tures deserving of special mention in this preliminary notice.

The latter are numerous, but apparently not much in excess

of those in some modern birds. Unfortunately, no portions

of the skull were recovered. The femur and tibia have very

thick compact walls, but appear to have been more or less

pneumatic. ‘The tarso-metatarsals and the phalanges were

nearly or quite solid.

millims.

Monethtol tight femurs. al Sileples v letd anew sls Mice elauiee 98

Transverse diameter of proximal end ................ 53

Diameter ofanticular Wead.y, © oi iahssen whe 1514 Gon) wee 18°5

Transverse diameter of shaft at middle .............. 22

Anteno=pasterior GIgMeper so .celeral pierces nia\e! ore meee 19-2

Transverse diameter of distal end ............+5005. 53°5

Mene tot ciSht tia puesto ie eile ies sun's nips ape taereeeys 316

Transverse diameter of proximal articulation.......... 38

Ikenioth of chenilal NrOtens gcse ta sua 50 (eke te eeorere 22

Transverse diameter of shaft at middle .............. 29

Transverse diameter of distalend .................. 32

Antero-posterior extent of outer condyle ............ 32

Antero-posterior extent of inner condyle ............ 22

Length of right tarso-metatarsal..................6. 137

Length to distal end of third metatarsal.............. 130

Length to distal end of second metatarsal ............ 116

Transverse diameter of proximal articulation.......... 36

- four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 215

millims

Least transverse diameter of shaft .............20005 a3)

Transverse diameter of distal end of fourth metatarsal... 16

Transverse diameter of third. metatarsal .............. ~ 85

Transverse diameter of second metatarsal ............ 8

Length of proximal phalanx of fourth toe ............ 45

Bone oe secand phalanx 5 655. 200,320 ls este oe 39-5

Hesoaneet third phalanx 72. oats. eka ee ce es ee eee 40

Length of proximal phalanx of third toe ............ 41

The various remains of the present species already dis-

covered belonged to five individuals, which differed but little

in size or in any important particular. ‘Taking the great

Northern Diver (Colymbus torquatus, Briinn.) as a standard of

comparison for the portions that are wanting, the skeleton of

Hesperornis regalis would measure about 5 feet 9 inches

from the apex of the bill to the extremities of the toes.

The affinities of Hesperornis have already been mentioned.

The characters given in the above description show plainly

that, although a comprehensive type, it belongs to the Palmi-

pedes ; and while most nearly allied to the Colymbide, it still

differs so widely from that group in the structure of the pelvis

and posterior limbs as to demand a place in at least a separate

family, which may be called Hesperornide.

All the remains of the species now known were found by

the writer, last summer, in the grey shale of the upper Cre-

taceous, near the Smoky-Hill River, in Western Kansas.

Graculavus velox, gen. et sp. nov.

Among the vertebrate remains in the Yale Museum, from

the Cretaceous greensand of New Jersey, are fragments of the

skeletons of two aquatic birds, which apparently belong to

the same genus, although to quite distinct species. Both of

these differ essentially from all recent birds, but are evi-

dently most nearly allied to the Cormorants. The largest

ot these birds, to which the above specific name may be given,

is mainly represented, at present, by the proximal half of a

left humerus, in perfect preservation, and hence a very cha-

racteristic specimen. In its general features this humerus

resembles that of the Common Cormorant (Graculus carbo,

Linn.), although indicating a somewhat smaller species.

The articular head is much more compressed transversely, its

apex is more prominent, and its anconal margin is strongly

deflected. The median ridge on the anconal side, below the

head, is rounded instead of angular, and the ulnar crest is

much less produced distally.

216 ~=—Prof.O.C. Marsh on Hesperornis regalis and

millims

Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus........ 23°75

Vertical diameter of articular head ................ 13

Hiramsyerse diameter aeseiisalatsls tes oie aie sse si brat Oates 6

Proximal extension of head beyond ulnar crest ...... 4:6

Least diameter of shaft below proximal extremity .... 6

The specimens on which this species is based were found by

John G. Meirs, Esq., at Hornerstown, New Jersey, in the

greensand of the upper Cretaceous, and by him presented to

the museum of Yale College.

Graculavus pumilus, sp. nov.

The present species, which is hardly more than one third

the size of the preceding, is likewise represented by the

proximal end of a humerus, as well as by some other cha-

racteristic remains. The articular head in this specimen is

equally compressed, and shows the same prominent apex, but

is without the anconal deflection which distinguishes the

larger species. The lower half of the head is narrower trans-

versely, and separated from the internal trochanter by a wider

notch. The median ridge, moreover, on the anconal face is

much more acute.

millims

Greatest diameter of proximal end of humerus........ 13°25

Vertical diameter of articular head ................ 8

remisyersesdrameber sid) 4} 08h. Jl APE R A RNAs 4

Least diameter of shaft below proximal end.......... 31

Greatest diameter of metacarpal at distal end ........ 55

JUGUAS RG DEHnYc1 21 OBOE EMBL ent TE mae RAY oR EUSP ra aT 3°75

The known remains of this species are from the same locality

and geological horizon as the preceding, and were also dis-

covered by John G. Meirs, Esq.

Graculavus anceps, sp. nov.

The only fossil bird-remain secured during the explorations

of the Yale-College party of 1870 in the Cretaceous beds of

Kansas, although special search for them was made, was the

distal extremity of a left metacarpal, which is so well preserved

and so characteristic a part of the skeleton, that it indicates

with considerable certainty the affinities of the bird to which

it belonged. A careful comparison of this specimen with the

corresponding bone in recent birds has made it apparent that

the species was a near ally of the Cormorants; and it may

therefore be referred provisionally to the genus G'raculavus,

until further discoveries determine its position more accurately.

The specimen implies a species about the size of the Violet-

four other new Species of Cretaceous Birds. 217

green Cormorant (Graculavus violaceus, Gray), of the Pacific

coast, and one somewhat larger than Graculavus velox, de-

scribed above. From the metacarpal of the former it differs

essentially in having the articular face for the external digit

broader and nearly flat, the face for the small inner digit con-

siderably smaller and oval in outline, and the intervening

tubercle much more prominent.

millims,

Greatest diameter of distal end. ..,... <0 tie eee em enee ee 6°75

MeastsGiaMeLen OL CISbAl GIG: ois c/aidiasislepa sfole ode oes 45

Transverse diameter of outer articular face .......... 5

VIET ELCA AA PATNE ECT: \, iad sytare alas enw radars aus Pit there te ace

This specimen was found by the writer in the grey Upper

Cretaceous shale, on the north fork of the Smoky-Hill

River, in Western Kansas.

Paleotringa vagans, sp. nov.

The existence of a new Wading-bird in the Cretaceous

greensand of New Jersey is plainly shown by an interesting

fossil recently presented to the Yale Museum. ‘The specimen

is the greater portion of the shaft and distal end of a left tibia,

somewhat injured, but with its more characteristic portions

still preserved. It indicates a bird somewhat smaller than

Paleotringa littoralis, described by the writer from the same

locality*, but is probably a closely allied form. From the

tibia of that species, the present specimen may readily be di-

stinguished by the proportionally more narrow and shallow

tendinal canal, on the anterior face of the distal end, and by

the more depressed supratendinal bridge. The trochlear sur-

face also, on the posterior side, contracts more rapidly, and at

\e epeiee margin passes directly, and not abruptly, into the

shait.

millims.

Length of portion preserved ..... SAR eae ss anh teat Ane 62

Approximate width of condyles in front ............ 8

Wi reloteou bridweratccertice t...) Sian oS gta ec 4 Neo cbabesns 2:15

Transverse diameter of lower outlet ...............- 15

Transverse diameter of shaft where broken .......... 5

AmMbero—posterlor OcaMeter . 4) sices'sl « ofs-ef lie! esq wenn es 4

This unique specimen was discovered at Hornerstown, New

Jersey, about ten feet below the surface of the marl, and was

presented to the Yale Museum by John G. Meirs, Esq.

Yale College, Newhaven, April 10th, 1872.

* Silliman’s Journal, vol. xlix. p. 208, March 1870.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 17

218 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Genera Manouria and Scapia.

~ XXXITII.—On the Genera Manouria and Scapia.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Dr. ANDERSON, in the just published part of the ‘ Proceedings

of the Zoological Society’ for 1872, has written a paper

to prove that Testudo Phayret, the type of the genus Scapia,

and Testudo emys, the type of the genus Manouria, are

only varieties or sexes of the same species, and has illustrated

it with eight figures of the sternum of different specimens (pp.

134 to 137)—five belonging to Scapia, and the other three to

Manouria. There is a slight modification in the form of the

pectoral plates in the different specimens; but I do not think

that, either in the plates or text, he proves the identity of

the two genera, which doubtless are allied, and which, in the

‘Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ I have

placed together in the same group of land-tortoises. And I

do not think that he has proved his case, as it would be very

unlike all that was previously known of the form of the pec-

toral shields in ‘Tortoises.

Because the three specimens of Manourta which Dr. An-

derson examined have the sternum concave, and his five

specimens of Testudo Phayret have it flat, he concluded that

the former were the male and the latter the female of the same

species, which he calls Testwdo emys; and he gives a number

of names as its synonyms, without defining which of them

belong to the male and which to the female. I think if he

had done so he would have avoided that mistake.

1. Testudo emys, described by Miiller and Schlegel in Ver-

hand. Nat. Gesch. Nederl. Ind. Rept. 1839, xliv. pp. 30, 34,

tab. 4, the type of the species of M/anouria, has a flat sternum,

and is, according to Dr. Anderson’s theory, a female.

2. The specimens in the British Museum, which are described

and figured under the name of Manouria fusca (Shield Rept.

p- 16. pl. 3), being the types of that species, also the specimen

said to have come from Australia with the animal figured in

the Proc. Zool. Soc. 1860, p. 395, t. 81. have a flat sternum, and

are, for the same reason, females according to Dr. Anderson.

3. Leconte, who describes the species under the name of

Teleopus luxatus (Philad. Proc. 1854, p. 187), does not men-

tion the form of the sternum, which, I think, he most likely

would have done if it had been concave.

I think we may therefore conclude that the two sexes of

Manouria are known, that the specimens described by Schlegel,

myself, and Leconte were females, and that those examined

and figured by Dr. Anderson were males, according to his

theory, and therefore both sexes of this genus are known,

Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier. 219

Unfortunately I do not know of any specimens of Testudo

Phayret (the type of Scapia) being in Europe, and IT have

never had the opportunity of examining any; but as it appears

that all the specimens that have been examined have a flat ster-

num, probably this species has the sternum flat in both sexes,

as is the case in many land-tortoises, and the concavity of the

sternum in males of Manowria would be a peculiarity of that

genus.

Until the skull on which Scapia was founded was deter-

mined to be the skull of Testudo Phayre?, it was not known

that the animal was so like that of Manowria; but since that

time the two genera have been arranged in a special section

(see Appendix to Catal. Shield Reptiles, 1872, p. 7). The

animals of both resemble that of Testudo sulcata of Africa in

form and in the scales on the legs and thighs; but that has

only a single caudal plate and a shorter head.

XXXIV.—On Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Trionyx hurum,

B.H. and Dr. Gray. By Dr. ANDERSON, Calcutta.

Dr. Gray’s characteristic reply* to my stricturest on his

understanding of the two species of Gangetic mud-tortoises

seems to indicate that his present knowledge of these species,

instead of being an advance on his ‘ Synopsis Reptilium,’ is a

relapse into confusion and unreliability. It is not surprising,

therefore, that Dr. Gray and his friend conjointly were unable

to follow the drift of my remarks. But, although I may not

carry conviction to Dr. Gray’s mind, I hope to be able, in the

the following observations, to prove satisfactorily to unpre-

judiced minds that the skull figured by Cuvier under the

name of Trionya gangeticus, and referred by Dr. Gray to the

Trionyx hurum} of Buchanan Hamilton, described at p. 47

in the ‘ Synopsis Reptilium,’ redescribed in the ‘ Catalogue of

Shield Reptiles,’ p. 66, under the name of Zrionya gangeticus,

Cuvier, and again brought forward under the same name at

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. no. 54, p. 478. + Ibid. no. 53, p. 382.

} Dr. Gray, in his ‘Synopsis Reptilium,’ under the name of 7. hawn,

announces the brilliant discovery that “ Cuvier’s specimen appears to

have a peculiarity, in the web between the second and third fingers of

each foot being pierced with a hole;” and he further observes that these

remarkable solutions of continuity “are not noticed in any of Dr. Hamil-

ton’s or General Hardwicke’s figures from living animals.” These holes,

which evidently suggest to Dr. Gray’s mind a wide and interesting field

for further research, are made by the fishermen, who pass a cord through

them and tie the feet together to prevent the animals escaping !

220 Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier.

p- 97 in the Supplement to the latter work, is not the skull

of that species.

The confusion that exists in Dr. Gray’s Catalogues regarding

the foregoing species (7. hurwm) and his so-called Trionyx

javanicus, Schweigger, MS., ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology,’

(7. javanicus, Geott.) ‘Synopsis Reptilium,’ p. 48, and ‘ Cat.

Shield Rept.’ p. 67, and Potamochelys stellata, Geott., ‘ Suppl.

Cat. Shield Rept.’ p. 104, is alone explicable on the justifiable

supposition that Dr. Gray is more anxious to catalogue the

specimens under his charge than to work out their natural

affinities by a careful consideration of the characters of the

materials at his disposal. It would be well if Dr. Gray would

carefully ponder the admirable advice which was so ably ten-

dered to him by M. Brunner de Wattenwyl*, and remember

that “les especes sont des entités de la nature dont l’observa-

tion est du domaine de la philosophie.”

The pernicious practice of creating new genera on characters

derived exclusively from single skulls or from drawings of

skulls without any knowledge whatever of the animals that

yielded them, has resulted in this, that we find animals de-

seribed by Dr. Gray in his Catalogues with their skulls and

tails allocated in widely apart genera. ‘The confused maze of

synonyms which this practice has elaborated can be better

imagined than described.

The facts connected with the two Gangetic mud-tortoises

are these :—Dr. Gray’s figure in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian

Zoology,’ bearing the name Trionyx javanicus, Schweigger,

MS., represents the most prevalent species. Its skull is iden-

tical with the skull figured by Dr. Gray at pl. xli. fig. 1 of

his ‘ Catalogue of Shield Reptiles,’ and which is there correctly

named Trionyx gangeticus. ‘This skull, however, is referred

by Dr. Gray to the other species of Gangetic mud-tortoises,

which was originally described by him in his ‘ Synopsis Rep-

tilium,’ p. 47, under the name 7rionyx hurum, but which in

his ‘Suppl. to the Cat. of Shield Rept.’ p. 97, is reproduced

as 7. gangeticus, Cuvier. This species (7. hurum), however,

does not yield a skull like the skull figured by Cuvier as 7.

gangeticus ; but if Dr. Gray will turn to pl. xhu. fig. 2 of his

‘Cat. of Shield Rept.’ he will find a skull figured, but without

-a name, which is very closely allied to the skull of 7. hurwm.

The differences that exist between the skulls there figured in-

dicate those that exist between Trionyx gangeticus and Trionyx

hurum. But, although it is impossible to separate generically

the skulls figured on that plate, Dir. Gray makes the unguarded

statement that the two mud-tortoises of the Ganges, in question,

* Rey, et Mag. de Zoologie, Mars 1870.

Dr. Anderson on Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, 221

belong to two genera. It should be borne in mind, however,

that Dr. Gray “has no practical acquaintance with the skull

of his 7. javanicus, Geoff., which is the last name but one

which he has adopted for the Testudo gotaghol of Buchanan

Hamilton, and which he named in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian

Loology’ Trionyx Jjavanicus, Schweigger, although he now

states that Schweigger ‘‘never uses such a name.” In the

; Synopsis Reptilium,’ p- 48, and in the ‘ Catalogue of Shield

Reptiles,’ p- 67, the same species appears under the name 7’

javanicus, Geoff. ; but Dr. Gray’s knowledge of the species

had apparently undergone a change in the interval between

the publication of the Catalog ue and its Supplement, because

in the latter (p. 104) the species is brought on the stage as

Potamochelys stellata, Geoft.

Dr. Gray remarks of the skull of Emyda punctata (Suppl.

Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 117) that it is very like that of Potamochelys.

I have before mea skull which I removed with my own hands

from an adult specimen of the common yellow-spotted Hinz yaa

of the Ganges. This skull, although it is hee er than Dr. Gray’s

figure of Potamochelys stellata, Geoff, I am prepared to prove

is generically identical with the skull which that figure repre-

sents; in other words, Dr. Gray’s figure of the skull of Pota-

mochelys stellata, Geoff., is the skull of an Hmyda closely

allied to Hmyda punctata.

It is to be desired that Dr. Gray should state whence he

obtained the figure of the skull of his so-called Potamochelys

stellata, Geoff., because in writing of the species he distinctly

states, “I have not been able to examine any skulls of it.”

Has Dr. Gray copied the skull from Prof. Wagler’s figure

without any acknowledgment, and without. any grounds that

justified him in referring the skull of an L’myda to the body of

a true Trionyx, the skull of which had been already figured

and described by Cuvier as Trionyx gangeticus ?

The foregoing insight into the character of the ‘ Supplement

to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles in the Collection of the

British Museum’ is unfortunately not an isolated instance of

the many inaccuracies which distinguish it. Only a very

short time ago I pointed out that Dr. Gray’s genera Manouria

and Scapia refer to one animal, the shell constituting the former

and the skull the latter eens, the two genera being the

equivalent of the genus Zestudo*! The correctness of what

* A paper of mine appeared in this Journal, vol. viii. p. 524 (1871),

under the misnomer, ‘ On Testudo Phayrei, Theob. and Dr. Gray,” whereas

it should have been “On Trionyv Phayrei” &e. The whole internal

evidence of the paper proved the absurdity of the title, which I believe

was drawn out by the editors of the ‘Annals.’ [Whatever Dr, Anderson

222 Royal Society :—

I then stated has been allowed by Dr. Gray, as he has returned.

the skull of Scapia Falconer? to this museum on the strength

of my representation,

Before concluding, I may observe that I have never asked

Dr. Gray, on any occasion, for his opinion of Dr. Fleming, and

that I never had the privilege, while a student, to be a regular

member of Dr, Fleming’s class ; and under these circumstances

I object to Dr. Gray’s Chelonian method being applied to me.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES,

ROYAL SOCIETY.

May 30, 1872.—George Biddell Airy, C.B., President,

in the Chair.

**On the Structure and Development of the Skull of the Salmon

(Salmo salar, L.)”’* By Wiiitam Kircuen Parker, F.R.S.

A few years ago Mr. Waterhouse Hawkins put into my hands

some newly hatched salmon and also three of the first summer.

Seeing their fitness for embryological research and the interest attach-

ing to the formation of an osseous fish, I applied to my friends

Messrs. Frank Buckland and Henry Lee, and these gentlemen most

liberaily supplied me with alarge number of unhatched embryos and

of the “fry” of this large fish.

My last subject, the frog, being fairly out of hand, I set myself

last summer to this newer and more easy task,—more easy by far ;

for the translucency of the young salmon contrasts most favourably

with the obscurity of the embryo frog.

I found that the two types at the time of hatching did not start

fairly, but that the salmon had hastened to finish its fourth stage

before emerging from the egg; this, however, is partly in conse-

quence of the difference of the envelope in which the embryos are

contained ; for in the salmon this is a leathery ‘chorion,’ and in

the frog a mere gelatinous bleb.

Moreover it soon became apparent that these two “ Ichthyopsi-

dans”’ are in no wise near akin to each other. In the very first stage,

where there is an essential agreement, in one important particular

they greatly disagree ; for the embryo of the salmon has two arches

in front of its mouth, while the tadpole has but one; there is also an

additional gill-arch in the osseous fish.

In the earliest stage of the salmon worked out by me I found a

may believe, and however absurd the Title, we can assure him it stands

in his own hand-writing—at the head of the MS. The only alteration,

fortunately, which I ventured to make was the substitution of a P for p

in Phayrei.—W.F. | :

* Being an abstract of the Bakerian Lecture.

Mr. W. K. Parker on the Skull of Salmo salar. 223

much more distinct condition of the parts than in frogs at the same

stage; the differentiation of the latter is obscure as compared with

the fish, and this not merely because of the quantity of pigmentum

nigrum in its tissues.

Then, in addition to other causes of obscuration, the mouth of the

tadpole is strangely modified in harmony with its ‘suctorial’’ cha-

racter and affinities (showing a remarkable affinity to the mouth of a

lamprey), so that a whole system of cartilages has to be eliminated

from the lips before the mouth (proper) can be understood. The

labial system is slightly and slowly developed in the salmon, and its

mouth is thus much more in harmony with that of the embryo reptile

or bird than with that of the tadpole.

After the simple stage is passed, the development of the facial

arches is very different in the two types—as different, indeed, as in

any two possible examples that could be given in the whole vertebrate

roup.

P The facial arches behind the mouth now undergo segmentation—

first the hyoid, and then the mandibular. The hyoid is cloven from

top to bottom and also has a single distal piece separated off.

At this stage we get an explanation of what is seen in certain rays,

where the hyoid suspensorium is permanently double; and also ascer-

tain that this second postoral arch, which retains the anterior piece

in relation to the skull as the great “ hyomandibular”’ pier, does not

need the saw of the transcendentalist to put it into proper relation to

its surroundings. Nature’s invisible wedge has done what was needed,

and the supposed double rib turns out to be half a visceral arch.

On the whole, this second stage is extremely ‘‘ Plagiostomous,” for

the details of which I must refer to the main paper.

While in the egg the head of the embryo is flattened, and so

twisted that one of the eyes (it may be the left or the right) looks

upwards towards the ‘‘chorion,”’ the other having a visceral direc-

tion.

The facial bars, at first having all a simple sigmoid form, rapidly

change towards the time of hatching ; and when the head gets free,

the cerebral vesicles speedily swell, taking on the form so familiar to

the embryologist ; and the head now gains the ‘mesocephalic

flexure.”

After this an approach is made to the Teleostean type of struc-

ture; but this is not done at a stride. The intermediate condition

is thoroughly “Ganoid,”’ and, happily, comes in to explain the related

structures of the older and newer “Orders.” Iam not aware that

any stage of the heart or of the intestines shows either the many

valves of the “aortic bulb” or the intestinal spiral valve ; this must

be seen to ; yet if these never show themselves in the “fry” of the

osseous fish, their absence does not affect the general skeletal mor-

phology.

The salmon amongst fishes, like the fowl amongst birds, never

attains to the greatest degree of special class-modification; it re-

mains subtypical, with a dentigerous maxillary, a ductus pneumaticus,

avery chondrosteous state of the skull, and a very heterocercal tail.

224 Royal Socvety :—

Yet, from an ichthyological point of view, this fish is an immense

height above the Sharks and Rays, and is far in advance, as a fish,

of the whole group of ‘ Ganoids.”

The results of the gradational study of the fish-forms by the

zoologist, and of their secular study by the paleontologist, are both

in harmony with morphological facts. Although the light obtained

is but as the first streak of dawn, yet it is a pleasant light, and quite

sufficient to show each kind of worker where and how to renew his

own special toil.

I cannot close this brief abstract without remarking that my re-

searches in these, the highest types of animals, seem to me to be in

perfect accordance with the results obtained by long study of the

very lowest, the Rhizopods—namely, that they both yield increasing

evidence in favour of the doctrine of Evolution.

Researches of this kind show what the life-processes can accom-

plish in the history of one individual animal, and also that the mor-

phological steps and stages are not arbitrary, but take place in a

manner in accordance with all that has of late been revealed to us of

the gradation of types in the ages that are past.

June 20, 1872.—Sir James Paget, Bart., D.C.L., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

‘Notice of further Researches among the Plants of the Coal-

measures.”” By Professor W. C. Wiitiamson, F.R.S. (in a Letter

to Dr. SHarrry, Sec. R.S.

Fallowfield, May 3, 1872.

My prar Dr. Suarpry,—In my memoir on Calamites, published

in the last volume of the ‘Philosophical Transactions,’ I gave two

ficures of sections of a plant (plate 25. fig. 16 and plate 28. fig. 39)

supposed to be a Calamite, but respecting the Calamitean nature cf

which I expressed my doubts in a note at the foot of page 488. I

have now got numerous examples of this plant; and it proves, as I

surmised, to belong to a distinct type. It has a branching stem, no¢

jointed, and having a remarkable pith. Since the latter organ, when

divided transversely, gives a star-shaped section, closely resembling

that of a Calamite, except that it has not been fistular, I propose

to give to the plant the generic name of Astromyelon. [have further

examined a series of curious stems which I described briefly at the

Edinburgh Meeting of the British Association under the name of

Dictyoxylon radicans; this plant I also find must be placed in a

new genus. It is characterized by possessing an exogenous, wocdy,

branching stem, composed of reticulated vessels. It has no pith;

and its bark consists of cells arranged in columns perpendicular to

its surface. I think it not improbable that this has been the sub-

terranean axis of some other plant, since I have succeeded in tracing

its ultimate subdivisions into rootlets. I propose for the present to

recognize it by the generic name of Amyelon. My specimens of this

plant are very numerous, some of them having been kindly sup-

plied to me by Messrs. Butterworth and Whittaker, of Oldham.

SE —————

Prof. W. C. Williamson on Plants of the Coal-Measures. 225

They may prove to be rhizomes and roots of the Asterophyllite de-

scribed in my last letter to you.

Of this last genus I have just got an additional number of ex-

quisite examples, showing not only the nodes but verticils of the

linear leaves so characteristic of the plant. These specimens place

the correctness of my previous inference beyond all possibility of

doubt, and finally settle the point that <Asterophyllites is not the

branch and foliage of a Calamite, but an altogether distinct type of

vegetation having an internal organization peculiarly its own. This

organization is identical in every essential point with that of my

Volkmannia Dawsoni already referred to in my previous letter, and

which I now do not hesitate to designate Asterophyllites Dawsoni.

The peculiar triquetrous form of the young vascular axis of this

genus is too remarkable and too distinct from that of all other Carbo-

niferons types to be mistaken for any of them, and especially for

that of Calamites, with which it has not one single feature of real

affinity.

I have also obtained, partly through the assistance of Messrs.

Butterworth and Whittaker, but especially the latter, an instructive

series of specimens of the genus Zygopteris, which has recently been

made the subject of an important memoir by M. B. Renault, pub-

lished in tome xii. of the ‘Annales des Sciences Naturelles.’ Our

Lancashire specimens are of the type which he describes under the

name ef Z. Lacattii. The French savant has found these plants, in

one instance, connected as petioles to a rhizome which he believes

to be that of a fern. Our specimens supply some information

additional to that published by M. Renault: they appear to me to

sustain his idea that they are petioles; and I have traced in them the

origin of the two vascular bundles which he refers to as pores existing

in the bark. I find much reason for concluding that they are, as he

surmises, the vessels going to the secondary rachis of the pinnules.

Our Lancashire specimens are covered with sparse but very distinct

hairs that, unlike the ramentaceous form common amongst ferns, are

perfectly cylindrical. Whilst I am thus inclined to express my

conviction that M. Renault is correct in his views respecting Zygo-

pteris, I find it increasingly difficult to distinguish fragments of ferns

from those of Lycopods, as also fragments of petioles from those of

roots.

Mr. Nield and Mr, Whittaker, of Oldham, have just supplied me

with two magnificent stems of Calamites of large size. The pith

is absent from both, except some slight traces at the node of one

of the specimens. I find on dissecting these matured stems that the

remarkable arrangements of the vascular structure seen in plate 23.

figure 2 of my memoir on Calamites almost entirely disappear in the

more external of the exogenous growths. The conspicuous vertical

laminee of cellular parenchyma (my primary medullary rays), which

separate the woody wedges, rapidly diminish in size as they proceed

from within outwards, becoming more or less like the secondary

or ordinary medullary rays represented in my fig. 5. Many of them,

however, retain the evidence of their primary medullary origin in

226 | Royal Soctety.

their unusual length, and in’consisting of two, or even three, vertical

series of cells instead of one, as is usual with the secondary rays.

The vessels pursue their longitudinal course across the node unde-

‘flected in any direction, save where they bend aside to allow the passage

outwards of vascular bundles going off to the aérial branches*, as

represented in my figures 13 and 38. Thus in the exterior parts of

these large stems the ligneous zone exhibits little or no indication of the

presence of a node, except what these divergent bundles afford. I

find that these bundles slightly increase in size as they proceed from

within outwards, showing that they share in the exogenous additions

made to the exterior of the ligneous zone; in one of my stems that

zone has a circumference of seven inches, and in the other of six

and three quarters. It is in the former one that I find the nodal

bundles; but I have not seen one of these organs whose actual dia-

meter exceeds three sixteenths of an inch, confirming my previous

statements respecting the comparatively small size of the aérial

branches. As in my previously described examples, these bases of

branches exhibit no separation of the vessels into a circle of wedges

like those of the parentstem. The persistent growth of the vascular

bundles just described seems to indicate more permanent relations

between them and the central stem than I once thought probable.

There appears to be a close approximation to uniformity in the

number of the woody wedges of these large stems; one of mine

contains 85, and the other 83 such. Mr. Binney counted 73 in his

large specimen (loc. cit. pl. 2. fig. 1). In the thin, young woody

cylinder represented in my fig. 19, the mean diameter of which was

slightly over an inch, the number was also about 80. This close

resemblance between stems so different in age and size again illus-

trates another of my previous statements, viz. that age produces no

increase in the number of the woody wedges, but that each one of

the latter enlarges by successive additions to its peripheral portions

of new laminee, which latter partly fill up the increasing area of the

enlarging circle, and partly encroach upon the primary medullary

rays, as represented in my figure 17, in addition to some interstitial

growth.

We thus learn that as the ligneous cylinder of a Calamite in-

creased in age and size it gradually exhibited less and less of the

Calamitean peculiarities seen in young stems ; its external portions

assumed a generalized, unsulcated form, which recurs with remarkable

uniformity in several otherwise different plants of the Coal-measures.

Amongst the Burntisland fossils sent to me by Mr. Grieve I

find two very curious stems, probably of the same general nature

as Zygopteris. Both have a dense outer cortical layer, with vascular

bundles in the interior. In the simpler of these plants the transverse

section of this bundle is crescentic ; but in the concave border of the

crescent are two small projecting capes dividing it into three minor bays

(fig. 2). In the other the vascular axis is a double one, lodged in a

somewhat elliptical stem: one of these is a simple crescent, the con-

* This condition is very correctly represented in plate J. fig. 3 of Mr. Binney’s

memoir on Calamites (Palaont. Soc.).

Miscellaneous. 227

eavity of which is directed inwards; the other has a very elegant

transverse section (fig. 1). It is shaped like adumb-bell, one head of

which rests within the concavity of the crescentie bundle, and the

other turns in the opposite direction; at each of these two extre-

mities the margin of the dumb-bell is excavated into a small bay, as

if a vertical canal had existed at each point; but these seem to have

been merely columns of cellular tissue encroaching upon the rounded

outline of the vascular structures. I propose provisionally to recog-

nize these two forms under the generic name of Arpexylon.

Fig. 1. Arpexylon duplex. Fig. 2. Arpexylon simplex. Fig. 5. Edraxylon.

Fig. 3 represents a stem or petiole in which the section of the vascular bundle

presents the form of a chair or seat, and to which I propose to assign

the name Edraaylon. This form exhibits numerous modifications of the

pattern represented in the outline, down to a single central vascular bundle.

It may prove to belong to Dictyorylon Oldhamium.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Specific Name of the Black Redstart.

By Atrrep Newron, M.A., F.R.S.

Dr. Gray’s note “On the name Tethya and its Varieties of Spell-

ing” in the last Number of the ‘Annals’ (p. 150) reminds me

of a still greater diversity which has long existed among ornitho-

logists as to the spelling of a name which at first sight looks as if it

might have something in common with that of Tethya.

In 1769 Scopoli (Annus I. Historico-naturalis, p. 157) charac-

terized a now well-known bird as “ Sylvia tithys,” with a reference

to “ Linn. 8. N. XI. n. 23.” The eleventh edition of Linnzeus’s great

work is not at present accessible to me ; but it was notoriously a mere

reprint of his tenth edition (1758), of which a copy is now before

me. Here (i. p. 187) we have the 23rd species-of the genus Mota-

cilla designated “ Tvtys,” and a reference to “ Fn. svec. 227;” but

this, as Linneus in his twelfth edition (1. p. 335) allowed, was the

female of his MZ. phenicurus, and Scopoli was unconsciously the first

to give a binomial title to the species we now know as the Black

Redstart; in so doing, however, he misspelt the word, introducing

an A into the name, and in consequence opened a door for a great

number of future errors, while puzzling naturalists to account for it.

Linneus, in his mode of spelling, copied Gesner, who in’ 1555

(Hist. Anim. iii. p. 719) has ¢itys; but the latter also mentions that

228 Miscellaneous.

Dionysius writes titis; and this. seems to be the correct form of the

word. Turning to Liddell and Scott’s ‘ Lexicon,’ based on that of

Passow, we have :—

“ riris, (dos, i), like rex, a small chirping bird, Phot.”

Now Photius flourished somewhere about a.p. 850; and looking

to his dictionary, printed in 1822 from the Gale MS., and edited by

Porson and Bekker, we see (il. p. 592) :—

““ruris: Bpaxv dpvibioy’ onpaiver kat To yuvatKkeloy aidotov" TiTis Kat

}) Képxos.”

Stephanus also shows that titis is the correct form. In his ‘ The-

saurus’ (ed. Paris: 1848-1854, vii. p. 2241) we have “ rizis, ios, i),

avicula,” &c., and the sentence “ éuPibalecOar eis Tas Kadovpévas

rirédas,” Which settles the mattcr. Moreover he adds “ rirvs in vy.

LL. affertur pro cir.”

Photius and others after him derive the word riris from ririZeu,

otherwise written wumiZecy, to chirp.

Hence we may conclude that ¢it’s was originally a general name

for a small chirping bird, that in time it became specially applied to

some bird with a red tail, that as such it had one or more figurative

meanings (in the sentence above quoted we might perhaps trans-

late it by “ Firetail”), concerning which we need not now trouble

ourselves, and that titys is an erroneous form, which has been still

further corrupted into tithys, tethys, thytis, and I know not how

many other misspellings.

Lastly, I may perhaps venture to hint that the root of titis exists

in the prefix “ Tit” of the English “ Titlark” and ‘‘ Titmouse,” and

the first syllable of the Icelandic Zithingur, where it retains its pri-

mitive generalized meaning.

In excuse for occupying all this space, I may mention that natu-

ralists like Hemprich and Ehrenberg (Symb. Phys. fol. 64) and Von

Heuglin (Orn. Nordost-Afr. 1. p. 334) have not thought it beneath

them to attempt an explanation of this word, referring it to rizns,

ultor, with which it has nothing whatever to do,

3 August, 1872.

New Names for a long-known Lepidopteron. By C. Rrrsema.

In the last Number of the ‘ Annals,’ Mr. A. G. Butler describes

and represents a new genus and species of the family Notodontide.

The genus is named Jarsolepis, the species 7’. remicauda.

The same insect, however, was figured as far back as 1806 by J.

Hibner, in the second volume (plate 197) of his ‘Sammlung exotischer

Schmetterlinge,’ under the name of Crino Sommeri, and as belonging

to the Noctue genuine. Herrich-Schiffer (Sammlung neuer oder

wenig bekannter ausser-europiiischer Schmetterlinge, p. 11) changed

the generic name as used before into Crinodes, and placed the insect

in the family Notodontina. Walker, on the other hand, in his

‘ List-of the Specimens of Lepidopterous Insects in the Collection of

the British Museum,’ part xiy. (1858), p. 13846, places the genus

Miscellaneous. 22

Orino, Hiibner, in the Noctuide family Ophiuside, which, however,

is rectified in the ‘Stettiner entomologische Zeitung’ for 1862

(p. 477) by K. Dietrich, who regards it, and most justly, as a Noto-

dontide genus, nearly allied to the genera Phalera, H.-Sch., and

Datana, Walk.

I have seen five specimens of Crinodes Sommeri, Hiitbn.—four

females in the collection of the Royal Museum at Leiden (placed

under the name bilaminata, De Haan, I. L., in the genus WVystalea,

Gn., at present also a Notodontide genus), and one male in Mr.

P. C. T. Snellen’s collection at Rotterdam, all sent over from Java.

Walker (/. c. p. 1348) makes mention of a specimen from Rio Janeiro

in Mr. Fry’s collection.

Leiden, August 10, 1872.

Note on Intelligence in Monkeys. By Prof. Corn.

T have two species of Cebus in my study, C. capucinus, and a half-

grown C. apella. The former displays the usual traits of monkey

ingenuity. He is an admirable catcher, seldom missing any thing,

from a large brush to a grain, using two hands or one. His cage-

door is fastened by two hooks, and these are kept in their places by

nails driven in behind them. He generally finds means, sooner or

later, to draw out the nails, unhook the hooks, and get free. He

then occupies himself in breaking up various objects and examining

their interior appearances, no doubt in search of food. To prevent

his escape I fastened him by a leather strap to the slats of the cage ;

but he soon untied the knot, and then relieved himself of the strap

by cutting and drawing ou; the threads which held the flap for the

buckle. He then used the strap in a novel way. He was accus-

tomed to catch his food (bread, potatoes, fruit, &c.), with his hands

when thrown to him; sometimes the pieces fell short three or four

feet. One day he seized his strap and began to throw it at the

food, retaining his hold of one end. He took pretty correct aim, and

finally drew the pieces to within reach of his hand. This perfor-

mance he constantly repeats, hooking and pulling the articles to him

in turns and loops of the strap. Sometimes he loses his hold of

the strap. If the poker is handed him he uses that with some

skill for the recovery of the strap. When this is drawn in, he

secures his food as before. Here is an act of intelligence which

must have been originated by some monkey, since no lower or

ancestral type of mammals possess the hands necessary for its

accomplishment. Whether originated by Jack, or by some ances-

tor of the forest who used vines for the same purpose, cannot be

readily ascertained.

After a punishment the animal would only exert himself in this

way when not watched; as soon as an eye was directed to him he

would cease. In this he displayed distrust. He also usually exhi-

bited the disposition to accumulate, to be quite superior to hunger ;

thus he always appropriated all the food within reach before be-

230 Miscellaneous.

ginning to eat. When different pieces were offered to him, he trans-

ferred*the first to his hind feet to make room for more; then filled

his mouth and hands, and concealed portions behind him. With a

large piece in his hands he would pick the hand of his master clean

before using his own, which he was sure of.—Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

April 1872, p. 40.

Curious Habit of a Snake. By Mr. Corn,

Mr. Cope made the following remarks:—I had for some time a

specimen of Cyclophis estivus, received from Fort Macon, N.C.,

through the kindness of Dr. Yarrow, living ina Wardian case. The

slender form of this snake, and its beautiful green and yellow colours,

have led to the opinion that it is of arboreal or bush-loving habits.

It never exhibited such in confinement, however, and instead of

climbing over the Caladia, ferns, &c., lived mostly under ground.

It had a curious habit of projecting its head and two or three inches

of its body above the ground, and holding them for hours rigidly in

a fixed attitude. In this position it resembled very closely a sprout

or shoot of some green succulent plant, and might readily be mis-

taken for such by small animals.—Jdid.

Eggs and newly hatched Young of Ixodes Dugesii and Argas reflexus.

By Grorcr Guiiiver, F.R.S.

Seeing the dreadful ravages committed of late by the Zwodes on

sheep and pheasants, and the novelty of Argas as a British Arachnid

(Ann. Nat. Hist. March 1872), any contribution towards the economy

of these Acarina may be important or interesting. And now we are

able to determine pretty nearly the time and manner in which both

these species are hatched. At the meeting of the East Kent Natural-

History Society at Canterbury, August 15, 1872, my son exhibited

(as reported in the ‘ Kentish Gazette’ newspaper four days after-

wards) specimens of the eggs and recently hatched young of both

these so-called ticks. The eggs of the Zvodes were smooth, regularly

oval, about 1, of an inch long, and ;), broad, and of a shining

chocolate colour; those of the Argas were larger, occasionally sub-

oval, but the majority of them globular, about > of an inch in

diameter, of a greyish colour, and slightly rough on the surface.

Adults of the Jwodes and Argas were confined in separate boxes

early in June, and were seen to be lively and unchanged at the end

of that month; but the eggs were laid in clumps some time after-

wards, and on the 1st of August most of them, both of Jaodes and

Argas, were found to be hatched. The young broods of both species

were in most respects miniatures of their parents—only, as is already

known of some other Acarina, with but six legs—and running about

with great activity; and the newly hatched specimens of Argas

were hairy, especially at the hinder part, where there is a fringe

a are

Miscellaneous. 231

of hairs. The Jvodes is very prolific. A single female confined in

a pill-box produced no less than 143 eggs, of which, on August 9,

all but six were found to be hatched, and the young swarm actively

trying to escape from their prison. The egg-shells, both of Jaodes

and Argas, are composed of tough chitine. The husbandmen, in

trying to relieve their suffering flocks and to destroy the ticks,’

have employed men to pick them off the sheep, throwing the ticks

on the ground; but this practice is now shown to be simply pro-

pagating the eyil by sowing the pregnant vermin broadcast.

Canterbury, August 20, 1872.

On the Embryonic Form of the Gordii, By M. A. Vittor.

The embryo of the Gordiz, which has hitherto remained unknown,

has no resemblance to the adult form. It is a microscopic cylin-

drical worm, scarcely 0-205 millim. in length, and 0-045 millim. in

breadth, in which we may easily distinguish a head, a body, and a

tail.

The head is as broad as the body and entirely retractile ; it is armed

with a triple circlet of stout prickles, and terminates in front in a sort

of trunk or sucker. ‘The trunk is rigid, owing to the four strong

styles which serve it as a framework. The prickles of the first two

rows (that is to say, those near the base of the trunk) are of the same

form, arrangement, and size; they are six in each row, the upper

ones slightly covering the lower ones; and they are partly inserted

into a triangular sheath, which gives them the form of a lance-head.

Those of the third row are implanted at the base of the head. They

alternate with those of the first two rows, and do not resemble them

either in number or in form; their sheath is nearly quadrilateral,

and their free extremity is much longer; they are also stouter and

more resistant; lastly, we count seven of them instead of six, as one

of the sheaths bears two. The head, in its movements of protrusion

and retraction, behaves like the trunk of the Echinorhynchi ; it turns

back upon itself from its apex to its base, and from its base to its

apex, causing its prickles to describe an are of 180 degrees. When

it is out of the body, the points of the prickles are directed backwards ;

in the contrary case the opposite. ‘Their arrangement is then com-

pletely inverted: the trunk, which was in front, is thrown completely

to the back ; then come successively the prickles of the first, second,

and third rows, united in bundles and constituting with the trunk a

solid rod in the centre of the body ; the extremities of the prickles

of the third row slightly project beyond the extremity of the body,

which is then armed with a short but very resistant dart.

The bedy presents numerous transverse folds, very close together

and very regular, so that it might be thought to be composed of true

rings.

The tail, which is a little narrower than the body, is separated from

it by a deep constriction; it is also very distinctly annulated, and

ris Pe Miscellaneous.

bears towards its posterior extremity, which is obtuse, four appen-

dages—two very small ones in the centre, and two larger at the

sides.

After its escape from the egg, when free in the water, where it is

at first called upon to live, the embryo of the Gordii has not at its

command any great means of locomotion. Its cylindrical and not

very mobile tail cannot serve it for swimming. At the utmost it

might make its way through the mud by means of the hooks with

which its retractile head is armed. It must also be easily carried

along by even the weakest current. Those which I kept in glass

vessels finally adhered to the walls, and formed there, by their

numver, a sort of pulverulent coating. In the natural state they

must fix themselves in the same manner to pebbles and the roots

and stems of aquatic plants; and it is there that they lie in wait for

the larvee of which they are the predestined parasites.

This is not an hypothesis; for the experiment has been made,

Having placed a certain number of the embryos in the presence of

various larve of culiciform Tipularia (Corethra, Tanypus, Chirono-

mus), I have had the satisfaction of seeing them encyst themselves.

The little worm penetrates into these larvee, whose integuments are

but slightly resistant, by means of its cephalic armature, which it

causes at first to project suddenly; its prickles becoming reversed

catch in the tissues of the larva, fix themselves there, and allow the

trunk to bury itself deeply ; then it withdraws the whole, to recom-

mence the same manceuyre. As soon as the embryo has found a

resting-place to suit it, it remains motionless ; then the fluids which

bathe it all round become coagulated and form for it an investment

which, by hardening, becomes a true cyst. This cyst, the outer surface

of which seems to be covered with small irregular concretions, is at first

transparent and exactly applied to the embryo; but if we reexamine

it in a few days, we find that it has become brown and elongated,

and that the embryo only occupies the anterior part of it, which

probably is never completely closed. ‘Thus the little parasite, after

its encystation, still travels in the tissues of the larva, constantly

elongating its cyst and leaving behind it an empty space, which

becomes larger and larger, until the moment when itself passes into

the larval state. Such are in fact the conditions of its existence ; and

such is the use of the complex armature which it has received from

nature.

The Gordii are therefore subject, in the course of their develop-

ment, not only to necessary migrations, but also to complete metamor-

phoses. This fact, which we were far from anticipating, shows that,

as regards the first phases of evolution, there is no analogy between

Mermis and Gordius, and that the latter, in the embryonic state, have

a certain resemblance to the Acanthocephala.—Comptes Rendus, 5th

August, 1872, p. 363,

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

No. 58. OCTOBER 1872.

XXXV.—On Callograptus radicans, a new Dendroid Grap-

tolite. By JoHN Hopkinson, F.G.S., F.R.M.S.

[Plate X.]

THE genus Callograptus belongs to a group of organisms

which are frequently classed with the Graptolites, but which

present sufficient points of difference to warrant their sepa-

ration as a distinct sub-order, for which the name DEn-

DROIDEA has been proposed by Prof. H. A. Nicholson. In it

are included the genera Péilograptus, Dendrograptus, Callo-

graptus, and Dictyonema. These forms, while nearly allied

to each other, differ considerably from the true graptolites.

The slender chitinous rod or “ virgula,” from the invariable

presence of which in the true graptolites Prof. Allman has

recently proposed for them the name RHABDOPHORA, is not

present in these forms; and the slender “ radicle,” forming in

the true graptolites the proximal termination of the virgula, is

also absent. ‘The DENDROIDEA, all of which are branching

forms, differ also from the RHABDOPHORA in their mode of

branching, and there seems to be a slight difference in their

hydrothece.

There is yet another and a very important point of differ-

ence between the two groups. ‘The new species of Callo-

graptus, which I propose to name C. radicans, seems to fur-

nish conclusive evidence of the fixedness of the forms to

which it belongs, while the slender tapering radicular process

of the Rhabdophora shows that they could not have been

similarly attached to foreign bodies.

CALLOGRAPTUS agrees with its near allies, Dendrograptus

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 18

234 Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite.

and Dictyonema, in having ‘a common trunk or stem, or

growing in sessile groups of stipes from a common origin,

without distinct bilateral arrangement of the parts,” and also

in having its hydrothece “ in single series on one side of the

stipes or branches, and arranged along a common canal or

axis,” and differs from them in having its branches “ untre-

quently and irregularly connected by transverse processes ”’

(Hall).

CALLOGRAPTUS RADICANS has a diffuse flabelliform polypary,

with an elongated erect and robust hydrocaulus, terminating

proximally in a spreading fibrous hydrorhiza. 'The polypary,

in the only specimen in which this rooting termination or

hydrorhiza has been seen, is at least six inches long ; and its

extreme width, where the branches terminate distally, appears

to have been about the same. The hydrorhiza covers a

space about half an inch square, but is very irregular in shape.

It appears as a series of interlacing or anastomosing fibres

which must have formed a kind of network over the surface to

which it adhered. ‘The hydrocaulus or main stem is about

1-10th of an inch in width at its junction with the hydrorhiza,

Increasing to twice this width where the first indication of

branching occurs, its length between these two points being

exactly one inch. It has a striated surface and an irregu-

larly crenate outline. The branches bifureate frequently

and continuously throughout their length, diverging only

slightly at first; but after the first few bifurcations the whole

polypary rapidly widens out, and towards its distal extremity

the branches frequently diverge from each other at a wide

angle. They vary from 1-50th to 1-30th of an inch in width,

but, being much compressed, must have been originally of

greater tenuity. They frequently anastomose; but this, as in

O. Salteri, Hall, does not appear to be a constant character.

Unfortunately the state of preservation im which this species

occurs does not allow the form of its hydrothece to be di-

stinctly made out. Some of the branches show minute oval

impressions arranged in a single series along their centre, the

longer diameter or major axis of the oval being parallel with

the margins of the branches. These impressions, of which

there are about twenty to the inch, most probably indicate the

apertures of the hydrothece.

This species is very distinct from the two previously de-

scribed species of Callograptus. It is much larger and more

robust in all its parts than C. elegans, Hall; and its branches

originate from the main stem in a very different manner. ‘To

C. Salteri, Hall, it is more nearly allied; but its branches

bifurcate in a more irregular manner than in that species, they

Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite. 235

have not the same zigzag direction, and the whole polypary

is more diffuse and irregular in form.

But the distinctive feature in the specimen of Callograptus

radicans described above is its possession of a hydrorhiza, or

rather, I should perhaps say, the preservation of its hydro-

rhiza; for the presence of this organ in a single specimen of

one species should suffice to prove its former presence in all

—to show, in fact, that it is an essential organ of the genus

Callograptus.

From the imperfect manner in which these Silurian fossils

are usually preserved, we cannot wonder that a delicate organ,

whose function it was to attach to some other substance the

more durable portion of the organism of which it formed a

part, has not before been found in connexion with this portion.

None of these dendroid graptolites has yet been found

attached to any other body. ‘Their proximal termination is

usually imperfect, and often has an irregular margin as if it had

been broken. Such fracture, when the polypary was severed

from the substance to which it was attached, would most easily

take place at the junction of the hydrocaulus with its hydro-

rniza.

In the rocks in which graptolites occur, other fossils are

seldom found; but in the graptolite beds from which this

specimen was obtained a large Conularia (C. Homfray?)

abounds, and in a thin zone in which this and other species of

Callograptus and Dendrograptus occur in profusion. it is

especially abundant. Upon this Conularia, which is some-

times covered with graptolites, and also upon other fossils

which are occasionally associated with it, some of these dendroid

forms may perhaps have grown; but no connexion has yet

been clearly seen.

We are not without evidence that the other genera of the

Dendroidea were similarly attached to foreign bodies or to the

sea-bottom. Even if this were wanting, these dendroid grap-

tolites are so nearly allied to each other (Callograptus forming

an intermediate link between Dictyonema and Dendrograptus,

to which also Pti/ograptus is nearly allied) that we might safely

have inferred that the mode of existence of all these forms was

the same. But the genus Dendrograptus has already furnished

evidence of the fixedness of these dendroid forms. Professor

James Hall, after expressing his belief that the true grapto-

lites “in their mature condition were free floating bodies in

Silurian seas,” thus treats of the mode of existence of the den-

droid graptolites :—

“In regard to another group, including Dendrograptus,

Callograptus, and Dictyonema, as well as one or two other

18%

236 Mr. J. Hopkinson on a new Dendroid Graptolite.

forms, we have some evidence indicative of a different mode

of existence. The stems of Dendrograptus are enlarged towards

their base, and sometimes present a sudden expansion or bulb,

which I have inferred may be the base or root, once attached

to another substance, or imbedded in the mud or sand of the

sea-bottom.” ..... . “In those which I have termed Cal-

lograptus, the bases of the fronds are imperfect, but indicate,

according to analogy, a radicle or point of attachment like Den-

drograptus. In the more nearly entire forms of Dictyonema

known, we have not been able to observe the base; but, from

their similarity in form and mode of growth to Fenestella and

Retepora, we have inferred their attachment either to the sea-

bottom or to foreign bodies.” (20th Rep. New-York State Cab.

Nat. Hist., p. 238, ed. 1870.)

The bearing of this on the question of the systematic posi-

tion of the Dendroidea alone remains for consideration. It

has already been shown that the Rhabdophora differ from

our recent Sertularian Hydroida only in their possession of a

slender rod or virgula, and in their having apparently been free.

The Dendroidea offer no such points of difference, being essen-

tially similar to the recent Sertularian zoophytes in their mode

of growth, as well as in their general form, and, as far as their

imperfect state of preservation enables us to determine, in their

intimate structure also. On this last and most important

point, however, we have no certain knowledge: while we

know of no characters whereby the Dendroidea can be sepa-

rated from the Hydrozoa, we are equally destitute of decisive

evidence of their structural difference from the Polyzoa; nor

can we wonder at this when we consider how long these two

classes were grouped together under the general term of Zoo-

phyte or Coralline.

Dictyonema certainly seems more Polyzoan than Hydrozoan

in its affinities, while Péelograptus, on the other hand, seems

to be far more nearly related to the Hydrozoa than to the

Polyzoa; and analogy with the true graptolites, which are

certainly Hydroids, would lead us to inter that the Dendroidea

have the same internal structure as they have. If this should

rove to be the case, the genera Ptilograptus and Dendrograp-

tus would fall naturally into families already existing in the

sub-order Thecaphora (or Sertularina), while for Callograptus

and Dictyonema, which have their branches more or less re-

gularly connected together by transverse processes, a new family

would have to be instituted. At present we do not know of

any tangible character whereby the Dendroidea, considered as

a single group, can be separated as a distinct sub-order from

the Thecaphora. In the mean time the term G'raptolite may

On the Mollusca of Eastern North America. 237

still be used as a general term for all the forms to which the

name has been applied, as the term Zoophyte was formerly used

for such different beings as the Hydrozoa, the Actinozoa, and

the Polyzoa,

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.

Callograptus radicans, Hopk., natural size. Photo-lithographed from a

specimen collected by the author in the Arenig rocks, Ramsey Island,

St. David’s, South Wales.

XXXVI.— The Mollusca of Europe compared with those of Eas-

tern North America. By J. GWYN JEFFREYS, F.R.S.*

AFTER mentioning that he had dredged last autumn on the

coast of New England in a steamer provided by the Govern-

ment of the United States, and that he had inspected all the

principal collections of Mollusca made in Eastern North

America, the author compared the Mollusca of Europe with

those of Massachusetts. He estimated the former to contain

about 1000 species (viz. 200 land and freshwater, and 800

marine), and the latter to contain about 400 species (viz. 110

land and freshwater, and 290 marine); and he took Mr.

Binney’s edition of the late Professor Gould’s ‘ Report on the

Invertebrata of Massachusetts,’ published in 1870, as the

standard of comparison. That work gives 401 species, of

which Mr. Jeffreys considered 41 to be varieties and the

young of other species, leaving 3860 apparently distinct species.

About 40 species may be added to this number in consequence

of the recent researches of Professor Verrill and Mr. Whiteaves

on the coast of New England and in the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

Mr. Jeftreys-identified 173 out of the 360 Massachusetts

species as Huropean, viz. land and freshwater 39 (out of 110),

and marine 134 (out of 250), the proportion in the former

case being 28 per cent., and in the latter nearly 54 per cent. ;

and he produced a tabulated list of the species in support of

his statement. He proposed to account for the distribution of

the North-American Mollusca thus identitied, by showing that

the land and freshwater species had probably migrated from

Europe to Canada through Northern Asia, and that most of

the marine species must have been transported from the Arctic

seas by Davis’s-Strait current southwards to Cape Cod, and

the remainder from the Mediterranean and western coasts of

the Atlantic by the Gulf-stream in a northerly direction. He

renewed his objection to the term “representative species.”

* An abstract of a communication made by the author to the Brighton

Meeting of the British Association, and now published at his request.

238 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

The author concluded by expressing his gratitude for the kind

hospitality and attention which he received from naturalists

during his visit to North America last year.

Mollusca of Eastern North America, according to Binney’s

edition of Gould's ‘ Invertebrata of Massachusetts.’

ea oe

wo | §

: Name of Species. a oO 2 Synonyms and Remarks.

&% oan | oe

a ° =i

a A ea

28| Teredo navalis, Linné ......... N E_ | Wood’s Hole, Mass. (J. G. J.).!

29 Norvagica, Spengler N E |

30 megotara, Hanley ...... N E

31| —— Thompsoni, TZryon...... 8

32 dilatata, Stimpson ...... IN eee stone T. megotara, variety.

30 chlorotica, Gould (1870).| N EK | 7. pedicellata, Quatrefages

34) Xylotrya fimbriata, Jeffreys...) S (1849), var.

36| holas costata, U2... osc.ccccssse s

38 truncata, SAY). 222.50... S)

39) Zirfea crispata, LE. ............ N E_ | Genus Pholas.

40) Solen ensis, Z. ...........-...-- N 1D)

43, Solecurtus gibbus, Sp. ......... 8

44 GivaSUS, Spree. ccc SS)

46 Machzxra squama, Blainville .| N | ...... G. Siliqua.

47 costata, Say .......02...2.- N G. Stliqua.

48 Solemya velum, Say (1822)...) N | ...... S. togata, young.

50. borealis, Totten (1834) ..| N E_ |S. togata, Poli (1791).

51, Panopeea arctica, Lamarck

(Gite) sake oaereconare conobacnee N E_ | Saxicava Norvegica, sp. (1793).

53 Glycymeris siliqua, Chemnitz .| N E | G. Curtodaria.

55) Mya arenaria, L. ..............- N E

58 iruameatian 7.) .. eacensstece N E

60, Corbula contracta, Say......... S

61| Nezra pellucida, St........... N E

62| Pandora trilineata, Say ...... N

64 Lyonsia hyalina, Conrad ...... Nag | eae Allied to L. Norvegica.

65 arenosa, Moller ......... N EH

66| Anatina papyracea, Say ...... N

68} Cochlodesma Leanum, Conr..| N | ...... Allied to Thracia pretenuis,

which is Huropean.

69 Thracia Conradi, Couthouy

(ESBS )oact cece ttre eaeteceaa: ING silage T. inflata, J. Sowerby (1845). |

71| —— myopsis (Beck), Moll.

(Cet 0) aarepececae sncoccecsdoroce N E | 7. truncata, Brown (1827).

72 truncata, Mighels& Adams

(tee eA ser aniebenseacasceeancte N E |Not 7. truncata, Br. T. sep-

tentrionalis, Jeftr. MS. |

73) Mactra solidissima, Ch. ...... IN eters jaic Lovén received a single valve’

from Finmark.

75 OValis.) Goudy estes ONDE Bea cis. M. solidissima, var.

77 lateralis, Say ...........- INE toda Allied to M. subtruncata, which

is European.

79| Cumingia tellinoides, Conr....| §

80) Ceronia arctata, Con7. ......... 1. (| a Mesodesma deauratum, var.

81} —— deaurata, Turton......... Tie ' | haameed G. Mesodesma.

Kurope and Eastern North America.

239

121

123

124

125

126

| Tellina tenta, Say

Name of Species.

| Kellia planulata, S¢.............

suborbicularis, Montagu.

Turtonia minuta, Mabricius...

}} Montacuta elevata, S¢..........

Saxicava rugosa, Pennant

—— arctica, L

Petricola pholadiformis, Lam.

dactylus, Say ...:........

Macoma fusca, Say (1826) ...

proxima, Gray (1839)...

tenera, Say

Lucina filosa, S7¢. (1851) ......

——— dentata, Wood ............

| Cryptodon Gouldii, Philippi

(lle? <3) Glanneaseaaea eqn arec neater

Sphezrium simile, Say (1816).

—— partumeium, Say (1822)

rhomboideum, Say

Vermontanum, Prime

(1861)

truncatum, Linsley

tenue, Prime

securis; Prvmeé .......--...

occidentale, Prime ......

Pisidium dubium, Say (1816)

Adamsii, Prime (1851)...

compressum, Prime

xquilaterale, Prime

ferrugineum, Prime......

abditum, Haldeman

(1841)

variabile, Prime .........

— yentricosum, Prime

Bete meee eee we eee eee eenne

Astarte castanea, Say

suleata, Da Costa

—— semisulcata, Leach (1817)

—— quadrans, Gould .........

elliptica, Hanley .........

Banksii, Leach (1817)...

crebricostata, Yorbes

(1847)

eee ween tere eters ce eee

North or South

of Cape Cod.

A'A'z

AiaiAs

AAA iaiazag

| European.

eeccce

Synonyms and Remarks.

| G. Lasea.

|G. Cyamium.

Linné instead of Pennant.

S. rugosa, var.

Valentia, Ireland; a fragment.

P. pholadiformis, var.

Tellina Balthica, L. (1766).

T. calearia, Ch. (1782).

Allied to Z. zenwis.

L. borealis, L. (1766).

Axinus flezuosus, Mont., vay.

(1803).

S. striatinum, Lam. (1818).

S. lacustre, Miller (1774).

Allied to 8. corneum, which is

European.

S. pisidioides, Gray (1856).

Perhaps introduced into

England.

S. lacustre, var.

S. lacustre, var. Rykholtii.

P. amnicum, Mill. (1774).

P. fontinale, Draparnaud

(1805).

Allied to P. nitidwm, which is

European.

P. pusillum, var. obtusalis.

P. pusillum, Gmelin (1788).

Possibly some of these North-

American species may be re-

duced in number.

Perhaps a variety of A. borea-

lis, Ch.

Including A. wndata, Gould=

A. Omalii, J. Sow.

A. borealis, Ch. (1784), var.

A. castanea, var. nana.

A, sulcata, var.

A. compressa, Mont.(1803),var.

A, depressa, Br. (1827).

240

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

Name of Species.

Astarte Portlandica, Mighels .

128) Gouldia mactracea, Lins/ey ...

129| Cyprina Islandica, L. .........

131| Cytherea convexa, Say.........

133) Venus mercenaria, J. .........

135 INOHENEy ISLE doqneononneanae

136) Tapes fluctuosa, Gowld.........

137| Gemma gemma, Totten ......

138 Manhattensis, Prime

139) Cardium Islandicum, JZ. ......

141 elegantulum (Bech),

TVEOUGS 1 Rickiate ol Motte award eset

148) Liocardium Mortoni, Conr....

144) Aphrodita Groenlandica, Ch. .

146) Cardita borealis, Conr. (1836)

147| Arca pexata, Say ..............-

148 transversa, Say...........-

149) Nucula tenuis, Mont.

150) —— proxima, Say ............

152 expansa, [eeve............

153 delphinodonta, Migh. ...

154) Yoldia limatula, Say (1831)...

55 ——fobesa, St. see.sleccescse eons

156| —— siliqua, Reeve (1855) ..

157| —— thracixformis, Storer ...

159; —— sapotilla. Gould (1841).

160 miyalis, Couth. ...........:

161| Leda tenuisulcata, Cowth.

(CS 1e))) gocooeonobeeane sdoceHenou

163 Jacksonii, Gould .........

(34) = sroivavery Ji Seonenoneooe

165 caudata, Donovan.........

167| Unio complanatus, Solander ..

169 MASUAAS; OLY wae tenia telerteet

7OV=————sradliabusn Gis esecsescens

172 CamiOsus; S07) Seces--.-0¢

173 ochraceus, Say............

174| Margaritana arcuata, Barnes

(IS23) ie doece sence te. teos-tsnere

176, —— undulata, Say .........+4

tia marginata, Gould.........

178 Anodon fluviatilis, Zea.........

180 implicata, Say ............

182 undulata, Say .........0.

183) Mytilus edulis, Z................

186 Modiola modiolus, LJ. .........

188 plicatula, Lam.............

190 Modiolaria nigra, Gray ......

192 GURCOUB Reser iasceca ted

orth or South

of Cape Cod.

AAAAAAAn AAAA AnAaBaaasaAaas | x

Z2AAA

RM RIA IA A 7 tA A

| European.

Synonyms and Remarks.

A, compressa, var.

G. Crassaitella.

G. Venus.

V. mercenaria, var.

G. Venus.

V. mercenaria, young.

G. Cardium.

C. sulcata, Bruguiére (1792).

var.

A, pexata, var.

N. tenuis, var.

Y. arctica, Sars. G. Leda.

Allied to Leda lucida, which

is Huropean.

L. arctica, Gray (1819).

G. Leda.

L. hyperborea, Loy. (1846).

G. Leda.

L. pernula, Mill. (1770), var.

L. pernula, var.

Mull. instead of Fabr.

I. minuta, var.

Perhaps U. cariosus, var.

Unio margaritifer, L. (1766).

G. Unio.

Dillwyn (1817) instead of Lea,

Anodonta cygnea, L. (1766).

G. Anodonta, A. cygnea, var.

G. Anodonta.

G. Mytilus.

Europe and Eastern North America. DAT

22) Bulla incincta, Migh,

Name of Species.

3, Modiolaria corrugata, Sé.......

Crenella glandula, Zoz?. .....

pectinula, Gould (1841).

Pecten tenuicostatus, Migh. §

Je OOO eee nee eae ns ane ee ees eeeees

Islandicus, Miill..........

ILTACLANIS | OMe tees es eel

MUS CUS ARIZ S/o mes uaeaees

2| Ostrea Virginiana, Lister......

DOreaiss 070) weeasneses

Anomia ephippium, Z..........

—— aculeata, Gi. ........008

alkerourmuee), Yor seosouacoadnoce

Sqamanal ayy Lee sete. esate

Terebratulina septentrionalis,

CottW UBB) A teaseca seo,

Rhynchonella psittacea, Gm. .

Waldheimia cranium, Gm. ..

oleinlime sinuata;, Ste case. sce.

Seaphander puncto-striatus,

Migh. § Ad. (1842) .........

Diaphana hiemalis, Co uth,

CE ie Ae ee

debilis, Gould (1840) ...

Utriculus Gouldii, Couth.

(WS39) eosesccshackedsstwecenes

pertenuis, Migh. .........

—— canaliculatus, Say ......

220) Cylichna alba, Br...............-

oryza, Tott. (1835) ......

solitaria, Say at eee

a, Migh. & Ad.

(CUES?) ee eo Oe Se

Tornatella puncto-striata, Ad.

Polycera Lessonii, D’ Orbigny.

Doris bilamellata, L.

tenella, Agassiz

pallida, Ag. (1870) ......

diademata, 4g. (1870)...

—— planulata, S¢. (1853) ..

GRISEA OG eciaaseeemeneeaee

North or South

of Cape Cod.

European.

1A 1A A

& &

AAIAAniAAA Ain

ZA Ala

Teel: Co ihe 888) :

Synonyms and Remarks.

C. faba, Fabr. (1780).

P. irradians, young.

O. Virginiana, var.

A, ephippium, vay.

A, ephippium, var.

A. ephippium, young.

Terebratula caput-serpentis, L.

(1764), var.

Miill., instead of Gm. G. Te-

rebratula.

Allied to P. nitida, which is

European.

P. lima, Br. (1827).

S. librarius, Lov. (1846).

Utriculusglobosus, Lov.( 1846).

Utriculus hyalinus, Turt.

(1834).

U. turritus, Moll. (1842).

U. Gouldii, young.

Bullautriculus,Brocchi(1814).

Cylichna striata, Br, (1827).

Perhaps Actgon pusillus. G.

Acton.

Perhaps D. inconspicua, which)

is European.

D. aspera, Alder & Hancock

(1842).

_D. tuberculata, Cuvier (1802).

D. repanda, A. & H. (1842)

| Very closely allied to D. in-

conspicua.”

242 Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

| Grd |

Peel

of |

‘ Name of Species. ad 2 Synonyms and Remarks.

So eee ah 1S

SS 2 2

Ay a &

233) Ancula sulphurea, S¢. ......... INFOS | aeees “Very lke to Ancula cristata,”

which is European.

234) Dendronotus arborescens,

THO tags ater Geer Coe N E

236] Doto coronata, Gm. ............ N E

238} Afolis papillosa, L. ......... N E

240 salmonacea, De Kay

(CIRCE) hoconosbdcurcocensagsods ING) creas | Eolis bodoensis, MOll. (1842).

241! —— Bostoniensis, Couth....... Nigga cseese “ Approaching closely E. coro-

nata of Forbes,” which is!

European.

242 rufibranchialis, Johnston.| N E

243 pilata, Gould ...:.......- N

245 Buell atew Ste pce seeaies stn N

246 PU PULCA WSC: mene ncesie ees HN

246 poletaeds juele encsene essere N

|= viersas COUWL/ts cs e.cccsees N

248 despecta, Johnst. ......... N EH

249| —— gymnota, De Kay......... IN) | Raasace “Nearly allied to E. concinna,”

which is Kuropean.

250| Calliopsea (?) fuscata, Gould...| N

251) Embletonia fuscata, Gould ...| N

252 remigata. Gould ......... N

253) Hermeza cruciata, Alex. Aq....| 8

254) Alderia Harvardiensis, 4g ...| N

255) Hlysia chlorotica, Ag. ......... N

256) Placobran chus catulus, 4g....| N

258) Limapontia zonata, Sz..........| N

258| Chiton apiculatus, Say......... s

259 (@QbaG EWES Ibs pospennncaeedon Ss H C. marginatus, not C. cinereus.

Asinglespecimen only ; ques-

tionable.

260 MUDEY) LOWE: wees ceavesee es: N E

261| —— marmoreus, Fabr. ...... N E

263 albus, Mont. . N E |L., not Mont.

263 mendicarius, Migh. § Ad.

((isi52)) re oseonoesccddeBeee a nnneTs N E |C. Hanleyi (Bean), Thorpe

(1844).

264, Amicula Emersonii, Cowth. ...| N

266) Dentalium dentale, L. ......... ING lee D. striolatum, var.

266 Entalis striolata, Sz, (1851)...| N Es Dentalium abyssorum, Sars

(1858), var.

267| Tectura testudinalis, Miil/. ...) N aD)

269 PR awh (CO Pyannosonnoncon 3 INNER esas T. testudinalis, vay.

270) Lepeta cxeca, Mill. ........ ... N EK

271) Crepidula fornicata, Z.......... N E

272 pla SW aes cepts nee Na ieee < C. fornicata, var.

273) —— convexa, Say ............ N

274 PENG, ISO) Gongon spacosese INIA lier eos C. fornicata, var.

275 Crucibulum striatum, Say ...| N

276, Cemoria noachina, L. ......... N E_ |G. Puncturella.

277| Ianthina fragilis, Deshayes ...| N E | Lam.,not Desh. Specifiename

changed to communis (1822).

Europe and Eastern North America.

243

Name of Species.

Adeorbis costulata, Moll. ......

Margarita cinerea, Couth. ...

undulata, Sowerdy (1838)

helicina, Fabr.............

argentata, Gould (1841).

obscura, Couth. .........

acuminata, Migh. & Ad..

varicosa, Migh. § Ad.

(1842)

pupoidea, Gould

Melantho decisa, Say

2) Amnicola pallida, Haldeman .

iibanayees ISI? Concecenmeoacee

PLANOM SAY seo. noses

295 Pomatiopsis lapidaria, Say ...

Skenea planorbis, Fabr. ......

North or South

of Cape Cod.

297| Rissoella? eburnea, Sf..........

297 Sulcosa,Miglint accesses

298) Rissoa minuta, Zozt. (1834)...

299, —— latior, Migh. & Ad. ......

299 aculeus, Gould (1841)...

300) ———-- mu | tilimeata, (SH. .<-.2.-..

301; —— Mighelsi, S¢................

301 XH baat aa eee neteen:

301; —— carinata, Migh. § Ad....

302) Lacuna vincta, Mont. (1803)..

303 neritoidea, Gould (1840)

304) Littorina rudis, Don. .........

306 tenebrosa, Mont. .........

308 Ritoneas sees as. ass cos tes:

309) —— palliata, Say (1822)

311 IEROLAtAUOCY- cep eeearescses

311) Scalaria Nov-anglix, Cowth....

312 lineata; SayG.Pi sees. -2--%-

313 multistriata, Say.........

314 Greenlandica, Ch..........

815) Cxcum pulchellum, Sé. ......

816) Vermetus radicula, S7..........

317) Turritella erosa, Couth.

(ASSO) baleniowsinsoucjanestscaences

318) reticulata, Migh. § Ad.

Ce ea ee

319 acicula, SUM <<. .eeacosces

320) Aporrhais occidentalis, Beck. .

Bittium nigrum, To??. .........

European.

Hee Fee

leoflcohcocoilcolc>|

Synonyms and Remarks.

G. Molleria.

|G. Trochus.

Trochus Grenlandicus, Ch.

(1781). |

G. Trochus. |

Trochus glaucus, MOll. (1842).

G. Trochus.

Trochus varicosus, young.

M. elegantissima (Bean), S.

Wood (1848). G. Trochus.

V. piscinalis, Mill. (1774), var.

G. Hydrobia.

G. Rissoa.

G. Rissoa, One specimen only.

Hydrobia ventrosa, Mont.

(1803), var.

R. striata, J. Adams (1795).

R. striata, var.

L. divaricata, Fabr. (1780).

L. pallidula, Turt. (1827), var.

Maton, instead of Don.

LL. rudis, var.

L. obtusata, Lu. (1766), var.

= L. limata, Low. (1846).

S. multistriata, var.

T. polaris, Méll. (1842).

T. lactea, Moll. (1842).

G. Cerithium.

244

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

' Name of Species.

322) Bittium Greenii, Ad. (1839)...

325) Triforis nigrocinctus, Ad...

325, Odostomia producta, Ad.......

325) AUSCAMEA CS tet tok cee siacta

327 eaibataesta ec: eascne:

327| —— modesta, Sz.......... cess.

327 bisuturalis, Say .........

328 inabatel,. ales, eandcceaeeseee

329 semimuda, Ad. \..0.c.+e-

330 impressa, Say (1822) ...

331) Turbonilla interrupta, Zod¢.

(SBA reese endeate case atseee

331 TUUVCR MO Coneeen ena qcoecte.

382) Eulima oleacea, Kurtz § St...

333} Menestho albula, Mod/..........

334) Velutina haliotcidea, abr.

(CULO) esac ad anonaya eno cee neces

339 zonata, Gould (1841) ...

3387, Lamellaria perspicua, LZ. ......

388) Lunatia heros, Say (1822

340 triseriata, Say ............

341 Greenlandica, Mol/. ......

342) Natica clausa, Broderip §& Sow.

(LSA ONE tendeets uevonwrsenctes

44 TOUSEN, ISH), 3865 ponecdee

344) Mamma? immaculata, Jof¢...

345) Neverita duplicata, Say ......

347) Culbus flavus, Gould (1840)...

348) Amauropsis heliccides, Johnst.

(VIGBE As ae ape ae a

349) Pleurotoma bicarinata, Cowzh.

350) —— plicata, Ad. (1842) ......

351| Bela turricula, Mont. .........

302 harpularia, Cowth. ......

309) violacea, Migh. § Ad.

CISA? \eeeeescneineuee cerecee tenes

304, —— decussata, Couth, (1841).

305 cancellata, Migh. § Ad.

USE) ts sche ce cseblnan tastes

355 pleurotomaria, Cowth.

(CLS) ES a np a

356) Columbella avara, Say.........

oo7 rosacea, Gould (1840)...

North or South

of Cape Cod.

European.

teenee

EEE S|

& &

Synonyms and Remarks.

Cerithiopsistubercularis, Mont.|

(1803).

O. impressa, var.

O. celata, Cailliaud (1865).

Melania rufa, Ph. (1836), var.

G. Odostomia.

Perhaps Turbo lacteus, L. G.

[ Odostomia.

Apparently not this species,

which is European.

V. levigata, Pennant (1777).

V. undata, Brown (1827).

Natica catenoides, 8. Wood)

(1848).

Natica heros, young.

Beck, fide Moll. G. Natica.

N. affinis, Gm. (1790).

G. Natica,

G. Natica.

Natica Smithii, Brown (1839)

=N. aperta, Loy. (1846).

Natica Islandica, Gm. (1790).

P. declivis, Loy. (1846).

G. Pleurotoma.

Defrancia Beckii, Moll. (1842).

G. Pleurotoma.

Pleurotoma Trevelyana, Turt.

(1834).

Defrancia Pingelii, Moll.

(1842). G. Pleurotoma.

Buccinum pyramidale, Strom

(179—). G. Pleurotoma.

C. Holboltit (Beck), Mall.

(1842).

Europe and Eastern North America.

245

; Name of Species.

358) Columbella dissimilis, S¢.

359, —— lunata, Say ............00

360} Purpura lapillus ...............

362)| Nassa obsoleta, Say ............

364 trivittata, Say (1822) ...

365 VAN OEE ISO PeodoneneeeccesOnee

866) Buccinum undatum, Z. ......

368) ciliatuns hohe sno ee

369; —— Donovyani, Gray (1839).

370 cinereum, Say ............

371| Fusus Islandicus, Gm..........

372 jonyeeEbeich YS) Geoeeenceeas

373 ventricosus, Gra7........-

374 tornatus, Gould (1840) ..

375 decemcostatus, Say ......

377, Trophon clathratus, Z. ......

378) —— scalariformis, Gouw/d

(ISAO aetewe cckecmceineacascens

379 muricatus, Mont.... .....

380) Busycon canaliculatum, J. ...

383 (Ente (GWZ0s Sonocbnancre Hee

385) Fasciolaria ligata, Wigh. § Ad.

386) Ranella caudata, Say .........

387) Cerithiopsis Emersonii, Ad....

389 terebralis, Ad. (1841) ...

390) Trichotropis borealis, Sow. ...

391) Admete viridula, Fatr..........

394) Vitrina limpida, Gould (1850)

395| Hyalina cellaria, Miid/..........

396 anboreay Sy ieweqse-e aoe

397 electrina, Gould (1841) .

398) indentata, Say ...........

399) minuscula, Binney ......

400, —— Binneyana, Morse ......

401; —— milium, Morse ............

401 fernea, MOnSe,csccssere ssc

402 chersina, Say (1821) ...

403 —— minutissima, Lea (1841)

404, —— multidentata, Binney ...

404 limentia, Sz), s.dreseenetes

406 Macrocyclis concava, Say......

407| Limax maximus, JZ. ............

408 BOTESUIS, is Fsuceeecencetee|

409 campestris, Binney (1841)

North or South

of Cape Cod.

European.

eeeces

esfles|

coe]

Be &

Synonyms and Remarks.

Subgenus Desmoulea.

N. propinqua, J. Sow. (1824).

| Not that species, but B. wn-

dulatum, Moll.

B. glaciale, L. (1766).

G, Urosa’pina, allied to Pur-

pura.

Not that species, but F. curtus,

Jeffr.

Not Buceinum Sabinii or Fu-|

sus Sabini, Gray.

F. despectus, lu. (1766).

Not that species, but 7. trun-

catus, Str.

T. clathratus, L. (1766).

Doubtful as American.

G. Cerithium, not Cerithiopsis.

C. trilineata, Ph. (1836).

Broderip and Sowerby’s. spe-

cies.

V. pellucida, Mull. (1774).

G. Zonites.

Closely allied to Z. excavatus,

but umbilicus much less open.

Zonites radiatulus, Alder

(1830), var. alba.

| Zonites fulvus, Mill. (1774).

| Helix pygmea, Drap. (1805).

L. levis, Mill. (1774).

246

Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca of

Name of Species.

am |

210) Snax Havas, 0h) vc.ccascsncas0e

412) Helix alternata, Say ............

413 striatella, Anthony ......

415) asteriscus, Morse .........

415 labyrinthica, Say ...... :

417; —— hirsuta, Say ...........-...

418} —— monodon, Racketé ......

420 Palliata, SOY -..25-..rcnece-

422) —— tridentata, Say.........-.-

423] —— albolabris, Say............

424 dentifera, Binn. .........

425| —— thyroides, Say............

426 SER ZU J2x00/0> sean anoosaaodbe

427 ——— ? harpa, SAY .s.-....r0c.00.

428 pulchella, Mii/l. .....

429 hortensis, iil. (1' 774).

431 Cionella subeylindrica, vbeermned

433 Pupa muscorum, L. ........-..-

433) —— Hoppii, Mill. ............

434 pentodon, Say ............

435) decora, Gould .........00+

436 alll Oe 817 soenbocnobsoecdos

437 GhecaWNeThy (SLA) Goodeoonsabe

438 contracta, Say ............

439 TAMONCOEL, NAA goccosaosece

439 corticaria, Say ............

440) Vertigo Gouldii, Binn. (1843)

441 milium, Gowld ........+s.-

442) —— Bollesiana, Morse (1865)

442 ovata, Say (1822) ...... |

443) —— ventricosa, Morse (1865).

444 simplex, Gould (1840)...

445 Succinea ovalis, Gould (1841).

446, AVAL, WSU acceerciesesee oe

447 obliqua, Say (1824)......

448 Totteniana,, 6d yessseeee

451 Arion fuseus, Mill. (1774) ...

453, Zonites inornata, Say .........

454 suppressa, Say............

454) fuliginosa, Griffith ..

457 Tebennophorus dorsalis, Binn.

465 Alexia myosotis, Drap.......... |

of Cape Cod.

| North or South

AA IAA AAA

AAA

424444 4% Aaa

466 Camghiam exiguum, Say

(1822)

European.

espeaiesiics|

feeeee

Synonyms and Remarks.

| Sweden.

|. nemoralis, L. (1766), var.

Perhaps that species, but de-

scribed as inhabiting fresh

water. Cochlicopa lubrica,

Mill.

Linné’s species is unascertain-

able. P. marginata, Drap.

V. alpestris, Ald. (1830).

V. pygmea, Drap. (1801).

V. antivertigo, Drap. (1801).

V. Moulinsiana, Dupuy

(1843).

V. edentula, Drap. edt

S. elegans, Risso (1826).

jeed to S. putris, var. ochra-

° aie L. (1766).

S. putris, var.

Perhaps that species. A. hor-

tensis, Férussac (1819).

Zonites is masculine; see De

Montfort.

G. Melampus.

| C. minimum, Mill. (1774).

Europe and Lastern North

America.

(247

Ho Name of Species.

os}

467| Melampus bidentatus, Say ...

471) Limneza columella, Say (1817)

473| —— decollata, ue antecaee

474 ampla, Migh. ......00.4.

475 elodes, Say (1821) ......

478} desidiosa, Say ............

479 catascopium, Say.........

480 umbilicata, Ad............-

481 palllrdastAd: Masceeeoakee ss

482 humilis, Say (1822) ......

483) Physa heterostropha, Sav

485) —=——sencillaria. S44) ccdeest- ese

486 Bulinus elongatus, Say (1821)

488 Planorbis trivolvis, Say ......

490 svannbey SYH07 So coaaasosee eee

491 bicarinatus, Say .........

492) —— campanulatus, Say ......

493; —— hirsutus, Gould (1840)..

494| —— deflectus, Say .........+.

495| —— exacutus, Say ............

497 parvus, Say (1817-19) ..

498 dilatatus, Gould .........

499) Segmentina armigera, Say .

501} Ancylus parallelus, Ha/d.......

502) —— fuscus, Ad. ...............

504) Diacria trispinosa, Lesweur ...

504) Psyche globulosa, Rang ......

505) Heterofusus balea, Moll/. ......

505 retroversus, Fleming AN

507| Clione limacina, Phipps (1773)

509) Loligopsis pavo, Les. .........

510 Ommastrephes sagittatus, Fé.

UEMNGROS _ Saccekemena tess snces

513 Loligo punctata, De Kay......|

514 TREAT Goobostobaacdes

516 Spirula fragilis, S¢. (1860) .

North or south

of Cape Cod.

weeeee

eeeee

Synonyms and Remarks.

Specific name preoccupied. M.

corneus, Desh.

L. peregra, Mill. (1774).

L. catascopium, var.

L. palustris, Mill. (1774).

L. truncatula, yar.

Allied to ZL. truncatula.

L. truncatula, var. elegans.

L. truncatula, Mill. (1774).

More nearly allied to P. riva-

lis, Mat. & Rack. than to P.

fontinalis.

Physa hypnorum, WL. (1766).

P. trivolvis, var.

P. albus, Mill. (1774).

P. albus, var. Draparnaldi.

Allied to P. nitidus.

P. glaber, Jeffr. (1828)

Perhaps introduced into Eng-

land and naturalized.

G. Planorbis.

Allied to A. lacustris.

G. Cavolina.

G. Spirialis.

C. papilionacea, Pallas (1766).

Lamarck’s species. G. Om-

matostrephes.

S. australis, Brug. (1789-92).

248 Messrs. Davidson and King on the Genera

XXXVII.—Remarks on the Genera Trimerella, Dimobolus,

and Monomerella. By 'THomas Davipson, F.R.S., F.G.8.,

&e., and WiLLIAM KiNG, Sce.D., Professor of Mineralogy

and Geology in Queen’s College, Galway.

THE genera named in the title constitute, in our opinion, a

new family, belonging to the helictobrachial section of the class

Palliobranchiata or Brachiopoda. We propose to designate

it Trimerellide, after the type genus. Although more or less

treated of by other writers, we have been induced, especially

by the desire of several intimate friends, who have kindly sup-

plied us with the loan of some valuable series of specimens, and

presented us with others, to undertake the further elucidation

of a most difficult and enigmatical group of shells; and for this

assistance our thanks are especially due to Lindstr6m, Walm-

stedt, Billings, Hall, Whitfield, Meek, and others. These

“‘ Remarks,” it is necessary to state, are merely preliminary to

a detailed memoir we have been preparing for some time past,

and which we hope to have completed for the Geological Society

in the early part of next session.

The Trimerellids differ much from all others of their class ;

though their proximate alliance to certain forms seems to admit

of determination. We think there is little doubt of their being

not only structurally related to the Lingulide *, but also gene-

tically connected with this family. The first point is of con-

siderable interest, inasmuch as the Lingulids are the earliest

Palliobranchs that geologists are acquainted with, occurring

in Cambrian rocks; while the Trimerellids do not seem to

have been in existence prior to the next systemal group, all

the forms belonging to the Lower and Upper Silurians. It

would therefore appear that the Trimerellids, adopting the

doctrine of genetheonomy (by which we mean evolution of

species effected mainly through the operation of Divine laws,

and not by purposeless or accidental modificationst), have

been produced out of the Lingulids. Moreover, considering

that the earliest Palliobranchs, taking them to be represented

by the existing aniferous Lingulas, are of a simpler type than

the non-aniferous Terebratulids and Rhynchonellids that suc-

ceeded them, the conclusion suggests itself that the latter

and simpler groups are the degraded successors of a type

that existed in the earliest known Life-period of our planet.

Another matter for consideration is the fact that the Cambrian

Lingulids were furnished with a framework of a horny or

* For the present we include Obolus and other related genera in the

Lingulide—though we are strongly inclined to regard the genus named

as typical of another family, Obolide.

+ See ‘Geologist,’ vol. v. p. 254.

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monomerella. 249

slightly calcareous nature, as was generally the case with

their contemporaneous Ccelenterates and Crustaceans, making

it doubtful that ordimary marine calcium compounds were

important solutions in the seas of their period; while the

fact that the Trimerellids had essentially a calcareous frame-

work, as was the case with a vast number of their coeval orga-

nisms, seems to show not only that such compounds had

increased in the Silurian seas, but further to support the con-

clusion that the family we are engaged with is a post-genetheo-

nomic branch of the Lingulids. With the physical changes

indicated, the shells of the present family underwent i important

modifications compared with the group from which they pre-

sumedly originated.

The ‘Trimerellids are strongly differentiated by the variety

and form of their parts. ‘The species, in general remarkably

distinguished by their massive umbonal region, have, speaking

subject to correction, the ventral or rostral valve characterized

by possessing twenty-four different parts, their dorsal one

having sixteen. Many of the parts are so unlike what are seen

in other families as to defy all attempts to determine their uses

or functions. One consideration that strikes us forcibly is that

such parts as the teeth and cardinal process (essentials in other

Palliobranchs) are exceedingly mutable, not only in a genus,

but in a species: besides, they are rarely well defined. The

teeth may be large and crude in certain individuals, but rudi-

mentary or obsolete in others of the same species. The car-

dinal process may be a thick projecting lamina, or rude in

shape and massive, or absent altogether. The deltidium

seems to be less lable to modifications: situated on a well-

developed area, it is bounded by two rather prominent ridges,

one on each side, with their inner and projecting terminations

serving as teeth. ‘The usual areal border hes on the outside

of each of the deltidial ridges. The deltidium itself is, in

general, wide and transversely marked with strong lamina-like

lines: it presents the appearance of being excavated out of

the areal face (or underlying solid portion) of the beak, agreeing

in this respect with what obtains in Lingula. In our forth

coming memoir it will be shown that another part, the deltidial

slope, further testifies to the close affinity between the Trime-

rellids and the last-named genus. The hinge or cardinal

plate, which requires more explanation than can be given on

the present occasion, is so variable in one species (77 rimerella

Lindstrémz) as to be with difficulty recognized in some indi-

viduals, The hinge-wall, as will shortly be seen, is equally

subject to variation. The umbo or beak, which is usually

prominent, presents itself under different appearances. Some-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 19

250 Messrs. Davidson and King on the Genera

what constant in form, it may, according to the species, be sub-

conical and massive, or compressed into a thin V-shaped

plate: in one genus it is obtusely rounded. In the first of

these conditions it may be solid or double-chambered: the

chambers are separated by either a thick or a thin partition ;

and they are shallow and. wide-mouthed, or long and tubular.

We are not acquainted with any thing strictly resembling the

pattition in other Palliobranchs. In Pentamerus, itis true, the

umbonal cavity is divided by a medio-longitudinal plate, giving

rise to two lateral chambers: in this last genus, however, the

dividing plate is double, causing it, when a specimen is suitably

struck with the hammer, to split lengthwise into two halves ;

but no such division has occurred to us in any specimens of

Trimerellids. The undivided condition of the partition seems

to be explained on the view that this part is a modified form

of the hinge-wall. Passing to the parts seen in the general

or valvular cavity of the Trimerellids, the principal are the

great muscle-bearing platforms, of which an example occurs

in each valve. A similar homologous duplication characterizes

other families—Pentamerids, Lepteenids, &e.; but the myo-

phores generally occur under a widely different shape. In the

typical genus of the present family the platforms are elevated

and doubly vaulted, the vaults bemg tubular and separated by

a partition. ‘The latter part is continued beyond or in advance

of each platform, where it becomes the ordinary medio-longi-

tudinal septum. A tendency to double-vaulting may be ob-

served in the myophores of some other Palliobranchs, particu-

larly Leptena Dutertric; in which the ventral one curves over

and rests upon the medio-longitudinal septum, forming thereby

a doubly vaulted arch. But the nearest approach to this

peculiarity, as pointed out by Billings, is undoubtedly pre-

sented by the genus Obolus, in which certain muscle-bearing

scars, usually excavated, have an overlapping posterior margin :

in Crania something similar is seen. The platforms, with their

tubular vaults and biconvex. surface, remind one of a double-

barrelled pistol. With a pair of this kind associated, as is often

the case, with a couple of tubular umbonal chambers, the inte-

rior of Trimerella presents a singular appearance. In Mono-

merella both platforms are solid and slightly raised ; and con-

sequently the absence of vaults gives the interior of this genus

a totally different aspect: the umbonal cavity, however, con-

tains two large chambers. Dzenobolus has neither a vaulted

platform, nor a chambered umbo. Lach of these three genera

contains species in which the myophores vary considerably,

being reduced to so rudimentary a condition that it is difficult

to allocate the species generically. Hall has been induced to

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monomerella. 251

raise an aberrant species of the kind to the rank of a genus,

Ehynobolus; but this step appears to us to be attended with

considerable disadvantage, as it would necessitate instituting

a genus for every aberrant form. ‘The scars are numerous

and exceedingly complicated by the modifications of the dif-

ferent parts, as just pointed out. After some consideration we

have abandoned the attempt to homologize them, except in a

few cases. We think the posterior crescent, with its loop and

lanceolate scars, corresponds to the post-aponeural impressions

in Lingula and Discina. We are unable to specify which

scars have been produced by the valvular muscles, except

some situated on the platforms: and with respect to the latter,

our efforts to identify them with the valvulars of Lingula (the

nearest living representative, as we believe) have not, it is to be

apprehended, been attended with much success. We have,

for the reasons stated, refrained as far as possible from em-

ploying terms for the different scars implying their uses, and

have, instead, simply given them names denoting their relative

position, distinguishing the group in the dorsal valve from

that of the ventral one by a different type. Certain scars, or

other parts, apparently occupying the same relative positions

in the two valves, and which appear to be analogous, bear

the same letter, but in a different type: nothing more is meant

by this mode of lettering.

The geographical distribution of the Trimerellids is a matter

of some importance. [minently a Silurian group, one might

have expected the well-explored region which the labours of

Murchison have made classical would have yielded an abund-

ance of examples; but it is remarkable that only a few speci-

mens of a single genus, Dinobolus, and apparently the last of

their race, have been met with, in the Wenlock limestones

and shales near Dudley, and discovered for the first time in

1852. Identical deposits in Gothland contain the same species ;

but a greater variety of the family occurs rather abundantly

in rocks of the “ Aymestry ” age of that remarkable locality.

Canada and adjacent districts in the United States have yielded

the greatest variety of species, all of which, with the exception

of Dinobolus canadensis and D. magnifica, are referable to

the Upper Silurians. The two species last named occur in

the Black-River limestone, a rock which appears to be equi-

valent to the Upper Llandeilo, or to the base of the Caradoc

of this country. A species of Monomerella has also been found

in Livonia (Russia) in rocks corresponding in age with those

in which the same genus occurs in Gothland.

Our labours on the Trimerellids have enabled us to confirm,

for the most part, the conclusions of previous writers as to

19%

252 On two new Philippine-Island Birds.

the number of species, and to determine the existence of some

others. The three genera are severally constituted in species

as follows :—

Trimerella grandis, Bellings. Dinobolus galtensis, Billings.

acuminata, Billings. Davidsoni, Salter.

— Lindstrémi, Dall. transversus, Salter.

—— Billingsii, Dall. — Woodwardi, Salter.

ohioensis, Meek. magnifica, Billings.

Dalli, Dav. & King. Monomerella Walmstedti, Dav. &

wisbyensis, Dav. § King. King.

Dinobolus Conradi, Hall. —- prisca, Billings.

canadensis, Billings.

orbicularis, Billings.

With one or two exceptions, all the species will be fully

illustrated in five lithographic plates in our forthcoming

memoir; in addition to which there will be two woodcut

plates of diagram figures explaining the various parts briefly

noticed on the present occasion, and another showing the

relationship of Lingula to the family.

XXXVIII.—On two new Species of Birds from the Philippine

Islands. By Artuur Viscount WALDEN, P.Z.8., F.R.S.

Hyloterpe philippinensis, n. sp.

Feathers of the chin, cheeks, throat, and upper breast silky

white, edged more or less with cinereous, a dingy sordid aspect

being thus given to these parts; an indistinct obscure zone

crossing the breast and bordering the upper breast-plumage,

consisting of feathers which are dark ashy at their base, then

pure white, tipped with dirty yellow; the remainder of the

under plumage with the flanks and under tail-coverts sulphur-

yellow, each feather, however, being iron-grey at the base

and then white; entire head dark smoke-brown, lighter on

the ear-coverts; remainder of upper plumage olive green,

rather darker on the outer edges of the quills and on the

rectrices ; under carpals and axillaries pale lemon-white ; tail

slightly forked; bill horn-brown.

Longitudo

Rostr. a nar. Alea. Caudee. Tarsi.

0:32 3°25 ole 0:75

From an example obtained in Luzon by Dr. B. Meyer and

labelled a ‘‘ male,”

Orthotomus castaneiceps, n. Sp.

Entire head, lores, streak under the eyes, and the ear-coverts

chestnut; nape and interscapulary region dark ashy, with

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 253

scarcely a tinge of olive-green ; feathers of the middle of back,

uropygium, and upper tail-coverts dark ashy at base, with

yellowish olive-green tips; quills brown, with bright yellowish-

green outer edges; rectrices above paler brown, edged near

their insertion and more or less throughout their length

with the bright yellowish green of the quills; outer rectrices

decidedly darker brown than the middle pair; the middle pair,

which is longest, with a faint subterminal bar or drop; the

next pair with an obvious dark subterminal drop, which is

still more evident in the remaining rectrices; all the rectrices

with a narrow albescent terminal fringe; on their under sur-

faces the green edgings appear brighter than when seen from

above; a few of the chin-feathers fulvous; throat and cheeks

ashy white; feathers of the breast pale ash, with broad luteous

or yellowish-white centres, giving the breast a striped appear-

ance; the remainder of the feathers of the under plumage silky

white, ashy at the base; those of the flanks with a faint yel-

lowish tinge ; shoulder-edge and under carpals yellowish white ;

axillaries silky white, tipped with yellowish green; thigh-

coverts pale ferruginous ; maxilla pale horn-brown ; mandible

yellowish white; legs like the maxilla, only paler. A large

species with a long and stout bill.

Longitudo

Rostr. a nar. Ale. Caudee. Tarsi.

0:50 2 2:20 0°85

Obtained in the Philippine island of Guimaras by Dr. B.

Meyer during the month of March. The single example pro-

cured is labelled a “ male.”

XXXIX.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.

K. Parker, F.R.S., and Prof. T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S.,

Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg.

[Continued from p. 200. |

XIX. MiscELLANEOUS RECENT FORAMINIFERA.

§1. Tripoli from San Francisco. (Monatsber. 1853, p. 216.)

Pl. xxxin. xin. fig. 27, Grammostomum simplex, seems to be

a young Bolivina dilatata (?).

§2. Blown Sand, Libyan Desert.

Pl. xxxiv. x. A. 6. Zriloculina? Indeterminable.

§ 3. Blown Sand, Baltic, near Wismar, Mecklenburg.

Pl. xxxrv. x. B. 1. Rotalia globulosa = Planorbulina globulosa.

254. Messrs. Parker and Jones on

§ 4. Deep-sea mud, Afgean Sea; 1200 feet (H. Forbes, 1842).

(Monatsb. Berl. Akad. Wiss. 1854.)

PL. xxxyv. A. xx. A. 6. Rotalia globulosa? = Planorbulina glo-

bulosa (Khr.), or Globigerina ?

With Spicules, Diatoms, Polycystines, and sand *.

$5. Anchor-mud, Cape Blanco, West Africa.

Pl. xxxv. A. x1x. B. 3. Calcarina atlantica = Planorbulina?

With Spicules and Diatoms.

§6. Anchor-mud, Spitzbergen. (Monatsh. 1841, p. 206;

Abhandl. 1841, p. 364.)

Pl. xxv. A. xx. 9. Uvigerina? borealis. Indeterminable ; but

it may be four chambers of a Planorbulina (Truncatu-

lina) ?

With Spicules, Diatoms, and sand.

$7. Deep-sea Mud, South Pole; 1620 feet, S. lat. 62° 42/,

W. long. 55°. (Monatsb. 1844, p. 191. Sir James Clark Ross,

‘Voyage in the Southern and Antarctic Regions,’ vol. 1. p. 344,

1847. Ann. Nat. Hist. no. 90, vol. xiv. p. 169.)

Pl. Xxxv. A. Xxil. 22. Guttulina? divergens (=“ Grammo-

stomum, 1844”). Indeterminable; it may perhaps be

a Bulimina.

With Diatoms, Spicules, Polycystines, and sand.

§8. Sea-life of the Deep Atlantic. (Monatsb. 1853, p. 782 ;

1854, pp. 54-75, 236-250.)

Pl. xxxv. B. Iv. A. Group of Foraminifera, Spicules, Diatoms,

Polycystines, and sand; from 10800 feet depth: mag-

nified 100 diameters.

e,f, m. Globigerina, sp.? Globigerina bullordes.

g. Glob. bulloides.

h. Pulvinulina Menardit.

t. —— { eal \ Small thick-set Globigerina bulloides.

porosa. .

fet. ,sp-2? Globigerina (small).

n. Rotalia, sp.? Small Cristellaria or Nonionina?

o. 'Textilaria, sp.2 Small stout Zext. gibbosa.

p. Grammostomum aculeatum. Vulvulina aculeata (Ehr.).

With Spicules, Polycystines, Diatoms, and sand.

g, h. Planulina, sp.? ‘

* Tn the ‘ Monatsberichte’ for 1858 (1859, pp. 10-30) Dr. Ehrenberg

has given short descriptions of eight ‘‘new genera” and seventy-one

“new species ” of Foraminifera from the Aigean Sea and the deep water

of the Mediterranean. Unfortunately this interesting catalogue is not

illustrated.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera, 255

Magnified 300 diameters :—

Figs. 1 & 2. Ptygostomum Orphei. From 840 feet. = Gobi-

gerina bulloides, rough shell.

Figs. 3 & 4. Phanerostomum atlanticum. From 6480 feet.

Glob. cretacea, smooth.

Figs. 5& 6. Globigerina ternata. From 840 feet. Glob. bul-

loides, ordinary heaped var.

Fig.7. Spiropleurites nebulosus. From 10800 feet. Pulvi-

nulina repanda, outspread form.

g. 26 represents a small G'lobigerina on a living Conferva

(Hygrocrocis Hrebi) from 12000 feet (about 21 miles)

depth.

§9. Volcanic May-dust, of May 1812; Barbadoes, West

Indies. (Monatsb. 1850, p. 359.)

Pl. xxxviil. XXxt. fig. 22. Rotalia globulosa. This appears to

be a Globigerina.

$10. Halibiolithic Volcanic Mud, Moya, Scheduba, Eastern

Archipelago. (Monatsb. 1846, pp. 171, 207.)

Pl. XXXVI. XXII. fig. 1. Rotalia globulosa. Planorbulina.

fig. 2. Textilaria leptotheca. Vargulina

Schreibersi?, Cz.

fig. 3. T. globulosa. Test. globulosa, Khy.

fig. 4, Textilaria. 7. gibbosa, D’Orb.

fig. 5. T.aculeata. 7. subangulata, D’Orb.

$11. Storm-dust.

Pl. xxxix. fig. 140. Textilaria globulosa. Small 7. gibbosa or

T. globulosa.

§ 12. Sirocco-dust in Malta, 1830.

Pl. xxx1x. m1. e. Rotalia globulosa (senaria ?). This is proba-

bly a Globigerina ; but perhaps it 1s Planorb. globulosa.

$13. Coloured Rain in Ireland, April 14, 1849. (Monatsb.

1849, p. 200.)

Pl. xxxix. xiv.g. Textilaria globulosa? This seems to be

either a small rough-shelled 7. gibbosa, or a G'lobigerina

of irregular shape.

XX. MIscELLANEOUS Fosst, FORAMINIFERA.

$1. Polycystina-deposits of Barbadoes and Nicobar Islands*,

* We refer the student to the beautiful plates of Dr. Conrad Schwager’s

memoir on the fossil Foraminifera of Kar Nikobar (‘ Novara-Expedition,

Geol. Theil, vol. ii. 1864, and ‘Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc.’ vol. xxviii. p. 125)

for more abundant illustrations,

256 _ Messrs. Parker and Jones on

(Monatsb. 1846, p. 382, with illustrations; 1847, pp. 40-60 ;

1850, p. 476, &e. Schomburgk, ‘ History of Barbadoes,’ 1848,

p- 556, pls. 1, 2, p. 560.)

Pl. xxxvi. fig. 67. Planulina mica. Young Planorbulina.

fig. 68. Rotalia? Planorbulina ammonotdes.

§2. Nummulitic Limestone of Traunstein, Bavaria. (Mo-

natsb. Juli 1854.) Magnified 300 diam.

Pl. xxxvu.tv.1. Guttulina turrita? Verneuilina pygmea

(Egger).

2. Mesopora chloris. (A green internal cast.)

Some early segments of a Haplophragmium.

3. Planulina ammonis. Operculina. Compare

Op. levis, Giimbel, 1868, ‘ Foram. nord-

alp. Hociingeb.’ pl. 1. fig. 113.

4. Rotalia rudis. Obscure; probably a prickly

Globigerina coated with calcareous granules.

§3. Pliner (Lower Chalk) Limestone, Teplitz, Bohemia.

(Monatsh. 1844, p. 414.) Magnified 300 diam,

Pl. xxxvu. vi.1. Cenchridium oliva. An entosolenian La-

gena globosa.

2. Proroporus crete? Probably a Polymor-

hina.

3 & 4. Rotalia globulosa tenuior. mee:

5 SEs Globigerina.

pertusas

6. Textilaria ¢lobulosa.

7 ca ee Text. globulosa.

§ 4. Hornstone (Cretaceous) pebble, Delitzsch, Saxony. (Ab-

handlungen, 1836, p. 110 &c. pl. 1.)

Pl. xxxvu. vit. 12. Textilaria globulosa. (A cast; magn.

100 diam.) Indeterminable.

Together with Xanthidia, Peridinia, &c.

§5. Hornstone of the Coral-rag, Cracow. (Monatsb. 1836,

p- 196; 1843, p. 161; Abhandl. 1838, pp. 39, 76, 78.) Mag-

nified 300 times linear.

Pl. xxxvu. vu. 5. Nodosaria urceolata, 1838. A cast. No-

dosaria.

6. Soldania elegans, 1838. A cast. Cristel-

laria.

Together with Xanthidia &e.

§6. Yellow Jurassic Melonia-limestone from the Kaiserstuhl,

Baden. (Monatsb. 1843, p. 105.)

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 257

Pl. xxxvu. rx. A. A small piece, of the natural size, consisting

of minute, globular, uniform bodies, lying in ‘contact

without calcareous cement. Fig. 1, Borelis (Melonia)

spheroidea (1842); figs. 2 & 3, sections. Magnified 20

diam. These have externally the appearance of Alveoline,

prolately spheroidal in shape; the internal structure,

however, though obscure, is not that of Alveolina (Borelis

of Montfort and Ehrenberg), but is like that seen in Fu-

sulina, Endothyra, and Involutina. Regarding Ehren-

berg’s specimens as Hndothyra, and taking the rock for

Jurassic, these are the youngest known of that genus*.

$7. Yellow Jurassic Melonia-limestone, York, England.

(Monatsb. /. c.)

This is said to have the same appearance as IX. A., but to differ

by containing some few extraneous objects, such as B. 1,

Nodosaria, sp.? ; 2, Textilaria, sp.?; 3, Cypris? These are

figured of the natural size. Figs. 1 & 2 are clearly as

stated. Fig. 3 is a simple, convex, oval object, possibly

a Cytherella (2). As to the presumed Alveoline character

of this Oolite we have no further evidence than the state-

ment quoted above.

§ 8. Pl. xxxvir. rx.c. A brown ‘ Melonia-limestone” from

the Oolites of Bath is also alluded to, and a minute Z7o-

chus or Pleurotomaria? is figured from it (c.1). There is,

however, no figured evidence of the presumed Alveoline

character of this rock.

§9. Melonia- and Alveolina-limestones and hornstones of

Russia. (Monatsb. 1842, p. 273; 1843, pp. 79, 106.) A white

Sriable Bellerophon-limestone from Witegra on the Onega Lake.

Pl. xxxvu. x. A. A piece figured nat. size. Figs. 1-4, Tex-

tilaria paleotrochus, nat. size and 4 diam. This is a Val-

vulina (compare xt. 12 & 13). Together with small

Polyzoan(?) stems (figs. 5 & 6).

X.B is a similar rock, with minute helicoid shells (B. 1,

EKuomphalus? nanus, and B. 2, Hu.? inversus), which are

much like Spirorbis.

§ 10. Melonia- and Alveolina-hornstone of the Mountain-

limestone of the Pinega (Dwina), Archangel. (Monatsh. 1842,

p- 273; 1843, p. 106.)

Pl. xxxvit. x. c. A piece, nat. size. ©. figs. 1-4, Borelis prin-

* In a sketch of the range of Foraminifera in time, by one of us, in the

‘Proceed. Geol. Assoc.’ vol. iii. pp. 180 & 182, Fusulina was inadvertently

made to take the place of Endothyra in this Jurassic stage.

258 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

ceps, nat. size and magn. 4 diam. Ovoidin shape. Figs.

5, a, b, Alveolina montipara, nat. size and magn. 4 diam.

Fusiform. [In the plate, fig. 5, outline or longitudinal

section, nat. size; fig. 6, longitudinal section, opened by

weathering, magn.] ‘There can be no doubt of these shells

being (fig. 5) Husulina cylindrica, Fischer, and (fig. 4)

its short spheroidal variety.

$11. Melonia-hornstone of the Mountain-limestone of

Witegra.

Pl. xxxvul. x.p. A piece, nat. size. oD. figs. 1-4, Borelis

spheroidea? (1842), nat. size, and views and _ section

magn. Very small, oblately spheroidal, deeply and evenly

furrowed longitudinally ; chambers small (or nearly filled),

decidedly Fusuline in character. Figs. 5, 6, B. constricta,

nat. size and magn. Such a /usulina as this has been

found fossil in the Arctic Regions*. Figs. 7-9, Alveolina

prisca (1842); nat. size and magn. This is a Fusulina

like c.5. Figs. 10, 1 a—-f, represent Borelis (Melonia) melo,

from the Karst, near Trieste, for comparison. This is a

true simple Alveolina, with a section very different from

that of any of the above.

$12. Hornstone of the Mountain-limestone, with Spirifer

mosquensis, from Tula, Russia, (Monatsb. 1843, pp. 79, 106.)

Pl. xxxvil. x1. A—D. The material variously shown.

Figs. 1, 2. Alveolina prisca? ‘These are internal casts of Fu-

sulina cylindrica; but the shape of the chambers is not

so definitely quadrangular as in figs.5 & 8. This may be

due either to mineralization or to some obliquity in the

section.

Fig. 3. Borelis labyrinthiformis (1843). A vertical section of

the internal cast of a Husulina, of an oblate-spheroidal

shape.

Figs. 4,5. B. paleophus. Casts of a Pusulina, with short alar

prolongations of the chambers, and therefore to some ex-

tent Nummuline in shape, being discoidal with keeled

edge.

Fig. 6. B. paleophacus. A cast of a similar but thicker Fw-

sulina.

Figs. 7, 8. B. paleosphera. Casts of a somewhat similar

Fusulina, but barrel-shaped, having considerably produced

ale. In shape it corresponds with x. p. 1-4.

* Fusulina hyperborea, Salter, in Belcher’s ‘ Arctic Voyage,’ 1855, vol. ii.

p. 380, pl. xxxvi. figs. 1-3,

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 259

Fig. 9. Grammostomum bursigerum. Embedded cast of a

Textilaria (to all appearance), with oval segments.

Fig. 10. Nodosarta index. Chamber-casts of a doubtful Fora-

minifer, in a row, with indications of a narrow straight

shell, but showing no stolons.

Fig. 11. Rotalia antiqua. <A_ rotaliform Endothyra; with

chamber-easts like those of small Planorbuline (Mantell,

Philos. Transact. 1846, pl. xxi.), and at the same time

like those of Phillips’s Endothyra Bowmani (Proc. Geol.

Polytech. Soc. W. Riding Yorkshire, 1846, vol. ii. p. 277,

pl. vii. fig. 1).

Fig. 12. Tetrataxis conica (1843); fig. 13. T. conica?, side

view (“compare Teaxtilaria paleotrochus”). As before

intimated, this is a Valvulina, or at least a Valvuline

modification of Trochammina.

Fig. 14. Textilaria falcata. Probably the edge view of fig. 17.

Fig. 15. 7. lagenosa. ‘The same as fig. 9.

Figs. 16 & 16*. 7. dunata (1843). Apparently a broad pyra-

midal Textilaria.

Fig. 17. 7. recurvata. Side view of 7. falcata, fig. 14.

Forms similar to figs. 11,12, 13, 14, and 17, besides others,

have been found in the Mountain-limestone of England and

Scotland by Messrs. Tennant, Darker, Phillips, Sorby, Hark-

ness, Holl, Young, Moore, and Brady. ‘The last-named has

made a preliminary notice of them in the Brit. Assoc. Report

for 1869, Trans. Sect. p. 881, and has elaborated one form in

particular (Saccammina Carter?) in the Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. vu. p. 177 &c., pl. xii. See also “‘ Monogr. Polymorph.,”

Linn. Soe. Trans. vol. xxvu. p. 199.

Fusulina.—With regard to the Fusuline specimens, Prof.

Ehrenberg has evidently taken Alveolina melo, var. 8 (F.& M.),

the Melonia spheroidea of De Blainville (1824), as the type for

those having a prolately spheroidal shape. This is also the

Borelis melonioides of De Montfort (1808) ; hence the use also

of the latter generic termt. But the Carboniferous specimens

are not of this genus, and had been rightly discriminated by

Fischer de Waldheim f.

+ For a bibliographic history of Alveolina, see our memoir in Ann. Nat.

Hist. ser. 3, vol. vi. pp. 161 &e.

¢ ‘Oryctograph. Moscou,’ 1830, p. 17, pl. xiii. Figs. 1-5 illustrate his

Fusulina cylindrica ; and figs. 6-11 are devoted to his /. depressa, which

is the same as F. cylindrica, but showing a different aspect of interior,

being opened at a different portion of the surface by weathering. See

also ‘Grbigny in ‘Geol. Russia, &c. vol. ii. p. 15; and D’Eichwald’s ‘ Le-

thea Rossica,’ 5° livr. 1859, pp. 349 &e.

260 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

In treating of Fusulina in the Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol.

viii. p. 166 (1861), we regarded it as an Alveolina; but Dr.

Carpenter’s researches have settled its higher rank as a hyaline

and tubuliferous shell near Nonionina and Nummulina*, as

intimated by D’Orbigny. Prof. Ehrenberg seems to have

adopted the terms ‘ Alveolina” and “ Borelis” for the long and

short Fusuline respectively t. If arranged in order, according

to the amount of compression or the diminishing length of

axis, the Fusuline figured in the plate before us would stand

thus :—

i Hts tar

1. Alveolina prisca. x. D. 7-9. Pee ae oP

ee montipara. X.C. 5, a, b. Brera nme tet: IGE IS

at lindrica and Ff’, depressa.

3. prisca? x1.1, 2. Long barrel-shaped.

4, Borelis constricta. x. D. 5,6. Cylindrical, but con-

stricted in the middle.

3. princeps. x.c. 1-4. Ovoid.

6. spheroidea. x. D. 1-4. \ Oblately spheroidal ;

fs paleosphera. XI. 7, 8. barrel-shaped.

8. —— labyrinthiformis. x1. 38. Deeply oblate; thick

disk with rounded edges.

9. paleophacus. x1. 6. Biconvex, with flattened

faces; a disk with attenuate margin.

10. —— paleophus. x1. 1-5. Lenticular.

Thus, with every possible gradation of shape between them,

the longitudinal section of the first is of the same outline as the

vertical cross section of the last; whilst all present the same

spiral arrangement of chambers (subquadrangular in section)

when exposed by a median section across the long specimens,

and parallel to the two faces in the discoidal and lenticular

forms.

Fusulina cylindrica has been found in the Carboniferous

rocks on the Ohiof and of Upper Missouri (Marcou, ‘ Geol. Map

U.S. and Canada,’ text p. 86, 8vo, Boston, 1853; and Meek

and Hayden, ‘ Paleontol. Upper Missouri,’ 1865, pl. 1. figs.

* “Introd. Study Foram.’ 1862, p. 804 &e.; ‘Month. Microscop. Journ.’

1870, p. 180.

+ We are obliged to come to this conclusion, although our respected

author had a decidedly different opinion in 1842. In the Monatsb. 1842,

p- 274, he states that “1. Melonia (Borelis) spheroidea, 2. B. constricta,

3. B. princeps (2 lines long), and 4. Alveolina prisca (1 line long, fusiform),

occurring mixed up together in the white Carboniferous Miliolite-limestone

of the Oneida Lake, are very different as to species from the evidently

allied Fusuling of Russia.”

t De Verneuil, ‘Silliman’s Amer. Journ.’ ser. 2, vol. ii. 1846, p. 293 ;

Bullet. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 2, vol. iv. pp. 682, 684, & 708.

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 261

6a-67). Also in California (Meek and Gabb, ‘Geol. Surv. Cali-

fornia, Paleont.’ vol. i. 1864, p. 4, pl. i. fig. 2), together with 7’.

gracilis (fig. 1, p.4) and F. robusta (fig. 3, p. 38). Abich found

his Fusulina spherica in the Caucasus: “ Vergleich. Grund-

ziige Kaukas.” &c., Mém. phys.-math. Acad. St.-Pétersb. vol.

vu. pl. ii. fig. 18. B. F. Shumard found a Permian Fusulina

(Ff, elongata) in New Mexico and Texas: Transact. Acad.

St. Louis, vol. i. no. 2, 1858, p. 297; see also Hayden’s ‘ Re-

ports.’ /. robusta has also been found in the Upper Carbon-

iferous Limestone of the Southern Alps (Canal-Thal, Uggo-

witz). Prof. Suess regards it as the same as J. spherica,

Abich, and notes its occurrence, with £. cylindrica, in Russia*.

There can be little doubt, with the evidence of gradational

forms given in the ‘Mikrogeologie,’ pl. xxxvii., that all these

and even other Husulinw may belong to one and the same

zoological species. It is highly probable also that, on strict

comparison, one and the same variety would be found to have

claim to two or more of the names quoted above and in the

foregoing list, made from the ‘ Mikrogeologie.’

In a specimen of white /usulina-limestone, brought from

Russia by the late Sir R. I. Murchison, we have found well-

characterized fragments of Dentalina communis and a conical

Valvulina. Such a form, recent, passes into Trochammina

squamata; and T’r. inflata passes into Lituola; and Lituola,

through Zrochammina, becomes Involutina and Endothyra t.

This low Rotaluform shell (Hndothyra) occurs in specimens

collected by Dr. Holl from some clay-seams of the English

Carboniferous Limestone, in sections of Carboniferous Lime-

stone made by Prof. Phillips, of oolitic Mountain-limestone

made by Mr. H. C. Sorby, and in several other collections.

As Valvulina passes gradually into Trochammina by traceable

links (Brady), and as the last and Jnvolutina are closely related,

we are not surprised to find a variety of modifications, even

Textilariiform, of this low group in the Paleozoic strata, and,

on the other hand, Kndothyran modifications higher up in the

series, as Khrenberg’s Jurassic “‘ Borelis spheroidea”’ (IX. A.

1-3) above noticed (p. 257).

Miscellaneous Fossil Foraminifera figured by Ehrenberg in the

‘ Mikrogeologie.’

1. Barbadoes (late Tertiary).

Planorbulina (young), and Pl. ammonoides (fss.).

* See Suess’s valuable note on the distribution of Fusulina in America,

Europe, and Armenia, Proc. Geol. Inst. Vienna, Jan. 4, 1870; Quart.

Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. Miscell. p. 3.

+ See above, p. 259; also H. B. Brady’s notes on these Foraminifera,

Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. vi. pp. 50-52.

262 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

2. Nummnulitic Limestone, Traunstein, Bavaria.

1. Haplophragmium.

2. Verneuilina pygmeea (Lgger).

3. Globigerina ?

4, Operculina ammonis (hr.).

3. Pliner-Kalk, Teplitz, Bohemia.

1. Lagena (Entosolenia) globosa (Monitaq.).

2.. Polymorphina ?

3. Textilaria globulosa, hr.

4, Globigerina.

4. Hornstone (Cretaceous), Saxony.

1. Textilaria globulosa, Ehr.

5. Coral-rag, Cracow.

Nodosaria and Cristellaria.

6. Jurassic Limestone, Kaiserstuhl, Baden.

1. Endothyra spheroidea (Hhr.).

7. Jurassic Limestone, York, England.

Nodosaria and Textilaria.

8. Jurassic Limestone, Bath, England.

g. Carboniferous Limestone, Witegra, Russia.

1. Valvulina (Tetrataxis) paleotrochus (Zhr.).

10. Carboniferous Hornstone of the Pinega, Archangel.

1. Fusulina cylindrica, ischer.

2. princeps (Zhr.). This is probably the same as F,

spherica, Abich, and F. robusta, Meek.

11. Carboniferous Hornstone, Witegra, Russia.

1. Fusulina cylindrica, isch.

2. constricta (Lthr.).

3. —— spheroidea (Hhr.).

12. Carboniferous Hornstone, Tula, Russia.

Nodosaria ? index, Hhr.

Fusulina cylindrica, Misch.

—— paleosphera (Hhr.).

labyrinthiformis (Lhr.).

paleophacus (Hhr.).

—— paleophus (Zhr.).

. Textilaria bursigera, Hhr.

falcata (vel recurvata), Khr.

; lunata, Hhr.

DO AAR OR obo

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 263

10. Valvulina (Tetrataxis) paleotrochus (Zhr.).

11. Endothyra antiqua (Lhr.). Possibly the same as LE.

Bowmant, Phil.

We have now finished the critical examination of the illus-

trated Foraminifera so liberally and magnificently set forth in

the ‘ Mikrogeologie.’ There remain, however, some equally

beautiful drawings and coloured engravings of Foraminifera

and their internal casts in the ‘ Abhandlungen’ of the Berlin

Academy, illustrative of the great microscopist’s researches in

green sand resulting from the infillings of these minute shells

and other little cavernous organisms and the subsequent decay

of the enclosing tissues, and of his successful work in the

artificial production of analogous casts. In the ‘ Monatsberichte’

for 1858 are still later researches on such siliceous casts,

with some illustrations. We proceed, therefore, with the ex-

amination of these plates, as part of the Miscellaneous Fossil

Foraminifera figured by Dr. Ehrenberg.

§13. On Green Sand* and its elucidation of Organic

Life. (Abhandl. preuss. Akad. Wiss. aus dem Jahre 1855, 4to,

Berlin, 1856, pp. 85-176; read in July and August 1854, and

in February, March, May, and July 1855.)

In this memoir are described foraminiferal shells and internal

casts from :—

I. & Il. 1. Tertiary glauconitic sand of Pontoise, France,

p- 104; 2. Tertiary glauconitic sand of Pierre-Laie, near Paris,

p- 105; 3. Tertiary green sand from Westeregeln, Hanover,

p- 105; 4. Nummulitic Limestone of Traunstein near the

Chiem-See, Bavaria, p. 105; 5. Nummulitic Limestone of

Montfort, Département des Landes, France, p.106; 6. Num-

mulitic Limestone of Fontaine-de-la-Medaille, near Montfort,

p- 107; 7. Green sand from beneath the Zeuglodon-limestone,

Alabama, North America, p. 107; 8. Chloritic Limestone of

the Pliner, near Werl, Westphalia, p. 107; 9. Upper Gréen-

sand, Compton Bay, Isle of Wight, p. 109; 10. Greensand of

Haldon Hill, Exeter, p.109; 11. Upper Greensand, Handfast

Point, Swanage Bay, England, p.109; 12. Lower Greensand,

Handfast Point, p. 110; 15. Gault, Escragnolles, Dép. du Var,

France, p. 110; 14. Neocomian, Lales, Dép. du Var, p. 110;

15. Loose green sand of the Middle Jurassic beds near Moscow,

p- 111; 16. Compact green sand of the Jura, near Moscow,

p- 111; 17. Lower Silurian green sand of St. Petersburg,

Pep ul 2.

* See also Prof. J. W. Bailey’s Memoir “On the Origin of Green Sand,

and its formation in the Oceans of the present Epoch,” in the Quart, Journ.

Microsc. Soc. no. xviii., 1857, pp. 83-87.

264 _ Messrs. Parker and Jones on

ILI. “ Remarks on the green sand of the Zewg/odon-limestone

of Alabama” (read February 1855), pp. 112-116. IV. “New

advance of knowledge of the green sand, and on the abundant

brown-red and coral-red stone casts of the Polythalamian

Chalk of North America” (read March 1855), pp. 116-129.

V. “Further recognition of the higher organization of the Poly-

thalamia by means of their ancient stone casts” (read May

1855), pp. 130-145. VI. “ The successful exposition of perfect

stone casts of Nummulites, with abundant organic structure”’

(read July 1855), pp. 146-148. VII. “ The successful trans-

parent colouring of colourless organic siliceous bodies for micro-

scopical purposes” (read July 1855), pp. 148-157. The expla-

nation of plates, pp. 158-176.

Plate I. figs. 1-111. represent chlorite Kc.

Fig. rv. A group of green siliceous casts and portions of casts

from the Nummulitic Limestone of the Traunstein. They are

numbered (1-11) in the text, p. 159, and lettered (a—/) in the

plate and its explanation, p. 160: fig. a (‘‘ Rotalia”) probably

belongs to an Operculina; fig.g (‘ Rotalia”) may be part of

the cast of asimple Alveolina. The others are very uncertain.

Fig. v. (p. 160), Nodosaria, Zeuglodon-limestone, Alabama.

Fig. vi., Nodosaria monile (Glauconitic Limestone, Montfort),

=N. pyrula, D’Orb. vit. & vitt., Nodosaria javanica (Gua

Linggo-manik, Java), has parallel grooves in each segment,

and is a Bigenerina that had a set of imternal ribs on the

chamber-wall (incipient labyrinthic structure) : seealsoa grooved

east in Textilaria trilobata, pl. IV. figs. xv., xvi. Fig. Ix.

Vaginulina, Zeuglodon-limestone. Fig. x. Vaginulina subu-

lata, Glauc. Limestone, Montfort.

Pl. I. fig. 1. (p. 161), Zeaxtilaria globulosa, Num. Limest.

Traunstein. Fig. 11., Grammostomum attenuatum, and fig. II.,

Gr. angulatum (Num. Limest. Montfort), are Teaxtilaria sagit-

tula. Fig. 1v., Text. euryconus? (Zeugl.-l.), is Teat. agglutinans.

Fig. v., Grammostomum (Zeugl.-l.), is Text. sagittula. Fig. V1.,

Oncobotrys buccinum (Zeugl.-|.),1s the cast of probably a Poly-

morphina, possibly of a Bulimina. Fig. vu., Rotalia umbilicata

(Glauc. L. Montfort), is a young nautiloid form possibly Ro-

taline, probably Operculine. Fig. vitt. (p. 162), Mesopora

chloris (Traunstein), is an Operculina, and not the same as is

figured in the ‘ Mikrogeologie,’ which is a Haplophragmium

(Lituola). Fig. 1x., Planulina micromphala (Zeugl.-l.), is

Rotalia Beccarti. Fig. x., Phanerostomum?, and fig. x1., Pla-

nulina polysolenia (Zeugl.-l.), are Planorbulina vulgaris. Fig.

xit., Cristellaria eurythalama (Zeugl.-l.), is a Lituola (Haplo-

phragmium). Fig. X11. (p. 163), Globigerina crassa (Zeugl.-l.),

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 265

is Glob. bulloides. Fig. xiv. Geoponus zeuglodontis (Zeugl.-l.,

is Planorbulina vulgaris*.

Pl. ILI. (p. 164), fig. 1.-1v., Nonionina? bavarica (Traun-

stein), isa young Amphistegina. ‘This is the earliest recorded

appearance of the genus in the geological series. Fig. v.,

fotalia (Zeugl.-l.), 1s a young Operculina or Nummulina?

Fig. vi., peculiar triangular dentate cast (Zeugl.-L.), is like the

septal plane of a Polystomella. Figs. vi1.-1x. (p. 165), Am-

phistegina javanica, and fig. x., Heterostegina clathrata, both

from the Orbitoidal Limestone of Gua Linggo-manik, Java, are

both the same Amph. javanica.

Pl. IV. (p. 166), fig. 1. (p. 167), not named, is an Amphi-

stegina with parasitic borings. Figs. 11.-vi1. (p. 168), Ordi-

toides Prattii?. Figs. viit.—x., Orbitotdes javanicus, and fig. X1.,

Orbitoides microthalama, both from Java, are thesame Orbitoides.

Fig. xu., Cyclosiphon?, from Java, is part of an Orbitoides

(referred elsewhere by Ehrenberg to Orb. Mantelli). Fig. x11.

(p. 169), Spiroplecta? (Zeugl.-l.), is a Sptroplecta. Figs.

XIV.-XVL., Textilaria trilobata (Java, Orb. L.), is an interesting

sublabyrinthic Text., already referred to (p. 264). Fig. Xvu.,

Spiroloculina ? (Traunstein), seems to be a Qudnqueloculina.

Fig. xvitt., Quinqueloculina, and fig. XIx., Quinqueloculina

(Traunstein), are undeveloped young Miliole. Vig. xx.,

Quing. saxorum (Calcaire grossier, Pontoise), is a Quinquelo-

culina, but not of that species which has a thick shell grooved

within. Fig. xx1., Triloculina (Orb. L., Java), has been

parasitically bored. Fig. xx1t., Spiroloculina (Orb. L., Java),

is very interesting in having lateral stolons from segment to

segment, showing a prolepsis of the more complicated and

closely related Orbitolites, the outside of the quasi-annular

segments being multistoloniferous. These supernumerary

stolons begin by few and become many in later segments.

Fig. xxi. Cerithium? (Zeugl.-l.). Fig. xxiv. Spirillina?,

or young Mollusk?, or Spcvorbis? (Alabama); decidedly a

young Mollusk.

Pl. V. figs. I-vi1. Nummulites striata (Couizac, Dép. de

VPAude) ; fig. vi1.is Nummulina planulata (Lam.). Figs. 1x.,

x. (p. 171), NV. Murchisoni (‘Traunstein). Fig. x1. N. Dufrenoyt

(Traunstein). Fig..xut., Polystomatium? (‘Traunstein), is a

Polystomella. Figs. X111.-xv., Polystomatium lepactis (Orb. L.,

Java), is Polystomella craticulata (compare pl. xvi. fig. 9, of

‘Introd. Study Foram.’ 1862). Fig. xvi. (p. 172), Physom-

phalus porosus (Orb, L., Java), is Operculina. Fig. Xvit.

Alveolina (Java),

* Two casts of this species from North-American Tertiary beds were

figured by Prof. Bailey in Amer. Journ. Sc. 1845, vol. xlviii.no. 2, pl. iv.

figs. 30, 31.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 20

266 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

I. Foraminifera from the Nummulitic Limestone, Traunstein,

Bavaria. See also above, page 256.

. Textilaria globulosa, Khr.

. Polystomella.

. Operculina.

. Amphistegina.

Nummulina Murchisoni.

—— Dutrenoyi.

. Alveolina.

» Quinqueloculina ?

CO ISD SUS GO NO

Il. Nummulitic Limestone, Montfort, France.

. Nodosaria pyrula, D’ Orb.

. Vaginulina subulata, Lhr.

. Textilaria sagittula, Defr.

. Operculina ?

—_

—

Baie H OO DO

. Nummulitic Limestone, Couizac, France.

. Nummulina striata, D’ Ord.

planulata (Lam.).

ate Zeuglodon-beds, Alabama.

. Nodosaria.

. Vaginulina.

. Polymorphina.

Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Orb.

sagittula, Defr.

; Spiroplecta.

. Globigerina bulloides, D’ Orb.

. Planorbulina vulgaris, D’ Ord.

. Rotalia Beccari (Lin.).

10. Polystomella ?

11. Operculina ?

12. Haplophragmium.

CONAN POH.

V. Orbitoides Limestone, Java.

. Textilaria trilobata, hr.

. Bigenerina javanica (Hhr.).

Polystomella craticulata (/. & M.).

. Orbitoides javanicus, Lhr.

Mantelli ? (Morton).

Operculina.

. Amphistegina javanica, Hhr.

Alveolina,

. Spiroloculina (stoloniferous).

. Triloculina.

SOMDNADOAP wre

—

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 267

Pl. VI. Lower Silurian green sand of Petersburg. Fig. 1. a

(p. 173), Textilaria globulosa?, in a piece of brownish siliceo-

calcareous green sandrock (treated with acid), from under

the Orthoceratite Limestone, Narwa, and fig. 6, Gutiulina,

are both small Textilarie. Fig. c, Rotalia, from the same ;

a Rotaline or Endothyran form. Fig. 11. (p. 174), athin slice

of the same rock (green), showing minute shaped bodies ;

19, Solenolithis simplex; 20, Dermatolithis subtilis; 21, D.

granulatus: said to be brownish calcareous and microscopic,

belonging to the structure of Obolus, and abundantly scattered

throughout the green sandstone of Narwa.

Pl. VII. Yellow, red, and brown sand casts of the yellowish

Chalk of Alabama, equivalent to that of the Mississippi.

Figs. 1, 2 (p.175), Textilaria americana. Fig. 3, T. striata.

Figs. 4,5, Guttulina turrita a, B, are Verneutlina pygmea. Vig.

6, Spiroplecta americana? Fig. 7, Textilaria americana?

Fig. 8, 7. euryconus ?, is T. agglutinans. Fig. 9, T. globulosa?

Fig. 10 (p. 176), Dimorphina (Text.?) saxipara, is Text. glo-

bulosa. - Fig. 11, Phanerostomum hispidulum, and fig. 12, Ph.?,

are Globigerina cretacea. Fig. 13, Rotalia?, is a young lim-

bate Planorbulina. Fig. 14, Phanerostomum senarium ?, fig.

15, Ph. porulosum ?, and figs. 16, 17, Ph. dilatatum, are Glo-

bigerina cretacea. Figs. 11 & 12 have more chambers than

figs. 14-17, but belong to the same species.

Foraminifera from the Chalk, Alabama.

. Textilaria agglutinans, D’ Ord.

globulosa, Hhr.

striata, Hhr.

americana, hr.

. Spiroplecta americana (?), Hhr.

. Verneuilina pygmea (Egger).

. Globigerina cretacea, D’ Orb.

. Planorbulina, young.

OO NI S? Or Oo NO

§ 14. “On organic siliceous sand, and Herr Ignatz Beissel’s

observations on such beds near Aix-la-Chapelle” (Monatsber.

1858, pp. 118-128). See also ‘Literary Gazette,’ 1857,

p- 1220, for a notice of Herr Beissel’s researches on the Glau-

coniferous sand-grains of Aix-la-Chapelle.

§ 15. I. “On the progress of knowledge of important micro-

scopic organic forms in the lowest Silurian clay-beds near St.

Petersburg” (Monatsber. 1858, pp. 295-311). See also ‘ Neues

Jahrb. fiir Min.’ &c., 1858, 5. Heft; Murchison’s ‘ Siluria,’

20*

268 . Messrs. Parker and Jones on

edit. 1867, p. 356; Bigsby’s‘ Thesaurus Siluricus,’ 1868,

p-6; and“ Monogr. Polymorph.,” Trans. Lin. Soc. vol. xxvii.

. 199.

II. “ On further important microscopic organic forms from

the oldest Silurian clay near St. Petersburg.” With a plate.

(Monatsber. 1858, pp. 328 &c., pl. i.)

A (p. 306). White marl-casts or marl-morpholites. 1.

Miliolina?, and 2. Textilarina ?

B. Green siliceous internal casts.

3. Vaginulina?, in pl. I. fig. 1.

4 (p. 307). Nodosaria ?, fig. 1.

5. Textilaria ? imitatrix, fig. 111.

6. Polymorphina abavia, fig. Iv.

iene avia, tie, Vv.

8 (p. 308). Guttulina silurica, fig. vi.

9. Rotalia paleotrias.) Figs. vit. & vit. No. 9 is omitted

10. R. paleeotetras. in the later list.

11 (p. 309). R.? paleeoceros. (“ Like R. Hemprichii,” ‘Mi-

krog,’ pl. xxxaiv. f..62.) Fig. 1x.

12. Dexiospira triarchea, fig. x.

13. D. hexarchea, fig. x1., a, d.

14 (p. 310). Aristerospira octarchea, fig. XII.

15. Nonionina? archetypus, fig. XII.

16. Spirocerium priscum. (‘‘ New genus near Spirobotrys,

but has not the two openings in the later chambers.’’)

Fig. XIv.

These figured glauconitic grains are magnified 56 diam.

Their relationship to Foraminifera is very uncertain. They

are not nearly so clear and definite as the usual inner moulds

of foraminiferal shells; but, like the green grains in our Upper

and Lower Greensand, some may be such casts, and many are

probably of concretionary or derivative origin. As Dr, Ehren-

berg at first stated, little can be said of them except that they

have Rotaline and Textilarian appearances. Some may have

belonged to Hozoon (as fig. 1.). Figs. Iv., v., vi. look Buli-

mine; VII., VIII, X. look Globigerine ; 1x. somewhat Nonio-

nine ; XI., XI., more or less Rotaline. They are all doubtful.

C (p. 311). “Calcareous shale casts from the Devonian

strata near St. Petersburg.”

17. Miliola (Holococeus) Panderi. (‘‘ Trochiliscus, Pander :

orbicular or oval; hollow ; compressed in the middle or

on the side; with a single opening ; furrowed longitu-

dinally with 18-20 sulci, which in some cases are

spiral.”) =Lagena?

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 269

APPENDIX.

Generic names of Foraminifera used by Ehrenberg, and their

probable equivalents.

Allotheca, 1854. G'lobigerina?

Alveolina, D’Orb. Alveolina; Fusulina.

Amphisorus, 1838. Orbitolites (old).

Aristeropora, 1859. Planorbulina?

Aristerospira, 1859. Planorbulina?

Aspidospira, 1844, Planulina.

Asterodiscus, 1838. =?

Bigenerina, D’ Orb. Polymorphina.

Biloculina, D’ Orb. Adesoline Quinqueloculina. Biloculina?

Borelis, Mtft. Alveolina; Fusulina; Endothyra.

Calearina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina?

Cenchridium, 1843? Entosolenian Lagena.

Ceratospirulina, 1859. Dimorphous Miliola?; Vertebralina?

Cimelidium, 1859. Valvulina?

Clidostomum. Textilarian [Reuss].

Colpopleura, 1844. Planorbulina.

Coscinospira, 1838. Peneroplis and Lituola.

Cristellaria, Lamk. Cristellaria; Planulina; Haplophrag-

mium.

Cyclosiphon, 1856. Orbitordes.

Dentalina, D’ Orb. Dentalina.

Dexiospira, 1859. _Indeterminable.

Dimorphina, D’Orb. Dimorphine Virgulina.

Encorycium, 1859. Nodosaria.

Frondicularia, Defr. Nodosaria; Glandulina.

Geoponus, 1838. Polystomella; Planorbulina.

Globigerina, D’ Orb. — Globigerina.

Grammobotrys, 1854. Virgulina; Spheroidina.

Grammostomum, 1839. Textilaria; Vulvulina; Bolivina ;

Virgulina; Polymorphina.

Guttulina, D’Orb. Verneuilina; Textilaria.

Heterohelix (1843) changed to Spiroplecta (1844).

Heterostegina, D’ Orb. Amphistegina.

Heterostomum, 1854. Textilaria; Virgulina.

Holococeus, 1859. Lagena?

Lenticulina, Lamk. Planorbulina; Pulvinulina.

Loxostomum, 1854. Heterostomella; Vulvulina; Polymor-

phina.

Megathyra, 1854. Mentioned in ‘Mikrogeol.’ p. 13, without

figure or description.

Melonia, Blainv. Fusulina; Alveolina.

270 On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.

Mesopora, 1854. Lituola (Haplophragmium) ; Operculina.

Miliola, Lamk. Lagena; Orbulina.

Monetulites, 1856. Nummulina.

Nodosaria, Lamk. Nodosaria; Bigenerina.

Nonionina, D’Orb. Nonionina; Rotalia?; Planorbulina? ;

Cristellaria?; Amphistegina.

Omphalophacus, 1838. Pulvinulina.

Oncobotrys, 1856. Polymorphina?

Ovulina. Lagena.

Phanerostomum, 1854. Globigerina.

Physomphalus, 1856. Operculina.

Planularia, Defr. Planularia.

Planulina, D’Orb. Planorbulina, including Planulina and

Truncatulina; Globigerina; Rotalia; Pulvinulina; Nonio-

nina?; Operculina; Cristellaria.

Platycecus, 1854. Pulvinulina?

Pleurites, 1854. Spheroidina?; Virgulina; Polymorphina?

Pleurostomum. ‘Textilarian [euss].

Pleurotrema, 1838. Calcarina?

Polymorphina, D’Orb. Polymorphina; Bolivina; Virgulina;

Teatilaria.

Polystomatium, 1856. Polystomella.

Proroporus, 1844. Polymorphina; Bolivina; Textilaria.

Prorospira, 1844. Planorbulina.

Ptygostomum, 1854. Planorbulina; Globigerina.

Pylodexia, 1859. Globigerina.

Pyrulina, D’ Orb. Pyrulina (Polymorphina).

(Quinqueloculina, D’ Orb. Quinqueloculina.

Rhynchoplecta. ‘T'extilarian [ Reuss].

Rhynchopleura, 1856. ‘Textilarian ?

Rhynchospira. Globigerine [Reuss].

Robulina, D’ Orb. Cristellaria.

Rosalina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina; Globigerina.

Rotalia, Lamk. Globigerina; Planorbulina and Planulina ;

Pulvinulina?; Cristellaria; Operculina?

Rotalina, D’ Orb. Pulvinulina.

Sagrina, D’ Orb. Heterostomella.

Selenostomum, 1859. Rotaline ?

Siderospira. Calcarina | Reuss}.

Soldania, D’Orb. Cristellaria.

Sorites, 1838. Orbitolites.

Spheroidina, D’Orb. Spherotdina; Virgulina.

Spirillina, 1841. Spirillina; Cornuspira?

Spirobotrys, 1844. Planorbulina ?

Spirocerium, 1859. Indeterminable.

Spiroloculina, D’ Orb. Spiroloculina; adelosine Quinqueloculina.

On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. 271

Spiroplecta, 1844 (olim Heterohelix). Spiroplecta.

Spiropleurites, 1854. Pulvinulina.

Strophoconus, 1844. Bolivina; Virgulina.

Synspira, 1854. Synspira (?).

Tetrataxis, 1854. Tetrataxis (Valvulina).

Textilaria, Defr. Textilaria; Bolivina.

Triloculina, D’ Orb. Miliola?

Uvigerina, D’ Orb. Planorbulina ?

Vaginulina, D’Orb. Vaginulina.

XL.— On the Habits of some Madeiran Spiders.

By Freperick Potiock, Esq.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GENTLEMEN,

In the number of your Magazine for June 1865 there

is an article by me on the Hpeira Aurelia spider.

I had some doubts, at the time I wrote it, upon one fact

therein stated; and having had the opportunity of making

further observations, in the season just passed, in Madeira, I

find that I was mistaken in what I originally supposed to

occur.

As it is an important point in arachnology, and as it differs

from all Mr. Blackwall’s observations, [ should like to be able

to contradict my former statement in the same publication in

which it was made, and to add a few remarks on the economy

of two other sorts of Madeiran spiders, which, if you will allow

me, I will now proceed to do.

Epeira Aurelia, now called Nephila Aurelia.

In the article above alluded to I said that the spider changes

its skin for the last time about a week after making its fifth

cocoon ; but from more recent observations I have come to the

conclusion, that there is no change of skin at all, after the

spider becomes adult. This reduces the number of changes

of integument to nine, in the female, viz. one in the cocoon

and eight after leaving it. The male, on the other hand, has

only four changes of integument after leaving the cocoon,

Unlike most spiders of the Nephila (Kpeira) kind, N. Aurelia

does not make for itself any chamber to retire to when wishing

to escape observation, but remains constantly in the centre of

its web, and is therefore very easily watched. I have men-

tioned (in the previous article on this subject) that in the

construction of this web there is always a space left between

the adhesive spiral line, which extends from the circumference

272 Mr. Frederick Pollock on the

to tolerably near the centre, and the inadhesive centre part ;

and I have frequently seen the spider scramble through this

opening, when frightened or anxious to get hurriedly from one

surface of the web to the other. Various opinions and doubts

have been advanced by arachnologists, upon the specific pur-

pose which this open space is meant to subserve; but in this

case the object appears plain enough—namely, to give a short

cut, near the centre, between the opposite surfaces of the web.

But there is another reason which, I think, may account for

spiders of the geometrical kind leaving the space just alluded

to; and I will endeavour to explain it.

When any comparatively large insect is caught in their

webs and carried away to be eaten, the spider generally bites

away the lines surrounding the insect (in order to get it free) ;

and thus a rent or hole must, of necessity, be made where the

insect became entangled.

Now the strength of these webs depends mainly upon the

radial lines, which are, of course, much closer together near

the centre than near the circumference.

If a fly is caught near the latter, perhaps no radial line, or

only one, need be broken, to get the creature away ; whereas if

it were caught very near the centre, two or three, at least, of the

radial lines might have to be cut, and the web would be

greatly weakened thereby. This may be the reason why the

spiral adhesive line is not carried nearer to the centre.

The central space, which is devoid of adhesive lines, and in

which it is undesirable that any thing should be caught, is

much larger than is requisite for a resting-place for the spider.

The real resting-place of inadhesive lines does not occupy the

whole of this space ; and hence the void; which there would be

no use in filling up, apparently.

I may here remark that, owing to the adhesive property of

the spiral lines so soon disappearmg in Madeira, NV. Aurelia

makes, on an average, about two webs in every three days.

Lycosa Blackwalliz.

This spider is described by Mr. J. Y. Johnson in the

August and November Nos. of the ‘Annals’ for 1863. On

the 6th of January, 1870, I dug out of a hole (of its own

making, probably), in a soft sloping: bank of earth, at an ele-

vation above the sea of about 2000 feet, in Madeira, a half-

grown female of L. Blackwallii; and none were ever found by

me at a lower elevation, though I repeatedly searched for them

in every direction. On the 9th of March it changed its skin ;

and in April I brought it to England, where it changed again

Habits of some Madeiran Spiders. 273

on the 25th of that month, and again on the 30th of July, at

which latter date it became adult.

It may here be seen that sixty-two days elapsed between

the time of capture and the ensuing change; and how many

days should be added to this, for the entire number between the

two consecutive changes, it is impossible to determine. Only

forty-seven days elapsed before another change took place, and

ninety-six before the last one occurred. Now, during the time

of the short interval (forty-seven days), the spider had less to

eat than at any other period whilst in my possession (for it

was shut up in a box in the hold of the ship during the voyage) ;

and this diminution of food ought to have prolonged, I think,

instead of shortening the time; and as all other circumstances

during its captivity remained much about the same, the only

way in which I can account for the shorter period, is from

fright occasioned by the sea voyages, the transhipment at

Lisbon, and the vibration on the railway and cab journeys.

After it became adult, nothing particular occurred for a year

and seven days, or till the 6th of August, 1871, when the

spider made a cocoon, scantily supplied with yellow eggs,

agglutinated together. This cocoon it attached to its abdomen,

which it kept constantly elevated from the ground. It like-

wise encircled the cocoon with its fourth pair of legs, thus ten-

derly preventing its coming into contact with any thing. As

this female had been in solitary confinement ever since it was

half-grown, the eggs were not fecundated, I imagine.

. On the 28th of September the creature dropped the cocoon

from the abdomen ; and this was just about the time that the

young ones should have made their appearance, if the eggs had

been good.

On the 15thof October I landed the spider again in Madeira ;

but, unfortunately, forgetting the mischief that ants are always

ready to do there, I made no provision for protecting the crea-

ture from them, and the next morning I found that they had

killed the spider and were busy in walking off with the eggs.

Lycosa ingens (Blackw.).

Having procured from the Deserta Grande some fine spe-

cimens of this large and handsome spider, in the early part of

this year, and having provided suitable cages, with glass lids,

for them, I was anxious to ascertain how large an animal the

largest spider would take; and for this purpose I obtained

some lizards about 3 inches long, including the tail. Three

of these lizards were killed and devoured by one spider during

the time I kept it.

274 Mr. A. G. Butler on

They were eaten, bones, and head, and claws and all, the

only remnant of the feast being a small ball about + of an

inch in diameter, which was cast aside at the bottom of the

cage.

The islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and Deserta Grande

all lie within an area about fifty miles across. ‘They have

each its own peculiar large Lycosa, no two being alike; and

it is a very remarkable fact that these Lycose vary in size in-

versely with the magnitude of the island in which they are

found,—Madeira, the largest island, having the smallest

Lycosa, and Deserta Grande, the smallest island, having by

far the largest spider.

The mode of defence of all these varieties of Lycose is pre-

cisely the same. They elevate the thorax, raise the first pair

of legs high up, and, opening wide asunder their falces, strike

at and seize any object, such as the end of a pencil, which is

presented to them, in a most formidable manner.

Circumstances unfortunately prevented my bringing this

splendid spider away with me from Madeira, or I should have

tried to watch and record the remainder of its existence.

Yours truly,

FREDERICK POLLOCK.

Thurlow, Clapham, 8, W.

Sept. 12, 1872.

XLI.—Remarks on Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remi-

cauda. By A. G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

In the last Number of the ‘ Annals’ C. Ritsema, of Leyden,

accuses me of renaming an old and well-known species of

moth, Crinodes Sommeri, with the new generic and specific

names of Tarsolepis remicauda.

C. Sommer? is figured by Hiibner in the second volume of

his ‘Sammlung,’ pl. 197; on pl. 196 both sexes of another

species (C. Besckit), of which we possess a series in the British

Museum, are correctly figured. The latter is therefore the type

of the genus Crino, subsequently altered to Crinodes, and is

evidently so considered in Mr. Walker’s catalogue.

Hiibner states his figure to be a representation of a male

insect, as we should naturally conclude from the fact of its

possessing the male character of a well-developed anal tuft of

radiating scales. My insect is also a male, and differs from

C. Sommeri, as figured by Hiibner, in the following generic

and specific ‘characters :—

Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda.

275

Generic differences.

Crinodes Sommeri, Hiibner.

1. Male antennz feebly pectina-

ted, as‘in the other species of Cri-

nodes.

2. Palpi long, slender, projecting

considerably beyond the head.

3. No abdominal tufts.

4, Body slender; abdomen ap-

parently spinous, as in Checupa

(Hadenide), P. Z. S. 1867, pl. vi.

fig. 5.

Tarsolepis remicauda, Butler.

1. Male antenne bearing about

forty-three well-developed pectina-

tions.

2. Palpi short, robust, scarcely

projecting beyond the head.

3. Two long tufts of carmine

hairs at base of abdomen, beneath

wings.

4, Body very robust, almost

clumsy ; abdomen not spinous.

Specific differences.

1. Pale costal band of front wings

restricted to centre of costa.

2. Pale basal patches represented

only by usual elongation of basal

scales.

5. Inner margin of front wings

waved as in the allied C. fulguri-

fera.

4, Hind wings comparatively

short and rounded, with well-

defined central black spot and three

distinct continuous marginal lines.

5. Underside of wings dark, all

the markings sharply defined.

6. Transverse band of front wings

strongly angulated, so as almost to

touch discoidal cell.

7. Fringe of all the wings long.

1. Pale costal band continuous

from base to apex.

2. Two distinct

patches.

pale basal

5. Inner margin of front wings

slightly convex, not waved.

4, Hind wings comparatively

long and ovate, with ill-defined cen-

tral spot; central marginal line

converted into spots, none of the

lines continued round margin.

5. Underside of wings pale, all

the markings ill-defined.

6. Transverse band of front wings

scarcely waved, nearly parallel to

outer margin.

7. Fringe of all the wings short.

The conclusion that I arrive at from the above comparison

is that my insect is not identical either generically or specifically

with Hiibner’s. It certainly is not a Crinodes ; for it does not

agree generically with the type, C. Besckii; and inasmuch as

all the members of the genus Crinodes, so far as we know them

are from the New World, it is not at all improbable that the

example from Rio Janeiro in Mr. Fry’s collection may be the

true OC. Sommer?z, and the Javan species a totally different

insect, belonging to an allied genus, and on that account some-

what similar to it in pattern and coloration.

I therefore feel myself fully justified in retaining the

generic and specific names Tarsolepis remicauda for Mr.

Cornthwaite’s insect ; and I should recommend that this name

be also attached to the Javan specimens examined by Herr

Ritsema. '

276 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

XLU.—Preliminary Report on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

By H. Atteyne Nicnorson, M.D., D.Sc., M.A., F.R.S.E.,

Professor of Natural History in University College, Toronto.

In consequence of the interesting discoveries made in the

dredgings carried on in Lake Superior in the summer of 1871

in the U.S. steamer ‘Search’ (Reports of the Sec. of War,

U.S. vol. i1.), I was induced to apply to the government of the

Province of Ontario for a grant to be expended in prosecuting

a similar series of dredgings in Lake Ontario, a lake which

had hitherto never been explored by the dredge. With a

praiseworthy appreciation of the value of such scientific re-

searches, the necessary assistance was generously granted to

me by the Provincial Government; and the results obtained

are of a very satisfactory character. The short time, however,

which has elapsed since the dredging was completed has not

permitted more than the most hasty examination of the mate-

rials collected. In the following preliminary report, therefore,

I shall merely state the general results which were obtained,

reserving for a future occasion a detailed account of the animals

which were collected.

The dredgings were all carried on in the later part of June

and the early part of July, and were made partly from the

yacht ‘Ina’ and partly from the steamer ‘ Bouquet.’ They

were entirely carried on by hand; and the dredges employed

were such as are ordinarily used in sea-dredging. In dredging

in deep water, however, a bag of embroidery canvas was

attached outside the ordinary net—an addition rendered neces-

sary by the extremely fine nature of the mud at great depths.

Even with this precaution the dredge not unfrequently came

up nearly or quite empty from great depths, its contents having

been completely washed out. In deep water, also, a fifty-six-

pound weight was attached to the rope, at a distance of about

12 feet above the dredge; and the same was necessary in

shallow water where the weeds were.very thick, in order to

secure that the dredge should reach the actual bottom.

The dredgings were all carried on within a radius of ten

miles from Toronto; and the following will show the general

nature of the bottom at different depths, and the chief loca-

lities at which the dredgings were prosecuted.

In Toronto Bay itself numerous hauls were made, both from

the yacht and the steamer, and the bottom proved very varied,

though the depth is almost constantly from 2 to 3 fathoms.

The greater portion of the bay, comprising the central part

of its area, has a bottom which appears to consist uniformly

of a tenacious, exceedingly fine, clayey mud, the temperature

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 277

of which is comparatively low. All the shells in this clay

are dead, but it contains numerous small Annelides of the

genus Senuris, along with many larve of a Dipterous insect

allied to Chironomus or Corethra, the latter being very con-

spicuous from their brilliant red colour. The muddy bottom

seems to be wholly destitute of weeds, and does not appear to

encroach upon depths of less than 2 fathoms.

Towards the edges of the bay, where the depth diminishes

to one and a half fathom or less, the bottom consists of sand,

covered over considerable areas by a dense growth of weeds

of different kinds. The chief varieties of bottom in this

shallow zone are these:—1. Pure siliceous sand with dead

shells, almost destitute of life. 2. Sandy mud with a dense

growth of Charas, containing numerous Gammart, small

leeches, larvee of Chironomus and Ephemerids, with shells of

Unio, Cyclas, Paludina, Planorbis, Valvata, Melania, Pisi-

dium, and Physa. 3. Sandy mud, sometimes with peaty

layers, supporting a dense vegetation of Anacharis canadensis

and Charas. ‘The life in these portions of the bay consisted

of much the same animals as in the preceding, except that the

Gammarti were absent, unless in the occasional patches of

Charas brought up by the dredge. In some places, in from

one to one and a half fathom of water, the sand was crowded

with Uniones, the dredge coming up completely packed with

diving and dead shells. This was especially the case at several

points under the lee of the “island,” a long, flat, insulated

strip of land which forms the southern boundary of the bay,

running parallel with the shore on which Toronto is built, at

a distance of about a mile and three quarters from it.

Another series of dredgings was carried on from a point in

the open lake, about eight miles to the south of Toronto, on a

line extending to the Toronto rolling-mills, the depth varying

from 40 fathoms at the southern end of the line to 3 fa-

thoms at its northern extremity. The deep dredgings along

this line were only partially successful, the dredge bringing

up nothing but good-sized pebbles, all the finer materials

having been washed out before it reached the surface. In

about 15 fathoms the bottom was found to consist of a tena-

cious blue clay, distinctly laminated, and containing numerous

broken-up stems of plants, along with small pebbles. No

traces of life could be detected beyond a few minute Anne-

lides belonging to the genus Senuris. Another haul in 10

fathoms brought up the dredge full of sand and pebbles with

no traces of life; and another in 8 fathoms showed a bottom

of clear sand with dead shells of Cyclas and Pisidium, but

devoid of all vestiges of animal or vegetable life.

278 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

Another series of dredgings was taken along a line extend-

ing in a south-west direction, from Toronto Point to a point

about five miles out in the lake, the depths varying from 8

to 15 fathoms. In this case the bottom was found uni-

formly to consist of an exceedingly fine, bluish-grey, clayey

mud, with numerous patches of a small bushy Alga (a species

of Cladophora). 'The mud contained very numerous minute

Annelides of the genus Senuris, along with dead shells of

Cyclas, Pisidium, and Planorbis; and the bunches of Clado-

phora yielded a large number of little Ostracode Crustaceans,

and a few beautiful little Amphipods which are as yet unde-

termined.

Another series of dredgings was carried on still further to

the south-west of the ground examined, in the series just men-

tioned, at a distance of about eight miles from the shore. The

depth here varies from 30 to 45 or 50 fathoms ; and the bottom

was found to consist uniformly of a fine greyish mud, some-

times highly argillaceous, sometimes more or less arenaceous,

with many small pebbles disseminated through it, and con-

taining a few dead shells of Planorbis and Pisidium, and

much broken-down vegetable débris. very haul also brought

up numerous specimens of a beautiful flesh-coloured Amphi-

pod and a few minute Annelides; but no other traces of life

were obtained. The Amphipods are referable to Pontoporeta,

being apparently undistinguishable from P. affinis of the Swe

dish lakes; and I shall speak of them at greater length imme-

diately.

Another series of dredgings were taken in Humber Bay,

about four miles to the west of Toronto. Here the bottom,

except close to the shore, consisted of a tenacious bluish-grey

clay, sometimes with reddish patches in it. Vegetable fife was

very scanty ; and animal life consisted entirely of many minute

Annelides.

Lastly, an examination was made, partly with the dredge

and partly by means of a hand-net, of the shallow water in

the immediate neighbourhood of the “ island”’ and of the ex-

tensive ponds which communicate with the lake. The bottom

here consisted, for the most part, of a black mud composed

almost entirely of decayed vegetable matter, and supporting a

dense growth of Charas, Vallisneria, Anacharis, Pontederia,

Nymphea,and Nuphar. Animal life was naturally extremely

abundant, comprising numerous examples of Limnea, Physa,

Planorbis, Paludina, Cyclas, Pisidium, and Anodon, along

with two species of Gammarus and many small Ostracode

Crustaceans, a few leeches (Clepsine), very many large scarlet

’ water-mites, numerous aquatic insects (Nepa, Gyrinus, Dy-

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 279

ticus, and larvee of Chironomus, Libellula, &c.), and a large

number of young fishes (Pimelodus, Perca, &c.). Numerous

Terrapins were also observed, and a single specimen of Meno-

branchus ; but the latter unfortunately was not secured.

In the following list are indicated the chief forms of animal

life which were obtained in these dredgings. As before re-

marked, time has in most cases not permitted of any specific

determinations being made, and the species will be described

at length in a subsequent notice. ‘The microscopic species

also have, in the meanwhile, been completely neglected.

ANNELIDA.

1. Nephelis, sp.

A small leech, nearly an inch in length when at rest, with

an oblique posterior sucker, and of a liver-brown colour in life.

Nearly allied to, if not identical with, N. lateralis, Say.

Rare in 3 fathoms, Toronto Bay.

2. Nephelis, sp.

An exceedingly remarkable form, apparently undescribed.

The body is much flattened, and the width is nearly as great

as the length when the animal is at rest. Length 4 inch in

extension, } inch or less in contraction. Colour sometimes

dark greenish brown or nearly black, sometimes light brown,

with innumerable black points and numerous yellow spots,

which are especially abundant at the margins. A double black

dorsal line. ‘he habits of this little leech are very remarkable.

The adult leech usually places itself with its entire ventral

surface closely appressed to some foreign body, such as a stone

or dead shell, to which it adheres like a limpet or small Chiton.

When forcibly detached or irritated it rolls up like a hedgehog

or like the Myriopods of the genus Glomeris. The objects

served by these peculiar habits become obvious when it is seen

that almost every individual carries attached to the ventral

surface of the body a large number (generally from twenty to

thirty) of young leeches. The young are attached to the ven-

tral surface of the parent posteriorly in a close cluster, which

is surrounded on all sides by a vacant space; they adhere to

the adult by their posterior suckers, which are separated from

the body by a very distinct constriction. The young leeches

are about =; of an inch in length, in colour light yellow or

reddish, and semitransparent. ‘The stomach is very conspi-

cuous, and fills the greater part of the body ; but no other in-

ternal organs could be detected. This extraordinary habit of

carrying the young has been noticed by Verrill in a species of

280 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

Clepsine; but, so far as I am aware, attention has not been

otherwise drawn to it (American Journ. Science and Arts,

vol. iii. Feb. 1872). I-have also observed it in a species of

Clepsine from Lake Ontario, and shall describe it more fully

upon a future occasion.

Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms. ;

3. Clepsine, sp.

A small leech, about 7 inch in length in extension. The

body flattened, with broad, transparent margins exhibiting

numerous lateral papille. Back and belly, with exception of

the transparent borders above alluded to, of a dirty greenish

brown. ‘The anterior end of the body is attenuated; the pos-

terior extremity wide and flattened out ; and when irritated, it

has the habit of rolling up into a ball, This species, also,

carries its young attached to the posterior portion of its ventral

surface, in a small rounded bunch.

Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

4, Clepsine (?).

A small undetermined leech, of a worm-like shape and a

red colour. Length when contracted about } inch, in exten-

sion about 1 inch. Instead of remaining quietly attached

to some foreign body, like the preceding species, this leech

swims actively through the water by a serpentine bending

of the body.

Rare in 3 fathoms.

5. Senuris, sp.

A large Oligochetous Annelide, about 2 inches in length,

of a red colour, with an iridescent blue intestinal streak.

A single individual was obtained in 3 fathoms, on a sandy

bottom.

6. Senuris or Chirodrillus, sp.

A small and very slender form, varying in length from

2 inch up to 1 inch, and of a red colour. ‘These minute

Annelides occurred in extraordinary numbers at all depths of

the lake from 3 up to 45 fathoms; but they were much more

abundant at the smaller than at the greater depths. They

were uniformly found wherever the bottom consisted of a fine

tenacious clayey mud.

CRUSTACEA.

7. Gammarus, sp.

A small freshwater shrimp, varying in length from } to 4

inch, and of a greenish-brown colour during life, with a dark

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 281

green intestinal tract. The antenne and antennules are about

half the length of the body, and nearly equal. Numerous

examples of this pretty little species occurred amongst Charas

and other water-weeds, in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

8. Gammarus, sp.

A minute form, not uncommon in shallow water in the

ponds at the “island.”

9. Crangonyzx (?), sp.

A small Amphipod, as yet unexamined, which may perhaps

iT OME ? Pa Deut

belong to this genus.

Common in from 10 to 15 fathoms, amongst branches of

Cladophora, upon a muddy bottom.

10. Cypris (?), sp.

A small Ostracode Crustacean, as yet undetermined, which

occurred plentifully, along with the preceding, amongst Clado-

phora at depths of from 10 to 15 fathoms.

11. Pontoporeca affinis (Lindstrém).

Small Amphipods, varying in length from ;4 up to }

inch, of nearly uniform flesh-colour. They .are referable to

the genus Pontoporeta; and though they have not yet been

satisfactorily examined, I have little doubt as to their being

identical with the Pontoporeta affints of the Swedish lakes and

of Lake Superior.

They occur in great plenty in from 30 to 45 fathoms; but

none were found in depths less than this, though they are

found in Lake Superior in all dredgings, from the shallowest

to the deepest. They were uniformly found inhabiting a

muddy bottom; and they died very shortly after they were

brought to the surface.

ARACHNIDA.

12. Limnochares, sp.

A fine species of this genus was extremely abundant in

i C g ae 2

shallow water and in the ponds at the “ island.

13. Hydrachna, sp.

A small water-mite of this genus occurred abundantly in

Toronto Bay in from 1 to 2 fathoms.

INSECTA.

14. Chironomus or Corethra, sp.

The larvee of a species of Dipteron belonging to one of the

Ann, & Mag. N, Hist, Ser. 4. Vol. x,

282 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

above genera occurred in great abundance in all the dredgings

in which a muddy bottom was found in depths of from 2

to 20 fathoms, but more abundantly im the smaller depths.

The colour varied in different examples from deep blood-red

to pink or greenish ; and their semitransparency rendered them

very beautiful under the microscope.

15. Ephemeride.

Larvee of Ephemerids were found rarely in shallow water

to a depth of 2 fathoms. )

MOoLuusca.

16. Planorbis trivolvis, Say.

Very common in shallow water, but not extending beyond

a depth of 3 fathoms.

17. Planorbis parvus, Say.

Very common in shallow water, but not extending beyond

a depth of 1 fathom.

18. Valvata tricarinata (?).

A small species of Valvata, apparently referable to the above,

occurred abundantly in from 2 to 3 fathoms, ranging, though

in much diminished numbers, into depths of from 5 to 8

fathoms.

19. Paludina, sp.

A large form, nearly allied to P. decisa, Say (perhaps P.

impura). ‘This species occurred in a living state and in all

stages of growth in from 2 to 3 fathoms on a sandy bottom,

20. Paludina (Amnicola), sp.

This is a very minute form which occurred in great plenty,

crawling over the stems of Chara or Anacharis in from 1 to

3 fathoms.

21. Limnea jugularis, Say (=L. stagnalis ?).

A large species, occurring in great plenty in shallow water

at Toronto Island. It is very nearly allied to L. stagnalis, but

it may perhaps be distinct.

22. Limnea, sp.

A smaller and more elongated form, nearly allied to L.

columella, Say. .

Rare in from 1 to 2 fathoms.

Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario. 288

23. Physa heterostropha, Say.

Very common in shallow water at the “ island.”

24. Physa, sp.

A smaller form, rare in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

25. Melania, sp.

A form nearly allied to, if not identical with, the WZ. depygis

of Say (=. niagarensis, Lea?).

Common in from 2 to 8 fathoms in Toronto Bay.

26. Cyclas similis, Say.

Common in from 1 to 3 fathoms.

27. Pisidium abditum, Haldeman.

Common in from 2 to 5 fathoms.

28. Unio crassidens, Lam.

Common, both in the living and dead state, in from 1 to 3

fathoms in Toronto Bay.

29. Unio, sp.

A large ventricose form, common at the same depths and m

the same locality as the preceding.

VERTEBRATA.

30. Pimelodus catus (=P. atrarius).

_ The young of this species, not more than 1 inch to 14 inch

in length, occurred abundantly in the pools in the vicinity of

the “island.”

31. Pomotis vulgaris.

The young of the sunfish or northern Pomotis of Richardson

occurred not uncommonly in shallow water at the “ island.”

32. Perca flavescens, Cuv.

The American yellow perch.

Common throughout Toronto Bay.

33. Leuciscus.

Two individuals of a small species of this genus were brought

up by the dredge in Toronto Bay from a depth of about 2

fathoms.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

In a mere preliminary report there are but a few general

considerations which require notice. Upon the whole the

21*

284 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on Dredgings in Lake Ontario.

results obtained in these dredgings in Lake Ontario agree

very fairly with those obtained in take Superior ; and there 3 18

a general conformity in the phenomena observed. The fauna

of Lake Superior, however, so far as deep water is concerned,

is decidedly richer than that of Lake Ontario; whilst some

of the more remarkable forms discovered in the former appear

to be altogether absent in the latter. This is especially notice-

able as regards the singular Stomapod Crustacean Mysis re-

licta, which was found in great plenty in Lake Superior at all

depths up to 148 fathoms, but which was not detected at all

in Lake Ontario.

As might have been expected upon & prior? grounds, the

fauna of Lake Ontario is not extensive, though some forms

occur in great profusion. The shallow-water fauna is very

rich in individuals, and the number of species is quite con-

siderable for fresh water. No doubt, also, the list might be

much increased bya careful examination and bya more extended

investigation than it was in my power to carry out. Beyond

8 or 10 fathoms the fauna becomes very scanty ; and when we

reach depths of 20 fathoms and upwards, the list becomes

reduced to some small Annelides and Amphipod Crustaceans.

The nature of the bottom, also, at great depths is exceedingly

unfavourable to animal life , consisting almost everywhere of a

fine clayey mud, the temperature of which is very low.

The most interesting forms of life discovered were the An-

nelides and Crustaceans. ‘The Annelides are very abundant

and varied, the two orders of the [irudinea and Oligocheta

being both: ‘represented, and the former presenting some species

of peculiar interest. Of the Crustacea the most “interesting 18

the littke Amphipod which occurs in such numbers in depths

of from 80 to 45 fathoms, and which appears to be identical

with the Pontoporeia affinis of the Swedish lakes. This

species and the Stomapod Mys¢s relicta, Lovén, are found in

Lakes Wetter and Wener in Sweden; and it is well known

that their occurrence in this locality, along with other species

of marine genera, led to the belief that these lakes had been

formerly part of the sea, from which they had been cut off by

geological changes. On this theory these Crustaceans are the

survivors of the original marine fauna of the area, which had

been able to bear up under the gradual changes by which the

formerly existing sea was converted into fresh water. The

occurrence, therefore, of these same forms of Pontoporeta and

Mysis in Lake Superior and of the former of them in Lake

Ontario is an extremely interesting fact, whether Lovén’s

theory is to be accepted or not. le may he mentioned also

that there are no insuperable geological difficulties which

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 285

would prevent the application of this theory to the great lakes

of North America. It is a singular fact, however, that whilst

both these Crustaceans have been discovered in Lake Superior

and also in Lake Michigan, only one of them has been found

in Lake Ontario, the Mysts seeming to be wholly wanting.

XLUTT.— On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Loven*.

[Plate XIV. ]

BESIDES the well-known external organs, ocelli, spines, pedi-

cellariz, the clavule of the fasciole, tentacles, and branchie, the

recent Kchinoidea possess another kind of organs which have

hitherto been overlooked, although they occur so generally

that we seek them in vain only in Cidaris. These are very

small, button-like bodies, spheroidal, ellipsoidal, or somewhat

irregular balls, 0°11—0°375 millim. in their greatest diameter,

furnished with a short stalk, which is movably attached to a

small, slightly projecting tubercle. They may not unsuitably

be named sphwridia. 'They are hyaline, shining, hard, solid,

and clothed with connective tissue rich in pigment, with epi-

thelium and a ciliated cuticle. Their pedicel has the reticu-

lated texture typical of the Echinoidea, which spreads more or

less distinctly and continuously around its starting-point. In

the direction of the axis of the ball we not unfrequently see

a tube which opens in its upper pole, and is either simple or

branched in a more or less regular manner, A great many of

the balls have on their surface sinall elevations, tubercles, or

spines—and many also depressions, which are sometimes shal-

low, but sometimes sink deeply in, towards the axis, in a

conical form. But the greater part of the mass of the ball is

formed of very numerous and very thin concentric layers ; and

there are some which do not present any thing but these.

Their solid contents are dissolved by a weak acid, so that only

the epithelium remains.

The spheridia belong exclusively to the ambulacra (radii) ;

and in all the genera which possess them they are never

wanting on the peristomial plates, but differ in number and

distribution in a direction from the mouth. They always

occupy a definite position. In the Spatangide they stand,

generally uncovered, one, two, or more in a little group, by

the base of the tentacular cirri of the buccal area, near the

* Translated by W. 5S. Dallas, F.L.S., from a separate copy communi-

cated by the author, from the ‘(fversigt af Kongl, Vetexskaps-Akad,

Forhandlingar,’ 1871, no. 7, 1

286 Prof. §. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

side turned towards the median suture of the ambulacra, de-

creasing thence the further from the mouth, especially on the

bivium,—not unfrequently four, three, or two upon each of the

first plates, only one upon each of the immediately following

ordinary plates, in Plagionotus, brissus, Schizaster, and Mera

(Gualteria?), more numerous on the bivium, in depressions, or

like rows of beads in narrow, elongated, well-defined furrows ;

but in Lovenia the segregated spheeridia are concealed under

domes, which have a small, narrow, transverse opening at

their apex.

A covering of this kind, which is an exception among the

Spantangide, is the rule in the Cassidulide and Clypeastride.

Ethyncholampas caribearum (Lamk.), Pygorrhynchus pacificus

(Agass.), and many others have on every plate of the first five

pairs in each ambulacrum a spheridium, which is gradually

overgrown by the outer layer of the shell-substance, which

finally leaves only a fine fissure open.

The Clypeastride exhibit two types. Hchinarachnius, Den-

draster, Lobophora, Mellita, Encope, Rotula, Laganum, Scaph-

echinus, and Hchinocyamus have in each radius only a single

spheridium in common for both its peristomial plates, and

most frequently, even in very young individuals, concealed in

a crypt in the mass of the shell. Near the peristomial margin,

which in the middle has a part somewhat projecting over the

two large pores of the buccal tentacles, we see, behind this, a

small, more or less distinctly halved elevation. On breaking

this up we find a spheridium with its pedicel attached to the

inner surface of a rounded cavity towards the mouth, which

is connected with the exterior either only by a fine canal, or,

m Rotula, by means of a tolerably wide opening, which is in

part covered by points projecting from its margin. In EHchin-

arachnius this cavity 1s divided into two halves by a very

thin, vertical membrane, which seems to issue from the edges

of the plate united in the suture. It is otherwise with Cly-

peaster and Arachnoides; these have two spheridia in each

ambulacrum, one in each of its two peristomial plates. In

both, the margins are destitute of the projecting part, and the

two pores of the large tentacles are exposed, not, as in the

preceding, in a surface falling abruptly towards the mouth,

but im a more level and open surface which nowhere exhibits

a sign of the presence of the spheridium. In Clypeaster we

can only perceive that, at adistance from the tentacular pores

twice that of the latter from the margin, the large radial tu-

bercles have between them a greater space than elsewhere, but

not differing in the disposition of the small tubercles and pores.

If we break through the outermost layer of the shell, we find

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea. 287

in both plates a small cavity, and in this a spheeridium, placed

as in the preceding. In the broad, perfectly smooth furrow

which in Arachnoides occupies the middle of each ambula-

crum, nothing indicates the position of the spheeridia; but we

find them concealed in the shell at the same distance from the

pores as in Clypeaster.

Echinoneus has, near the tentacular pores on the first and

second plates, segregated globular sphzeridia, which are seated

uncovered in slight depressions. In this, as in much else, it

‘resembles the regular Kchinoidea.

In most of the latter the spheeridia are numerous and distri-

buted alternately on both rows of plates of the ambulacra.

Echinus Flemingi, E. esculentus, Toxopneustes drébachensis,

Loxechinus albus, Tripneustes ventricosus, Echinometra lu-

cunter, and Amblypneustes ovum have their usually ellipsoidal

spheridia arranged near the sutures, with the long axes nearly

parallel to the surface of the test. In Temnopleurus, Sal-

macis, and Mespilia their form is spheroidal, and they stand

in the apertures of the deep cavities in the angles of the plates.

In all these Echinide the row of spheridia is separated on

both sides from the tentacular pores by the series of large

radiolar tubercles. In Diadema, on the contrary (Astropyga),

the spheridia are seated near the tentacular pores, and the

radiolar series of tubercles is situated between them and the

suture. LHchinocidaris is quite different, as it has in each

ambulacrum only a single spheeridium in a rounded notch in

the suture quite close to the margin. In Cidaris spheridia

are not found.

These organs, which are so well and peculiarly protected in

many genera (Brissopsis lyrifera seems to protect its uncovered

spheeridia by binding together the neighbouring small radioli

over them), cannot be any thing but a sensorial apparatus,

probably destined for the perception of the changes which

take place in the surrounding water and in the substances

which this holds in solution or suspension, consequently an

organ of taste. Brissopsis lyrifera holds them quite still for

hours; then follows a half-circular movement around the

point of attachment, which very soon ceases. The strong

nervous stem which runs internally along the suture in each

ambulacrum gives off alternate branches, one for each plate.

Every such branch enters with the tentacular vessel into the pore

of the plate, and passes through this out to the outer side of the

test ; in this way it may furnish both tentacles and spheeridia

with nerves, although [ have not succeeded in demonstrating

this. It is easier, in Brissopsis lyrifera, especially in the

bivium, to ascertain how the nerve, atter issumg through the

288 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

pore, loses itself on the outside of the calcareous layer, beneath

the overlying connective tissue, in a great number of branches,

which run through the anterior part of the plate in a radiating

and diagonal direction in order to distribute themselves to the

interradial radioli and other external parts attached to the

plate. This branching is most distinctly seen on the third

plate of the bivium situated near the sternum, which is freer

from spines than the second.

The spheeridia make their appearance, seemingly, later than

the spines and pedicellarie in very young Spatangide (Bris-

sopsis lyrifera, Echinocardium ovatum), first one alone in the

single peristomial plate of the ambulacra, then one on the second

plate, and so forth; all in accordance with the order which

prevails in the disposition of the ambulacral plates throughout

the whole class, and which, at least in all recent Echinoidea,

may be expressed by a formula common to all. This order is

as follows :—

If we hold a Spatangus of any species with the mouth

turned upwards and the unpaired interradium backwards, and

count the ten peristomial plates of the ambulacra going from

left to right (that is to say, from the animal’s right to its left

side) round the buccal aperture of the test, marking, in each of

the ambulacra I., II., L1I., IV., V., the plate we first come to

with the letter a, and the second with }, we shall find that the

plates I. a, Il. a, I. d, IV. a, V. b are larger and bear two pores

and two tentacles, whilst [., I. 6, II. a, IV. 4, and V.a are

smaller and furnished with only one pore and one tentacle.

Assuming that here each ambulacral plate has originally only

one tentacle and one pore, the former series of plates should

consequently, although no suture can be detected, be composite

and binary, and the latter simple and primary, like all the other

ambulacral plates. The Casstdulide behave in exactly the

same manner; in the binary plates one of the pores is situated

in the outer horn of the plate. That in the Clypeastride the

peristomial plates of the ambulacra follow the same rule is seen

from their unequal size—I. a, I. a, III. 6, 1V. a, and V. d being

larger than I. 6, IL. 6, IIL. a, IV.d, and V.a; and Clypeaster

rosaceus has in the smaller plates one, and in the larger ones

two tentacular pores, which differ by their size from the

numerous pores for locomotor tentacles. If an Hchinoneus

be held in the above-mentioned position and counted in the

same manner, the same arrangement is manifest. ‘The peri-

stomial plates I. a, I.a, II. 6, IV. a, and V.é are larger and

have two pores, a complete double pore and one which is

marginal and half interrupted; I.d, 11.4, I.a, IV. 6, and

Y.a, on the contrary, are smaller and bear only one double pore.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotidea. 289

Thus in the irregular Echinoidea the peristome of the trivium

is asymmetrical with relation to the antero-posterior axis ; of its

six ambulacral plates, the right side of the animal has two

simple and one binary, and the left side two binary and one

simple. ‘The bivium, on the contrary, includes symmetrically

the unpaired interradium. Right and left are determined here

by the position of the anal aperture, and also, except in the

Clypeastride, by that of the madreporic plate; in the regular

Kchinoidea, hitherto, by the latter alone.

Of the five genital plates, the Spatangide are destitute of

the hinder one, which elsewhere is placed near the end of the

unpaired, anal interradium. It has never been developed, any

more than the genital gland, which otherwise, as in the four

others, should have its efferent duct through it. In all the

known living Spatangide, apparently with the exception of a

single genus, its place is occupied by the madreporic plate ;

the filtering-apparatus of the aquiferous system, which spreads

itself out in the posterior part of the vertex, often occupies a

greater space than any of the four genital plates, is posteriorly

in immediate contact with the last plates of the anal inter-

rn aad

Has

Echinocardium cordatum (Penn.), Schizaster fragilis (Dub. & Kor.),

Abatus Philippi, n., Hemiaster expergitus, n.

radium, by which it is enclosed, and separates from each other

the eye-plates of the bivium and the lateral genital plates.

There is no suture to form a boundary between the mght

anterior genital plate and the madreporic area; and when the

latter has a great extension it is this plate that first enters into

290 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

it:—in some to a small extent, as in Meoma ventricosa; inothers,

e.g. Brissopsis, to a greater extent ; and in some, e.g. Schizaster

fragilis (Diib. & Kor.), so completely that the genital pore is

absent, and with it the right anterior interradial genital gland.

The next in order to disappear are the genital pore and gland

of the left anterior genital plate; and when, as in Adbatus

Philippit, n., and Paleostoma mirabile, Gray, only two genital

pores remain, these are situated in the lateral genital plates. An

arrangement by which the madreporic plate extended backward

separates from each other the eye-plates of the bivium, occurs

among the Spatangide of the Kocene period, and not only in

most of those which also belong to recent times, but also in

some (e.g. Prenaster, Macropneustes) which had already made

their appearance in the younger deposits of the Cretaceous

formation. On the other hand the genera which essentially

belong to the latter formation and attained in it their highest

development, present throughout a different disposition of the

genital and madreporic plates, at the same time that the latter

does not reach the posterior interradium, but is separated from

it by the eye-plates of the bivium, which meet and touch each

other, as do also, in most, the lateral genital plates. Among

the known living Spatangide only one has this character of

antiquity, namely Hemiaster expergitus, n., which was dis-

covered on the voyage of the Swedish corvette ‘ Josephine,’ in

the year 1869, by Smitt and Ljungman, near Josephina’s bank,

in 38° 7! N. lat. and 9°18! W. long., at a depth of 550 fathoms

ona clay bottom. The genus, which until then was regarded

as having become extinct during the Miocene Tertiary period,

and which attained its highest development during the Cre-

taceous period, is recognized by its rounded oval outline,

which, with a length of 14 millims., has a breadth of 13 millims.,

by its posteriorly considerable height (10 millims.), by the posi-

tion of the periproctium high up on the posterior surface, the

single peripetalous broad fasciola, which forms an oval ring,

the short, broad petala of the bivium half as long as the an-

terior ones, and, for still further distinction from Adbatus, by

the madreporic plate with which the anterior right genital

plate is united, but which posteriorly does not reach the unpaired

interradium, but is shut off from it by the two eye-plates of

the bivium and the lateral genital plates. ‘he individual is

young, so that the four genital pores do not yet perforate the

genital plates, and the madreporic plate has only a few pores;

but the peristome is reniform, and the lobes prominent. The

ambulacra are remarkably narrow where they pass under the

fasciola. The test is extremely thin and brittle.

~ Jn the regular Echinoidea the anus opens in the circle formed

Prot, S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 291

by the genital and eye-plates perpendicularly above the mouth,

and the corona, which 1s nowhere in contact with it, developes

in like manner its ambulacra and interradia. The apparently

regularly radiate form is originally disturbed by the madre-

poric apparatus, which perforates with its strainer one of the

genital plates, all of which subsequently, during the early

growth of the animal, become perforated by the efferent ducts

of the genital glands.. That even here the genital plate which

contains the madreporic plate is the right anterior-one, and

that the ideal longitudinal axis of the body passes through

the unpaired ambulacrum, as thereby indicated, is confirmed

by the fact, that only by such a division between right and

left does the same formula prevail for the plates of the peri-

stomial margin in the regular as in the irregular forms, ‘This

is most distinctly observed in very young individuals, in which

the primary plates may still be distinguished.

Ifa young Toxopneustes drébachensis of from 3 to 6 millims.

diameter be held with the mouth upwards, and the unpaired

ambulacrum, determined as above, forwards, and the peri-

stomial plates be gone through in the same sequence as was

adopted in the examination of the irregular Kchinoidea, we

find not only that all the peristomial plates are composite

oe may therefore be denominated large plates), but also that

.a, I. a, I. 6, 1V.a, V.6 are all ternary; that is to say,

every one of them consists of three still distinguishable primary

plates ; whilst I. 6, II. 6, II. a, 1V.d, V.a are binary, formed

of two primary plates. Consequently here also the peri-

stomial plates of series I. a—V. 6 are larger than those of series

I. b-Y. a, and likewise bear more pores. In both series, the first

primary plate has two pores, a complete double pore and one

which is formed only by a notch in the very margin; and it

may be supposed that this primary plate is a combination of

two plates which were distinct in a still younger stage, the

earliest formed of which, like ail others, had a complete double

pore, which afterwards, during growth, shifted to the margin

and became reduced, its upper passage being closed and its

lower one partly removed and thus converted into merely a

notch of greater or less depth (see Plate XIV. figs. 1 & 2-8).

The primary ambulacral plates in the Latistelle are in part

entire, ¢. e. such as occupy the whole space between the inter-

radium and the median suture of the ambulacrum, and in part

halved, or such as extend from the interradium to about the

middle of the entire ones, and terminate there in a more or less

distinct point. The larger peristomial plates of the ambulacral

series I.a—V.b generally consist,in very young individuals, of an

entire adoral, a half intermediate, and an entire aboral primary

of series

292 Prof. 8S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

plate; but sometimes all three are entire; in series I. b-V.a

both primary plates are always entire.

The order which prevails in the ambulacra at the peristome

recurs at the vertex. The corona of a young Towopneustes

dribachensis of 4 millims. diameter, and with a stoma of 2°4

millims, is shown by the proportions given in the following

table, which states for each large plate the number of its pri-

mary plates, of which the half ones are included in paren-

theses :—

—— a eg? 3 4 5 6

plates :—

es I. a ..{1 (2) 3}1 (2) 3/1 (2, 8) 411 (2,3, 4) 5/1 (2, 3,4) 5} 1 QQ)

w: |ILa..) ” ” 1 (2, 3) 4 ” 1 (2, 3, 4)

at 2, 3) 4 1 (2, 3, 4

1 4 IL. 6 ” ” 1 2, 3) ” (2, 0, 4)

SLY. @ 5 We, SrA aiGid)r4 2 1 (2, 3, 4)

TSB ae 93 » fl (2,3) 41 (2, 8,4) 5 1 (2)

< tim 1,2 {1 (2) 3/1 Q, 8) 4) 1 2, 3) 4 {1 (2,3, 4) 5/1 @, 3,4) 5) O

toy a ” ” ” ” ” ” 1

Ei % Ul. a ” ” ” ” ” ” 1, 2

az | IV. b ” ” ” ” ” ”

LV. a@ ” ” ” ” ” ”

It will be seen that the number of primary plates in each

large plate increases from the peristome towards the vertex.

In the rows of series I. a—V. 0 this increase is not quite regular,

but somewhat unequal in the large plates 8 and 4, which may

be an individual peculiarity; but the rows I. a—V.6 of the

bivium agree perfectly, even in the last plates, where the tri-

vium also forms a group of similarly developed plates. In

series I. b-~V.a, however, the increase is the same throughout.

In large plate 3 some individuals have 1 (2) 3.

In each row the peristomial plate 1 is the oldest; the other

plates are younger in proportion as they are further from this ;

and the youngest is that which strikes upon the eye-plate of

the vertex. The youngest plate has not the same ordinal

number in the rows of both series. In the rows of series I. a—

V.6 it is the sixth, in those of series I.J-V.a the seventh,

with the, perhaps, individual exception of I.; so that this series,

which in the peristome has one primary plate less than series

I. a-V.¢, has in its increasing end one or several more than

this, inasmuch as not only is the large plate 6 completed, but

even the large plate 7 is commenced,

Each large plate commences as follows :—Close to the aboral

margin of a previously completed large plate the new first

primary plate is formed, close to this the second, and so on.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 293

All primary plates, even the half ones, are originally in their

first foundation entire plates; that is to say, they reach from

the interradium to the median suture of the ambulacrum.

Subsequently, whilst the whole of the complex of primary

plates which forms large plates increases in breadth, and even

before it is completed by the last primary plates, the inter-

mediate ones fall off in their growth; and whilst they retain

their position in the boundary of the ambulacrum towards the

interradium, their narrowed ends become more remote from

the median suture of the former. ‘The first formed of these

intermediate plates is the smallest of all, the later ones become

gradually larger; and thus it happens that whole groups of

intermediate primary plates acquire forms of a triangular figure,

the apex of which is formed near the middle of the large plate

by the projecting end of the last alone. By all this it is also

clear that these intermediate plates are not of later origin,

neither secondary nor inserted, but that they are formed in

ordinal sequence with the two outer entire plates. But the

latter grow to a much greater degree, so that they directly

touch each other where the intermediate plates cease, constitute

the greatest part of the area of the large plate, and the whole

of its margin towards the median suture.

The youngest large plates are distinctly longer, in the

direction from the vertex towards the peristome, than broad ;

but in proportion as each large plate grows, and at the same time

is removed from the vertex, it becomes broader in proportion to

its length. The greatest periphery of the corona is always

so placed that half the number of the plates and something

more is ventral—that is to say, situated between it and the

peristome, notwithstanding that the distance from it to the

peristome is always less than to the vertical rings. Con-

sequently during growth a compression from above downwards

of the ventral plates takes place, which appears more strongly

in proportion to their age, and, in combination with the move-

ment which also takes place in each large plate, alters their

form in a regular manner and at the same time changes the

position of the pores. In the youngest individuals which

have been examined, all the tentacular pores (with the excep-

tion of the very first interrupted one) are placed near the suture

towards the interradium, and those which belong to the same

large plate form together a curve with a slight, outwardly

convex flexure. These are the primordial pore-arcs. But

the tentacular pores begin very soon to move, in order to take

up a different position, and finally form other secondary ares,

which remain the same during the animal’s whole life, and are

so characteristic that we derive from them the characters of

294 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

the genera. What determines the issue of this removal is that

the pores of the entire plates have, even in comparison with

the size of the plates, a greater movement than those of the

half plates. Every pore which belongs to an entire primary

plate departs by degrees from its margin and approaches the

middle. Within every large plate this movement is strongest

in the first, adoral primary plate, and combined with a drawing

downwards ; in the last, aboral primary plate the same move-

ment occurs, although in a less degree. In the intermediate

half plates the shifting of the pores is nothing or almost im-

perceptible in the first, but more considerable and increasing

in the following ones. Consequently, if a large plate is com-

posed of a first entire primary plate, (1), three intermediate

plates, (2, 3, 4), and again an entire plate, (5), the first pore

moves far inwards nearly to the middle of the plate, the second

retains its original position, the third has drawn itself a very

little inwards, the fourth rather more, and the fifth still more.

But it is a.consequence of this unequal movement that the

first pore no longer belongs to the original pore-arc, but has

separated therefrom and entered and completed a new, secon-

dary arc, the other members of which are constituted by the

pores of the preceding large plate, with the exception of the

first. The ares of 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 pores which characterize

Toxopneustes, and in which the number of pores is dependent

on the number of intermediate plates, are therefore always

counted from and including the second pore in one large plate,

to and including the first in the following plate. These altera-

tions of the ambulacra are represented in Pl. XIV. figs. 2-8.

In the peristome, even in individuals of small size, all order

seems to have disappeared in consequence of these shiftings,

This, however, is only apparently the case. A careful ex-

amination shows that every thing arranges itself in accordance

with the same law.

The peristomial plates of series I.a—V.5 present the fol-

lowing alterations. The rudimentary double pore (1), which

remains only as a notch in the very margin, moves gradually

past the middle of the first plate and becomes still more incon-

siderable; for whilst the corona grows near its vertical pole,

some of its solid substance disappears in the margin of the

peristome, where its caleaceous deposit is slowly absorbed,

with the result that the pore-cup which was moving thither

becomes, as it were, eaten away, and loses a greater or less

portion of its wall. The perfect double pore (2) in the first

primary plate (1,1), which is an entire plate, moves, like this,

from the suture towards the middle, and also approaches the

margin, so that by degrees it loses a good deal of the wall

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 295

round its lower aperture, after the upper one becomes filled up

and blind. These two pores (1 and 2) form persistently a

‘pair of themselves. The second primary plate (1, 2) is a half

plate ; its pore (3) removes very slightly from its original place,

and commences the first distinct secondary are, but, in conse-

quenceof the diminution and depression of the first primary plate,

approaches the margin, where it also in its turn loses a part of

its wall. The third and last primary plate (1,3) of the first

large plate is again an entire plate ; and its pore (4) also moves

inwards, and further than the preceding one. Pore 5, which

belongs to the first primary plate of the second large plate, is,

as such, again the most movable, wanders far from the suture,

and completes the first secondary arc of the three pores 3, 4, 5.

Pore 6, situated in the intermediate half plate 2,2, remains

in its place as the first of the second are, again of three pores,

of which the second, (7), in primary plate 2, s, has moved

inwards not inconsiderably, although not so much as the third

(pore 8), which belongs to primary plate 3,1. With pore 9, in

primary plate 3, 2, again commences a third secondary arc of

four pores, which move in accordance with the same law as

the preceding ones—namely, 9, pl. 3, 2, 10, pl. 3, 3,11, pl. 3, 4,

and 12, pl. 4,1. Whilst these movements have been going on,

the large plates 1, 2, and 3 have also become more strongly com-

pressed. In one individual (fig. 2) they constitute two thirds

of the whole height of the corona, and the greatest periphery

nearly coincides with the suture between 2 and 3; in fig. 3 they

all lie below the line of the greatest periphery, occupy less than

half the height of the corona, and their width is rather greater

than their height. The first large plate (1), the peristomial

plate, especially, is strongly compressed; its pores cease to

grow ; their upper tube is diminished or closed; pore 2 loses

still more of its wall in the margin of the peristome; pore 3

gradually follows in the same direction ; the radiolar tubercles

disappear entirely or for the most part ; and in the individual,

fig. 6, the suture between the large plates 1 and 2 has dis-

appeared, and they have coalesced to form a single binary large

plate of the second order, 1+2, composed of six primary

plates, which number cannot be distinguished; and the large

radiolar tubercle it bears is that which originally belonged to

large plate 2. In the individual, fig. 7, this double large plate

1+2 has become still more compressed ; of pore 2 only half

remains, and but little more of pore 3. The sutures of the

primary plates now disappear still more within the large plate

3; and in the individual, fig. 8, even this has completely

coalesced with 1+2 to form a single ternary plate of the

third order, 1+2+3, composed of eleven primary plates, and

296 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

consequently furnished with eleven pores, so placed that they

may be counted as follows:—1, 2; 3,4, 5; 6, 7,8; 9,10, 11,

and, to complete the latter are, 12 in the following large

plate 4,—that is to say, in groups of 2,3, 3, 4,&c. The form

of this large composite plate has now become such that its

breadth stands to its height about in the relation of 1:0°7. In

the youngest specimen (fig. 2), in which the three plates are

quite distinct, the breadth is to their length, taken together,

as 1: 2°25.

Within the first coronal plates which belong to series I. b-

V.a corresponding changes take place, with only such differ-

ences as are due to the first large plate consisting only of two

primary plates. Here, also, the plates 1, 2, and 3 coalesce,

apparently almost earlier than in series I.a-V.b. The ternary

plate of the third order finally produced by coalescence has

then ten pores so arranged that they may be counted 1, 2; 3,

4; 5,6, 7; 8,9, 10, and, to complete the arc, 11 in the next

large plate (4); consequently 2, 2, 3, 4, &c. It is by the

second number that we recognize the peristomial plates of

series 1.b-V.a ; it is there two, but three in series I. a—V. 6 ; and

this character is constant in the Latistelle, which may be

oriented by this means. ‘The fourth arc, which here has four

‘pores, has only three in occasional individuals ; that is to say,

the third large plate has only one intermediate primary plate.

Some variability seems to prevail in this.

In the Echinide the tentacular pores are double pores.

Within an oval space or cup bounded by a more or less

elevated wall open two straight passages, through which

aquiferous ducts pass to the tentacle. ‘Their openings on the

inside of the shell are considerably further apart than on the

outside. These passages consequently traverse the thickness

of the test in an oblique direction. If we compare the posi-

tion of the outer apertures with that of the inner ones in the

same plate of different ages and sizes, we find that the inner

‘ones do not change their position so much as the outer ones ;

so that the passages which, in the younger specimens, take the

shortest course from the inside to the outside, gradually draw

away during growth in an oblique direction towards the

middle, in the same proportion as the outer apertures shift

their place. The movement which takes place in the sub-

stance of the plate is therefore not the same in its whole mass,

and has, the nearer we go to the outside, a preponderant

direction towards the median suture of the ambulacrum.

Thus, in Toxopneustes drébachensis, do the ambulacra grow,

with constant alterations in the plates and pores; but even in

the largest individuals the different character of the two dif-

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 297

ferent series is recognized by the form aad grouping of the

above parts in the peristome. The numbers by which the

arrangement of the pores can be indicated in that species

(namely, in series I. a—V. b, 2, 8,3, 4, &c. ; and in series I. 6-

V. a, 2, 2, 38, 4) recurs not only in generically allied species,

such as Toxopneustes brevispinosus and T. lividus, but also in

Loxechinus albus, Echinus esculentus, Lytechinus variegatus,

Tripneustes ventricosus, Boletia heteropora, Amblypneustes

ovum, Temnopleurus toreumaticus, in fact throughout the La-

tistelle, even in the Lchinometre. In the arrangement of

the pores round the peristome the same numbers recur in the

West-Indian £. lucunter, Linn., with striking distinctness.

The madreporic plate is situated, as in all others, near the

right anterior interradium ; and the animal’s antero-posterior

does not coincide, as J. Miiller thought he found, with the

longest diameter of the oval test; but itis oblique, as L. Agassiz

supposed ; for the longitudinal diameter passes through ambu-

lacrum I. and the corresponding interradium 3, and in its ver-

tical plane are situated the lines of curvature for the flexure of

the test. On the other hand Heterocentrus and Colobocentrus

are symmetrical ; in these, moreover, the short diameter of the

test 1s its antero-posterior axis, in which direction also the

peristome is elongated, with the posterior sinus deepest. This

is the position accepted by J. Miiller as the correct one in these

genera; but the position which is thus given to the madre-

poric plate, he regarded as an exception from that which he

regarded as the normal one both in “chinus and Cidaris, near

the left posterior interradium. This is not the case. Except

in the Clypeastridee the connexion of the madreporic plate

with the right anterior apical plate is constant in all Hehi-

noidea. If its position is occasionally unknown, it is found

in the Latistelle by the formula of the arrangement of the pores

in the peristomial plates, and by the antero-posterior axis of

the same test, and its division into a trivium and a bivium.

The Latistelle have ten free pore-plates in the buccal mem-

brane. It might be asked whether these do not become very

early detached from the corona, before the auricles are yet

developed. Careful investigations under favourable conditions

ought to settle this question. A small Toxopneustes driba-

chensis, 2 millims. in diameter, has already the five pairs of

large plates in the buccal membrane, each pair in front of

an ambulacrum (fig. 9). Of these ten plates, those of series

I. a—V.¢ are the larger, but destitute of tentacular pores; the

other five, of series I. B-V. a, on the contrary, are smaller, and

each furnished with its pore and its tentacle; that is to say,

this latter series is here, as always, inferior in size, but supe-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 22

298 Dr. Sclater on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis.

rior in development to the former one. In a much earlier

stage (fig. 10), when the young Hchinus, 0°6 millim. in dia-

meter, no longer shows any remains of its pluteus, but still

does not present any indications either of mouth or anus, it

moves, as we learn from J. Miiller’s investigations, by means

of five large primordial tentacles furnished with sucking-disks,

which issue, at equal distances apart, from inconsiderable de-

pressions not far from the margin of the ventral surface of the

lentiform body, which was turned towards the inside of the

pluteus. Within these large tentacles is situated a circle of

five pairs of calcareous reticulated disks, of a rounded, inter-

nally oblong form. ach disk has near its aboral end a

large, evenly bounded, oval, outwardly pointed aperture,

above which is placed one of the ten smaller tentacles (figs.

12 & 13). These five pairs of disks can hardly be any thing

but the foundations of the first primary ambulacral plates, and

the rather because, between the pairs nearer to the periphery,

five smaller, nearly triangular plates come in, which then

would be the first commencement of the interradia. Hach of

the five large primordial tentacles has its base in the line

which separates each pair of the ten smaller and later ones,

at the point from which the median suture of the ambulacrum

will subsequently start. Can these five isolated tentacles have

any thing m common with the tentacles of the buccal mem-

brane, which also first make their appearance isolatedly ?

Krohn saw them become absorbed and disappear before the

mouth opened, and the ten paired tentacles become the instru-

ments of locomotion in their stead*.

[To be continued. |

XLIV.—WNotes on Propithecus bicolor and Rhinoceros lasiotis.

By 2. L. Sciarnr, MAL) Ph.D. mR Ss.

Tue Lemur described by Dr. Gray in the last Number of the

‘Annals’ (anted, p. 206), as Propithecus bicolor, has been al-

ready named Propithecus Hdwardsi by M. Alfred Grandidier

(Compt. Rend. Ixxii. p. 231, 27 Feb. 1871). M. Milne-Ed-

wards, who has requested me to make known this correction,

informs me that he has examined a marked skin of this animal

received from Mr. EK. Gerrard, jun., and has no doubt of the

identity of the two species.

As regards the two Asiatic two-horned rhinoceroses in

the Zoological Society’s Gardens, when the first specimen ar-

rived from Chittagong I referred it to Rhinoceros sumatrensis,

that being the only species of this section then known to science.

* Miiller’s Archiv, 1851, p. 351.

Bibliographical Notice. 299

But when the second animal (obviously of a different species)

reached us, [ carefully examined the literature on the subject, and

came to the conclusion (exactly contrary to that of Dr. Gray,

antea, p. 207) that the latter was the true R. sumatrensis and the

former new to science. Under these circumstances, in a paper

read before Section D at the British Association’s Meeting

at Brighton on the 16th of August last, I proposed to call the

former Rhinoceros lasiotis*, Supposing even that the exist-

ing descriptions and figures of hinoceros sumatrensis are not

sufficient to settle this question (which, however, is, in my

opinion, by no means the case), the known localities from which

the two animals were brought are of themselves strongly pre-

sumptive that my determination is correct. One was captured

near Chittagong, in a district, where no two-horned rhino-

ceros was previously known to occur; the other in Malacca,

where the fauna is well known to be identical with that of the

adjacent island of Sumatra. I may add that Mr. Blythf,

who has paid special attention to the Asiatic rhinoceroses, and

Dr. Dorner, who has examined not only the specimen in the

Regent’s Park, but also the similar animal in the Gardens of

the Zoological Society of Hamburg, of which he is Secretary,

are both of opinion that the Malaccan animal is the true

L. sumatrensis ; and I believe that any naturalist who has an

opportunity of examining the two animals in the Zoological

Society’s Gardens will come to the same conclusion.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE,

Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles drawn from Life. By James

pE Carte Sowersy, F.L.S., and Epwarp Luar. London, Paris,

and Frankfort: Henry Sotheran, Joseph Baer and Co., 1872.

Dr. Gray, who edits this work, prefaces it by the following intro-

duction :—

“This series of Plates was made under the superintendence of

Mr. Thomas Bell, to illustrate his ‘ Monograph of the Testudinata,’

a work in which the author intended to represent and describe not

only all the known recent, but also fossil species. The publication

of this extensive work was unfortunately interrupted (by the failure

of the publisher) when only two-thirds of the plates that had been

prepared (which in themselves formed but a limited portion of the

intended work) were published.

“We are informed in the original Prospectus that ‘The whole of

the drawings are from the inimitable pencil of Mr. James Sowerby ;

and the author feels that he is only doing justice to that distinguished

artist in natural objects when he states that in correctness of

* See the ‘Times’ of August 19th, p. 5, where a notice of this paper is

given; also ‘Atheneum’ of August 24th, p. 243.

+ See ‘ Field,’ August 24, 1872, letter signed “ Z.”

22*

300 Royal Society :-—

delineation, minute and elaborate execution, and taste in the

general arrangement of the figures, nothing within the range of

zoographical illustration has ever surpassed them. The Plates will

be lithographed by Mr. Lear, coloured (so as to form the most perfect

facsimiles of the drawings) by Mr. Bayfield. The joint talent of

these excellent artists, exhibited in the illustrations of the Psittacide

of the former gentleman, renders it unnecessary to say that the ability

of the painter will be ably seconded by that of the lithographer and

colourist.’ Which I entirely indorse.

“The unsold stock and unpublished plates were purchased at Mr.

Highley’s sale by Mr. Sotheran, and the work has been in abeyance

for many years.

‘Mr. Bell has declined to furnish the text for the unpublished plates.

In this difficulty Mr. Sotheran applied to me; and feeling that it

was much to be regretted that such beautiful and accurate plates

should be lost to science, and considering that such minutely accu-

rate and detailed figures would not require to be accompanied

by a description, I agreed to add a few lines of text to each Plate,

containing first the original name that Mr. Bell placed upon them,

then the name used in the Museum Catalogue of Tortoises, so as to

bring the nomenclature to the level of our present knowledge of

these animals, at the same time referring to a work in which the

synonymy of the species is to be found. I have also added a few

lines on the habits and manners of the species from works of authors

who have had the opportunity of observing them in their native

country.

“« Many of the specimens figured and the rest of Mr. Bell’s collection

of reptiles are now to be found in the Anatomical and Zoological

Museum at Cambridge.”

The work contains 60 plates and represents 36 species; so that of

many species there is a plate of the upper and underside, and of

several, varieties of the same species. They are all from living

specimens except Hmyda ceylonensis, which is from a specimen pre-

served in spirit.

It is one of the most beautiful and accurate works that has appeared

on Tortoises, and, one might almost say, on any known reptiles.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

ROYAL SOCIETY.

June 20, 1872.—Sir James Paget, Bart., D.C.L., Vice-President,

in the Chair.

“On the Echinidea of the ‘Porcupine’ Deep-sea Dredging-Ex-

peditions.” By Prof. Wyvitte THomson, LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.

The deep-sea dredging-cruises of H.M. Ships ‘ Lightning’ and

‘Porcupine’ during the summers of 1868, 1869, and 1870 in the

North Atlantic, were comprehended within a belt 1500 miles in

length by from 100 to 150 miles in width, extending from the Feerde

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 301

Islands along the northern and western coasts of Scotland and Ireland

and the coasts of Portugal and Spain to the Strait of Gibraltar. In

this area fifty-seven successful hauls of the dredge were made during

the three summers in water exceeding 500 fathoms in depth, sixteen

beyond 1000 fathoms, and two beyond 2000 fathoms.

Even at the latter extreme depth Echinodermata appeared to be

abundant. At 2435 and at 2090 fathoms all the Echinoderm orders

were represented—the Echinidea by a small variety of Echinus norvegi-

cus, D. & K., and a young example of Brissopsis lyrifera, Forbes ;

the Asteridea by a species of the genus Archaster ; the Ophiuridea

by Ophiocten sericeum, Forbes, and Ophiacantha spinulosa, M. & T.;

the Holothuridea by Echinocucumis typica, Sars ; and the Crinoidea

by a very remarkable new form of the Apiocrinidee, which has been

described under the name of Bathycrinus gracilis, Wy.T. From

2000 fathoms upwards the number of Echinoderms seems to increase

rapidly ; but this apparent increase may possibly be due to our wider

knowledge of the fauna of the shallower water; at from 300 to 800

fathoms along the coast of Britain many species of all the orders

are enormously abundant, so much so as to give a very marked

character to the fauna of that special zone. Several of these species,

such as Cidaris papillata, Leske, Toxopneustes drobachiensis, Miiller,

Echinus norvegicus, D. & K., Astropecten tenuispinus, D. & K.,

Archaster Parellii, D. & K., 4d. Andromeda, M. & T., and Euryale

Linkii, M. & T., have been long known to inhabit the deep water

of the British area, and form part of a fauna which will be probably

found to have a very wide lateral extension at temperatures whose

minimum ranges from ()° C. to +2° C., a fauna which crops up, as it

were, within the ordinary limits of observation in the seas of Scandi-

navia, and which has consequently been carefully studied by the

Scandinavian naturalists.

Another group of species, including Tripylus fragilis, D. & K.,

Ctenodiscus crispatus, Retzius, Pteraster militaris, M. & T., dm-

phiura abyssicola, Sars, Antedon Eschrichtiit, O. F. Muller, and

several others, are members of the same fauna described from locali-

ties in the seas of Scandinavia and Greenland, but not hitherto

known as British. A third section, consisting of a number of unde-

scribed Echinideans, Asterideans, and Ophiurideans, may probably

also belong to this fauna ; while a fourth group, likewise undescribed,

and including such forms as Porocidaris, Phormosoma, Calveria,

Pourtalesia, Neolampas, Zoroaster, Ophiomusium, Pentacrinus,

Rhizocrinus, and Bathycrinus, would rather appear to be referable

to a special deep-sea fauna of which we as yet know only a few ex-

amples, and with whose conditions and extension we are unacquainted.

This abyssal fauna is of great interest, inasmuch as nearly all the

hitherto discovered forms referred to it show close relations to family

types of Cretaceous or early Tertiary age, and hitherto supposed to

be extinct.

Twenty-seven species of Echinidea were procured during the

cruises of 1868, 1869, and 1870, off the coasts of Britain and Portu-

gal, at depths varying from 100 to 2435 fathoms.

302 Royal Society :—

CIpDARID&.

Cidaris, Lamarck.

1. C. gapillata, Leske.

Occurs in enormous numbers on gravel at depths of from 100 to

400 fathoms, from Feerée to Gibraltar, and small-sized examples

are frequent down to 1000 fathoms. ‘This is a variable species,

and every possible link may be shown between the typical C. papillata,

Leske, and C. Aystriv, Lam. I have no hesitation, after examining

many hundreds of specimens, in fusing the two forms into one

species.

2. C. affinis, Stokes.

This is a pretty little species, and apparently distinct, although it is

sometimes not easy to draw the line between it and small forms of

©. papillata. It occurs abundantly in the Mediterranean, and locally

off the coast of Portugal.

Porocidaris, Desor.

This genus was established by Desor chiefly on a character which I

eannot regard as of great importance, and which is absent in the

present species, a row of small holes surrounding the tubercles of the

primary spines in the scrobicular areee. From the description these

holes seem to be nothing more than complete perforations, owing

to imperfect calcification, in the position of the depressions which

frequently occur in the scrobiculz of the Cidaridee for the insertion

of the muscles of the spines. Along with this character, however,

there were some others of greater value, a very remarkable paddle-

like form of the spines surrounding the mouth, and a tendency to

coalescence in the scrobicular areze. ‘These characters are well marked

in the species described. This genus has hitherto only been found

fossil—a few detached plates and some of the characteristic spines in

the Nummulitic beds of Verona and Biarritz, and some spines referred

to the genus, on account of their having the same singular form, in the

Lower Oolite of Frick.

1. P. purpurata, n. sp.

Four examples from depths of from 500 to 600 fathoms off the Butt

of the Lews.

EcHINOTHURID&.

I think it due to the memory of the late Dr. S. P. Woodward to

adopt as the type of this very distinct and remarkable family the

genus Echinothuria, which he described with singular sagacity from

one or two imperfect specimens from the White Chalk. The Echino-

thuridz are regular urchins with depressed tests, rendered perfectly

flexible by the whole of the plates, both ambulacral and interambu-

lacral, being arranged in imbricating rows, the interambulacral plates

overlapping one another from the apex to the mouth, and the ambu-

lacral plates in the opposite direction. The margin of the peristome

is entire, and the peristomial membrane is covered with imbricated

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 303

scales, through which the ranges of double pores and ambulacral tubes

are continued up to the edge of the mouth as in Cidaris. The am-

bulacral plates are strap-shaped, and the pores trigeminal; the two

inner pairs of each are pass through small accessory plates inter-

calated between the ambulacral plates, and the third pair, remote

from the others, pass through the end of the ambulacral plate. The

dental pyramid is broad and low, and the teeth are simply grooved as

in Cidaris. The two divisions of the tooth-socket are not united by a

closed arch ; the ambulacral tube-feet on the oral surface are provided

with suckers, while those on the apical surface are simple and conical.

Phormosoma, ui. g.

Plates overlapping slightly and forming a continuous shell, the

corona coming to a sharp edge at the periphery, and the upper

surface of body differing greatly in character from the lower.

1. P. placenta, n. sp.

One example from 500 fathoms off the Butt of the Lews; several

fragments from deep water in the Rockall Channel.

Calveria, n. g.

Plates overlapping greatly in the middle line of the ambulacral and

interambulacral areze. Plates narrow, and leaving fenestree between

them which are filled up with membrane. Character of the peri-

stome with regard to the distribution of spines, the structure of the

pore-areze, &c. nearly uniform from the apex to the edge of the peri-

stome.

1. C. hystrix, n. sp.

Fenestrze between the plates small. Colour a nearly uniform rich

claret. One specimen in deep water off the Butt of the Lews.

2. C. fenestrata, n. sp.

Plates narrower than in the last species, and fenestrae wider. Of

a pale grey colour, with bands of chocolate radiating from the apical

pole. Two specimens from the coast of Portugal, and fragments in

deep water off the south and west of Ireland.

Ecuinip&.

Echinus, Link.

1. £. melo, Lam.

One or two small specimens off the coast of Portugal.

2. E. Flemingii, Ball.

The large typical form of this species was met with in deep water

off the Shetlands, but not abundantly.

3. E. rarispina, G. O. Sars.

4. E. elegans, D. & K.

5. E. norvegicus, D. & K.

The last three are critical species ; and although the extreme forms

are very dissimilar, in a large series there are so many intermediate

304. Royal Society :—

links, that it is difficult to tell where the one begins and the other

ends. It is possible that they ought to be regarded as varieties, and

lumped together under Lamarck’s name, F. acutus.

6. EH. microstoma, n. sp.

Although I have great hesitation at present in proposing an addi-

tion to the genus Echinus, I feel compelled in the meantime to

separate this very distinct form with a thin depressed test, a remark-

ably large periproct, and a small peristome with the edge markedly

curved inwards and a uniform vivid red colour. . microstoma is

very abundant from 150 to 400 fathoms off the west coasts of Scot-

land and Ireland.

Spherechinus, Desor.

1. S. esculentus, L., sp.

A marked variety, with a tall narrow test and white spines, in deep

water.

Toxopneustes, Agassiz.

l. T. drébachiensis, Miller.

Of this species it seems to me that 7’. pictus, Norman, and T’. pal-

lidus, G. O. Sars, can only be regarded as varieties. It is generally

distributed at depths beyond 100 fathoms.

2. T'. brevispinosus, Risso, sp.

Shallow water on the coast of Spain.

Psammechinus, Agassiz.

1. P. miliaris, Lam., sp.

2. P. microtuberculatus, Ag.

CASSIDULID&.

Neolmapas, A. Agassiz.

This genus, with a nearly central pentagonal mouth and a tolerably

distinct floscelle, with the anal opening at the bottom of a deep pos-

terior groove excavated in a kind of projecting rostellum, with narrow

ambulacral areze and a small compact group of apical plates, must

be referred to the Cassidulide ; but it differs from all known genera

of the family, living or extinct, in having no trace of a petaloid

arrangement of the ambulacra, which are reduced on the apical sur-

face of the test to a single pore penetrating each ambulacral plate,

and thus forming a double row of alternating simple pores for each

ambulacral area.

1. N. rostellatus, A. Ag.

I believe I am correct in referring to this species a single specimen

dredged at the mouth of the English Channel. It is upwards of an

inch in length, and therefore nearly double the size of the examples

procured by Count Pourtales in depths of from 100 to 150 fathoms in

the Strait of Florida.

CLYPEASTRIDZ.

Echinocyamus, Van Phelsum.

1. E. angulatus, Leske.

Generally distributed, but not found living beyond 150 fathoms.

Prof. W. Thomson on the Deep-sea Dredging-expeditions. 305

ANANCHYTIDE.

Pourtalesia, A. Agassiz.

According to the classification of Desor, which makes the “ dis-

junct ” arrangement of the ambulacra at the apex the test character

of the Dysasteridze, this genus should be referred to that group ; for

the apical disk is truly decomposed as in Dysaster and Collyrites,

and not merely drawn out as in dnanchytes. From the arrangement

and form of the pore-plates, however, and from the general appear-

ance and habit of the animal, I am inclined to think with A. Agassiz

that its affinities are more with such forms as Infulaster. Pourta-

lesia must be an aberrant form, in whatever group it may be placed.

The mouth is at the bottom of a deep anterior groove, occupying the

anterior ambulacral area. ‘The arrangement of the trivium is nearly

normal; but the bivial region is enormously prolonged backward

into a long rostrum, on the upper surface of which, near its pos-

terior extremity, the anus is situated ina pit partially covered by a

projecting boss. The ambulacral pores are simple, one pore on each

plate.

1. P. Jeffreysi, n. sp.

A single specimen of this very remarkable form was dredged in

640 fathoms to the north of the Shetlands. It is nearly allied to

P. miranda, Pourtales, from the Strait of Florida, but differs in several

details.

2. P. phyale, n. sp.

Two or three small specimens were dredged by Mr. Gwyn Jeffreys

in the Rockall Channel. All the specimens are immature ; but from

the marked difference in form, and from some other characters, I

believe them to be the young of a second species.

SPATANGID.

Brissopsis, Agassiz.

1. B. lyrifera, Forbes, sp.

Large specimens of this species are abundant at from 50 to 250

fathoms. Beyond the latter depth the specimens decrease in size,

and at extreme depths only examples which have all the appearance

of being very young are met with. ‘These small delicate specimens

were found at all depths, even down to 2090 fathoms.

Tripylus, Philippi.

1. T. fragilis, D. & K.

At from 400 to 500 fathoms between Scotland and Ferée. Hitherto

known as Scandinavian.

Schizaster, Agassiz.

1. S. canaliferus, Val.

A single small specimen from the coast of Spain.

Amphidetus, Agassiz.

1. A. ovatus, Leske, sp.

Abundant at moderate depths.

Spatangus.

1. S. purpureus, O. F. Miller.

306 Miscellaneous.

2. S. Raschi, Lovén.

This species is apparently gregarious, and is enormously abundant

in patches here and there from the Feerdes to the Strait of Gibraltar

at depths of from 100 to 300 fathoms.

Of the twenty-seven species observed, six (namely Echinus Flem-

ingii, Spherechinus esculentus, Psammechinus miliaris, Eehinocya-

mus angulatus, Amphidetus ovatus, and Spatangus purpureus) may

be regarded as denizens of moderate depths in the ‘‘ Celtic province,”

recent observations having merely shown that they have a somewhat

greater range in depth than was previously supposed. Probably

Spatangus Raschi may simply be an essentially deep-water form

having its headquarters in the same region. Eight species (Cidares

papillata, Echinus elegans, E. norvegicus, E. rarispina, E. micro-

stoma, Toxopneustes drobachiensis, Brissopsis lyrifera, and Tripylus

Jragilis) are members of a fauna of intermediate depth; and all, with

the doubtful exception of Echinus microstoma, have been observed in

comparatively shallow water off the coasts of Scandinavia, Five

species (Cidaris affinis, Echinus melo, Toxopneustes brevispinosus,

Psaummechinus microtuberculatus, and Schizaster canaliferus) are

recognized members of the Lusitanian and Mediterranean faunee,

and seven (Porocidaris purpurata, Phormosoma placenta, Calveria

hystrix, C. fenestrata, Neolampas rosteilatus, Pourtalesia Jeffreysi,

and P. phyale) are forms which have for the first time been brought

to light during the late deep-sea dredging-operations, whether on this

or on the other side of the Atlantic: there seems little doubt that

these must be referred to the abyssal fauna, upon whose confines we

are now only beginning to encroach. ‘Three of the most remarkable

generic forms, Calveria, Neolampas, and Pourtalesia, have been

found by Alexander Agassiz among the results of the deep-dredging

operations of Count Pourtales in the Strait of Florida, showing a

wide lateral distribution; while even a deeper interest attaches to

the fact that while one family type, the Echinothuride, has been

hitherto known only in a fossil state, the entire group find nearer

allies in the extinct faunas of the Chalk or of the earlier Tertiaries

than in that of the present period.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On Thread-cells and Semen in Marine Sponges. By T. Erumr.

Tux researches which have been made during the last few years

on sponges have led to the recognition of striking affinities between

these animals and the Coelenterata; nevertheless certain important

differences in their organization and, in particular, in their histolo-

gical structure even recently checked those who would have been

most disposed to unite these two groups. M. Hiickel said, in 1869:

— <The complete absence of the urticant organs in all the Sponges,

the constant presence of these same organs in all the Coralliaria, the

Hydromeduse, and the Ctenophora, constitute at present the sole

morphological character which separates in a clear and definite manner

the first of these classes from the three others. I have in con-

Miscellaneous. 307

sequence proposed already, in my monograph of the Monera, and,

later still, in my ‘Natiirliche Schépfungsgeschichte,’ to unite these

three last-named classes under the ancient name of Acalephes or

Cnide (urticant animals).”

Notwithstanding the existence of this differential character, the

idea that the sponges are only an inferior group of the Coelenterata

had gained ground. Thus M. Claus, in the second edition of his

work on zoology, divides the subkingdom of the Ccelenterata into

three classes—namely, the Spongiz, Anthozoa, and Ctenophore. This

grouping, which might appear rather rash, has just been confirmed in

a striking manner by the discovery, due to M. Eimer, of urticant

organs in the sponges. This naturalist has observed some organs of

this nature in a certain number of siliceous sponges more or less re-

lated to the Reniere.

In one species with remarkably viscous sarcode the urticant cells

are found disseminated without any regular arrangement, but never-

theless frequently round the spicules, and most frequently surrounding

throughout their whole extent the openings which give access to the

afferent currents. They cover in particular abundance the cavity

of the stomach ; it seems, on the contrary, that they are wanting

at the surface of the animal. Their form is an abbreviated oval, as

in many of the Celenterata. Amongst those which are completely

developed, numerous cells in the course of formation are found.

The second species which has presented urticant cells has oscula

opening most frequently on papilliform eminences and conducting

into canals lined with an extremely distinct membrane. It is this

membrane which is furnished with urticant cells, in all degrees of

development ; they are more spherical and a little smaller than in

the preceding species. Where the canals abut on the exterior sur-

face of the body, they give place to ordinary cells.

A third species of sponges with urticant cells approaches very closely

to the preceding, but differs from it by the absence of a cutaneous

layer and in the nature of its spicules. The canals serving for the

passage of the efferent currents are of the same width, and have the

same arrangement as in the preceding, except that they are only

lined with a very delicate membrane—-so delicate, in fact, that it is

often difficult even to prove its existence. This membrane bears the

urticant cells and cells of formation in all degrees of development ;

but the urticant cells are very rare in the midst of the others. This

species, which thus forms a passage between the sponges with urti-

cant cells and those which are destitute of these organs, may be re-

garded as an arrest of development of the preceding.

The fourth form has no trace of a membrane lining the tubes

which serve for the passage of the efferent currents. Its tissue, in

most cases, is still more delicate than that of the preceding, from

which it differs also in the spicules. It is ordinarily colourless ; but

yet individual specimens are found which have a slight reddish-blue

colour ; and from these we pass to others which are of a violet-blue.

Among a great number of specimens of the bluish variety, M. Eimer

has found some which were filled with urticant cells of a type totally

308 Miscellaneous.

different from that which he had observed in the other species, but

bearing, like the others, very long threads. The urticant cells here

not only cover the internal surface of the efferent tubes; they are

diffused throughout the whole sponge, with their numerous cells of

formation in all stages of development. It can be proved clearly by

the latter that the essential part of the urticant cell (that is to say,

the urticant organ) originates from the nucleus. The different in-

dividuals here do not present the same uniformity that is observed

in the preceding species; they are seen to differ the one from the

other in the numerical proportion of the cells in course of formation

and those fully developed. In certain specimens we only find cells

in course of formation ; in others, as, for example, in the colourless

variety, we no longer find even those.

M. Eimer remarks that, whilst Leuckart and Hickel think that it

is through the calcareous sponges that the change from sponges to

corals takes place, the discovery of the urticant cells reveals a

remarkable affinity between the siliceous sponges and the Ccelen-

terata.

In addition to these details on the urticant organs, the author

communicates the results of his observations on the nourishment of

the sponges, which consists of little Crustacea, like that of certain

polypes, and on the existence in these animals of incontestable

zoosperms. ‘This is not the first time the existence of zoosperms

in the sponges has been noticed. Some bodies of that nature

were found by Lieberkiihn in the Spongille ; and other natura-

lists have indicated their existence in marine sponges. But several

of these observations were contested; it was supposed that, in

certain cases at least, flagellated cells or Infusoria had been taken

for zoosperms. M. Eimer figures perfectly characteristic zoosperms

which he has observed in numerous gelatinous, siliceous, and cal-

eareous sponges. Through the tissues will be found distributed

spherical or oval balls, the surface of which appears granulated.

A very strong magnifying-power shows us that these granules are

caused by myriads of heads of zoosperms, which have their tails

turned inward. When this ball has been broken, it may be seen

that the head of the zoosperm bears a well-developed anterior

prolongation or beak (Schnabel), which is darker than the other

portions of the head. Except the greater length of this prolonga-

tion, the head has quite the same form as the zoosperms in man.

The tail is of extreme thinness ; and we can only perceive it with a

very powerful objective, such as the immersion No. 10 of Hartnack;

and even then it is impossible to follow it throughout its length.

We can, however, see enough of it to convince us that in the full-

grown zoosperms it is of an exceptional length ; often we can count

150 p. These zoosperms originate from cells with distinct nuclei ; and

M. Eimer believes he has noticed that the head is formed at the

expense of the nucleus, whilst the filament originates from the proto-

plasm. He has always found with these zoosperms numerous ova ;

and for these reasons he considers the sponges to be hermaphrodites.

At the same time that M. Eimer was studying the sponges at

Miscellaneous. 309

Capri, M. Hiickel was also occupied with these animals on the shores

of Dalmatia, and had likewise ascertained the existence of zoosperms

and ova in the calcareous and siliceous sponges*. The results of his

researches had even been published a little before the memoir of M.

Eimer. The latter, however, thinks Hiickel, like Huxley and Lie-

berkiihn, had not under examination any completely developed zoo-

sperms, but only slightly advanced forms of those elements. As,

however, Hickel has observed a direct fecundation, M. Eimer hazards

the supposition that there may be some sponges in which the zoo-

sperms are arrested at one of the inferior stages of their develop-

ment.—Archw fiir mikroskopische Anatomie, vol. vill. Heft 2; Bibl.

Univ. August 15, 1872, Bull. Scient. p. 350.

Investigations upon the Development of the Gregarine.

By E. van BenepeEn.

The investigations of M. E. van Beneden upon the Gregarina

gigantea of the lobster confirm the observations of Lieberkiihn

upon the transformation of certain amceboid forms into Gregarine ;

only the phases are here somewhat different from those observed in

the Gregarine of the earthworm. The author found, in the small

intestine of the lobster, some small, finely granular, protoplasmic

masses, destitute both of membrane and nucleus. These masses,

which are continually changing their form, greatly resemble Protu-

meba primitiva or P. agilis of Hackel, from which they differ only

by presenting fine molecular granulations even to the periphery, and

by never emitting true pseudopodia. According to Hiickel’s nomen-

clature, these would be true gymnocytodes.

Side by side with these we find small protoplasmic globules, which

differ from them only by having lost the faculty of moving and

changing their form. They have no enveloping membrane any more

than the former ; but their spheroidal form is preserved by a peri-

pheral layer of denser and less fluid protoplasm.

With these globular and motionless forms we find others perfectly

similar to them, except that they have one or two prolongations

which cannot be assimilated to pseudopodia, but rather to the

movable stalk of the Noctiluce. M. van Beneden names these

generative cytodes, because it 1s these which directly give birth to

the Gregarine. When there are two prolongations, these are

inserted at but a little distance apart. One of these prolongations,

which is shorter and more slender and with paler outlines than the

other, and only contains very fine granules, is almost destitute of

mobility. When brought against a hard body, it is seen to bend;

and the bend thus produced persists for a very long time. The

other prolongation is considerably longer and stouter, with stronger

outlines and a more refractive protoplasm. Besides a very fine

punctation, it contains opaque granules, which are very numerous at

its slightly widened extremity. This process is endowed with an

extreme mobility, which is manifested in two modes. It may

swing about like the stalk of the Noctiluce, or present an inflection

* Jenaische Zeitschrift, vol. vi. Heft 4.

310 Miscellaneous.

which is propagated from the extremity towards the base, and

which is followed by a sudden straightening of the whole arm. At

the same time that this movement of straightening is made, a cur-

rent carries the granular protoplasm from the centre of the cytode

into the interior of the arm. This action repeated produces an

elongation of the arm, which is accompanied by a narrowing of its

basal portion and an accumulation of opaque granulations in its

terminal part.

When the mobile arm has attained a certain length, it separates

from the body of the cytode, and moves like a Nematode worm. We

shall soon see what further transformations it undergoes.

After this arm has separated and acquired an independent

existence, the other process follows the course of its development,

and arrives at the same state as the former one; only for this

purpose it requires the whole remainder of the body of the cytode.

If M. van Beneden has correctly coordinated the different phases

which he has been able to observe in the intestine of the lobster,

we must conclude that a single cytode gives origin successively to

two prolongations, each destined to become developed into a Grega- —

rina: one separates from the body of the cytode, the other ab-

sorbs the rest of that body.

These protoplasmic filaments, endowed with very active move-

ments, the author designates by the name of pseudofilarie ; he sup-

poses that it is their resemblance to young Nematode worms which

has led certain authors to assume that the Gregarine are a phase in

the evolution of the Nematoda,

These pseudofilarize are thinned at one of their extremities, and

slightly inflated at the opposite (cephalic) extremity, which is always

strongly charged with refractive granules. After a certat period

of activity their movements slacken; the length of the hody gra-

dually diminishes at the same time that its width increases, espe-

cially in the anterior part. Then all movement ceases, and the

pseudofilaria remains motionless. Towards the middle of the body,

there appears a dark circular spot, formed by a material more

refractive than the protoplasm, and the limits of which become more

and more distinct; this is the nucleolus. Around the nucleolus

there appears a transparent zone without granulations, the limits of

which are at first not very distinct, and which becomes the nucleus

of the cell. The pseudofilaria shortens and becomes more or less

oval; and an anterior projection or swelling, in which the refractive

granules have a tendency to accumulate, begims to be distinguish-

able.

We have then before us a Gregarina which has no longer any

important changes to undergo. It becomes elongated and acquires

more and more the form of a tube slightly dilated in its anterior

part. The posterior part becoming more elongated than the anterior,

the nucleus finally settles at the extremity of the anterior third of

the body. The refractive granules accumulated in the anterior

terminal inflection form a mass separated from the granular proto-

plasm of the rest of the body by a sort of transverse septum, formed

Miscellaneous. ay ball

by a layer of transparent protoplasm. The external part of the

protoplasm of the body, which at first formed a simple homogeneous

and transparent layer without granules, becomes more and more

distinctly bounded, and soon presents the form of a membrane with

a double contour. The nucleus becomes regularly oval and also

surrounds itself with a membrane.

By these changes and its increase in size the pseudofilaria finally

acquires the definitive form of Gregarina gigantea, and a length of as

much as 16 millims.

M. van Beneden follows this description of the development of the

Gregarina with some very interesting general considerations upon

the Monera and the Monerian phase of the Gregarinew. According

to him, if we admit that the substance of the Monera and cytodes is

identical with the sarcode of the Rhizopoda and the protoplasm of

cells, as regards physical and vital properties, we must regard it as

different from those bodies from a chemical point of view, since it

also contains the elements of the nuclear organs, which are differen-

tiated from it in the cell. He consequently proposes the name of

plasson for the constitutive substance of the body of the Monera and

cytodes. Although recognizing with him that both in the ontogenie

and in the phylogenic series we always, at the beginning, find this

plasson before meeting with cell-formations, it seems to us that the

necessity for this neologism has not yet made itself felt. Our

knowledge with regard to the nuclear formations compared with

protoplasm is too unsatisfactory to render it very urgent for us to

distinguish these substances. by names destined to indicate their

chemical differences. Moreover, if we were to commence this course,

we could not stop at the nomenclature proposed by M. van Beneden ;

it would be necessary to have :—a first name for the living substance

which does not present either nucleolus, nucleus, or enveloping mem-

brane; a second for that which has already abandoned the elements

necessary for the formation of the nucleolus; a third for that from

which have been separated the elements of a nucleolus and a nucleus,

bodies which M. van Beneden regards as chemically distinct (p. 146) ;

and a fourth for that which, besides these nuclear organs, has

furnished the elements of an enveloping membrane. This list is

still incomplete ; we should have to add to it, among others, the

protoplasm of the lepocytodes. It must be remarked, moreover,

that the substance to which M. van Beneden wishes to give the

name of plasson, on account of its chemical composition, is already a

complex substance, even from:a histological point of view, since the

author recognizes in the interior of the transparent mass granules

of two kinds, one kind being regarded by him as nutritive, com-

bustible elements; he even explains, by the presence or absence of

these granules, the different manner in which the movable and

immovable arms of the Gregarine in the ameeboid state behave.

The ontogenic development of the Gregarinc, as M. van Beneden

indicates, represents in an abridged form the phylogenic develop-

ment of the cell. We have here an example of endogenous gene-

ration by the formation of the nucleus in the body of the pseudo-

a2 Miscellaneous.

filaria ; but in the nuclear formation it is the nucleolus that first

appears—a fact which it is important to notice, and which is the

more striking because M. van Beneden has observed in the adult

G. gigantea a successive disappearance and reappearance of the

nucleoli.

To sum up, the Gregarina of the lobster would pass, in the course

of its embryonic development, through the following phases :—the

Monerian phase, the phase of the generative cytode, that of the

pseudofilaria, that of the protoplast, that of the encysted Gregarina,

and that of psorospermia.

There would therefore be in its evolution two phases during

which reproduction would take place by division :—1, that which

gives origin to the psorospermiz after encystation ; 2, that in which

the generative cytode produces pseudofilarize.—Journal de Zoologie,

tome i. (1872) pp. 1384-165; Bibl. Univ., Arch. des Sa. July 15,

1872, p..256.

Diatoms in Hot Springs.

Dr. Blake has collected diatoms at a hot spring in Pueblo valley,

Humboldt Co., Nevada, the temperature of which was 163° F.

More than fifty different species were recognized by him; and they

were found to be mostly identical with the species found in beds of

infusorial earth in Utah and described by Ehrenberg, showing that

the latter must have been accumulated in a hot lake, of about the

same temperature. No other living species were found in the hot

waters, excepting red alge. The deposit was a large one, and in it

there were concretions of silica. On making a thin section of one of

these concretions, a pair of legs of a coleopterous insect were visible

in the quartz; the greater part of the concretion was made up of

petrified algze.

In one of the hot springs at the California geysers, having a tem-

perature of 198° F., he found two kinds of Conferva—one capillary,

resembling Hydrocrocis Bischoffii, but larger; the other a filament,

with globular enlargements at intervals. In another spring, the

temperature 174° F., many Oscillarize were found, which by the

interlacement of their delicate fibres formed a semigelatinous mass,

and also two diatoms. In the water of the creek of Geyser Canon,

112° F., the alge formed layers sometimes 3 inches thick, covering

the bottom of the pools, and the same diatoms were found as in the

174° spring. The waters are acidulated by the presence of free

sulphuric acid ; and Dr. Blake suggests that this may account for the

rarity of diatoms.—Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iv. pp. 183, 189, 193, 197.

On the Habits of Galeodes pallipes. By Prof. Copr.

Prof. Cope exhibited a specimen of a G'aleodes, probably G. pallipes

of Say, taken in the town of Denver, Colorado, by Dr. Gehrung.

According to that gentleman, it was common in that place in houses,

and was an enemy and destroyer of the Crimea lectularius (bed-bug).

In captivity, it showed a preference for them as food, and crushed

them in its short falces, preliminary to sucking their juices.—Proc.

Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil. part iii. p. 295 (1872).

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. |

No. 59. NOVEMBER 1872.

XLV.—On the Hydroid Lar sabellarum, Grosse, and its Repro-

duction. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

[Plate XIX.]

Many years have elapsed since Mr. Gosse described, in the

‘Transactions of the Linnean Society,’ a remarkable Hydroid,

which he named Lar sabellarum. From that time to the

present nothing more has been heard of it; and meanwhile it

has been regarded with a kind of polite suspicion, and has

held its place in our systematic works almost on sufferance.

The unique oddity of its configuration and the grotesqueness

of its attitude, as depicted by Mr. Gosse’s pencil, are such as

to justify some amount of incredulity, or at least to create a

desire for further information. Allman, with a mixture of

~ courtesy and scepticism, says of it, “we are almost tempted to

regard it as an abnormal condition of some other form ;”’ and

in my ‘ History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes’ I have

assigned it a provisional place, in the hope that some new light

might be thrown upon it by further observation. Under these

circumstances it was with peculiar pleasure that . obtained

during the past summer a fine colony of this h* fmythical

Hydroid in full maturity, and am thus enabled bot: to remove

all doubts as to its true nature, and to complete the history

of which Gosse has given us the first lines.

The Lar was dredged off the @apstone at Ifracombe ; and

- its polypites were distributed along the margin of a Sabella-

tube, the very habitat in which Gosse’s specimen occurred.

In the first place, I am able to vouch for the general accuracy

of the figure which its discoverer has given us and ean affirm

that, extraordinary as it /ooks, it does no more than justice to

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist.. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 23

314 Rev. T. Hincks on Lar sabellarum

the original. It may, perhaps, be admitted that the skilful

pencil of the artist has introduced the slightest touch of cari-

cature ; but it really only serves to bring out more strikingly

the remarkable peculiarities of the creature.

The most marked characteristics of the genus Lar are to be

found in the number and disposition of the tentacles, and in the

curious head-like lobe in which the body of the polypite

terminates above. The arms are reduced to two, which spring

close together from the base of a prominent bilabiate proboscis

endowed with great mobility ; they are smooth, not muricated

or roughened with clusters of thread-cells, and very extensile.

These two tentacles face the mouth-bearing proboscis, and act

with it in the capture of food; they are frequently jerked in

the direction of the latter organ, which is furnished with two

broad lips, and is itself capable of the freest and most energetic

movement. ‘The proboscis is marked off from the rest of the

body by a well-defined constriction ; near the top of it occurs

a small space, which is thickly paved with thread-cells,

forming a kind of boss a little below the summit (PI. XIX.

fig.2,a). The polypites are fusiform, with a trace of brownish

colour a little below the terminal lobe, perfectly sessile, and

quite naked; they are very active and lively in their movements,

and are constantly throwing the body and tentacles into the *

most fantastic attitudes. ‘'The ludicrously close resemblance”’

which they bear to the human figure has already been noticed

by Gosse, and will be apparent to any one on a reference to the

Plate (Pl. XIX. fig.1). In this genus, then, we have a most

interesting modification of the structure that prevails amongst

the Hydroida. Instead of a wreath of tentacles immediately

surrounding the mouth, or several whorls distributed over the

body, we have here two tentacles only, placed on one side and -

opposed to a highly developed movable proboscis, which acts

energetically with them in the capture of prey, and compensates

for the reduced number of the prehensile arms.

Gosse was not so fortunate as to meet with the reproductive

zooids, and was therefore unable to give a satisfactory diagnosis

of the genus ; but the Ilfracombe specimen supplied this de-

ficiency, and has shown that the gonosome, no less than the

trophosome, is marked by very distinctive characters.

The fertile polypites of Zar (Pl. XIX. fig. 1, ff) are distri-

buted along the creeping stolon, amongst the alimentary zooids,

and bear a strong general resemblance to those of Hydractinia.

They are slender, somewhat filiform bodies, destitute of ten-

tacula, and terminated at the free extremity by a globular en-

largement, in which many thread-cells are imbedded ; they are

generally inferior in size to the alimentary polypites. The re-

and its Reproduction. SLs

productive buds are borne in clusters of three or four on the

upper portion of the body, and when mature detach themselves

as free medusiform zooids (planoblasts*); they are destitute

of an ectothecal covering (a character which they share with the

gonozooids of Clavatella, Corymorpha, and Cladonema), and

are therefore freely exposed to the surrounding water. In an

early stage of development the buds are much elongated

(Pl. XIX. fig. 1), and take on their hemispherical form as

they approach maturity.

The planoblast (Pl. XTX. figs. 3,4), at the time of its libera-

tion, is almost hemispherical in form ; the umbrella is perfectly

colourless and destitute of thread-cells. The digestive sac or

manubrium is very mutable in shape; normally it is sub-

cylindrical, and somewhat swollen at the base, with a slightly

lobate mouth. Six radiating canals traverse the umbrella,

terminating on the margin in as many oval bulbs of a brownish

colour, from which six smooth tentacles originate. Both ocelli

and lithocysts are wanting; but halfway between every two

tentacles a minute sac occurs on the margin of the umbrella,

containing two or three glittering bodies, which appear to be

thread-cells (Pl. XIX. fig. 6). The planoblast, when detached,

_ bears with it a portion of the peduncle which had formed the

bond of connexion between it and the parent stock ; this sur-

vives as a somewhat conical process above the base of the

manubrium (Pl. XIX. fig. 3,2), but is no doubt absorbed

after a time.

Six is an unusual number for the radiating canals ; amongst

the British Hydroida it is met with only in Clavatella (which

has also occasionally four) and in the genus Wills¢a of Forbes.

The smooth tentacles (which closely resemble those of the

polypite), the absence of the customary organs of sense, and

the minute marginal sacs with thread-cells may also be noted

as significant characters T.

There can be no doubt that the genus Lar must stand as

the type of a distinct family amongst the Hydroida Athecata,

which will present features as strongly marked as those of any

group in the suborder. Indeed the important modification in

the structure of the polypite has scarcely a parallel within the

limits of the whole order. A question, however, arises as to

* Planoblast (wandering bud) is a happy and expressive term intro-

duced by Allman to designate the free gonozooid.

+ Allman considers it probable that the marginal sac is the origin of

“whatin the adult Medusa would become an interradial marginal tentacle”

(‘ Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids,’ part ii. p. 427).

The substance of this paper was communicated to Prof. Allman by

letter, and is incorporated in the second part of his ‘Monograph’ just

issued by the Ray Society.

23*

316 On Lar sabellarum and its Reproduction.

the name of the family. Laride (which would be the natural

designation, and which I have adopted in my ‘ History ’) has

been appropriated by the ornithologists ; and Allman proposes

to substitute for it the compound Hydrolaride. I confess that

I have serious doubts as to the expediency of this change. It

seems to me that no practical inconvenience of any moment is

likely to arise from the identity of the two family names, under

the circumstances of the case; while there is a positive dis-

advantage in the adoption of a term which does not at once

suggest the typical genus. The rules respecting zoological

nomenclature have been framed with a view to general con-

venience, but are not to be inflexibly applied without regard

to special circumstances. In the present case I should feel in-

clined to retain the name Larida*.

The following is the amended diagnosis of the genus Lar,

and of the only known species.

Subkingdom CH#LENTERATA.

Order HY DROIDA.

Suborder ATHECATA, Hincks.

Fam. Laride.

Genus LAr, Gosse.

Polypites fusiform, developed on a creeping filiform stolon

clothed with a polypary ; tentacles two, filiform, springing from

one side of the base of a bilabiate proboscis, which is separated

by a constriction from the rest of the body. Reproduction by

means of medusiform planoblasts, which are borne on im-

perfectly developed polypites (blastostyles), terminating above

in a spherical cluster of thread-cells.

Gonozoo1D: umbrella (at the time of liberation) subhemi-

spherical; manubrium destitute of oral tentacles; radiating

canals six ; marginal tentacles six, springing from non-ocellated

bulbs.

Lar sabellarum, Gosse.

Polypites about 7; inch in height; a patch of thread-cells

near the summit of the terminal lobe; mouth furnished with

two broad lips; tentacula very extensile, smooth.

Gonozootds borne in clusters of three or four on the upper

portion of the slender blastostyles: umbrella (at the time of

liberation) colourless, destitute of thread-cells; manubrium

subeylindrical, slightly swollen at the base, of a reddish-brown

* Cases like the present, in which two family names are identical while

the names of the typical genera differ (Zar, Larus), are likely seldom to

occur.

On new Genera and Species of Coleoptera. 317

colour, not reaching to the orifice of the bell; tentacles smooth,

springing from brown bulbs; a minute marginal sac, with

thread-cells, halfway between every two tentacles.

Hab. Ilfracombe, off the Capstone, in shallow water, on the

tube of a Sabella.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX.

Fig. 1. A colony of Lar sabellarum, Gosse, highly magnified: f f, fertile

polypites, laden with the reproductive buds.

Fig. 2. A single polypite (a portrait) : a, collection of thread-cells.

Fig. 3. The medusiform gonozooid or planoblast: z, the remains of the

peduncle by which it was attached.

Fig. 4. The same, with the tentacles extended.

Fig. 5, The same, as seen from above.

Fig. 6, The marginal sac, containing thread-cells.

XLVI.—Notes on Coleoptera, with Descriptions of new Genera

and Spectes.—Part II. By Francis P. Pascos, F.L.S. &e.

[Plate XV.]

Inst of Genera and Species.

TROGOSITID.

Neaspis (n. g.) villosa ARRHENODINZE.

Poltin ae ad Prophthalmus sanguinalis.

—— planipennis.

CUPESIDA, Stratiorrhina (x. g.) xiphias, Westw.

Cupes ocularis. Eupsalis promissus.

BRENTHID~. BELOPHERINZ.

Blysmia (. g.) ruficollis.

TAPHRODERINZ,

Taphroderes filiformis. CEOCEPHALINZ.

—— obtusus. Ceocephalus internatus.

EPHEBOCERINE. —— tenuitarsis.

Ionthocerus ophthalmicus. ITHYSTENINZE.

TR ACHELIZINA Phocylides (x. g.) collaris.

: vine —— ebeninus.

Trachelizus Howittii. Achrionota (. g.) bilineata.

Cordus semipunctatus.

Amorphocephalus sulcicollis,

NEASPIS.

(Trogositide.)

Caput transversum ; clypeus brevis, sutura clypeali fere obsoleta ;

labrum late transversum. Mentuwm parvum, subrotundatum ;

labium latum, subtransversum, apice anguste truncatum, barba-

tum ; maaille lobis subsequalibus, interiore mutico. Oculi trans-

versi, integri, grosse granulati. Antenne 10-articulate, articulo

basali unilateraliter valde ampliato, secundo et tertio obconicis, illo

318 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

majore, quarto usque septimum gradatim brevioribus et latiori-

bus, octavo, nono et decimo clavam magnam formantibus, sed

duobus ultimis quasi conjunctis. Prothorax transversus, lateri-

bus foliaceis, apice late emarginatus. Hlytra oblonga, lateribus

anguste explanato-marginatis. Femora compressa, tibie recta ;

tarsi lineares 4-articulati. Cove antice valde transverse,

quatuor postici approximati. Prosternum angustum. Abdomen

segmentis longitudine fere sequalibus, liberis.

According to Lacordaire’s arrangement of the Trogositide,

the 10-jointed antennze would place this genus in the A‘go-

line ; but in other respects it agrees better with Leperina, or,

but for the inner unarmed lobeof the maxille, with Peltis. After

a close examination of the tarsi, I can find no indication of an

atrophied basal joint, as is usual in this family, although it is

possible there may be one. The suture between the ninth

and tenth joints of the club of the antenne is so nearly obli-

terated that, except in certain lights, it does not seem to

exist ; as itis, J mention it with hesitation. In any case, the

genus is especially differentiated in having seven joints only

to the antenne exclusive of the club; and it should, I think,

form the type of a new subfamily (Neaspidine). I received

three specimens of the species described below four or five

years ago from my valued correspondent Dr. Howitt, of Mel-

bourne, but without any precise locality. In appearance it

is like Peltis oblonga, but much smaller and proportionally a

little broader.

Neaspis villosa.

NV. depressa, ovalis, supra fusca et subgriseo-villosa, marginibus pro-

thoracis, labro, antennis, corpore infra pedibusque pallide ferru-

gineis ; capite prothoraceque sat vage punctato; scutello semieir-

culari; elytris lateribus parallelis prothorace parum angustioribus,

dorso striato-punctatis, subrugosis. Long. 2—23 lin.

Hab. Australia.

Peltis monilata.

P. oblongo-ovata, fusca, opaca, marginibus prothoracis ferrugineis ;

capite prothoraceque reticulato-punctatis, punctis singulis in fundo

tuberculo minuto instructis ; antennis ferrugineis; lobo interiore

maxillarum transverso, antice rotundato, inermi; scutello parvo ;

elytris rugoso-reticulato-punctatis, singulis lineis tribus elevatis

munitis; corpore infra pedibusque piceis, confertim punctulatis ;

prosterno planato, dilatato, postice late truncato ; acetabulis an-

ticis occlusis ; tibiis anticis apice spinoso-productis. Long. 4} lin.

Hab. Australia.

In general appearance this species is somewhat between

Peltis oblonga and P. procera; and, as in the latter, the inner lobe

and Species of Coleoptera. 319

of the maxille differs from that of Peltis proper (P. grossa) in not

running out and ending in a hook. The anterior cotyloid

cavities, on the other hand, are closed in behind; and in this

it differs from P. procera. It is this latter character which

has induced Dr. Leconte to propose a new genus (Nosodes*)

for the reception of the American species (serrata and si/-

phides); but then these species are said to have the internal

maxillary lobe hooked. Hitherto, I believe, it has been taken

for granted that this is the case in all the species ; and Lacor-

daire even differentiates his tribe ‘ Peltides ” by this character.

With regard to the anterior cotyloid cavities, rather too much

stress has, it appears to me, been laid on them; at least I

think it is as well to be cautious in separating generically

nearly allied species by characters depending on them. Under

an ordinary lens, and in acertain light, the lines on the elytra

have a beaded appearance, which suggested the name.

Cupes ocularis.

C. griseo-brunnea; capite longitudinaliter profunde sulcato, supra

oculos subbituberculato; oculis amplis; prothorace capite mi-

nore, transverso, dorso utrinque fortiter excavato, angulis anticis

subacutis ; scutello postice latiore, rotundato ; elytris carinatis,

inter carinulas biseriatim fortiter, sat confertim punctatis; cor-

pore infra infuscato. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Japan.

This is the second Asiatic species of a genus otherwise

American, except two undescribed species from Borneo in my

collection; the Chilian species (C. Latredlle?) differs from the

others in the antenne having a large basal joint and in other cha-

racters. The species before us is remarkable for its large eyes.

Taphroderes filiformis.

7. angustissimus, nitide piceus, disperse villosus; elytris flavo

trifasciatis ; capite prothoraci latitudine fere sequali, subtilis-

sime vage punctulato; rostro apice flavo; antennis ferrugineis ;

prothorace obsolete impunctato, ante medium valde angusto ;

elytris prothorace angustioribus et sesquilongioribus, apicibus

angulo exteriore productis, fascia flava ante, altera pone me-

dium tertiaque apicali notatis; femoribus anticis ampliatis.

Long. 3 lin.

Hab, Amazons.

In the females of this genus the antenne are longer and

more slender, and the rostrum is not stouter at the base as in

the males. The description of 7’. brevipes, Gyll., in Schénherr

* To Nosodes must be referred the European P. dentata. It is the type

of Caltys, C. G. Thomson, a name of later date than Nosodes.

320 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

appears to have been made from the latter sex—and not from

a female, as stated.

Taphroderes obtusus.

7. robustior, nitide piceus, levigatus, capite quam prothorace

multo angustiore, obsolete punctulato; rostro paulo arcuato ;

antennis piceis, articulis tertio usque decimum unilateraliter pro-

ductis ; prothorace elongato, pone medium ampliato, antice supra

linea longitudinali impressa notato; elytris brevioribus, apice ob-

tusis, maculis quatuor ferrugineis (2 ante, 2 pone medium)

ornatis; corpore infra piceo-nigro; coxis anticis fulvis. Long.

4 lin.

Hab. Amazons.

At least twice as stout as the preceding, the apices of the

elytra not produced, &c.

In reference to M. Lacordaire’s note (Gen. vu. p. 410), I

have reexamined my Cyphagogus advena; and although its

shorter rostrum approaches it to Zemioses, as I have already

remarked, in other respects (¢. e. antenne, legs, &c.) it is a

true Cyphagogus. Aprostoma, Guér., which Lacordaire had

not seen, but refers to the Taphroderine, is a Colydiid, after-

wards named by Erichson Mecedanum.

Ionthocerus ophthalmicus. Pl. XV. fig. 4.

I. omnino nitide rufo-ferrugineus, apicibus articulorum antennarum

nigris exceptis ; rostro modice crasso, basi subcylindrico, antennis

in medio insertis; prothorace levi, dorso antice tenuiter, postice

fortiter sulcato ; elytris simpliciter striatis, striis tribus sutura-

libus tantum conspicuis, apicibus extus planato-productis; tarsis

_ parce pilosis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Queensland (Rockhampton).

Lacordaire founded Jonthocerus on a species from Ceylon,

from which the present differs in its uniform colour, thinner

rostrum, and glossy elytra otherwise sculptured. My speci-

men, like Lacordaire’s, appears to be a male. With Hphebo-

cerus, Lac., it forms a subfamily remarkable for the long

slender antenne clothed with delicate hairs, and large eyes

occupying the greater part of the head.

Trachelizus Howitttit.

T. nitide fulvo-testaceus ; capite prothoraceque levigatis, remote

punctatis ; rostro paulo arcuato, haud gibboso, inter antennas

sulco longitudinali impresso; oculis parvulis ; antennis articulo

primo vix incrassato, ultimo acuminato ; sulco prothoracis ab apice

ad basin extenso ; elytris fortiter striatis, sutura valde elevata ;

corpore infra sparse punctulato ; metasterno segmentisque duobus

and Species of Coleoptera. 321

basalibus abdominis longitudinaliter late excavatis ; coxis anticis

approximatis ; femoribus subpedunculatis. Long. 2 ln.

Hab. Melbourne.

I have adopted M. Jekel’s catalogue name for this little

species, the only one, I believe, hitherto found in Australia.

Cordus semipunctatus. Pl. XV. fig. 7.

C.(¢) nitide ferrugineus, capite pone oculos cylindrico, subcon-

stricto ; rostro difformi, basi alte carinato, inter antennas excavato,

apice dilatato ; mandibulis productis; antennis validis, articulis

secundo usque decimum transversis, cylindricis, perfoliatis, ultimo

ovato-acuminato; prothorace oblongo, utrinque rotundato, basi

apiceque eequali, antice subtiliter vage, postice gradatim magis con-

fertim et fortiter punctato; scutello nullo; elytris subparallelis, late

suleato-punctatis, punctis haud approximatis, interstitiis acute

carinulatis, apice obtuse rotundatis ; pectore vage punctato; ab-

domine nitidissimo, impunctato; femoribus crassis, muticis ; tibiis

compressis,in medio sensim incrassatis, apice spina conica instructis;

tarsis linmearibus. Long. 83 lin,

Hab. Natal.

This species has the normal head of Cordus and the broad

irregular rostrum of Amorphocephalus, and is therefore inter-

mediate in these respects between the two genera; but as the

former character apppears to be of the most importance, it is

referred to Cordus; it may, however, be desirable eventually

to separate it generically.

Amorphocephalus sulcicollis.

A.(¢) nitide ferrugineus ; capite brevi, postice vix truncato, inter

oculos verticeque profunde triangulariter excavato, fundo excava-

tionis leviter sulcato ; oculis ampliatis ; rostro supra paulo arcuato,

longitudinaliter fortiter excavato, basi utrinque oblique constricto

et lobo ovali munito, infra cornu verticali armato; antennis arti-

culis secundo usque octavum valde transversis, nono et decimo

longioribus, perfoliatis, ultimo conico; prothorace oblongo, basi

quam apice parum latiore, in medio fortiter canaliculato ; elytris

prothorace in medio vix latioribus, striatis, interstitiis convexis

subtilissime sparse punctulatis ; tibiis intus bisinuatis, apice spina

conica instructis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

The canaliculate prothorax is an exceptional character in

the subfamily to which Amorphocephalus belongs; but it oc-

curs in the genus T’rachelizus, the representative of the group.

I have two other specimens of Amorphocephalus trom West

Australia, one of which may possibly be the female of the

above (see fig. 9, a, the head), the other (see fig. 9, 6, the

322 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

head) may be the female of A. australis, Lac., only that the

latter is said to be from Moreton Bay; its prothorax is not

eanaliculate, but is rather closely and coarsely punctured.

Prophthalmus sanguinalis. Pl. XV. fig. 6.

P. validus, nitide piceo-rufus; ¢ rostro levi, supra fortiter exca-

vato, apicem versus late explanato ; antennis articulis tertio usque

octavum longiusculis, subeequalibus, ultimo duobus precedentibus

conjunctim parum longiore; capite prothoraceque impunctatis,

opacis, supra nitidis, illo ab oculis gradatim paulo latiore, hoc in

medio lineatim suleato, apice sulcatim constricto ; elytris longitu-

dine prothoraci cum capite usque ad oculos equalibus, sulcatis,

sulcis primo et secundo a sutura impunctatis, interstitiis planatis,

reliquis punctatis, interstitiis angustioribus, elevatis, singulo

lineola basali alteraque apicali, et plagis duabus, una ante altera

pone medium, sanguineis, decorato, apicibus paulo divergentibus,

subtruncatis, corpore infra pedibusque nitidissimis, levigatis ;

femoribus anticis validis, infra bidentatis. Long. 17 lin.

Hab. India.

Apparently near P. potens, Lac., but with broader sutural

interstices and the others narrower, and having two large

lateral blood-red patches on each elytron. Besides the differ-

ence generically, the female has a broader and more opaque

prothorax, and has only one tooth on the anterior femora, and

their trochanters not produced.

Prophthalmus planipennis. Pl. XV. fig. 5.

P. niger ; capite rostroque levibus, nitidis, parce irregulariter punc-

tatis, ¢ hoe supra fortiter excavato, apicem versus paulo expla-

nato; genis juguloque transversim plicatis ; antennis articulis se-

eundo usque sextum subturbinatis, ceteris parum gradatim crassi-

oribus, ultimo anguste ovato ; prothorace in medio nitido, impune-

tato, ad latera squamositate grisea induto, apice integro; elytris

subnitidis, ad latera abrupte deflexis, dorso planatis, tenuiter sul-

catis, interstitiis 1. et 2. latioribus, planatis, tertio basi, quarto pone

medium, apice excepto, flavis, cum quinto angustis elevatis, ceteris

magis depressis; corpore infra pedibusque nitidis ; femoribus an-

ticis subtus dente valido instructis. Foemina latet. Long. 9 lin.

Hab. Celebes.

Remarkable for the flatness of its elytra; in other respects

it is allied to P. tridentatus, Fab.

STRATIORRHINA.

(Brenthidee. )

Ab Estenorhino differt vostro ante antennas serrato vel dentato, et

mandibulis parvis, concretis.

The type of this genus is Arrhenodes xiphias, Westw.

and Species of Coleoptera. 323

(Cabinet of Oriental Entomology, p. 31, pl. xv. fig. 1), re-

ferred by Lacordaire, oddly enough, to his Hstenorhinus, from

which it essentially differs in the characters given above.

M. Lacordaire mentions having. seen two other allied species

from Malacca.

Eupsalis promissus. Pl. XV. fig. 8.

£. nitide rufo-castaneus, elytris oblonge flavo guttatis; capite an-

tice convexo; rostro inter antennas elevato, basi utrinque lobo

oblongo retrorsum producto; antennis articulis quinque basa-

libus subobconicis, sexto usque decimum oyalibus, ultimo ovato-

acuminato ; prothorace sat anguste ovato, impunctato; elytris

subtiliter striato-punctatis, stria suturali excepta,in certa luce levi-

gatis; femoribus anticis subtus dente acuto instructis, reliquis

subtus ad apicem emarginatis. Long. 5-7 lin.

Hab. Batchian.

The female only differs in having the rostrum, beyond the

insertion of the antennze, slender and cylindrical; in the males

the mandibles vary from being only slightly prominent to the

normal condition, as shown in fig. 8. The lobe at the base of

the rostrum on each side leaves a clear space between it and

the cheek, or part just before the eye. The other three de-

scribed species of Hupsalis are one North-American, extend-

ing so far north as Canada, and two African, including one

from Madagascar; but I have another species from Old

Calabar.

BLYSMIA.

(Brenthide.)

( 2 ) Caput transversum, postice truncatum, collum retractum ; ros-

trum breviusculum, cylindricum, basi inerassatum, elevatum.

Oculi rotundati, majusculi. Antenne lineares, corpore longiores,

articulis longitudinaliter strigosis. Prothorax breviter ovatus,

supra haud sulcatus. Hlytra breviuscula, parallela, apice late ro-

tundata. Pedes breves, antici majores ; femora modice crassa,

mutica; tibie normales; ¢ars? articulo primo breviusculo. Meta-

sternum et abdomen sat brevia.

The male is unknown, but probably differs principally in

having a broader rostrum and the antenne inserted more

towards its middle. The genus in its aspect is quite different

from the ordinary Brenthide ; but its affinities are, I think,

with Belopherus. The tarsi seem to be glabrous or only very

slightly ciliated beneath; but my specimen having been

gummed down, it is difficult to be exact. The abdomen,

however, which is comparatively short, is nearly twice as

long as the metasternum.

324 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Genera

Blysmia ruficollis. Pl. XV. fig. 1.

B. nigra, opaca, prothorace (apice excepto) rufo, subtus nitide lutea ;

capite impunctato, supra postice subbilobo ; rostro, apice excepto,

rufo-testaceo, subnitido; antennis nigrescentibus, parce setosulis,

articulis tribus basalibus brevioribus, secundo multo breviore ;

prothorace impunctato, apice quam basi angustiore et nitide nigro ;

elytris prothorace haud latioribus, supra subdepressis, striatim

fortiter foveatis, foveis quadratis ; pedibus nigris, nitidis. Long.

3 lin.

Hab. Batchian.

Ceocephalus internatus.

C. rufo-ferrugineus, nitidus, subtus, prothorace femoribusque cas-

taneo-rufis ; ¢ rostro prothorace breviore, basi canaliculato, apicem

versus gradatim dilatato; antennis articulis secundo usque decimum

transversis. perfoliatis, tribus ultimis parum crassioribus ; protho-

race elytris paulo latiore, supra profunde sulcato, apice nigro-

marginato; elytris fere parallelis, apice paulo explanatis, late

rotundatis, striato-punctatis, stria juxta suturam profunda, im-

punctata, postice in strias duas divisa; femoribus apice nigris,

subtus obsolete dentatis. Long. 7-9 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

The female has a more slender rostrum, with the antenne

inserted nearer the base.

Ceocephalus tenuitarsis.

C. nitide castaneus ; rostro prothorace multo breviore, basi canalicu-

lato, versus apicem gradatim dilatato; antennis articulis secundo

usque decimum transversim moniliformibus, tribus ultimis majo-

ribus, clavam quasi formantibus; prothorace elytris vix latiore,

impunctato, profunde sulcato; elytris fere parallelis, brevioribus,

sulcato-foveatis, foveis approximatis ; pedibus sat vage setosulis ;

tarsis angustis. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Sydney.

In this and the preceding species the constriction of the

neck begins a little behind the eyes; the head, therefore, is

more abruptly limited than in the African members of the

genus.

PHOCYLIDES.

(Brenthide.)

A Prodectore differt tibiis intermediis et posticis brevibus compressis,

tarsis articulo basali brevi, obconico; a Diuro antennis articulis

secundo tertioque fere equalibus, prothorace longitudinaliter sul-

cato, et femoribus clavatis, basi pedunculatis.

The antennz also are shorter and stouter than in either

Prodector or Diurus ; and the elytra at the apex are drawn out

and Species of Coleoptera. 325

in two parallel and contiguous tails, nearly of the same width

as the rest of the elytra. Brenthus ruficollis, Guér., a species

not noticed by Lacordaire, also belongs to this genus.

Phocylides collaris. Pl. XV. fig. 2.

P. niger, subnitidus, prothoracis apice basique sordide rufis; ¢ ca-

pite postice fortiter impresso ; rostro in medio lineatim canalicu-

lato ; prothorace subtilissime punctulato, utrinque pone medium

paulo incurvato, apice transyersim tri- vel quadriimpresso, pone

apicem profunde longitudinaliter sulcato; elytris postice sensim

angustioribus, prope suturam bistriatis, cauda modice elongata ;

corpore infra nitide piceo ; Q rostro basi sola canaliculato ; elytris

singulis apice extus in processum mamilliformem rufum productis.

Long. ¢ 19 lin., 2 11 lin.

Hab. Batchian.

Phocylides ebeninus.

P. niger, capite rostroque nitidis, minus elongatis, illo postice paulo

angustiore, hoc late sed minus profunde canaliculato; prothorace

opaco, subtiliter parce punctulato, pone medium utrinque modice

rotundato; elytris parallelis, prope suturam bistriatis, apice

singulorum in,‘caudam multo breviorem producto; corpore infra

pedibusque nitidis. Long. 9 lin.

Hab. Amboyna.

ACHRIONOTA.

(Brenthide.)

Ab Ithysteno differt elytris singulatim stria unica suturali instructis ;

et femoribus linearibus; a Diuro rostro apice dilatato (vel apice

obcuneiformi).

In Ithystenus there are two striz, and the femora are strongly

pedunculate; the head, antennz, rostrum, and legs are also

shorter than in any of its species. The single character that

distinguishes Achrionota from Diurus is too important to allow

of the species described below being referred to that genus.

The female is unknown.

Achrionota bilineata. Pl. XV. fig. 3.

A, fusca, opaca, parte apicali rostri pedibusque rufo-ferrugineis,

punctis raris squamositate ochracea repletis ubique tecta ; capite

linea longitudinali tenuiter impresso ; rostro capite plus duplo

longiore, supra ante antennas fortiter sulcato, pone antennas

tenuiter bisulcato; antennis griseo-pubescentibus, setulis vagis

nigris adspersis; prothorace dorso punctis bivittatim notato ;

elytris subsulcatis, remote punctatis, singulis linea ochracea e

squamulis condensatis formata, ornatis, apicibus angulo exteriore

in caudam contortam linearem productis ; corpore infra pedibusque

punctis minoribus conspersis. Long. 8-10 lin.

Hab. Sarawak.

326 = Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of Inara.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. Blysmia ruficollis (2 ).

Fig. 2. Phocylides collaris (3).

Fig. 3. Achrionota bilineata (3).

Fig. 4. Tonthocerus ophthalmicus (3); 4a, right fore leg. The hairs on

the antenne are too delicate to be represented in a figure of this

size.

Fig. 5. Prophthalmus planipennis ( ¢ ).

Fig. 6. sanguinalis (3).

Fig. 7. Cordus semipunctatus (3); 7a, head and antenne, side view.

Fig. 8. Eupsalis promissus (3). The antenne are not sufficiently accu-

rate as regards the last five joints.

Fig. 9a. Head of Amerphocephalus, sp. nov. (Q), (prothorax canalicu-

late); 9 6, head of Amorphocephalus, sp. nov. (2), (prothorax

not canaliculate, allied to A. australis, Lac.).

Fig. 10 a. Side view of the head of Amorphocephalus sulcicollis (3);

104, ditto, top view.

Fig. 11. Side view of the head of Cordus hospes, Germ., for comparison.

Fig. 12. Head and antenna of Prophthalmus sanguinalis (Q ).

Fig. 13. Head and antenna of Stratiorrhina xiphias (3), Westw. (Arrhe-

nodes).

XLVII.—Notes on the Mud- Tortoises of India (Trionyx,

Geoffroy). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Tue Three-clawed or Mud-Tortoises are a very natural and

well-defined group; but the division of them ito species

has been a subject of great difficulty to European zoologists,

chiefly arising from the very imperfect material which they

have had at their command.

Formerly Geoffroy, Bell, and Fitzinger seem to have re-

garded the extent of the union of the ribs as a character of a

species ; the latter even attempted to divide them into genera

from characters derived from this part. But it is now well

understood that the extent to which the ribs are united de-

pends entirely upon, the age of the animal, the union being

only partial m the young, and entire in the adult, as in the

land tortoises and terrapins.

The number, extent, and shape of the sternal callosities no

doubt afford very good characters for the distinction of the

species, if adult animals are compared together; but they are

gradually developed, and in some species (or perhaps in some

individuals of the same species) they are much later developed

and much longer in coming to their perfect state than they are

in others. ‘This is also the case with the development of the

odd bone in front of the dorsal disk; so that these parts can

only be used as characters when specimens of the same age

and stage of development are compared, and especially speci-

mens which have arrived at their adult state.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India, — 327

The sternum being furnished with flaps on the sides (which

cover the legs when they are contracted), or being narrow at the

sides and leaving the legs bare (as in most freshwater and marine

tortoises), furnishes a most natural and easily observed character

for the division of the group, and as such has been used by most

authors. But it has been shown that each of these groups con-

tains animals with very different skulls; and it is a matter of

serious consideration whether the form of the skull, on which

such important peculiarities in the animal economy depend, is

not of more importance than the covering or exposure of the

feet when they are withdrawn. When first the covering of the

feet was observed, it was connected with a bony margin to the

dorsal disk ; but it is now well ascertained that many species

with covered feet have the margin flexible and without bones,

like the other mud-tortoises. It is to be remarked that all the

tortoises that have flaps to cover their feet have callosities on

the two anterior bones of the sternum, which have never yet

been observed in those which have naked feet. This character is

common to those that have thin skulls and jaws and narrow

alveolar edge, and those which have thicker skulls and wider

alveolar surface.

Cuvier and Wagler described and figured the skulls of

two or three species of this group; but all the skulls which

they had the opportunity of studying belonged to a single

type of form, of a thick and solid consistency. In my ‘ Cata-

logue of Shield Reptiles in the British Museum’ I figured

a few skulls of the species which we then possessed, pointing

out that they belonged to two different groups—one solid, and

the other light and thin; and in the ‘ Supplement to the Cata-

logue of Shield Reptiles’ I figured and described the skulls

of many more species. I used this character to separate the

soft-disk mud-tortoises into two families, Trionychide and

Chitrade—one having a solid, and the other a thin and light

skull; and I divided the genera of each family according to

the form of the skull, especially the form of the alveolar edge

of the jaws. I consider this one of the most important steps

towards the proper division of the species and defining them,

as it affords us the power of dividing them into natural

groups: for example, Chitra indica, Trionyx gangeticus, and

Tyrse nilotica have been considered specimens of the same

species, but they belong to two very different families ; Chitra

indica and Pelochelys Cantort have been regarded as the

same species, the one having a very long ovate, and the other

a short square skull. In the same manner Fordia africana and

Tyrse nilotica (the one having a broad, flat alveolar surface,

and the other a sharp thin one) have been regarded as the

328 Dr. J.E.Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India.

same species; whilst a Central-African tortoise, Aspidonectes

aspilus, has been separated from Zyrse nilotica because the

individual had slightly differently developed sternal callosities,

whereas the examination of the jaws shows that they are the

same species.

The study of the jaws at various ages has shown that the

form of the alveolar surface is the same in the young as in the

adult, and therefore furnishes a very excellent character for di-

stinguishing the species ; and if one had skulls of all the species

in the collection, they would no doubt afford the characters of

the various kinds, and also the best arrangement of them into

groups. But, unfortunately, that is not the case, and we are

obliged to do the best we can under the circumstances. Un-

fortunately, too, the skulls cannot be extracted from the stuffed

specimens without destroying them ; and it is always difficult

to be certain that the skulls and skeletons that you receive

belong to the species they are said to represent ; for the char-

acters by which the species are distinguished in their perfect

state have been destroyed. Every care has been taken to pre-

vent an error of this kind; and in general the characters of the

genera have been taken from the examination of the head in

the perfect animal, and of the skulls extracted from duplicate

specimens. It is much to be regretted that the Indian zoolo-

gists do not study the numerous Asiatic species and give us the

result of their examination, considering that there are only two

Indian zoologists in modern times who have paid the slightest

attention to these animals, and they have not yet learned the

elements of herpetology. ‘Thus Mr. Theobald and Dr. Ander-

son have described two most different animals under the name

of Trionyx Phayret, and have described them in such an in-

correct and imperfect manner that it is impossible to make out

to what species, or section, or genus either of them is refer-

able.

The receipt of some additional specimens of mud-tortoises

and their skulls required that they should be determined ; and

to do this I have been induced to study and revise what I had

formerly written: as our materials are so imperfect, from the

Indian collectors not sending home specimens, it is a matter of

ereat difficulty. We know far less of the tortoises of our

Indian possessions than we do of those of almost any other part

of the world. Experience has shown me that the most reliable

character for the distinction and arrangement of the tortoises,

and especially of the mud-tortoises, is to be obtained by the

study of the skulls; I have therefore been particular in col-

lecting them, and (where it could be done without injury)

have had the skulls removed from several of the specimens.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 329

The result of this examination has been the discovery of

serious mistakes, some of the separate skulls received having

been assigned to the wrong species. Thus the skull which

was thought to belong to the 7rionyx hurum is found to belong

to Trionyx gangeticus of Cuvier ; the skull which was regarded

and figured as belonging to Potamochelys stellata (and which

was received as a present from Professor Oldham) is found to

be the skull of a species of Hmyda. Such mistakes were un-

avoidable with the very imperfect materials which we had at

our command, and could only be corrected as more authentic

specimens were procured.

MUD-TORTOISES (Trionychoidea).

General Hardwicke, of the Bengal Artillery, at the end of

the last century made at Futteghur a series of drawings (now

in the collection in the British Museum) of the mud-tortoises

( Trionyches) which he obtained from the Ganges :—

1. The ‘ Sewteree.” This is the Chitra indica of the Ca-

talogue of Shield Reptiles. The figure is copied in the

‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology.’

2. The “ Kaavez,” which is the Trionyx hurum of the ‘ I-

lustrations of Indian Zoology’ and of this paper.

3. The ‘ Dekoolee,” which is the Trionyx gangeticus of

Cuvier and this paper.

Hardwicke figures the Dhank or Jaank, which appears to be

a larger specimen of ihe same species.

4. The ‘ Bun-Goma” or “ Turpin,” which is an Emyda,

probably Hmyda punctata. The figures of the young and

old are copied in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’ as Tr7-

onyx punctata.

5. Trionyx subplanus ; but it is from a dried specimen from

Java. The figure is copied in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian

Zoology.’

Dr. Buchanan-Hamilton, a friend and fellow labourer of

General Hardwicke (who allowed Hardwicke to have copies

made by his own artist of the greater part of the fish he de-

seribed, which are now in the British Museum), figured many

species of mud-tortoises of India. The collection of his draw-

ings was in the India House, and is now in the India Museum

at Westminster.

1. Testudo dura is Emyda punctata.

2. Testudo hurum is copiedas Trionyx hurum in the £ IIl-

lustrations of Indian Zoology.’ The Zrionyx hurum of this

paper.

3. Testudo chin. This is copied in Gray’s ‘Synopsis of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 24

330 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India.

Reptiles,’ tab. x., and is the same as the former, Trionyx

hurum.

4. Testudo ocellatus. Copied in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of

Indian Zoology.’ Called Trionyx ocellatus there and in this

aper.

r 5. Testudo gataghol. Copied as Trionyx javanicus in Gray’s

‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology ;’ but this now proves to be a

new species of Aspilus, named Aspilus gataghol in this paper.

6. TLestudo chitra. 'This is the Chitra indica of the ‘ Cata-

logue of Shield Reptiles in the British Museum.’

In my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles’ I described some of these

drawings ; and in the ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’ I pub-

lished a selection from them, which I believe were the first

published figures of Indian mud-tortoises. This book contains

some mistakes in nomenclature ; but it is to be recollected that

when it was published (in 1831) there was not a single spe-

cimen of the Asiatic species of the family in this country.

In 1809 M. Geoffroy, in the ‘ Annales du Muséum d’ Histoire

Naturelle’ (vol. iv. p. 1), formed the genus Zrionyx, and

described the species which had come under his notice. ‘They

are as follow :—

1. Trionyx subplanus, p. 15, tab. v. fig. 1. This species is

established upon the bones of a dorsal disk; and the habitat is

unknown. ‘There is little doubt that it is the Dogania subplana

of my ‘ Catalogue of Tortoises.’

2. Trionyx egyptiacus, p. 12, tab. i. fig. 2,a beautiful figure

of the back and lower surface of the animal, and of the bones

of the back and sternum. ‘This is the Tyrse nilotica.

3. Trionyx stellatus, p. 13. From the Testudo cartilaginea

of Boddaert, which the French had taken from the Dutch

museum ; a young specimen, peculiar for having five stars in

the hinder part of the carapace. It is not known from what

country it came, and is in too bad a state to determine;

Duméril and Bibron consider it the young of Gymnopus java-

nicus.

4, Testudo carinatus, p. 14, tab. iv., which represents the

dorsal and sternal disks of a young half-grown specimen, of

which we do not know the locality ; but being without its head it

is impossible to tell whether it belongs to Trionyx, Platypeltis,

or any other genus that has four callosities. It is peculiar for

having the front odd bone at a considerable distance from the

dorsal disk. Schweigger changed the name of this species to

Trionyx Brongniartit ; and Bibron considered it the young of

Gymnopus spiniferus, which he confounded with Testudo ferox

of Pennant. :

5. Trionyx javanicus, p. 15, tab. ii., representing the dorsal

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 331

disk without the odd bone, and the sternal disk with two

narrow lateral callosities. From Java. Though it is without

its head, I have no doubt that this is the Aspilus cariniferus

of my Catalogue, which has the odd bone in front of the

dorsal disk separate from the others, and smooth, except in

the adult.

6. Trionyx coromandelicus, p. 16, tab. v. fig. 1, representing

the dorsal disk. From Coromandel. This isa species of Hmyda ;

but one has no means of knowing to which species of the genus

it belongs.

The two following species he had not seen :—

7. Trionyx georgicus (the Trionyx ferox of Pennant). From

North America. Platypeltis ferox of my Catalogue.

8. Trionyx euphraticus, p.17 (Testudo rafeht of Olivier).

From the Euphrates. afetus euphraticus of my Catalogue.

Schweigger published his ‘ Prodromus Monographie Chelo-

niorum’ in 1814; but the manuscript was presented to the

Institute before 1809, for it is quoted by Geoffroy in his essay ;

and it was originally printed in the ‘ Koénigsb. Archiv fiir

Naturwissensch.’ fase. 11. & iv. Instead of the original name

given by himself (Amyda), he adopts Geoftroy’s genus Tri-

onyx (p. 14), containing :—

1. Trionyx ferox, Pennant, from North America.

2. Trionyx egyptiacus, Geoftr., from the Nile.

3. Trionyx euphraticus, Olivier (tab. 41), from the Euphrates.

4. Trionyx javanicus, Ann. du Mus. 1v. tab. 3, from Java.

“ Bouloufte” according to Leschenault.

5. Trionyx Brongniartii, the Trionyx carinatus, Geoff.

Ann. du Mus. iv. tab. 4.

6. Trionyx granosus, Schcepf, Test. tab. 30,a&6. An

Emyda. é

7. Trionyx subplanus, Geoftr. Dogania subplana.

Dr. John Wagler, in his ‘ Natiirl. Syst. d. Amphibien,’

1830 (large folio), figures the following.

Tab. 2. fig. I. represents, under the name of A sp¢donectes java-

nicus, a young animal, which may be the same as the Trionya

javanicus of (Geoftr., whose figure of the dorsal disk (tab. iu.)

he copies.

Tab. 2. figs. X111.—XX., called Aspidonectes gangeticus, are

copied from Cuvier’s figures of the bones of Trionyx gangeti-

cus of Duvaucel.

Tab. 2. figs. XXXIV., XXXV., Aspidonectes carinatus, are

copied from Geotiroy’s figures of Trionyx carinatus.

Tab. 2. figs. XXI.-XXXIIL, bones of the various parts of

Trionyx coromandelicus, Geoffroy (Testudo granosa, Scheepf).

A species of Hmyda.

24*

332 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

Fam. Chitrade.

CHITRA.

1. Chitra indica. (The Sewteree).

“ Sewteree,” Hardwicke, icon. ined.

Trionyx egyptiacus, var. indicus, Gray, Il. Ind. Zool. i. tab. 80 (copy of

Hardwicke).

Testudo chitra, Buchanan-Hamilton, icon. ined.

Trionyx indicus, Gray, Synopsis, p. 47.

Gymnopus lineatus, Duméril & Bibron, Erp. Gén. ii. p. 491.

Chitra indica, Gray, P. Z. 8S. 1864, figs. 11, 12 (skull); Cat. Shield

Rept. B. M. p. 70, tab. 41 (skull).

General Hardwicke observes, “‘ The Sez¢tevee found in the

Ganges grows to the size of 240 pounds ;” with a green head and

the back of the neck striped. It is described in the ‘ Suppl.

Cat. Shield Rept.’ under the name of Chitra indica. It is

known by the eyes being very near the end of the nose, and,

according to Hardwicke’s figure, by being marked on each

side of the pupil with a spot.

The top of the head and back of the neck are lined. It is

different from all the other mud-tortoises in having an elon-

gate ovate, very thin skull, with weak jaws, with only a linear

alveolar process.

Hardwicke’s figures are copied in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of In-

dian Zoology’ (tab. x.) under the name of Trionyx wgyptiacus,

var.2ndica. Buchanan-Hamilton had itin his drawings, figured

under the name of Testudo chitra; in my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles’

I defined it as Trionyx indicus; and in the ‘Tortoises of the

British Museum, after examining the skull, I formed it into a

genus under the name of Chitra indica, and figured its skull in

the ‘Catalogue of Shield Reptiles.’ It is the Gymnopus

lineatus of Duméril and Bibron (‘ Erpétologie Générale’).

Fam. Trionychide.

* Sternal callosities four, lateral and posterior ; all broad and well

developed in the adult.

NILSSONIA.

Skull rather elongate ; nose shorter than the diameter of the

orbit ; alveolar process broader behind ; separation between the

alveolar surface and groove in the skull to the inner nostrils

narrower, and deeper as well as narrower behind. Alveolar

process of lower jaw very broad, especially in front, with a very

deep, broad, longitudinal, central impression on the front half ;

rather concave on the hinder part of the sides, with a well-

marked elevated ridge on the inner margin.

Skull in the British Museum, presented by Charles Falconer,

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India. 333

Esq. (68. 2.12.15). Itis known from the skulls of Zrionyz,

which it greatly resembles, by the narrowness of the groove

in front of the palate to the internal. nostrils; in Trionyx

gangeticus, T. Jeudit, and in T. Leithii this groove is broad

and shallow, and nearly of uniform width.

1. Nilssonia formosa.

Young only known. Callosities not developed.

Back of the crown with a broad transverse pale band.

Trionyx formosus, Gray, P. Z. 8S, 1869, p. 217, tab. 15. fig. 1; Suppl.

Cat. Shield Rept. p. 99.

Hab. Pegu (B.M.).

The skull of the young is shorter and broader than those of

the adults. I believe this arises only from difference of age.

TRIONYX.

The dorsal disk in the young animals is generally marked

with three pairs of black spots, which have concentric pale

rings within. These spots often last in a more or less perfect

degree throughout the life of the animal ; sometimes the anterior

and sometimes the posterior pair, and rarely a spot on one side

of these pairs, are deficient. The crown of the head of the

young specimens is generally marked with spots of various

colours, which become more and more indistinct as the animal

grows. I believe that these spots are characteristic of the

species ; and sometimes whole series of species have character-

istic spots—that is to say, on the sides of the crown and face.

+ Crown of head olive, with radiating black lines behind.

1. Trionyx gangeticus. (Dekoolee.)

Skull short, broad ; nose suddenly bent down, with a rounded

outline ; eyes within a very short distance of the cavity of the

nostrils, which is not as long as the diameter of the orbit ; al-

veolar surface of the lower jaw deeply concave, with a very

slight, indistinct, central longitudinal ridge.

“‘ Dekoolee,”” Hardwicke, icon. ined.

Trionyx du Gange, Cuvier, Oss. Foss. v. pt. 2, p. 187, tab. ii. figs. 5-8

(skull).

Trionyx gangeticus, “Duvaucel,’’ Cuvier, Régne Anim. vol. ii. p. 16 ;

Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. B. M. p. 66, Suppl. p. 97 (skull only).

Gymnopus Duvaucelit, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. vol. ii. p. 47.

Aspidonectes gangeticus, Wagler, Amphib. Taf. 2. figs. 13-22 (copied

from Cuvier).

Trionyx javanicus, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. p. 67 (not synonyma).

Potamochelys stellata, Gray, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 85; Suppl. Cat. Shield

Rept. B. M. p. 104 (animal only, not skull).

Var.? The black lines irregular.

“ Jaank,” Hardwicke, icon. ined.

334 Dr.J.E. Gray on the Mud-Torioises of India.

General Hardwicke figures this species under the name of

“ Dekoolee,” which grows to the weight of 120 pounds, and is

found in the Ganges. The ‘ Dekoolee”’ has been referred to

the Trionyx javanicus of Geoffroy; but this is evidently a

mistake, as that species is figured with two lateral transverse

callosities, whereas all the more adult specimens of the ‘ De-

koolee”” in the British Museum have four well-developed

callosities.

Cuvier, in the ‘Ossemens Fossiles’ (vol. v. pt. 2, p. 187),

figures a skull under the name of “* Trionyx du Grange” (tab. 1.

figs. 5-8), and in the ‘ Régne Animal’ he refers it to Trionyx

gangeticus, Duvaucel (vol. ips t6).

I find by comparison that the skull which I extracted from

a half-grown specimen (but retaining the black rays on the

crown, ‘and having the four sternal callosities well developed)

is exactly like the skull figured by Cuvier as the Trionyx du

Gange, and by me under the name of Trionyx gangeticus in

the ‘ Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’ (t. 42. fig. 1

Cuvier’s figure most correctly represents. ie skull of this

species, both in outline and in the proportion of the nose to the

orbits, and in the form of the bones on the underside of the

skull, which is very different from that of the skull of 7. Jeudit.

There are now in the Museum four skulls of this species,

of different sizes, which retain their characters most distinctly

marked.

Duméril and Bibron change the name of this species to

Cryptopus Duvaucelit, and quote Trionyx hurum, Gray (Syn-

opsis of Rept. p. 49, tab. x.) as a synonym of ‘this species.

Believing that they had the original specimen to compare with

my figure, I adopted their idea, and described the animal I so

named as the animal of Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier ; but the

examination of the skullof what [had called Trionyx gangeticus

shows that to be the species the skull of which was figured and

described by Cuvier when he established the species.

General Hardwicke figures a specimen of almost one uniform

green colour, which, he says, is called “ Jaank” or “ Dhank”

in the country, and is found in the Ganges and grows to the

weight of 240 pounds. Unfortunately he does not figure the

underside. ‘The top of the head is green, marked with a series

of rather irregular black lines; and there is one from the back

edge of the eye, very different from the regular diverging lines

of Trionyx gangeticus ; but it may be only a variety, or it may

be the Aspilus gataghol with a lined head figured by Hamilton.

2. Trionyx Leithii. (The Poonah Mud-Tortoise.)

A small species; the shield about 10 inches long and 6$

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortotses of India. 335

broad. The alveolar surface of the lower jaw nearly flat, with

a very slight longitudinal ridge across the front end.

Hab. Poonah (Dr. Leith).

Dr. Leith gave the British Museum a stuffed specimen and

a perfect skeleton of this species.

The head of the dried specimen, unfortunately, does not show

any distinct indication of colour by which to distinguish it ;

but Mr. Charles Waterhouse thinks he can observe some ob-

scure indications of olive stripes radiating from a centre in the

hinder part of the crown. The skeleton is mentioned by

mistake in the ‘Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’

(p. 102) under Aspilus cariniferus; and Dr. Giinther had given

this name to both specimens; it has four well-developed

callosities to the sternum.

The skull is rather short and narrow ; the nose shelving to

the forehead, with a rather tapering outline. Eyes a very

short distance from the cavity of the nostrils, not half as long

as the diameter of the orbits. Alveolar surface of the lower

jaw broad, very slightly concave, with a very indistinct central

ridge in front, most elevated in the middle of the front central

portion of the alveolar surface. The centre of the front edge

of the lower jaw of the skeleton marked with a deep notch ;

but this may be only an individual peculiarity, because there

is no indication of it in the stuffed specimen.

+t Crown of the head olive, closely and minutely punctured with

black.

3. Trionyx pequensis.

Trionyx peguensis, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. p. 99.

Hab. Pegu. Head and skull only known.

This is a large species. The skull has a broad palatal

groove to the nostrils.

ttt The hinder part of the crown and sides of the head marked

with pale spots.

4. Trionyx hurum. (The Kaavez.)

Crown of the head varied with irregular black lines, a

yellow spot on each side of the crown and at the back angle

of the mouth.

“« Kaavez,” Hardwicke, icon. ined. B, M.

Trionyx hurum, Gray, Synopsis Rept. tab. x. (copied from Hardwicke) ;

Ill. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from Hamilton).

Testudo hurum and T. chin, Hamilton, icon. ined.

? Trionyx Jeudi, Gray, P. Z.8. 1869, p. 217, fig. 19; Suppl. Cat. Shield

Rept. p. 97, fig. 82 (skull).

Hardwicke figures a second species, under the name of

336 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

“¢ Kaavez ;”’ it is found in the Ganges, and grows to the weight

of 120 pounds. The top of the head in this species is brown,

black-lined, with a yellow spot on each side of the crown and

at the back of the angle of the mouth. This had been named

Testudo hurum by Dr. Hamilton, and is the Trionyx hurum of

my ‘Synopsis of Reptiles,’ tab. x. Duméril and Bibron referred

this species and figure to Trionyx gangeticus; but this was

certainly a mistake, and has been a fertile source of error.

It is figured as Trionyx hurum in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of

Indian Zoology’ from Buchanan-Hamilton’s drawings, where

it is called Testudo hurum.

Of this species there is no specimen in the British Museum ;

but I have a suspicion that the skull which I have described

as Trionyx Jeudi (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869, p. 217, fig. 19;

Gray, Suppl. Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 97, fig. 32) probably belongs

to this species.

The skull named 7. Jeudi has the nose rather elongate, pro-

duced forward, with a rather tapering outline; orbit further

from the cavity of the nostrils than the diameter of the orbit ;

alveolar surface of the lower jaw with a very distinct central

longitudinal ridge in front, with a deep pit on each side.

The British Museum has a second skull of this species,

which was given to us by Mr. Theobald as the skull of his

Trionyx Phayret. It certainly is not the skull of the species

described under that name in the Journal of the Linnean

Society, nor of the tortoise described under that name by Dr.

Anderson.

5). Trionyx sewaare.

The upper surface of the head uniform olive, with a distinct

yellow spot on each side of the crown.

‘¢ Sewaare,” Hardwicke, icon. ined. in B. M.

Trionyx gangeticus, var., Gray, Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 97.

Hab. Bengal.

Hardwicke figures a species under the name of “Se-

waare,’ which grows to the weight of 160 pounds and upwards.

It has a uniform brown head, with a large pale spot on the

side of the crown behind the eyes, and a few similar spots on

the back of the neck. ‘The back is marked with six black

eye-like spots. I know nothing of this tortoise in the adult

state, and at one time considered it a variety of Trionyx hurum ;

but I believe that it is quite distinct.

There are in the British Museum two half-grown speci-

mens (95a & 6) agreeing in some respects with these figures,

one of which is marked with six spots, and the other has the

anterior pair deficient. Unfortunately they are too young to

have the sternal callosities developed.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. 337

There are in the Museum three half-grown specimens, possi-

bly of this tortoise, which I mentioned under Trionyx gan-

geticus in the Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. They may be only

varieties of the preceding species.

6. Trionyx ocellatus.

Young only known. Callosities not developed ; nose before

the eyes with a broad lunate yellow spot.

Testudo ocellata, B. Hamilton, icon. ined.

Trionyx ocellatus, Gray, 11. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from Hamilton).

Gymnopus ocellatus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. iv. p. 9.

Hab. India (B.M.).

A young specimen in the British Museum is very like the

Trionyx ocellatus of Gray (Illust. Indian Zool. tab. 78), copied

from the Testudo ocellatus of Dr. Hamilton’s drawings. It

chiefly differs in the crown of the head being black and minutely

punctate like the rest of the head, instead of being uniformly

bluish as in the figure. It is at once known by the broad

yellow lunate mark over the nose just before the eyes, and the

large yellow spot behind each eye. Duméril and Bibron regard

this as a species under the name of “ Gymnopus ocellatus,

Hardwicke ;” and they refer to it Trionyx gangeticus, Guérin

(Cuvier, Régne Animal, tab. 1. fig. 6), from specimens in the

Paris Museum sent home by Duvaucel. This figure is not

very characteristic.

Duméril and Bibron refer to Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier,

Régne Animal, tab. i. fig. 6; but the figure does not represent

the characters of this species. And they also, curiously enough,

refer to Trionyx hurum. They say that there are five speci-

mens in the Paris Museum sent by Duvaucel; but they do not

mention the peculiar broad yellow band across the nose, and

their specimens may be-only the young of Trionyx gangeticus.

7. Trionyx Bellir.

Young only known. Callosities not developed. Upper part

of the head black, white-spotted on the crown, with a red spot

on the sides of the temple and on the angles of the mouth.

Trionyx gangeticus, Cuvier, Bell’s MS.; Gray, Tortoises, Terrapins,

and Turtles, p. 11, tab. 51.

Hab. Asia.

I only know this species from Mr. Bell’s figure. It is very

like 7. ocellatus ; but the nose is black: the back of the crown

is not to be seen, as the head is partially withdrawn.

Mr. Bell’s specimen is probably in the museum at Cambridge

with the rest of his collection.

338 Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

Schlegel, in the ‘ Fauna Japonica’ (tab. v. fig. 7), represents

a head which he calls Trionyx stellatus, var. japonicus. The

upper surface is pale-coloured, with pale spots on the edge of

the lips and sides of the neck, the latter being the largest. At

tab. vu. he figures the animal; but the specimen appears to be

bleached. It probably belongs to this genus.

LANDEMANIA.

1. Landemania perocellata.

Trionyx perocellatus, Gray, Cat. Tort. B. M. p. 48; Cat. Shield Rept*

p- 65, tab. 31.

Potamochelys? perocellatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 86,

Landemania? perocellata, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1869, p. 216 ; Suppl. Cat. Shield

Rept. p. 96.

Hab. China, Chusan.

Trionyx tuberculatus, Cantor’s drawings; Gray, P. Z. S. 1861, p. 42.

Potamochelys tuberculatus, Gray, P. Z. 5. 1864, p. 87 ; Suppl. Cat. Shield

Rept. p. 105.

Hab. Chusan.

I believe this is the same as the preceding, as is also the

half-dried specimen called Landemania trrorata, Gray, Suppl.

Cat. Shield Rept. p. 96, fig. 1 (sternum). ‘They all have a

black streak from the back edge of the eye, extending along

the upper part of the side of the neck.

POTAMOCHELYS.

The genus Potamochelys of Fitzinger, as restricted by me in

the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for 1864 and 1869

and in the ‘ Supplement to the Catalogue of Shield Reptiles’

(p. 104, fig. 34), should be erased from the system. The skull

ficured (which was presented to the museum by Prof. Oldham),

now that we have other skulls to compare with it, proves to

be the skull of an Hmyda, with the figure of which in Wagler I

had compared it when I first described it. The animal de-

scribed as Potamochelys stellatus proves to be T'rionyx gangeticus

of Cuvier, having no alliance with 7. yavanicus of Geoftroy,

which is an Aspilus.

I feel considerable regret but no shame in making this con-

fession, when one considers the very imperfect materials I had

to work on when I wrote the “ Revision of the Species of Tri-

onychide ;” and any person who will follow my papers on the

different genera of that family will see the disadvantages under

which I laboured, and how I had to feel my way as specimens

illustrative of the subject were gradually received.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud-Tortoises of India. — 339

DOGANIA.

Dogania subplana.

Trionyx subplanus, Geoftr. Ann. du Mus. iv. p. 15, tab. v. fig. 1; Cuvier,

Oss. Foss. y. pt. 2, tab. xiil. fig. 5 (dorsal disk only); Gray, Ill. Ind.

Zool. tab.

Gymnopus subplanus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. p. 492.

General Hardwicke in his drawings figures the upper and

lower surfaces of a stuffed animal, which I believe he received

from Java, without a name. ‘These figures are copied in the

‘Tllustrations of Indian Zoology’ under the name Trionyx

subplanus, Geoftr.

The specimen was young and had not the sternal callosities

developed.

MM. Duméril and Bibron, because the animal is figured by

Hardwicke, erroneously say it lives in the Ganges.

This animal is not known in the adult state. The specimen

described as Sarbieria frenata (Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept.) is

evidently a specimen of this species approaching to maturity,

having four slightly developed callosities, as the specimen de-

scribed as Dogania Giintheri also has; so that I have no doubt

that the adult animal has four well-developed callosities, and

the odd front bone united to the rest of the dorsal disk.

** Sternal callosities two, lateral ; broad and well developed in the

adult.

RAFETUS.

1. Rafetus euphraticus, Gray, Cat. Sh. Rept. p. 103.

*** Sternal callosities two, lateral, narrow, linear, on the suture

between the pair of lateral bones.

ASPILUS.

The front odd bone of the dorsal disk is small and smooth,

with a central rounded callosity in the adult.

The palatine groove in Aspilus javanicus 1s moderately

narrow, rather deep, and of the same diameter through the

whole of its length.

+ Forehead with radiating black lines.

1. Aspilus gataghol. (The Gataghol.)

Testudo gataghol, Hamilton, icon. ined.

Trionyx javanicus, Gray, Ill. Ind. Zool. tab. (copied from B. Hamilton).

Hab. India.

This mud-tortoise is very like Trtonyx gangeticus with its

radiated head; but Buchanan-Hamilton’s figure shows only

two very narrow lateral callosities. I have never seen this

species.

340 = Dr. J. E. Gray on the Mud- Tortoises of India.

tt Head white-spotted.

2. Aspilus javanicus. (The Boulousse.)

Amyda javanica, Schweigger’s MS., quoted by Geoffroy.

Trionyx javanicus ( Trionyx de Java), Geottr. Ann. du Mus. vol. iv. p. 15,

tab. il. fig. 2.

Aspidonectes javanicus, Wagler, Amphib., Atlas, tab. 2. figs. iii—xiii.

(fig. iii. copied from Geoffroy).

Trionyx carinferus, Gray, Cat. Shield Rept. B. M. p. 67, t. 32 (from

a specimen in spirit).

Aspilus cariniferus, Gray, P. Z.S. 1864, figs. 4-6 (skull), 1869, p. 218 ;

Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 101, fig. 33 (skull).

Gymnopus javanicus, Duméril & Bibron, Erpét. Gén. p. 493.

Hab. Java.

Schlegel, in the ‘ Fauna Japonica’ (tab. v. fig. 6), figures

the head of a mud-tortoise under the name of T’rionyax stellatus,

var. javanicus, which is mottled above and below and pro-

bably represents this species.

3. Aspilus ornatus.

Trionyx ornatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1861, p. 41, tab. v. (young).

Aspilus? ornatus, Gray, P. Z. 8. 1864, p. 85; Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept.

p. 103.

Hab. Camboja.

Fam. Emydide.

EMYDA.

General Hardwicke figures a spotted example of this genus

with the upper part of the head spotted, which is copied as

Trionyx punctatus, jun., in Gray’s ‘ Illustrations of Indian

Zoology.’

General Hardwicke figures a much larger specimen from

Futteghur, which he says is called “ Bun-Goma,” which is

the country namefor the land-turtle commonly called “ Turpin.”

The lower side shows the sternal callosities well developed.

These figures are copied in my ‘ Illustrations of Indian Zoology’

under the name Trionyx granosus. The back is uniform olive-

green; and the upper part of the head, neck, and limbs is

green, with two pale orange spots, one on each side of the back

of the crown. I do not know whether this difference of colour

depends on age or not.

Buchanan-Hamilton, in his drawings, calls this tortoise Tes-

tudo dura.

Geoffroy describes the species of this genus as Trionya co-

romandelicus (Ann. du Mus. iv. p. 16, tab. v. fig. 1).

The skull is figured as Potamochelys stellatus, Gray, P. Z. 8.

1864, p. 85, figs. 7 & 8(skull) ; Suppl. Cat. Shield Rept. p. 105,

fig. 34 (skull only).

Schlegel figures the head of Trionyx granosus (‘ Fauna

Japonica,’ Chelon. tab. v. fig. 4). It is of uniform colour.

On Deep-sea Dredging in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 341

XLVIII.—WNotes on a Deep-sea Dredging-Expedition round

the Island of Anticosti, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. By

J. F. WHITEAVES, F.G.S. &c.

Unti last summer (1871), so far as I am aware, no dredging-

operations have ever been conducted in the deepest parts of

the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence. In 1867 and 1869 I

dredged in upwards of fifty different localities north of the

Bay of Chaleurs, but never in deeper water than 50 fathoms.

The researches of Dr. Packard and others on the coast of

Labrador, those of Principal Dawson, Prof. Bell, &c. in the

Gaspé district, together with those of Mr. Willis on the Nova-

Scotian coast, were all conducted in comparatively shallow

water. On several occasions I have called the attention of

the Natural-History Society of Montreal to the importance,

from a scientific point of view, of a careful investigation into the

nature of the animal and vegetable life of the greater depths

of the gulf, which seemed to me to promise a rich harvest of

new facts.

A committee was appointed to petition the Dominion Go-

vernment to allow qualified observers facilities for deep-sea

dredging on board government vessels. Principal Dawson also,

as President of the Society, represented to the Honourable the

Minister of Marine and Fisheries the practieal value of, and

the useful results that might accrue from, such inquiries, and

met with the most liberal response. ‘The desired facilities on

board government cruisers were at once promised, the neces-

sary rope was provided, and no efforts were spared to make

the cruises successful. I was deputed by the Natural-History

Society to undertake the management of the expedition, and

left Montreal early in July 1871. My friend Mr. G. T.

Kennedy, M.A., of Montreal, an ardent zoologist, started with

me, but returned after he had been a few days at sea.

The first cruise was on board the government schooner ‘ La

Canadienne,’ and lasted three weeks. The ground examined

on this vessel was from Point des Monts (on the north shore

of the St. Lawrence) to the Mingan Islands, then round the

west point of Anticosti, and from there, in a diagonal line, to

Gaspé Bay. Next, embarking on board the ‘ Stella Maris’

at Gaspé Basin, we made an entire circuit of the island of

Anticosti, sailing as far to the north-west as Sawhill Point,

on the north shore, and to the south-east as the Magdalen

Islands. We were driven to Bryon Island, one of the Mag-

dalen group, by a “ nor’-wester,”’ which of course prevented

our dredging there. As these investigations were entirely

subordinate to the special duties upon which the two schooners

342 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

were engaged, dredging could only be carried on at intervals,

and in several cases the same ground was gone over twice or

more.

On ‘ La Canadienne’ we had sixteen successful hauls of the

dredge. Of these, four were in 50 fathoms of water or less,

seven in between 50 and 100 fathoms, and five in from 100

to 200 fathoms.

On the ‘ Stella Maris’ we had nine successful hauls. One

of these was in less than 50 fathoms, two were between 50

and 100, and six between 100 and 250 fathoms.

The deep-sea mud, in the places examined, is dotted over

with (for the most part rounded) masses of rock, usually of Lau-

rentian gneiss, varying in size from that of a pea to considerably

larger than a man’s head. By a modification of the usual

sieving process every organism, piece of rock, &c. larger than

;; of an inch in diameter was first picked out from the mud. A

large bagful of the mudthus sifted, from each locality examined,

was preserved for subsequent microscopic examination. ‘Three

fourths of this mud was found to be a silt so impalpable as,

when wet, to pass readily through fine cambric; the remain-

ing fourth consisted half of organic, and half of inorganic

matter. The organic matter comprised a few diatoms, mul-

titudes of Foraminifera, some Polycystina, many sponge-

spicules, and fragments of other organisms. The inorganic

débris was a more or less coarse kind of sand, made up of

fragments of quartz, bits of felspathic rocks, and small flakes

of mica.

Attempts were made to endeavour to ascertain the approxi-

mate temperature of the deep-sea mud. When the dredge

was hauled up, its contents were emptied as quickly as possible

into a large shallow tub ; and this was covered with a tarpaulin

and placed in the shade. An ordinary thermometer, with a

metal case and perforated base, was then plunged into the

mud, and the whole was kept carefully shaded for some time.

With one exception, the temperature of the mud was found to

be from 37° to 38° Fahr., and this not alone in deep water ;

for sand brought up from 25 fathoms, on the north shore of

the St. Lawrence, also made the mercury sink to 38° or

37° Fahr. In the centre of the river, between the island of

Anticosti and the south shore of the St. Lawrence, mud

brought up from 200 fathoms only made the mercury sink to

from 43° to 45° Fahr. Either a warm current affects the

temperature of the bottom at this point, or else my observa-

tions were inaccurate or defective, which latter assumption is

by no means unlikely.

On one occasion a somewhat curious phenomenon occurred.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 343

We had been dredging in the afternoon in 212 fathoms, be-

tween the east point of Anticosti and the Bird-rocks. About

600 fathoms of rope (made of cocoanut-fibre) had been paid

out, which when hauled in was, of course, wet. About ten

o'clock the same evening we threw the dredge over in 250

fathoms water, and again all the coils were paid out. As

the line went over the side it was luminous throughout its

entire length with electric sparks! The closest examination

with a triplet lens failed to disclose any trace of animal life

entangled in the strands.

With a view of trying to get some information as to the

nature of the food of some of the surface-feeding fishes, and

especially of the herring and mackerel, towing-nets were fre-

quently used; but scarcely any thing was taken in these. I

attribute these failures to the circumstance that the towing-

nets were only used in the daytime; had they been employed.

at night the results might have been different. Hempen tan-

gles, similar to those devised by Captain Calver, were em-

ployed with some success ; but the mistake was made of placing

these some 20 fathoms or so in front of the dredge, instead of

behind and on each side of it.

The following is a brief sketch of some of the most inter-

esting forms of animal life obtained during the expedition.

During the autumn of 1871, Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S.,

visited Montreal, and went over the whole of the testaceous

Mollusca with me. I am also indebted to Professors A. Agassiz,

A. E. Verrill, and 8. J. Smith for the identification of several

critical species.

FORAMINIFERA.

Large quantities of these beautiful organisms were collected,

especially from very deep water, but at present only a portion

of these have been carefully examined. In Mr. G. M. Daw-

son’s paper on the “ Foraminifera of the River and Gulf of the

St. Lawrence,” published in the ‘ Annals’ for February 1871, a

list is given of fifty-five subspecies or varietal forms. Among

the specimens collected last year in deep water are a number

of large specimens to which it is difficult to attach any name,

but which form a series connecting the subgenera Nodosaria,

Dentalina, Marginulina, and Cristellaria, One of the most

remarkable of these is a Marginulina fully one eighth of an inch

long, from the first chamber of which long spines proceed (at

various angles), which, when perfect, must have been as long

as the shell itself; these long spines vary in number from

one to three ; and besides these there are others which are either

rudimentary or imperfect. Cristellaria crepidula and T'ro-

344 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

chammina incerta were collected in comparatively shallow

water (30 to 40 fathoms) ; and Bolivina punctata, Nonionina

umbilicatula, Vulvulina austriaca, and gigantic examples of

the trwe Triloculina tricarinata (reminding one of miniature

beech-nut seeds carved in ivory) were dredged in from 200

to 250 fathoms. By far the greater number of the St.-Law-

rence Foraminifera seem to have a wide range in depth. I

have examined large bagfuls of dredgings from more than

fifty localities in the northern part of the gulf, and out of fifty

or sixty species or varietal forms, only four or five seem pecu-

liar to deep water. Virgulina squamosa, Bolivina costata and

squamosa, Nonionina umbilicatula, and the typical Triloculina

tricarinata are only met with in apparently from 200 to 300

fathoms water. In the St. Lawrence, Lagena distoma (typi-

cal), Bulimina pyrula and marginata, and Vulvulina austriaca

are characteristic of deep water, but are very rarely met with

in lesser depths. Globigerina bulloides, though small, is not

unfrequent at all depths ; but, curiously enough, Orbulina uni-

versa has not yet been found living in Canada. Although many

of the Foraminifera from the deep water are small and delicate,

by far the largest specimens yet collected were taken in from

200 to 250 fathoms. This agrees with the result of Dr. Car-

penter’s observations on board the ‘ Porcupine.’ The Rhab-

dopleura figured by Mr. Dawson I believe to be an annelid-

tube, having examined the animal in a living state.

POLYCYSTINA.

Dictyocha aculeata and a species of Ceratospyris have been

previously catalogued from the Gulf of St. Lawrence by Prin-

cipal Dawson. ‘Three additional species were dredged in up-

wards of 200 fathoms ; but these are at present undetermined.

In Canada, Polycystina are not peculiar to deep water ; for I

have taken fine specimens from the interior of a species of

Halichondria, also from the stomach of Hchinus drébachiensis,

both collected from a little below low-water mark.

SPONGES.

Several examples of the Grantia ciliata of O. Fabricius

were dredged from 96 fathoms in Trinity Bay, on the north

shore of the St. Lawrence. It is the first sponge with cal-

careous spicules recorded from the Gulf. The straight spicules

of the terminating cone and the triradiate ones of the body of

the sponge, make beautiful polariscope objects. A fine species

of Polymastia was abundant in many places in deep water.

In 38 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse a massive Hali-

chondria was dredged, which, besides the ordinary smooth,

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 345

curved, fusiform spicules, has small retentive bihamate ones,

apparently resembling those of Dr. Bowerbank’s H. falcula

in all but size. The other sponges collected are as yet un-

determined.

HypROZOA.

Thuiaria thuyja and articulata and Campanularia verticil-

lata have been noticed among the specimens collected, which,

however, have yet to be examined.

ACTINOZOA.

The two common sea-anemones of the New-England coast,

viz. Metridium marginatum, Say (which is probably a variety

of the European Actinoloba dianthus), and Urticina crassi-

cornis, Khr., were found as abundantly living in the greatest

depths examined as in very shallow water. Prof A. E.

Verrill recognizes a species of Zoanthus in some specimens

which I sent him, which were dredged in 212 fathoms, be-

tween Anticosti and the Bird-rocks. Among the same spe-

cimens he has also detected examples of his Hunephthya glo-

merata, an Aleyonoid previously known only from Greenland

and the banks of Newfoundland; also a new species, and

perhaps genus, near to Cornularia. A large number (50 or

60) of living specimens of a Pennatula, which I believe to

be new to science, was dredged in from 160 to 200 fathoms,

between the island of Anticosti and the south shore of the St.

Lawrence. In the largest specimens collected there are 40

pinnules on each side of the upper portion of the ccenosarc ;

but in average full-grown examples the number is less, and

ranges from 30 to 35. On the back of the rachis there is a

central groove, on each side of which are numerous but un-

equal, spinose, undeveloped polyps. The average number of

polyp-bearing cells on each pinnule seems to be about 11, but

varies from 9 to 16. The polyp-bearing cells are entirely

separate, and are margined with bundles of spines. The 8

mesenteries and somatic chambers, as well as the 8 tentacles

of the polyps, can be well made out in the specimens collected.

In one specimen examined by Mr. G. T. Kennedy the basal

portion of the pinnules is filled with spheres of granular

matter. The spicules of the lower half of the stem are ellip-

tical or oblong, and decidedly constricted in the middle. The

calcareous internal axis is somewhat longer than the ccenosare

itself, and is recurved at the base. Large examples measure

about 8 inches ; but some are only 6 inches long, or even less.

These latter specimens have as few as 21 pinnules on each

side of the stem. The St.-Lawrence Pennatula, although re-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 25

346 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

sembling in some respects some of the varieties of P. phos-

phorea as described by Kélliker, seems nevertheless a distinct

species, for which I venture to propose the name of Pennatula

canadensis. On this point Prof. A. E. Verrill, to whom I

sent specimens, writes tome as follows :—“ I have spent con-

siderable time on the Pennatula. It is very near P. phos-

phorea, and for a time I thought it would prove identical. So

far as the figures and descriptions of the latter go it agrees

very well, allowing that all the varieties and subvarieties re-

cognized by Kélliker really belong to one species; but on

comparison with Norwegian specimens, received from Copen-

hagen, it seems to be sufficiently distinct. The most evident

differences are to be found in the more numerous, crowded,

and unequal rudimentary or asexual polyps along the back of

the stalk in your species, and in the greater smoothness of

the peduncle, due to the much smaller size of the spicula of

the integument in the American species.” For many of the

details respecting this species I am indebted to my friend Mr.

G. T. Kennedy, M.A., of Montreal, who has kindly helped

me in the dissection of specimens.

ECHINODERMATA.

Two fine living examples of Schizaster fragilis (the Brissus

fragilis of Diiben & Koren) were dredged, one off Cap-Rosier

lighthouse, in 125 fathoms, the other from 200 fathoms, in

the centre of the river, between Ellis Bay, Anticosti, and the

south shore. Off Sawhill Point, on the north shore, the

dredge brought up, from 69 fathoms, a curious Asterid covered

with long and slender spines. Prof. Agassiz, to whom I sent

the only specimen collected, informs me that it is identical

with a species dredged on the ‘ Porcupine’ expedition, and

subsequently named by Prof. Wyville Thomson Calveria

hystrix. Prof. A. Agassiz thinks that this Asterid may be

the Solaster furcifer of Diiben & Koren. Unfortunately two

widely different Echinoderms are called Calveria hystrix in

the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society.’ The St.-Lawrence

starfish is the “ singular Asterid allied to Pteraster,” but not

the Echinoderm “belonging to the Diadema family,” to

both of which the same name is given. Ctenodiscus crispatus,

Diiben & Koren, was abundant in every haul at depths

greater than 100 fathoms. Amphiura Holbéllii, Liitken, and

Ophiacantha spinulosa, Miill., were also frequent in deep

water. Large living examples of Ophioglypha Sarsti, Liitken,

were dredged in 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse,

and a few fine specimens of Astrophyton Agassizii were taken,

from 60 fathoms mud, off Thunder River.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 347

ANNELIDA.

By far the most numerous of the denizens of the deep-sea

mud in the St. Lawrence are marine worms. Apparently

about. 20 or 30 species were collected ; but none of them has

as yet been studied or determined.

CRUSTACEA.

Hempen “ tangles ” used in 212 fathoms water, to the south-

east of the east point of Anticosti, brought up several living

examples of a Pycnogonum, which is Dr. Stimpson’s P. pelagr-

cum, but which does not seem to differ from the P. littorale,

Strom, of European seas. A fine specimen of Nymphon

giganteum, Goodsir, was dredged in 125 fathoms off Cap-

Rosier lighthouse. On the authority of the Rev. A. M.

Norman’s ‘ List of the Crustacea of the Shetlands,’ I had quoted

this (in a report printed by the Department of Marine and

Fisheries for the Dominion) as Johnston’s species; but Prof.

8. J. Smith informs me that it was Goodsir who first described

it. Several examples of Munnopsis typica, M. Sars, were

taken in 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse. Several

curious Amphipods were taken, among the more conspicuous

of which were fine specimens of an Epimeria, which Mr.

Smith refers doubtfully to L. coniger of Boeck. No large

Decapods were dredged from deep water; the only specimens

observed were a few shrimps. Mr. Smith recognizes the fol-

lowing critical forms of Macrura in a small series which I sent

to him for identification :—

Pandalus annulicornis, Leach. 96 fathoms, Trinity Bay,

and 125 fathoms off Cap-Rosier lighthouse.

Hippolyte Phippsti, Kréyer, with the preceding species.

Hippolyte Fabric, Kroyer. 125 fathoms, off Cap-Rosier

lighthouse.

Hippolyte polaris, Kroyer. 38 fathoms, off Cap-Rosier

lighthouse.

POLYZOA.

Good specimens of the following species have been deter-

mined, from depths of from 90 to 250 fathoms; but many in-

teresting forms are at present unnamed :—

Crisia eburnea, Linn. Caberea Ellisii, Flem.

Idmonea atlantica, Forbes. Bicellaria ciliata, Zinn.

Defrancia lucernaria ?, Sars. Acamarchis plumosa, Pallas.

Alcyonidium gelatinosum, Padlas. Flustra Barleei, Busk.

Scrupocellaria scruposa, Linn. Retepora cellulosa, var.

elongata, Smitt.

25*

Gemellaria loricata, Linn.

348 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

TUNICATA.

The following is a list of the few species of this order at

present identified by Prof. A. E. Verrill :—

Ascidiopsis complanatus (= Ascidia complanata, Fabr.). In

212 fathoms to the south-east of the east point of Anticosti.

Eugyra pilularis, Verrill. In 50 fathoms off the St. John’s

River, Mingan.

Botryllus, a purple species, distinct from B. Gouldit, Verrill.

Attached to Plustra Barleei?, Busk, from 96 fathoms in

Trinity Bay.

Several examples of Amouroucium glabrum, Verrill, were

collected in and just outside of Gaspé Bay, where I had pre-

viously dredged it in 1869.

MOo.Luusca.

In the ‘ Canadian Naturalist’ for 1869, I published a cata-

logue of 114 species of marine Mollusca inhabiting the Gulf

of St. Lawrence, to the north of the Bay of Chaleurs. We

now know localities for 150 species which inhabit the region

in question. ‘The shells collected last summer have been

carefully studied ; and the following is a list of some of the

most interesting among them *.

Terebratula septentrionalis, Couth. In 112 fathoms, stones, off

Charleton Point, Anticosti, and in 212 fathoms to the 8.S.E.

of the east end of that island.

Terebratella spitzbergensis, Davidson. 38 fathoms, stones,

off Cap-Rosier lighthouse, alive, adult, and frequent; 96

fathoms, in Trinity Bay, one young, but living example ;

112 fathoms, off Charleton Point, Anticosti, one dead, adult.

Most abundant in somewhat shallow water.

Pecten grenlandicus, Chemn. ‘Taken alive in several localities

in from 160 to 250 fathoms, mud.

Lima sulculus, Leach. Fine specimens in 38 fathoms, off Cap-

Rosier lighthouse.

Arca pectunculoides, Scacchi (=A. raridentata, Searles Wood).

Dredged on the north shore of the St. Lawrence, also be-

tween Anticosti and the south shore, in 160 to 170 fathoms.

The specimens were often living, and of large size for the

species. New to the western side of the Atlantic.

Arca glacialis, Gray (= A. raridentata, var. major, Sars). A

few dead examples of this shell were taken with the pre-

ceding one.

* Tam indebted to Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys, F.R.S., for the determination

of those species to which an asterisk is affixed.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 349

Yoldia (? Portlandia) thracieformis, Storer. One living speci-

men occurred in 212 fathoms, 8.S.E. of the east point of

Anticosti, and a dead, but perfect one, in 125 fathoms, off

Cap Rosier.

Yoldia (Portlandia) lucida, Lovén. Living in seven of the

localities examined, its range in depth being apparently from

150 to 250 fathoms.

* Yoldia (Portlandia) frigida, Torell. Frequent, living with

the preceding.

Dacrydium vitreum, Méll. In 212 fathoms, mud, to the 8.8.E.

of the east point of Anticosti, living. This and the pre-

ceding are new to America.

Cryptodon Gouldit, Philippi. Common, living, at all depths ;

it ranges from 10 to 250 fathoms.

Astarte lactea, Brod. & Sow. Fine in several localities. Off

Sawhill Point in 30 fathoms ; off Moisie village in 70 fathoms;

mouth of St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms ; Gaspé

Bay. The young is Astarte Richardsonii, Reeve.

Astarte. ‘Two species of Astarte, both of the A. sulcata

group, were collected in deep water. One, of which two

specimens only were dredged (off Bear Point, Anticosti,

in 112 fathoms), I at first thought to be A. crebricostata ;

the other is by far the most abundant mollusk of the greater

depths of the northern part of the river and gulf of the

St. Lawrence. Mr. Jeffreys says that this latter shell is

Astarte sulcata, var. minor. No specimens that I have seen,

from American or European localities, exactly resemble

either of these shells; and, in my judgment, both are new

and good species.

Tellina (Macoma) inflata, Stimpson, MSS. Perhaps M. fragilis

of Leach. Fine living specimens of a shell which the late

lamented Dr. Stimpson gave to the writer some years ago,

with the label ‘¢ Macoma fragilis, St. MSS.,” were dredged

in 70 fathoms, sand, off Moisie village and at various depths

in other localities.

* Newra arctica, Sars. Several living specimens of this spe-

-cies (the largest of which measures upwards of an inch and

a quarter in its greatest breadth) were taken in 125 fathoms,

off Cap-Rosier lighthouse ; also in 200 fathoms, mud, Ellis

Bay, Anticosti, bearmg §8.8.W. 27 miles distant.

* Newra obesa, Lovén (=.N. pellucida, Stimpson). Off Caribou

Island, on the north shore of the St. Lawrence, nearly oppo-

site Cape Chatte, living, in 170 fathoms, mud. I regard

both N. arctica and N. obesa as varieties of the European

N. cuspidata, N. arctica being adults of unusual size, and N.

obesa the young of the same species. In deference to Mr.

350 Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

Jeffreys’s greater experience, however, I keep the two forms

separate. NV. arctica has not previously been found on the

American coast.

* Utriculus pertenuis, Mighels. In 25 fathoms, sand, off Trinity

River, also in Gaspé Bay; abundant at both localities.

(Probably =U. turritus, Moller.)

Utriculus hyalinus ?, Turton (=Diaphana debilis, Gould).

With the preceding, but rare in both places.

*Philine quadrata, Wood. Alive, from 212 fathoms, mud, to

_ the 8.8.W. of the east point of Anticosti.

Philine lineolata, Couth. Gaspé Bay, and off the St. John’s

River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms.

Dentalium abyssorum, Sars. Dead but good specimens of this

species were dredged in three localities: —in 164 fathoms, mud,

off Seven Island Bay; also in 160and 200fathoms to the 5S. W.

_ and §.8.W. of Ellis Bay, Anticosti. New to America.

Stphonodentalium vitreum, Sars. Deep water, in several lo-

calities, fine and living. Most frequent in 200 to 250

fathoms; also new to the American side of the Atlantic.

Margarita argentata, Gould (=M. glauca, MOoll.). Off the

. mouth of the St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms, and

_ sparingly in other localities. Gaspé Bay.

Margarita striata?, Brod. & Sow. A remarkable variety of

this species, with three unusually prominent revolving ribs

(so much so as to remind one of some of the Australian

Trochocochleas), occurred in 70 fathoms, sand, off Moisie

village. The type is abundant and large almost everywhere

in the St. Lawrence in shallow water.

Rissoa carinata, Mighels. Frequent, alive, from 96 fathoms

in Trinity Bay.

Rissoa castanea, Moll. With the above, and elsewhere not

unfrequent.

Rissoa scrobiculata, M6ll. Collected in three localities, in

from 125 to 250 fathoms, where it is large and fine. It

occurs living, but of small size, in Gaspé Bay, at depths of

from 20 to 30 fathoms.

Rissoella eburnea, Stimpson. One living and adult example,

in 70 fathoms, off Moisie village.

Lacuna glacialis, Miller. A living adult specimen of this

species was dredged from 96 fathoms in Trinity Bay. The

shell is not a true Lacuna, and belongs, in my judgment, to

a new genus.

Aporrhais occidentalis, Beck. A remarkable thin and in-

flated variety of this species was taken in 120 fathoms off

Bear Head, Anticosti. The type is not uncommon through-

out the gulf in from 20 to 50 fathoms.

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 351

Eulima stenostoma, Jeffreys. A single living adult was taken

from 160 fathoms, to the south-west of Ellis Bay, Anticosti.

New to America.

Astyris Holbillit, M6ll. (= Columbella rosacea, Gld.). Tri-

nity Bay, 96 fathoms, also other localities. Ranges from 20

to 100 fathoms.

Buccinum ciliatum, O. Fabr. Alive, in 112 fathoms, off

Charleton Point, Anticosti.

Buccinum cyaneum?, Brug. From 250 fathoms, mud, be-

tween the east point of Anticosti and the Bird-rocks.

Stpho islandicus, Chemn, Only one living example of this

mollusk was collected, from 112 fathoms, off Charleton

Point, Anticosti.

Sipho Sarsti, Jeffreys. With the above, but much more fre-

quent; also off Egg Island, in 70 to 80 fathoms. The

epidermis is very different in these two species; but it is diffi-

cult to separate them when the specimens are water-worn.

Trophon craticulatus,O. Fabr. Off Cap-Rosier lighthouse, in

38 fathoms, stones, fine and living; also near the mouth of

the St. John’s River, Mingan, in 50 fathoms, sand, but dead.

Fasciolaria ligata, Mighels. ‘Two living examples were taken

in Gaspé Bay, near Cape Gaspé, on a stony bottom, in

20 or 30 fathoms.

Twenty-five species of shells not previously known to in-

habit the seas of the Province of Quebec were collected during

the two cruises; of these, twelve are new to the American

side of the Atlantic.

FISHES.

The only fishes brought up in the dredge were a young

specimen of each of the following species :—

Sebastes norvegicus. ‘The Norway haddock. 96 fathoms,

Trinity Bay.

Anarrhichas lupus. The wolf fish. 112 fathoms, off Charle-

ton Point, Anticosti.

Agonus hexagonus?, Schneid. With the preceding.

It is estimated that, when the whole of the material collected

has been examined with care and all the specimens are de-

termined, upwards of 100 species of marine invertebrates new

to the Gulf of the St. Lawrence can be added to its previously

recorded fauna. Of these, from 30 to 40 species are new to

the western side of the Atlantic, and a few are undescribed.

When it is considered that only five weeks were spent at sea,

that during this time the ordinary duties upon which the

schooners were engaged (and sometimes unfavourable weather)

aon Mr. J. F. Whiteaves on Deep-sea Dredging

often made dredging quite impracticable, also that I was

alone (so far as scientific help was concerned) nearly the whole

time, I may be pardoned for thinking that the results of

these investigations, so far as they go; are very encouraging,

and such as should stimulate to renewed exertions in so pro-

mising a field of inquiry.

I have previously shown (in the ‘Canadian Naturalist’ for

1869) that a large proportion of the Greenland invertebrates,

probably three fourths of the whole, range as far south as the

northern part of the Gulf of St. Lawrence down to Gaspé

Bay. In Canada many marine animals (such as, for example,

the oyster and the two species of Crepidula which are found

attached to it) occur off the southern coast of the Bay of Cha-

leurs, but not in the northern part of the same bay. A

number of characteristic New-England species inhabit the

coasts of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, which do not ap-

parently range further north than the Bay of Chaleurs.

On the Admiralty Charts of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, an

irregular line of shallow soundings may be seen to extend from

a little above the northern extremity of the Island of Cape

Breton, round the Magdalen group, and thence, in a westerly

direction, to Bonaventure Island. To the south and south-

west of this line the water is uniformly somewhat shallow,

and never exceeds 50 fathoms in depth. To the north, north-

west, and north-east of the same line the water deepens

rapidly, and perhaps even precipitously. Principal Dawson

suggests that the Subcarboniferous rocks of which the Magdalen

Islands are composed, and which appear again on the mainland,

in Bonaventure County, may possibly crop up under the sea

in the area between the north-west side of Cape Breton and

the mainland of New Brunswick, as well as that of the counties

of Bonaventure and Gaspé, in the Province of Quebec. This

would account, possibly, for the shallowness of the water in

the area in question. Whether this is the case or not, it seems

not improbable that this extended line of shallow soundings

may form a natural barrier to those arctic currents, if any such

there are, which sweep down the Straits of Belle Isle in a south-

westerly direction, and may tend to deflect their course in a

bold curve into and up the river St. Lawrence.

In the centre of this river, opposite Murray Bay, about 80

miles below Quebec, Principal Dawson has dredged quite a

large series of Labrador marine invertebrates ; but how much

further up the stream these salt-water denizens extend, we

have yet to learn.

North of the Bay of Chaleurs the fauna of the Gulf of St.

Lawrence has a purely arctic character. The species of which

in the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 353

it is composed are remarkable alike for their geological anti-

quity and for their wide range of geographical distribution.

In time, a few of them date back to as ancient periods as the

Coralline and Red Crags, and a much larger number occur in

the Postpliocene deposits of both Kurope and North America.

It is curious to observe that species which are found both living

on the American coast to-day and fossil in the European

Pliocene and Postpliocene, had a different geographical range

in former times from that which they are known to have now.

Many of these arctic marine invertebrates are circumpolar in

their distribution, and not only inhabit both sides of the At-

lantic, but are also found in the Northern Pacific. The prece-

ding generalizations refer almost exclusively to the assemblage

of marine animals characteristic of comparatively shallow

water, the members of which range in depth from low-water

mark up to about 50 fathoms.

The deep-water fauna, at least that of the localities examined,

is also decidedly arctic, but it has at the same time a much

more Scandinavian aspect. Nearly all of the species which

are now for the first time recorded as inhabitants of the Atlantic

coast of America occur also in the seas of the north of Scot-

land, of Norway, and Spitzbergen. There is a striking simi-

larity between the series of fossils from the Quaternary deposits

of Norway (as catalogued by Sars) and the marine inverte-

brates of the deepest parts of the St. Lawrence. Pennatule,

Ctenodiscus, Tripylus (Schizaster) fragilis, Ophioglypha Sarstt,

together with many species of mollusks, are common to both.

Still it must be borne in mind that in the Quaternary deposits

of Norway a number of characteristic European invertebrates

occur, which, so far as we know, do not live on the western

side of the Atlantic.

In the River and Gulf of St. Lawrence, generally speaking,

the number of species of marine animals which may be collected

at or above low-water mark is very small; few specimens,

apparently, are washed ashore by storms. But there is a con-

stant tendency in the opposite direction ; littoral and shallow-

water forms are constantly being drifted down to lower levels,

particularly shells (which are usually dead and empty) and the

larger calcareous Polyzoa, such as Celleporaria incrassata and

Myriozoum subgracile. Sometimes the Mollusca are living:

on one occasion I dredged an example of Littorina rudis,

apparently alive, but certainly with the operculum fitting

tightly into the aperture, from upwards of 100 fathoms water.

When such is the case, it is often difficult to separate the true

denizens of the deep sea from those which are washed down

from shallower water.

354 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

The Government of Canada (to whom I had the honour of

presenting a report on this preliminary deep-sea dredging-

expedition, with special reference to facts collected bearmg on

the fisheries) has decided that the prosecution of these inquiries

shall be continued. A vote of a small sum of money has

been passed, which will, it is hoped, defray the necessary

expenses of the expedition. I propose to devote the months

of July and August of the present year to endeavouring to

dredge in the greatest depths of the River and Gulf of St.

Lawrence, particularly in the deepest place to the west of

Newfoundland. Between the east point of Anticosti and the

Magdalen Islands, about halfway, and in an easterly direction

towards Newfoundland, is the deepest part of the gulf. The

bottom, at this locality, for several miles (nearly two meridians)

has a depth of 313 fathoms. Last year we were unfortunate ;

for as soon as we were fairly on the ground, and had got

every thing in readiness, a stiff north-west gale sprung up,

which lasted sixty hours, and made dredging quite imprac-

ticable. It is hoped that in this respect our efforts will be

more successful during the present season.

Montreal, July 12, 1872.

XLIX.—Descriptions of new Myriopoda of the Family Glo-

meride. By ARTHUR GARDINER BuTLeER, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

[Plate XVIII. |

THE millipedes treated of in the present paper are all in

the collection of the British Museum.

CHILOGNATHA.

Family Glomeride*, Gervais.

Genus ZEPHRONIA, Gray.

1. Zephronia chitonoides, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. figs. 2, 2a.

Brownish testaceous, inclining to castaneous; head and

nuchal plate darker.

Head shining, external area coarsely rugose, central area

coarsely punctured, inner margin bearing about fourteen minute

teeth ; dorsal segments highly polished, covered with exceed-

ingly indistinct, almost obsolete, granulations ; external margin

of first segment rugose ; last segment very oblique ; segmental

lateral wings much incurved in dried specimens, very oblique.

* Variously designated Zephronude, Spherotheride, and Polyzonide !

(Wood, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1865, p. 172). In his ‘ Aptéres,’

M. Gervais restricts this family to the three genera Polyzoniwm, Stiphono-

tus, and Stphonophora.

Mr. A.G. Butler on new Myriopoda. 355

Length 1 inch 7 lines to 1 inch 3 lines; width at first dorsal

segment 9 lines.

Hab. Madras and Ceylon (Dr. A. Smith). Four speci-

mens. B.M.

Allied to Z. Brandtii of Humbert, but differing in the

number of teeth on the back of the head, the projecting last

segment, the incurved character of all the segments, the wings

of which are narrower, the relatively narrower and more

elongate character of the entire animal. We have Z. Brandtit

under two distinct types of coloration; the darker form appears

to be the adult type.

2. Zephronia rugulosa, n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 1.

Very near to the preceding, but pale testaceous; the head,

nuchal plate, and hind margins of dorsal segments olivaceous

brown.

Head glabrous, external third very coarsely and densely

punctured, inner margin bearing about ten small teeth ; nuchal

plate and dorsal segments distinctly rugose and sparsely punc-

tured all over ; segmental wings less oblique and broader than

in the preceding species.

Length 7 lines; width 4 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (£. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

3. Zephronia noticeps, n. sp.

Allied to Z. chitonotdes. Brownish olivaceous; the eyes,

antenne, legs, and nuchal plate (except central area) green;

front of head melining to orange, central area crossed by three

oval red spots.

Head glabrous, somewhat pilose in front, coarsely but

sparsely punctured ; hind margin bearing about eight small

teeth ; nuchal plate surrounded by a series of coarse punctures,

several also scattered over its central area; dorsal segments

dull, almost imperceptibly granulose, the last segment percep-

tibly punctured, especially behind; segmental wings almost as

in preceding species.

‘Length 8 lines ; width 4 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (FE. W. Janson). One specimen. B.M.

4, Zephronia corrugata, n. sp.

Allied to 7. inermis, but paler in colouring, and with all

the dorsal segments coarsely rugose.

Length 1 inch 8 lines to 7 lines; width 9 lines to 3 lines.

Hab, Ceylon (f. Templeton). Four specimens. B.M.

Possibly only a variety of Z. inermis, of which we have four

examples from Madras and Ceylon.

356 Mr. A.G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

5. Zephronia leopardina, n. sp.

_ Allied to Z. inermis, but pale testaceous, blotched all over

with castaneous, and covered with minute, scarcely perceptible

hairs; puncturing almost precisely as in Z. inermis.

Length 8 lines ; width 44 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (&. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

6. Zephronia tigrina, n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 7.

Allied to Z. corrugata. Castaneous, with each of the dorsal

segments, excepting the first and last, crossed by a band of

ochre-yellow ; head and front of first dorsal segment pitchy ;

hind margins of all the dorsal segments pitchy.

Head and nuchal plate covered with coarse punctures; dorsal

segments very rugose; wings not angulated, but obliquely

rounded off in front, and with well-developed anterior ridge.

Length 1 inch 7 lines; width 9 lines.

Hab. “ Kast Indies” (S. Stevens). One specimen. B.M.

7. Zephronia zebraica, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 4.

Allied to Z. téigrina. Ochreous, head pitchy ; front of nuchal

plate and front margins of all the dorsal segments black ; two

uregularly triangular pitchy patches towards the front of last

segment.

Head densely and coarsely punctured in front, otherwise

sparsely punctured; a row of well-defined punctures along

front of nuchal plate; all the dorsal segments sparsely punc-

tured in front, last segment punctured all over.

Length 1 inch 11 lines ; width 11 lines.

Hab. Near Bombay (Col. Whitehill). One specimen. B.M.

8. Zephronia nigrinota, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 9.

Allied to the preceding species. Dark olivaceous or casta-

neous, with dorsal segments slightly paler in front, and dotted

here and there with black and sometimes with ochreous spots ;

head and nuchal plate pitchy.

Head glabrous, densely and coarsely punctured in front,

irregularly and sparsely punctured behind ; nuchal plate ex-

hibiting a few coarse punctures here and there ; dorsal segments

almost imperceptibly granulose; segmental wings as in the

preceding species.

Length 1 inch 3 lines to 1 inch 2 lines.

Hab. Sikkim (Dr. Hooker) ; Assam (Warwick). 81x speci-

mens. B.M.

9. Zephronia lutescens, n. sp.

Testaceous, sometimes clouded with olivaceous; head and

nuchal plate pale olive and covered with short bristles.

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda. 357

Head coarsely punctured, external third densely punctured ;

nuchal plate with a row of coarse punctures in front; dorsal

segments (excepting the front edge of the wings and the

posterior portion of the last segment, which are somewhat

rugose and pilose) polished and without punctuation.

Length 10 to 84 lines ; width 5} to 5 lines.

Hab. India (Mrs. Hamilton). 'T'wo specimens. B.M.

Allied to 7. glabrata of Newport; but larger, broader, and

with the nuchal plate and dorsal segments much less punctured.

10. Zephronia ignobilis, n. sp.

Testaceous, clouded with dusky olivaceous. 2

Head, nuchal plate, and dorsal segments densely punctured

all over and clothed with short hair; segmental wings slightly

curved and very pointed.

Length 44 lines ; width 2 lines.

Hab. Java (Argent). One specimen. B.M.

Allied to Z. Lichtensteinii; but without the shining dorsal

ridge.

11. Zephronia pilifera, n. sp.

Brownish testaceous, spotted here and there with black, and

clothed with short hairs; head and nuchal plate pitchy.

Head coarsely punctured, more densely in front; nuchal

plate coarsely punctured; dorsal segments finely and densely

punctured ; wings curving slightly backwards.

Length 9 lines; width 44 lines.

Hab. Ceylon (Rf. Templeton). One specimen. B.M.

Also allied to Z. Lichtensteinit?. It differs also from the

preceding species in size, colour, and the form of the segmental

wings.

12. Zephronia innominata, Newport, MS. Pl. XVIII. fig. 8.

Testaceous, eyes and antenne greenish.

Head coarsely rugose and punctured all over; nuchal plate

densely and coarsely punctured ; dorsal segments densely but

minutely punctured, their external edges minutely pilose.

Length 1 inch 34 lines; width 7 lines. _

Hab. Philippines (Cuming). Two specimens. B.M.

Nearly allied to Z, castanea of Newport; but narrower, paler

in colour, with broader terminal joint to antenna, and more

distinctly punctured dorsal segments.

13. Zephronia sulcatula, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 5.

Allied to 7. inermis, rather paler and duller.

Head flatter than in Z. ¢nermis, punctured in the same way ;

358 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Myriopoda.

nuchal plate without punctures; dorsal segments, excepting

the last (which is delicately rugose), without punctures; all,

excepting the first and last, longitudinally multisulcate.

Length 1 inch 11 lines to 1 inch 4 lines; width 1 inch to 9

lines.

Hab. Borneo (W. Jeakes). Eight specimens. B.M.

One example shows scarcely a trace of the sulcations on the

dorsal segments.

Genus SPH#ROTHERIUM, Brandt.

1. Spherotherium latum,n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 3.

Castaneous, dotted here and there with blackish; mouth

black; eyes crystalline white.

Head rugose and densely punctured in front, coarsely but

sparsely punctured in the centre; nuchal plate sparsely punc-

tured ; dorsal segments delicately rugose, last segment also

sparsely punctured.

Length 2 inches 1 line; width 1 inch 3 lines.

Hab. North Madagascar (L. Bouton). One specimen. B.M.

Allied to S. Actwon of White; but smaller, paler in colour,

more depressed in outline, less rugose, and with lateral wings

of segments less curved. The antenne in S, Acton are broken,

which accounts for Mr. White not having more than hinted at

its genus by comparing it with S. hippocastanum*.

2. Spherotherium Neptunus, n. sp. Pl. XVITI. fig. 6.

Olive-green, clouded and blotched with pale ochreous; the

external margins of the segments dark ochreous. Variety

pitchy, clouded with castaneous; the external margins of the

segments castaneous.

Head coarsely and densely punctured in front, sparsely

behind ; nuchal plate with row of coarse punctures in front and

two or three punctures behind; dorsal segments smooth and

shining, the last sparsely punctured.

Length 2 inches to 43 lines ; width 1 inch to 2 lines.

Hab. Madagascar (Madame Ida Pfeiffer); Port Natal

(Gueinzius). Hight specimens. :

Allied to S. rotundatum of Brandt, and agrees in many

respects with the description of S. Titanus ; but the last segment

is not peculiar in shape.

* A Zephronia (!) in the British Museum agrees pretty well with the

description of the latter species ; it will, however, doubtless prove to be

distinct when an opportunity occurs of comparing it with authenticated

examples of that species.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 359

3. Spherotherium fraternum, n. sp.

Closely allied to the preceding, but with head and nuchal

plate coarsely punctured all over and clothed with short hairs,

the dorsal segments exhibiting a number of small, rounded,

whitish pustules.

Length 84 lines ; width 5 lines.

Hab. Victoria, Australia (Dr. Howitt). One specimen. B.M.

4. Spherotherium nigrum, n. sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 11.

Shining black, antenne clothed with reddish hairs.

Head glabrous, coarsely and densely punctured in front,

sparsely behind; nuchal plate delicately rugose and coarsely

but sparsely punctured ; dorsal segments coarsely rugose and

punctured, last segment densely punctured, its outer edge

curving outwards so as to form a distinct projecting rim ; lateral

wings very slightly curved.

Length 1 inch 4 lines ; width 8 lines.

Hab. South Africa (Sir Andrew Smith). One specimen.

B.M.

A remarkable species, coming nearer to S. grossum, Koch,

than to any other described form.

5. Spherotherium sinuatum,n.sp. Pl. XVIII. fig. 10.

Closely allied to S. dorsalis, Gervais (Zephronia pulverea,

White ; Spherotherium retusum, Koch), but smaller, without

dorsal ridge, the punctuation of the head. and nuchal plate finer,

the lateral segmental wings curving distinctly backwards, and

the depression of last segment reduced to a slight sinus.

Length 74 lines ; width 4 lines.

Hab. Sarawak (Wallace). One specimen. B.M.

L.—On Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. By Oscar ScumiptT*.

[Plates XVI., XVII. ]

I must preface my communications upon Coccoliths and a

newly discovered kind of organized corpuscles from the Bathy-

bius-mud, which I call Rhabdoliths, with a short report upon

the course of that expedition in the lower part of the Adriatic

Sea during which I first made a close acquaintance with these

exceedingly remarkable corpuscles.

By working up the sponges captured during the sounding

and surveying of the Florida coast, and incited by the English

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Sitzungsbericht der

k. k. Akad. der Wissenschaften in Wien,’ Bd. Ixii. (1870) Abth. i.

pp. 669-682.

360 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

deep-sea soundings, the desire was raised in me to learn more

accurately the conditions of the bottom of the Adriatic. My

frequent dredging-voyages along the Dalmatian coast had

hardly made me acquainted with a greater depth than from 40

to 50 fathoms. In presence of the surprising results of the

investigations of the Atlantic sea-bottom, and their importance

equally in zoology and geology, a supplemental examination

of the sea near me appeared to be of general interest. But it

was perfectly clear that this could only be undertaken with

large resources ; and for this purpose circumstances were pecu-

liarly favourable. Considering the total deficiency of modern

and fully trustworthy charts of the Adriatic Sea, a thorough

survey of it could no longer be put off. This great work was

confided by the Admiralty to Captain Cisterreicher with a

number of officers. A smaller steamer was associated with the

principal ship, the ‘'Triest,’ a large and convenient steamer ;

and besides its rowing-boats the ‘'Triest’ carried a steam-launch.

As in the summer of 1870 it was proposed to lay down some

lines between the Apulian and the Albano-Dalmatian coasts,

I applied to Vice-Admiral von Tegetthof and Captain Cister-

reicher, and received from them the most obliging permission

and invitation to pass a few weeks with my friend Professor

Gobanz as a guest on board the ‘ Triest,’ and a promise that I

should be as far as possible aided in my designs. Equally liberal

was the assistance of the Imperial Academy with regard to

our equipment. And so my companion and I found ourselves

with the Lloyd’s steamer, on the morning of the 20th of June,

in the roads of Durazzo, where the ‘ Triest’ was lying at anchor.

We were cordially received by the gentlemen of the surveying-

expedition, and 1 look back with pleasure and’ gratitude to

every hour of my living in their company.

IT had had dredges made upon two models :—one the frame of

which was a narrow rectangle; and several with triangular

frames, of which I have previously made use with good results.

The only improvement (to which Professor Lovén had called

my attention) was, that of the three bows which bear the ring

for the rope, only two are riveted together, whilst the third is

united with them by a somewhat thinner piece of rope. In

the event of the catching of the dredge, this union will break

more easily than the hawser, and the dredge will be more

easily freed. I was never in a position to learn this by ex-

perience. The triangular dredge proved perfectly available

down to depths of 630 fathoms, the greatest that we attained,

when leaden weights of 80 lbs. were attached in the angles.

As a tow-line, rope of the thickness of one’s thumb was used ;

and in the absence of a small steam-engine for drawing it up,

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 361

the numerous hands of the crew proved to be more than

sufficient. During the operations with the dredge, the sound-

ings and measurements of temperature were also carried on.

With regard to the temperatures, I have as yet seen no con-

nected series ; but this portion of the operations of the survey

will be worked out by Lieutenant Weyprecht. In the deepest

parts of the gulf, with a surface temperature of 18° R., the tem-

perature does not fall below 12°-10° R., so that these differ-

ences can hardly have any essential influence upon the deve-

lopment or repression of life. Moreover in the basin-like part

of the Adriatic Sea in which we made our observations, the

currents are remarkably small, and do not appear to affect the

greater depths of several hundred fathoms. I place the extra-

ordinary poverty of those deeps in all the higher forms of life

chiefly to the account of this circumstance. On the upper

parts of the Dalmatian coast, where the gulf is more narrowed,

the shore-current is more perceptible, and the position of

elongated islands and groups of reefs (Scoglien) gives origin to

stronger local currents; it is precisely these regions that are

endowed with the richest fauna and flora. As both Heller

and myself ascertained, this abundance diminishes towards

Ragusa, and below this point the coast is almost entirely sterile.

On board the ‘ Triest’ I investigated three lines with the dredge,

namely Sasano-Brindisi, Bari-Durazzo, and Dulcigno-Viesti.

The greatest depth of the first line was reached with 480

fathoms, and that of the third with 630 fathoms. The dredge

could be so often cast, and, notwithstanding its simplicity, acted

with such certainty, that from its contents a tolerably correct

picture of the nature and population of the bottom must result.

The first freshly examined sample of the bottom from 170

fathoms convinced me that I had Bathybius-mud before me,

Its yellowish-grey colour and its exceedingly characteristic

greasy nature were so well known to the officers that I was

unanimously assured by them that this “ primitive mud”

predominates from the upper parts of the Adriatic Sea, alter-

nating only here and there with a few extended sandy tracts.

The soundings of previous years have confirmed this; and in

like manner the dredge constantly brought me up this mud

from all depths on all three lines. It was immediately seen

that it is extremely rich in Foraminifera (predominantly Globi-

gerina, Orbulina, Uvigerina, Rotalia, Textularia); but I looked

in vain for other things which I had expected to find. A

young and consequently not quite certainly determinable

specimen of an Echinus, probably /. melo (= Flemingii?), from

230 fathoms, and an empty but perfect shell of Terebratula

vitrea from 430 fathoms is the entire produce! That from the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 26

362 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

same depths some very young Bivalves, of scarcely ? millim.

in diameter, made their appearance, whilst no trace of full-

grown animals was to be found, can only be explained by the

supposition that the larve furnished with their velum were

driven unusually far into the open sea.

I turn now to the Bathybius-mud and the coccoliths. Very

soon after my return, I published in the ‘Ausland,’ No. 50, a

short notice of the discovery of these bodies at all depths in

the Adriatic Sea, from 50 fathoms downwards, with the addition

that they would no doubt be present also at less depths. I

was consequently in advance of the publication of the extended

investigations and discoveries of Giimbel, as he explained in

No. 32 of the same journal. We have now a more detailed

statement of these fine observations*, which show the extra-

ordinary diffusion of Bathybius and the coccoliths in all depths

of all seas of the actual world, and the colossal part taken by

them in building up the crust of the earth. I had also already

made the discovery that the coccoliths are strongly represented

in the raised land of Brindisi. Now, as Hiickel also nearly. at

the same time investigated the coccoliths with his usual

thoroughnesst, it might seem to be superfluous for me to go

into the same subject.

_ But as Giimbel’s work, so far as it is at present before us,

extends only to the demonstration of the presence of coccoliths

in the most various calcareous and marly deposits and in

the sediments of the present day, and to certain reactions of

Bathybius, and as I am obliged to conceive the structure of the

coccoliths differently from Hiickel in several points, and, finally,

as, from the almost inconceivable importance of the coccoliths,

any contribution to their more accurate knowledge must be

welcome, the present memoir will carry with it its own justifi-

cation.

I will first of all deal with a statement of Giimbel’s, “that

it is certainly conceivable that Bathybius takes its origin in

the sarcode of the lower animals.”’ He is led to this by the

observation, “that when the shell of calcareous-shelled Fora-

minifera is dissolved away by dilute acid, their punctate mem-

branes and granular flocks remain undissolved in the residue,

which latter possess the form and reaction of Bathybius. ‘These

remains, indeed, may just as well be the residue of the sarcode

of the Foraminifera as of our Bathybius, which had only been

deposited in the cavities of the Foraminifera, and in this way

comes again into view.” The sarcode of the Foraminifera will

* Giimbel, “Vorliiufige Mittheilungen tiber Tiefseeschlamm,” N. Jahrb.

fiir Mineral. &c. 1870, Heft 6.

+ Hiickel, “ Beitrige zur Plastidentheorie,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, vy. 3.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 363

very probably exhibit the same reactions as the protoplasm of

Bathybius ; so that I should by no means be inclined to deduce

the identity of the two bodies in other respects from such a

resemblance. But even before I had read Giimbel’s communi-

cation in the ‘Jahrbuch’ it was known to me, by direct obser-

vation, not only that empty shells of Foraminifera are filled by

Bathybius-mud, but also that living Foraminifera incept Bathy-

bius-flocks together with coccoliths, no doubt as nourishment. The

derivation of Bathybius from Foraminifera and other Protista

is quite inconceivable when we consider the quantitative pro-

portions. If we wash and strain off several pounds of Adriatic

Bathybius-roud, there remains a minute heaplet of Foraminifera.

And, further, the Bathybius-protoplasm, if supposed to originate

from Foraminifera, would necessarily become decomposed be-

fore it could collect into such incalculable masses. Bathybius

freshly taken out of the sea exhibits very sluggish movements,

more sluggish even than those which occur in the sarcodic net of

most sponges, but in other respects exactly the same phe-

nomena which may be detected in specimens preserved in

spirits of wine. This agrees exactly with my numerous com-

parative observations of fresh sponges and sponges preserved

in spirit. Preparations of the finest sarcodic nets derived from

the latter are absolutely undistinguishable, if we leave out of

consideration the sluggish displaceability, from fresh prepar-

ations just taken out of the sea. I believe, therefore, that the

further observation of the living Bathybius will furnish no par-

ticular information as to its nature.

At present the coccoliths seem to be inseparable companions

of the Bathybius-protoplasm. It is a very different question,

however, whether they merely live upon the soil of this pro-

toplasm as independent organisms, or are products of it, as

parts or organs. In what follows, an interpretation will come

out, according to which the coccoliths pass through an inde-

pendent cycle of development.

Both Huxley and Hiickel admit that there are two different,

although nearly allied, forms of coccoliths—namely, a simple

disciform kind (the discoliths), and another which presents the

form of a double disk united by a central pin (the cyatholiths).

I must decidedly affirm that this distinction does not occur,

and that rather all those forms which Hdckel has described as

perfectly developed discoliths with an outer ring are cyatholiths—

in other words, that the outer ring is nothing but the margin

of that shield which in the cyatholiths stands out better, from

its somewhat greater removal from the other parts. Thus I

have met with no supposed discolith the margin of which

could not with patience be ascertained to be a constituent of

364 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

an entire disk. I beg the reader who may have Hickel’s work

at hand to compare figures 25 (discolith) and 72 (cyatholith).

Both, when looked at from the surface, have the same appear-

ance; and even in 72, e, the margin of the larger disk appears,

like e in 25, as the outer ring. If 72 when placed on the edge

appears like figs. 33 and 62, whilst 25 in the same position gives

an outline like fig. 44, this is due solely to the fact that in the

latter case the inner circle and disk are completely concealed

by the outer basin-shaped shield.

I desired at the beginning to call attention to this important

point, as it essentially simplifies the question as to the struc-

ture of the coccoliths; and I will now pass to the special ex-

amination.

In Pl. XVI. fig. 15 a coccolith is shown from the flat or

ventral side. The individual parts are named as follows b

Hickel :—a, central granule ; b, medullar space (Markfeld) ; ¢,

medullar ring (Markring) ; d, granular ring (Kérnerring) ; @,

outer ring. I must remark that only im rare cases have I seen

the medullar ring otherwise than as in my drawing and as

Hiickel figures it. It appears to me almost without exception

as the simple contour of the medullar space, and only becomes

more shaded when the medullar space acquires a more concave

form. We now first trace the coccoliths to the development

of the granular ring, which frequently becomes a granular disk.

Numerous corpuscles with a simple or double contour, and

from 0°001 to 0-004 millim. in diameter, appear as isolated cen-

tral granules and as central granules with the medullar space

(figs. 1,2). The most important stage, however, in the deve-

lopment of the coccolith is that of the formation of the granular

ring. Hiackel characterizes this simply as a granulated zone ;

and, according to his figures, the material examined by him

was already so much altered that the composition of the

granular ring of actual spherical portions did not distinctly

appear. Bodies like fig. 3 of our plate are not unfrequent.

It consists of a lenticular central part, with a ring of from 7

to 10 balls. Hiackel also has a similar structure in his fig. 10,

which, however, according to his statement, consists of merely

sarcodic granulations. The bodies of which I am speaking

are solid, but may certainly have proceeded from a sarcodic

foundation.

Although we may remain in doubt as to this category of

corpuscles, this is no longer the case with another very frequent

form. In fig. 4 we see the central granule and medullar

space surrounded by a distinct cirelet of balls ; and from a com-

parison of a great number of specimens and stages, it appears

that this ring of globules originates in a growth and subse-

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 365

quent division of the margin of the medullar space. The

margin of the medullar space swells up; and such specimens

as fig. 5 show that the marginal swelling is not formed

uniformly, and only by degrees constitutes a perfectly closed

circlet. Almost without exception, the whole structure, at

the appearance of the circlet of balls, acquires the form of a

bowl, at the same time that there is the greatest variability in

the number of the globular portions and the size of the individual

globules.

In two cases we have nothing more formed than a mére

zone of globules or granules. This is shown in figs. 6, 7, 9,

10, 11. One case is, that only a circle of large globular por-

tions surrounds the medullar rmg. A very frequent case of

this kind is shown by fig. 6, from the fresh Bathybius, and

fig. 9, from the raised deposits near Brindisi. It is true, as

I shall show hereafter, that here also completion may be

effected by the outer ring, 7. e. the dorsal disk ; but in general

the development of the body seems to be closed with the growth

of the large globular portions; and I have no indication that

these large globules break up into smaller portions. Such bodies

as fig. 11 are excessively rare. It shows, in the circumference

of the central disk, a circlet of large celliform balls; and this

body also occurs but little altered in the deposits at Brindisi

(fig. 10). The centres in the globules of the circlet appear

quite distinctly to be condensed into a sort of nucleus, which

also makes its appearance quite definitely, although irregularly,

in the specimen trom Brindisi.

In the second case (fig. 7) we find, instead of a simple

circlet of globules, a granular zone, ¢. e. a zone in which small

globules of about the diameter of the central granule are placed

in from 2 to 4 rows side by side and partly over one another.

Both this and the above described body may, as we show

further on, cover themselves with the dorsal shield; but fre-

quently this course of further development does not occur, and

bodies are produced like fig. 8 and, more distinctly, fig. 12;

they are hemispherical. In fig. 12 we are looking into the

sphere ; fig. 13 is the appearance from the side, fig. 14 from

behind. Instead of a granular zone, a regular granular mantle

is present. I am uncertain about the observation that some-

times an entire hollow sphere is produced. How the division

into globular portions is compatible with the not unfrequent

concentric striation, is not yet clear to me (fig. 8).

I give on Pl. XVII. figs. 16 & 17 a form of the incomplete

coccolith which is not unfrequent. The central granule and

medullar space are present, the latter undoubtedly as a disk.

There is, however, no medullar ring; but what might be

366 Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

regarded as such is the actual margin of the medullar space.

The granular zone is in course of production, although it does

not appear in the whole circumference, but advances round the

margin as an excrescence starting from a particular point.

When the development of the coccolith has taken a direction

as in fig. 12, Pl. XVI., it appears to be concluded with the

granular layer. In all other cases the coccolith usually becomes

completed by the formation of a concavo-convex disk, which

generally appears homogeneous, rarely irregularly notched and

granular, and covers and more or less overarches the parts

previously formed. As already mentioned, I have most de-

cidedly ascertained that Hickel’s so- -called outer ring 1s never

in connexion with the outer margin of the granular zone, but

is only the margin of a regular shield projecting beyond

the granular zone. In every object that I succeeded in turning

and placing on its edge, I was able to trace and ascertain this

dorsal shield.

In Pl. XVI. figs. 16,17, and in Pl. XVII. most of the

figures show the character and position of the dorsal shield.

In figs. 1 and 2 the case is represented in which the central

granule has attained a perfectly excessive development. This

may furnish the explanation of a case occurring at Brindisi

(Pl XVII. fig. 18) in which not only is the central granule

elevated, but its base and the part representing the medullar

space appears granulated. ‘This coccolith is completed by a

strong granular ring. In figs. 3 and 4 (Pl. X VIL.) the aoe

granule is wanting. All these, and the other figures of disco-

liths with a dorsal shield (figs. d, 6,4, LO 12, 13, 145 05),

show individually and when compared with each other that in

the centre of the convex side of the coccolith the dorsal shield

is connected either with the medullar space itself, or with a

peg-like prolongation of the part corresponding to the central

granule. In the fresh state their union seems to be so firm,

and perhaps elastic, that the dorsal shield is scarcely ever

broken away. From the deposits at Brindisi, however, I

have repeatedly obtained coccoliths like Pl. XVII. fig. 19,

with a regular aperture in the centre of the medullar space,

which I imagine to have been produced by the breaking

away of the dorsal shield together with its pin.

From all these observations, therefore, the dorsal shield

cannot be otherwise produced than by its gradually over-

growing the other parts from the dorsal pole of the coccolith.

The observation of such intermediate stages is extremely

difficult, because, up to the period when it projects beyond the

circumference of the granular ring, it appears to adhere closely

to the dorsal surface in the form of a most delicate lamella.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 367

Pl. XVII. fig. 13 shows a coccolith from the dorsal side, and

how the granular zone projects beyond the somewhat irregular

outlines of the shield. A monstrous shield-formation may,

however, occur, as in Pl. XVII. figs. 8 and 9, in which one

half of the shield is completely adherent, whilst the other has

grown out like a tongue. Rarely the margin of the shield is

notched and so swelled as to resemble the margin of the

granular zone, as in fig. 5.

We come now to a very important, and, it seems to me,

quite unsettled question, namely that of the relation of the

coccoliths to the Bathybius-protoplasm. Are they independent

organisms? or are they organs or parts of Bathybius? In other

words, do they propagate themselves by passing through a

definite cycle of development, in which the Bathybius-proto-

plasm serves them as a soil? or does their formation occur as

particles of the protoplasm? In the first place we have to

examine whether the doubling of the central granule, with

division of the surrounding parts, which is represented by

Hickel in a series of figures, leads to any reproduction.

Hickel simply states the fact, and says only that the elliptical

discoliths are often distinguished by having a double central

granule. But the importance of the central granule seems to

be by no means great, as it is frequently wanting in otherwise

perfectly regular and well-developed coccoliths. Many cor-

puscles with fissional processes or doublings occurring in

Bathybius are either decidedly of a different nature or at least

doubtful. Thus Pl. XVI. fig. 24 may be an Alga, and fig. 19

perhaps an Alga, but might also be a double central granule

with a correspondingly divided medullar rmg. With regard

to corpuscles such as fig. 18, with a clear centre and turbid

periphery, if we consider them isolatedly, we can scarcely

make any supposition; but compared with the not unfrequent

stages of coccoliths like fig. 20, they might be brought into

connexion therewith. As we may ascertain by placing it on

its edge, Pl. XVI. fig. 20 is a decided coccolith with a perfect

dorsal shield ; the dark non-granular part represents the gra-

nular zone, and the clear spaces in it a divided medullar space

without central granules. Pl. XVI. figs. 22, 23, is unique in

my knowledge. The structure and size leave no doubt that it

is a coccolith ; but the development in height is quite unusual.

The dorsal shield has become a capsule open above; and the

two central granules appear deeply immersed in it.

When I grasp the impression produced by numerous obser-

vations, compared with the facts of the reproduction of other

low organisms, the coccolith appears to me to be an independent

living creature. That nutrition and growth are performed by

368 Dr. QO. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths.

the central parts, the granule and the medullar disk, appears

undoubtedly from their arrangement and the connexion of the

other parts with them. The dorsal shield is nothing but a

covering piece, and, notwithstanding its extent, of subordinate

importance. In the globular and granular zone, however, I

see the reproductive apparatus. In favour of this there are

several reasons. So long as, like the previous observers, we

discovered in the granular zone only quite indefinite granula-

tions, the question as to the significance of this part of the

coccolith could hardly be raised; but by the present inves-

tigation the granular zone must be placed in quite a different

light. That the formation of the coccoliths starts from cor-

puscles which vary in form and size exactly like the globular

and ellipsoidal portions of the granular zone, is easy to observe.

Exactly the same scope that we see in the foundations of the

coccoliths is repeated in the dimensions of the parts of the

granular zone, from the small globules like those we find in

coccoliths such as Pl. XVI. fig. 15, to the large lenticular

bodies in fig. 11. The former are isolated as central granules ;

the latter appear as central granules with a medullar space.

An intermediate step is formed by the globule in Pl. XVII.

figs. 1 and 3; and their perfect picture is the central glo-

bule in Pl. XVI. fig. 3. The extraordinary variability of the

mature coccoliths will therefore be in accordance with an

equally wide scope in their foundations ; and the multifarious

forms of the coccolith-cycle, still by no means exhausted by

Hiickel and myself, prove (notwithstanding the identity of

discoliths and cyatholiths) that we have to do with nothing

less than a fixed species. But when we have once accepted

the notion that the corpuscles of the granular zone are the

spores of the coccoliths, the appearance of many coccoliths is

explained by it, as, for example, Pl. XVII. figs. 6, 10, and 14.

In fact we often see, instead of the granular zone, which is

elsewhere so distinct, an irregular ring or an empty disk-margin.

For this I know no other explanation than that the granules

have fallen out, leaving behind them that margin belonging to

the medullar space from which the growth and production of the

corpuscles of the granular zone took place. It is certainly

remarkable that specimens such as Pl. XVII. fig. 14 are rare ;

but they show quite evidently a retrogression and degradation,

which is expressed in the brittleness of the central disk and

the shrinking of the dorsal shield. It will be objected that

this 1s incompatible with the apparently uninterrupted accu-

mulation of the coccoliths. But m opposition to this it may

be said that the fossil coccoliths are still but very little inves-

tigated. The form with a finely granular zone (Pl. XVI.

Dr. O. Schmidt on Coccoliths and Rhabdoliths. 369

fig. 15), which is so remarkably abundant among living cocco-

liths, I can hardly detect in the deposits at Brindisi; but it

came most prominently into consideration with regard to

reproduction. The objection is therefore not serious.

My supposition, however, as to the independence and repro-

duction of the coccoliths, is established by the discovery of a

second corpuscle accompanying Bathybius, which is much

simpler and clearer, and consequently easier to check in its

individuality. It also presents certain points of comparison

with the coccoliths. We call it Rhabdolithes (Pl. XVII. figs.

20-35). Its first foundation is a little rod, which may be traced

of all sizes from 0:001 to 0:005 millim. The developed forms

range between 0°0054 and 0°004 millim. inlength. Together

with the cylindrical rods there occur about an equal number

which are thicker at one end than at the other (fig. 22). They

then acquire a button-like or globular terminal inflation (figs.

21, 23) ; and around this is produced a circlet of globules (fig.

24 &c.) which rarely exceed six in number.

The usual form of the fully developed corpuscle is as shown

in figs. 31 and 27, the parts of the circlet becoming cylindrical

or bacillar ; and one can hardly doubt that they are destined to

be thrown off for reproduction. In their size and whole

appearance they agree with the above-mentioned smallest

bacillar corpuscles. Forms such as figs. 29 and 32 are more

rare, and are produced, as we may ascertain by turning and

twisting the object, by the portions of the circlet being pressed

closer together. We may always distinguish in them the

individual globular or bacillar parts when we succeed in placing

the corpuscle upon the vertex which has no circlet. In the

shaft of the larger and especially of the clavate specimens, we

observe a fine streak, the indication of a central canal, as

appears with certainty from cases such as fig. 30. Not unfre-

quently also we have forms such as fig. 26, i which the

main outline is surrounded by a very pale external contour,

and the appearance is produced as if the rod were a larger

cavity. Figs. 33, 34,35 show rare irregular structures. Thus

in fig. 33 we see a sprout in the neighbourhood of the non-

circleted end; in fig. 34 a piece of the circlet has been pro-

duced in the prolongation of the axis of the shaft; and in

fiz. 35 the circlet has been produced above its usual point of

attachment.

In all the samples of mud from the Adriatic which contain

Bathybius and the coccoliths, rhabdoliths also occur in count-

less quantities, so that a complete view of them may be

obtained in almost every microscopic portion. They are just

as well preserved as the coccoliths in the elevated deposits of

370 Dr. A. Giinther on a new Species of Lizard.

Brindisi; and their composition of an organic formation and

of carbonate of lime may be demonstrated just as well as for

the coccoliths. Now, if we compare the granular zone of the

coccoliths with the circlet of globules of the rhabdoliths, and the

central disk (medullar space) of the coccoliths, as the matrix of

the globules, with the shaft of the rhabdoliths, and consider that,

as I believe I have shown, the dorsal disk or covering piece of

the coccoliths is of but little importance, we must recognize the

most intimate relationship between these calcareous organisms,

notwithstanding their difference of form. 'To regard the rhab-

doliths as organs or form-constituents of the Bathybius-proto-

plasm we have not the least reason; and thus, it seems to me,

the last doubt is removed, as to whether the coccoliths are

independent creatures. ‘The two bodies remain no less interest-

ing than they did before, when the coccoliths passed merely

as the tokens of the mysterious Bathybius. ‘The origin and

significance of this latter organic material are still far from

being explained. As I have already indicated, it seems to

me that the supposition that the Bathybius-protoplasm is the

residue of other low organic creatures must be completely

rejected. It is, however, no Protiston or Moneron in the sig-

nification now current, according to which all these simplest

organisms have a limitation in space and a development. A

living creature of unlimited extension is so strongly in contra-

diction to our present notions of life and organization, that our

conceptions and ideas must first adapt themselves to it.

LI.—Notice of a new Species of Lizard (Kumeces albofascio-

latus) from North Australia. By Dr. A. Gintuer, F.R.S.

Tue British Museum has recently received from Mr. Krefft a

specimen of a very large species of Humeces from Northern

Australia, which appears to be undescribed and may be cha-

racterized thus :—

Eumeces albofasciolatus.

A supranasal shield is present, but on one side it is confluent

with the nasal behind the nostril; the nostril itself is so large

as to be partly formed by the supranasal.

The lower eyelid is scaly. Palate entirely toothless, the

palatal notch being considerably behind the level of the orbit.

The single prefrontal forms a suture with the rostral and

vertical, which is very long, as long as the occipitals together ;

a pair of anterior occipitals ; central occipital elongate ; occipi-

tals bordered behind by four large scales. Nine upper labials,

the two posterior low. Opening of the ear not denticulated.

On a Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. 371

Thirty-five longitudinal series of scales round the trunk;

sixty transverse series between the fore and hind limbs. Ten

preanals, scarcely larger than the neighbouring scales. Sub-

caudal scales scarcely larger than those on the back of the

tail.

Limbs somewhat feeble ; the fore legs extend to the eye when

stretched forwards, the hind legs not quite halfway up towards

the axil. The third and fourth fingers equal in length, but

longer than the second. The third hind toe a little shorter

than the fourth and a little longer than the fifth.

Upperand lateral parts blackish brown, with irregular bluish-

white, band-like transverse spots, one or two scales broad.

Tail and legs without such bands. Lower parts uniform

white.

The specimen is 63 inches long to the vent, the greater part

of the tail being lost.

in. lin.

Distance of the snout from the eye .......... OF 25

# as STH as Sets Schacte i) 2

a ae aml 2 sh Jaki 212

os s vent Somos Vi

Benton ObAGte My: can atom a tae ee ee 1 43

ep LMG TUNERS ee ss trace ON cra ee ee 0” 38

| ania (oI hint) oe etc aay tart are Rack ee kisi ak)

55 SECON HOG. eM ee cea ele eee 0 4

H AC POG! eater ae area re 0 6

5 POUMCH COR, ee ete ae ne O 64

af HUES DOO Re ais ee a ees oe ee 0 5

LII.—Dredging-Excursion to Iceland in June and July 1872.

By T. A. VERKRUZEN.

HAvineG relinquished my first idea of paying a second visit

to Norway, where I had had an excursion last year of so much

interest, I left London about the middle of June for Granton

Harbour, Edinburgh, and went thence by the steamer ‘Queen’

to Reykjavik, where we arrived after a voyage of about ninety-

five hours—perhaps the quickest passage made there, the wind

being all the time in our favour. I stayed a month in the

island, had a ride to the Geyser, besides several shorter excur-

sions, and employed the remainder of my time in dredging and

exploring the shores of the Bay of Reykjavik. I had consider-

able difficulty in obtaining good boatmen, the Icelanders not

being accustomed to the labour of dredging, and tiring after a

few hours of exertion. All circumstances considered, however,

I managed, by good pay &c., to get my dredging done tolerably

well; and encouraged by a friend to communicate the result

312 Mr. T. A. Verkriizen on a

of my labours to the conchological world, I now have much

pleasure in doing so, trusting it may prove of some interest.

I returned from Reykjavik towards the end of July, when our

voyage back to Granton Harbour was performed in about five

days and five nights, and took consequently nearly a day anda

night longer than the outward passage. I much regretted my

want of opportunity to visit likewise the more important

northern part of that most interesting island, but should be

happy to do so under favourable circumstances, as no doubt

there we should meet with a decided, and perhaps highly

interesting, arctic fauna.

My shells have been kindly verified by J. Gwyn Jeffreys,

Esq., F.R.8., &c., who has obligingly assisted me in deter-

mining the species which had hitherto not come under my

notice.

List of Mollusca

dredged and collected in the Bay of Reykjavik, Faxa Fjérdur,

Iceland, in 20 to 36 fathoms (ground mostly stony with sea-

plants, in parts muddy sandy), in July 1872, by T. A. Ver-

kriizen.

1. Anomia ephippium, Linné. Small; from between roots of sea-

plants.

: , var. sguamula, L. Small; from leaves of sea-plants.

. Pecten islandicus, Miller. Not plentiful, and difficult to obtain.

. Mytilus edulis, L. Abundant and common.

modiolus, L. Rather plentiful ; occasionally very large.

, var. ovata, Jeffreys. Now and then met with.

. Modiolaria corrugata, Stimpson. The young plentiful, adults

rare.

8. discors, var. semilevis, Jeffr. (levigata, Gray). A fine live

specimen, though it got crushed in the dredge.

9. Crenella decussata, Montagu (cicercula, Moller). Abundant.

10. Nucula tenuis, Mont. Only five young specimens obtained.

11. Leda pernula, Mill. Moderately plentiful ; large specimens and

adults rarer.

12. Awvinus fleaxuosus, Mont. Sparingly.

13. —— , var. Gouldii, Philippi. More plentiful.

14. Cardium echinatum, L. Rather scarce; adults of a thinner

texture and smaller than British specimens.

15. —— fasciatum, Mont. Not common.

16. islandicum, L. Young and middle sizes pretty numerous,

adults scarce.

aly gronlandicum, Chemnitz. Young and middle sizes pretty

numerous, adults scarce.

18. Cyprina islandica, L. Not common in the bay.

19. Astarte sulcata, DaCosta, var. elliptica, Brown. Rather scarce ;

some approach the American variety of wndata, Gould.

ID op oto

Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. ate

20. Astarte compressa, Mont. Abundant.

21. borealis, Ch. (arctica, Gray). Rather plentiful, though

much scarcer than the Jast.

22. Tellina calearia, Ch. Young and middle sizes abundant, fine

adult specimens scarce.

23. Mactra solida, L. Scarce.

24, -—— , var. elliptica, Brown. Similar to the last; a few more

' of these.

25. Scrobicularia nitida, Mill. Pretty abundant.

prismatica, Mont. A few amongst the last.

27. Thracia truncata, Br. About half a dozen obtained.

28. Mya truncata, L. Plenty of young, the adults only in odd valves.

29. Saaicava rugosa, L. Not common.

, var. arctica, L. A few among the last.

31. Dentalium striolatum, St. A few only obtained.

é entalis, L., var. infundibulum, Lee. One dead specimen.

33. Chiton albus, L. Rather abundant.

ruber (Lowe), L. Middling plentiful.

: marmoreus, Fabricius. Not scarce.

36. Helcion pellucidum, L. A few only obtained.

37. Tectura testudinalis, Mill, Plentiful and fine, my largest

measuring about 1} inch (nearly 30 millims.) long.

38. , var. pallida, Verkriizen. Colour white, all but the

centre or dorsal scar, sometimes exhibiting a clouded wreath of

a reddish-brown colour, or other ornamentation, in the inside, with

awhite margin, and sometimes a plain colouring, but without the

longitudinal rays of the typical species. This variety also occurs

in Norway ; I am not aware whether it is hkewise met with on

the north British coasts ; not finding it named, I have proposed

the above designation for it.

39. virginea, Mill. Rather plentiful.

40. , var. lactea, Jeffreys. A few specimens.

41. Lepeta ceca, Mull. Not common. Rather a small form; the

apex sharp and prominent.

42. Punctwra noachina, L. Only two specimens, and a fragment of

a third.

43. Trochus tumidus, Mont. Rather abundant.

44, gronlandicus, Ch. Of a fine rose colour, very beautiful ;

scarce.

45.

46.

vation.

47. Molleria (Jeftr.) costulata, MO. Rather scarce; mostly dead

shells, a few with operculum.

48. Lacuna divaricata, Fabr. Pretty abundant.

49. , var. canalis, Mont. Similar to last.

50. Littorina obtusata, L., var. palliata, Say (=limata, Lovén).

Common colours. Plentiful on sea-plants on the Eider-Duck

Island in the bay.

, var. 1, darkest olive (nearly black). Abundant.

helicinus, Fabr. Only one specimen got.

cinereus, Couthouy. One dead specimen, in good preser-

374. Mr. T. A. Verkriizen on a

Littorina obtusata, var. 2, middle olive. Similar to last.

, var. 3, light olive. Not quite so plentiful.

, var. 4, yellow. Scarce.

The olive varieties have purple or plum-coloured throats; the

yellow varieties have yellow throats.

, var. 5, banded, various colours. Not common.

, var. 6, chequered. Similar to the last.

, var. 7, mottled. More plentiful among the common

colours, though prettily mottled or clouded specimens are

scarce.

rudis, Maton. Common colours. Abundant.

, var. 1, grey. Less common, especially fine examples.

, var. 2, white, brown throats. Plentiful, though

fine specimens rather rarer.

, var. 3, cream, orange throats. Rather scarce.

, var. 4, red. Now and then occurring.

——,var.5, ribbed. Sameas the last, amongst any of the

varieties and type.

, var. 6, grey-and-white banded. Plentiful ; fine spe-

cimens scarcer.

, var. 7, coloured-banded. Not frequently occurring.

, var. 8, chequered. Not frequently occurring.

, var. 9, mottled. Not frequently occurring.

52. Rissoa striata, J. Adams. Perhaps about two dozen obtained,

mostly dead shells.

53. Skenea planorbis, Fabr. Two specimens.

54. Odostomia insculpta, Mont. Fewer than fissoa striata.

55. unidentata, Mont. Only one obtained, a dead shell.

56. Natica islandica, Gmelin. A few only (dead shells) washed on

shore.

57.

dl.

gronlandica (Beck), Moll. Young and middle sizes pretty

plentiful, adults scarce.

58. affinis, Gm. (clausa, Sowerby). Similar to the last, perhaps

rather scarcer.

59. Velutina levigata, Pennant. A few only obtained.

60. Trichotropis borealis, Broderip & Sowerby. Like the last ; some

fine specimens.

61. Admete viridula, Fabr. About twenty dredged; mostly fine

specimens, my largest about 17 millims. long and 9 wide.

62. Aporrhais pes-pelecani, L. A fragment (the spire) of one adult,

and four young.

63. Purpura lapillus, L. Common colours, plain. Very abundant

on piers and rocks.

64. , var. 1, orange-colour. Occasionally met with among

the last.

65. , var. 2, banded. Same as last.

66. , var. 8, ribbed. Occasionally amongst any of the

preceding.

, var. 4, imbricata, Lamarck. Rare, especially the

fine specimens.

Dredging-Excursion to Iceland. Sia

68. Buccinum undatum, L. Shape similar to British ; spire rather

longer in proportion, waves and spiral ribs rather coarse and

strongly produced. All of these were dredged in deep water.

, var. planum, Verkr. Shape conical, spire shorter

than in typical form ; mouth proportionally longer ; whorls flatter ;

suture shallow; waves slight and disappearing on last whorl,

sometimes on the two or three last ; spiral ribs indistinct, except

on intermediate forms; texture thin and more brittle, plain;

colour a purplish olive-grey, with dark purplish-brown throat,

the intermediate forms generally of a lighter hue. This variety

occurred in one to four feet water at lowest ebb-tide, near the

shore; none of these were dredged in deep water.

70. Trophon truncatus, Strom, Rather scarce.

file clathratus, L. Similar to the last, though more frequently

met with.

ae:

69.

, var. Gunneri, Lov. This form occurs perhaps the

most of the irae. though all are rather scarce.

73. Fusus despectus, L., var. tornata, Gould. Only three dredged.

74. Pleurotoma ee Mont. Not common ; fine specimens; my

largest 21 millims. (nearly inch) long, and 11 millims. (nearly

2 inch) wide.

70. Trevelyana, Turton. A few only obtained.

76. pyramidalis, Str. More frequent, still rather scarce ; fine

specimens rare.

77. violacea, Mighels & C. B. Adams. Young rather plentiful,

the older ones not frequent.

78. bicarinata, Couthouy. About half a dozen young shells got,

mostly dead.

79. Utriculus Gouldvi, Couthouy. Pretty plentiful, though mostly

dead shells.

80. hyalinus, Turton. Only three specimens obtained.

81. Actwon tornatilis, L. One young dead specimen.

82. Philine scabra, Mill. A few specimens only.

83. Doris bilamellata, L. Four pretty specimens from under a stone

at low water.

Conspicuous by their absence in the places where I dredged

and collected were :—Brachiopoda, Pecten (except islandicus),

Lucina borealis, Cardium edule, Dentalium entalis and others,

Patellavulgata, Littorina littorea, and other species sofrequently

met with in Norway and on other northern coasts, though I

doubt not but some of them will occur in other parts of Iceland.

Should any one have a wish to inspect my Icelandic collec-

tion, I shall be happy to show the same on receiving a previous

intimation, for the purpose of arranging the time.

The following circumstance may, I trust, not be without

interest to collecting conchologists. One morning the boy I

had engaged brought me several Patelle, which genus I had

not met with near Reykjavik, and one thick Pur, ‘pura lapillus,

376 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

different from those I had found in great numbers. He spoke

but very little Danish, and it was with difficulty I got to un-

derstand from him that hehad obtained them from aship. Going

there with him, I saw them unloading sand brought as ballast

from Great Britain. It was fortunate I found this out, as [

might otherwise have taken them for Icelandic shells from a

different part of the island. Thisis one more instance showing

how shells may be transported to countries where they do not

occur in a living state, thus causing errors against which

conchologists cannot be too much on their guard.

2 Ampton Place, W.C.

LIII.— On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Loven.

[Continued from p. 298. ]

THE explanation just given of the development and changes

of the ambulacra in the Latistelle shows that during the growth

of the Hchinus the primary plates of both rows, as if borne by

a slowly flowing stream, are in motion from the point near the

eye-plates where they make their appearance, as from its

source, down towards the peristome. There the auricles

meet, which belong to the masticatory apparatus, not to the

corona, with their bases firmly attached to the inside of the

oldest plates. It is by their resistance that, in the Latistellee,

the peristome becomes the fixed boundary of the corona towards

the buccal membrane, and that, during their growth and

the simultaneous downward pressure of the primary plates,

the pressure originates of which the consequences are the

regular displacement, shifting, and firm coalescence of the

plates, which renders the position of the pores apparently

confused.

The Angustistelle, or Cidaride, present different conditions.

In them all the primary plates of the ambulacra are entire

plates, continue so always, and distinctly separated from each

other by sutures, which are not effaced by any coalescence.

They are consequently throughout life like the primary plates

in the young of the Latistelle in their first foundation, and

form a narrow, single, and uninterrupted sequence, of nearly

the same width, which descends gradually in the direction of

the margin of the corona, between the margins of the large

interradial plates, with regular flexures, which are not original

curves, but determined by the margins of the interradial plates.

There the bases of the auricles present no resistance; they

remain entirely upon the interradia, by the side of the track of

the ambulacra, which they leave so open that there is no

Prof. S$. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 377

obstacle to cause compression or enlargement in width. On

the contrary, when a primary plate in the ambulacrum reaches

the margin of the corona, the suture which previously united

it with the next following plate separates, it becomes free, and

it moves out into the buccal membrane as if out of the mouth

of a river (fig. 2). At the same time a change takes place in

Fig. 2.

Cidaris hystrix, third ambulacrum: the ninth plate in b has scarcely

separated ; its fellow in a is already free and converted into a lamella.

its form. The curved process on the inside of each plate,

which is more elevated the nearer we approach the peristome,

is absorbed when the plate separates, and disappears quickly.

The plate wears away at its lower margin, and its radiolar

tubercle diminishes ; but it increases greatly in breadth towards

the interradium, and also in depth, and thus becomes attenuated

into a lamella, or scale, which lies with its lower margin over

its predecessor. The pores thus come gradually to be situated

lower and lower, become drawn out transversely, and change

their position relative to the longitudinal axis. In the rows of

scales produced in this manner in the buccal membrane of the

Cidaride, the pair which most closely approach the mouth are

the oldest plates, the others, each in its order, have separated

themselves from the corona, and gradually increased the num-

ber of lamellz in each row.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 27

378 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

The great distinction between the Cidaride and the Latistellee

consists in this dissimilar movement of the ambulacra. Thus,

in the former, the ambulacrum breaks up at the peristome into

its elements, the primary plates, and these become converted

into free imbricated lamelle ; and this is in complete opposition

to the homologous movement which, in the Latistelle, con-

cludes with their union into large plates, which in the peri-

stome coalesce into a solid rmg. And nevertheless the same

law prevails here most distinctly as in all other Hchinoidea.

A careful examination shows that, of the oldest scales (which

immediately surround the mouth), those which belong to series

La, U.a, U1. 6, IV.a, V.6 are somewhat smaller than those

which constitute series I. 6, II.6, III.a, IV.6, V.a. If we

trace the rows upwards towards the corona, we find that the

former throughout cover the latter with their lateral margins ;

and when we come to the corona we see that this position of

theirs is due to the fact that the plates of the former series

come later to the margin, and do not begin to separate until

after their fellows of the latter series are already completely

free and begin to arrange themselves in the imbricated rows

of the buccal membrane ; and this difference is to be recognized

throughout the whole ambulacrum. Of each pair of plates,

that which belongs to the series I. a-V.6 follows that of the

series I. b-V.a; and of the newly formed pair close to the eye-

plate, the plate belonging to the former series is always less

developed than that of the latter series, or even still uncom-

menced. In a Cidaris hystrix of 28 millims. diameter the

number of plates from the mouth to the vertex is as follows :—

THO Ail DSC SPS stra sn ie 54. rive Sime) BY teats Nit cape B= 55

pre Loeeeere gts stiles 542 fey LLG Oe ee eaters eee 552

PMUUL CD oat ek oe toes 54 apie) 0 Uy aaa dae eA bas rt 544

Se slate tajeidisitie nos 56 bys Wis Oh is aelaches ry eee 564

WAN estas ota nase viene 56 Peek Mail vansteck convenes 563

If we compare with the Latistelle the different groups of

irregular Echinoidea, Hchinoneus comes nearest to them in the

structure of the ambulacra. All the pores are double pores.

As in the Spatangide and the Cassidulide, the peristomial

plates of series I.a—V.b have two pores (that is to say, they

consist hypothetically of two early coalescent primary plates),

and those of the series [.b-V.a@ only of one; and in the

former the lowest pore is marginal and broken, and frequently

has its upper tube obliterated, as in the Echinide. But the

buccal membrane is without pore-plates. Although the row

of pores is simple, entire and half plates alternate with each

other in regular order, which does not continue the same from

the vertex to the peristome. The newly formed plates are

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 379

entire; then they arrange themselves in groups of three, two

half aboral and an entire adoral. Gradually the upper aboral

plate increases and becomes entire, and, together with the

adoral plate, embraces the intermediate half plate. But these

groups do not unite into large plates in the neighbourhood of

the peristome by the coalescence of the sutures as in the

Latistelle. Hchinoneus again agrees with the latter in that

the alteration of the plates, which is a consequence of their

growth during the accession of new ones from above, takes

place in a uniform manner throughout the whole ambulacrum,

which, moreover, throughout, from the peristome to the vertex,

bears no other than cylindrical tentacles with sucking-disks, im

which there is a ring of calcareous network. This is not the

case in the other three groups of irregular Echinoidea, in which

the branchize have a portion (in the Cassidulide and Clypeas-

tridee in all the five ambulacra, in the Spatangide in most

cases in the four paired ones)—a portion which during

growth acquires the leaf-like form to which the name of

petalum is given, whilst the lateral plates nearly retain their

first form, and the buccal area, with its peculiar tentacles, is

gradually compressed and altered. While in the Echinide

and Clypeastride the peristome in its firm union with the

masticatory apparatus continues circular or five-cornered as it

was from the beginning, although in some (e. g. Hchinometra

or Lchinocidarts) it deviates therefrom with age in some

degree, its character in the Cassidulide and Spatangide,

which do not possess a masticatory apparatus, is quite dif-

ferent. In both it alters its form during growth ; how it may

be in Hchinoneus remains to be ascertained. When a Cassi-

dulus is still quite young, the peristome is pentagonal, with

rounded angles, and the ambulacra occupy larger portions of

its margin than the interradia, with the exception of the

labrum ; in full-grown examples the conditions are reversed,

inasmuch as the interradial peristomial plates, especially

in 2 and 3, become swelled up during growth, and give

the pentagon the incurved sides which are characteristic of

this group, and between which the first plates of the ambulacra,

compressed into a wedge-shape, enclose the projecting angles.

But the mouth, gradually elongated transversely, remains in

the middle of its naked membrane. Connected with this trans-

formation of the peristome are the compression and displace-

ment of the primary plates situated near the peristome (which

take place with age), and that considerable alteration of their

original relations by which that arrangement is produced

which Desor calls phyllode. We have still to investigate the

origin and progress of this in individuals of different ages.

380 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

Of the living Spatangide, by far the greatest number have

the four paired ambulacra like each other in closing with

petala towards the vertex, whilst the unpaired anterior ambu-

lacrum has its peculiar structure, and in one genus, Echino-

cardium, even the alternation of entire and half plates, which

does not occur elsewhere in this family. Not more than two

genera can be found which form an exception to this: one of

them is Lissonotus fragilis, A. Agass., from the great depths

between Cuba and Florida; the other was discovered by

Smitt and Ljungman during the expedition of the corvette

‘ Josephine’ im the year 1869, off Villa Franca, in the Azores,

at a depth of 200-300 fathoms. A resemblance which this

Spatangid presents at the first glance from above to certain

forms of Ananchytes ovata, leads us to name it Paleotropus ;

the species may be called P. Josephine. All five ambulacra

lie in the plane of the test, without the slightest depression,

and are apetalous ; so that they all finish similarly towards the

vertex—in this way, that their five or six youngest plates form a

simple and narrow row, such as we see nowhere else, in which,

however, the alternating position of the pores indicates to

which side each plate is to be referred. The rows of the

trivium agree completely ; the unpaired one is not depressed,

and the dorsal arching of the test is uniformly within the

obovate circumference. ‘These characters differ greatly from

those of the living Spatangide ; others agree with them. The

mouth has a projecting lobe, and the somewhat depressed

posterior end of the test an infraanal fasciola. The genital

apertures are two in number, corresponding to the posterior

paired interradia 1 and 4. The eye-plates are very distinct ;

but the vertical plates cannot be distinguished; the right

anterior one, however, has a bounded, irregular orifice, which

is the madreporite. The length of the animal described is

11°7 millims., and its breadth 9:1 millims. The presence of a

fasciola and a developed labrum unites Paleotropus with the

Spatangidee, if we exclude from their character the petala and

the difference of the unpaired frontal ambulacrum from the rest.

There is no living Spatangid destitute of tentacular pores in

any of the plates of the frontal ambulacrum. In all, its

oldest ventral plates, within the buccal area, are like those of

the other ambulacra; and the younger ones, situated nearer the

vertex, have more or less distinet double pores, the elongated

apertures being closed in the middle by a portion growing out

from the margins,

Because the Spatangide in general do not grow to an equal

extent in the different radii, but most frequently more in the

direction of the bivium than of the trivium, their ambu-

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 381

lacral plates, which, except the peristomial ones I. a—V.d, are

always simple and primary, behave in a different manner. As

in all the irregular Kchinoidea, the corona has a fixed boundary

in the peristome. Many young Spatangide a few millimetres

in length, which are more rounded than the older ones, and

have the mouth nearer the middle, have the peristome pent-

agonal, and so nearly equilateral, that in a still earlier stage

it was probably completely so (see woodcut, fig. 3). Its sides

all lie in the plane of the test, or are just sunk within it, as

in LHemiaster &c. In accordance with this form of the

peristome, is the part taken in its formation by the ambulacra

and interradia. In opposition to what occurs in Cassidulus,

the former occupy only a small portion, enclosing the angles of

the peristome ; the latter, which are much broader, and nearly

of equal breadth among themselves, form the greatest parts of

its sides. The mouth is now in the middle of the buccal

membrane. ‘he considerable change which the peristome

subsequently undergoes consists in its ambulacral plates in-

reasing in breadth, especially in the trivium, whilst the

peristomial plates of the paired interradia do not increase in

breadth in the same proportion, especially those of the posterior

pair ; and that of the unpaired interradium (the labrum) becomes

widened, shoots forth, and arches itself, at the same time that the

mouth, having become elongated by degrees, gradually moves

backward, so that the greater part of the plated buccal mem-

brane soon comes to lie in front of it, and only a narrow border

behind it, and this is concealed by the projecting lobes. When

the individual is full-grown the ambulacra of the trivium near

the peristome are broader than the interradia, with the exception

of the labrum; in Breynia the peristomial plates of the paired

interradia 2 and 3, 1 and 4, are even entirely expelled from

the peristome, and in Atrapus grandis, Mera atropos, and Mi-

craster cor-anguinum those of the pair 1 and 4. It is especially

the paired ambulacra of the trivium II. and IV., of which the

peristomial plates, longer than broad and nearly wedge-

shaped in the young, in old examples are broader than long,

and so depressed that, while in small individuals of Brissopsis

lyrifera 4°6 millims. in length the anterior margins of the

peristomial plates in the interradia 1 and 4 regularly cor-

respond to two plates in the ambulacra II. and IV., they

receive three plates in older individuals. Thus here also a

movement takes place in the ambulacra towards the peristome,

between the interradia. It is only a little less in degree in the

unpaired ambulacrum. In the bivium it is otherwise. Here it

is the two oldest plates that are the most pressed ; the following

ones, even in the older individuals, preserve their elongated

382 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

form. A different condition stands in connexion with this.

Most of the living genera of Spatangide have an infraanal

fasciola, which forms below the periproctium an oval ring,

within which, as Johannes Miiller first observed in Brissopsis

lyrifera, long tentacular cirri come forth, the pores of which,

therefore, are also situated within its circumference. At the

same time the case is that, in all the genera furnished with

an infraanal fasciola, in both the inner rows of the bivium the

sixth plate and some of the following ones—namely, two in

Paleotropus, Spatangus, and Meoma (which has an incomplete

fasciola),three in Maretia, Echinocardium, Lovenia, Brissopsis,

and Eupatagus, four in Brissus, Kleinia, Plagionotus, and Xan-

thobrissus, and even six in Breynia—have a different form

from the others, inasmuch as they are drawn out towards the

middle line of the test, and form together a produced wedge.

In the seventh and following of these plates, moreover, the

tentacular pore has so shifted that it comes within the fasciola.

In all these genera it is also the rule that the first six plates of

the inner rows of the bivium correspond with the outer mar-

gins of the labrum, sternum, and episternum, the three ventral

parts of the unpaired interradium, and that the episternal pair

of plates forms, with the nearest pair of abdominal plates on

both sides, an angle (angulus episternalis) which receives this

wedge of produced plates, and in different genera is more or

less deep or open. <A young Brissopsis lyrifera, 4°6 millims.

in length, presents in these respects the same characters as the

full-grown individuals; in both it is the fifth ambulacral

plate that corresponds to the angle between the sternum and

episternum, and the sixth to and with the ninth that enter the

episternal angle ; and hence it is clear that in this part of the

bivium during growth no shifting takes place in these plates

in the direction of the peristome ; but we rather see the ambu-

lacral plates here, except those of the peristome, become

somewhat elongated with age. In the genera which are

destitute of a fasciola infraanalis (such as Schizaster fragilis,

Desoria, Agassizia, Abatus, Atrapus, and Hemiaster) the

plates corresponding to the scarcely perceptible angulus epi-

sternalis, which is not always alike on both sides, are but

little or not at all produced im a direction towards the middle

line of the test, but have almost completely the form of the pre-

ceding; and the number of plates of the bivium which occupy

the same length as the three ventral parts of the unpaired

interradium is indeterminate,—in Schizaster seven, in Atrapus

six, in Abatus seven and a half on the left side and six and a

half on the right, in Desortva eight and a half, in Agassizia

six and a half. This irregularity is most considerable in

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 383

Palewostoma, Gray, at least in young individuals; I have no

full-grown ones at my disposal. In the whole of this group

consequently the arrangement, especially in the interradia, is

much less strict and symmetrical than in those with infraanal

fasciole. These latter seem to prevail among the recent

Spatangide, but were apparently represented only in the

genus Micraster during the Cretaceous period, the other

genera of which either want the fasciola or have it peripetalous

or composite, and with this, we may assume, a less regular

arrangement of the plates.

A strongly depressed form of body, the proximity of the two

surfaces (ventral and dorsal) to each other, their union internally

by means of processes, pillars, arches, and chambers, the dis-

tribution of the very numerous tentacular pores even upon the

interradia, the madreporite, which, in most, occupies all the five

apical plates, the position of the genital pores not always in the

apical plates, but separate from them in the interradia—all

these are characters which, with others, distinguish the Cly-

peastridee from the other irregular Echinoidea. On another

side they approach the regular Echinoidea by the presence of

jaws, by the small alterability in form of the peristome during

growth, which is dependent upon this, and its central position

in the ventral surface, opposite to the pentagon of the vertical

and eye-plates in the dorsal surface, in which only the abnormal

Dendraster and some few others present any deviation. When

full-grown, moreover, they have, in many genera, all the five

ambulacra alike ; whilst in others the bivium, to a certain ex-

tent, becomes apparent early, or gradually, by the movements

and changes in the form and size of the plates, which are more

considerable here during growth than in other Echinoidea.

L. Agassiz and Johannes Miiller observed how, in the Clype-

astride, the corona simplifies itself towards the mouth, how the

plates increase more in breadth than in length (as had already

been noticed by Philippi in Lchinus), and how this applies most

to the ambulacral plates, which are imserted into each other.

In the fully developed state Hchinocyamus pusillus and

Laganum depressum, both of which have all the five interradia

connected in an uninterrupted sequence of plates, are regular,

with all the five ambulacra similar, and, with the exception of

the periproctium, essentially also all the interradia—as also

Encope Valenciennest and EL. Stokest, Clypeaster rosaceus and

Stolonoclypus prostratus, in which, im all the ambulacra of both

bivium and trivium, plate 2 in the former and plates 2 and 3

in the latter are so enlarged in breadth that by means of them,

in their outer angles, all the ambulacra touch each other, form

a complete circle, and shut off plate 2 and the following ones

384 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

of the interradia from plate 1, which takes part in the forma~

tion of the peristome, which here, as in all these genera, is

complete, 7. e. composed of ten ambulacral plates and five in-

terradial plates.

Irregular forms, with a bivium which differs from the

trivium, are Mellita (hexapora) and Rotula (Rumphit), im

which plates 2 in I. a and V.é become enlarged inwards, and

therefore do not interrupt the unpaired interradium, of which

the sequence of plates is continuous; whilst the former in the

trivium and in I.6 and V.a has plates 2 and 3, and the latter

plate 2 in the trivium and plates 2 and 3 in I. 0. and V.a, so

dilated that they form a ring which is open only at the un-

paired interradium, and by which the sequence of plates in the

four paired interradia is interrupted and in each of them peristo-

mial plate 1 separated from the following ones. Lehinarach-

nius parma and Lobophora are irregular in a contrary way; im

them plates 2 in I. a and V.d are more dilated than those in

the trivium and in I. and V.a, so that the unpaired inter-

radium is interrupted in a much greater degree than the paired

ones. All these also have the peristome complete, composed

of ten ambulacral and five interradial plates. Arachnovdes is

singular in having the oldest ambulacral plates so strongly

dilated in breadth that in all five interradia plate 1 has dis-

appeared from the peristome, which consists only of the ten

first ambulacral plates, forming with the two or three following

ones a broad connected ring, which throws the interradia far

away. But even here the bivium makes itself felt, although

in a small degree. Between plates 2 in I.a and V. d there is

a little space left open for two very small and compressed

plates of the unpaired interradium.

Thus, whilst in the Echinide, Hehinoneus, and the Cassi-

dulide the test is still nearly regular and regularly divided

into ambulacra and interradia, and in the Spatangide the

former only rarely predominate so as to displace the latter from

the peristome, in the Clypeastride the preponderance of the

ambulacra is the rule, and in most of them the interradia are

therefore interrupted. It is of importance to ascertain whether

these peculiarities pertain to the earliest ages or make their

appearance during growth.

A Mellita hexapora 6°5 millims. long has great distance

between the rows I. a and V. 4, so that the interradium between

them lies free and broader than in the others; but plates 2 in I.d

and V.a of the bivium and in the whole of the trivium have

already become so widened that they form a connected circle

which excludes the following plates from the peristomial in-

terradial plate 1. It is, however, only at a still larger size

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 385

that plate 2 also is so dilated that it enters into this circle ; and

this increase indicates that when of a less size than 6°5 millims.

Mellite: may have all its ambulacra separate. This is actually

the case in Kehinarachnius parma. A young individual of

this species, 6°5 millims. in length, has all five ambulacra

similar; and their plates 2 are not yet broad enough to attect

the form of the interradia, all of which are free and connected

in uninterrupted sequence. But at a length of 384 millims.

plates 2 of 1. a and V.é in the bivium have so increased as to

touch each other and interrupt the unpaired interradium,

although one of the plates 2 is excluded from contact with

plate 1 still only in interradia 1 and 4. It follows from this

that the regular form, with five similar ambulacra and five

similar interradia, is the primordial one in the Clypeastride,

which is retained by Hchinocyamus and Laganum, but from

which Hncope, Clypeaster, and Stolonoclypus, Mellita and

Rotula, Echinarachnius and Lobophora, together with Arach-

noides, depart during growth, the five last named, moreover,

forming a bivium. Pressure towards the peristome during

growth and the addition and great multiplication of new

plates in the petala which are destined for the branchiz have a

great part in these changes. ‘The “equator” is not the same

during the whole life of the animal. We may see, by com-

paring several Hcehinarachnii of different ages, how a great

part of the plate through which the periphery passes gradually

goes over to the ventral surface, until the following one becomes

visible there, and the periproctium, which is at first dorsal,

becomes finally more than half ventral. At the same time the

stoma of the test, as in the Hchin7, becomes less in proportion

to the whole animal. In a Mellita hexapora 6 millims. broad

the transverse diameter of the stoma is about 0°15 of that of

the disk, at 8 millims. 0-1, at 35 millims. 0:04, and at 80

millims. 0°034.

[To be continued. |

LIV.— Contributions to the History of the Hydroida.

By the Rev. THomas H1ncxs, B.A., F.R.S.

I. The Sarcothece (Nematophores) of the Plumulariide.

[Plate XX. figs. 1-3'.]

THE singular organs to which the name nematophore has been

assigned by Busk, and which are confined to the Hydroid

family of the Plumulariide, have been investigated by several

able observers ; and much light has been thrown on their struc-

tural and physiological history, though as yet little is known

386 Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

of their precise function. Meneghini seems to have been the

first to notice them; he was followed by Huxley (1849) ; and

a few years later Busk gave a more complete and accurate

account of them, and drew special attention to the important

characters which they yield to the systematist. Allman (1864)

studied the contents of the nematophore, and established the

very interesting fact that the soft granular mass contained in

it has the power of emitting extensile processes, very similar in

structure and behaviour to the “ pseudopodia”’ of an Amoeba.

More recently (1872) Kirchenpauer has minutely described the

varieties of nematophore which occur in the different groups

of Plumulariide, and has applied the results of his research in

a revised arrangement of the family*. After all, however, one

or two points have escaped observation which are worthy of

record.

The presence of thread-cells in the protoplasm of the nema-

tophore has been noticed by Busk and Allman. They seem

not to occur universally; at least the latter observer failed

to detect them in Antennularia antennina, Linn. In all the

species which I have examined they are present, and occupy

the same position.

It has been observed that these thread-cells are never carried

out in the “ pseudopodia’”’—a remark which indicates that the

true structure of the protoplasmic offshoot enclosed in the chi-

tinous case of the nematophore has not been determined. In

all the cases that have come under my notice the terminal

portion of the sarcode-mass was divided into two distinct and

constant lobes, in one of which (the superior) the cluster of

thread-cells was immersed, while from the other (the inferior)

originated the extensile process.

In the nematophores which stand out on each side of the

ealycle in Aglaophenia pluma this bipartite structure may be

studied to great advantage. The superior lobe (Pl. XX.

fig. 1, a) is elongate in form, and extends from about the

middle of the cavity to the outer extremity of the terminal

aperture; it contains a number of rather large thread-cells,

arranged longitudinally at the very summit. The inferior

lobe, which originates at the base of the other, presents a

rounded outline (Pl. XX. fig. 1,0) when at rest, and is com-

posed of a simple granular substance.

In Plumularia setacea (P|. XX. fig. 2) the bilobate character

is equally marked, though, from the nature of the chitinous cup

or bowl in which the nematophore terminates, the two lobes

are more nearly on a level than in the previous species. At

* ‘Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularida, einzelne Gruppen der-

selben und ihre Fruchtbehalter.’ Hamburg, 1872.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 387

the same time the portion containing the thread-cells stands

out as a well-rounded prominence above the margin of the cup,

while the extensile lobe originates at one side of it, a little

below the summit. I have observed the same structure in

Plumularia pinnata.

The division of the sarcode-mass towards its upper extremity

into two processes with different functions is very apparent in

the mesial nematophore, which adheres to the front of the

calycle in Aglaophenia pluma. In this case the chitinous tube

of the nematophore is not merely furnished with a terminal

aperture, but also communicates with the cavity of the calycle

to which it is attached. The lobe bearing the thread-cells ex-

tends to the top of the tube; the extensile (or inferior) lobe

only to the point where this communication exists, and here

it discharges itself into the calycle, as noticed by Allman, who

does not seem, however, to have recognized the constant diversity

of function in the two branches of the granular mass.

Kirchenpauer has described certain species of Aglaophenia

in which the tube of the anterior nematophore has a second

orifice, placed generally near the point at which it begins to

stand off from the calycle; this orifice does not communicate

with the cavity of the hydrotheca, but affords a passage for the

extensile lobe into the surrounding water. He proposes to de-

signate nematophores of this kind “ double-mouthed ” (zwe7-

miindige). This observer does not seem to have noticed the

bilobate structure of the lateral nematophores, which I have

just described.

We may distinguish, then, in the nematophore:—(1) the chi-

tinous case, which may be simple (PI. XX. fig. 1) or compound

(fig. 2), and, if simple, furnished with one orifice only or with

two; and (2) the soft granular offshoot from the ectoderm per-

vading it, which may be either entire and destitute of terminal

thread-cells, or divided into two lobes above, one bearing

thread-cells and the other extensile.

The protoplasmic processes which are emitted by the inferior

lobe have been well described by Allman. They are very

mutable, and exhibit frequent changes of form, often attaining

a great length. Sometimes they are cylindrical and slender,

stretching along the stems and branches, to which they are

closely appressed and along which they glide slowly, almost

imperceptibly, in Ameba-like fashion ; sometimes they appear

clavate at the extremity ; sometimes they swell out at intervals

into bulbous dilatations. Occasionally they may be seen to

reach across to a neighbouring branch and fix the extremity

upon that; and rarely they give off two branches at the top,

which move in opposite directions (Pl. XX. fig. 3,6). I have

388 Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

observed them in a state of great activity, as I have mentioned

elsewhere, on a young specimen of Plumularia frutescens, which

they completely invested with “a multitude of gossamer-like

threads.”” ‘These extraordinary prolongations of the granular

mass in the nematophore can be entirely withdrawn.

The action of the thread-cells on the superior lobe is much

more rarely witnessed; Meneghini seems to have noticed it,

but without comprehending its true nature. On a specimen

of Aglaophenia pluma I have seen the contents of the nemato-

cysts discharged, and the long delicate threads streaming up-

wards from the extremity of the lateral nematophores (Pl. XX.

fig. 1,a). These fine extensile lines were cast out to enormous

distances, intertwining and waving about in the water; three

or four were usually emitted from each cluster of thread-cells 5

and in some cases I noticed that the cyst itself was raised to

some height above the nematophore and borne on a slender

pedicle. At times a tuft of the threads might be seen slowly

contracting, and I have observed one dragging down with it

a mass of stuff which it had collected.

The sight of this wonderful apparatus in full action was

singularly interesting, and it was impossible not to feel that it

must bear some important relation to the life of the Hydroid.

I may mention that the specimen on which the thread-cells

were in action showed no trace of pseudopodia.

It is difficult to form a conjecture as to the function of these

curious appendages. ‘They have been regarded as organs of

defence; and Kirchenpauer proposes to rank them with the

polypites and gonozooids of the Hydroid colony under the name

of the “ defensive zooids” (Wehrthicre). But it seems to me

very doubtful whether this is the true interpretation of the ne-

matophore. I am inclined to think that its function may be

in great measure nutritive ; the pseudopodia at least seem much

better fitted for the work of alimentation than for that of

defence.

If we may accept Prof. Allman’s very ingenious theory of

the structure of the fossil Graptolites, we shall have important

evidence in favour of this view. He regards them as morpho-

logically Plumulariidans in which the development of hydro-

thecee has been suppressed by the great development of the

nematophores*. In short, according to his interpretation, they

were Plumulariidans in which the ordinary alimentary zooid

(the polypite) was wanting, and the function of nutrition pro-

bably devolved altogether on the nematophores. If this view

be correct we shall have, as Allman has remarked, in the

* ‘Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids,’ part ii.

p. 170.

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 389

nematophore of the existing Plumularva “ the last traces of the

structure of its ancient representative, the Graptolite.”

In this case we must conceive of the remote ancestors of our

recent forms as obtaining their food altogether after the manner

of a Rhizopod, by help of the pseudopodia, which still survive

to supplement the work of the polypite. This view, however,

though ably supported, can hardly claim at present to be more

than a happy conjecture.

A word as to the terms employed in this department of

Hydroid morphology. With our present knowledge, nemato-

phore can scarcely be accounted an appropriate designation for

these singular appendages. The presence of thread-cells is

certainly not the most significant or distinctive character which

they exhibit; and it would seem that it is not universal. As

we have already the terms hydrothecw and gonothece, I should

propose to name them sarcothece, while the oftshoot from the

ectoderm, which they enclose, may be appropriately called the

sarcostyle,

II. New Species of Plumularia (P. cornu-copie, Hincks).

[Plate XXI, figs. 1-3.]

I have lately obtained at Ilfracombe a new Plumularia,

which exhibits some interesting points of structure. In the

form of the calycle, the jointing of the stem and branches, and

the general arrangement of the sarcothecee (nematophores) it

resembles P. Catharina, Johnston; but from this species it

differs notably in size and habit, in the form of the gonothece,

and in the alternate arrangement of the ramules. It is re-

markable, however, that while the pinne are usually alternate

and somewhat widely separated, one or two of the lowest pairs

are not unfrequently opposite, as in P. Catharina. Another

distinction between the two forms is to be found in the structure

of the sarcothece that occur one on each side of the calycle ;

in P. Catharina they are pedunculate, in the present species

sessile. Looking at the whole assemblage of differences and

points of resemblance, it seems not improbable that we may

have in P. cornu-copie a derivative from P. Catharina, though

it is now a strongly marked and well-established form,

Fam. Plumulariide.

Genus PLUMULARIA, Lamarck (in part.).

P. cornu-copie, i. sp.

Plumes distributed at intervals on the creeping stolon.

Stems recurved, regularly jointed; a single internode between

those which bear the ramules. Pinne generally alternate,

390 Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida,

occasionally opposite towards the base of the plume, simple,

moderately distant, a single calycle on the main stem at their

origin. Hydrothece cup-shaped, deep, with an even margin,

separated by two joints. Sarcothece bithalamic, one on each

side of the calycle above and one below it, two on the inter-

mediate internodes of the stem and one on those of the pinne,

and two on the longer internode near their base. Gronothecee

shortly pedunculate, springing singly or in pairs from the base

of the calycles both on the stem and pinne: female in the

shape of an inverted horn, curved inwards towards the calycle ;

aperture suboval, oblique ; two sarcothecee near the base: male

unknown.

Height of plumes about 3 inch.

Hab. On stones, dredged off the Capstone at Ilfracombe.

The plumes of P. cornu-copie are compact and slightly re-

curved. The pinne are not very distant, and of moderate

length, seldom bearing more than six calycles; I have never seen

them branched. The internodes which separate the hydrothece

are not nearly so long as in P. Catharina, and bear only one

sarcotheca, whereas there are two or three in the latter species.

The much greater length of the internodes, both on the stem

and branches, in P. Catharina confers on this species a very

distinctive habit. It approaches P. cornu-copie in many of

the details of its structure, but not at all in general appearance.

The pinnz of the latter species are decidedly alternate, with

the exception I have mentioned above. ‘The most striking

feature undoubtedly is to be found in the gonothecz, the pecu-

liar form of which has suggested the specific name*. ‘The

originate, as in P. Catharina, at the base of the calycles,

sometimes singly, but frequently in pairs, and are perfectly

hyaline and of the most delicate texture ; they are of ample

size and most gracefully curved, bearing, like the similar parts

in the allied species, two of the bithalamic sarcothece near

the base. The polypites are adorned, just below the tentacles,

with a conspicuous belt of opaque white, which forms a striking

feature.

III. Reproduction by Fission in Campanularia neglecta,

Alder.

[Plate XX. fig. 4.]

Allman has described a case of reproduction by spontaneous

fission in a Campanularian Hydroid which he has referred to

a new genus under the name of Schizocladiumf. I have had

* The gonotheca is like an exquisite little crystal cornucopia.

+ Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science,

1870; ‘Monograph of the Gymnoblastic Hydroids,’ part i. p. 151.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 391

the opportunity of observing the same mode of development in

Campanularia neglecta, Alder, and have little doubt that it is

far from uncommon amongst the Hydroida. In the month of

June I obtained a fine colony of the Campanularia bearing a

full complement of polypites and also a considerable number

of branches, carrying at their extremities the planuloid exten-

sions of the coenosare described by Allman (PI. XX. fig. 4, x).

I am inclined to think that they were of greater length than

those of Schizocladium, but in other respects exactly resembled

them. I did not actually witness the liberation of the frustule,

but in one case at least a constriction was very apparent a little

within the chitinous tube of the stem, at which point no doubt

separation would ultimately have taken place.

I confess that, with great deference for Prof. Allman’s

opinion, lam unable to accept his genus Schizocladium, which

seems to rest on a single character, the development of fission-

frustules in a certain way—a character which, there is reason

to believe, may have a wide range amongst the Hydroida.

There seems to be nothing peculiar in the trophosome of his

zoophyte but the presence of the frustule-bearig branchlets ;

there is nothing in his account or figure of it, apart from this

character, to indicate that it is even specifically distinct from

known forms of Obelia or Campanularia.

The observation of reproduction by fission in Camp. neglecta,

and its probable occurrence, as recorded by Allman himself,

in Corymorpha, tend to show that schizocladism may be a

common element in the reproductive history of the Hydroida,

and that it therefore cannot be the peculiarity of a genus.

The frustule with its branchlet is hardly likely to exhibit any

morphological peculiarities that will serve the purpose of the

classifier. It presents the same character in Camp. neglecta as

in Allman’s Hydroid, which is probably an Obelia.

Prof. Allman has made a most important and interesting

addition to our knowledge of the modes of reproduction amongst

the Hydroida; but I venture to think that he himself will

hardly care to retain the new genus.

IV. Cladonema radiatum, Dujardin: the Planoblast.

[Plate XXI. fig. 6.]

Through the kindness of Dr. Hudson, of Clifton, I have

had the opportunity of examining during the past summer, for

the first time, the planoblast of Cladonema radiatum, which he

had taken at Watermouth near Ilfracombe. I was surprised

to find the tentacles unbranched and furnished with only one

suctorial appendage. In this state they bear a very close re-

semblance to those of Clavatella, the only important difference

392 Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida.

between the two being that in Cladonema the thread-cells are

distributed in several clusters (about five) along the arm, while

in Clavatella they are gathered into a single spherule at the

extremity. Van Beneden has observed that in an early stage

the tentacle of the planoblast is destitute of branches, and is

furnished with two suckers: it appears that in a yet earlier

stage it has only one. Allman, in the concluding part of his

great work on the Tubularian Hydroids, has made the same ob-

servation, and he adds that ‘‘in a very early stage” (before the

liberation of the gonozooid) ‘‘ the marginal tentacles are quite

simple.” At the time of detachment one suctorial appendage

has been developed; and, according to the observation of Van

Beneden, a second makes its appearance before the branching

of the tentacle commences*.

Judging from Allman’s exquisite figure, the bifurcation of

the tentacles begins at a later period in Cladonema than it does

in Clavatella; in the latter the minute lobes on the margin of

the disk, in which they originate, exhibit almost immediately

a slight depression in the centre, indicating the future course

of development.

I was much interested in watching the curious habits of the

young Cladonema. It was exceptionally hardy, and throve

well in confinement. But after a short time it proceeded to

reverse its swimming-bell (just as a man might throw off his

coat on commencing a piece of hard labour), and, firmly planting

itself on its suctorial appendages, made a vigorous attack on

the minute crustaceans that swarmed in the surrounding water.

The manubrium, unimpeded by the restraint of the umbrella,

and placed on a decided vantage ground, moved eagerly from

side to side, and with the aid of its well-armed oral lobes

succeeded, I have no doubt, in securing abundant supplies.

The zooid in this condition presented an extraordinary figure:

the characteristic grace, with much of the familiar appearance,

of the Medusa had vanished; and the stout cylindrical proboscis,

mounted on a kind of pedestal and swaying to and fro as the

little Entomostraca’ played about it, offered a strange contrast

to the exquisite form of which Van Beneden could say, “ rien

nest gracieux comme un Cladonéme.”’

The retroversion of the umbrella has been noticed in several

species and by several observers—but always as occurring late

in the life of the zooid, and shortly before the escape of the

generative products. When the walls of the manubrium were

already laden with ova, I have seen the swimming-bell in the

planoblast of Syncoryne eximia thrown back and contracted

into a small mass, to which the tentacles were still attached.

* ‘La Faune Littorale de Belgique: Polypes,’ 1866, p. 142.

Rev. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 3938

The locomotive organ perished, and the zooid in its last stage

returned to the condition of the polypite. But in the case of

the young Cladonema the umbrella, though everted, continued

otherwise unchanged, and manifested its healthy condition by

vigorous contractile movements; it was clear that at any

moment it might be restored to its normal position, and

discharge its functions as efficiently as ever.

This peculiarity of habit in the planoblast of the Cladonema

no doubt connects itself with the presence of organs of attach-

ment, which amongst the natatory gonozooids it alone possesses.

I may mention that I was unable to detect any thread-cells

on the umbrella, nor is there any reference to their existence

in Allman’s description; but they are represented in Mr.

Holdsworth’s excellent figure engraved in my ‘ History of the

British Hydroida’*.

V. Zanclea (Gemmaria) implexa, Alder.

I have to record the occurrence of this very beautiful

Hydroid at Ilfracombe, where it was found on the Capstone,

and dredged up from a moderate depth not very far from shore.

In the former locality it grew on Laminaria-roots in the lower

rock-pools. All the specimens obtained were spreading over

masses of Cellepora, in the orifices of which the polypites were

lodged; Mr. Hodge obtained it in the very same habitat at

Seaham Harbour. Hitherto this species has only been met

with on the coasts of Northumberland and Scotland.

The form found in Devonshire is the one first described by

Alder as Coryne pelagica, which he subsequently considered to

be the young of his Tubularia (Coryne) implexa—and is iden-

tical with the Coryne briareus of Allman, and the C. margarica

(natural-size figure) of Wright. It is also the one so beautifully

figured in Allman’s ‘ Monograph’ as G‘emmaria implexa, the

polypites of which are borne on short and simple stems about

half a line in height. At first sight this form seems very

unlike the Hydroid with branching tubes, growing gregariously

and forming “‘a densely tangled mass” from a half to three

quarters of an inch in height, which Alder has described as

his Coryne implexa. I have little doubt, however, that the

two must be referred to the same species.

I have fine specimens of Zanclea implexa from the Firth of

Forth, kindly supplied by Dr. Strethill Wright, in which the

two forms are associated. The creeping stolon gives off many

short stems enclosed in a polypary, which tapers slightly down-

wards and is annulated throughout the greater part of its length,

the upper portion, however, being smooth and of more delicate

* ‘History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ vol. ii. pl. 11. fig. e’.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 28

394 Rev. T.Hincks on the History of the Hydrovda.

material than the rest. These are unbranched, and bear at

their summit a single polypite. Associated with them are

much longer stems, branched for the most part unilaterally,

and invested by a polypary exhibiting the curious structure

described by Alder. Polypites are borne on the summit of the

main stem and of the several ramules. The polypary is com-

posed of two layers or coats, distinctly separated from one

another—the outer transparent and membranous, the inner of

a decided horn-colour and for the most part strongly ringed*.

Every here and there portions occur in which the separation

of the two coats is not apparent; but throughout the greater

part of the stems and branches it is strongly marked.

The inner tube is completely filled by the ccenosarc; its

carinated rings are connected with the epidermis by frequent

processes. Towards the base of the stems this singular struc-

ture is not generally distinguishable; but the ‘thin and

transparent” polypary, which Allman describes as occurring

in his specimens for some distance below the polypite, is no

doubt the epidermal layer, forming in other parts of the stem

a continuous distinct envelope, and enclosing the annulated

tube which immediately surrounds the coenosarc. It appears

that the form with short and simple stems, associated in the

Firth-of-Forth specimens with the larger branched form, not

uncommonly occurs alone; and as in this condition it bears

the reproductive bodies freely, it cannot be accounted im-

mature.

That the Tubularia implexa, Alder, and the Firth-of-Forth

species are identical is beyond a question f; and Dr. Wright’s

specimens show that the humbler form described by Alder

(as Coryne pelagica) and by Allman, and found by myself at

Ilfracombe, is only one state of the same species. A complete

diagnosis of Zanclea implexa, therefore, must include the

branched double-coated stem, which belongs to the perfect

condition of the zoophyte.

The polypites have five or six large-headed tentacles round

the oral extremity; the rest have verysmall capitula, containing

a few thread-cells. I have noticed a large oval thread-cell at

the base of most of the tentacles and imbedded in the ectoderm

at various points, where tentacles would probably have been

developed. Occasionally one occurred in the course of an arm,

and a group on the surface of the body.

The gonophores are borne in large clusters, and number

* Vide ‘History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ pl. 9. fig. 3 6.

+ I have compared specimens of the polypary of the former, received

from Mr, Alder, with the latter; and they exactly agree, as already ob-

served by Wright.

Rey. T. Hincks on the History of the Hydroida. 895

sometimes as many as seven. The sacs containing thread-

cells on the umbrella of the planoblast were placed, in the I-

fracombe specimens, a little way above the tentacular bulbs;

they are represented in the same position in Alder’s figure ; but

Allman describes them as extending upwards for some distance

from the base of each tentacle.

Thave referred the Coryne implexa of Alder to Gegenbaur’s

genus Zanclea, and at present I see no reason to change this

view. M‘Crady, indeed, has instituted the genus Gemmaria

for a planoblast which seems to agree in all essential (generic)

points with that of our British form ; the trophosome he had

not discovered. But I can find no sufficient ground for this

addition to an already oppressive nomenclature ; Zanclea and

Gemmaria seem to me to embrace one and the same generic

type. The main characteristics of Gegenbaur’s genus are a

bell-shaped umbrella, a moderately long manubrium with

simple mouth, four radiating canals, tentacles springing from

non-ocellated bulbs and furnished along their course with

pedunculated sacs containing thread-cells, and certain pro-

minent ‘‘ribs”’ on the umbrella, in which thread-cells are en-

closed ; and these are really the essential characters of Gem-

maria. Allman, however, has adopted M‘Crady’s genus, but

has not given us his reasons for doing so. It is of course

possible that the structure of the pedunculated sacs on the arms

of Zanclea costata (Gegenbaur) may differ essentially from that

of the similar organs on Coryne implexa, Alder; but it is

hardly probable. It is also possible that the “ribs” on the

umbrella of the former may not correspond with the “sacs”

on that of the latter, though it seems likely enough that the

same kind of structure is intended in both cases. But with

our present information, and looking to the whole group of

characters, it seems to me better to hold provisionally at least

to Gegenbaur’s name.

Alexander Agassiz also accepts M‘Crady’s genus Gemmaria,

and has given us his reasons ; “the form of the bell,” he says,

“of the digestive cavity, and of the tentacles is totally dif-

ferent in the two genera.” “The form of the bell” is a very

doubtful generic character ; but the differences in this respect

between the supposed species of Gemmaria are quite as great

as those between any one of them and the Zanclea costata.

The form of the digestive cavity is a matter of inferior moment ;

there are no important differences in size or structure. The

tentacles may not agree in shape, though there is little dis-

agreement in this respect between Zanclea costata and Zanclea

impleaa ; but they seem to be similar in all essential points.

On the whole I see no reason for dispossessing the established

name.

28*

396 On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa.

LV.—On Campylonema, a new Genus of Polyzoa. By the

Rev. Tuomas Hinoxs, B.A., F.R.S.

[Plate XX. fig. 5.]

On stones and stems of seaweed collected from the Capstone

at Ilfracombe a minute Polyzoon has occurred to me not un-

commonly, which, though closely resembling the well-known

Valkeria in general appearance, presents an arrangement of

the tentacles so remarkable that it can only be referred to a

new genus. I suspect that it may prove identical with the

form which I have already characterized under the name of

Valkeria tremula*. At least there is a striking agreement

between the two in the shape and size of the zocecia, and the

manner in which the colonies are distributed on the creeping

stolon ; and asI was unable to make a thorough examination

of the polypide of Valkeria tremula, the peculiarity in the ten-

tacles, supposing it to exist, might readily have escaped me.

This point, however, must be left for future determination.

Class POLYZOA.

Order INFUNDIBULATA.

Suborder CTENOSTOMATA, Busk.

Family Vesiculariide.

Genus CAMPYLONEMA, Hincks.

Der. kdpidos, bent, and vjya, a thread (tentacle).

Generic character.—Polyzoary a filiform creeping stolon, on

which the zocecia are distributed at intervals in groups;

zocecia erect, sessile; polypides with eight tentacles, two of

which are bent outwards for about two thirds of their length,

so as to interrupt the circle of arms on one side; no gizzard.

Campylonema tremulum, n. sp.

Zocecia very small and slender, oblong, tapering off to a

point below.

The remarkable arrangement of the tentacles is the one

point of difference between this form and Valkeria. The

abrupt reversion of two of the arms destroys the circular form

of the tentacular verticil, and gives it somewhat the shape of a

horseshoe. Six of the arms stand erect as usual; the other

two are thrown back, so that on one side the circle is broken.

The flexure of the tentacles takes place at about a third of the

whole height from the base; this peculiarity gives avery remark-

* “Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall,”

p. 58, pl. xii. fig. 9 (Ann. Nat. Hist. 1862, ser. 3, vol. ix. p. 472).

On some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands. 397

able and distinctive appearance to the polypide. The zowcia

are slender, and taper off very decidedly below; when the

polypide is retracted they droop a little to one side, and rise

into an erect position when it expands.

The polypides are extremely minute and delicate, and very

nimble in their habits; those of Valkeria uva appeared coarse

and clumsy beside them. They are destitute of a gizzard, and

present altogether a very simple structure.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE XX.

Fig. 1. One of the lateral sarcothecze (nematophores) of Aglaophenia

pluma, Linn., showing the thread-cells in action: a, the superior

lobe of the sarcostyle (s), which bears the thread-cells ; 6, the

inferior lobe, from which the extensile processes arise; c, the

ectoderm of the cvenosarc, from which the sarcostyle originates ;

d, the chitinous cup of the sarcotheca.

Fig. 2. The bithalamic sarcotheca of Plumularia setacea, Ellis, showing

one of the extensile processes (pseudopodia) given off from the

sarcostyle: a, the superior lobe with thread-cells; 6, the ex-

tensile process ; x, the terminal cup-shaped chamber of the sarco-

theca, in which the two lobes are lodged; y, the inferior tubular

chamber.

Fig. 3. The same, showing one of the processes (6) dividing into two

branches, of which one tends upwards and the other downwards.

Fig. 3'. The same, showing a process with bulbous dilatation (6): a, the

superior lobe ; s, the sarcostyle.

Fig. 4. Campanularia neglecta, Alder: x, a“ fission-frustule ” in course of

formation.

Fig. 5, Campylonema tremulum, Hincks, highly magnified, with one of

the polypides expanded, showing the peculiar arrangement of

the tentacles.

PLATE XXI.

Fig. 1. Plumularia cornu-copia, Hincks, natural size.

Fig. 2. A portion of one of the plumes, magnified.

Fig. 3. Two gonothece, borne on a portion of the main stem.

Fig. 4. A calycle of Plumularia Catharina, Johnston, showing the pedun-

culate sarcotheca (x).

Fig. 5. A gonotheca (female) of Plumularia Catharina.

Fig. 6. The planoblast of Cladonema radiatum, Dujardin, in an early stage

of development.

LVI.—Notice of some Species of Fishes from the Philippine

Islands. By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

Tue British Museum has recently obtained a series of the

fishes collected by Dr. Adolf Bernhard Meyer in the Philip-

pine Islands. ‘The following appear to be undescribed :—

Platycephalus fasciatus.

D. 1)/Sy pyle A. 1255) asdatsew:100:

The angle of the preoperculum is armed with three spines,

398 On some Species of Fishes from the Philippine Islands.

the upper of which is twice as long as the middle one, and nearly

half as long as the eye, the lowermost being minute. The length

of the head is one third of the total (without caudal), and its

width between the preopercular spines nearly one half of its

leneth. The interorbital space is but slightly concave, and its

width one half of the vertical diameter of the eye, or two

sevenths of the length of the snout. The spines of the super-

ciliary edge and of the other ridges of the head are very small,

and but slightly prominent. Lateral line smooth. 'There are

eight or nine scales in a transverse series between the first

dorsal fin and the lateral line. Greyish brown, with broad

irregular blackish-brown cross bands—one, corresponding to the

first dorsal, and two corresponding to the second, being the more

conspicuous. The first dorsal and the ventrals nearly entirely

black ; the rays of the second dorsal and anal with large black

spots ; caudal with three very large irregular black blotches.

Pectoral deep brown; but the membrane between the five upper

rays is transparent, and these rays are spotted with brown.

One specimen, from the Bay of Manila, 9 inches long.

Otolithus leuciscus.

D.10|5. A.2/7. LL. lat. ca 55.

Snout rather obtuse, with the lower jaw but slightly pro-

jecting beyond the upper. Both jaws with a series of distant

canine-like teeth, the anterior of which form a pair of canines

in the upper jaw, the lower jaw being without canines in front.

There are eight scales in a transverse series between the spinous

dorsal fin and the lateral line. The height of the body is a

little less than the length of the head, and two sevenths of the

total (without caudal). The diameter of the eye is a little less

than the length of the snout and two ninths of that of the head.

The width of the interorbital space is somewhat more than the

diameter of the eye. Praeoperculum distinctly serrated. Fins

sealeless. Anal spine feeble. Coloration uniform silvery ;

vertical fins slightly blackish towards the margin.

Two specimens, from the Bay of Manila, 6 inches long.

Atherina lineata.

D.4|} A. L.lat.37. L. transv. 7.

Evidently closely allied to A. endrachtensis.

The height of the body is two ninths of the total length

(without caudal), the length of the head one fourth. Eye very

large, its diameter being equal to the width of the interorbital

space, and contained twice and one third in the length of the

On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 399

head. Snout very short, one third of the diameter of the eye.

Pectoral long and pointed, as long as the head; dorsal small,

its origin nearly midway between the end of the snout and the

extremity of the caudal. ‘The silvery band is narrow, bordered

above and below by a very conspicuous series of black dots ;

a third series of similar dots runs along the middle of the row

of scales below the silvery band.

Two specimens, 34 inches long, from Cebu; we have re-

ceived also two others from Amboyna.

Salarias holomelas.

D.30. A.(2+)19.

Allied to Salartas fuscus.

Body comparatively short, its depth being contained thrice

and one eighth in the total length (without caudal). Anterior

profile of the forehead nearly vertical. Canine teeth none. No

orbital tentacle, no crest on the head. The dorsal fin is not

notched; this fin, as well as the anal, is elevated, all the

spines and rays terminating in very fine filaments; both fins

connected by a short membrane with the caudal, which is also

produced. Entirely black.

One example, 3 inches long, from Cebu.

LVII.—On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros.

By Epwarp Briytu, Hon. Memb. As. Soe. &e.

In some remarks on two species of Asiatic two-horned rhino-

ceros (Ceratorhinus of Gray) which appeared in the ‘ Annals’

(anted, p. 208), Dr. Gray awards to me the discredit of sup-

posing “that the one inhabits the east coast of the Bay of

Bengal and the series of islands extending to Sumatra, and the

other the Malay peninsula and Tenasserim, separated in Bur-

mah by the Irrawaddy river.” Now as that is a part of the

globe with the geography of which I happen to be tolerably

familiar, and as, moreover, I have especially studied the fauna

of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands and was the first to bring

to notice sundry species inhabiting those islands, it is therefore

somewhat unlikely that I should have suspected them of har-

bouring such an animal as a rhinoceros, or that I should have

ignored the fact that the Tenasserim provinces and northern

part of the Malayan peninsula constitute, equally with the

provinces of Chittagong and Arakan, portions of the eastern

boundary of the Bay of Bengal.

I do know for certain that the small blackish and coarse-

haired rhinoceros procured at Malacca, an example of which

died lately in the Regent’s Park, is identical with one of those

400 Mr. E. Blyth on the Species

inhabiting the Tenasserim provinces,—also that a two-horned

species of some kind inhabits the province of Arakan, which I

presume to be the same as that obtained in the contiguous pro-

vince of Chittagong, viz. f. lasiotis, Sclater. But at present

there is no evidence to show that the latter exists southward

(or to the south-east) of the Gulf of Martaban, unless the figure

of a Tenasserim skull published in the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic

Society of Bengal’ (vol. xxxi. p. 156, pl. ii. fig. 1) represents

that of A. lasiotis, which is notimprobable. That the latter is

the two-horned species which has been killed (as I was assured

by a planter) in Assam, where it is considered an exceedingly

great rarity, is very highly probable; and Dr. J. Anderson

mentions that while at Bhamé, in Upper Burmah, he “ was in-

formed by an intelligent native that two-horned rhinocerotes

are found in the Mogonny district, which is close to the con-

fines of Assam, and as far north as the twenty-sixth degree of

north latitude”’ (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 129).

The larger of the two obviously distinct species which we

have seen alive in London (£. lasiotis, Sclater) is considered

by Dr. Gray to exemplify the true 2. sumatrensis ; while the

smaller of the two he imagines to be identical with the animal

which bore the long and much-curved anterior horn upon which

fi. Crossti, Gray, is founded (vide figure in Proc. Zool. Soe.

1854, p. 250). Mr. Sclater with much better reason, as it

appears to me, assigns the smaller species to the veritable swma-

trensis ; but this can hardly be the same Sumatran animal as

is figured under that appellation by Professors Temminck and

H. Schlegel.

That &. Crossti and R. lasiotis are the same I think extre-

mely probable ; for I have seen well-developed horns attached

to the skin of the head of a Tenasserim male of the small

blackish species, the skull of which was afterwards cleansed,

and is figured together with those horns in ‘ Journ. As. Soe.

Beng.’ (loc. cit. pl. iv. fig. 1). Though of similar peculiar

character, the anterior horn curves much less than in 2. Crossii ;

while that«the very remarkable amount of curvature of the

latter is normal is shown by the existence of a second, though

less developed, specimen of a horn in the museum of the

London Royal College of Surgeons, bearing the number 3086.

In both cases (or species) the horns are very slender except at

the base, and the structure of them is very much harder and

more compact than in other rhinoceros-horns ; for which reason

they command so high a price among the Chinamen (to be

elaborately carved upon) that fine specimens are hardly ever

procurable by Europeans ; and therefore it is that we do not

see them in our museums. The size of the &. Crossii horn

of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 401

would suit /astotis rather than the other; and I think it pro-

bable that the second or posterior horn will prove to be much

shorter than in the smaller species. The British-Museum

specimen, upon which the name Crossiz was founded, measures

32 inches over the curvature, and is 17 inches in span from

base to tip.

R.sumatrensis was originally described, and somewhat rudely

figured, by Surgeon Bell in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions ’

for 1793 (p. 282,-pl. 2). His specimen is stated to have been

a male; ‘the height of the shoulder was 4 feet 4 inches” (over

the curvature of the body ?); “from the tip of the nose to the

end of the tail 8 feet 5inches. From the appearance of the

teeth and bones it was but young, and probably not near its

full size. The general colour was a brownish ash ; under the

belly, between the legs and folds of the skin, a dirty flesh

colour, YF ore" The ears were small and pointed, lined and

edged with short black hair. . . . . The whole skin of the

animal ts rough, and covered very thinly with short black hair.”

Sir T. Stamford Raffles remarks of the animal, as observed by

himself in Sumatra, that ‘its hide is much softer and more

flexible than in the Indian one, and is not, like it, corrugated

into plates of mail; it has, however, some doublings or folds,

particularly round the neck, shoulders, and haunches, rather

more distinct and defined than in Bell's drawing” (‘Trans. Linn.

Soc. vol. xiii. p. 268). Upon the whole, this description

applies fairly to the stuffed specimen in the British Museum,

which is believed to have been procured at Pinang, meaning

the adjacent mainland of province Wellesley ; but it does not

suit /. lasiotis, either as regards the prevailing shagginess of

the hide, the length and colour of the hairy vesture, the very

conspicuous long pendent fringe of hair bordering (but not

lining) the ear-conch, and the copiously tufted tail. But the

latter is represented in Bell’s figure as being slightly tufted,

and not so long and tapering as in the animal from Malacca,

the tail of which had some scattered hairs upon it but was not

distinctly tufted; in the British-Museum specimer? the tail is

mutilated. Moreover the skin of £&. lastotis would rather be

described as smooth than as rough ; and in this respect it con-

trasts remarkably with that of the smaller species.

In his ‘ Histoire Naturelle des Mammiféres’ M. Frédéric

Cuvier supplies two figures assignable to this type of rhinoceros

(Ceratorhinus, Gray), one of which is obviously from a drawing

from life of a very young calf, which he erroneously refers to

the conspicuously distinct single-horned rhinoceros of Java ;

and in his supposition of its representing the latter, he either

overlooked or possibly ventured to suppress the indication of

402 Mr. E. Blyth on the Species

a second and posterior horn, which could scarcely fail to have

been shown in the original drawing. Even at that early age

a rudiment of the posterior horn must needs have been suf-

ficiently apparent in the living animal, as shown by Schlegel’s

figure of a still younger calf. The comparatively rough skin

(although in so very juvenile an individual), the blackish-

brown colour of that skin, and especially the length and pecu-

liar form of the tail combine to identity the animal with the

small blackish species inhabiting the Tenasserim provinces and

Malayan peninsula ; but still I do not understand its being

represented as so very slightly hairy, especially upon the ears,

which is hardly to be sufficiently accounted for by the youth

of the particular specimen.

M. Frédéric Cuvier’s other figure, which he assigns to

£. sumatrensis, appears to me to have been made up from that

of Bell, aided and partly misled by the remark of Raffles

concerning the plaits or creases of the skin. I do not believe

that any original figure of a Ceratorhinus would have repre-

sented the crease on the flanks as extending upwards across

the loins. The attitude and position of the limbs are essen-

tially the same as in Bell’s figure ; and so also is the amount of

development of the horns ; and the accompanying descriptions

and measurements of both swmatrensis and supposed jyavanicus

are compilations. Moreover it is erroneously asserted that

fi. sumatrensis was named Lf. sondaicus by Messrs. Raffles and

Horsfield, inasmuch as that name was first applied by George

Cuvier to the lesser one-horned species, which is the only rhi-

noceros that inhabits Sunda, ¢.e. the western half of Java.

It follows that F. Cuvier’s figure assigned to swmatrensis is

of no authority whatever in détermining whether either or

which of the species in question is properly entitled to that

designation.

Lastly, the figures assigned to FR. sumatrensis (adult and

young) by Professors Temminck and H. Schlegel were made

up from stuffed specimens in the Royal Museum of Natural

History at Leyden; and the fore limbs of the adult are repre-

sented as being much too slender. Otherwise those figures

resemble £2. dascotis rather than the small blackish species, and

have the comparatively short tail of the former ; but they are

represented as being very inconspicuously clad with minute

hairs, which would scarcely be remarked unless especially

looked for. I remember distinctly that the stuffed adult spe-

cimen in the Leyden Museum is hairless (unless to a very

slight extent where least exposed), and that the young (under

glass) was well clad; but not suspecting at the time a plurality

of species of the particular type, nor how such species have

of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros. 403

since proved to differ, I did not examine those specimens so

critically as I should now do, though I retain the impression that

the adult is notably larger than the stuffed male in the British

Museum, or than the aged female of the same species which

lately died in the Zoological Gardens. The skeleton of a Su-

matran female in the museum of the Royal College of Surgeons

agrees in size with the last mentioned; but although a very old

animal, it retains its front teeth, which the others had lost. But

the skull of a Sumatran male in the same collection indicates a

considerably larger animal, which may even be of a different

specific race, corresponding to Schlegel’s figure; but this is a

matter for further investigation, and to which I can only

recommend attention. The Leyden beast is certainly not so

large by a good deal as is the living R. lasiotis, which appears

to be still growing, and has much increased in size since its

arrival in this country ; but it is not likely to become so large

an animal as the adult of the lesser single-horned species

(R. sondaicus), of which a skull, said to be undoubtedly from

Sumatra, has lately been received at the British Museum.

I was assured at Leyden by Professor Schlegel that A. su-

matrensis existed in Borneo; but an anterior horn said to be

from Borneo, in the possession of Mr. A. D. Bartlett, would

seem to indicate a species of still more diminutive size than that

which I believe, with Mr. Sclater, to be the real sumatrensis

of Bell, the mere difference of size of horn being not the only

reason for suspecting that the Bornean rhinoceros will even-

tually have to be recognized as a peculiar species.

I may also here mention that upon lookmg over a portfolio

of drawings at the India House, belonging formerly to the

Earl of Mornington (Governor-General of India and subse-

quently Marquis of Wellesley), I found two of single-horned

rhinoceros. One of these is a fair representation of a very

young individual of 2. sondaicus ; the other—which, however

faulty in general outline (being much too deep in the body),

is finished elaborately as regards details—appears to me to

represent a peculiar and undescribed species. ‘The folds of the

culrass are the same as in both ¢ndicus and sondaicus, except

the one which crosses the nape in the latter, and is deflected

backward across the shoulder-blade in the former; this one is

intermediate in its direction, for it is deflected backward much

higher upon the shoulder than is regularly the case in R. indicus.

The most remarkable peculiarity, however, consists in the

cuirass being throughout conspicuously studded with uniformly

small tubercles (as in &. sondaicus), while the head and limbs

are represented as wrinkled, but the skin quite smooth and

devoid of tubercles, and in this respect contrasting remarkably

with the adjacent parts of the cuirass. I cannot think that

404 On the Species of Asiatic two-horned Rhinoceros.

any one who looks at the elaborate finish of this drawing from

a living animal can readily suppose the peculiarities described

to be freaks of the native artist; and in the other figure (of

indubitable &. sondazcus) the head and limbs are represented

as being tuberculated uniformly with the cuirass. Moreover,

in the figure of very juvenile /. sondaicus, a slight hairiness is

represented upon the back, between the shoulder-fold and that

which crosses the loins; and I doubt not that this is correctly

copied from the living specimen. No habitat is assigned to

either, nor aught given to guide respecting the dimensions ; but,

without desiring to attach undue importance to any drawing

made by an unscientific artist, I still cannot help thinking that

the one in question indicates, in all probability, a species

hitherto ansuspected—as.much so as were, until quite recently,

the additional species of Asiatic two-horned rhinoceros, which

must now be generally recognized and accepted. Be it re-

membered that for many years a male of £. sondaicus existed

in this country which was never recognized as differmg from

the large R. indicus ; and we only know it now from the two

figures of it, assigned to &. indicus, in the ‘ Naturalist’s

Library;’ while the skeleton of an adult 2. sondaicus in the

anatomical museum of Guy’s Hospital, in Southwark, is in all

probability that of the same individual, which was exhibited

about the country and finally deposited in the Zoological

Garden of Liverpool, at a time when the larger of the two

Indian species was much less familiarly known to us than it is

at present. That particular specimen of £. sondaicus was re-

ceived from Calcutta ; and it is the only species which is known

to inhabit the Sundarbins of Lower Bengal, as it is also the

only single-horned species known to inhabit the Indo-Chinese

countries and contiguous Malayan peninsula. Although the

commonest and most widely diffused of any Asiatic rhinoceros,

I can learn of no other example of it having ever been exhibited

in Europe.

Note.—Since the above was in print I have seen Mr. Sclater’s

paper on the Asiatic two-horned rhinoceroses, published in

‘Nature’ for October 24th, 1872 (pp. 518, 519), and accom-

panied by figures of &. lasiotis and LR. sumatrensis. Un-

fortunately they are not on the same scale, so that the former

is made to appear the larger of the two, and the attitude of

lasiotis does not permit of the distinctions being sufficiently .

shown. At present the tail of the living animal is much more

largely tufted, and the long hair fringing the ears is more de-

veloped, than appears from Mr. Sclater’s figure taken from the

animal when younger; nor is the different quality of the hair

upon the body sufficiently apparent. In &. swmatrensis this

is shorter, much coarser, suberect, ana of a black colour—in

Miscellaneous. 405

R. lasiotis longer, more appressed (or tending to lie flat on the

skin), of a light greyish-brown colour, and somewhat glistening

at certain angles of vision. In &. swmatrensis the muzzle an-

terior to the nasal horn is much broader, and the space between

the ears is proportionally much less. Moreover Mr. Sclater

states that “the tail of the Malacca animal is shorter and

nearly naked ; in that from Chittagong it is longer and tufted

at the extremity ;” on the contrary, it 1s conspicuously shorter

in &. lasiotis, and even with its tuft does not descend so low

as in the other. That of &. swmatrensis is correctly represented

in Mr. Sclater’s figure of the species, in which also the very

strongly marked crease behind the shoulders is not at all

exaggerated.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Varieties of the Tiara (Galera barbata).

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Tis animal is generally brown, with a pale head and a large white

or yellow blotch on the throat. It has a large distribution in the

tropical or subtropical parts of America.

The British Museum has lately received two half-grown specimens,

which have the whole head, neck, and front of back between the

shoulders pure white ; one of the specimens has the chin and middle

of the throat grey. These come from Xalapa in Mexico.

Mr. Salvin sent to the Museum a specimen from Costa Rica, which

is entirely black, without any pale colour on the head and neck; and

there is a young specimen in the Museum which is entirely of a pale

whity-brown colour.

On Branchipus and Artemia. By C. Voer.

At the meeting of the “‘ Société Helvétique des Sciences Naturelles ”

held at Fribourg in August last, M. Vogt gave a summary of the

results of his researches upon these genera. The first species in-

vestigated by him was Branchipus diaphanus, found in August 1871

near the summit of the Reculet (Jura), in artificial ponds dug by the

herdsmen for the use of their cattle. M. Vogt obtained several

hundred individuals of this species, among which the males and

females were nearly in equal numbers. When placed in an aqua-

rium they lived there very well at first, and produced a multitude of

eggs, from which larve issued ; but towards the end of September

they all perished by degrees. At the approach of cold weather the

water was emptied out of the aquarium, leaving only the mud

at the bottom, which was completely frozen during the winter.

Towards the end of February the aquarium received some new

inhabitants, namely about 50 larvee of Petromyzon, which concealed

themselves in the mud. In the month of May of the present yeara

certain number of larve of Branchipus made their appearance, being

hatched, no doubt, from eggs which had remained in the mud.

M. Vogt succeeded in rearing several generations of them, which

enabled him to follow all the phases of their development. Several

406 Miscellaneous.

excursions to the Reculet during the present year furnished no

results ; no traces of Branchipus could be found in that locality.

Wishing to compare Branchipus with an allied genus, M. Vogt

applied to Prof. C. Martins of Montpellier, to ask him for some speci-

mens of Artemia salina, a species of Branchiopod which swarms in

the salt marshes of the neighbourhood of Cette. M. Martins sent

several thousands of these animals, with a supply of the mother

liquors in which they live. They arrived at Geneva in good con-

dition, and are living in an aquarium, in which they produce enor-

mous quantities of eggs and larve.

M. Vogt exhibited a bottle filled with living Artemiw and their

larvee and explained the structure of the adult Branchipus, describing,

among other things, a pair of footjaws which had escaped the obser-

vation of MM. Joly, Leydig, &c. He then dwelt upon the form of

the larve, which in both Artemia and Branchipus exhibit the

primitive fundamental type of the Crustacea, to which the name of

Nauplius has been given. But although fundamentally the same,

the Nauplit of the two genera present considerable differences, those

of Branchipus being shorter and more compressed, and those of

Artemia more slender and elongated. The lateral compound eyes

appear much later in Artemia than in Branchipus.

The first pair of appendages in the Nauplius consists of two

antenne which afterwards become the antenne of the perfect

animal. The second pair forms the chief or sole organ of locomotion

of the larva; and after numerous moults these appendages finally

become the horn-shaped pieces which serve as prehensile organs in

the male Branchipus and are rudimentary in the female. The third

pair serve the larva to carry its food to its mouth; in the adult it

forms the mandibles, which constitute the third pair of appendages.

The eleven pairs of natatory feet and the pair of footjaws of the

adult originate subsequently by budding.

M. Vogt confirms the observation of M. Joly that among the

Artemice collected at Cette during the months of July and August

there are no males, and that the females propagate by parthenogensis.

This fact is the more remarkable as we find males in great abundance

in other salt marshes inhabited by the same or analogous species.—

Bibl. Univ. Sept. 15, 1872, Arch. des Ser. p. 30.

On Osteocella septentrionalis from British Columbia.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

The substance described by me in the ‘ Annals, 1872, ix. p. 406,

under this name was, at the meeting of the British Association at

Brighton, and since in ‘ Nature,’ regarded as the notochord of a fish !

Professor Dawson of M‘Gill College, Montreal, Canada, states that it

was submitted to Professor Verrill of Yale College, who “had no doubt

as to its nature ” (that is, of its being the axis of a Virgularia or

some similar creature), ‘‘ but believed it probably belonged to an un-

described species.” Dr. Dawson states that Mr. Selwyn’s specimen

has “‘ attached to the granulated lower extremity some trace of animal

matter, in which I think I can detect, under the microscope, a few

club-shaped spicules.”

Miscellaneous. 407

The observation of Professor Verrill is interesting, as since I

described it I thought it might probably be the axis of a species of

his genus Stylatula, which has a subcylindrical axis instead of the

quadrangular one of Virgularia, and of which he describes two

species from California; but Professor Verrill does not recognize it

as being a species of that genus.

Sowerby and Lear’s ‘ Tortoises.’

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrNTLEMEN,—In the notice of Sowerby’s Plates of Tortoises &c.

recently published by Sotheran, edited by Dr. J. E. Gray, it is

stated that ‘“‘ Many of the specimens figured and the rest of Mr. Bell’s

collection of reptiles are now to be found in the Anatomical and

Zoological Museum at Cambridge.”

This statement is incorrect, as Professor Bell’s collection of reptiles

(both in a dry condition and in spirit) was purchased by the late Rev.

F, W. Hope, and was by him presented to the University Museum

of Oxford. Professor Bell’s admirable collection of Crustacea is also

in the same museum, having been purchased by myself and presented

to the University on my appointment as Hope Professor of Zoology.

I am, Gentlemen,

Your obedient Servant,

J. O. WzEstwoop.

The correctness of the statement in Dr. Gray’s preface to this work

having been called in question, we thought it our duty to submit

Prof. Westwood’s letter to Dr. Gray, from whom we have received

the following answer :—

British Museum,

October 24th, 1872.

My pear Francis,—Mr. Westwood’s letter is entirely erroneous. I

have had one specimen of Mr. Bell’s lent me by Prof. Newton; and I

have consulted the others in the museum of the Cambridge Philo-

sophical Society, where they were before they were transferred to

the Anatomical Museum. I never before heard that Mr. Bell had a

second collection, and think it must be a mistake; I knew the col-

lection of Crustacea was purchased by Mr. Westwood.

Yours truly, J. E. Gray.

The Ahu (Capreolus pygargus). By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &.

We have three specimens of this animal in the British Museum—

one from North China, and the others from Siberia ; they are of very

different sizes.

The Siberian specimens, male and female, are much the largest.

They stand 38 inches high at the withers, and the length from the

nose to the place of the tail is 53 inches ; length of the hind leg to the

hock 16 inches. In the specimens in the museum the horns are very

slender, elongate, nearly smooth, and simple ; one has a single branch

on the inner side near the tip.

The Chinese specimen, on the other hand, is much smaller, about

the size of the common Scotch roebuck, and of the same dark colour

asitis inthe summer. The horns are stout and long, with distinct

408 Miscellaneous.

anterior and posterior snags, and have numerous beads round various

parts of the lower half, some of which are large and covered with

tubercles. Height at the withers 26 inches; length to the place of

the tail 41 inches; length of the hind leg to the hock 12 inches.

A new British Callithamnion. By Dr. J. EK. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

The Seriospora Griffithsiana has long been known as an inhabitant

of the coast of Devonshire. Agardh refers it to the genus Call-

thamnion, and calls it C. sertospermum—which was the specific name

that Mrs. Griffiths first gave to it; and she was the first discoverer of

it. Dr. Harvey considered it a variety of Callithamnion ver-

sicolor, but afterwards corrected this. We have never yet found spe-

cimens of the true Callithamnion versicolor on the British coast ; for

it is very distinct from Callithamnion corymbosum, of which Dr.

Harvey thinks it is a synonym.

Mr. Holmes kindly presented to Mrs. Gray a series of specimens

which he had obtained in Plymouth Sound, of a form which, he said,

had only been observed very lately, and differed from the usual

Seriospora, which has the spores at the end of the branches, in having

them in the first lower branchlet on the inner side of the branches,

as in other Callithamnia. I have examined the specimens; and

there is no doubt of their being the true Callithamnion versicolor,

very distinct from the Seriospora. The C. versicolor has the spores

triangularly divided, while in the genus Seriospora they are cru-

ciately divided. It is a most interesting addition to our flora.

It is very curious that the majority of the Plymouth collectors

regard Seriospora Griffithsiana and Callithamnion versicolor as

varieties of the same species, the different kinds of fruits being pro-

ductions of different seasons on the same plant; but they must have

overlooked the different forms of the sphzerospores.

On Macroxus tephrogaster. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1867 (xx.

p. 431) I described a species of American squirrel as Macroaus tephro-

gaster, which was sent from Guatemala, Bogota, and Honduras; I

also mentioned that M. Sallé had sent it from Mexico.

Mr. E. Gerrard, Junior, has shown me five specimens from Medellin,

Antioquia, in the New-Granadan Confederation, South America.

They are all not above half the size of the more southern specimens ;

and I should be inclined to regard them as a variety or species, under

the name of Macroaus medellinensis.

Two specimens in the Museum, bought from Mr. Gerrard, Junior,

vary in the extent of the black mark and of the white on the under-

side. In the larger specimen the dorsal patch begins at the back of

the neck and extends to the base of the tail, being very broad just

behind the shoulders, and the white on the underside only occupies

the middle of the throat, chest, and belly, the sides being greyish,

having the rest of the hairs black. Thesmaller specimen has a very

indistinct dorsal streak, with a squarish black spot on the middle of

the back, which appears to be further back than the broad part of

the patch on the other specimen; the throat, chest, abdomen, and

inside of limbs much more white than in the other specimen.

.-THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FOURTH SERIES. ]

No. 60. DECEMBER 1872.

LVIUIL.—On a new Family and Genus and two new Species

of 'Thelyphonidea. By the Rev. O. P. CAmBripce, M.A.,

C.M.Z.S.

[Plate XXII.]

In September 1871, among numerous spiders of great interest

received from Ceylon from Mr. G. H. K. Thwaites were

several other minute Arachnids. At first sight I was inclined

to pass them over as very young examples of some species of

Thelyphonus; but a closer examination showed them to be

not only destitute of eyes (no vestige of a visual organ being

apparent), but presenting some other remarkable differences in

form and structure from the genus Thelyphonus. 'The prin-

cipal of these differences (which seem to render it necessary

to form a new family to receive these arachnids) are the sub-

division of the cephalothorax into two segments, the broad

fore part, and the convexity of the first segment (including the

caput), whose fore margin is prolonged into a central pointed

beak-like prominence: other interesting and important generic

and specific characters are also detailed below. As far as lam

able to determine, the examples comprise two species.

Mr. Thwaites informs me that these arachnids were found

by M. Ferdinandus (the successful discoverer of the four-

eyed spiders, Miagrammopes, Cambr.) among decayed leaves

&c. on the ground. The absence of eyes was observed by

M. Ferdinandus, who begged Mr. Thwaites to call my atten-

tion to it.

The discovery of a blind arachnid thus above ground is a

remarkable fact. As far as I am aware, there is no instance

on record of any blind creature having ever been found except

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x.

410 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on two

in caves, where (the supposition is) the eyes have become

gradually and at length totally obsolete from ages on ages of

disuse. If in the present instance the eyes of this Ceylon

arachnid have vanished from a similar cause, the light having

been shut out merely by the interposition of decayed leaves, it

would seem to show, on the part of these creatures, a persistency

in keeping out of the light almost amounting to a quasi-suicidal

determination.

Although undoubtedly a near ally to Thelyphonus, yet a

strong general resemblance to Solpuga may be traced in the

form and segmentation of the cephalothorax. The rough

sketches of the main features of form and structure, added to

the subjoined descriptions, will, it is hoped, give a better idea

of the peculiarities of these small but very interesting arachnids

than could be formed from description alone.

Order THELYPHONIDEA.

Fam. nov. Tartarides.

Nearly allied to the family Thelyphonides, but. differing in

the general form, which is more elongate. The cephalothorax

also is divided into two parts or segments; the first comprises

the caput and segments belonging to the first two pairs of legs,

the hinder part (much the smallest) comprises the segments

pertaining to the third and fourth pairs of legs; but in neither

part are these segments indicated by any groove or indentation.

The abdomen is segmented, or rather covered both above and

below with articulated, corneous, transverse plates; the upper

series 1s separated from the lower, being divided from it by a

horizontal narrow divisional line or space; it terminates with

a short tail, varying in form in different species, and issuing

from the last of several small postabdominal rings or segments.

Gen. nov. NYCTALOPS.

Cephalothorax divided into two parts, oblong, tolerably

convex above; the foremost part greatly the largest and of a

somewhat oblong form, broader before than behind, the fore

corners depressed and rounded; the central part of the fore

margin is prolonged into a strongish pointed rostrum or beak,

the point of which is a little depressed; the hinder part is

broade: than long, and appears to be simply an arched covering

to the sternal surface, upon which the two hinder pairs of legs

are articulated.

Eyes none.

Kalces strong, much deeper than broad, of a flattened cylin-

drical form; they project in the same plane as the cephalo-

new Species of Thelyphonidea. 411

thorax, and terminate with a movable, sharp, curved fang,

which appears to be destitute of teeth.

Palpi very strong, 5-jointed; each issues from a large,

strong, long, nearly cylindrical basal joint or maxilla, the inner

fore corner of which is prolonged into a sharp strong point;

the other joints are armed variously with teeth; and the final

or digital joint terminates with an apparently movable, sharp,

curved fang.

Legs moderately long, 7-jointed, those of the first pair much

the longest, slender, and palpiform; the tarsal joint of this

pair is divided into several minute articulations, and without

any terminal claws; the tarsi of the other three pairs appear

to be undivided, and each is furnished with three simple, curved,

terminal claws; the femora of the fourth pair are of inordinate

strength.

Abdomen covered above and below with transverse horny

plates, and ending with a variously formed, short, caudal

prolongation.

Sternum situated beneath the fore portion of the cephalo-

thorax, between the basal joints of the legs of the first two

pairs, of a somewhat hollow-sided pentagonal form, considerably

drawn out behind. There is no sternum, properly so called,

connected with the basal joints of the legs of the two hinder

pairs, these being articulated to the general sternal surface of

that portion of the cephalothorax.

Nyctalops crassicaudata, sp.n. Pl. XXII. fig. 1.

Length 23 lines.

The general colour is yellow-brown, the cephalothorax being

of a rather darker though duller hue than the rest, and the

palpi and falces a little richer and brighter, with red-brown

edgings to their different articulations.

The /egs are sparingly furnished with hairs and fine spine-

like bristles; the two superior terminal claws are long,

moderately strong, simple, and curved, the inferior one small

and sharply bent downwards; their relative length is 1, 4, 2, 3,

those of the first pair much the longest, slender, and without

terminal claws; the tarsi short, and subdivided into about six

minute articulations.

The palp7 issue from the maxilla by a narrowish neck, but

quickly swell out into a strong tumid first jot, which has a

moderately strong, curved, sharp-pointed tooth at its lower

outer fore corner, and another smaller one opposite to it on

the inner side; the second joint is still stronger, longer, and

also more tumid; the third is not so large, but very nearly as

long, rather bent, and with a moderate strong sharp tooth

29*

412 On two new Species of Thelyphonidea.

directed forwards on its underside; the fourth joint is a little

longer than the third and straighter, and appeared to be some-

what serrated beneath; the fifth or digital joint is a little

curved, slightly tapering and has a sharp ‘terminal claw, which

appeared to be movable; beneath the fifth joint are some small

teeth.

The abdomen has eight transverse corneous plates above, and

seven beneath ; the first of those beneath is much the largest,

and probably conceals the sexual parts, which, however, pre-

sented no external aperture beyond a line-like fissure : near the

fore margin of each of the three succeeding plates are two

small reddish-brown transverse slits, probably the openings to

the breathing-apparatus ; these openings form two parallel

longitudinal rows. In this view the spiracular openings would

be six in number ; but it was difficult to determine whether or

not there were two others connected with the hinder margin of

the first segment. Several very narrow plates, decreasing

rapidly in size, form a sort of postabdominal continuation,

terminating with a caudal appendage of a peculiar form, some-

what resembling the fluke of an anchor blunted at the point

and rounded at the hinder corners; from this appendage there

issue a few long, straight, slender, diaphanous, spine-like

bristles, of which there are also numerous others beneath the

hinder part of the abdomen.

Several examples of this species were received from Ceylon

(where they were found, under decayed leaves and rubbish, by

M. Ferdinandus in the Royal Botanic Gardens), and kindly

sent to me by Mr. G. H. K. Thwaites, together with numerous

rare and new spiders.

I could not determine with any certainty whether or not

these examples were adult, or, indeed, of which sex they were ;

there was no apparent difference whatever of form or structural

detail by which the sex might*be concluded.

Nyctalops tenuicaudata, sp.n. Pl. XXII. fig. 2.

Length 24 lines.

In general form, structure, and colour this species resembles

the foregoing; but it may readily be distinguished by the

almost total absence of the teeth at the extremity of the first

joint of the palpus, these being quite rudimentary; those on

the other joints also appeared ‘to be wanting; another strong

character is also furnished by the caudal appendage being

slender and cylindrical. Possibly this may be the female of

the former species ; I am, however, inclined to think that it is

distinct.

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 413

Several examples were found in the Ceylon collection re-

ceived from Mr. Thwaites.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXII.

Fg. 1. Nyctalops crassicaudata: a, profile, greatly enlarged ; }, cephalo-

thorax, abdomen, and falces, upperside, with legs truncated and

palpi absent; c, underside, showing maxille and sternum ; legs

and palpi truncated; d, first two joints of right palpus, from

outer side in front; e, hinder extremity of abdomen, showing

caudal appendage, from underside ; f, profile of fore part of

cephalothorax, showing falx and fang; maxilla and portion of

first joint of palpus truncated; g, natural length, exclusive of

caudal appendage.

Fig. 2. Nyctalops tenuicaudata: a, left palpus, from outer side; b, hinder

extremity of abdomen, showing caudal appendage ; ¢, left leg of

fourth pair, from the outer side; d, first two joints of right

palpus, from outer side, rather in front; e, natural length, ex-

clusive of caudal appendage.

LIX.—On Balenoptera patachonica and B. intermedia.

By Dr. H. BURMEISTER*.

AN interesting acquisition is the skeleton of the whale met

with in our river near the mouth of the Rio de Jujan during

the month of August. Unfortunately the skeleton is not

complete, owing to the negligence of the people who cleaned

it provisionally ; it wants the extreme point of the tail and the

ends of both fms, which defect greatly diminishes its scientific

value.

The skeleton belongs to the species which I have de-

scribed (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 191) under the name of

Balenoptera patachonica, and completes our knowledge of that

species, founded on an imperfect specimen, which showed some

characters of importance—and proves, by its perfect identity

with that specimen, that the other whale received last year (see

Boletin, p. vu) does not belong to the same species, but is

quite different, as I can now confidently prove by comparison

of the two entire skeletons.

The whale now found was, according to the information

given by the sailors, 22 varas or 58 feet in length; but as I

did not see the animal before the body had been dried, I cannot

accurately describe its external appearance. Therefore the only

subject for comparison is the skeleton, the general characters of

which I will now give.

The specimen in question was, like the other, rather young—

as is proved by the vertebrae separate from the free apophyses,

* Translated by Miss Miers from the ‘ Boletin del Museo publico de

Buenos Aires,’ 1871, from a corrected copy with additions sent by the

author.

414 Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera.

and also by the skull, in which the maxillary bones are easily

separated from their sutures. Although the entire skeleton is

not shorter than that of the species described in the ‘ Boletin’

(p. viii), the whole breadth is less, which is a proof that this

was a more slender species than that found last year. In

order to prove this difference, I give some of the principal

measurements of the cranium, naming last year’s species Ba-

lenoptera intermedia, on account of its affinity with the species

above described as B. patachonica, adding tothese measurements

those of the third and much smaller species described as B.

bonaérensis.

Measurements in English inches.

B. intermedia.| B. patachonica. |B. bonaérensis.

———

Length of the base of the

cranium from the occipi-

tal hole to the tip of

thpevomer sis. Mahe 128 122 80

Breadth of the cranium be-

tween the anterior points

GETNE ORDILA » oc inys sfc i030 68 62 42

Central breadth of the ver-

tex between the temporal

10/372) ea asl rea aes AP 39 33 24

Length of the plane of the

WEEDON | Se. ci bieie Alaais wo 32 28 26

Length of the upper jaw .. 102 102 70

Length of the lower jaw . . 136 138 92

Length of the intermax-

BUMS V POLIS be. beara abet ats tohe 102 100 63

Breadth of the base of the

Length of the apophysis of

the temporal bone...... 24 22 12

Width of the shoulder-

Ls es Ae eo ae 40 373 32

Greatest breadth of the

cranium, between the

apophyses of the tempo-

eS NApeeea tie. ack Gh ape 72 67 48

The vertebral column has had probably sixty-two to sixty-

four vertebree—that is to say, four less than in the other species ;

but not more than fifty-eight and a half have been preserved,

the end of the tail with the caudal fin having been cut off by

the sailors, who found the body of the animal floating im the

river. Each one of these vertebree has a smaller body than

the corresponding one in the other species, although its apo-

physes are a little longer and also rather broader. In order to

prove this remarkable difference, | give the measurements of

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 415

the thirty-fifth vertebra in each individual, which vertebra is

one of the largest of the skeleton. This vertebra in B. pata-

chonica has a height in the body (with the spinous apophysis)

of 30 inches, of which 10 are occupied by the body, and a

breadth between the transverse apophyses of 34 inches, the

breadth of the body being 12 inches ; whereas in B. intermedia

the same vertebra is 28 inches in height, with 12 inches in

height of the body, and 32 inches in breadth, with 14 inches

in breadth of the body; which difference appears to me suf-

ficient indication of a specific difference between the two

animals.

The fifty-eight and a half vertebrae are distributed in the

following manner. There are seven well separated in the

neck; the five posterior very slender, two inches thick in the

body, and with two free apophyses excepting in the first two

(the atlas and axis), which are a good deal larger and have not

free apophyses, the atlas on both sides, the axis on the an-

terior side. ‘The axis has two large closed lateral wings, in-

cluding an oval aperture; the three following are open, with

two curved apophyses, but separated at the end; the sixth

has a lower and shorter apophysis; and the last has no lower

apophysis at all. In B. intermedia all the vertebre of the

neck are broader in the body, but the apophyses are shorter ;

and this species has a lower and tolerably large apophysis on

the sixth vertebra, which is wanting only on the seventh.

The seven vertebrae of the neck are followed by sixteen

dorsal vertebree, with the same number of pairs of ribs—that

is, one pair more than in the other species, now called B. ¢n-

termedia. ‘This difference seems to me of great importance,

principally on account of the constant difference of the

corresponding ribs, which are all longer and larger to the

very end in B. intermedia than in B. patachonica, and very |

different also in the shape of the upper part of the rib, and of

the tubercle of each rib. Hach rib of the first pair is 34 feet

in length in B. patachonica and 32 in B. intermedia. In the

former species the head of the rib is slender and the tubercle

rather large ; in the latter the small tubercle can scarcely be

said to be separate, and the head of the rib is larger, scarcely

separated from the neck, which is also large. The second rib

of B. intermedia is 5 feet in length, and the same rib in B.

patachonica 44 feet; the longest rib, which is the sixth, measures

in the former species 7 feet 2 inches, and in the latter 6 feet

8 inches. We may infer from these differences that the body

of B. intermedia must have a much larger circumference than

that of the other species, and that-its general shape must be

less slender, as we said at the beginning of our comparison.

416 Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Baleenoptera.

The number of the lumbar vertebre is seventeen in B. pata-

chonica and sixteen in B. intermedia. After these vertebree

there come in B. patachonica thirteen, and in B. intermedia six-

teen caudal vertebrae, with free lower spines or hemapophyses,

the last of these spines being in both species open—that is to

say, divided into two separate lamine, larger in B. patachonica

than in B. intermedia. At last, to the end of the tail, follow

nine or ten vertebra, successively smaller, of which, in both

species, the last six have been lost. The fifty-eighth vertebra

in B. patachonica has almost the same bulk as the fifty-ninth

vertebra of B. intermedia, but is a little larger in the body ;

which permits us to suppose that the total number of verte-

bre in the two species was not the same, but that B. pata-

chonica had several vertebre less than B. intermedia, although

the last inferior spine is situated in both species on the same

vertebra, ¢.e. the fifty-fourth. All these differences seem to

me to indicate a specific difference in the two animals.

Of the fins only the shoulder-blade and the humerus have

been preserved in the skeleton of B. tntermedia, the sternum

also is wanting; but in that of B. patachonica we have the

fins almost quite complete, the smallest inner finger alone

having been lost. The sternum also has been preserved: this

has nearly the shape of the same bone in 5. physalus; but

the large central excision of the anterior portion is absent im

our species, and in place of it there is asmall hole in the centre

of the same portion, which measures 17 inches in breadth, and

the whole sternum 15 inches in length, the central aperture

occupying 23 inches of this extension, and commencing 24

inches behind the slightly excavated anterior margin. The

narrow posterior portion of the sternum is 8inches long and

5 inches broad at first, but 2} at the end.

The shoulder-blade presents nothing of importance; it is

23 inches in height and 373 at its greatest breadth. The

humerus is 18 inches long; and each bone of the forearm is

25-26 inches in length, the cubitus above having behind a

large salient angle. The pectoral fin is 6 feet in length and

18 inches in breadth at the beginning of the forearm, the pro-

jecting angle of the olecranon being occupied by a large,

sharp, triangular cartilage. There are the usual five carpal

bones, and in the terminal portion of the fin five fingers, as

with all the Balenoptere. In these fingers the first (external)

one has four bones, namely one metacarpal and three phalanges,

the four measuring 44, 4, 33, and 3 inches in length. In the

second finger, which is longer, there are six large bones and a

small terminal point as indication of a seventh ; these articu-

lations are 54, 5, 4, 22, 2, and 14 inch in length. The third

Dr. H. Burmeister on two Species of Balenoptera. 417

finger is but little shorter than the second, though somewhat

longer than the first, and has the same bones as the second,

though each one is rather smaller—44, 4}, 34, 3, 2,and 13 inch

in length. The fourth finger (which ought to contain, ac-

cording to analogy, one metacarpal bone and three phalanges,

being the shortest of all) has been completely lost from both fins.

Of the bones at the side of the sexual aperture, corresponding

to the bones of the pubis of the pelvis, one has been preserved,

very similar to the same bone in B. physalus. It is slender

and nearly a foot long, compressed and slightly arched, with a

projecting and rather sharp angle on the upper margin, 3 inches

above the termination. To conclude, the hyoid apparatus is com-

posed of the three bones which are well known in all whales,

of which the middle one much resembles the same bone

figured in the work of Van Beneden and Gervais, pls. x. & xi.

fig. 15; but the two lateral ones are not externally so bulky as

those in the same figure. The central bone has a transverse

Jength, measured in a straight line, of 26 inches; and each of

the lateral processes is 15} inches long.

We have also the hyoidal apparatus of B. intermedia. It is

a little larger ; its middle portion measures 31 inches in length ;

and each anterior horn is somewhat larger in bulk though

shorter, 144 inches in length. In the middle portion the two

angles at which the horns are united are shorter and more

divergent; and the whole shape of the apparatus is slightly

different from that of the other species. For the rest, I

can affirm that not a single bone of the one skeleton is

identical in shape or size with the corresponding bone of the

other; and this proves clearly a specific difference between the

two animals.

Unfortunately I am not acquainted with the sex of my

skeleton of B. patachonica so as to certify definitely that the

indicated differences are not sexual ; but they appear to me of

too great importance to admit this supposition. I have also

under my notice the whalebone-plates of the two animals;

but those of B. intermedia are too much destroyed for a com-

plete description. Those of B. patachonica are composed of

300 lamine on each side of the mouth, of which the 136

smaller ones at the end are all white, also the underside of

the others, with the bristles of the whole; whereas the beards

of the plates of B. intermedia are completely black, and there

is no vestige of the whitish colour of the other species.

It follows from the explanation here given, according to my

views, that there are actually three well-defined species different

from the Balenoptera of our coast of the Atlantic Ocean, which

are distinguished in the following manner :—

418 Dr. A. Giinther on some new

1. B. intermedia. The largest; 58 feet long, with a head 14

feet in length and 6 feet in breadth, and 8 feet high at the

middle of the body; has the most robust figure, most bulky

cranium; and its vertebree number at least sixty-six (besides the

sixty-one preserved there being five to six wanting), which

number may be divided into seven cervical, fifteen dorsal, six-

teen lumbar, and sixteen caudal with spines beneath.

2. B. patachonica. Rather smaller, although not shorter ;

but has a more slender figure and less bulky head, 53 feet broad,

although also 14 feet in length; of the fifty-eight and a halt

vertebree preserved, seven are cervical, sixteen dorsal, seventeen

lumbar, and thirteen caudal with under-spines, also wanting

the five to six terminal vertebree. This species is described in

the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.’ 1865, p. 191.

3. B. bonaérensis. The smallest, 30 to 32 feet in length,

with a head 7 feet long and 4 feet wide, and a vertebral column

of forty-eight vertebrae, divided into seven cervical, eleven

dorsal, twelve lumbar, and eighteen caudal; but only the nine

anterior have under-spines. ‘The skeleton of this species was

described by me in the ‘ Proc. Zool. Soc.’ 1867, p. 707.

Posrscript.—In the description, instead of nine under-spines

of the tail it should be twelve, as I have lately found three more

bones on the skeleton, each open and composed of two separate

pieces; the number of vertebra is exactly the same as im the

European species. Mr. Turner of Edinburgh is of Dr. Gray’s

opinion, and separates Stbbaldius from Physalus. I have seen

the Ostend specimen of Stbbaldius at Leipsic, and cannot under-

stand how M. van Beneden could unite this gigantic animal

with the slender Physalus, which I know very well, from the

daily inspection of the skeleton in the museum of Greifswald.

Buenos Ayres, Et. ie

September 25, 1872.

LX.—On some new Species of Reptiles and Fishes collected by

J. Brenchley, Esq. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S.

Tue following diagnoses are taken from an account of the

reptiles and fishes collected by J. Brenchley, Esq., in Poly-

nesia, the East Indies, and Central Asia, and kindly presented

by him to the Trustees of the British Museum. This ac-

count, which contains more detailed descriptions, was prepared

some time ago for a large work which Mr. Brenchley has in

the press; but as the execution of the numerous plates with

which the work will be illustrated may cause a further delay

in its publication, I have thought it best to publish now the

following shorter notices.

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 419

REPTILES.

Evremias Brenchleyt.

The supranasals meet, separating the prefrontals from the

rostral; preefrontals not confluent; a small azygos shield be-

tween the postfrontals. Six upper labials in front of the

infraocular, which forms a part of the free margin of the lip ;

the sixth labial only about half the size of the infraocular.

Eyelid entirely scaly. Collar formed by eight scales, subequal

insize. Ventral scutes forming thirty-one transverse and twelve

longitudinal series. Preeanal region covered with small scales.

Fore limb reaching nearly to the extremity of the snout when

stretched forwards ; hind limb extending to the axil of the fore

limb. Upper parts brownish olive, with an indistinct series of

light-coloured ocelli on each side of the back; a well-defined

whitish band commences behind the eye, passes through the

tympanum, and runs along each side of the body to the axil of

the hind leg. Hinder side of the thighs with a few whitish

ocelli on a black ground.

A single adult female was obtained in Mongolia.

Eremias multiocellata.

The supranasals meet, separating the single preefrontal from

the rostral; prefrontals confluent into a single shield; a small

azygos shield between the postfrontals. Six upper labials in

front of the infraocular, the narrow lower corner of which

enters the free margin of the lip; the sixth labial as large as the

infraocular. Lyelid entirely scaly. Collar formed by a central

larger and numerous smaller lateral shields. Ventral scutes

forming thirty transverse and eighteen longitudinal series.

Preanal region covered with small scales. Fore limb reaching

nearly the extremity of the snout when stretched forwards ;

hind limb extending to the axil of the fore limb. Greenish

olive above, with numerous more or less perfect black rings

enclosing a lighter centre. A somewhat irregular, whitish,

black-edged band along each side of the body, from the eye to

the axil of the hind limb.

A single specimen was obtained in the desert of Gobi, on the

route from Sumé to the Tola river.

Euprepes haplorhinus.

This species would appear to represent a distinct generic

division ; but more than enough genera have been distinguished

by names in the Scincoid family, and I am unwilling to increase

their number without being fully convinced of the generic value

of the distinctive characters.

420 Dr. A. Giinther on some new

This species, then, differs from Huprepes by lacking supra-

nasal shields; it would be a Mocoa, but it has the scales

distinctly provided with three or four keels.

The prefrontal forms a broad suture with the rostral as well

as with the vertical. Only one fronto-parietal, notched behind

to receive the front part of the central occipital. Vertical five-

sided, nearly as long as broad. Nostril wide, in the centre of

the nasal. Har-opening with two or three short lobules in front.

The middle of the body is surrounded by twenty-eight longi-

tudinal series of scales, subequal in size; there are thirty-eight

scales in a longitudinal series between the fore and hind legs.

Six preanal scales, the middle of which are rather larger than

the others. The fore leg extends to the middle of the eye if

stretched forwards; third finger a little shorter than the fourth.

The hind leg covers about two thirds of its distance from the

fore lez; the fourth toe one fourth longer than the third.

With regard to coloration it is very similar to Mocoa tri-

lineata. The dorsal parts are brownish, uniform or with dark

markings more or less confluent into a pair of longitudinal

bands. Sides black, with a well-defined white streak, one scale

broad, from the tympanum, above the shoulder, to the axil of

the hind leg. Lower parts uniform white.

Two examples from the Feejee Islands.

Mocoa micropus.

Prefrontal shield single, in contact with the rostral as well

as with the parietal. Five occipitals, of which the central is

as large as one of the anterior. Har-opening very small, with-

out any lobules. The middle of the body is surrounded by

twenty-one longitudinal series of smooth scales ; six series are

dorsal and rather larger than the others. There are thirty-

five scales in a longitudinal series between the axils of the

fore and hind limbs. Four preanal scales, the two middle of

which are twice the size of the lateral. Legs very feeble, but

five-toed; the fore leg does not reach the ear-opening if stretched

forwards; fingers very short, subequal in length; the third

and fourth toes equal in length. Back light greenish olive,

with a few minute black specks, bordered on the side by a

deep-black band, which gradually passes into the greyish

coloration of the lower parts ; the latter are indistinctly marbled

with whitish.

Two specimens, apparently young, from the Feejee Islands.

Hinulia tetragonurus.

The prefrontal forms a broad suture with the rostral as well

aswith thevertical. Vertical five-sided, much longer than broad.

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 421

Only one fronto-parietal, notched behind to receive the front

part of the central occipital. Nostril in the centre of the nasal,

with a lunate groove behind. LEar-opening without lobes in

front. The middle of the body is surrounded by twenty-

eight longitudinal series of scales, those on the back being

rather larger than those on the sides and abdomen; there are

forty scales in a longitudinal series between the fore and hind

legs. Four preanal scales, subequal in size. Tail strong,

tetrahedral. Legs feeble; the anterior extends to the ear-

opening if stretched forwards ; fingers very feeble and short ;

the hind leg covers about one half of its distance from the fore

leg; the fourth toe one fourth longer than the third. Upper

parts light brownish, finely marbled with darker, sides lighter ;

lower parts white.

One example, apparently adult, from the Feejee Islands.

NANNOSCINCUS (g.n. Scincid.).

Appears to be allied to Cophoscincus (Ptrs.), but differing by

having keeled scales. Body of moderate proportions; legs

feeble, five-toed. Eyelid narrow, scaly. No supranasal. Har-

opening externally not visible, entirely hidden by scales.

Nannoscincus fuscus.

Rostral shield depressed, flat, somewhat wedge-shaped.

Preefrontal forming a broad suture with the rostral as well as with

the vertical. Vertical much longer than broad, tapering behind.

Four supraciliaries. Five occipitals, the middle of which is

smaller than one of the anterior. Nasals rhomboid, with the

anterior and posterior angles acute, perforated in the middle by

the nostrils. Five or six supralabials. Scales with three or

four keels, in twenty-two longitudinal series, the dorsal not

being conspicuously larger than the lateral; there are thirty-

eight transverse series of scales between the fore and hind legs.

Four preanal scales, the middle being somewhat the larger.

Anterior toes almost rudimentary ; the third and fourth hind

toes rather longer than the second. Upper parts uniform

shining blackish brown ; lower parts speckled with greyish.

One example from the Feejee Islands.

Gymnodactylus multicarinatus.

Snout broader than long. Head without any larger tubercles,

except in the occipital and temporal regions. Six upper

labials; the middle lower labial large, without mentalia, or

with a pair of only rudimentary ones behind. Back with from

sixteen to twenty regular longitudinal series of small conical

422 . Dr. A. Giinther on some new

tubercles ; the series are equidistant from each other, and the

tubercles are close to one another and ribbed. The abdominal

scales are very small, strongly keeled, and gradually reduced

to minute tubercles in the direction towards the vent. . ‘The

tail in all our specimens is more or less reproduced and uni-

formly granular, without tubercles or scutes. The upperside

of the hind limbs with scattered, strongly ribbed tubercles.

No pores. Upper parts brownish uniform, or with dark trans-

verse markings; sometimes a blackish streak from the eye to

above the tympanum.

Several examples from the New Hebrides (Aneiteum) and

Tongatabu.

Peripia cyclura.

Back uniform granular, without any tubercles. Scales in

the middle of the belly in about forty-five longitudinal series.

Tail rounded, not depressed, very narrowly verticillated, with-

out enlarged subcaudals. Nine upper and

eight lower labial shields. Front lower labial

elongate; but the two adjoining labials are

still longer; the chin is covered with very

small shields, of which one in the centre,

immediately behind the front labial, is /

generally the largest. Brownish grey above,

with more or less irregular brown bands

across the back, each band being ornamented

with some small white spots ; the brown bands are sometimes

replaced by a dark marbling.

Several specimens from New Caledonia, all agreeing in the

peculiar pholidosis of the chin and in the form of the tail. The

longest is 43 inches long, of which the tail takes 2 inches.

I have no doubt that Professor Peters is perfectly right in

supposing that Peripia Peronii is identical with Peropus mu-

tilatus of Wiegmann (Monatsber. Berl. Acad. 1867, p. 14).

Twice nat. size.

FISHES.

Dicerobatis draco.

Teeth tessellated, those of the upper jaw in forty-six series,

each tooth being much broader than long and_ trenchant

behind. The band of teeth terminates laterally at a short

distance from the angle of the mouth. Body and tail smooth.

The distance between the mouth and dorsal fin is one half of

the greatest width of the body. ‘Tail more than twice as long

as the disk, without spine. Upper parts uniform brown, top

of the dorsal fin white. - EEE re,

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 423

Misol Island. Greatest width ofthe disk 15 inches ; distance

between the front margin of the head and dorsal fin 73 inches.

Scolopsis xenochrous.

DD: 7 A. .. L. lat. 44. LL. transv. 33/14.

Allied to Scolopsis ghanam.

The height of the body is contained thrice in the total length

(without caudal), the length o head thrice and a third.

The diameter of the eye is one third of the length of the head,

and a little more than that of the snout, and equal to the width

of the interorbital space. Infraorbital arch with two strong

spines, one pointing forwards, the other backwards ; two or

three small denticulations below the strong spine. Preeoper-

culum with the angle projecting. Dorsal spines rather strong,

but less so than those of the anal fin; second and third anal

spines nearly equal in strength and length. Brownish olive ;

a narrow pearl-coloured band along the uppermost dorsal series

of scales; a large blackish-brown spot on the posterior part

of the gill-cover. A broad silvery band, three scales broad,

along the trunk below the lateral line ; the anterior part of the

band is crossed by a pair of short oblique brown streaks, the

middle part with a brown spot on the base of each scale ; the

posterior portion uniform pearl-coloured. Preorbital with a

narrow silvery band. Fins colourless.

Misol Island. Length 7 inches.

Cubiceps pauctradiatus.

D.10| 75. A.;. Lat. 50.

The height of the body is one fourth of the total length

(without caudal), the length of the head two sevenths. Ab-

domen compressed into a ridge in front of the ventral fins,

which are received into a groove of the posterior part of the

abdomen. The diameter of the eye is equal to the width of

the interorbital space and one third of the length of the head.

Snout shorter than the eye. Jaws with a series of minute

teeth. The vomer and tongue are armed with a long elliptical

patch of very small obtuse teeth ; no teeth on the palatine bones.

Maxillary hidden below the preorbital, and extending to the

front margin of the orbit. Humeral plate much developed,

triangular. Pectoral fin very long, longer than the head, and

extending to the vent; not quite thrice as long as the ventrals.

Caudal fin forked nearly to the base; the lobes can overlap

each other. Uniform brown; inside of the mouth and gill-

cavity black.

Misol Island. Length 53 inches.

424 D:. A. Giinther on some new

Percis alboguttata.

D5 | 22. A... Ue lat.60. 1. transy. 5/13)

The height of the body is contained six times and a half in

the total length (without caudal), the length of the head thrice

and a half. The width of the interorbital space is one

third of the diameter of the eye, which is two sevenths of the

length of the head, and not quite equal to the length of the

snout. Lower jaw slightly projecting beyond the upper ; the

maxillary extends somewhat behind the vertical from the front

margin of the orbit. Cheek covered with minute scales to

below the middle of the eye. The fourth dorsal spine is rather

longer than the third, and about twice as long as the fifth.

The ventral fins reach to the vent ; caudal truncated. Brownish

olive, with a series of five small pearl-coloured spots on each

side of the back, along the base of the dorsal fin; a series of

indistinct brownish spots along the lower half of the side;

caudal fin with a pair of brown spots on the base, the lower ~

spot being followed by an ovate white spot. Fins without

distinct markings.

Misol Island. Length 6 inches.

Salarias coronatus.

DAZ 20 TAL20)

The height of the body is contained six times in the total

length (without caudal), the length of the head five times and

a third. The forehead projects a little beyond the mouth.

The supraciliary tentacle is about as long as the eye, and ter-

minates in several fringes. Nuchal crest none. <A pair of

canine teeth in the lower jaw. Dorsal fin deeply notched.

Pectoral nearly as long as the head. TF lesh-coloured, with

eight dark cross bands as broad as, or broader than, the inter-

spaces, darkest on the edges. Back with scattered brownish-

violet spots smaller than the pupil. Sides and upper surface

of the head with small round yellow spots, a group on the

crown of the head being placed in a circle. Throat with

three brownish-violet cross bands. Vertical fins nearly imma-

culate; anal with a blackish margin; pectoral finely dotted

with black.

Salomon Islands. Length 32 inches.

Cherops Brenchleyt.

D7. A.% LL. lat. 28. L. transv. 3.

The height of the body is equal to the length of the head,

and one third of the total (without caudal). Head much

longer than high ; the depth of the preeorbital is more than the

Species of Reptiles and Fishes. 425

width of the orbit. Scales on the cheek small, scarcely im-

bricate, in four series. Operculum terminating in a membra-

naceous flap behind. Posterior canine tooth present. Pre-

operculum not serrated. Reddish olive: a broad pearl-coloured

band ascends obliquely from above the axil of the pectoral to-

wards the origin of the soft dorsal ; its upper half is surrounded

by a broad brown margin, which is spread over the base of the

last dorsal spines and anterior rays. Root of the pectoral

silvery. No other markings in a preserved state.

Misol Island. Length 73 inches.

Clupea pinguis.

Bros Dedl7inpA,o19, Liilatt43. do. transys.

The height of the body is one fifth of the total length

(without caudal), the length of the head one fourth. Scales

deciduous. Lower jaw but slightly projecting beyond the

upper; maxillary extending to below the front margin of the

eye. Teeth none. Snout longer than the eye, which is one

fourth of the length of the head. Ventral fin inserted below

the anterior third of the dorsal fin, the base of which is midway

between the root of the caudal and the end of the snout. Caudal

fin deeply forked. There are fourteen abdominal scutes behind

the base of the ventrals. Back bluish green, sides silvery,

both colours being sharply defined from each other.

Misol Island. Length 5 inches.

Ophichthys pinquis.

Teeth pointed, in a single series in the maxillary, mandible,

and on the vomer. Head small, pointed, its length being con-

tained five times and a half in the distance of the gill-opening

from the vent. Eye about half the length of the snout, the

cleft of the mouth extending considerably behind its hinder

margin. Dorsal and anal fins low, nearly entirely hidden in

a groove ; the former commences somewhat in advance of the

gill-opening. The length of the pectoral fin is about one third

of that of the head. Reddish brown, with eight large broad

black spots across the back of the trunk, and fifteen across the

back of the tail ; they extend downwards to the middle of the

side. Head with numerous small round blackish spots. No

other spots.

Salomon Islands. Length 16 inches, the tail being 94 inches

long.

Ophichthys filaria.

Allied to O. longipinnis and O. Kirkii, but distinguished

from both by the considerably greater slenderness of the body,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 4. Vol. x. 30

426 Dr. A. Giinther on Psammoperca and Cnidon.

the depth of which is two ninths of the length of the head, whilst

it is rather more than one third in those two species.

The length of the head is one tenth of the distance between

the gill-opening and vent; tail almost as long as the body.

Cleft of the mouth of moderate width, extending to some dis-

tance behind the eye, which is small, and somewhat nearer to

the corner of the mouth than to the end of the snout. Snout

pointed, more than twice as long as the eye, projecting beyond

the mouth. Anterior nostril with a small tube ; posterior on

the inner side of the lip, below the front margin of the eye.

Teeth pointed, uniserial. Gill-openings lateral. Pectoral fin

reduced to a minute filament. ‘The dorsal and anal are about

half as high as the body, the former commencing midway

between the gill-opening and the eye. Coloration uniform.

Misol Island. Length 24 inches, the tail being 114 inches

long ; depth of the body 3 lines.

Ophichthys misolensis.

The length of the head is one seventh of the distance between

the gill-opening and vent; tail as long as the body. The depth

of the body is one third of the length of the head. Eye small,

above the middle of the cleft of the mouth, which is of moderate

width. Snout pointed, twice as long as the eye, projecting

beyond the mouth. Anterior nostril with a very short tube ;

posterior on the inner side of the lip, below the front margin of

the eye. Teeth equally small, pointed, uniserial. Gill-openings

somewhat oblique, lateral. Pectoral fin none. Dorsal and

anal fins low, the former commencing at a very short distance

behind the gill-opening, the latter immediately behind the vent.

Coloration uniform.

Misol Island. Length 11 inches.

LXI.—On Psammoperca and Cnidon. By Dr. A. GUNTHER.

THESE two genera are identical; and the name Psammoperca

given by Richardson in 1846 has the priority, the name

Cnidon dating. from the year 1849 (Mill. & Trosch. Hor.

Ichthyol. Heft 3). The amended diagnosis of the genus will

stand as follows :—

Seven branchiostegals. Pseudobranchie none. All the

teeth villiform, in bands, without canine teeth ; tongue with a

small, ovate, rough patch. Operculum with a small spine ;

preoperculum with a strong spine at the angle, with the

posterior edge serrated, and with the lower limb smooth and

covered by membrane. ‘Two dorsal fins, slightly continuous,

the first with seven or eight strong spines, another being

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 427

attached to the soft dorsal ; three anal spines. Caudal rounded.

Pectoral short, rounded. Scales rather large, finely ctenoid.

It is more difficult to come to a final decision as regards the

specific affinity of Psammoperca waigiensis and Cnidon chi-

nensis. The British Museum possesses now six examples:— —

1. The typical example, stuffed, from Australia (9 inches).

2. A stuffed example from Victoria (7 inches).

3. An example in spirits from New South Wales (9 inches).

4, A stuffed example from Torres Straits (12 inches).

5. An example in spirits from Manila (10 inches); obtained

by Dr. A. B. Meyer, and undoubtedly identical with Cnidon

chinensis.

6. A dry skin, said to be from China, obtained from a dealer

(10 inches long).

In all these specimens the formula of the fins is the same:

the first dorsal has only seven spines, not eight *, the eighth

spine belonging to the second dorsal fin. In other respects

nearly every one of the specimens shows certain peculiarities,

so that no two agree perfectly with one another, not even those

from South Australia; but I think these differences are so

slight as not to allow of specific distinction. Thus the number

of scales in the lateral line varies from forty-seven to fifty-five ;

the vertical fins are sometimes quite naked, sometimes more or

less thinly covered with minute scales ; the humerus has some-

times two short points behind, sometimes one of the points is

slightly denticulated, sometimes the lower is absent altogether.

There is only one point by which the Philippine specimen is

somewhat more conspicuously distinguished; and that is the

distinctly concave profile of the snout ; but also in this respect

it is approached by that of our Australian example which is

preserved in spirits, although the concavity is so slight that it.

has been entirely effaced in the stuffed specimens.

Under these circumstances I am inclined to regard these

fishes as specifically identical.

LXII.—On the Structure of the Echinoidea. By 8. Lovin.

[Concluded from p. 385. }

THE same arrangement that is expressed by the formula for

the two series of the ambulacral peristomial plates, makes itself

apparent also in the appearance of the spheridia. In the Spa-

tangidee (for example, brissopsis lyrifera) they first show them-

selves in the one-pored peristomial plate in each ambulacrum,

quite close to the suture, and usually incline over towards the

* What I have formerly (in dried specimens) taken for the spine of the

second dorsal fin is, in fact, only the hardened first simple ray.

30*

428 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

two-pored plate. While the peristome is still pentagonal, and

the mouth only.a very little removed from the middle of the

buccal membrane, a spheeridium has appeared in the two-pored

peristomial plate also in Echinocardium ovatum ; but this is still

much smaller than the first. Thus, even here, series I. a—V.

comes after series I.6-V.a. When the mouth has shifted its

position so far backwards that it nearly touches the labrum,

each ambulacrum shows a third spheridium in plate 2 in series

I. 6-V. a; and when the mouth begins to be concealed by the

prolceng labrum, the fourth is added in plate 2 in series

.a-V.b, apparently first in the paired rows of the trivium.

A very young Cassidulus caribearum, 4 millims. in length, has

already two spheeridia, the unequal size of which shows that

of the one-pored peristomial plate to be the older one ; when

7 millims. long it has four, all visible, in deep cavities. When

it has reached a length of 12 millims., there are six spheeridia,

but the overgrowth characteristic of this group has likewise

commenced. An outer layer of shell-substance of irregularly

reticulate texture, closely resembling a froth, spreads upon the

surface of the test ; itis seen most distinctly in the sternal region

of the unpaired interradium, where it starts from the middle of

each plate and extends over its margins in narrow, tortuous,

irregular ridges, so as finally, in the adult, to form the uniform

surface with small scattered holes which is peculiar to these

genera. In the ambulacra this excrescent layer is first seen to

raise the margins of the depressions in which the spheridia

are seated, thus forming a projection from them which gradually

coversthe spheeridia; and just as of each pair the firstspheridium

makes its appearance in series I. (-V. a, so it is also this which

in its order is first concealed, and afterwards that of series

I. a-V. 6, so that they are overgrown in the order of their

appearance.

Toxopneustes dribachensis again may show how the spheeridia

appear in the Latistelle (see Pl. XIV. figs. 1-8). An indi-

vidual of 3 millims. (fig. 2) has two spheeridia in each ambula-

crum :—one, the oldest, on the binary plate of the first primary

plate of series I. 0-V. a, near its margin ; another on the ternary

plate of series I.a-V.6. At the size of 6 millins. (fig. 3) their

number is four; 1 stands still nearer the margin of its primary

plate 1, and 2 as before, and two new ones have made their

appearance—3 on the other primary plate of the binary large

plate of series I. B~V.a, and 4 on the third primary plate (3)

of the ternary of series [. a-V. b, which is an entire plate, not

on 2, which is intermediate and a half plate. When the animal

is a little more grown (fig. 4), it.has also four spheridia, not,

however, 1, 2, 3, 4, but 2, 3, 4, 5. The binary large plate

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 429

of series I. b~V. a, both primary plates of which have coalesced,

has become depressed to a great. extent ; and its spheridium,

which was the first to appear and stood on the margin of its

primary plate 1, has disappeared. Spheeridium 2 still remains,

but, during the progress of the depression, has approached the

margin; 3 stands, as before, on the binary large plate of series

I. b-V. a, and 4 on the ternary plate of series .a-V.b; anda

new spheridium has made its appearance on the primary plate

1 of large plate 2 of series I.6-V.a. These spheridia, 2, 3,

4, 5, are still present after the large plates 1 and 2 of both

series have coalesced into secondary large plates, and the animal

has become 11 millims. in diameter (fig. 6). But in a some-

what larger animal of 15 millims. diameter (fig. 7), which has

five spheeridia, these are not 2,3, 4, 5, 6, but 3, 4, 5, 6,7; for

the spheridium 2, gradually approaching the margin, has

disappeared, a spheridium, 6, has been added apparently on the

primary plate 1 of large plate 2 in series I. a—V.6, and yet

another, 7, apparently on the primary plate 1 of large plate 2

in series I. 0-V.a. Finally, at the size of 52 millims. (fig. 8),

when the ambulacral peristomial plates are large plates of the

third order, consisting of 1, 2, and 3 united, their six spheeridia

have the ordinal numbers 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, the last of which

apparently belongs to primary plate 1 of large plate 3. “Thus

by the resorption which takes place in the margin of the peri-

stome, two spheridia have been lost, and one radiole with its

tubercle.

Thus the asymmetry in the Echinoidean skeleton, with relation

to tts antero-posterior axis,is expressed within each ambulacrum,

im its two subordinate rows of plates, most strikingly in the

arrangement, size, form, changes, and movements, during growth,

of the peristomial plates and those immediately following them,

in the number and position of their pores, in the order of the

appearance and disappearance of the spheridia; and it will

probably not fail, upon closer investigation, in the relations of

the radioles and pedicellariz. In effect it abrogates the radiate

lan of structure and displays the homologies between the

Spatangide and Kchinide, that even under the latter appa-

rently radiate form we find in the bivium, which symmetrically

encloses an unpaired interradium, a bilateral arrangement on

the two sides of an antero-posterior axis, which is the same in

the mature animal in all the different groups in the class.

If in the peristome of Toawopneustes drébachensis (fig. 1,

Plate XIV.), or of some other Echinid, we unite by straight

lines the five plates I. a, I. a, III. 6, 1V. a, V. 6, and the five,

1.6, IL. 4, U1. a, IV. 4, V. a, two pentagons of the same size

and form are inscribed in the circle, each of which has three

430 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

approximated angles of equal size. ‘These two pentagons are

so placed that the side I. a V.6 stands towards the unpaired

interradium, and towards the madreporite’s interradium the

side II. 6 III. a, which is homologous with this,—that the four

sides which in the two pentagons enclose angles of equal size

but not homologous, are parallel two and two, but the sides

which are common for the two unequal but homologous angles

intersect each other,—and, moreover, so that the two pentagons

together form with their outer lines a figure whichissymmetrical,

not in relation to that diameter of the stoma which coincides

with the antero-posterior axis of the animal, but only in relation

to a diameter, a@, which passes through the pomt where

the last-mentioned sides intersect each other, so that all lines

which unite the homologous angles of the two pentagons

(namely, [V.a with IV.6, II. 6 with V.a, V. 6 with HI. a,

I. awith II. }, and I. 6 with II. a) are reciprocally parallel and

perpendicular to the same diameter—and that consequently, if

sph. 5 are

Buccal area in a young Brissopsis lyrifera: sph. spheeridia.

one pentagon is turned round this diameter as upon an axis, it

coincides with the other. In the same way we get two similar

pentagons in the pentagonal peristome with rounded angles of

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 4381

the young Spatangus (see fig. 3) ; and it is clear that this is the

case also in the typically equally pentagonal peristome of the

Clypeastrid and Cassidulide. ‘The diameter a passes, if

produced, through ambulacrum IV. and interradium 1.

The interradia are rows of plates of the perisome, different

from the ambulacra in growth and movement. If, by boiling

in solution of soda, we carefully separate their plates in Spa-

tangus purpureus, Brissopsis lyrifera, and Hchinocardium

ovatum, we find that many of them are furnished at their adoral

angles with a semilunar lamella,which projects within the aboral

margin of the preceding plate, which has a corresponding de-

pression on its mner side. Spatangus has such a lamella on

the third and fourth frontal and the third, fourth, and fifth

lateral plates ; Brissopsds on the third and fourth frontal and

third, fourth, fifth, and sixth lateral plates in the hinder row ;

Lichinocardium on the third lateral plate in the anterior row.

No doubt the same is the case in many Spatangidee, perhaps

also in other irregular Echinoidea. This is an indication that

the plates of the interradia are in some degree scales, although

they never fulfil the same functions as the scales in the peri-

some of the Holothuriz and Crinoidea.

The interradia in the Echinide are in a high degree mutually

accordant ; into the peristome of these they always enter with

two plates, a large and a small one. It is generally only in

young Kchinide that the position of these can be observed.

Toxopneustes drébachensis, when young, constantly shows that

if we mark the animal’s right lateral interradium with 1, and

consequently the unpaired one with 5, the smaller peristomial

plate and the larger new-formed plate close to the vertical plate

are found to belong to la, 2a, 36, 4a, 5a, and the larger

peristomial and smaller new-formed plates to 1 6, 26, 3a, 44,

56. It is the interradium 3, the left frontal of the animal, that

changes the position of the plates (see fig. 1, Pl. XIV.). We

find that such an arrangement is symmetrical on the two sides

of a diameter passing through ambulacrum I. and interradium

3, the same that is the longitudinal axis in Hchinometra, and in

the vertical plane of which it has the curved line of its flexure.

Whilst in Hchinoneus the interradia greatly resemble those

of the Kchinide in the forms and relative sizes of the plates,

so that even the unpaired one, although perforated by the large

periproctium, is still in a high degree in accordance with the

paired ones, there is nevertheless a remarkable difference with

respect to the peristomial plates, which is worth indicating in

order that it may be carefully investigated in young indivi-

duals, like so many other things in that animal, such as the

oblique mouth, &c. Interradia 1, 3, and 5 enter the peristome

432 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

with a single plate, 2 and 4 with two plates; and if we reduce

the peristome of Hchinoneus to a circle, this arrangement also is

symmetrical to the diameter which passes through ambulacrum

I. and interradium 3. All other irregular Echinoidea have in

each interradium only a single plate in the peristome. The

arrangement of the interradia is symmetrical in relation to the

animal’s antero-posterior axis, which is also its longitudinal

axis, and passes through the unpaired ambulacrum III. and

the unpaired interradium 5—with a constant deviation in the

Spatangidz, without deviation in the Clypeastrid and Cassi-

dulide ; whilst in these two families all the four paired

interradia resemble each other in a high degree, the two frontal

above all, and the two lateral are reciprocally perfectly sym-

metrical, and the unpaired interradium differs little from

them, the plates being analogous in proportion and form, but

cut out as if eroded for the periproctium, which is surrounded

by the same plates during the whole life of the animal. This

is the case in a high degree in Laganum and Echinocyamus,

which have one of the youngest plates which pushes into the

vertical plate large and pointed. So also in Clypeaster, Sto-

lonoclypus, Encope, Mellita, Echinarachnius, and Arachnotdes,

in which the younger plates are gradually smaller and smaller,

and those which lie close to the vertical plates small and of

equal size, diverging and receiving the genital pores between

them.

Much of all this is quite different in the Spatangide. The

frontal interradia are symmetrical in all living genera; and

between them and the lateral ones there is a considerable

agreement. Ifthe plates 2 in the frontals are very large, and

the following ones very short, as in Breynia, Lovenia, Hupa-

tagus, Plagionotus, Maretia, Spatangus, and Echinocardium,

the same conditions occur in the lateral interradia ; if the plates

of the frontals approach a nearly equilateral pentagonal or

hexagonal form, the same prevails in the laterals. But among

themselves the lateral interradia are never alike, always un-

symmetrical on both sides of the longitudinal line; and it is

always the right lateral interradium, 1, that deviates. Those

Spatangidee, which seem to be most numerous among existing

forms, but were very few during the earliest periods of the

family, the Prymnodesmit, or those which have an infraanal

fasciola and the most regular ambulacra, are also those in which

this asymmetry is most strictly maintained. All their genera

have in the right lateral interradium, in its hinder row, 1 a,

one plate less than in the same row of the left one, 40; the

first three plates of the right peristomial plate 1 and two

following, represent the first four of the left lateral interradium,

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 433

namely peristomial plate 1 and the three following 2, 3, 4.

One of the three in interradium 1 a must therefore be regarded

as composed of two plates; and it is clear that it is the second,

which consequently should be indicated by 24+3; but both

plate 1 and plate 4, and sometimes plate 5, assist in filling up

the deficiency which occurs when the right 2 +3 is not so large

as the left 2 and 3 taken together. In most cases the former

is as large as the two latter, asin Brissopsis, Maretia, Lovenia,

Eupataqus, and Echinocardium ; and in these, moreover, plate

4 is of equal size on both sides; in Breynia, Plagionotus, Spa-

tangus, Xanthobrissus, Micraster, Paleotropus, and Meoma

(which last has only a half infraanal fasciola) the plate 2+3 of

the right side is somewhat less than the left 2 and 3 taken

together; and then it is the right plate 4 in Wicraster, Echino-

cardium, and Paleotropus, and with this also plate 1, and, in

Meoma, plate 5, that is larger than the corresponding plate on

the left side and fills up the deficiency. In Brissus, on both

sides, plate 2 in 16 and 4a, is so large and so nearly equi-

laterally pentagonal that it presses away plate 2 in 1a and 46

from all contact with plate 1; and, moreover, plate 2 in 16 is

much larger than in 4a, so that it makes up no small part of

the measure that must be filled up in order to correspond with

2,3,4in 44; here, also, 2+3 in 1a is considerably less than

2 and 3 im 46 taken together, and 4 in 1a larger than 4

in 40.

The second group of Spatangide, which is now, so far as we

know, less rich in generic forms, the Prymnadeti, those which

are destitute of an infraanal fasciola, is far less regular as

regards what is here in question. Five genera resemble many

of the Prymnodesmii in this respect—that they have plate 2+3

in interradium 1 a of the right side equal in size to the left

2 and 3 taken together, and, moreover, plate 4 of equal size on

both sides, as in Agassizia and Schizaster, or, as in Mera,

Abatus, and Hemiaster, plate 2+3 in 1a smaller than 2 and 3

in 4 6, and therefore plates 1 and 4 of the right side, and in

Hemiaster also 5, somewhat larger than on the left. But three

other genera are very divergent. Desorda has plate 2 of inter-

radium 1a@ amalgamated, not with plate 3 in the same row,

but with plate 2 in 14; and the same occurs in Atrapus; and

in the former plate 2 in 44 is besides separated from plate 1.

Paleostoma, however, is the most divergent. Whilst all other

Spatangide have, in each interradium, immediately after the

peristomial plate 1, a pair of plates 2, this genus has plate 2

simple in both the frontal and lateral interradia ; and, moreover,

in interradium 1 it is not in 1 a that plates 2 and 3 are amal-

gamated, but in the row 1 6.

434 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

This is the diversity that the right interradium 1 shows in

all known genera of recent Spatangide. It is quite clear that

it is not the left side that has a plate more, but the right that

has a plate less, and that here within a region not far from the

peristome, but separated therefrom, the normal structure of the

plates is disturbed. It is in the direction of this interradium

that the diameter lies in relation to which the ambulacra are

symmetrically disposed. Whether this diameter may possibly

indicate the heterologous position which the Echinoderm, whilst

still residing in its larva, had with regard to the latter, a pri-

mordial axis, from which it subsequently passed to another

antero-posterior axis, or whether this abnormal coalescence

of certain plates on one side of the animal may perhaps have

some connexion with what takes place when the Echinoderm

took up into itself the stomach and intestine of its larva, are

questions which deserve to be borne in mind during further in-

vestigations upon the development of the Echinodermata, but

which, for the present, we can only treat in a general way.

The unpaired interradium differs far more from the paired

in the Spatangide than in the other irregular Kchinoidea. _ It

has a far more independent structure; and its dissimilar

plates, which are essentially symmetrical, are differentiated for

various functions. ‘The first, or peristomial plate, which in the

young is not very unlike those of the paired interradia, becomes

developed into the labrum, with which the animal, during its

movement forward in the soft sea-bottom, raises the mass of

mud which constantly fills its intestinal canal. Behind the

labrum follows the sternum, composed, like all the following seg-

ments, of two paired plates, furnished with powerfully movable,

more or less oar-shaped radioles, with which the animal rows

itself away; and behind the sternum the episternum and the

long row of the abdominal plates, which are generally numerous,

and which, in most of the existing genera, close at the ma-

dreporite, or, in Hemiaster and many extinct genera, are sepa-

rated therefrom by eye-plates or vertical plates, when these

close together behind the madreporite.

The labrum, in most, is very short, so that, with its

outer margins, it occupies only the first 2-pored radial plate ;

in others, such as Maretia, Lovenia, Breynia, Hupatagus,

Atrapus, and Paleostoma, it is so produced backward that it

corresponds to the two or three first radial plates. The sternum

presents, most distinctly in the Prymnodesmii, a certain corre-

spondence with the plates 2 of the paired interradia, inasmuch

as it is usually small when these are very large, as in Breynia,

Plagionotus, Eupatagus, and Lovenia. Its relation to the bivium

has already been mentioned. The plates of the episternum, in

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 435

the same group, are narrowed or pointed backward ; and their

outer margin forms, with the outer margin of the first abdominal

pair on each side, the angulus episternalis, into which the pro-

duced plates of the bivium project. This angle is very deep

in Lupatagus, Breynia, Plagionotus, Maretia, Echinocardium,

Xanthobrissus, and Paleotropus, and shallower in Lovenia,

Brissus, Meoma, Brissopsis, and Spatangus. It is very small

in the Micraster of the Chalk, in which it makes its earliest

appearance, and which has the episternal plates still of nearly

the same form as the other abdominal plates; this is also the

condition in the Prymnadeti, in which all the posterior part of

the unpaired interradium (e. g. in Hemdaster), by its uniformity,

has a certain resemblance to the same part in the Cassidulide.

This group of Spatangide also differs from the Prymnodesmii

in that the plates of the unpaired interradium belonging to the

left side are notably longer than those of the right side. Even

the left sternal plate projects beyond the right one in most of

them; if not, the episternum and all following segments are

elongated. In Palwostoma this difference goes very far, inasmuch

as the left plate of the episternum lies with nearly the whole of

its length behind the right one, and all the following nearly in

the same way. <A consequence of this is a projection by which

the periproctium, which here also is bounded, at least in front,

by the same plates during the whole life of the animal, is not

always symmetrically enchased—that is to say, that on one side

a smaller number of plates attain its margin; and then it is

always the left side that is furnished with a plate more than the

right side. In general we may observe that in the Spatangidee

the left side is preponderant.

If we compare avery young Brissopsis lyrifera,4’6 millims. in

length, with a full-grown one, we find that the paired interradia

in the former have already acquired their permanent form, only

that the oldest plates (of the peristome) are comparatively

broader, and plates 2 a little longer than in the full-grown spe-

cimen—and that in the frontals the small individual has eleven

or ten plates, and the large one thirteen, two small plates having

been added at the ends. In the laterals ten plates may be

counted in both. The unpaired interradium has undergone far

more change. The labrum and sternum are alike in both; the

episternum in the small individual very short, its posterior

margin very narrow ; and the praanal plate, that which does

not enter into the periproctium, and which changes most of all

the plates of the test, is still three times as long as broad, while

in the adult its length and breadth are nearly equal. In the

latter there are 5-8 anal plates, in the young 5-9; the whole

number of plates in the young is fourteen, in the adult fifteen,

436 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinotdea.

It appears from this that the interradia in the Spatangide are

enlarged principally by the growth of the individual plates,

very little by the addition of new plates near the vertical plates.

Every plate has a nucleus, which may often be recognized as

its umbo, and is surrounded internally by the curves of growth.

If we examine a Mellita hexapora 6°5 millims. in length side

by side with an adult of 85 millims., we find (besides the changes

in the interradia of the ventral side, which are a consequence of

the outgrowth of the ambulacra at their expense) that all the

interradia in the small individual have from 9 to 10 plates, and

in the large one 13 or perhaps 12; for it is scarcely possible to

ascertain how far the plate through which the periphery passes

is or is not divided into two by a suture. Here, also, the un-

paired interradium is differentiated from the rest, although not

so much as in Brissopsis. The hiatus (“ lunula”’), which occurs

early in this interradium (all the others are situated in the

ambulacra and have not yet made their appearance), is in the

young nearly circular, in the adult long and narrow; and it

shifts its position during growth, so that in the former it is

bounded by the ventral plates 2 and 3, and by the dorsals 5,

6, and 7, but in the adult by the same ventrals (2 and 3) but

by the dorsals 6, 7, and 8; the dorsals approach the margin,

and there even, in some degree, become ventrals. The peri-

proctium, which, like the stoma, is much larger in proportion

in the young than in the adult, is round in the former and sur-

rounded in front by a narrow margin of plate 2, which gradually

disappears, so that finally plate 1 constitutes the anterior boun-

dary of the aperture,which is oval in the adult. The circumstance

that the number of pairs of plates in the interradia in the adult

onlyin aslight degree exceeds that in the youngest, is notdifficult

to observe also in the Cassidulide and regular Echinide ; whilst

in all the augmentation within the ambulacra is far more consi-

derable, and extraordinarily great in the petala of the Irregulares,

in which it is greatly multiplied. We soon ascertain that in all

Kchinoidea the interradia and ambulacra grow and move in-

dependently, the former as the plated perisome, the latter as

fixed arms.

In Brissopsis it is easy to see that the peripetalous fasciola

strikes over the same interradial plate in the adult as in the

young, over plates 4 and 5 in the frontals, 6 and 7 in the

laterals, and over the tenth plate of the unpaired interradium ;

and it keeps in both to the same ambulacral plate in the bivium,

namely the 14th or 15th, in the paired radii of the trivium to the

ninth or tenth, but shifts, apparently, in the unpaired ambula-

crum from plates 4 and 5 to plates 5 and 6.. So also the

infraanal fasciola passes in young and old over plate 3 of the

Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 437

unpaired interradium (the episternum) and its plates 4 and 5,

and over plates 6, 7, 8, and 9 of the inner rows of the bivium.

The fasciola consequently grows nearly equally with the plates

of the test—but not pertectly ; for it shifts a little on the plate

within the limits of which it remains. On the inside of the

test no indication of it is seen ; it does not occupy an interspace

between the plates of the test, but is entirely external, and

belongs to a stratum of the test which lies without the radioli.

For we see sometimes, e.g. in Agassizia, how, perfectly un-

affected and entire, it covers groups of radiolar tubercles which

are perfectly recognizable, as to form andarrangement, asthrough

a piece of gauze, and in size are but little inferior to those of

the same group which bear radioles immediately beyond its

margin. Or we see, for example in Plagionotus, a crack in it; _

and through this the subjacent layer with its radiolar tubercles

sticks forth. It has fractures which run transversely ; during

growth joints arise, when its close rows of tubercles change

their direction ; and sometimes such a joint coincides with the

suture between subjacent plates, sometimes not, when the

fasciola passes over it unaltered. Both the peripetalous and

infraanal fascioles contain special forms of tentacles which do

not overstep their boundaries. In Lrissopsis the peripetalous

fasciola contains, in the unpaired ambulacrum, the powerful

tentacles with annular calcareous disks, and in the paired ones

branchie ; the infraanal constitutes the limit between the large

tentacles wreathed with cirri, belonging to the inner rows of

the bivium, which are produced so that their pores fall within

its circle, and the simple, finger-shaped ones, which issue from

the ambulacral plates of the sides. When we observe the

entirely external position of the fasciola, how it glides over

ready developed radiolar tubercles, how the most powerful ex-

ternal organs stand forth only within its circle, how in certain

genera (such as Plagionotus, Eupatagus, and Breynia) the

tubercles of the test, which on one side of the boundary indi-

cated by it are small and but slightly developed, suddenly make

their appearance of large size and strongly marked on the other

side, and if we, moreover, note the opposition between the

dissimilarity of the regions thus distinguished in the Spatan-

gide, and the thorough uniformity in the Cidaridz, Cassidulide,

and Echinoneus, which have no fasciola, we are induced to ask

whether a membrane, perhaps following the largest circumfe-

rence of the test, may not cover the sides of the dorsal surface,

and then, in some forms, check the development of the radioli,

but beyond its border, which is the fasciola, leave two free fields

for the outer organs and the hard structures of the test, one

around the vertex and one infraanal. But this is of little con-

438 Prof. 8S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

sequence ; the fasciola is still an unexplained organ. It has a

border-line (“‘ Sawmlinie”’), says Johannes Miiller, comparable

with the ciliary border of the larva in these respects, that it

forms closed loops and produces an extremely brisk ciliary

movement. Its satin-like close clavule of equal height, the

shafts of which, and not the rounded and soft heads, are the

vibratory organs, as was already observed by Johannes Miiller,

are in a high degree sensitive ; and if a few of them are touched,

many pass instantly into a common waving movement. With

respect to the important question whether the Echinoderm has

taken this over from its larva, and the membrane bounds it, it

is worth remembering that the infraanal fasciola and the lateral

(Desor) exclude each other.

On the dorsal surface, in all recent Echinoidea, the five

ambulacra and the five interradia meet at a circle of five

ocellar plates and, typically, five vertical plates. The latter

have been called genital plates, because, in most cases, the

efferent ducts of the genital glands have their external aper-

tures, the genital pores, in them, and they have been regarded

as belonging to the organs of reproduction. But they are no

more a part of these than the plates of the unpaired interradium

are a part of the nutritive organs because in the irregular

Echinoidea the anus perforates them. It is easy to ascertain

that the plates which have here hitherto been named vertical

plates are present and ready formed in young individuals

which are not yet fertile, and to observe how it is only at a

later period, when the genital glands are matured, that their

efferent ducts, oviducts, or vasa deferentia, perforate the plates

from within. The madreporite, on the other hand, is com-

menced early during the larval state, and is undistinguishable

from the vertical plates, while the genital pores in certain

cases are distant from them. The greater the part occupied

in the vertical plates by the aquiferous system, the smaller is

that of the genital organs; and, vice versd, when the former is

small the latter is large. In the Spatangide the genital pore

is wanting in the plate towards which the percolating appa-

ratus spreads from its central region—so far, that of the nor-

mal five never more than four remain, in some not more than

two. When, as in Laganum, the madreporite, which in some

species of that genus opens into a ramified fissure, occupies the

middle of the stellate ring, or, as in Echinocyamus, it consists

only of a single pore, and when, besides, as in both these

genera, the interradia close with one plate of the last pair very

large and wedge-shaped, the genital pores in the vertical plates

are situated near their margins; but when the madreporite is

more widely expanded, so that it occupies the whole star of

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea, 439

the vertex, they are placed between the vertical plates and the

interradia, as in Mellita, or, as in Clypeaster, entirely in the

latter and separated from the vertex by their last two or three

plates. Cotteau long ago made the important observation

that an Kchinid also, namely G'oniopygus, has the genital

pores outside the vertical plates, near their apices*. But in

all the Echinide every one of the five vertical plates bears its

genital pore, and the madreporite is confined to one of them

only, namely 2, the right anterior one. It cannot be doubted

that the madreporite and sand-canal are carried to this position

in this way—that the intestinal canal, which, in the irregular

Kchinoidea, has its anal orifice surrounded by the periproctium

in the unpaired interradium and only in that, but there ter-

minates at any point from the neighbourhood of the mouth

till it cuts through the circle of the vertical and ocellar plates,

opens in the Kchinidz in the middle of that circle, which closes

round it. While the mouth, which opens earlier, has in all

Kchinoidea the same position with relation to the ambulacra

and interradia, and its peristome independently formed regu-

larly by the same plates fitted for the purpose and in a definite

order, the anal apexture has a highly variable position, sur-

rounded by eroded plates, in which it occupies during growth

a gradually increased space.

Ina young Toxopneustesdrébachensis of 5 millims. the vertical

plates form a closed circwit, each over its interradium, and in their

reentrant angles the five plates which bear the eyes are placed

equally regularly. This is also the case in adult individuals of

Echinus, Spherechinus, and Psammechinus, and also in the

Salenidew. But in Zoxopneustes and most others this primor-

dial and normal arrangement is soon disturbed. The eye-

plates of the bivium are gradually pushed into the circle on

both sides of the vertical plate of the unpaired interradium 5,

between this and 1 on the right side and 4 on the left. It is

eye-plate I. that first reaches the inner circumference, and

next eye-plate V., as in most genera, such as Lowechinus, Lyt-

echinus, Heliocidaris, Tripneustes, Boletia, Salmacis, Echino-

cidaris, Acrocladia, and Echinometra; in Amblypneustes and

Mespilia they come quite near it. Of the eye-plates of the

trivium, IV. approaches the inner circumference, which it

reaches in many; II. also approaches it, but in a less degree ;

and III., the eye-plate of the unpaired ambulacrum, is always

distant from it. In Diadema, on the other hand, all the eye-

plates are seen more or less completely to touch the anal

* «“Fehinides fossiles du Département de la Sarthe,” pp. 152, 154, pl. 26.

fig. 2, and pl. 27. fig. 25; ‘ Echinides fossiles du Département de l’ Yonne,”

ii. p. 50, Hi 52. fig. 14: Bull. Soc. Géol, Fr. 2° sér, xvi, p. 162,

440 Prof. S. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

membrane. This change of position depends, no doubt, upon

the circumstance that the periproctium, by the resorption, espe-

cially, of the vertical plates 1 and 5 and by stretching, is

enlarged more rapidly and strongly than the breadth of the

vertical plates increases, and that the eye-plates, on which the

growth of the ambulacra reacts as a vis & tergo, are driven into

its median space. Vertical plate 2, which contains the madre-

porite, is enlarged more than the others, and keeps back eye-

plates II. and III.

The anal aperture is produced in the same way in the Spa-

tangidee and Hichinide. Quite young individuals of the former

have the periproctium much more dorsal than older ones, as is

the case in a high degree in a Spatangus purpureus, 2°025

millims. in length; this species is destitute of the peripetalous

fasciola. So early as this the periproctium is nearly round, with

the anus about in the middle. ‘The anal membrane is closely

covered with thin imbricated scales, which form circles :—

the innermost one of long, narrow, pointed lamelle, connivent

around the anus; and around this one or more, consisting of

larger triangular scales; the outermost a circle of still larger

plates. Of these last, in many genera, the adoral grow pre-

ponderantly, so that the periproctium is gradually elongated,

and the anus comes to be situated more excentrically in an

aboral direction. It is otherwise in the Echinide.

In his memoir on the Echinoidea collected by Pourtales in

the great depths between Florida and Cuba, Alexander

Agassiz states that in a very early stage, when, however, the

mouth with its jaws is already developed, “ the anal system of

the Echinide is limited toa single subanal plate, which makes

its appearance before the genital and ocellar plates, and long

remains more prominent than the other plates, which are

added to complete the enlarged anal system”’*. The penta-

gonal or somewhat rounded space which is enclosed by the

five vertical plates is embraced at this stage by a single un-

paired disk. Soon afterwards, in a young Toxopneustes dré-

bachensis, place begins to be prepared for the anus; but

this occurs not in the middle of the disk, but excentrically and

outside of it. The margins of vertical plates 1 and 5 are

absorbed, and between them and the central disk an interspace

is produced which is occupied by the soft general integument.

In this is formed a pair of free, rounded, oblong, calcareous

pieces, which do not coalesce with the disk. Whilst the peri-

proctium enlarges so that it becomes oval in an oblique direc-

tion, and the disk is raised a little at its free margin, although

* Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf-stream ’ &c. pp. 281, 284, 285.

From ‘ Memoirs of the American Academy,’ ix. p. 12.

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 441

it constantly remains attached by that opposite to vertical

plate 3, another pair of rounded pieces appears in the enlarged

interspace, and another near vertical plates 2 and 4; and, as

many such are added, gradually becoming smaller and smaller,

their number is greatly increased; while the original central

disk, which itself does not grow much, is still long recogniza-

ble by its position and size. Finally the periproctium is

eroded into a large oval aperture; the calcareous pieces which

closely fill its covering membrane become very numerous, and

the surrounding plates strongly eroded. ‘The anal aperture,

which is not completed until this augmentation of the calca-

reous pieces in the skin is considerably advanced, is always

situated more or less excentrically in the apex of the membrane,

which gradually rises conically, and normally in the direction

of ambulacrum I.; and the oval periproctium generally has its

longest diameter in the same direction from interradium 3 to

ambulacrum I., the same that is the longitudinal axis of the

test in Hehinometra, and in relation to which the peristomial

plates of the interradia are symmetrically arranged in the

Latistellee.

This formation of hard pieces of calcareous network occurring

in the central space, within the circle of the vertical plates, and

which, in the earliest stage, gives origin to a single disk, but

afterwards, during growth, divides itself regularly into different

centres for the production of numerous, free, smaller and

smaller pieces, agreeing in their texture with the first disk—the

whole of this structure, although in close connexion with the

appearance of the anus, belongs nevertheless not to its deve-

lopment but to that of the dermal skeleton; and the complex

of hard parts which originates therefrom is an independent

part of the latter. It recurs in the Salenide, not early broken

up into different small parts, but constant, coherent, and solid,

in the pentagonal disk which here regularly occupies the

central space. At the appearance of the anal tube it is partly

eroded by absorption in its posterior margin, but still more the

vertical plates lying behind, in Heterosalenia and Salenia, 1

and 5, in the normal direction towards ambulacrum I.,—in

Acrosalenia, Goniophorus, and Peltastes only plate 5, as has

been explained by Cotteau, who was the first that correctly

oriented both these and all other forms of Echinide, in the

manner here confirmed. In these genera it is not an added

supernumerary plate, but a normal part of the skeleton, which

in them retains during the whole life of the animal its original

_ form but little altered by the intrusion of the anal tube; whilst

in other Echinide it 1s very early changed into a flexible

covering, or, as in Diadema, entirely disappears. It seems

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x.

442 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

probable that careful investigations will show that this inde-

pendent central disk may recur in the irregular Echinide in

the median area of the vertex, which is penetrated by the

madreporite, and in many of them (Pygurus, Clypeus, and

others) is very large.

If we get rid of the notion that the vertical plates are an

appendage of the generative organs and the central disk of

the alimentary canal, if we see the latter in young Echinide

in its original state, and consider, moreover, the vertex of the

Salenidee as being entire and not eroded from the periproctium,

we obtain an arrangement of these parts of the skeleton the

nearest homologue of which is to be sought in an Echinoderm

of a class which is regarded as very distinct from the Echi-

noidea. The Marsupites, only known as fossil, a Crinoid

without a peduncle, has in the pole opposite to the mouth a

single pentagonal disk closely embraced by the five basalia.

It is the same arrangement as that of the vertex in the young

of Echinus and in the Salenide. The central disk and the

basalia, with the rest of the plates in Marsupzttes, have strive

or grooves which are perpendicular to the suture, and may be

traced up to the middle of the plate, and make their appear-

ance most distinctly when its outermost calcareous layer is eaten

away. But this character is no peculiarity of Marsupites or

of the numerous Crinoidea in which it occurs. If we carefully

examine the central disk and vertical plates in small Echinide,

we find exactly the same structure. It may be discerned even

on the surface by direct light, but is exceedingly distinct by

transmitted light and suitable treatment. We see the penta-

gonal plate divided into five triangular areas, which have its

five sides for their bases, their apices united in its middle; the

reticulated texture is arranged, in each area, so that straight

parallel rods perpendicular to the base have narrow interspaces

between them. In the middle of the plate the rods and inter-

spaces of the different areas meet together and unite, crossing

each other in a closed and apparently irregular network ; but

in the sutures those of one plate are seen to meet those of

another in the same direction. This structure recurs in all

plates in the Echinoidea, whether regular or irregular, and is

the same that has long been known in the Cystidea. In the

fossil Salenidz these strie are seen very generally; and the

structure of parallel rods in the interior is very distinct in a

living Salenia from the great depths near the Antilles, for

which, as for a Pygaster from the same depths, and numerous

other valuable objects, our Royal Museum is indebted to

Dr. Axel Goés’s conscientious and indefatigable researches.

Another trait which expresses the homology between the

Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea. 443

base of Marsupites and the vertex of the Salenide is to be

found in the elevated ridges which in both unite the middle

points of the plates; and the strongly developed vertical plates

of the Salenide scarcely present any “sculpture” which

does not recur in a similar form in the Crinoidea.

Now, since the central disk in the young Echinide and in

the Salenide is to be regarded as homologous with that of

Marsupites, the five plates which embrace it, and which here

are called vertical plates, but have hitherto borne the name of

genital plates, are zpso facto to be interpreted as basal pieces

(basalia), and the “eye-plates”’ in their reentrant angles as

radial pieces (radialia). A calyx is present in its essential

parts, homologous, by its position at the pole opposite to the

mouth, its constitution, and its structure, with that of the Cri-

noidea. But since the Echinoidea are free animals which

turn their mouth towards the surface whence it takes its food,

the calyx comes to be the vertex of the dermal skeleton instead

of its base. Itreceives the newly formed plates of the corona,

the basalia meeting the growing ends of the interradia, and

the radialia those of the ambulacra. In the HEchinide which

have their anal aperture where the peduncle of the Crinoidea

is attached, the calyx is normal and recognizable in its form ;

in the Clypeastride it is most frequently entirely penetrated

by the madreporite, which effaces the sutures of the pieces;

and in the nregular forms with an elongated antero-posterior

axis and a developed bivium (Hchinoneus, Cassidulide, and

Spatangide) it becomes entirely abnormal, and, in the Colly-

ritid, during the Jurassic and Cretaceous periods, was broken

up, so that the two radialia which meet the bivium were sepa-

rated from it by the perisome. But it is not absent from any

form of Echinoidea.

The investigations which are here communicated will, it is

hoped, speedily appear in a more detailed form, illustrated by

a selection from numerous figures carefully prepared by M.

A. M. Westergren.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. A young Toxopneustes drobachensis of 4 millims., spread out from

the peristome. I., II., IIJ., IV., V., ambulacra; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

interradia. In the middle the mouth with the teeth; around

this, in the buccal membrane, ten free pore-plates, two for each

ambulacrum, of which the five which lie before I. a, II. a, III. 4,

IV.a, V.6 are poe ently larger than the others. Peristomial

er I. a-V. 6 and [.b-V.a are united by straight lines; and

y this means two pentagons are inscribed in the circular stoma,

symmetrical only in relation to the diameteraa. The plates

of the vertex kept together, upon interradium 2 (where the madre-

porite has its place), with the central disk, d, c. The inner circle,

She

444 Prof. 8. Lovén on the Structure of the Echinoidea.

already enlarged and elongated in the direction of ambulacrum I.

by the absorption of the vertical plates 1 and 5 at their inner

margins; in the interspace small pieces of calcareous network

show themselves. The verticals are not yet perforated by the

genital pores. Of the eye-plates, I. has already pressed in be-

tween.1 and 5, and II. approaches the inner circle.

Figs. 2-8. Toxopneustes drobachensis. Ambulacrum III., to show its

changes during growth. 1, 2, 3, &c., primary plates and tenta-

cular pores; 1, 2, 3, &c., large plates; 1, 2,3, &c., spheeridia;

1, 2, 3, radiolar tubercles.

Fig. 2. Young of 3 millims. The tentacular pores still in nearly unaltered

Fig.

Fg.

Fig.

10.

ra Lil's

. 13.

primordial curves. Two spheeridia.

Young of 6 millims. The tentacular pores already distinctly

arranged in secondary curves. Four spheridia, 1, 2, 3,4. The

peristomial plates depressed. The radiolar tubercle 1 in a1

much diminished.

. Young, somewhat larger. The peristomial plates more depressed ;

in a1 the two primary plates have coalesced. Spheeridium 1

has disappeared, and 5 has been added. JRadiolar tubercle 1 in

a very small, that in 6 diminished.

. Young, somewhat larger still. In a, large plates 1 and 2 have

coalesced to form a binary peristomial pate ; in db the sutures of

the primary plates have disappeared. Radiolar tubercle lina 1

lost, in 61 diminished.

. Young of 11 millims. diameter. In this, as in the following,

large plate 3 in a has only three primary plates. Large plates

1 and 2 coalesced into a binary plate, also in 6. Radiolar tu-

bercle 1 has disappeared both in a and 6.

. Young individual of 15 millims. The binary large plates 142

in both rows depressed. Spheeridium 2 has disappeared, and

6 and 7 have been added. KRadiolar tubercle 2 diminished.

. Adult individual, of 52 millims. diameter. Large plates 1, 2, and

3 in both rows have coalesced to form ternary peristomial plates.

One spheridium, 8, added. In 6 there is still, apparently, a

residue of radiolar tubercle 1.

Stoma of a very young Toxopneustes drébachensis of 2 millims.

diameter. Of the free plates in the buccal membrane those

which belong to I.a, I. a, II. 6, IV. a, V. 6, have not yet ac-

quired pores. One spheeridium in each ambulacrum in I. 6-V. a.

Young of some northern Echinide, 0°6 millim. in diameter, from

the ventral side. The pigment-spots are omitted, and the

radioli only partially represented. No remains of the larva; no

trace of jaws; no mouth or anus. Five large primordial tenta-

cles, which, according to Krohn, soon disappear. Within these

five pairs of smaller permanent tentacles, each of which stands

over a disk of calcareous network, the first primary plates in

the ambulacra. Outside of and between the pairs of these there

are other disks, probably the foundations of the interradia.: From

an individual preserved in spirit.

One of the large primordial tentacles with its disk, and in the

latter a ring of calcareous net. In the wall of the tube longitu-

dinal and transverse muscular fibres.

. One of the smaller permanent tentacles in the young animal,

fig. 10, with its disk and a portion of the calcareous net which

lies beneath its base.

The oblong, externally pointed opening in the calcareous network,

the pore, over which the tentacle stands.

Dr. J. E. Gray on the Guémul. 445

LXIII.—On the Guémul (Huamela leucotis).

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Mr. Bares has kindly sent to the British Maseum the skins of

amale and of afemale Guémul, forwarded to the Geographical

Society by Don Henrique M. Simpson, who observes: —“ These

deer were encountered in a valley through the Cordilleras in

lat. 46° S. There is only one other specimen known in Chili,

in the Santiago Museum, which was found in lat. 35°.”

The skins sent are in winter fur, consisting of “ quills” like

those of the roebuck. They agree with the female animal

which the Earl of Derby sent to the Zoological Society in 1849,

and which was obtained by him from Valparaiso, from whence

it was brought by “Don Benjamin Munoz, a Commodore in the

Chilian navy; the animal was shot by one of the Chileno

officers about 20 leagues from Port Famine, in the Straits of

Magellan.” I described and figured this animal under the

name of Capreolus leucotis (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1849, p. 64, t. xil.).

The male now sent has very peculiar horns, showing that it is

different from any South-American deer hitherto existing in

European museums ; it is also characterized by the length and

acuteness of its face. The horns are nearly erect, and some-

what like the horns of the fawn of Cervus elaphus, with a

conical subbasal anterior branch. The beam is about the length

of the head, quite simple, and tapering to a point; the front

of the right horn is keeled, and rather below the middle there

is a compressed tubercle, probably indicating a branch in the

adult state; but there is no appearance of this on the other

horn. It forms a genus distinct from any other, which may

bear the name of Huamela leucotis; it differs from all the

other Guazus in having a nearly basal frontal snag to the

horns.

The Guémul or Huamel (Zquus bisulcus of Molina, ‘ Hist.

Nat. de Chili,’ p. 303) has been a great puzzle to zoologists,

and has been very imperfecrly described by Molina, who ob-

serves that it is ‘ the unknown animal found by Captain Wallis

in the Straits of Magellan (Hawkesworth, Voy. tom. i. cap. 2,

. 28).”

: The rediscovery of the Guémul in its original country is of

considerable importance, as there has been great confusion about

it. It is quite distinct from and at least one third larger than

the Xenelaphus leucotis brought from Tinta in South Peru, by

Mr. Whitely, Jun., of which we have fine specimens in the

British Museum, and which I formerly thought might be the

Guémul ; it must now be called Xenelaphus anomalocera. The

specimens of the latter animal are covered with paler and thinner

quills; but this appears to be the summer coat, and in the

446 C. Ritsema on Crinodes Sommeri

adult male there are patches of a darker colour and of thicker

quills, indicating the coming of the winter coat.

This species differs from the Guémul in having, at least in

summer, pale haunches and whitish legs. We have in the

British Museum the imperfect skin in winter fur of a female,

which Admiral Thornby, the brother-in-law of the Earl of

Derby, brought from the coast of Chili in 1849. I have

hitherto considered it a specimen of the Guémul; but it has

much more whitish on the rump and abdomen. It may be the

winter coat of Xenelaphus anomalocera, or a third species of

South-American deer.

The South-American deer called Guazus are blastocerus

paludosus from Brazil and Paraguay, Furcifer antisiensis and

Xenelaphus anomalocera (X. leucotis, Gray, Cat. Ruminant

Mammalia, p. 89) from the Bolivian or Peruvian Alps, Blasto-

cerus campestris and Huamela leucotis from Patagonia.

LXIV.—On Crinodes Sommeri and Tarsolepis remicauda, in

answer to Mr. Butler’s Remarks. By C. Ritsema.

Iy the ‘ Annals’ of last October Mr. Butler rejects my opinion

concerning the synonymy of the above-named moths.

It is, however, clear that the author, when he drew up the

description of Mr. Cornthwaite’s insect, was totally unac-

quainted with Hiibner’s Crino Sommeri, and that it was only

after he saw my synonymic note that he compared the new (?)

moth with Hiibner’s figures, and endeavoured to find some

differences which might justify him in retaining his names.

Why otherwise did he not mention this very similar moth, or

indicate the supposed generic and specific differences when

describing the new one?

In the following lines I will refute the arguments used.

Mr. Butler considers Crino Bescket the type of the genus

Crino, because this species is figured before C. Sommert.

But, if we pay attention to the characters ascribed by Hiibner

(‘ Verzeichniss bekannter Schmetterlinge,’ p. 216) to this genus

(““Schwingen blass-sehnig, dunkelstriemig, mit gliinzend

weissen Flecken geziert”’), we shall see that this lepidopterist

really had in view the species called by him OC. Sommert, and

that this description, without any modification, applies to

Butler’s Tarsolepis remicauda. With respect to C. Beseked it

is clear that Hiibner was not attached to the so-called type-

system, and consequently we have nothing to do here with the

last-named species. There is no doubt that Tarsolepis remi-

cauda ought to be transferred into the genus Crino, Hiibner,

= Crinodes, Herrich-Schiiffer.

and Tarsolepis remicauda. 447

Whilst Mr. Butler believes that Hiibner’s figure is really a

representation of a male insect, as possessing a well-developed

anal tuft of radiating scales (this character, however, occurs

also in the Javan females, and is therefore without value), I

rather believe it to be a female, on account of the feebly pec-

tinated antenne. The anal tuft, as covering entirely the

sexual organs, may have been the cause of Hiibner’s mistake ;

in such cases only the examination of the retinaculum will

furnish certainty concerning the sex of the moth.

The want of the two long tufts of carmine hairs at the base

of the abdomen most probably must be ascribed to the sex,

such tufts being almost confined (at this moment I do not re-

collect an example of the contrary) to the male insect; they

are often totally hidden, as probably is the case with the male

in Mr. Snellen’s collection.

As regards the length of the palpi, I notice that the females

I examined agree in this respect with Hiibner’s figures, and

that Mr. Snellen’s specimen (¢) holds the middle between

Hiibner’s and Butler’s.

_ No importance can be attached to the size of the abdomen

and to its spinous processes as figured by Hiibner, the former

depending chiefly upon the sex and the state of desiccation,

the latter, formed by some diverging long scales on the sides

of the abdomen, occurring also in Mr. Snellen’s male. More-

over it is incomprehensible to me how Mr. Butler can regard

these processes as a generic difference, although nothing of

the kind is to be seen in the representation of Crino Bescker,

the species which, according to Butler, should be the type of

the genus Crino.

The specific differences summed up by Butler must certainly

be ascribed to a great extent to inaccuracies of the artist. In

order to prove this it may be sufficient to notice the inner

margin of the front wings in both Hiibner’s figures, which is

waved only in fig. 1, and also the hind wings of the same

figure, which are unlike one another. Moreover Hiibner’s

figures are coloured too dark, and have almost all the markings

(the pale basal patches excepted) defined too sharply, instead

of the underside of the wings only, as Mr. Butler states; as

for the latter, this author inclines to the contrary.

In the specimens I examined, the pale costal band does not

quite-extend to the apex and is broader than in Butler’s figure,

especially at the base of the wings; the central marginal line

of the hind wings is continued round the margin, but, at the

upper and underside, converted into spots as in Hitbner’s

fig. 2; the transverse band of the front wings is strongly

waved and not nearly parallel to the outer margin, whilst the

fringe of all the wings is tolerably long.

448 On the Habits and Distribution of Lycosa ingens.

For these reasons I persist in my assertion that Butler’s

Tarsolepis remicauda is identical, generically as well as spe-

cifically, with Hiibner’s Crinodes Sommert.

After all, I may remark that it is not ¢mpossible that C.

Sommert occurs also in the New World*, although I rather

believe it to be a mistake—just as seems to be the case with

Hemeroblemma peropaca, which, according to Hiibner (‘ Zutriige

zur Sammlung exotischer Schmetterlinge,’ No. 271, figs. 541

& 542), is from Monte Video, but has since been sent over

from Sumatra, Java, Ternate (coll. Royal Mus. Leyden), and

Celebes (Mr. Snellen’s coll.), and also, with Ophiusa magica,

received by Dr. Boisduval from Madagascar and Bengal

(‘ Faune Entomologique de Madagascar, Bourbon et Maurice,’

Lepidoptéres, p..100), and by the Royal Museum of Leyden

from Java, and ‘not from Monte Video as stated by Hiibner

(Zutrige &c., No. 268, figs. 535 & 536).

Leyden, Novehuiisk 1872

LXV.—On the Habits and Distribution of re aoe (Bi.).

By the Rev. O. P. Campripcs, M.A., C.M.Z.S.

Accounts of the habits of spiders must nee be interesting

to arachnologists, and especially important to those who may

themselves be unable to see their objects of study in a living

state. ‘The question, therefore, now raised (not for the first

time) by Mr. F’. Pollock’s account (Ann. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1872,

p: 271) of the habits of Lycosa ingens (Bl.) is one on which,

as an arachnologist, I should wish to have some clearer and

more detailed evidence. I allude to the possibility of a spider

swallowing solid matter; in the instance recorded by Mr.

Pollock the solid matter consisted of the ‘‘ bones, and head, and

claws and all” of a lizard 3 inches long, ‘the only remnant

of the feast being a small ball about { of an inch in diameter.”

My own impression has always been that no arachnid could

do more than swallow the juices of its prey, or at most such

other parts as could be so completely comminuted by the action

of the fangs, falces, and maxille as to be enabled to pass in a

kind of semifluid state through the simple but very small

passage to the stomach. Did Mr. Pollock’s spider thus com-

minute the ‘bones, head and all” of the lizard, except that

small portion represented by the ball of a quarter of an inch in

* T am informed (October 14th, 1872) by Mr. Walker that at present

he has no opportunity of inspecting the specimen from Rio Janeiro,

mentioned in the ‘ List of the Specimens of Lepidopterous Insects in the

Collection of the British Museum’ (/. c.), because it is no longer in Mr.

Fry’s collection.

t Vide ‘Entomologist’ for June 1870, No. 77, pp. 65-67.

On a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons. 449

diameter? This is a point which it would be both important

and interesting to have confirmed by more detailed and special

observation.

Lycosa ingens must indeed have great power ; it is the largest

known spider of the Tarantula group; an adult female in my

own collection (from Porto Santo) measures 13 inch in length,

exclusive of the legs and palpi; the male, however, is much

smaller. If Mr. Pollock’s example was an adult female, the

length of its body and that of the body of the lizard (ex-

clusive of the tail) would be about equal, so that the easy and

speedy demolition of the lizard need not excite surprise.

Another observation of Mr. Pollock, and one upon which he

grounds a strong and (if sound) an interesting generalization,

is that each of the three islands of Madeira, Porto Santo, and

Deserta Grande has its “own peculiar large Lycosa, no two

being alike; and (Mr. Pollock continues) it is a very remarkable

fact that these Lycose vary in size inversely with the magni-

tude of the island in which they are found,—Madeira, the

largest island, having the smallest Lycosa, and Deserta Grande,

the smallest island, having by far the largest spider.” It

would be important to know what were the range and extent

of the observations upon which this is stated; the already

published facts respecting the localities frequented by Lycosa

éngens are certainly at variance with it. Mr. Blackwall states

(Ann. Nat. Hist., Sept. 1867) that he had received both sexes

of this species from all three of those islands; the same author

(Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xx. p. 284) also states that he had

received another almost equally large species, Lycosa tarantu-

loides maderiana (Walck.), from Porto Santo; and I have in

my collection examples of this same species from that island.

It would therefore surprise me very much to find that any

careful and at all extended search should confirm Mr. Pollock’s

conclusion that these three islands, so apparently derived from

a common origin and so near to each other, should be yet so

capricious in respect of the distribution of their Lycose,

Bloxworth, November 16, 1872.

LXVI.—WNotice of a large Siluroid from the Upper Amazons.

By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER.

THE Trustees of the British Museum have recently purchased

a very large specimen of a Siluroid from the river Huallaga,

Upper Amazons; it had been captured by B. La Mert, Esq.,

who adopted the best method of preparing such large specimens,

by having it carefully skinned, the fins and head remaining

intact and attached to the skin, and then packing it in spirits

450 Mr. R. B. Sharpe on some new Species of Birds.

of wine, which had to be changed twice, in a cask of suit-

able size. The specimen arrived in very good condition,

and is now stuffed and mounted.

It belongs to a species apparently allied to Platystoma trun-

catum, but differing in the width of the bands of teeth in the

upper jaw and palate; moreover it has the barbels much

shorter than any of the other known species. I propose to

name it

Platystoma gigas.

D. 1/6. A. 11. The upper jaw projects conspicuously

beyond the lower. The length of the head is contained thrice

and two thirds in the total length (without caudal). Head

covered with skin; maxillary barbels much shorter than the

head, mandibulary barbels still shorter. The intermaxillary

band of teeth is rather broader than the vomerine portion of

the band on the palate, which has acrescentic form ; the inter-

maxillary and palatine bands are separated from each other by

avery narrow interspace. The dorsal fin commences midway

between the end of the snout and the origin of the adipose fin,

and its first ray is rather feeble ; the length of the adipose fin

equals that of the anal. Caudal deeply forked. Colour of a

uniform greyish brown, darker above than below.

ft. in.

Vota lemmeeh ss bide eigce (castes epee oe a 0

engtnr or MeBAi cin hh cue sie tiete <1 eins Bint

», snout (from the eye) ........ 0 8

Distance between the eyes ...........- 0 53

LXVII.—Description of some new Species of Birds in the

National Collection. By RK. BowpDLER SuHarpe, F.L.8.,

¥.Z.8., &c., Senior Assistant, Zoological Department,

British Museum.

Family Paride.

Subfamily Srrrivz.

Sitta tephronota, n. sp.

S. similis 8. Newmayeri, sed rostro longiore, coloribus conspicue pal-

lidioribus, et linea nigra per oculum ducta usque ad interscapulium

extensa distinguenda.

The large Nuthatch from Central Asia appears to me to be

worthy of specific separation from the typical S. Newmayert

of Europe (S. syriaca, Ehr.). In the ‘ Birds of Europe,’ Mr.

Dresser and myself examined a bird from Kokand, which

differed extraordinarily in size from the typical Grecian and

Mr. R. B. Sharpe on some new Species of Birds. 451

Palestine specimens. I do not think, however, that the species

will rest so much on the larger dimensions, as they seem to

be very variable, as upon the clear pale grey coloration and

the pronounced elongation of the black eye-stripe. Two spe-

cimens from Candahar in the National Collection appear to

belong to the eastern form. The comparative measurement of

the Kokand example with another of the true S. Newmayert

gave me the following results :—

Long. tot. culm. ale. caudee. tarsi.

S. Neumayert ........ 56 0:75 2:9 1:85 0-9

S. tephronota ........ 6:0 1:0 35 2°1 1:05

Family Muscicapide.

Diaphorophyia Blissetti, n. sp.

D. supra saturate cinereus, vix viridi lavatus: tectricibus alarum remi-

gibusque nigricantibus, extus viridi-cinereo marginatis: cauda

supra metallice viridi, subtus nigricante: genis et regione parotica

lete castaneis, plagam conspicuam triquetram formantibus: gula

sordide at metallice viridi: corpore reliquo subtus pure albo, late-

ribus fuscescentibus nigro striolate lavatis: caruncula conspicua

orbitali erecta scarlatina; rostro nigro: pedibus saturate brunneis.

Hab. Gold Coast. Presented by Andrew Swanzy, Esq.

Of this beautiful little Flycatcher I have another specimen, in

my own collection of African birds, which is apparently the

adult male; it differs from the one above described in having

a dark metallic green back. ‘This bird was sent to me by m

friend Mr. H. F. Blissett, who procured it on the Gold Coast,

in the province of Wassaw; and I have great pleasure in

oftermg him a public acknowledgment for the aid he has

rendered me by collecting birds in Western Africa.

Family Timaliide.

Trichastoma rufipennis, n. sp.

T. similis 7. fulvescenti (Cass.), sed multo minor, et pileo brunneo,

dorso rufescente lavato, remigibus extus sordide castaneis dis-

tinguenda. Long. tota 5:3 poll. Angl., culm. 0°55, ale 2:45,

caudee 2°3, tarsi 1:0.

Hab, Gaboon. Collected by Mr. Paul Du Chaillu.

There can be no doubt, as Lord Walden some time ago

pointed out to me, that the genera L//ladopsis of Heine and

Trichastoma of Blyth are identical; and the other African

species are Trichastoma fulvescens (Cass.) and T. gularis

(Sharpe). ‘The present species is distinguished from both these

last-named birds by its small size and red wings.

452 Mr. J. Gould on new Species of Humming-birds.

LXVILI.—Descriptions of three new ts of mek

By Joun Gout, F.R.S. &

Lolema Whitelyana. (Whitely’s ai Seaeien

Male. Crown, all the upper surface, and flanks deep grass-

green; an obscure glittermg mark on the forehead; chin,

chest, and centre of the abdomen jet-black, with a broad gorget

of beautiful violet on the throat; the bill, which is stout and

straight, is black, as are also the legs and toes; the tail and

the under tail-coverts steel-black ; primaries and secondaries

purplish brown, the external edge of the outer primary reddish

brown.

Total length 53 inches; bill 14, wing 3, tail 24.

Hab. Cosnipata, province of Cusco, in the Peruvian Andes.

Remark. About the size of Lolema Schretberstit and I. fron-

talis, but distinguished from both those species by its black

chest.

Ihave great pleasure in naming this fine humming-bird

after Mr. Henry Whitely, who is at this moment energetically

searching for novelties pertaining to this beautiful family of

birds in the more remote provinces of Peru. The specimen

above described was obtained in August 1871 at Cosnipata,

at an elevation of 2300 feet.

Adelomyia chlorospila.

Male. Crown and upper surface bronzy green, the feathers

of the crown and upper tail-coverts greener than those of the

back ; over and behind the eye and curving downwards on the

sides of the neck a somewhat conspicuous streak of buffy white ;

ear-coverts blackish brown; throat, chest, and centre of the

abdomen buffy white, the feathers of the throat punctated with

glittering green ; flanks bronzy buff; under tail-coverts the

same, but lighter ; tail bronzy brown, all the feathers con-

spicuously tipped with fawn- -colour ; bill blackish brown, in-

clining to yellow beneath; legs and toes brown, the soles of

the latter inclining to yellow ; wines purplish brown.

Total length a inches ; bill 4 L, wing 254, tail 13.

Hab. San Antonio, in the Peruvian Andes.

Remark. The female of this species was, I believe, brought

home by M. Warszewicz; but we are indebted to Mr. Henry

Whitely for the discovery of the male. Its nearest ally is the

Adelomyia tnornata; but it has a longer bill than that bird,

and, moreover, has the throat punetated with green instead of

being of a bright blue. Mr. Whitely’s specimen was collected

at San Antonio in July 1871, at an elevation of 3600 feet.

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. 453

Adelomyia cervina.

Crown and all the upper surface bronzy green; over and

behind the eye and curving down the sides of the neck a con-

spicuous mark of buffy white; ear-coverts blackish brown ;

throat, sides of the neck, and centre of the abdomen delicate

fawn-colour, with very minute speckles of brown on the former ;

flanks bronzy russet, with reflections of golden yellow-brown ;

under tail-coverts hoary buff; wings purplish brown ; tail very

dark olive, glossed with green; all the feathers tipped with

buff, but less so on the two centre ones; bill black on the

upper mandible, the lower one lighter and inclined to flesh-

colour at the base.

Total length 4 inches; bill 2, wing 23, tail 12.

Remark. This new species was discovered near Medellin in

Columbia by Mr. Salmon, whose exploration of the country

westward of the Magdalena has just commenced.

LXIX.—On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera. By W.

K. Parxer, F.R.S., F.Z.8., and Prof. T. RuPERT JONES,

fo. EGS.

Part XV. The Species figured by Ehrenberg (continued).

[Continued from p. 271. ]

APPENDIX II.

To enable the student to utilize the foregoing collocations of

the species and notable varieties of Foraminifera figured and

described by Dr. Ehrenberg and other rhizopodists, it is

necessary to append a classified list of the adopted names,

with references to the localities and materials. treated of in the

‘ Mikrogeologie’ and the Berlin Academy ‘ Transactions.’

In the followimg List, therefore, we have arranged the

genera treated of in their order, and have appended to the

species numbers corresponding with those divisions of the

foregoing memoir which contain references to or descriptions

of them. Thus:—I. From AMgina (1), Greece. IL. From

Zante. ILI. From Aigina (2). IV. From Oran, Africa. V.

From Caltanisetta, Sicily. VI. From Gyzeh and Mokattam,

Egypt. VII. From Thebes, Egypt. VIII. From Antili-

banon, A. IX. From Antilibanon,B. X. From Haman Fe-

raun, Arabia. XI. From Cattolica, Sicily. XII. From

Meudon, France. XIII. From Gravesend, England. XIV.

From the Island of Méen, Denmark. XV. From the Island

454 Messrs. Parker and Jones on

of Riigen, Baltic. XVI. From Volsk, Russia. XVII. From

the Upper Missouri, North America. XVIII. From the

Upper Mississippi, North America.

- Nos. 19-28 (included in Section XX.) are miscellaneous

fossil Foraminifera figured by Ehrenberg ; thus :—19, from the

Chalk of Alabama; 20, the Pliner-Kalk of Teplitz, Bohemia ;

21, Nummulitic Limestone of France ; 22, Nummulitic Lime-

stone of Traunstein, Bavaria; 23, Orbitoidal Limestone of

Java; 24, Zeuglodon-beds, Alabama; 25, Polycystina-beds,

Barbadoes; 26, Jurassic Limestone, Baden; 27, Coral-rag,

Cracow ; 28, Carboniferous Limestone, Russia.

By the use of this List the student will see at a glance

which are the more abundant and persistent of the species

under notice; and he will also be enabled to find the synonyms,

sometimes numerous, which several of them have received in

the ‘ Mikrogeologie,’ ‘ Abhandlungen,’ and ‘ Berichte,’ during

the long course of Dr. Elrenberg’s researches.

Classified List of the Foraminifera figured by Dr. Ehrenberg.

References to Sections (1. to xvlI.)

in the foregoing Memoir, and

: to subsections in Section xx.

J. IMPERFORATA (19-38),

1 Maliola eeihve2..555 Spsindetensve.ssch ees costae soa Ill.

(Spiroloculina) ... sp. indet................000 eons rie

)yeneuvedecsseces planulata (Lam.) ............ I.

==) srosonpconoocee (stoloniferous)) .:...-css-++--- 23.

(Quinqueloculina) sp. indet.............:sccsceesees VII., XI., 227

(Triloculina) ...... Sp. INdehar.secesstastceseeseso es 23.

2. Alveolina .......... pom S Ps WNCCbesaeeecearscnossesccees: 22?, 23.

II. ARENACEA.

3. Lituola (Haplo-

phragmium)...... SPPwideba: senna awere ee tate site 22, 24.

4. Endothyra ......... spheeroidea (EAr.) ...cec.s.eee 26.

Bngigqual (LWT) wesccenacesseee 28.

5. Valvulina (Tetra-

TEAS) plas ctleeeeese palzotrochus (Hhr.) ......... 28.

III. PERFORATA.

Grelarengy. «secsess ones globosa (Montagi)............ Vile Wie, ales Soa

(entosolenian) ......... 20.

Sulcatial (Vs Gude) meeesascc ee xe

costata, Williamson ......... VII., XVIII.

Clawata, OP B.watethosss. see XVIII.

stiligera (Ehr.) seo.........000 XVI.

apiculata, BSS. .1.........200 XIV.

elongata (Ehr.) ..........e00e- VIIL., XI.

CMACIAIA, LSS. ssesacees ve s0+sce VII., XVI., XVIII.

7. Glandulina ......... levigata, D’Orb.........4 vacew Mie Ov MLE

455

the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.

References.

8. Nodosaria ......... filiformis, D’ Orb. ....ecceoces I.) III., VIII.

glabra, D’ Orb. aUecatesaue XVII., XVIII.

CUR I eeeeseseceas Sade saees XVII.

ovicula, D Orb. Secor sass ve NVIKs, VELMe, 1X5 XTEs, KEN,

) XIV., XV., XVI., XVIII.

pyrula, D’ Orb. ......000..-00 VIL, 21.

gracilis, D’ Ord, ...... Papeectiog Bele

subulata; 23S), cdesursss..cdcces XIV

subnodosa, 2258) \c..0csessc0e VIII.

hispida, D' Orb. ..........00-+) XIVs

PINdOReHAGi eb adaccsmeemcees ac 28.

sp. indet .........0. Spec oneagson 24, 27.

9) Dentalana:.c.. .:.s.04- Boueana, D’ Orb. ........+. ore SQV

10. Vaginulina ......... laevigata, Rem. .........000 VII., XI., XIII.

leguminiformis (Batsch) .. VIL., XVIII.

longa, Cornuel .......006 onoos 2st,

AGUA LTS ae neacvecsescaapdecee XIV.

subulatay Liitivescsscecsecsenses 21.

marginata, D’ Orb. ....... coose XVI

SPsINCetoncwceseseeaessmcekeense 24.

11. Marginulina ...... OHISIN; E59. ewan ccanasntoaenasr XIV.

12. Planularia ...... geenitene lla wLAiagrcncasee doesent: XIV.

crepidula (F. & M.) ......+.- XVIII.

13. Cristeilaria ......... TGARICAN (DE{7")\V.teecceercncseniee VII.

rotulata (Lam.) .........0.+0+ IIl., XI., XV., XVIII.

cultrata (Montf.) .....-00++- THs Ves VIX Te SNOT KLIN

XV.,. XVIII.

BPs INGeb.... caccuetodeeewackanse xvii ?, 27.

14. Polymorphina...... lactea (W. § J.)...csscseeeeee XVI.

compressa, D’ Orb. ..... eooeees VIL, VIIL., XVIII,

problema, D’ Orb. ......s000 xI,

tuberculata, D’Orb. ......... XIV.

Mhouint, ViOrGaeccasesesceenee X0e, XUN KITS

SP MMe te tetecn snes aeevoeaawens 20?, 24?

15. Bulimina......... Ee eeacileatanD) Orb Aasacsnccnaces a Tk :

16. Bolivina ......... .» punctata, D’ Orb. ....c0.c0e0ee Tuy UL, IV., VI., VII. VIIL.,

Ki, XL XLV eve

Gilatata, RSs. vic... orelaa: TINes LV ey) VEC AVMs XLV eg Ves

XVI., XVIII.

americana (Hhr.) .......0.02- XVIII.

panty (U2)! poncdedoesetodnoar IIL,

Reussil (Gei.) ..secesseeeoeee Xv.

INGPASSALAS He SSausaciesceccnecees XV.

guilcatay (H/T) \acndetes conscesoes Il.

costulata (Hhr.) ............06- VIII.

aculeata (Lh7.) ....s..00« seoes XLV s

17. Virgulina..........6 squamosa, D’Orb. ...cce.ssoee Vil.,, XIf:,. XIVs, 0 Xie), XVI,

XVIII.

— tegulata, Rss....... Focce 2a

asparagus (Hhr.) ...... XII, XIV.

—— Schreibersii, Czjz....... 1.?, I11., V., VII. XI., XII,

SHG, 36, 20h 2aRler

XVIII.

Hemprichii (Zvr.)...... ease

—— gemma (Ehr.) w..1..00-

—— nucleus (Hhr.) ...... ze

—— calcipara (Ehr.) ...4

—— tessera (Ehr.)

eoecereee

TVs Vien AVilss WIMKs (5) Kiley

XII. ?, XIV., XV. XVI. ?,

XVIII.

XV.

XVIII.

Saweeernceas

18. Bifarina

LOM Mextilaria cessceccnes

On the Nomenclature of the Foraminifera.

References.

Hemprichiiamericana(Hhr.) Xvuit.

—— stiligera (Hhr.) ......... XI.

paradoxa (Hhr.) ...... XI.

saxipara. (Hhr.) -.2...s-.00+0 .. XVIII.

globulosa, Hhi. ....00..-s00

Mibbosay LOND: hese. scecmr

agelutinans, D’Orb. .........

BABILCHIA, D2/%, > Sb eaecocceeses

jqnabaplly JES Soonecncaqoudsceue

subangulata, D’ Ord. .........

striata, Ehr.

Sewer necee Soeveee

SePAVE-y VILe nV Tes XoXo es eX TTA

XIV., XV., XVI., XVIII., 19,

20, 22.

Tes Le, Vis5) Villes Ves exe OT

XII., XIII., XIV., XV., XVI.,

XVII., XVIII.

Vi, Vile) VI, XT tT

XVI., Xvii1., 19, 24.

Wilt, WEIN. Xe eXT, ex Key

xvi., 21, 24.

XIV.

MII, XLVeg) RVET eV

us XIV., XV., XVII., XVIII.

striato-punctata, Hager ...... XVII.

missouriensis, Hhr. ....... pee antl

americana, Hhr. .........0 SH PEREXSV IES

ANILO ALA, HHIe ie ceeeteceecet 23.

bUrSsi vera Minter e.erersee bon een

daleata, LAP: cose naseaeee 28.

DIET el 01 pan sale anceace eb cue 28.

IS) ons (el papage ore cesacossscoooce wie

D0 ss piroplectalsescccen COSA: Mr ecseecesocerccses XVIII.

americana, LAr. ......0c.eccess XVII, xvur., 19.

sp.-indet........ Rees Seems

21. Vulvulina............. pennatula (Batsch)............ XIII.

apiculatay (He) ecscescsesessest XL

22. Bigenerina ......... digitata, Orb. Siccdetesseness XVIII.

acanthopora (Ehr.) ......... XVI.

javanica (Zhr.) ......c..se000 23.

23. Heterostomella ... tumens (Hhr.) ..........0006 XVI., XVIII.

aculeata ((22A7.) o..ts-scseeces KIl., XIU, -XV., XVI-

24. Verneuilina......... pygmea (Hager) ....2.-..008 XII., XIV., XViII., 19, 22.

Bpinulosa, WSS.) ..ceacsove cece XII.

25s Orbuling) ....0..cere- universa, D’ Orb. ...... Seatene XV., XVI.

26. Globigerina ......... cretacea, DiOrbMes.cseenesa ves VII., VIII., XII., XIII, XIV.,

KVsy KiVIey MVIIL Oe

bulloides, D’ Orb. ............ Me,) WML; 5)| DVe5) Wag) Wiley Vis Xs

hirsuta Orbe eaoseeee teen XVII.

(so 1018 (2) pre gasopncbanocecoucce tee, Dane

27. Spheroidina ...... bulloides, D'Ord. ........ conn, 20

28. Planorbulina ...... Haidingerii (D’Ord.)......... E., III., V., VII.) VIIIe XI., XV.,

XVI.

denticulata (Hhr.) ......... etg, WE

ammonoides (fss.) ........ EV 5) Vin CouaVEsgu Vilas Xe Eas

Glin, AA Sone OA

xvult., 25.

globulosa (Zhr.)...........0008 Tey Hs Wks VAs Vadis esr C-

XIL, XIV., XV., XVII.

farctay (Gere eiVe\ eres cs oy eccese) Ves) Ville nViles XT

Vu Cars O7- Deter ses case VII., VIII, Ix., 24.

Sp indotncweceeaseeeeree tess cee 19, 25.

29. Planulina........,.... ariminensis, D’Orb. ...... seorebed UMEePaiVles WiINe sVINTeo Ties

XIV., XVI., XVIII.

BP. INdota.2 slecwdrey-vecwes ds. ees I1.?

Bibliographical Notices. 457

References.

30. Pulvmulina......... repanda { spatiosa (Hhr.) ... Iv., XIV.

type |squama (Ehr.) ... xv.

i Menardii (D’ Orb.)... Xt.

'S » | Pharaonum (Fhr.)... v1.

8 & 4 truncatulinoides

Micheliniana(D’ Orb.) x11., XIIL, Xv.

mini eg Karsteni( ss.) vit.

elegans { *legans (D’ Orb.)... x1v.?

ie Orbignyi (em.) x1v.?

Gills Sh yaalfoie>) aqganeeoedee ERIGUetba, LATS eaesseccseseces XIv.

32. Rotalia.....:.s.cc0.. Becearit (Lin \e-anaacosee sete 24.

ammoniformis (Lam.) ...... VI.

orbicularis, D’ Orb............. III.

oo.) Nonionina 5...-.... Scaplai (Hi Gj 1M:)) .ic.c-n.cos VI.

Sp indetaccssecsesscooteceaeans 11. ?

34. Polystomella ...... craticulata (Ff. f& M.)......... 23.

Bp Ainidetsitnteccdes sceeeccves 22, 24.

85. Orbitoides ......... javanicus, Hhr. ......sece.s0e 20+

Mantelli? (Morton) ......... 23.

36. Operculina ......... complanata (Def7.)..........+ VI.

SMIMOnIS (HAL) 2.01.0 .s008 22.

turgida (Hii.)) te2.ccste.cs5.e XVI.

Sprindebsccasscn.ateosesees fea 2,23.

37. Nummulina......... gyzehensis (Forsk.) ......... VI.

curvispira, Meneg. .....0...... VI.

Guettardi, D'A.g H. ...... VI.

Miarchisont..2.2es.esse. coca: 22.

Duiren ovine sa acee ee sseeee 22.

StriataseiOrUm ey caseceeseen: 21.

planulata (Zam.) .........04. 21.

38. Amphistegina ...... TENE MN a eeedodoecnanwed 23.

Bpeindetaaepe-vacessecestasents 22.

39. Fusulina ............ cylindrica, Fischer ........,... 28.

constricta (Zhr.)....6..+2.000+ 28.

palzosphera (EHhr.) ......... 28.

spheroidea (Hhr.) ............ 28.

labyrinthiformis (hr.)...... 28.

paleophacus (HAr.) ......... 28.

paleophus (Hhr.) .........3:. 28.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

New Ornithological Works.

Tue first in importance of the works we here propose to notice is

Andersson’s ‘ Birds of Damara Land,’ edited by Mr. J. H Gurney *.

For nearly seventeen years Mr. Andersson collected materials for

* “Notes on the Birds of Damara Land and the adjacent countries of

South-west Africa.’ By the late Charles John Andersson, author of

‘ Lake Ngami’ and of ‘The Okavango River.’ Arranged and edited by

John Henry Gurney, with some additional notes by the Editor, and an

introductory chapter containing a sketch of the Author’s life,abridged from

the original published in Sweden. London: 1872. 8vo, pp. 394, with a

map and 3 plates. (Van Voorst.)

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 32

458 _— Bibliographical Notices.

a work on the bird-fauna of South-western Africa, when death

prevented him from accomplishing his task, the arrangement of

which had already been commenced. Most fortunately for ornitho-

logical science he left behind him copious notes, which, with numerous

prepared skins, made it possible for another to take up the work

where he left it off and carry it to a successful conclusion. Yet Mr.

Gurney’s task in editing and arranging Andersson’s notes has been

no light one; and no small amount of original work has he performed

in determining the species, and in making intricate points of synonymy

intelligible to the student of ornithology.

Andersson’s own notes describe the habits of each species, and

give the places where they were found. For descriptions the reader

is referred to Layard’s ‘ Birds of South Africa,’ and in many cases to

Finsch and Hartlaub’s ‘ Vogel Ost-Afrika’s.’

In the nomenclature adopted by Mr. Gurney he has, we think,

pushed the use of generic subdivisions to an extent that future

researches will not warrant. He makes use of most of the terms

given in Gray’s ‘ Hand-list’ in a subgeneric sense as indicating

genera. It will be some time yet before ornithologists come to any

agreement on the moot point of the value of generic names ; for very

much hasty work has to be carefully examined before many a genus

can fairly be accepted or rejected as such. Yet we hardly think that

the genera proposed, frequently in the most off-hand informal manner,

by Bonaparte, or in such works as those of Reichenbach, are entitled

to the respect here accorded them.

As a contribution to the knowledge of the geographical distribu-

tion of birds this work is invaluable, and makes a sensible addition

to our information on African birds, now fast becoming complete,

from Cape Colony northwards to the limits of Andersson’s researches.

With Cape Colony itself, Mr. E. L. Layard’s useful little volume has

made us familiar; while on the east coast in Port Natal and the

Trans-Vaal Republic another diligent explorer, Mr. Ayres, with

whom Mr. Gurney has cooperated, has done excellent work. North-

ward of these points our knowledge is but fragmentary; while of

the ornithology of the districts the scenes of Livingstone’s recent

journeyings we, of course, know nothing as yet. In conclusion, we

must record our opinion that this volume is a real and substantial

addition to ornithological literature, and that we owe much to Mr.

Gurney for rescuing Andersson’s valuable notes from the danger in

which his death had placed them.

The ornithology of Egypt has long been a subject of interest, and

its birds have most of them been mentioned in various articles of

greater or less completeness scattered though the pages of ‘The

Tbis’ and elsewhere; so that, though Captain Shelley has done good

work in collecting these scattered materials*, more especially as he

has verified and observed for himself during several visits to the

* ‘A Handbook to the Birds of Egypt.’ By G. E. Shelley, F.G.S.,

F.Z.8., &e. London: 1872. Large 8vo, pp. 342, with 14 coloured plates.

(Van Voorst.)

Bibliographical Notices. 459

country, not much novelty was to be expected in retraversing well-

trodden ground.

Some short chapters at the commencement of the book give a

general idea of the mode of travelling in Egypt, and of the favourite

haunts of its birds. These serve as an introduction to the more

formal part, where each species of bird is individually treated of and

described.

The number of species mentioned is 352, which at first sight seems

a large total when the nature of the country is taken into consider-

ation, and seeing that no high mountain-chains are present to main-

tain a varied fauna. But Egypt is peculiarly situated, being the only

strip of fertile land, with deserts on either side, to form a connexion

between the Mediterranean and the equatorial regions of Africa, and

is hence a highway, as it were, for birds passing both north and

south. The number of birds, both of species and individuals, is

doubtless increased by this favourable circumstance.

The portion of Egypt treated of by Captain Shelley is confined

between the Mediterranean and the Second Cataract, and west and

east by the Libyan and Arabian deserts. A glance at the list of

birds found there shows that they chiefly belong to the fauna of

South-eastern Europe. Its connexion with Ethiopia proper and

with the East is only shown here and there by the presence of such

forms as Pycnonotus, Crateropus, Nectaruua, and Centropus. But

Egypt, though belonging to the European fauna, forms quite an out-

lying province of it; passing a little further south, we come to the

truly Ethiopian fauna of Abyssinia.

But to return to the book itself. Captain Shelley’s plan through-

out has been to give the Latin and English name of each species, a

short note of the places where it is found in Egypt, a brief descrip-

tion and a reference to some well-known illustrated work to assist

in the subsequent identification of each species. Where his own

observations have been extended or modified by others who have

preceded him over the same ground, he has given a reference to the

observation quoted. These chiefly refer to the works of Von Heuglin,

who has travelled in and written much on the ornithology of this

country and those adjoining it immediately to the southward.

With this plan we have not much fault to find; and we believe

that any one travelling in Egypt with Captain Shelley’s book, and a

smattering only of bird lore, will make fair way in determining the

birds he shoots ; but his task would have been instructively lightened

had a little assistance been rendered him towards determining the

genera and higher groups, which, as the work stands, are left for deter-

mination to any prior knowledge the traveller may possess. But we

are, in the case of genera, perhaps asking a little too much in a work

of this description; we regret, however, to see serious confusion in

the names of the families, and even orders, which we are at a loss to

account for, unless it be that pardonable oversights in the MS, have

not been detected by a careful revision of the proofs.

The plates in this work are very acceptable, and have been ex-

ecuted by Mr. Keulemans in the style which has rendered him so

32*

460 Bibliographical Nottces.

favourite an ornithological draughtsman. The subjects are judi-

ciously selected from characteristic or peculiar species.

Mr. Harting’s last contribution* brings us nearer home; and

though he offers a quasi apology for adding another to the already

extant works on British Birds, we think none was needed; and we

doubt not the present volume will be accepted as a useful addition

to the ornithological literature of the British Islands.

In the first portion Mr. Harting comes forward as a reformer of

nomenclature, and, to some extent, of arrangement, taking Yarrell’s

third edition as his starting-point. On both subjects he still leaves

room for justifiable improvement. As regards nomenclature, the

three rules he specifies as his guide by no means attempt to solve

several intricate questions—such, for instance, as the best generic

name available for the Nightingale. He uses Luscinia; but we

think Daulias of Boie, on the whole, far preferable. Then, too, why

should Linneeus’s name in connexion with the Stilt entirely disappear ?

There are other cases we might mention. Mr. Harting states that

he has avoided the use of subgeneric names; yet he does not hesitate

to place the Titlarks under a family name, Anthida, as distinct from

the Wagtails, Motacillidw, and to banish the Rock from the true

Thrushes under the name Petrocinclide. We are at a loss to know,

and Mr. Harting makes no attempt to show us, how the adoption of

these family names can be justified by the production of definite

characters of sufficient value to show their distinctness.

The alterations in arrangement are so far advantageous; but a

little more might have been done in this direction without doing much

violence to the feelings of British ornithologists. We point especially

to the retention of the Hirundinide in juxtaposition with the Swifts.

Those whose studies are bestowed on exotic species are considerably

in advance of their fellow students whose attention is confined to the

birds of these islands in such matters; and with them there are

questions of affinities which have passed out of the region of doubt

which are clung to by our home naturalists with, we might say,

almost obstinate tenacity. What is required of our workers at home

is a more independent spirit, a thorough investigation of bird-strue-

ture, and, what has never been the case, a keener appreciation of the

work that is going on around them, much of which affects the special

sphere to which they may confine their attention.

The second portion of Mr. Harting’s work has the merit of greater

completeness; and in gathering together all the records of the ap-

pearance of occasional visitants to our shores, he has provided

workers over the same ground with a ready index to facilitate their

labours. The records thus gathered show a goodly list of instances

where members of the same species have over and over again wan-

* ‘A Handbook of British Birds, showing the Distribution of the Resi-

dent and Migratory Species in the British Islands, with an Index to the

records of the Rarer Visitants.’ By J. E. Harting, F.L.S., F.Z.8., Member

of the British Ornithologists’ Union, &c. &c. London: 1872. Large 8vo,

pp. 198. (Van Voorst.)

Miscellaneous. 461

dered to our shores; and on seeing how numerous in some cases

they are, one cannot refrain from the feeling that it is far from

impossible that we might now own some of these birds as established

settlers had the treatment they received at our hands been reversed.

The passion for collecting British-killed birds, so prevalent at the

present time, has much to answer for.

In his introductory chapter, Mr. Harting has analyzed the occa-

sional visitants to show the origin whence they came. It is not a

little surprising to see how large is the proportion of American

species which again and again find their way to these shores. He

finds it extremely difficult to believe that the non-aquatic species

have actually performed unaided this journey of, at least, 1700 miles ;

but of the powers of sustained flight possessed by birds we, as yet,

know very little indeed, and the task may not, under favourable cir-

cumstances, be so difficult as it would appear.

In reading Mr. Harting’s book we detect some errors perhaps

unavoidable in a work of the kind; but there are others we hardly

expected to see, such as the mistake about the Grouse and Ptar-

migan in the Introduction (p. xvii). We are not aware that the

distinctness of the Ptarmigan of Scotland from the continental bird

has ever been advocated; whilst the validity of the Grouse of the

British Islands to be considered a species distinct from the Willow

Grouse has been a bone of contention for years, Then, too, Gilbert

White’s account of the Honey Buzzard breeding in Selborne Hanger

is overlooked, and also the fact of the Harlequin Duck breeding

regularly in considerable numbers in Iceland. Mr. Harting records

it as of accidental occurrence in Europe.

But we are not disposed to criticise too severely a book which

will prove of undoubted service.

MISCELLANEOUS.

The Bell Collection of Reptiles.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

Museum of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy,

Cambridge, Noy. 22, 1872.

GENTLEMEN,—My attention has been drawn to the letters of Prof.

Westwood and Dr. Gray in the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural

History’ for November 1872, respecting Mr. Bell’s collection of

reptiles. I beg to be allowed to make the following statement.

The whole of that gentleman’s museum was purchased by my

late father, Professor Clark, in 1856, who thus describes the acqui-

sition in the preface to the ‘ Catalogue of the Osteological Portion of

Specimens contained in the Anatomical Museum of the University of

Cambridge’ (Cambridge, 1862) :—

“In 1856 I had the pleasure of increasing the Collection by

adding to it the osteological collection of Professor Bell, F.R.8., &e.

462 Miscellaneous.

&c., by which every order of Vertebrata is more adequately repre-

sented, and especially that of the Reptiles, amongst which is that

yaluable collection he had formed for the illustration of his work on

the ‘ Testudinata.’ His specimens are marked ‘ Bell collection.’”

It is of course quite possible that some specimens might have

passed into the hands of dealers before Mr. Bell sold the collection;

but these could not have formed an important portion of the whole,

as Mr. Bell expressly stated to my father that he was selling to him

his entire museum. This fact is impressed upon my memory by the

recollection of my father’s annoyance and regret at the non-appear-

ance of one specimen, a skull of the Sumatran rhinoceros, which

was noted in Mr. Bell’s MS. catalogue (which I now possess) as

part of his collection, and which could never be found. It would be

interesting, especially at the present time, to know what has become

of this skull.

We have at present at least thirty-three skeletons and parts of

skeletons of Chelonia alone, which belonged to Mr. Bell—a number

even larger than that noted in his Catalogue. I think this facet

proves conclusively that whatever Mr. Hope may have purchased

and given to the Oxford Museum, it could not have been the “ Bell

Collection of Reptiles” properly so called. I ought to mention that

we received no specimens in spirit from Mr. Bell, nor any in a

stuffed state.

There is but one trifling error in Dr. Gray’s letter of October 24.

He says that he consulted Mr. Bell’s specimens “in the Museum of

the Cambridge Philosophical Society, where they were before they

were transferred to the Anatomical Museum.” The collection was

never placed, even for a single day, in any other building than the

Museum of Anatomy.

I am, Gentlemen,

Your obedient servant,

J. W. Crarx (Superintendent).

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

November 22, 1872.

GrenTLEMEN,—My attention having been directed to a correspond-

ence in the ‘ Annals’ between Dr. Gray and Professor Westwood, I

find myself called upon to state that Dr. Gray is entirely in error

respecting the distribution of my collection of Reptilia, including, in

particular, the Testudinata.

In the year 1856 I sent a few specimens of the latter, with others

of my osteological collection, to my late friend Professor Clark, of

Cambridge. Amongst them there are now in the museum at Cam-

bridge, as I am informed by my friend Professor Newton, the shells of

only about half a dozen species of Testudinata, besides a few heads

and several osteological specimens. In 1861, five years subsequently

to my sending these few specimens to Cambridge, the whole of my large

collection of Reptilia was purchased by Mr. Hope, in order to present

Miscellaneous. 463

it entire to the new museum at Oxford, where it now is. Amongst

the specimens included are those which formed the subjects figured

in my work on the Testudinata. I have to add that the few dupli-

cates (for such they were) of the shells of tortoises at Cambridge

are, most of them, of common occurrence in collections.

Tuomas BELL.

On Spatulemys Lasale, a new Genus of Hydraspide from Rio

Parana, Corrientes. By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

Colonel P. Perez de Lasala has kindly presented to the Museum

a water-tortoise from Rio Parana, Corrientes, which has not been

recorded in scientific catalogues. It differs from Hydraspis in the

general form of the head and thorax, and in the head being entirely

covered with small shields. It is like Hydromedusa in many par-

ticulars, especially in the thorax of one sex at least being concave ;

but it has a regular small nuchal plate.

SPATULEMYsS.

Thorax oblong, elongate, depressed, with a distinct elongate nuchal

plate. First vertebral plate very broad; second, third, and fourth

longer than broad; anterior marginal plates broad; the second

and ninth largest, angular above. The sternum elongate, broad and

rounded in front, deeply notched behind ; gular plate large, marginal.

Head broad, depressed, entirely covered with small polygonal shields ;

forehead convex, rhombic, with a broad flat crown between the very

large temporal muscles; chin with two beards; mouth broad and

rounded in front. The two outer hinder claws very small, rudi-

mentary. Tail conical, Sternum in male (?) slightly concave,

especially behind.

Spatulemys Lasale.

Shell above olive, nearly uniform, with a few small black spots on

the margin, which are more abundant and larger on the hinder plates.

Thorax and underside of margin pale, with symmetrical black spots,

which are largest on the front and sides of thorax. Length of thorax

15 in., breadth 84 in. ; length of head 25 in.

Hab. Rio Parana, Corrientes (Colonel P. Perez de Lasala, Novem-

ber 5, 1872).

Observations on the Metamorphoses of the Bony Fishes in general, and

especially on those of a small Chinese Fish, of the Genus Macropoda,

recently introduced into France. By M. N. Jory.

In a letter addressed to M. H. Milne-Edwards on the 24th of

December 1864, M. Agassiz expressed himself as follows :—“I have

lately observed among fishes metamorphoses as considerable as those

which are known among reptiles. Now-a-days, when pisciculture is

pursued with such success and on so large a scale, it is surprising

that this fact has not long since been observed ”*.

* See Ann. des Sci. Nat. 5° sér. tom. iil. p. 55.

464 Miscellaneous.

By the kindness of M. Guy, who is successfully rearing a pair of

Macropode in his magnificent aquarium of the Faubourg Saint-

Cyprien, I have been able to study, not only the nidification of this

handsome fish, but also its ova and their development, which is so

rapid that I have seen them hatched in sixty hours. I shall not

enter into long details as to the embryogeny of our Macropode, as I

have the intention of soon making known all its phases, with numerous

drawings to illustrate them. It will be sufficient at present to say

that the development of our little Chinese fishes presents much

analogy with that of the perch, which was so well studied by our

colleague Lereboullet. Ishali therefore at present confine myself

to the most striking features.

The ovum of the Macropoda, which is of the size of a poppy-seed

at the time of its being deposited, is distinguished by its perfect

transparency and its density, which is inferior to that of water.

Hence it rises of itself to the surface and comes into contact with the

air-bubbles which compose the nest fabricated by the male, or which

are expelled from his mouth when he respires. We have already

stated that the embryogenie work which has to be accomplished

within the ovum does not last longer than from sixty to sixty-five

hours; but rapid as the hatching is, it is not more so than that of

the tench and some other fishes. But it will be easily understood

that, in consequence of this rapid developmemt, the animal must be

born in a very imperfect state. In point of fact it presents the form

of an obese tadpole, the head and trunk of which are applied to an

enormous umbilical vesicle, whilst the tail is free, already very

mobile, and furnished all round with an extremely transparent

natatory membrane.

Although it appears to be completely destitute of striated muscu-

lar fibres, the animal wriggles briskly upon the object-slide. It

is about 14 millim. in length,

Its head is remarkable by the existence of two large eyes still

destitute of pigment. The mouth does not yet exist. This is also

the case with the intestine and the anus. But the heart has already

been in motion for more than twelve hours, and there is an active

circulation in a part of the tail (nearly the anterior half),in the

vitelline vesicle, and in the remainder of the body. There are no

branchie; the respiration is effected by means of the skin and the

umbilical vesicle ; there are no secretory organs of bile or urine, no

genital organs, and no fins properly so called.

As in all fishes and, indeed, in all Vertebrata, the nervous system,

which is very early formed, consists of two parallel cords which swell

out in the head to give origin to the cerebral vesicles. The skeleton

is as yet represented only by the chorda dorsalis; the vertebral

lamine, if they exist, are not yet very distinct.

Numerous pigment-spots are to be seen upon all parts of the body,

and even upon the umbilical vesicle.

Many organs which do not yet exist will appear sooner or

later after birth. Of this number are the mouth, the intestine, the

liver, the swimming-bladder (at least in the perch); the genito-

Miscellaneous. 465

urinary organs, the hyoid apparatus, and especially the branchie will

be formed. The circulation which took place in the umbilical

vesicle, a provisional respiratory organ, will cease. New vessels will

appear and others will become atrophied ; the chorda dorsalis and

the sheath which surrounds it will become solidified to produce the

bodies of the vertebree. The true or permanent fins, at first reduced

to two pectoral palettes which the animal agitates very rapidly, will

originate in the interior and at the expense of the embryonic caudal

membrane or fin; finally brilliant iridescent scales will cover the

body of the animal, which, from this moment, will appear under

the form belonging to the adult age.

Such is, briefly, the series of changes which will be manifested at

various intervals in our new-born fish. These changes are exactly

of the same nature and at least as considerable and numerous as

those which occur in Petromyzon Planeri, in the Insects, or in the

Crustacea (Caridina Desmarestii, Cancer pagurus, &c.). Formation

of new parts (mouth, intestine, branchial apparatus, genito-urinary

apparatus, permanent fins, vertebral arches), disappearance of parts

previously existing (vitelline vesicle and its vessels, embryonic caudal

membrane), modifications in the form of the body, in that of the heart

and in its structure (which was at first entirely cellular), in the eyes

(originally destitute of pigment and becoming movable instead of im-

movable as at first), &c. &e. Now formation, disappearance, and modi-

fication are the three essential modes which are included, according to

Dugés, in that very complex operation that we call metamorphosis ; and

if I am not deceived, the embryogeny of the Macropoda has displayed

them to us.

To accept the reality of metamorphosis in the case of the grass-

hopper for example, and the other Orthoptera or Hemiptera which

quit the egg with all their parts except the wings, and to refuse to

believe in this phenomenon when we have to do with osseous fishes

such as the perch or the Macropoda, would, it seems to me, be to show

a deficiency of logic and to close our eyes voluntarily against

evidence.— Comptes Rendus, Sept. 30, 1872, p. 766.

On the Habits of Terebratule, or Lamp-shells.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &c.

Mr. Davidson informs me that the shell [have named Terebratula

truncata in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for 1872

(x. p. 152) is what is now called Kraussca rubra (T. rubra, Pallas).

He also informs me that “ Mr. Jeffreys found a number of specimens

of Terebratulina caput-serpentis attached to seaweed ; and he believes

some forms of Argiope that occur in the Mediterranean likewise affix

themselves to seaweed.”

On referring to Mr. Jeffreys’s ‘ British Conchology,’ ii. p. 15, he

says, ‘ 7’. caput-serpentis is attached to stones, old shells, and occa-

sionally to small seaweeds and other substances ;” and Mr. Davidson

informs me that ‘“ Prof. E. Forbes had found some small specimens

466 Miscellaneous.

of Argiope attached to Fuci, though more commonly attached to

stones.”

It therefore appears that the habitat I gave for Kraussia rubra is

not quite peculiar to that species, though it certainly is the usual

habitat of Kraussia, while in other lamp-shells attachment to sea-

weeds is the exception.

On the Conneaion which exists between the Nervous System and the

Muscular System in the Helices. By M. Stcarp.

In his celebrated memoir on the slug and the snail, Cuvier has

described the submission (to use the term which he has employed) of

the nervous to the muscular system. It is established, in his opinion,

by the close cellulosity which unites the retractor muscles of the great

tentacles to the envelope of the cerebroid ganglia, and the principal

lobes of the retractor muscles of the foot to that of the subcesophageal

ganglia. Since then, every one abides by that assertion; neverthe-

less the union of the two systems is much more intimate than was

indicated by Cuvier, and histological study shows that they are

directly united with each other. It is not, in fact, simply cellular

tissue which joins the nervous centres to the neighbouring museles ;

microscopical examination discloses, in this tissue, the presence of

smooth muscular fibres ; so that the nervous system is surrounded by

an actual expansion of the muscular apparatus.

In certain species the arrangement is very manifest, particularly

in Zonites algirus—that old Helix of which a great many malacolo-

gists justly make a distinct genus. In it clearly marked membranous

muscles surround the oesophageal collar. From the upper surface of

the retractor muscle of the foot, from the outside, and for nearly

half its length, there starts on each side a little muscular band two

millimetres in width, which soon divides into two lobes, the outer

of which, the external, goes to the superior, and the other to the

small tentacle ; these muscles are known as the retractor muscles of

the tentacles. Now the little band which constitutes the second of

these muscles enlarges, spreads like a fan on the internal side to

unite with the neurilemma of the cesophageal collar, and thus form

with its fellow a sort of muscular framing; then this muscle goes

to the little tentacle with the nerve which is destined for it. On the

other hand the muscular bundle which goes to the superior tentacle

receives into its interior the tentacular nerve, which, from its point

of origin on the subcesophageal ganglion to the point where it enters

into the cavity of the retractor muscle, is accompanied by a muscular

band, which envelops it and which thus unites the nervous centres to

this muscle.

The connexion just described, of the retractor muscles of the ten-

tacles with the cesophageal collar, and the union of these two

muscles behind into a single primitive bundle, would make it more

proper to designate this muscular whole the common retractor

muscle of the tentacles and nervous collar. The action, however, is

not so simple as this denomination would seem to indicate; for if

Miscellaneous. 467

during the retreat of the animal all these parts act in order to pro-

duce the retraction, they do not act all in the same way during its

unfolding. Then the portions placed in front of the nervous collar

intervene, at least passively, in its protraction. These muscular

bands having on one side their points of attachment to the integu-

ments, they must, as the latter are carried forward, aid in drawing

the collar into this movement if they did not act only as simple

ligaments.

This is not all; the muscular expansion which surrounds the

nervous collar furnishes to the nerves which start from the supra-

and subcesophageal gangha a regular contractile sheath. This is

often considerable, and then, if the nerve be examined by the mi-

croscope, under a low power, or by the help of a simple lens, it pre-

sents the appearance of an opaque, more or less flexuous cord in

the middle of this envelope, which constitutes an external newri-

lemma for it, the histological composition of which must detain us a

moment. In the first place we find in it a superficial conjunctive

layer, formed by voluminous cells, the mean diameter of which is

-05 millimetre, and which is, up to a certain point, comparable to

the adventitia of the vessels. Below this cellular membrane we re-

cognize the presence of a muscular layer formed of fine and very

elongated fibres arranged longitudinally. It is easy to ascertain

the existence of these muscular elements by macerating, for three or

four days, the collar and the nerve which starts from it in a mixture

of equal parts of hydrochloric and nitric acids, diluted with ten or

twelve parts of water. It is then easy to separate them.

Immediately round the nerves may be remarked a second con-

junctive element, or inner neurilemma, composed of cellular elements,

but less voluminous. These cells are about 0°025 millimetre in

diameter.

This double neurilemmatic envelope has not yet been indicated,

so far as we know, in-the animals under consideration. Leydig has

observed it in the Arthropoda and in the Annelida, where the ex-

ternal neurilemma is represented by the ventral vessel; he has re-

cognized, particularly in the earthworm, the presence of muscular

elements; but we have nowhere seen the existence of these elements

indicated in the neurilemma of the Mollusca. According to Leydig, it

takes that cellular form of conjunctive tissue which is seen elsewhere

among the organs. This is only correct with regard to the super-

ficial cellular layer ; and what we have said shows how much more

complex is the composition of this neurilemma.

The existence of muscular fibres in the sheath which encloses the

nerve has the effect of producing an elongation and shortening of

this musculo-nervous cord; and, indeed, when there is a contraction,

the flexuosities described by the nerve in its envelope are more

marked the stronger this contraction is; in the state of relaxation,

on the contrary, the nerve follows a rectilineal direction.

It is plain that this peculiar musculature of the nerves has a

manifest physiological relation with the intimate connexion that

we have indicated between the nervous collar and the muscular

468 Miscellaneous.

apparatus. In consequence of this connexion, in fact, the nervous

centres connected with the muscles suffer some displacements in

relation to the changes of form that the body undergoes when the

animal retracts or expands itself; and the nerves themselves, by

virtue of the muscular envelope with which they are provided,

being able to elongate or shorten themselves, form active bands,

which intervene in the modifications which the movements of the

animal cause. — Comptes Rendus, September 30, 1872, pp. 769-

aes

On Delphinus Desmarestii, Risso (Aliama Desmarestit, Gray).

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S.

Risso, in his ‘ Histoire Naturelle de ’Europe Méridionale,’ de-

scribes and figures a species of dolphin under the name of Delphinus

Desmarestit (vol. ii. p. 24, t. 2. f. 3). As the figures of the two

dolphins on the preceding plate are accurate, and his figures in

general reliable, and the figure itself agrees with the description, I

am inclined to regard it as correct until it is proved otherwise. It

has been considered the same as Ziphius cavirostris of Cuvier,

a ziphioid whale. It is so unlike all the other ziphioid whales

known that it may be considered one of the whales requiring fur-

ther examination. Instead of having the rounded head and short

cylindrical beak and small pectoral and dorsal fin common to all the

ziphioid whales, it has an elongated, conical, tapering head, acute in

front, with two teeth produced in front of the lower jaw, elongate-

lanceolate pectoral fins low down on the sides of the body, like the

Grampus and Globiocephalus, and a large elongated truncated dorsal

fin; and the body is marked with a multitude of irregularly placed

white lines, as in Grampus. The female described and figured was

nearly 20 feet long.

In the P. Z.S. 1864, p. 242, I proposed a genus for this dolphin

under the name of Aliama; but I unwisely placed the Hyperoodon de

Corse, Doumet, Bull. Soc. Cuviér. 1842, p. 207, t. 1. f. 2, and Del-

phinus Philippi, Cocco, Erich. Arch. 1846, p. 204, t. 4. f. 6, which

are both true ziphioid whales, probably belonging to the genus Epi-

odon, as synonyma of the same species. Most probably Doumet’s

Hyperoodon de Corse is the animal of the skull described as Ziphius

cavirostris of Cuvier ; if it is the Ziphius de Corse of Gervais (Ostéog.

Cét.), which appears to be a female animal, it is interesting as show-

ing that the inner side of the intermaxillaries of the female animals

are dilated and turned up.

This whale has been confounded with Delphinus Desmarestit under

the name of Hpiodon Desmarestit (see Suppl. Cat. Seals and Whales,

p- 98), figured by Gervais, which differs from all other Petrorhynchi in

the inner margin of the intermaxillary bones not being nearly so

much elevated behind as in that genus, and not elevated but rounded

in front, and margining the linear vomer; while in Petrorhynchus

the inner edge of the intermaxillaries is dilated, forming a well-

marked concavity round the nostrils, and much elevated on the sides,

forming a thin hood over each side of the much-swollen vomer.

Miscellaneous. 469

Ishould propose to call this species Epiodon Heraultii, to distinguish

it from Risso’s Delphinus Desmarestii, Theskull of HE. Heraultit and

Petrorhynchus cavirostris, as shown in Gervais’s figure, is very dif-

ferent; and probably, as the Hyperoodon de Corse of Doumet is

proved to be the animal of Petrorhynchus, Delphinus Philippi of

Cocco may be the animal of Epiodon Heraultii.

The Swedish Scientific Expedition.

[Extract from a letter from Mr. J. E. Lrypant to Dr. J. E. Gray.]

My Greenland expedition was very successful. The ‘Gladan’

shipped the meteorite iron at Disco Island, and then she made a

cruise to some places where our geologist, Dr. Nanckhoff, wanted to

carry out his explorations ; and Dr. Th. M. Fries, a botanist who had

joined the expedition as a private passenger, followed him. I had

got the steamer ‘ Inzegerd’ for my dredging-operations. I went up

to Upernivik at the 73rd degree of latitude, thence westward till we

met the lasting ice; and following the edge of the ice we made south-

ward down to St. John’s, Newfoundland, to fall in with the ‘ Gladan ’

and return to Sweden in company.

From Cape Terewek to Upernivik, and thence to St. John’s, we

dropped our dredges at least once for every degree of latitude that

we passed, often in pretty good depths of water down to 980 fathoms.

In 410 fathoms I got two specimens of the Umbellula granlandica—

I think better Umbellularia encrinus. There is not the slightest

doubt that they are not of the same species as those described and

figured by Ellis and Mylius. My specimens are younger, only some

12 inches long, and with fewer polypes (about 12), than in the former

ones. I am just going to work out a paper upon them, which will

probably appear in the beginning of next year. Although these

animals are probably the most interesting things brought home by

the expedition, they are by no means the only objects of high scien-

tific value. Among the great number of siliceous sponges and

starfishes, as well as some other groups of animals, I have reason to

believe that many new or rare things are to be found; but nothing

is yet examined except the Arachnida, described by Tamerlan Tho-

rell in the ‘ Gfversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps Akademiens Forhand-

lingar, 1872, no. 2, pp. 147-166. I had not much time for

explorations on shore. Our physicists, Dr. Nystrom and Dr. Fries,

assisted in making collections on shore. We found but twenty

specimens of Arachnida, nearly all of them new to science. <A few

of them were also taken by Professor Nordenskiold in 1870. We

collected a pretty good amount of skeletons and implements from

some long-abandoned Esquimaux villages. Also temperature sound-

ings were taken; and samples of water from the abysses of Baffin’s

Bay were brought home. [I hope the expedition will prove to have

many important results to science; only we want the means of

employing scientific people to work it all out; but the Swedes have

not copper enough to do such things rapidly.

This summer I have examined the greater depths in Skagerrack

470 Miscellaneous.

down to 355 fathoms, the greatest depth ever found in Skagerrack

being a little more than 400 fathoms. Although I had not’ very

long time for the explorations, I was very successful indeed. The

most interesting haul during the cruise may be one in lat. 58° 35’ N.,

long. 10° 15' E., depth 150 fathoms, bottom clay. Among other

things, I got there two specimens of the rare Synaptoid Olizotrochus

vitreus.

I suppose you know that the Swedish naturalists are never allowed

to keep any specimens obtained in the expeditions fitted out by the

government; all belong to the Royal Museum of the Vetenskaps

Akademien; and thus I have no right whatever to make a bargain

with the animals that I collected in Greenland.

I am very much obliged to you for your kindness in sending me the

catalogue.

Report on a Memoir by Dr. Dufossé, “ On the Noises and Expressive

Sounds which the Freshwater and Marine Fishes of Europe pro-

duce.” By M. C. Rosin.

The memoir submitted to our examination is a considerable work,

a true monograph ; it has cost its author numerous investigations.

This subject has been, on his part, the object of very diverse obser-

vations, the summary of which has on several occasions been inserted

in the ‘Comptes Rendus.’

The first part of Dr. Dufossé’s work consists of a very extended

history, summing up all that naturalists and physiologists have said

with regard to the noises produced by certain fishes. This history

commences with Aristotle, whose remarks upon this question deserve

to be recalled.

‘“‘ Fishes,” he says, “‘ having neither lung, nor trachea, nor pharynx,

have no voice. ‘Those which have been said to have one, produce

nothing but certain sounds and whistlings. Such is the kind of

grunting of the Lyre, the Chromis, and the fish called the boar-fish,

which is found in the Acheloiis. We may also cite the Chalets and

the cuckoo-fish: the former makes a sort of whistling; the second

emits a sound approaching that of the bird whose name it has re-

ceived in consequence of this resemblance. All these fishes produce

what has been called thew voice either by the rubbing of their

branchiz, which they have garnished with points, or by means of

certain internal parts near the intestine, and which contain air. It

is this air the agitation and friction of which produce a sound.

Some Selachii also seem to whistle. All this, however, can only

improperly be called voice; we must say that it is a sound.”

(Hist. Anim. Lib. iv., Camus’s translation, Paris, 1783, tom. i.

. 221.)

The sounds emitted by fishes may be very varied irregular noises,

such as those which the Cyprini, the loaches, the Dactylopteri, the

Hippocampi and others produce with their lips or their opercula,

or by moving certain articulations.

There are other, regular noises: various Scomberoidei produce

Miscellaneous. 471

these by the friction of the pharyngeal bones; the Orthagorisce

cause them by the friction of their intermaxillary teeth; various

Cyprinoidei, Anguilliformes, Siluroidei, &c. cause them by expelling

into the cesophagus the air of their swimming-bladder.

Lastly, there are noises which, while regular and voluntary, like

the preceding, result from certain peculiarities presented by muscles

in course of contraction in fishes furnished with an air-bladder

which has no communication with the cesophagus. These have been

observed in Peristedion cataphracta, Trigla, Sciena, Zeus, Umbrina

cirrhosa, and Hippocampus brevirostris.

The mechanism of the production of the first two varieties of

these sounds was already pretty well known; but M. Dufossé, by a

fresh examination and by his dissections, has given more precision

to several of the anatomical and physiological notions relating to it.

This part of his investigations, which is already old, has, moreover,

been the subject of a favourable report from our regretted colleague,

Constant Duméril (see ‘Comptes Rendus,’ 1858, tome xlvi. p. 610).

Therefore we will dwell only upon the later communications of the

author, made from 1858 to 1862 (Comptes Rendus, 1862, tome Lxiv.

p- 393), which appear to us to be still more valuable than the pre-

ceding ones.

He has set himself to show, that the regular sounds which fishes

emit may be voluntarily produced, and are not a simple consequence

of some other physiological action. They are consequently, in cer-

tain cases, true acts of expression, however rudimentary.

M. Dufossé has shown that in the fishes which voluntarily pro-

duce regular sounds, these are commensurable as musical sounds ;

and although they are more imperfect than those emitted by ser-

pents, as Lacépéde had already remarked, he has determined their

note in all the species which he has observed. He has also shown,

by conclusive experiments, that all the fishes which emit noises or

regular expressive sounds in the air, produce them also in the water—

that is to say, in the medium in which they live and are naturally

in relation to each other.

In the case of several species, the intensity of the sounds is so

great that, when produced by a single individual, they may be heard

at a distance of several metres; this is the case with certain 7’rigle,

Zeus, and especially Pogonias chromis, &. When emitted by

animals combined in shoals, they may be transmitted still further ;

more than once, under these conditions, they have frightened the

crews of ships, who did not know to what cause to ascribe the noises

produced around and beneath their vessels. They have been the

source of more than one fable spread among maritime populations,

M. Dufossé has himself ascertained the existence of these noises, by

going frequently, and not always without danger, to pass whole nights

on the open sea in fishing-boats.

In the case of the fishes with an air-bladder which does not com-

municate with the esophagus, M. Dufossé has ascertained experi-

mentally that the wall of this reservoir was affected by strong and

frequent movements during the production of the sounds. He has

thoroughly studied the nerves and muscles then in action. His

472 Miscellaneous.

vivisections, aided by touch and auscultation, proved to him abso-

lutely that the muscles themselves are the agents producing the vibra-

tions from which the sounds formed originate (loc. cit. 1862, p. 394).

Since then a distinguished physiologist, M. Armand Moreau, by sub-

mitting the nerves which run to the air-bladder of the gurnards to

the action of an electric current, has ascertained that the striated

muscles of the air-bladder contract and cause the reproduction of

the characteristic sounds, and this in the animal when killed by

section of the spinal cord (Comptes Rendus, 1864, tome lix. p. 437).

This mode of formation of sounds by contraction of the muscles

of the air-bladder was not known before the investigations of M.

Dufossé. Science has to thank him for this discovery, and for the

care which he has taken in observing the diversities of this pheno-

menon from species to species of the fishes which present it.

We shall conclude this report by calling the attention of the

Academy to another point in this work, because it will certainly

become the subject of fresh experiments made by means of the re-

gistering and other instruments which now-a-days serve to determine

the real nature of a great number of organic phenomena. Accord-

ing to M. Dufossé, it is not the readily visible movements of the

air-bladder that are the cause of the sound heard while they last.

Although much greater than the concomitant trepidations which cause

the sonorous vibrations, these contractions merely tighten or relax cer-

tain parts of the air-reservoir ; and the use of the latter in this respect

is to act as a sounding-board, an organ for the reinforcement of

the sounds produced, which are comprised between s7” and re’.

It is well known that the striated muscles during contraction

give rise to a peculiar sound, which is called the muscular sound,

rotatory sound, susurrus, wrinkling, or myophonia, and has been

well studied by Wollaston, Erman, Gilbert, Laennec, and many

modern observers. According to M. Marey this muscular sound cor-

responds sometimes to the wt, and sometimes to the sz of the lower oc-

tave of the piano. Now, according to M. Dufossé, the noise produced

by the fishes of which we are speaking is this very muscular sound,

caused by the contraction of the voluntary muscles of the air-bladder ;

and the latter plays, with respect to it, the part of an organ of re-

inforcement in a sufficiently marked manner to enable it to reach

our ears.

The Academy will see that, if the correctness of this ingenious

analysis of the mechanism of production of the sounds produced by

the air-bladder should be experimentally confirmed, the acoustic

property of muscular contraction will be raised to the height of a

phenomenon productive of sounds, not merely commensurable, but

even expressive. In the absence of experiments made by your

committee, it cannot yet pronounce a formal opinion upon this

point. But it recognizes that, by the sagacious and laborious em-

ployment of his knowledge of comparative anatomy and physiology,

M. Dufossé has discovered new facts which have elucidated several

previously obscure ichthyological questions. — Comptes Rendus,

November 4, 1872, tome lxxy. pp. 1074-1078.

Miscellaneous. 473

On a new Species of Balenoptera. By Capt. C. M. Scamaon, U.S.R.M.

BaLZNopTerA, Gray,

P. Z. 8. 1847, p. 89, B. M. Cat. Cet. 1850, p. 31.

Balenoptera Davidsoni, Scammon, n. sp.

Above dull black; body, pectoral and caudal fins white below,

with a white band across the upper surface of the pectorals near their

bases. Gular folds seventy in number, the interspaces having a

pinkish cast, though the more prominent portions are of a milky

white. Head pointed; dorsal fin small, falcate, placed two thirds

the length of the body from the end of the beak; pectorals small,

narrow, placed one third of the animal’s length from the anterior

extremity. Genitalia opening below and slightly behind the anterior

edge of the dorsal fin. Baleen pure white ; lamine on each side 270

in number, the longest not exceeding 10 inches. Total length of

animal 27 feet ; pectorals 4 feet long, 13 inches wide; spiracles 3

feet 8 inches, pectorals 8 feet 6 inches, anterior edge of dorsal 15 feet

6 inches, and posterior edge of dorsal 18 feet behind the end of the

beak; height of dorsal 10 inches; breadth of flukes, from point to

point, 7 feet 6 inches, width of lobes of the same 25 inches; from

the fork of the caudal fin to the anus 8 feet 4 inches, to opening of

vagina 923 feet; anterior end of snout to corner of mouth 4 feet

8 inches.

Distribution from Mexico to Behring Strait, on the west coast of

America.

The specimen from which this description was taken was obtained

in Admiralty Inlet, Washington Territory, October 1870. It was a

female, and contained a foetus five feet long—thus correcting the

error of the whalers, who commonly regard this small species as the

young of the “ finback” of the coast. The skull has been deposited

in the National Museum at Washington.

This species is evidently congeneric with the Balenoptera rostrata

of the British-Museum Catalogue of 1850; and, while changes in

nomenclature (more recent than those reported in the works of

reference now accessible to me) may render it necessary to change

the generic appellation at some future day, the one now used seems

sufficient for purposes of description. In specific details, also, the

present species is nearly allied to the B. rostrata, as far as descriptions

will admit of instituting acomparison. Ihave dedicated the species

to Prof. George Davidson, U. 8. Coast Survey, and President of the

Academy, as a testimony of respect for his scientific attainments, no

less than as a personal token of appreciation of his efforts to assist in

the advancement of the scientific interests of this coast.

A more detailed account of this animal and its habits, accompanied

by illustrations, is reserved for a monograph on the Cetaceans of this

coast, which I have long contemplated, and which is now on the

point of publication.— Proceedings of the Cal. Academy of Sciences,

Oct. 4, 1872.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.4. Vol. x. 33

474 Miscellaneous.

On the Varieties of Indris and Propithecus.

By Dr. J. E. Gray, F.R.S. &e.

A series of specimens of lemurs have arrived from Madagascar.

The examination of them has confirmed the idea that I expressed in

a paper sent to the Zoological Society, that these animals are lable

to considerable variation, and that the presumed species of the genera

Indris and Propithecus are mere varieties of colour.

The British Museum has lately received an adult Indris, which,

instead of being black with a white patch on the hinder part of the

back and a black tail, has a patch over each eyebrow, the fore legs

nearly to the hands, the hinder part of the thighs, the legs from

the knee to the ankle, and the whole of the underside iron-grey—that

is to say, having a very large quantity of whitish hairs intermixed

with the black ones; the ankles and hinder part of the heels white,

and yellow below. The variety may be named Jndris variegatus.

The British Museum has also received a fine adult specimen of the

animal called Propithecus diadema, which differs from the three other

specimens in the British Museum in having a greyish black in-

stead of the white forehead that is to be found in the three other

specimens.

On Peloric Structures. By Dr. Pryrrtscu.

In this paper, types of peloric structures in Labiate, Verbenacee,

Scrophulariacewe, and Ranunculaceze were described in detail, and the

peculiarities which each of these families presents in its peloric

structures were discussed. With regard to the Labiate, the author

endeavoured to show that the prevailing theory upon the structure

of the Labiate flower is not tenable. Upon the hypothesis that with

the first three whorls of flower-leaves an equal number of whorl-

members must be assumed as originally present, the structure of the

Labiate flower indicates changes which have taken place in the num-

ber of the flower-leaves. The prevailing theory explains the number

of the anthers by the complete abortion of the fifth anther; but

changes in the number of the whorl-members of the calyx and corolla

may also have taken place, and the number of the anthers may indi-

cate the original type.

The author expressed himself in favour of the latter alternative.

The preponderant occurrence of quaternary types in the apical and

lateral regular flowers is, in his opinion, in contradiction to the

assumption of the quinary type. In zygomorphic flower-structures

anomalies in the number of anthers often occur ; but those are most

rare in which a posterior anther appears. The assumption of a qua-

ternary type has, moreover, the advantage of simplicity, and the

number and position of the flower-leaves then stand in connexion

with the position of the leaves and bracts, which only in the rarest

cases depart from the cruciformly opposite position.—Anzeiger der

kais. Akad. der Wiss. in Wien, October 24, 1872, p. 161.

475

INDEX to VOL. X.

ACHERRES, description of the new

genus, 87.

Achrionota, characters of the genus,

325.

Adelomyia, new species of, 452.

/Kdriodes, description of the new

genus, 85,

Agenopus, characters of the new

genus, 99.

Agriocheta, description of the new

genus, 96.

Algee, on a new genus of unicellular,

139.

Amorphocephalus, new species of,

321,

Anderson, Dr., on Trionyx gangeti-

cus, 219.

Antipathes, on a new species of, from

the Polar seas, 77.

Aoplocnemis, new species of, 92.

Aplysina, on a new species of, 101.

Apus cancriformis, on the reproduc-

tion and mode of life of, 152.

Arachnida, on a new family and

genus of, 409.

Argas reflexus, on the eggs and

newly hatched young of, 280,

Argus Pheasant, on the two (?) un-

known species of, 67.

Arpexylon, description of the new

genus, 227.

Artemia, observations on, 405.

Atherina, new species of, 398.

Baleenoptera, new species of, 413,

473.

Balistidee, on the natural affinities of

the, 68.

Bathybius-mud, on the, 362.

Bell’s Collection of Reptiles, 407,

461, 462.

Belus, new species of, 95.

Birds, new, 61, 71, 114, 252, 450,

452; on fossil, 72; on the sense of

sight in, 142; new species of cre-

taceous, 212.

Black Redstart, on the specific name

of the, 227.

Blake, Dr., on Diatoms in hot springs,

312.

Blysmia, characters of the genus, 323.

Blyth, E., on the species of Asiatic

two-horned Rhinoceros, 399.

Boeckia, description of the new

genus, 6,

Books, new:—Sowerby and Lear's

Tortoises, Terrapins, and Turtles,

~ 299; Andersson’s Birds of Damara

Land, 457; Shelley’s Birds of

Egypt, 458; Harting’s Handbook

of British Birds, 460.

Bowerbank, Dr. J. 8., on Mr. Car-

ter’s paper on two new Sponges

from the Antarctic Sea &c., 58;

reply thereto, 141.

Brachiopoda, on a new family of, 248.

Brady, G. 8., on the non-parasitic

marine Copepoda of the north-east

coast of England, 1,

Branchipus, observations on, 405.

Brauer, Dr. F., on the reproduction

and mode of life of the Phyllopoda,

152.

Burmeister, Dr. H., on his so-called

Globiocephalus Grayi, 51; on Ba-

lenoptera patachonica and B. in-

termedia, 413.

Butler, A. G., on a new genus and

species of Heterocerous Lepido-

ptera, 125, 228, 274; on the species

of Thelyphonus, 200 ; on new My-

riopoda, 354,

Calamites, on the structure of the,

225.

Callithamnion, on a new British, 408.

Callograptus radicans, description of,

Calveria, characters of the new genus,

Cambridge, Rev. O. P., on a new

family and genus and two new

species of Thelyphonidea, 409; on

the habits and distribution of Ly-

cosa ingens, 448.

Campanularia neglecta, on reproduc-

tion by fission in, 390.

Campylonema, description of the

new genus, 396,

Canthocamptus, new species of, 11.

mel pygargus, observations on,

407.

476

Cariama cristata, on a deformed ex-

ample of, 67.

Carter, H. J., on the sponge-animal,

and on the origin of thread-cells

in the Spongiade, 45; on a new

species of Aplysina, 101; on two

new Sponges from the Philippine

Islands, 110; on new species of

Tethya, 141.

Centyres, new species of, 91.

Ceocephalus, new species of, 324.

Chilodactylus, new species of, 184.

Chcerops, new species of, 424.

Cladonema radiatum, on the plano-

blast of, 391.

Clark, J. W., on the Bell Collection

of Reptiles, 461.

Clepsine, on some species of, 280.

Cletodes, description of the new

genus, 12.

Clupea, new species of, 425.

Coccoliths, observations on, 359.

Codiophyllum, description of the new

genus, 139.

Coleoptera, new genera and species

of, 317. ;

Colluricincla, new species of, 114.

Cope, Prof., on intelligence in mon-

keys, 229; on a curious habit of a

snake, 230; on the habits of Ga-

leodes pallipes, 312.

Copepoda, on the non-parasitic ma-

rine, of the north-east coast of

England, 1.

Coral, on a new species of black, 77.

Corals from the Red Sea, list of, 124.

Cordus, new species of, 521.

Crateromorpha, new species of, 112;

observations on the genus, 186.

Crinodes Sommeri, observations on,

228, 274, 446.

Cubiceps, new species of, 423.

Cupes, new species of, 319.

Curculionidz, on new Australian, 84.

Cyanocephalus hamadryas, on the

anatomy of, 62.

Cyclophis zestivus, on the habits of,

230.

Cyclopicera, description of the new

genus, 8.

Cyclops, new British species of, 5.

Dactylopus, new species of, 15.

Dareste, C., on the natural affinities

of the Balistide, 68.

David, the Abbé A., on a new species

of Paradoxornis, 71.

Davidson, T., on the genera Trime-

INDEX.

ary Dinobolus, and Monomerella,

48.

Delphinus Desmarestii, observations

on, 468.

Diaphorophyia, new species of, 451.

Diatoms in hot springs, 312.

Diczeum, new species of, 114.

Dicerobatis, new species of, 422.

Dinobolus, Monomerella, and Tri-

merella, observations on the genera,

248.

Dorvillia agariciformis, observations

on, 209.

Drassicus, description of the new

genus, 98.

Dredgings in Lake Ontario, 276; in

the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 341; on

the coast of Iceland, 371; on the

coast of Greenland, 469.

Dufossé, Dr., on the noises and ex-

Breen sounds produced by fishes,

470.

Echinidea, of the ‘ Porcupine’ deep-

sea dredging-expeditions, on the,

300.

Echinoderms from the Red Sea, list

of the, 115.

Echinoidea, on the stracture of the,

285, 376, 427.

Eimer, T., on thread-cells and semen

in marine Sponges, 506.

Emys nigra from Upper California, on,

Enchymus, new species of, 92.

Ennothus, characters of the new

genus, 87.

Entomostraca, contributions to the

study of the, 1.

Epeira aurelia, on the habits of,

271.

Eremias, new species of, 419.

Escharide, on a new genus of, 167.

Eumeces, new species of, 370.

Euprepes, new species of, 419.

Eupsalis, new species of, 323.

Euryalidee, on the synonymy of the

genera, 71.

Fish-remains, fossil, on some dermal

tubercles associated with, 66.

Fishes, new, 397, 418, 449; on the

metamorphoses of the bony, 463 ;

on the noises and expressive sounds

produced by, 470.

Flustra marginata of Krauss, on the,

167.

Flustramorpha, descriptions of the

new genus, 167.

INDEX.

Foraminifera, on the nomenclature

of the, 184, 253, 453.

Fossa Daubentonii, observations on,

207.

Galeodes pallipes, on the habits of,

312.

Galera barbata, on varieties of, 405.

Globiocephalus Grayi, observations

on, 51.

Gordii, on the embryonic form of

the, 231.

Gould, J., on two new species of

birds, 114; on three new species

of Humming-birds, 452.

Graculavus, new species of, 215.

Graptolite, on a new dendroid, 233.

Gepiolies on the migrations of the,

Gray, Dr. J. E., on the Emys nigra

from Upper California, 54; on the

synonymy of the genera of Eurya-

lide, 71; on a new netted Sponge

from the Philippines, 76; on Os-

teocella septentrionalis, 76,406; on

the Echinoderms from the Red Sea,

115; on a new genus of hexara-

diate and other Sponges, 154; on

Codiophyllum, 189; on the name

Tethya, 150; on the Clustered

Sea-polype, 151; on the Marine

Sponges in the British Museum,

152; on the habits of Terebratula

truncata, 152; on Flustra margi-

nata, 167; on a new Propithecus

and the Fossane from Madagascar,

206: on the double-horned Asiatic

Rhinoceros, 207; on the genera

Manouria and Scapia, 218; on the

Mud-Tortoises of India, 326; on

varieties of the Tiara, 405; on

the Ahu, 407; on a new British

Callithamnion, 408; on Macroxus

tephrogaster, 408 ; on the Guémul,

445; on a new genus of Hydras-

pidee, 463 ; on the habits of Tere-

bratulee, 465 ; on Delphinus Des-

marestii, 468; on the varieties of

Indris and Propithecus, 474.

Grayella cyathophora, note on, 124.

Gregarine, on the development of

the, 309.

Gulliver, G., on the eggs and newly

hatched young of Ixodes Dugesii

and Argas reflexus, 280.

Gunther, Dr. A.,on a deformed ex-

ample of Cariama cristata, 67; on

two new fishes from Tasmania, 183 ;

477

on a new species of Lizard, 370; on

some species of fishes from the

Philippme Islands, 397; on new

species of reptiles and fishes, 418 ;

on Psammoperca and Cnidon, 426 ;

onalarge Siluroid from the Upper

Amazons, 449,

Gymnodactylus, new species of, 421.

Helices, on the connexion existing

between the nervous and muscular

systems in the, 466.

Hemiaster, new species of, 290.

Hesperornis regalis, description of,

212.

Hincks, Rey. T., on Lar sabellarum

and its reproduction, 313; contri-

butions by, to the history of the

Hydroida, 385; on a new genus of

Polyzoa, 396.

Hinulia, new species of, 420.

Hopkinson, J., on Callograptus radi-

cans, 253.

Huamela leucotis, observations on,

445,

Hydraspide, on a new genus of, 463.

Hydroida, contributions to the history

of the, 385.

Hyloterpe, new species of, 252.

Idotasia, new species of, 100.

Imaliodes, new species of, 98.

Indris, on the varieties of, 474.

Insects, on the position of the centre

of gravity in, 55.

Toleema, new species of, 452.

Ionthocerus, new species of, 320.

Ixodes Dugesii, on the eggs and

newly hatched young of, 230,

Jeffreys, J.G., on the Mollusca of

Europe compared with those of

Eastern North America, 237.

Joly,N., on the metamorphoses of the

bony fishes, 463.

Jones, Prof. T. R., on the nomencla-

ture of the Foraminifera, 184, 253,

453.

Kent, W.S., on Tethya muricata and

Dorvillia agariciformis, 209.

King, Prof. W., on the genera Tri-

merella, Dinobolus, and Monome-

rella, 248.

Krefft, Dr.G., on Thylacoleo carni-

fex, 169.

Lanioperca, description of the new

genus, 183,

Laophonte, new species of, 12.

Lar sabellarum, on the reproduction

of, 313.

478

Lee, Dr. R. J., on the sense of sight

in birds, 142.

Lepidoptera, new, 125, 228, 274.

Lindahl, J., on the Swedish Scien-

tific Expedition, 469.

Lizard, on a new species of, 370.

Lovén, Prof. 8., on the structure of

the Echinoidea, 285, 376, 427.

Liitken, Dr. C.,on Antipathes arctica,

(is

Lycosa Blackwallii, observations on,

272.

ingens, on the habits and dis-

tribution of, 275, 448.

Macalister, Prof. A., on the myology

of Sarcophilus ursinus, 17 ; on the

anatomy of Cynocephalus hama-

dryas, 62; on the muscular ana-

tomy of Phascolarctos cinereus,

127.

M‘Andrew, R., on the Echinoderms

collected by, in the Red Sea, 115.

Macrochiron, description of the new

genus, 9.

Macropoda, on the metamorphoses of,

463.

Macroxus tephrogaster, note on, 408.

Major, Dr. J. Forsyth, on some fossil

monkeys found in Italy, 155.

Manouria and Scapia, on the genera,

218.

Marsh, Prof. O. C., on Hesperornis

regalis, and other new species of

Cretaceous birds, 212.

Meyerella, characters of the new

genus, 76.

Meyerina, description of the new

genus, 110, 184.

Milne-Edwards, A., on fossil birds, 72.

Misophrice, description of the new

genus, 93.

Mocoa, new species of, 420.

Meechius, description of the new

genus, 96.

Mollusca of Europe compared with

those of Eastern North America,

237.

Monkeys, on some fossil, found in

Italy, 153; on intelligence in, 229.

Monomerella, Trimerella, and Dino-

bolus, observations on the genera,

248.

Myriopoda, descriptions of new, 354.

Myrmacicelus, new species of, 95.

Mythites, new species of, 84.

Nannoscincus, characters of the new

genus, 421.

INDEX.

Neaspis, characters of the new genus,

517

Nechyrus, new species of, 99.

Nephelis, on some species of, 279.

Nephila aurelia, on the habits of, 271.

Newton, Prof. A-, on the specific

name of the Black Redstart, 227.

Nicholson, Prof. H. A., on migra-

tions of the Graptolites, 75; on

dredgings in Lake Ontario, 276.

Nyctalops, characters of the new

genus, 410.

Oditesus, description of the new

genus, 88.

(Enochroma, characters of the new

genus, 92.

Ophichthys, new species of, 425.

Orpha, new species of, 94.

Orthotomus, new species of, 252.

Osteocella septentrionalis, observa-

tions on, 76, 406.

Otolithus, new species of, 398.

Paleeotringa, new species of, 217.

Paradoxornis, new species of, 71.

Parker, W. K., on the nomenclature

of the Foraminifera, 184, 253, 458 ;

on the structure and development

of the skull of the salmon, 222.

Pascoe, F. P., on new Australian

Curculionide, 84; on new genera

and species of Coleoptera, 317.

Peltis, new species of, 318.

Percis, new species of, 424.

Peripia, new species of, 422.

Peters, Dr. W., on the systematic

name of the Walrus, 151.

Peyritsch, Dr., on peloric structures,

474.

Phascolarctos cinereus, on the mus-

cular anatomy of the, 127.

Phocylides, characters of the genus,

524,

Phormosoma, characters of the new

genus, 303.

Phrenozemia, description of the new

genus, 94,

Phyllopoda, on the reproduction and

mode of life of the, 152.

Plants of the Coal-measures, on the,

224.

Plateau, F., on the position of the

centre of gravity in insects, 55.

Platycephalus, new species of, 397.

Platystoma, new species of, 449.

Plumularia, new species of, 389.

Plumulariidz, on the sarcothecz ot

the, 585.

IN DEX.

Pollock, F., on the habits of some

Madeiran Spiders, 271.

Polypes, on parasitic, in the paren-

chyma of a sponge, 50.

Polyzoa, on a new genus of, 396.

Prophthalmus, new species of, 322.

Propithecus, new species of, 206,

298 ; on the varieties of, 474.

Psammoperca and Cnidon, on the

identity of the genera, 426.

Pseudocyclops, description of the

new genus, 7.

Pseudorca, new species of, 51.

ee review of the fossil,

Reptiles, new species of, 418.

Rhabdoliths, observations on, 359.

Rhinoceros, on the double-horned

Asiatic, 207, 298, 399.

Ritsema, C., on Tarsolepis and Cri-

nodes, 228, 274, 446.

Robin, C., on the noises and expres-

sive sounds produced by fishes,

470.

Rossella, new species of, 137.

Rotch, W. D., on a new genus and

species of hydroid Zoophytes, 126.

Royal Society, proceedings of the,

142, 222, 300.

Szenuris, on some species of, 280.

Salarias, new species of, 399, 424.

Salmon, on the structure and deve-

lopment of the skull of the, 222.

eae ursinus, on the myology

or, 17.

Scammon, Capt. C. M., ona new

species of Baleenoptera, 473.

Scapia, on the genus, 218.

Schmidt, Dr. O., on Coccoliths and

Rhabdoliths, 359.

Sclater, Dr. P.?L., on Propithecus bi-

color and Rhinoceros lasiotis, 298.

Scolopsis, new species of, 425.

Seeley, H. G., on the origin of the

vertebrate skeleton, 21.

Sharpe, R. B., on some new species

of birds, 450.

Sicard, M., on the connexion which

exists between the nervous and

muscular systems in the Helices,

466.

Sitta, new species of, 450.

Sosytelus, description of the new

genus, 90.

Spatulemys, description of the new

genus, 465.

479

Spheerotherium, new species of, 358.

Spiders, on the habits of some Ma-

deiran, 271.

Sponges, on new species of, 58, 76,

101, 110; on some parasites of,

108; on a new genus of hexara-

diate and other, 134; of the Bri-

tish Museum, on the marine, 152;

on thread-cells and semen in ma-

rine, 306.

Spongiadee, on the origin of the

thread-cells in the, 50.

Spongozoon, on the, 45.

Staurocoryne, description of the new

genus, 126.

Stratiorrhina, characters of the genus,

322.

Taphroderes, new species of, 319.

Tarsolepis, description of the new

genus, 125, 228, 274, 446.

Tartarides, description of the new

family, 410,

Terebratule, on the habits of the,

152, 465.

Tethya, on the name, and its varie-

ties of spelling, 150, 227.

antarctica and T. zetlandica, ob-

servations on, 58, 141.

muricata, observations on, 209.

Thelyphonidea, new genus and species

of, 409.

Thelyphonus,

genus, 200,

Thomson, J., on some dermal tuber-

cles associated with fossil fish-re-

mains, 66.

Thomson, Prof., on the Echinidea

of the ‘ Porcupine’ deep-sea dredg-

ing-expeditions, 300.

Thylacoleo carnifex, observations on,

169.

Timalia, new species of, 61.

Tortoises, on the Mud-, of India,

326.

Trachelizus, new species of, 320.

Tragopus, new species of, 97.

Trichastoma, new species of, 451.

Trimerella, Dinobolus, and Monome-

rella, observations on the genera,

248,

Trionyches of India, on the, 219,

326.

Umbellula groenlandica, note on,

151.

Van Beneden, Prof. E., on the deve-

lopment of the Gregarinz, 309.

monograph of the

480

Verkriizen, T. A., on a dredging-ex-

cursion to Iceland, 371.

Vertebrate skeleton, on the origin of

the, 21.

Villot, A., on the embryonic form of

the Gordii, 251.

Vogt, C., on Branchipus and Ar-

temia, 405.

Walden, Arthur Viscount, on a new

species of Timalia, 61; on two

new species of birds from the

Philippine Islands, 252.

Walrus, on the systematic name of

the, 151.

INDEX.

Whiteaves, J. F., on deep-sea dredg-

ing in the Gulf of St. Lawrence,

341.

Williamson, Prof. W. C., on the

plants of the coal-measures, 224.

Wood, T. W., on the two(?) un-

known species of Argus Pheasant,

Zanclea implexa, observations on,

393.

Zephronia, new species of, 354,

Ziphius Sowerbiensis, note on, 151.

Zoophytes, on a new genus and

species of hydroid, 126.

END OF THE TENTH VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,

RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

ALERE

) FLAMMAM,